298 files changed, 25483 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/21760-8.txt b/21760-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..77d8e08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7795 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange
+Islands, by Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange Islands
+
+
+Author: Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+
+Release Date: June 7, 2007  [eBook #21760]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES
+ON STRANGE ISLANDS***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Joe Longo and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes the original illustrations.
+      See 21760-h.htm or 21760-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760/21760-h/21760-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760/21760-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable
+experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the
+South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
+exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools
+and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them
+but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The
+books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to
+know.
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Castaways
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+               Exploring the Island
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Tribesmen
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+              The Capture and Pursuit
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Conquest of the Savages
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+          Adventures on Strange Islands
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+             Treasures of the Islands
+
+       _Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations._
+           _60 cents per vol., postpaid._
+
+                    PUBLISHED BY
+             THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+           147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+Illustrated
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: NYBC]
+
+
+The New York Book Company
+New York
+
+Copyright, 1915, by
+The New York Book Company
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+CHAPTER
+
+I. THE STRANGE OARS AND ROPES                         Page 15
+
+       The charted island. Previous history of the boys. The professor.
+       Mysteries. The strange oars and ropes. Experiments. The various
+       trips through the Island. Meeting the natives. The caves.
+       Finding metals and ores. A strange village.
+
+II. A MYSTERIOUS MESSAGE                              Page 26
+
+       The Town of Unity. Enterprises on the island. Building a ship.
+       Homesick. Considering the question of other islands. Treasure
+       hunting. The Krishnos. Their beliefs and practices. The
+       comparison of customs with the white people. Preparing to launch
+       the vessel. The professor decides to remain. Angel. The message.
+       Blakely. A scrap of paper with illegible words. The V-shaped
+       tracing. Guessing the contents of the note.
+
+III. THE ARROW ON THE SHEET                           Page 38
+
+       Deciphering the discolored paper. The arrow on the sheet. The
+       first Walter letter. The comparison. Dimensions of the vessel.
+       The engine. The professor and John's error. Pointing to an
+       island. Convinced of the correctness of the boys' views.
+       Launching of the vessel. The feast day. Putting up the rigging.
+       Selecting a crew. Preliminary trials. The day for departure. The
+       trip to Valparaiso. Reshipping to New York. Telegrams home after
+       three years. Angels and the wonders of New York. The great
+       change in the boys. The return to Wonder Island. Reaching
+       Valparaiso. Meeting Blakely. The new steamer. Installation of a
+       line to Wonder Island. The return trip.
+
+IV. THE SKULL WITH THE CRYPTIC WRITING                Page 51
+
+       Steaming up Enterprise River. Unity in sight. The natives at the
+       wharf. The enthusiasm. The chiefs witness the arrival. A "Grand
+       Homecoming." The boys visit the natives. Contemplating voyages
+       to discover other islands. Native sailors. Sutoto captain of the
+       _Pioneer_. Rumors about the boys. Plans for the proposed trips.
+       The force for the expedition. A cargo of copper. The trip to the
+       copper treasure cave. Tides. Fireflies. Explanation of the
+       light. Light without heat The problem of light. Advantages of
+       light which generates no heat. Color of daylight. Phosphorescent
+       glow. Catching fireflies. Scaling the heights. The spot where
+       the Walter note was found. A skull with mysterious characters on
+       it. The mark on the skull and the mark in the message. The star.
+       Cryptic signs.
+
+V. THE TRIP TO THE NEW ISLAND                         Page 63
+
+       Sutoto at the top of the peak. The telescope. The view of Unity.
+       The Illyas' village. The visit to the last captured village. The
+       reception. The kindness of the chief. The great change in the
+       village. The feast of John and the boys. Happiness of the
+       people. The Illyas at work. Return of the _Wonder_ to Unity. The
+       _Pioneer_ on its way to other Islands. Seasickness of the crew.
+       Trying the new cure. Atrophine, and how administered. Explaining
+       its origin, and how it acts. The effect on the crew. Driven out
+       of their course. A light in the dense darkness. Land ahead.
+       Awaiting the morning. Fifty leagues from Wonder Island. The cove
+       in the shore line. Anchoring. The two boats sent ashore. Signs
+       to indicate that people lived on the island. Reminiscences of
+       the Yaks and bears. The discovery of coffee trees. The wild
+       variety. Identity of vegetation in widely-separated countries.
+
+VI. DISCOVERY OF THE ISLAND AND EXPLORATIONS          Page 75
+
+       Return to the landing. John's advice. Surveying the island. The
+       cardinal points of the compass. Laying out the coast line by
+       triangulation. What measurement of angles means. Transferring
+       the angles to paper. Making plans by means of a scale.
+       Proportionate lengths of the different limbs of the angles. The
+       shore line to the south. Instructions to Sutoto. The party to
+       explore the interior. Starting on their mission. The equipment
+       of the party. The spears, and bolos. The camera and field
+       glasses. Amazing tropical vegetation and fruit. Stone hatchet
+       found. Independent exploits of the boys. Temporary separation.
+       Disappearance of George. A pistol shot in the distance. The
+       search. Evidences of a scuffle. George's tracks found. The
+       footprints of natives. Muro scouting in the direction of the
+       natives. The runner to the ship. The _Pioneer_ sailing away. The
+       new landing place. Uraso advised of the capture.
+
+VII. CAPTURE OF GEORGE BY THE NATIVES                 Page 89
+
+       George's capture. Hearing John's whistle. Firing the gun. The
+       surprise of the natives. Rendered unconscious. He recovers. Sees
+       his gun and glasses in the hands of the natives. Discovers that
+       his revolver is still in his pocket. The natives see him trying
+       to discover the time by his watch. The fight of the savages for
+       the watch. George's determination to escape. The natives
+       discover the revolver. He surprises the natives by explaining
+       the knife and glasses. While explaining the glasses accidentally
+       discovers the ocean in the distance. The matchsafe. Discovers
+       the village. Tries to escape before reaching there. Planning the
+       details. Surprised at the appearance of another party. All hope
+       lost. A powerful Chief. George and the Chief. Investigating
+       George's belongings. How George unwittingly told the Chief about
+       the gun and glasses. The Chief arrests the captors. George
+       explains the weapons. Returns the revolver to George. Invites
+       him to the village. In the home of the Chieftain. Description of
+       the "Palace."
+
+VIII. FIGHT OF THE NATIVES FOR THE TRINKETS          Page 102
+
+       Scouting. Muro's work. The first traces. Arrival of Uraso. His
+       grief at the news. The conference. John and party march to the
+       east. Finding George's chain. Evidences of a struggle.
+       Determining the number of enemies by the footprints. Reading
+       characters by feet. How people are distinguished. Observing
+       peculiarities of actions. Estimating the number of natives in
+       the party which captured George. Discovering the Chief's
+       footmarks. Judging of the safety of George by the marks of the
+       feet. Uraso discovers the tree where George exhibited the power
+       of the bullet to the Chief. Inferences as to the characters of
+       the natives who captured George. The trinkets and buttons of
+       more importance to the savages than the person of the captive.
+       Power as the great factor with savages. Why right is might.
+
+IX. THE GIANT CHIEF AND HIS "PALACE"                 Page 113
+
+       The Chief interested in George's belongings. Discovery of a
+       ship's chair. The matchsafe in the Chief's hands. The imitative
+       quality. The first meal. The peculiar knives and forks. The
+       Chief's capacity for food. The character of the meal. The siesta
+       after the meal. George's opportunity. Stealing from the Chief's
+       house. The daughter of the Chief. Wandering from the Chief's
+       house. His midnight sleep from exhaustion. The watchers at his
+       bedside. Finding the soap plant. Breakfast. Absence of the
+       Chief. George's suspicions. Follows the Chief. The appearance of
+       John and Harry. The meeting. George introduces the party to the
+       Chief. Uraso and Muro able to converse with the Chief. George's
+       story. "The Palace." The village. The feast.
+
+X. PECULIARITIES OF THE NATIVE TRIBE                 Page 125
+
+       How the feast was served. John relates the story of the boys to
+       the Chief. The Chief interested in the wonderful ship. The story
+       of the island. The runner to the ship. No Krishnos on the
+       islands. Sutoto sees the runners. Sails for the village. The
+       Chief does not believe in a great spirit. His philosophy.
+       Strength is the only right. No caves on the island.
+       Disappointment of the boys. Bad people to the north. Their own
+       kin, but convicts. Stealing and lying the only crimes. No crime
+       to steal from each other, only from the Chief. The sun as a
+       great Chief. The coming of the ship. The natives on the
+       seashore. Casting of the anchor. Sutoto sees the Chief's
+       daughter. George's captors on the way to the convict colony.
+       Intercession on the part of the boys. The food at the banquet.
+       The natives' aversion to fish. Snake worshippers. Witch doctors.
+       The bad god Baigona. Peculiar ideas of right and wrong among the
+       natives. The survey of the southern part of the island.
+       Triangulation from the mast of a ship.
+
+XI. SUTOTO AND THE CHIEF'S DAUGHTER                  Page 137
+
+       Sutoto's love affair. Cinda, the Chief's daughter. The Chief is
+       told of the wonders of Wonder Island. About the activities of
+       the natives on that island. His curiosity. John tells him how
+       the white people live. The acute questionings of the Chief.
+       Teaching him how trade and commerce is carried on. Money and its
+       uses. How it gets its value. Why it is a measure only. The trip
+       to the north in charge of the Chief's son. Gruesome tales of the
+       ferocity of the convicts. John still anxious to find some
+       particular cave. His chart. The unsolved mystery of the boat.
+       The clothing of the natives. Bracelets. Glitter to attract
+       natives. Weaving, the only industry. The aptness of native women
+       to adopt fancy articles of dress and ornament. John's scheme,
+       anticipating the wedding of Sutoto and Cinda. A "State affair."
+       The mission to the Professor. Sending the _Pioneer_ to Wonder
+       Island. Stut captain of the ship. Sutoto's secret mission
+       through Stut.
+
+XII. THE SKELETON BENEATH THE BOAT                   Page 148
+
+       How the present journey reminded the boys of their first
+       adventure on Wonder Island. Peculiar animals. The kagu. The
+       fashionable millinery styles. Singular habit of the bird. The
+       benne plant. Its remarkable properties. Lard from trees. The
+       coffee trees. A tree with sandpaper leaves. The indicus.
+       Analyzing soils. How plants digest food. Larvæ. The early forms
+       of many animals. Kinds of food in the earth. The bruang. The
+       sun-bear of Malay. The bear and the honey pot. How it was tamed.
+       The sport. The ocean. George and Harry at the beach. Bathing in
+       the surf. The discovery of the wreck of an upturned boat.
+       Finding the compartments belonging to their lost boat on Wonder
+       Island. Sending for John. The skeleton beneath the upturned
+       boat. The bound skeleton. The startling discovery of the same
+       kinds of ropes found in their lost boat. Evidence of a crime.
+
+XIII. A CONVICT COLONY OF NATIVES                    Page 161
+
+       Describing the skeleton. A soldier or an adventurer. Their first
+       hatchet. The narrow neck of land. The Rose of Jericho. The
+       resurrection plant. The Australian kangaroo. The exiled people.
+       The Chief's son tells about them. Explains they do not believe
+       in killing except in self-defense. The upas tree. Its flowering
+       branch. Valuable mineral in the hills. Description of the
+       convict's home. Banishment one of the most serious forms of
+       punishment for crimes. The survey of the mountains. Hunting for
+       caves. How the parties, were organized. The influence of odors
+       on human actions. Tests of odors on patients. How they affect
+       dreams. Calcareous formations. Where the real caves are found.
+       Erosive action of water on limestone.
+
+XIV. A WHITE PARALYTIC IN THE CONVICT COLONY         Page 174
+
+       The wide search for the caves. George finds a cave entrance.
+       Preparing to explore the cave. The lamps. A blind lead. A
+       fissure, not an erosion. The joke on George. The first sight of
+       the location of the dreaded criminal colony. The magnificent
+       wild fruits. The beautiful flowers. The first criminals. The
+       industry of the people. Cultivating fruit and vegetables.
+       Hutoton. Peculiarity in names. Well-dressed natives. The
+       distinguished head of the village. His dignity. The welcome to
+       the village. The well-kept huts. The garden plots and bowers of
+       flowers. The criminals preparing a feast of welcome. The boys
+       discover a white man. A paralytic patient. How the convicts
+       cared for him. Surprised to learn that the convicts rewarded the
+       men who rescued the paralytic. How the savages calculated time.
+       The movement of the sun, and how it gave them the time.
+
+XV. SAVAGE MARRIAGE CUSTOMS                          Page 185
+
+       Criminal Colonies. The effects on the people. Its advantages.
+       The principles of punishment. Protecting society. Isolating
+       patients who have contagious or infectious diseases. Trying to
+       ascertain the identity of the paralytic. John's promise to
+       reward the people for the care bestowed on the white man.
+       Refusing to be paid, for taking care of him. Contrasting Hutoton
+       with Sasite, the home of the Chief. Returning to Sasite. The
+       first glimpse of the returning _Pioneer_. The interesting party
+       aboard. The Chief and the entire village at the seashore. The
+       Professor. Muro's wife. Blakely. The Chief meets the Professor.
+       The Chief knows why the Professor is a wise man. The double
+       eyes, spectacles. The Chief with the spectacles. Muro's wife
+       meets the Chief's wife. They confer about Cinda and Sutoto. The
+       savage customs in marriage. The ceremonies. Stut tells the boys
+       about Sutoto's mission to procure his wedding outfit. The
+       surprising news that Sutoto and Cinda were to be secretly
+       married that night. The plot. Muro's wife informed.
+
+XVI. SUTOTO AND CINDA'S MARRIAGE; AND THE SURPRISE   Page 193
+
+       The Chief's wife gets the news. The Chief brought into the
+       conference. His will the only law on the matter of marriage. He
+       consents to their plan. The two requirements in the ceremony of
+       marriage according to their rites. The gift of fruit, of fowl,
+       and of game. The blindfolding of the bridegroom. The absolute
+       silence when eating. Preparation for the banquet that night.
+       Sutoto and Cinda arrange to be married that night while the
+       people are at the banquet. Decide to conform strictly to the
+       rites of the tribe. The boys learn of the stealthy plans.
+       Witness the ceremony in Cinda's home. The Chief arrests the
+       bridal couple and takes them aboard the ship. The criminals
+       before the Chief. The Chief upbraids Sutoto. The reconciliation.
+       The presents brought over from Wonder Island. Grief of the boys
+       because they had forgotten a present. The surprise of the
+       natives at the beautiful silver forks. Spices. Coffee. Cream and
+       sugar. Curiosity about the cows. The great surprise to Sutoto.
+       He is made Chief of his tribe. Monuments. The presents. The
+       great mirror, the present of the boys. The crowns. The final
+       ceremony. The dance. Originally a religious ceremony. The
+       encircling wreath.
+
+XVII. HUTOTON; THE PLACE OF DEATH                    Page 207
+
+       Preparations for further explorations. Consulting the charts.
+       Determine to sail northward, on way to Wonder Island. Reasons
+       from shape of the island why an island might be to the north.
+       Geological formations. Upheavals. Islands mere ridges. Sutoto to
+       return to Wonder Island. The Chief agrees to go to Wonder
+       Island. His family to accompany him. Proposed visit to Hutoton.
+       Boarding the ship. The welcome of the convicts. Taking the
+       paralytic to the ship. Stores from the ships for the convict
+       colony. The _Pioneer_ sails to the north. Discovery of a new
+       island. Taking observations from the sun. The calendar. Summer
+       and winter. Taking the angle of the sun, and what it means.
+       Triangulation. The nautical chart. Greenwich or Standard time.
+       The island which they had left named _Venture_. The new island
+       and its magnificent vegetation. John, with the boys and two
+       boatloads, land. The exploring parties formed. The boys and Muro
+       at the head of one party. Traces of savages. Appearances that
+       cannibals were there. A shower of arrows their first surprise.
+       The volley and the disappearance of the natives. Reappearance of
+       the savages. Surrounded. Preparing for defense. The second
+       attack. The fight. The natives apparently preparing to rush
+       them.
+
+XVIII. DISCOVERY OF A NEW ISLAND, AND A SAVAGE TRIBE Page 222
+
+       The effect of the second volley. The determination of the
+       attacking party. The fire on all sides. The ammunition getting
+       low. The relief party under John. Hearing the sounds of firing.
+       The surprise of the natives. The savages repulsed. Muro and the
+       men follow the fleeing natives. Recalled by John. Aiding the
+       wounded. Taking along a wounded Chief. The litter. The decoy.
+       Returning to the ship. Observing the enemy from a tree-top.
+       Following up the party. A rear guard. The runner reports the
+       determination of the natives to follow. The signal shots to the
+       ship. Reinforcements. The determination to explore the island
+       and meet the natives. John with the boys and a strong party
+       remain. The _Pioneer_ sails for Wonder Island. Holding a
+       council.
+
+XIX. FIGHT WITH NATIVES AND RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND  Page 231
+
+       Arrangements for the _Pioneer_ to return. Ammunition needed. The
+       arrangement of the men for scouting and picketing. Leaving
+       security harbor. A plant which devours insects. Venus's
+       fly-trap. How plants absorb food. Irritability. How the leaf
+       digests the fly. Food absorbed by leaves as well as by roots. A
+       cache of human skulls. Head hunters. The vele. A hoodoo. The
+       rattle. The vele and the bamboo box. How it is worked to produce
+       the charm. Evidences of extreme superstitions. Witch doctors.
+       Peculiar noises. Doleful sounds. Speculating on the mysteries of
+       the island.
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+                                                                 PAGE
+  He turned it over and examined every portion                     75
+  The rites were progressing very satisfactorily                  195
+  She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror   218
+
+  Fig.  1. The Mysterious Message.                                 28
+  Fig.  2. The Walter Letter.                                      40
+  Fig.  3. The Fire-fly.                                           57
+  Fig.  4. Inscription on the Skull.                               60
+  Fig.  5. Measuring by Triangulation.                             76
+  Fig.  6. The Second Limb                                         78
+  Fig.  7. Triangulation from a Vessel.                            80
+  Fig.  8. The Kagu.                                              149
+  Fig.  9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne.                           119
+  Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree.                                 152
+  Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear.                              155
+  Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho.                                       163
+  Fig. 13. The Koala.                                             164
+  Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree.                           167
+  Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun.                212
+  Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap.                                       234
+
+
+
+
+ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE STRANGE OARS AND ROPES
+
+
+"I am awfully anxious to know where the charted islands can be that John
+spoke about," remarked George, as Harry was consulting the plans of the
+boat they were building.
+
+"They must be in this section of the southern seas, or his party
+wouldn't have sailed in this direction," answered Harry, after a pause.
+
+"Do you think he would be offended if we spoke to him about it!"
+
+"No;" answered Harry, after some reflection. "He has spoken to me about
+it several times. But why do you ask!"
+
+"For the reason that I think it would be a grand thing to hunt them up."
+
+Harry laughed, and then slowly said: "That would be a big thing to
+undertake. But what about going home?"
+
+"I hadn't forgotten that. I meant that when we came back it would be
+proper for us to undertake."
+
+"Well, haven't you had enough trouble during the past two years?" And
+Harry laughed, just as though they hadn't gone through sufficient trials
+to last a life time.
+
+"I wouldn't mind going through the same experiences, when I remember
+what we have learned and what all of us have accomplished," responded
+George, as he looked through the window, reflectively, and watched the
+natives at work.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+It will be difficult to understand the force of the above conversation,
+unless the reader knows the situation in which the boys were placed at
+the time it took place, and the locality of the scene where the
+conversation was held.
+
+Over two years previously two boys, George Mayfield and Harry Crandall,
+were members of a school training ship which left the Harbor of New
+York, for a cruise in southern waters, the object being to instruct the
+crew of seventy boys in the art of seamanship, as well as to give them a
+foundation knowledge in the arts and sciences.
+
+On board they became intimate with a gray-haired Professor, who became
+very ill. They were particularly attracted to him, and waited upon him,
+until they reached the Pacific Ocean, where, for some reason the ship
+met a catastrophe, and the crew were compelled to take to open boats.
+
+The two boys, with several companions, and the Professor, were together
+in one of the life boats, and after leaving the sinking ship a terrific
+gale, one of the great monsoons, separated them from the companion
+boats, and for six days they were driven about in the vast ocean,
+absolutely helpless. During this time all their young companions were
+washed overboard, and they were driven to the point of despair, when
+they were cast ashore on an island.
+
+They were thus placed on an unknown land, with nothing but their scanty
+clothing, and devoid even of a knife. There is no indication that the
+land was inhabited, and for the first three months, while recuperating,
+they had no opportunity to go far from the spot where they landed.
+
+After the Professor had regained his health, they began to make a few
+necessary things, and hunt for the food which was necessary to preserve
+life. As they grew bolder, however, they fashioned crude implements,
+like bows and arrows, and primitive articles of utility.
+
+They made a few trips into the interior, and then saw the first
+indications which pointed to the presence of inhabitants. From some of
+the traces it was evident that the people must be savages, and then they
+saw the necessity of preparing themselves to meet hostile neighbors.
+
+Then began the most remarkable series of adventures on the part of the
+boys, under the instruction of the Professor, to provide not only the
+necessaries of life, but many of the luxuries. While engaged in the
+different enterprises they undertook numerous excursions, all of which
+confirmed them in the first intimations that they had landed on an
+island, and that it contained one or more savage tribes.
+
+To recount all that the boys did, even in the briefest space, would be
+impossible in this book, and it is not necessary, in order to relate the
+happenings from this time on; but some things are necessary, because we
+shall have to deal with incidents which took place during their
+adventures, and this volume also brings into the scene several
+characters, in addition to the three which have been named, as the
+principal participants.
+
+The incidents referred to were called by the boys "the mysteries." When
+they landed on the island they erected a flag pole, and improvised a
+flag which was kept at half mast, and mounted on a high point, so that
+it would attract passing ships, if their island chanced to be in the
+path of vessels. During one of their excursions the flag pole and staff
+disappeared.
+
+For the purpose of making one of the trips by water a boat was built,
+and they sailed it up a large stream, only to find that within ten miles
+of their home was an immense cataract, or falls, around which they could
+not porter the vessel. It was left below the falls in a secure position,
+and ten days later, when they went for it, were surprised at its
+disappearance.
+
+Later on it was found miles away, but the little closets which they had
+built in to hold their food and clothing, had disappeared, and they were
+still more startled to find a pair of oars, which they could not have
+made, attached to the boat.
+
+In repairing the boat a note was discovered, written by some one who
+could not have been a member of their ill-fated vessel. This added to
+their perplexities, for it indicated that white people had been on the
+island, as well as savages.
+
+Then they found strange ropes, evidently fashioned by a crude hand; a
+skull of a well-developed man was picked up on the shore not far from
+their home; part of the wreckage of a vessel was discovered; a herd of
+yaks was captured and a mysterious brand deciphered on one of them.
+
+But in their wanderings they found the entrance to a cavern, and this
+was explored, resulting in finding that it was formerly a pirates' lair,
+and they were astounded at finding immense wealth in its hidden
+recesses.
+
+They industriously searched the island, and found numerous ores which
+were dug out and smelted and from which they were able to build many
+things that added to their comfort; and finally, firearms were
+constructed, and powder made.
+
+They spent much of the time in chemical experiments, in hunting for and
+gathering the different vegetables, and fibres, and from the latter
+learned how to weave cloth, to make felt, and to turn skins into leather
+from the animals which they hunted.
+
+Their adventures were not wholly devoid of the amusing things of life.
+In one of the expeditions they captured a young Orang-outang. This was
+carefully taught to do many things, and it became not only a valuable
+assistant, and a wonderful scout in their wanderings, but it afforded
+them immense amusement, which was appreciated by the boys.
+
+And now, having been provided with suitable weapons, they determined to
+go on voyages of discovery, being prompted in this course, because they
+found in the wreckage along one of the rivers, and far in the interior,
+a life boat which was a companion to their own which had been lost when
+they were stranded in the great tempest.
+
+It was evident to them that some of their companions were on the island,
+and probably, captives. This made the quest a most exciting one, so
+every energy was bent toward the end of helping the unfortunates.
+
+On the initial expedition, after the completion of the first weapons,
+they came into contact with several tribes of savages, one of whom was
+captured, after being wounded. It developed that he was a chief of one
+of the tribes which at that time were at war with each other.
+
+Returning from this trip they discovered at their home a distinguished
+looking white man in rags, totally devoid of intellect, and unable to
+speak. It was evident that he had met with some accident, but he was
+entirely harmless, and obediently took up and performed every sort of
+manual labor,--in fact, was an expert in any sort of mechanical
+operation required of him.
+
+In hunting, or in scouting, he was a perfect specimen of the hunter, or
+the soldier. It seemed to be an instinct with him to render every kind
+of service that might be needed, with the gun, or the tools which were
+all about him. In the absence of a better name they christened him John.
+
+On the second trip into the unknown portions of the island they met
+three of the savage tribes, with whom they had several battles, and one
+of the natives was wounded and captured. While wandering through the
+forests, in their efforts to return to their home, they ran into a
+savage village, where they were successful in rescuing two boys who had
+been shipmates on the _Investigator_ which went down months before.
+
+While this was a source of joy it was clouded by the information that
+they were not the ones who came to the island in the life boat that the
+boys had found in the river. This was evidence that others must still be
+in the island, and probably held as captives.
+
+Some months after the silent John came to them, his reason and the
+ability to speak returned to him, and he told a wonderful tale of his
+wanderings, and that which impressed the boys most was the information
+that he had shipped in a vessel which was designed to search out the
+treasures hidden in the islands of the South seas.
+
+From hints which he dropped from time to time, the islands containing
+the treasure were charted, and later on, one of the caves so charted was
+found on the island they now occupied, although they also found several
+which were not alluded to and could not be recognized by the
+description, according to the story told by John.
+
+John was an educated man, an archæologist, and, next to the Professor,
+had the most varied knowledge of any one the boys ever met, and it can
+be understood, that their association with men of that class made them
+remarkably active in seeking out and understanding the wonderful things
+that nature presents in every field of human activity.
+
+In order to be as brief as possible with this part of the story, it is
+necessary to add that the rescue of the two boys, and the restoration of
+John's faculties, made a strong party, and new weapons were made, and
+the real expeditions through the island begun.
+
+During the first extended trip, the Professor was captured. Out of this
+misadventure grew some of the most remarkable series of events, but
+finally, they were successful in rescuing four more of their former
+companions, and two of John's shipwrecked companions.
+
+The capture of the Chief, formerly alluded to, and the subsequent rescue
+of a chief who was about to be offered up as a sacrifice, served as a
+means to bring two of the tribes to the rescue of those in the
+expedition, and the Professor, by his wisdom, was able to enlist the
+services of the tribe which had captured him.
+
+The events which lead directly up to the beginning of this volume were
+brought about by the enmity of two of the most bitter and vindictive
+tribes, which compelled the Professor and the boys to form an expedition
+against those hostiles, in which four other tribes assisted.
+
+They captured the Chief, and rescued two of their former companions, and
+then built a town called Unity, where the advantages of civilization
+were taught the natives, and to which place many of the families of the
+natives emigrated.
+
+All the chiefs formed an alliance of peace, and the Professor was made
+the chief magistrate. After peace and order had been restored, the boys
+again began to long for home. Prior to this they had determined to build
+a ship large enough to take them to the nearest shipping point, and they
+were now feverishly engaged in the work with the aid of the natives, who
+were eager to learn how the white men built the wonderful things which
+they saw all about them.
+
+It will, therefore, be understood, that the remarks of George, at the
+opening of this chapter, had reference to the fact that the most
+important of the islands, or the ones having the most of the treasures
+could not be the one on which they resided, but pertained to some other
+localities.
+
+"Well, if there is anything I am interested in, it is to know why the
+wonderful buildings we found at the Illyas' village were put up at that
+place, and what caused all trace of them to be lost," said Harry, after
+George had expressed his last opinion.
+
+"Do you remember what John said, after we came out of the cave below the
+village?"
+
+"No; what was it!"
+
+"He said the copper in the cave might explain it."
+
+After the capture of the last tribe, John demanded that the Chief inform
+them of the location of the Hoodoo, or Medicine Men of the tribe, and
+he reluctantly consented, but the Chief warned them, that to attempt to
+enter the cave would mean Death.
+
+John knew that the Chief and the people believed the death tales told by
+the Medicine Men, as it was tales of this kind which enabled them to
+maintain such a hold on the people. In order to destroy the power of
+those people, who really had been the cause of much of their troubles,
+John announced that he would take the Chief and his followers to the
+cave, and that he would then go into the cave alone, and come out again,
+to prove that the Medicine Men had lied to him.
+
+John entered the cave, and single-handed captured the Krishnos, as they
+were called, and brought them out, thus verifying his statement that
+those men had deceived the people. Soon thereafter John and the boys
+entered the cave, which, from the description he had, contained an
+immense amount of treasure, but they were unable to discover any trace
+of it if it existed.
+
+By accident the calcareous deposit was broken off at one part in their
+search, and below was found a dark material, which, after examination,
+was found to be copper. It was not in its native state, but was a
+product produced by smelting the ore, and they uncovered an immense
+quantity of it, sufficient to show that the portion of the cave in which
+it was found was really a storehouse.
+
+Not more than a mile away was the Native village, where they held the
+tribe captive. The village was absolutely unlike anything else in the
+form of habitations found in the island. Three of the buildings were
+large structures, built in three of the well-known types of
+architecture, and the other parts of the village were laid off
+regularly.
+
+Surrounding the village was a strong embankment, as though originally
+used as a fortification, and the village itself was located on the side
+of a hill, betokening sanitary considerations.
+
+"But I do not see," observed George, "what the copper in the cave had to
+do with the town?"
+
+"Nor do I," responded Harry. "Suppose we see John at the first
+opportunity. There are other things besides the copper I would like to
+know. John has asked every one that he has come into contact with about
+the different wrecks that have come ashore within the past two years,
+and no one seems to have any idea that more than two of the
+_Investigator's_ boats came ashore."
+
+"Well, if they did it isn't at all likely that they could come to the
+southern shore, when the wrecked vessel was to the north of the island."
+
+"It is just for that reason," responded George, "that I believe we shall
+find other islands in the vicinity, and who knows but some of the boats
+reached those islands?"
+
+"I am with you," said Harry. "Shall we talk to John about it?"
+
+"By all means. But stop! Why not have a talk with the Professor first?"
+
+"Good idea. We owe everything to him."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+A MYSTERIOUS MESSAGE
+
+
+The town of Unity was located about ten miles from the sea, on a little
+stream, which had a waterfall, from which they derived the power for
+turning the machinery which had been put up. This consisted of a saw
+mill, a small foundry, a machine shop, as well as grist mill and other
+mechanism suitable for a town.
+
+All these enterprises were now being operated by the natives. The
+leading commercial genius of the town was Blakely, who was one of the
+owners of the vessel on which John had sailed from San Francisco, and
+which was also wrecked by the same monsoon which sent the schoolship
+_Investigator_ to the bottom.
+
+It was Blakely's idea that the work of the natives could be profitably
+turned to raising coffee, cocoa, and the different fibres which
+naturally grew all over the island, and in order to take advantage of
+the crops which could be grown there it would be necessary to open
+communication with the outside world.
+
+To do this meant that they must build a ship, and thus reach
+civilization, and vessels could then bring such things to the islands as
+the natives could use, and take away the produce that the natives could
+turn out.
+
+Such a plan was one which was heartily seconded by all the boys, who,
+although they had been engaged in the most wonderful experiences, were
+homesick, and longed to see their parents in the States, and thus
+relieve them of their anxiety, after an absence of more than two years.
+
+It was with a will that all took a hand in the work, and the ship was
+nearing completion. They had no facilities for making a large engine, so
+the vessel was a sailer, with a small propeller, and the largest size
+engine they could turn out was to be used as an auxiliary.
+
+The next evening while the Professor, John and the boys were together,
+Harry brought up the subject of the talk of the previous evening.
+
+"George and I have been talking about making a voyage of discovery."
+
+The Professor looked at Harry with that genial smile which the boys had
+learned to love. Without answering for the moment, the old man turned to
+John, as the latter's face lit up.
+
+"I thought you boys were homesick?" he said.
+
+"Well, yes," answered George. "But only for a little while."
+
+"Only homesick for a little while?" and the Professor's hearty laugh
+followed.
+
+"I mean we are homesick,--that is, we can be cured of it in a little
+while."
+
+Without relaxing that broad smile, the Professor continued: "I suppose
+you want to be cured before you go on the voyage of discovery? Is that
+it?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"But what do you expect to discover!" asked John, gravely.
+
+"Just what you suggested on one occasion," said Harry.
+
+"We want to know where the treasures are on the islands," remarked
+George.
+
+"Then, there is another thing," ventured Harry. "I don't think all the
+boats of our ship were lost, and it is likely that they found refuge on
+some other island."
+
+"But how do you know there are other islands near here?" asked the
+Professor.
+
+"Well, I don't know, only from what John has said."
+
+John looked at Harry for a moment quizzically, and then said: "When did
+I say so?" he asked with a smile.
+
+"When you told about the charts of the treasure caves."
+
+"But we have found them, haven't we?"
+
+"Yes; but not all of them."
+
+"That is true; and your argument is correct. Unquestionably, there are
+other islands, probably not in the immediate vicinity, but near enough
+that they could have caught some of the boats. I quite agree with you
+that we ought to make the attempt. The Professor and I have just been
+talking of taking up the matter in order to relieve any who might have
+been so unfortunate as to be east away."
+
+"I am surprised," said the Professor, "that you are not through with
+treasure hunting, and want some more of it."
+
+"But you know, Professor, that some of the most interesting times we had
+were during the investigations we made at the big cave at the Cataract
+on Wonder Island!"
+
+"Quite true; but think of the immense riches you now have. In the vault
+beneath the floor of the main shop you have the combined treasure of the
+two caves," continued the Professor.
+
+"Yes; and that shall be taken back by you to your homes in the States,
+and you will want to enjoy it," and John said this with a most sincere
+air, as he looked at the boys.
+
+"That would be nice," said Harry reflectively. "But if we are there the
+only thing we can do is to spend it, and there is no particular fun in
+doing that."
+
+"What? No fun in spending the money?" exclaimed the Professor.
+
+"Why, we haven't spent a cent since we have been here, and we have
+enjoyed every hour of the time, except--except--" and George hung his
+head for a moment.
+
+"I know," said the dear old Professor; "I know what you mean. Home still
+has a warm place in your heart. That is right. You must see your home,
+and then,--"
+
+"Then we want to come back," broke in Harry.
+
+"It makes me happy to see that the lessons of the past while we have
+been together has impressed on your minds one thing; that it is not
+riches which give happiness."
+
+"I know that," said Harry. "When I go out and see these poor people
+here, and I meet smiles on every face, and a welcome everywhere, the
+thought that we have tried to make them feel and know that wars were
+wrong, and that true happiness consists in trying to make others happy,
+it gives me more pleasure than all the gold which we took from the caves
+of the Buccaneers."
+
+"Yes, and there is another thing, that I have been thinking about," said
+George. "I really don't think the people here are so bad, and never have
+thought so."
+
+"Well, they have been doing some pretty bad things," remarked John. "I
+would like to know what makes you think as you do."
+
+"I mean, that if it wasn't for certain classes, like the Krishnos, say,
+the people would not be trying to sacrifice each other. Those fellows
+are the ones who lie to the people, just as the fellows at the last cave
+told the people and the Chiefs that if they went into the cave the Great
+Spirit would destroy them."
+
+John and the Professor both laughed, while the boys looked on. There did
+not seem to be anything amusing about that, and they wondered why they
+should laugh at George's remark.
+
+"Did it ever occur to you how like that is to the white man's way of
+doing things?" asked John.
+
+"I never thought of that!" said Harry.
+
+"Do the white people act that way, too?" inquired George. "I never knew
+that we had people who tried to deceive others so they could give them
+up as a sacrifice?"
+
+"What do you think the Krishnos deceive the people for?" asked the
+Professor.
+
+"So as to give them the power," answered George.
+
+"Quite true. But what is the object of that power?"
+
+"So they can rule?"
+
+"Yes; but what gives them the power to rule?"
+
+"Oh, I see now! They get paid for it! And that is why the Krishnos have
+all the best things, and are better cared for than even the chiefs are?"
+
+"You have given the right answer. The Krishnos don't want to sacrifice
+human life because they love to do it, but because in the doing of it
+they inspire fear, and through fear they can get what they want."
+
+"But, Professor, you haven't yet told us how that is like the white
+people do it."
+
+"In exactly the same way. The Krishnos own the big gun factories, and
+they tell the chiefs that the people across the river, or on the other
+side of the mountain are going to rise up against them, and they must
+arm the people and attack them. You see the white man's Krishnos have a
+great cave, called a gun factory, and while he does not want to offer up
+any sacrifices for the love of it, he does so because it is his business
+to make guns, and ammunition, and shells which explode with terrific
+force, and destroy hundreds at every shot."
+
+"Well, after all, we are not much better than the savages here, are
+we?" said Harry, as he looked around, with a sad expression.
+
+"We have advanced a little beyond them," interpolated John. "We have
+tried to systematize the killing. The savage goes at it without regard.
+But the white man has set rules to conduct the slaughter. Of course, the
+rules do not say that they shall not kill but it does point out the
+impolite ways of killing."
+
+The Professor smiled at this homely way of putting it, but the boys
+looked doubtfully at John's exposition, and then George ventured to
+remark: "I can see the force of it, and it is my opinion that the savage
+way is, after all, the most reasonable."
+
+"If it is not the most reasonable," answered the Professor, "it is
+certainly the most logical. But we are getting away from our subject. I
+understand from what John says that within the next week we shall be
+able to launch the vessel!"
+
+"Yes," answered Harry. "Everything is now so far ahead that in two weeks
+more we can be ready to sail."
+
+"That is well. I hear there is considerable rivalry among the men to go
+with you?"
+
+"But aren't you going with us?" asked George in a voice of alarm.
+
+"No; my place is here. I have no desire to go back. I have induced John,
+much against his will, I know, to go with you, but I cannot leave my
+people here. I will welcome you only the more gladly when you return."
+
+Harry was almost in tears, as he said: "But we wanted you to go back
+with us so we could take you to our homes and let our people see you.
+They would be so happy to see you and to hear you talk."
+
+"Thank you so much for the kind invitation. Sometime in the future, when
+everything is properly settled here, and I can see my way clear, I will
+consider it an honor to visit your homes, and enjoy the friendship of
+your dear ones; but not now."
+
+The door opened quietly, and Angel stepped in, Angel being the
+Orang-outang to which we have alluded. He was now nearly as tall as
+George. He gravely shambled over to the Professor, and placed an
+envelope in his hand.
+
+Angel was the most wonderful character in that community. He was the pet
+and the playmate of all the children. No one dared to harm him or offer
+an insult. Such a thing would have caused an insurrection in that town.
+
+While he could not speak, he could understand practically everything
+that was told him. Daily he performed many extraordinary tasks, thanks
+to the training and care that George had bestowed upon him from the day
+he had become a captive.
+
+The Professor opened the envelope, and adjusted his glasses. As he read
+his eyes opened wider and wider, while John and the boys drew closer.
+While reading one of the sheets the Professor was slowly unfolding a
+scrap of dark colored material, smaller than the sheet he was reading.
+
+"What is it?" asked Harry.
+
+"The letter is from Blakely," he said as he passed the papers to John.
+"And what do you think it is about?"
+
+All eagerly peered at the letter and then at the brown missive, whatever
+it was.
+
+"Read it aloud," said the Professor.
+
+John handed it to George, and this is Blakely's letter:
+
+                                                   "SOUTH MOUNTAIN,
+                                                        Below Illya.
+
+  "My Dear Professor:
+
+    "I felt sure that my view as to the character of the mountain range
+  below the town was correct. Copper outcroppings were found as far
+  south as the range can be seen, and there is also silver in abundance.
+  This will surely be a profitable field for the natives. Yesterday,
+  while prospecting on the southeastern side of the main ridge, I was
+  surprised to find a part of a metal pot, evidently of cast iron. Quite
+  a number of articles, of no particular value were lying near, but
+  within the fragment of the pot, and protected by a shale of rock, was
+  the enclosed scrap, which I thought might interest you, as you have a
+  leaning in the direction of finding out hidden and abstruse things.
+  Probably, you can decipher what it says. All the men are well, and are
+  feeling jolly. We may be ready to return in a week. I hope the old
+  ship is coming along all right.
+
+                                              "Hurriedly, as ever,
+
+                                                        "BLAKELY."
+
+"That is satisfactory. Blakely is the right man for his job," remarked
+John.
+
+"Now, let us see what the scrap has to say," said the Professor.
+
+John held the scrap up to the light, and all peered at it. "I think
+there are cross lines on it, although I am not quite sure," he said, as
+he again held it up so the light could flash through it.
+
+"What difference would that make whether it had or it hadn't cross
+lines?" asked Harry.
+
+"Simply this: I wanted to satisfy myself whether or not it was taken
+from a ship's pad, which is generally ruled both ways."
+
+"What is the object of having paper ruled both ways?"
+
+"It is a convenient way of making calculations where measurements are
+necessary, as is the case in figuring out and placing the different
+celestial marks which guide the sailors. I think this is a marine pad.
+Now, let us see what it contains, before we go further."
+
+"See the name signed at the bottom," cried out George. "W-a-l-t. That
+must be a 't'. But the rest is blurred."
+
+"I wonder if that isn't Walter?" said Harry.
+
+"Who is Walter?" asked John.
+
+"Walter? Why he is the man who signed the note we found on the
+_Investigator's_ life boat No. 3 and from whom we have never heard."
+
+"I remember now," said John, reflectively. "He mentioned Wright who was
+one of my companions. But I did not know Walter,--but what is this?" All
+craned forward now. "Here is a line; it looks like a large V, pointing
+to the south;--that is if the upper part of the paper is the north."
+
+"There is some sort of tracing on it," said George.
+
+"Your eyesight is good, George, see if you can see any figures on the
+sheet that will explain the V, and the reason for the name below."
+
+"There is the slightest sign of a figure, or a word just below the point
+of the V. It looks like '30'. This seems to be an arrow, which points to
+the right diagonally."
+
+"Now you boys have something to occupy your minds. Yon have been
+interested in the Walter note for a year; now is the time to do some
+investigating."
+
+"I have an idea," said Harry, jumping up. "Where can we find the
+original Walter's note? We can compare the signature, and that will tell
+whether it is Walter or not."
+
+The Professor smiled as he noticed the eagerness of the boys. They
+rushed out of the room and went over to the shop to reclaim the note
+that had given them so much concern fourteen months before.
+
+When they had gone John said: "I presume you have already guessed what
+the note contains?"
+
+"Unquestionably it has reference to the location of the main ledge of
+copper or other ore which is measured from some point in that vicinity,
+and which may be determined later on by noting the place where the
+missive was found, or from some natural landmark."
+
+"That is my view, but I felt it would be better for the boys to dig it
+out for themselves," replied John.
+
+The wonderful nature of the instruction which the boys had obtained
+during their stay on the island, was characterized by this little
+incident. Everything learned by one's own exertions is not only more
+valuable because of that fact, but the facts thus gleaned will leave a
+stronger impress upon the mind.
+
+The boys thus learned by doing things themselves, that they became
+strong and self reliant, and it made them happy to think that they were
+able to pick up the threads, however tangled, and weave them into a
+harmonious whole. It is the secret of doing things well.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE ARROW ON THE SHEET
+
+
+When the boys reached their rooms they set to work to decipher the
+colored paper. It was about four by six inches in size, and had been
+folded twice, as the creases plainly showed. Assuring themselves that it
+was paper which had been crossruled, as suggested by John, they tried to
+decipher the straggling letters and form them into some coherent form.
+
+The paper had the following appearance when they received it:
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 1. The Mysterious Message._]
+
+The words, or parts of words "dire," in the first line, and "30 gues" in
+the second line, together with the letters "Walt" are the only
+absolutely clear things to be noticed.
+
+"The writing is right across the V-shaped marks, and the arrow is plain
+enough. It may be though, that the arrow has nothing to do with the
+V-shaped mark." And George held the paper away from his eyes to get the
+proper effect at a distance.
+
+"I wonder how close the mountain is to the sea?" ventured Harry.
+
+"I don't see what difference that would make," replied George. "That
+_30_ must mean some measurement. It is either feet, or miles, or yards,
+or,--"
+
+"Why can't you see that 'gues' is a part of the word 'leagues.'"
+
+Harry jumped up as though shot. "Well, that was stupid of us, sure
+enough."
+
+"With that key before us, we can make some headway. I believe the
+V-shape is the lower end of the mountain, probably a headland, and the
+arrow points to a place 30 leagues to the,--see here, in the last line
+is a W. and there is a blur before it and after it. That may be SWE,
+EWS, SWW, SWS, and,--"
+
+"Don't go so fast," shrieked Harry. "What do you suppose the capital I
+stands for at the beginning of the third line?"
+
+"I--I--, why,--_Island_, of course," said George, with an air of
+superiority. "But it cannot be west."
+
+"Well, the arrow points southeast."
+
+"How do you know?" asked George, dubiously.
+
+"Why, that word at the extreme top must be 'north,' and if so then the
+arrow is pointing south, and the 'W' belongs to something in that
+direction."
+
+"There, in the second line is a word that looks like 'land.' Can it be a
+part of the word 'Island'?"
+
+"It doesn't seem so, as there is too much space before the letters. It
+seems to me though, that it reads 'land 30 leagues' but what does 'se'
+mean?"
+
+The boys were up late that night, and they went to bed with the missive
+still unsolved. Before retiring Harry said: "Let us wait until daylight.
+The sun may help us out."
+
+When they awoke the first thing that occurred to George was the original
+Walter letter, so that the writing could be compared. It was found, and
+George came in with an exultant bound.
+
+"I am sure now that it was Walter. Here it is." The original letter was
+as follows:
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 2. Walter Letter._
+  Go directly south from the large river which flows to the east,
+  west of the mountains. We are too closely watched to escape. The
+  tribe at war with our captors are to the west of. If I escape I
+  will follow the river to the sea so you will understand where I am.
+                                             Walter. ]
+
+"Compare the two and you will see they look alike," said George.
+
+"What shall we tell the Professor!" asked Harry.
+
+"Well but I am not yet through with the paper. Suppose we moisten it,
+and that may bring out something we didn't see before."
+
+This was done, but it made the entire document worse than before.
+
+"Too bad we have spoiled it," remarked Harry, "but I think we are safe
+in telling the Professor and John what we have found out."
+
+For the time being, however, the boys had other urgent work to do. The
+day for launching had been set, and every working hour was valuable, so
+they were over at the ship yard early, and the boys did not see either
+John or the Professor during the day.
+
+The vessel as designed by Harry, and supervised by John, was ninety feet
+long, and had a beam of eighteen feet, with a very deep keel, and high
+bulwarks. It was constructed of a species of oak, found in abundance in
+the forest west of the town, and was cut up into boards, and dried in
+specially-prepared kilns which were put up for the purpose.
+
+While lumber dried in this way is not the best for ordinary uses, it
+will serve for shipping purposes, because there is always more or less
+moisture present in the hull of the vessel, and the object was to enable
+them to get the material in the speediest way.
+
+The saw mill was one of their first experiments in building machinery,
+and it was in constant service from the day it was first erected,
+getting out lumber for building purposes.
+
+The engine was designed only for auxiliary purposes, and the boiler was
+intended to use coal, of which they found an ample supply in the
+northern portion of the island, as explained in a previous book.
+
+When the boys returned to their rooms late that afternoon, the first
+thing that interested them was the message. When it was brought in it
+was dry, and a slight change was noticed in its appearance. Now, what
+appeared to be the first word of the message, was discernible, the word
+"Take," and the word "Head" could be made out before and as a part of
+"land," in the second line.
+
+"We have it," cried Harry, as he jumped up. "Now let them know about
+it."
+
+They were across the open space, without any ceremony, and without
+taking trouble to announce themselves, were in the Professor's room.
+
+"We have it,--we have made it out," was the announcement, as Harry held
+up the message.
+
+"Does it tell you where the Copper mine is located?" asked the
+Professor.
+
+"Copper mine!" exclaimed George. "What has a copper mine to do with it?"
+
+"John and I concluded, from certain markings on the paper, that it
+contained a diagram of the mine!"
+
+"Well, you were mistaken," said Harry with a chuckle. "It is something
+about an island, thirty leagues to the southeast, somewhere."
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed the Professor in surprise. "Get John. He will be
+surprised."
+
+John came hurriedly at the announcement, and the contents of the missive
+pointed out. "This is certainly good news," he said. "That was fine work
+on your part."
+
+"You see the arrow, and the part of the word 'leagues.' That couldn't
+mean feet or yards, or miles."
+
+"Quite evident," said John, as he mused for a while. "This confirms, in
+a measure, the information that we have as to the proximity of these
+islands, but the charts show them farther away."
+
+"Undoubtedly, if Walter knew what he was talking about, we have an
+interesting problem to decipher, and the determination to make the
+voyage is a wise and timely one," interposed the Professor.
+
+"Now for the ship," said Harry. "Every day is a hundred, in my mind."
+
+As may be imagined, the boys now worked with feverish haste. Other
+islands here, and waiting for them! Sometimes they were almost tempted
+to give up the trip home, but the Professor would not hear of it.
+
+"Do not change your plans, if you have any good conclusions when you
+start out. Don't oscillate from one thing to another. Always make up
+your minds and then take a wise, persistent course. It is that which
+always serves you best."
+
+"No; we will go home first, and _then_ for the islands," said Harry, who
+felt relieved that the impetuous nature of George could be brought to
+their way of thinking, although George was by far the most homesick of
+the entire lot.
+
+All the boys were on hand when the vessel was launched. It rode the
+water beautifully, and the natives were the most enthusiastic helpers.
+They felt proud of their work. Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were
+the most prominent men in the community, and particularly Sutoto, the
+intelligent Beree, and Stut, the brother-in-law of Muro, were on hand.
+
+It was a great feast day for the people. Tears actually flowed from the
+Professor's eyes, as he saw the women and children crowd about him. He
+was almost a God to them. They were accustomed to receive visits from
+him in his weekly rounds, and how at such times he loved to tell them
+how to make and arrange things about the house, which contributed to
+their comfort.
+
+Everybody was at work; all were happy, and no one appreciated this more
+than the women, who had been lifted out of the bonds of slavery and
+elevated through the wise administration of the Professor.
+
+Angel, too, was in evidence. He was the first to climb the mast, as the
+ship floated in the stream.
+
+"I wonder whether Angel remembers the first trip he took with us on boat
+No. 1?" asked Harry.
+
+Angel bestowed a knowing look on Harry. "I believe he knows what you
+said," remarked George.
+
+In another week the rigging had been put up, and the boiler and engine
+were installed before the launching, so that the necessary work
+required to enable the ship to sail, was the provisioning. John
+suggested that what was of far more importance would be the work of
+training a crew to handle the ship, so they turned their minds toward
+the solution of this question.
+
+The selection of a crew was a most difficult task, because all the men
+were willing to volunteer. It was decided, however, that only the
+unmarried men should be taken, and this at once eliminated many who
+might otherwise have been selected.
+
+For three days the ship was taken out to sea, under sail only, and John
+found no trouble in maneuvering the vessel with his new crew. John was a
+sailor, and had once been owner of a vessel, so that they were in
+competent hands.
+
+But the final day came, when they must go. It was a most trying time for
+the poor boys. Almost at the last moment, Harry and George walked back
+to the Professor's room, and broke out into tears.
+
+"Everybody is leaving you," said Harry, "and I cannot bear to go and
+leave you in this way."
+
+All the rescued boys were on board, as well as Blakely, since the
+Professor had insisted that the latter should go, for business reasons,
+so that the Professor was left alone, the only white man on Wonder
+Island, when the ship sailed down the river.
+
+True, there was no reason to fear for his safety. The natives loved him
+too devotedly, but the boys felt that he must often be lonely in his new
+surroundings, with no one but the natives about him. They little knew
+that the solace and comfort of the grand old man was the knowledge that
+he had helped his fellow man, though the color of the skin was darker
+than his own.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Their voyage was accompanied by favoring winds and perfect weather.
+Valparaiso, Chile, was the first port at which they landed, and as a
+trip around the Horn, or even through the Straits of Magellan, and up
+along the Atlantic coast, would mean several months, with their own
+vessel, they shipped in one of the line steamers, and within seven weeks
+they saw Sandy Hook lightship, and then the forts which lined the
+opposite shore at the Narrows.
+
+Telegrams to their parents created paroxysms of joy in many homes which
+had been robbed when the _Investigator_ went down. There were no happier
+homes than the ones Harry and George were welcomed to.
+
+The papers told the stories of the boys in pages and pages of
+descriptions, and they showed the photos, and told what the boys had
+done in their temporary home. The hero of all this wonderful home-coming
+was Angel.
+
+The people, the houses, the wonderful automobiles which he saw on every
+hand, at first alarmed him, but when he saw that George did not seem a
+bit afraid, he reconciled himself to the situation.
+
+His first automobile ride was a revelation to him. He held on tightly to
+George, at first, but soon the sensation became one of joy, and he could
+not get enough of it. The boys were certainly fêted, but when they told
+their parents that they must go back, the proposition met with strong
+opposition.
+
+The parents forgot that the boys were now over two years older than when
+they went away, and it seemed singular that the surroundings did not
+seem the same to them as before the happy boyhood days before they left
+home.
+
+For business reasons the parents knew that it would be prudent to permit
+them to return and they were influenced by the remarkable change they
+saw in the manners and actions of the boys. They saw the youths were
+strong and self reliant, ever ready to act and to carry out their
+resolutions. These boys had been transformed into men.
+
+They spent many days going over old scenes and visiting friends. They
+enjoyed to the utmost the reunion with their families, but they could
+not cease talking about the Professor. They now realized in full what he
+had been to them, and what his example and teaching meant to them. There
+was really a feeling amounting almost to jealousy on the part of the
+people at home against the Professor, but it was not one of bitterness.
+
+One who could exert such a healthy influence on the lives of the young,
+as he possessed, was worthy of the adulation that the boys bestowed. But
+John was not forgotten in these periods of happiness.
+
+They were never happy when telling the tales of their adventures except
+when John was present, and the latter was the most sought-for
+individual, because when he once began to tell some of his vivid tales
+the people would not let him stop.
+
+Finally the time for departure came. A merry party gathered upon the
+dock when the explorers were about to depart. They would write at least
+once a month, as Blakely had assured them that he would arrange to have
+a steamer run a round trip each four weeks, to take care of the
+commodities which would be made up by the natives.
+
+The steamship _Panama_ slowly moved out into the bay, and the boys
+remembered the memorable event which took place at that same dock thirty
+months before. Then they left with a sort of half joy in their hearts,
+and now they were going away to finish up the great adventures which
+they had started when they reached the island of Wonder.
+
+All hearts were anxious as the ship neared Valparaiso, because there
+they would leave the liner from New York, and again ship in the boat
+they had built. They keenly scanned the pier as the vessel was being
+warped in.
+
+"Ah! there is Blakely on the dock," said Harry.
+
+"But I don't see the _Pioneer_ here!" responded George.
+
+_Pioneer_ was the name of the vessel they had built, and which brought
+them to that port from their island home.
+
+The moment the vessel came alongside the dock, George called to Blakely:
+"Where is our boat?"
+
+"At Wonder Island," was the reply.
+
+"At Wonder Island?" said Harry, and the boys looked at each other in
+amazement. And now they must wait several weeks, probably, until it
+returns. This was disappointing, indeed.
+
+The boys rushed off. "And where shall we go now?" asked Harry.
+
+"Over to our ship," replied Blakely.
+
+They followed his gaze to a dock beyond, where lay a beautiful vessel, a
+steamer, all decked out with flags.
+
+"Is that our vessel!"
+
+"Yes, and I have been to Wonder Island on her since you left. We just
+arrived two days ago. We are ready to steam out within two hours."
+
+"Then don't let us waste a moment's time," said Harry.
+
+"I thought you might want to take a look over the town," said Blakely.
+
+"I have no wish to do so, as long as we have the islands in view,"
+remarked George. "And how is the Professor," he continued in an eager
+tone.
+
+"He is well and happy. But I have no doubt he longs for you, as he
+frequently goes over to your rooms, and wanders around the shop, a thing
+which he never did while you were there."
+
+This was joyful news to the boys. How they longed to sail up Enterprise
+River. The steamer which Blakely had bought, and which was destined to
+ply between Wonder Island and the nearest trans-shipping point, was
+called the _Wonder_, a thing which the boys had not noticed until they
+were nearing the vessel.
+
+It was a saucy little steamer, and as they drew near Blakely said: "What
+speed do you think she will make?"
+
+"Fifteen miles at least," remarked Harry.
+
+"I am guaranteed eighteen miles an hour at the least."
+
+"Isn't that fine," said George. "What does she burn?"
+
+"Either wood, coal or petroleum."
+
+"Now would be the time to look up the oil deposits on the island,"
+remarked Harry.
+
+Within an hour the ship was under way, greatly to the delight of the
+boys.
+
+Notwithstanding the ship was sent forward under full steam, the speed
+was far too slow for the impatient boys. They were on the bridge most of
+the time with the Captain who had been employed to run the vessel. He
+proved to be a jolly, red-faced tar, who loved the antics of the boys.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE SKULL WITH THE CRYPTIC WRITING
+
+
+It was at the latter part of May when the _Wonder_ steamed up the broad
+river which led to the town of Unity. When they were within two miles of
+the town, where they could begin to see the beautiful white houses in
+the distance, Blakely came up to the bridge, and suggested that it would
+be time to give the town a salute.
+
+The Captain gave the order and the great whistle began to make a
+horrible din, and kept it up for a full half mile. Long before the boat
+came into sight of the dock itself the boys could see the people of the
+town hurrying down to the wharf.
+
+When they saw the boys on the bridge pandemonium was let loose.
+
+"This looks and acts just like a real American town," said Harry.
+
+"See the Professor," said Harry, as he rushed to the end of the bridge,
+and frantically waved his hat.
+
+The plank was swung and fastened, and the crew of natives rushed off and
+met their friends, but George and Harry were not permitted to walk down
+the gang plank. The joy at seeing them again was so intense that the
+people took them on their shoulders, and the Professor had a hard time
+to get near enough to grasp them and bid a welcome.
+
+The people marveled at the boys. They were dressed up in regulation
+American style, and the Professor asked them if they had brought the
+"latest" cuts to put in the show windows.
+
+Everybody followed, and the bantering and cheering made a continuous
+performance for them until they reached their home. All the chiefs were
+there, dressed up for the occasion, and what delighted them more than
+anything else was the fact that the Krishnos, the former witch doctors
+of the tribes, and who were now the teachers for the children, were the
+first to offer congratulations on their return.
+
+There was no work in the town that day. Everybody determined to
+celebrate, and it was with hearts full of joy that the boys witnessed
+the demonstrations in their behalf.
+
+"Isn't this a glorious home-coming?" said George. "It was worth the trip
+here to witness it."
+
+"It does seem strange to call it a 'home-coming,' but that is just what
+it is," answered Harry. "How happy the people are. They seem to
+appreciate everything that has been done for them, and it is such a
+pleasure to do things for those who appreciate it."
+
+The stories which John brought to the Professor were so beguiling that
+he promised the boys that he would probably be able during the next year
+to make a visit with them to their homes, and this delighted them beyond
+measure.
+
+Although they had been absent four months, they noted many improvements
+made during their absence. The boys, on their own initiative, visited
+many of the homes, and talked to the people, and told them of the visit
+home. And how those simple people enjoyed this kindly act, and cherished
+it for months afterwards.
+
+But it was now time to think seriously of the contemplated voyage of
+discovery, which was ever uppermost in the minds of the boys. While
+conversing on the subject a few evenings after their return, Harry
+remarked: "I suppose we must use the _Pioneer_ for our trip, as the
+_Wonder_ will have to make the regular trips?"
+
+"John and I think that would be the wisest plan. The native sailors are
+now well adapted to handle her, and do you know that Sutoto sailed her
+around the island?"
+
+This was pleasing to the boys, who liked Sutoto.
+
+"And who are the others that went with him?"
+
+"Why Lolo was one of them, and Stut and Chump. Oh, they had a jolly
+time; so they said, and I can believe it, because they are simply crazy
+to make another trip." And the Professor beamed as he related many of
+the incidents which they told him of their experiences.
+
+While they were talking, Sutoto appeared, and was immediately admitted.
+After some talk, Sutoto said: "The Professor said that when you returned
+you would have some work for me with the _Pioneer_."
+
+"Yes, and you shall command her," said Harry.
+
+Sutoto could not but show his pleasure. "I knew you would come back, but
+so many here said you would not."
+
+At this point Professor explained that there were many rumors among the
+people to the effect that the boys would never again come back, and all
+showed grief at the news. I assured them that you were just as anxious
+to return as they were to have you and I then told Sutoto that I knew
+you had plans which would require his services, but I thought it would
+be more agreeable if you imparted the nature of it to him.
+
+The boys were not slow to outline the plans to him, but advised him to
+keep the information to himself, which he promised to do. It was enough
+for him to know that he would command the ship. It was this that induced
+Sutoto to take out the ship, and finally to circumnavigate the island,
+so as to try out the sailors and properly to fit them for the work when
+the boys returned.
+
+"Now that being settled, Sutoto, we are going to leave the work of
+provisioning the _Pioneer_ to you. We must take a supply of guns and
+ammunition, as well, and probably it would be wise to have a small troop
+of the best soldiers," was Harry's instruction.
+
+"Uraso wants to go. I am sure he would be the best one to take.
+
+"What will Muro say to that?" asked the Professor.
+
+"Oh, take him along, by all means," said George, "because I want Lolo to
+go with us."
+
+It was then settled that they were to take a small force, sufficient for
+immediate purposes, and if it was found that the islands discovered were
+too well settled with hostiles it would be an easy matter to remain
+aloof, or return for reinforcements.
+
+While arrangements were being made for the departure of the expedition
+Blakely informed the Professor that it would be good policy to make up
+part of the cargo of the _Wonder_ with copper, and that both vessels
+could proceed to the southeastern part of the island, and the men aboard
+could be used to transport the copper to the sea.
+
+In this way the expedition would serve a double purpose. No one
+attempted to go contrary to the wishes of Blakely on matters which
+touched upon the commercial ventures in which they were engaged.
+
+John was only too glad that Blakely had hit upon that idea, as he was
+anxious to visit that part of the coast, contiguous to the copper
+deposit, and what was more, he wanted to see the place where Blakely
+found the missive which the boys had translated.
+
+As there was still a week before the _Wonder_ would sail for its
+northern port of call, both of the ships wended their way to the east,
+skirting the coast as closely as possible, John on the _Pioneer_ with
+the boys.
+
+They now had an opportunity to see the Great South Mountains from the
+sea. They remembered when they last saw them on land, during the
+campaign against the Illyas, and also the wonderful village on the
+western side of the mountains. What would their present wanderings bring
+forth?
+
+That evening they landed within a cove, both vessels being brought as
+near the shore as possible.
+
+"We can safely go in close this evening, because the tide is now out,"
+said John.
+
+Sutoto, while he had navigated the vessel, and had shown remarkable
+skill, was, nevertheless, not well versed in tides and the action of the
+moon.
+
+Quick to learn, he asked John why the tides thus changed. John explained
+the reason that the tides flowed in and out twice during each
+twenty-four hours, or a little less than that time, so that high water,
+or low water would always be at a time a little later each day, and then
+stated that it would be an easy matter to so make the calculations that
+they would be able to tell ahead for a whole year just when during each
+day the highest or lowest water would be.
+
+While waiting on the ship during the hours of the evening they were
+interested in the magnificent fire flies which they saw on the shore and
+along the mountain side. This was not an unfamiliar sight to them as
+they had witnessed such scenes many times before.
+
+But now they saw such sights as they had never before observed. They
+must have been giant glow birds, because some of the lights flew at
+least hundreds of feet emitting continuous streams of light, and this
+was not all, many of the lights were colored, particularly red and blue
+or simply faint tinges of those tints.
+
+"I have often thought that there is nothing more wonderful than the fire
+fly," said George.
+
+"But what do you think makes it so wonderful?" asked John.
+
+"Well, I suppose the wonderful part is that it has strength enough to
+make a light," answered Harry.
+
+"No, the remarkable thing is that the light which it emits is absolutely
+cool. Experiments which have been made go to show that there is no heat.
+In every form of light which man has been able to produce thus far
+artificially, a great heat is evolved, and it would be a most valuable
+discovery to find out why these insects are able to do it without
+raising the temperature."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 3. The Fire-fly._]
+
+"But what difference does it make if heat is produced?" asked Harry.
+
+"The production of heat means the loss of power. The heat generated
+takes up more of the power than the light which is produced, so that it
+would be a great economy if the heat could be dispensed with."
+
+"But if there was no heat in the light produced would it make any
+difference in the lamps themselves?"
+
+"Unquestionably. The lamps would last much longer."
+
+"What are the things which must be learned in order to get the secret of
+cold light?"
+
+"Well, there are number of questions which must be determined. While it
+is known that the fire fly and the glow worm emit what is called a
+phosphorescent light, this fact is a mere prelude to the knowledge of
+what is the exact color of daylight."
+
+"Color of Daylight? Why, I supposed it was white."
+
+"But the light of the glow worm and fire fly are not white."
+
+They watched them, and soon appreciated that John's statement was true.
+
+"You asked what were some of the things to be solved? Well, to find out
+the secret of the phosphorescent glow. That is one thing. What is the
+best artificial light, is the next. Then, what substance will have the
+most intense glow when a current passes through it, and give out the
+least heat."
+
+"Well, has no one attempted to explain any of these things?"
+
+"Yes; many explanations have been offered, but all of them leave the
+subject dark somewhere." And John laughed as he saw that the boys
+appreciated his little attempt at witticism.
+
+"But the time will come when man will find out this, as everything in
+his way. When you think of it, that electricians, chemists,
+metallurgists, physiologists, engineers, physicists and microscopists,
+are all working on the problem, we should be able to extract the secret
+sooner or later."
+
+"I am going to have some of those fellows," shouted George, and when the
+natives on board heard the request of George there was a scramble for
+the boats, and John was delighted to give them instructions for
+capturing the insects.
+
+Early the next day the entire party landed, and Blakely, together with
+John and the boys, started for the high peak, the one visible for miles
+from the west, and which John and the boys often wished to visit.
+
+One of the things which the boys brought with them from the States, was
+a pair of strong glasses, and these were constantly in use.
+
+"What do you say to scaling that point?" said Harry.
+
+"Just what I have been thinking about," said George.
+
+Sutoto, who was with the party, showed by his glowing eyes that he
+wanted to be of the party. "Certainly you shall go," said Harry.
+
+"Before going we must visit the place where the Walter note was found,"
+called out John.
+
+The boys had forgotten this. "Most assuredly," answered George, "I had
+almost forgotten that."
+
+Blakely led the way up alongside the rugged cliff. "See that bluish
+green outcropping," he said as they were pulling themselves up.
+
+John stopped and chipped off some specimens. "Wonderful!" he exclaimed.
+"Better than anything I have ever found in Mexico. These hills remind me
+of the formation all along western Chihuahua, and through northeastern
+Sonora."
+
+The ledge on which they finally emerged was fully six hundred feet above
+sea level. When they turned around and viewed the sea below them, and
+saw the ships at anchor, they were delirious with joy. How Sutoto
+enjoyed the scene. He had never seen anything like it before and he was
+amazed and stupefied. He turned and grasped George by the hand. He was
+too full to speak.
+
+"But wait, Sutoto, until we get to the top," said Harry, as he saw his
+countenance. As they looked up at the top they wondered what they might
+see from the elevation.
+
+"Here is the spot," cried out Blakely. "This is the pot in which the
+message was found. And here is something that I dug up afterwards."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull._]
+
+The boys crowded around. It was a skull on which was engraved the
+characters ABCC, followed by a star.
+
+All looked at John, thinking he might offer some solution. He turned it
+over, and examined every portion. Not a word was spoken. "Tell me the
+exact position in which this was found," he asked, as he looked at
+Blakely.
+
+"The first thing I found was the pot, which was simply turned upside
+down, in exactly this way. This is the place. It rested on this flat
+stone. The skull was behind it on this upper shelf."
+
+"And was there nothing else on the shelf?"
+
+"Nothing whatever."
+
+John stooped down and carefully examined the shelf. All followed his
+motions. "Do you see that mark?" he said, pointing to a heavy scratch,
+which was now plain. "That mark is associated with the skull, if not
+with the message. I am unable at this time fully to decipher the marks
+on the skull, but I have an idea of the meaning."
+
+"I wonder if the scratch across that is in the same direction as the
+arrow in the letter?" asked George.
+
+"Unquestionably: let me see your glasses," and George unslung them as
+John took them and gazed long in the direction of the line on the shelf.
+
+He lowered the glasses and slowly shook his head. Something was forming
+itself in his mind, this was evident. He walked around the ledge and
+back again. Finally, he said: "I wish it were night, it might help to
+solve the riddle."
+
+"And why?" asked Harry.
+
+"Those letters have reference to the star which follows."
+
+"It seems to me to be a singular thing that anyone should leave this
+here in the hope or expectation that it could be a guide for any one,"
+remarked George.
+
+"There is certainly one explanation of that," answered John. "It is
+evident that the articles were placed there as a form of note to others,
+and it is a sort of cryptic sign, intelligible only to those who have
+the key. The fact that these signs are here denote several things, one
+of which is that something important, such, for instance, as treasures,
+or the location of hidden wealth, or the directions necessary to find
+mining lodes, or even to point out the direction and distances of other
+islands in the distance."
+
+"But," said Harry, "the fact that we have found these things here looks
+as though there were other parties besides Walter and that he was
+associated with them in some sort of enterprise."
+
+"Quite true; but I am not at all satisfied that the Walter note has
+anything to do with the skull. In fact there is every evidence to me
+that they are entirely disconnected with each other."
+
+This announcement was the most surprising to Blakely, who now added a
+few points of information. "I should have said that the skull was not
+exposed as you now see it on the shelf. After I went up the side of the
+hill, I returned and landed on the ledge, and then I noticed the skull
+through the apertures formed by the stones now lying at the side."
+
+"That is evidence to my mind, that Walter knew nothing of the existence
+of the skull at the time he left the message, and yet, singular as it
+may seem, both the skull and Walter's message point to the same thing."
+
+This announcement was certainly curious and interesting, and keyed up
+the listeners to a high pitch of expectation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE TRIP TO THE NEW ISLAND
+
+
+Exciting as were the events alluded to in the last chapter, the boys
+insisted on taking Sutoto to the top of the peak. John and Blakely
+gathered up the fragments, and when the boys left they were busily
+engaged in making careful measurements of the stone and ledges.
+
+It was not an easy task to gain the summit, but when they reached it,
+there was spread before them the most remarkable panorama. To the north
+they could see South River, the first stream they discovered when they
+came to the island.
+
+They looked on it almost lovingly. "If it were not for the mountain
+range to the north we could see clear to Cataract," said Harry.
+
+"The dear old place!" exclaimed George. Sutoto smiled. He had been
+there, and he shared the views of the boys.
+
+"Let me have the glasses," shouted Harry, as he adjusted them and turned
+to the west. "Unity," was the only thing he said, as he handed the
+glasses to Sutoto. The latter looked, and stepped back in surprise.
+George kept his eyes on Sutoto, as the latter bent forward in his
+eagerness to see the town which was now so plain to him, although more
+than fifty miles away.
+
+George leisurely took the glasses, as Sutoto said slowly, and with
+proper emphasis, "Wonderful! wonderful!"
+
+He turned the glasses to the southeast, hoping to catch a glimpse of the
+land of treasures, but they saw nothing but the wide open sea, calm and
+peaceful, and he wondered that it could ever be so angry and tempestuous
+as they had known it to be on two momentous occasions.
+
+They remained there for a long time, and viewed every portion of the
+island. When they descended they took a route leading to the west, and
+when nearly at the bottom, heard the unmistakable sounds of voices below
+them. For a moment the boys were alarmed, but Sutoto set up a shout, his
+quick ears having detected the voices of their friends. It was the first
+caravan load of copper which they were taking from the great cave near
+the Illyas' village.
+
+"Glory! we are near the Illyas' village," said Harry, as he stumbled
+down the mountain side, and saw the train of men with the loads.
+
+They would now do some more visiting. They must surely go over to the
+village where they captured the last of the hostile tribes. As they
+neared the village they were surprised to see Oma coming toward them. He
+greeted them like a monarch, and led them into the village.
+
+"I am glad to welcome you," he said. The boys were astounded at the
+words. This man, the most vindictive and bitter of all the tribesmen,
+had learned to speak, and showed by his actions that he was glad to
+welcome them.
+
+But when they came to the village, the surprise of the boys was so great
+that they could hardly speak. Instead of filth and uncleanliness
+everywhere, they saw carefully attended lawns, and houses, instead of
+huts. The people came out and greeted them with laughter.
+
+And then the boys recognized many of the men who had lived in Unity, and
+who had worked for them in the shops, and in the fields. The Chief then
+escorted them to the large building, the same one in which the Chief was
+captured by the boys, the year before.
+
+What a change! Formerly the furniture in the room was one jumbled mass
+of débris, and the household arrangements were only such as savage
+conditions warranted. Now, the large interior had been cut up into
+rooms, and they were furnished with comfortable belongings.
+
+The Chief saw the curiosity of the boys, and he read their thoughts.
+"You wonder at the difference? Yes; it is a difference. We owe it to
+that wonderful Chief, and to you, and to John."
+
+"Yes; John will be here soon," said George.
+
+"I have seen him. He will be here. We are preparing a great feast for
+him," and the boys opened their eyes and smiled as they heard this
+announcement.
+
+The people flocked about them, and the men who knew the boys were only
+too proud to be recognized by them. Thus they visited every nook and
+corner of the town, surprised and glad to see that the Chief had
+insisted on his people going to Unity and learning the ways of the white
+people.
+
+There was a further reason why the coming of John and of Blake was a
+joyous event. Oma had been informed that the great copper mines were to
+be opened in the mountains, which would insure work for every one, and
+that they would be able to buy every sort of luxury and enjoy all the
+comforts of the white people.
+
+Late that evening John and Blakely came accompanied by two hundred of
+the Illyas who had actually been engaged during the day in transporting
+copper from the cave to the hold of the _Wonder_.
+
+The feast and the celebration that night in a village which, only a few
+months before, was of the most savage character, was, indeed, a marvel.
+Oma could scarcely express himself with enough earnestness, and the
+women were following the boys with their eyes, and actually caressing
+them, in their eagerness to show appreciation.
+
+When the time came for them to leave, the Chief accompanied the men to
+the shore below South Mountain to witness their departure. Before they
+left the village, the things which had been brought there by the ships
+for the Illyas were placed in the Chief's storehouse, and Blakely paid
+the members of the party who had assisted them. This, also, was the
+occasion for much rejoicing.
+
+Blakely, on board the _Wonder_, waved an adieu to the boys and John as
+the boats separated, and Sutoto gave the order to sail directly
+southeast.
+
+During the afternoon the sea was calm and afforded a beautiful sail, but
+during the night a strong breeze came up and its intensity varied during
+the night. The next day, however, the sea became choppy, and over
+two-thirds of the natives were rolling around on the deck in the agonies
+of sea-sickness.
+
+"This will give us an opportunity to try the new cure for the malady,"
+said John.
+
+"What is that?" asked George.
+
+"Simply atrophine."
+
+"How is it administered?"
+
+"By injecting it."
+
+"What is atrophine?" asked Harry.
+
+"It is a crystalline, bitter and poisonous alkaloid, taken from the
+deadly nightshade, and the same principle is also found in the thorn
+apple."
+
+"Isn't it the same as belladonna?" remarked George.
+
+"No; but belladonna is also an extract of nightshade."
+
+"Have you any of it here?"
+
+"Yes; I brought some, together with the other drugs that the Professor
+ordered, and I am anxious to try it. The remedy was discovered by Prof.
+Fischer, of Munich, and also simultaneously by Dr. Reginald Pollard, of
+South Kensington, England."
+
+Accompanied by the boys John went among the sufferers, and administered
+the medicine, giving at each injection about 1-64th of a grain. It was
+remarkable in its effects. Within a half hour the sickening feeling in
+the stomach disappeared, the eyes began to grow bright again, the pulse
+full, and the patient became strong and vigorous.
+
+None of them objected to John's ministrations. Their confidence in his
+ability was sufficient for them and the results justified their faith.
+
+When the boys came on deck in the morning, they strained their eyes
+looking toward the horizon for land but there was no land in sight. John
+was already on deck and he smiled as he saw them ascend the ladder. "And
+where is your island?" he asked.
+
+"How far have we gone?"
+
+"We have been driven somewhat out of our course, it is true; but we are
+more than a hundred miles from Wonder Island, and have sailed past the
+place where the other island ought to be, according to Walter's letter."
+And John chuckled somewhat, at the crestfallen looks of the boys.
+
+"Where are we going now?"
+
+"I told Sutoto we would better tack to the southwest. We can use up a
+day at that course, and then double back, probably thirty or forty miles
+to the south, and in that way we can cover a wide area."
+
+While sailing in that direction they had to go pretty much into the face
+of the wind, but it was considered wise to explore that region to the
+south of the islands first, and then take another section to the east or
+to the west.
+
+Night came on without any indications of land, and the course was
+altered directly to the east. The boys remained up until nearly twelve
+that night, but no light or evidence of land came in sight. Tired with
+the exertions of the day, they retired, and were soon asleep.
+
+How long they slept was immaterial to them. Sutoto came into their
+cabin, and awakened them, saying, "We can see some lights in the east."
+They heard the voice, and its earnest expression, and without waiting to
+dress scrambled out. Far off to the southeast was a faint glimmer, then
+it died away.
+
+After a moment or two it appeared again, somewhat brighter than before.
+The night was intensely dark, and the wind was blowing a steady gale, so
+that the boat not only rocked but it moved forward into the lines of
+waves across their path.
+
+John was above, and they hurriedly rushed to see him. He was smiling, as
+they approached, and he greeted them by saying "We have reached your
+island, probably."
+
+"How long have you seen the light?" asked George.
+
+"A half hour, or more," he answered.
+
+The boys were not in the mood now to return to bed, so they went back to
+dress, and then returned, meanwhile watching the light with eager eyes.
+The course of the ship was directed toward it, and every one on board
+had now heard the news.
+
+Soon the watch on the port side sang out: "Land ahead," and every one
+sprang to the left side. There, plainly in the darkness, was a headland,
+or a spur, which they were passing at almost right angles. The most
+intense excitement prevailed.
+
+Still the light was directly ahead, and, apparently, a long distance
+from them. John told Sutoto to haul in the sails, and to take a course
+directly to the south. He explained that it would be wise to stand off
+the shore as long as possible, as the ship's clock showed that it was
+now past four o'clock so that within the next hour they might be able to
+view the land clearly enough to determine their future course.
+
+Impatiently they awaited that period of gloom which is said to be the
+darkest time,--just before the dawn. This seemed to be so to the
+watchers, but shortly after five the curtain lifted. A slight haze was
+over the land, but they had found an island, at least.
+
+"Do you know our position?" asked Harry, as John approached. "Yes; I
+have just figured it out. We are fifty leagues (one hundred and fifty
+miles) southeast of Wonder Island."
+
+The boys looked at each other. Evidently Walter was wrong, or they had
+read his letter incorrectly. But they saw land, and John assured them
+that there was no land between that place and their own island.
+
+Anxiously they awaited daylight, and when it came they gazed out on a
+barren waste,--a rocky and uninviting shore.
+
+"Steer for the little cove beyond the great rock," said John.
+
+The sails were hoisted, and the vessel slowly moved south, and rounded
+into the waters bounded by the circular shore line. The anchor was soon
+cast, and then began the launching of the boats.
+
+John called the men before him, and gave a few words of advice. "We have
+no knowledge of the character of the land, or of the people who may live
+there. Two boats will be manned, and ten will take their places in each.
+Uraso will have charge of one, and Muro of the other. When we reach the
+shore Muro will remain with the men under his command, while Uraso will
+follow me. It will be understood that so long as no shots are heard by
+Muro and his party that our expedition is safe, but should any firing be
+heard, then the ship must be signaled and those in the vessel here must
+come to shore, and Muro with his soldiers will at once come to our
+relief. I hope we shall have no occasion for calling on you, but we must
+be prepared for any emergency."
+
+The two boats pulled for the shore. After landing John, with Uraso's men
+the boys quickly scrambled up the rough cliffs beyond. When the heights
+were gained they looked over a beautifully wooded landscape, but it was
+still, except for the birds and the small animals which looked at them
+in a startled manner, and then scurried for cover.
+
+"I doubt whether there are any people living here," remarked Harry.
+"There is not a sign of living beings."
+
+"You are quite mistaken there," said John.
+
+The boys looked at John. "Have you seen any signs?" asked George.
+
+"Yes; did you notice how the animals fled at our approach?"
+
+They had noticed it, but neglected to draw any inference from it.
+
+"That is one of the surest signs. Do you now remember how differently
+the animals acted in the region around Cataract from those in the
+southwest portion of Wonder Island?"
+
+"I now remember that is so. Don't you remember, George, when we came
+across the first herd of yaks, that they hardly noticed us? I am sure
+that the animals out at West River didn't wait to interview us."
+
+"Well, I remember the big bear was very anxious to make our
+acquaintance," said George, and Harry smiled, as he remembered how the
+big fellow took his revenge by tearing up their baggage.
+
+John directed the men to the right, and in the direction of an elevation
+which seemed to be clear of timber. From that point they searched the
+intervening wooded area, and caught sight of a still higher tableland
+miles beyond.
+
+"Your glasses would be serviceable here," said John. George handed them
+to John, and he gazed through them long and earnestly. "I am unable to
+find any traces of human beings, and I cannot account for the light
+which we saw during the night, and which must have been nearly ahead of
+us."
+
+He walked forward, the men following. They marched for more than a mile,
+every object being examined. Fallen trees were particularly
+investigated, and clumps of trees were searched, even the bark of trees
+being minutely gone over by John.
+
+The natives, generally so keen to discover evidences of their kind,
+walked along, and shook their heads, to indicate the absence of all
+signs. The land in the interior was elevated, but it was not rough or
+broken, the only place where an upheaval had taken place appearing to be
+the west coast.
+
+"This seems to look bad for our purposes," said John, as he turned to
+the boys.
+
+"What do you mean?" asked Harry.
+
+"I don't think there are any caves in this section," he answered. "But
+we might as well investigate farther to the right, and see what the land
+looks like."
+
+"Aren't those coffee trees?" said George, in great eagerness, as he
+bounded forwardly.
+
+There, not a hundred feet away, were the beautiful trees with white
+clusters all over them. Thousands of these trees were in sight.
+
+"I believe we have struck a coffee plantation," exclaimed Harry.
+
+John did not answer, but went up to one of the trees and carefully
+examined it. "No, these trees have grown wild, and no one has ever
+gathered the berries."
+
+"But what an opportunity there would be here for gathering coffee! Too
+bad Blakely isn't here," said George.
+
+"We never saw anything like it on Wonder Island," suggested Harry. "Now,
+why is it that cocoa will grow in wonderful profusion on one island,
+and none on the next, and the other island will have bananas and the
+other not?"
+
+"The explanation of that has been the means of bringing out a wonderful
+study, that is explained by the nature of the soil itself. In every
+country certain sections will spontaneously produce product alike, in
+almost every essential quality. Thus, flax, for instance, is found,
+identical in its character, in Kamscatska, and in Minnesota; in the
+Siberian wilds and in Central America; on the heights of the Himalayas,
+and in the lowest plains of South America."
+
+"But how do you explain the similarity? They must have come from seed,
+and how did the seeds get from place to place, when there were no ships
+to carry them?"
+
+"There can be only one explanation. The soil itself, if identical in its
+character, will, eventually, produce the same vegetables and vegetation.
+Thus, it has been found that the localities where this wild flax was
+found, had soil which was the same in its nature, and calculated to
+produce the same in kind."
+
+For four hours the little band marched to the south, and came back along
+a track nearer the sea, without discovering the slightest indication of
+human habitations, except the frightened looks and actions of the
+animals in their path.
+
+[Illustration: "_He turned it over and examined every portion_"
+                                                   [See p. 60]]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+DISCOVERY OF THE ISLAND AND EXPLORATIONS
+
+
+Weary, they dragged themselves over the cliffs and down to the waiting
+natives. Muro was surprised to learn that they had found no signs of
+people, so they rowed back to the ship, and after a hearty meal, retired
+for the night.
+
+In the morning when they asked John for his opinion, he said, "The only
+course is to sail south, and circumnavigate the island. In doing so we
+shall effect a landing every ten miles or so, and then go into the
+interior. This will thus enable us to learn all about the land. At the
+same time we must survey the island, so as to learn its extent, as well
+as its general shape and outline."
+
+"But how can we survey it without the instruments?"
+
+"That is readily done, by observing the headlands, or some special coast
+line marks, and then taking the angles from those points."
+
+"Well, that will be interesting, at least. How shall we start?"
+
+"Do you see that point to the south which may be five or ten miles
+away?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Now, examine the compass, and turn it so that the cardinal points are
+directly north and south. Now sight across the face of the compass so
+that you get the exact line between this point and yonder object. What
+do you make it to be?"
+
+"Why I make it out to be S. E."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation._]
+
+"That is correct. The line 1 is south by east."
+
+"But how can we find out how long line 1 is?" asked Harry.
+
+"Why by triangulation," said George, quickly.
+
+"I know that, but how can we do it on sea?"
+
+"It can be done on sea, as well as on land, but we had better go and
+make the first measurement by triangulation correctly, and do this in
+our subsequent measurements, unless it should be necessary to make the
+measurements at sea. The plan followed on shipboard will be found
+similar to the plan followed on land."
+
+The boat was manned and the boys with a crew of the men and John made
+for the shore, and together they went inland to a point marked B (Fig.
+5), and sighted across to the same object C that was noted of the ship.
+This, then, gave three lines, 1, 2 and 3, forming a triangle.
+
+"If these angles are placed on a paper the distance from A to C can be
+determined on the principles of proportion," remarked John.
+
+"How is that done?"
+
+"We will assume that the lines 1, 2, are at right angles to each other.
+This is not necessary, but it happens to be so in this case. Let us
+first measure the distance along the line 2, which may be any number of
+inches, or feet. Suppose we call the line one inch long. Then draw the
+line 1, so that it will be sufficiently long to be sure and meet the
+line 3."
+
+"Yes; I now see how it is done," remarked George, with enthusiasm. "If
+the line 3 is drawn at the angle we got, when we looked at C, from B,
+the line will cross line 1 at C."
+
+"That is correct. Now, if it is one inch from A to B, we may use that
+inch as a measurement to get the distance along the line."
+
+"Let me step it off," said Harry. "I find it is just two and
+three-quarters inches."
+
+"What was the distance, in feet from A to B?" asked John.
+
+"I have the figures here," said George. "We found it was six hundred and
+ninety feet."
+
+"If, now, you will multiply 690 by 2-3/4, we shall have the distance
+from this point A, and yonder point, or headland C."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 6. The Second Limb._]
+
+"I make it out to be just 1897.5," was Harry's conclusion.
+
+The boys, together with John and a half dozen of the natives, went along
+the shore, and mounted the point C, and from that place selected another
+point in a southerly direction, and again made the same calculations.
+
+The vessel in the meantime was put under sail and anchored a mile
+below, giving the surveying party time to make several triangulations,
+and late in the afternoon the party came on board, tired and ready to
+take a rest.
+
+From the position taken up by the ship they could see a long stretch of
+shore line, practically straight, trending toward the southeast, and
+with their glass could see, miles away, a headland which afforded a
+pronounced point for observation.
+
+The next morning the same parties rowed to the shore, and Uraso was left
+with the party to guard the shore boat, while Muro accompanied John and
+the boys. On this occasion John issued the following instruction:
+
+"The long point which you see in the distance is, probably, 15 miles
+beyond. It is not more than that, but this clear atmosphere is liable to
+deceive. I have instructed Sutoto to wait until one o'clock today, and
+if by that time there is no word from us Uraso will return to the ship,
+and you will take up anchor and steer for the headland beyond."
+
+"So that you may understand our movements, we will strike into the
+interior, taking a course due east, for ten miles, or thereabout, and
+then turn to the south, and reach the sea near the place where the
+vessel will be located."
+
+"I understand, now, how the distance can be measured by triangulation on
+land; but how to get the distances, on shipboard, is what puzzles me,"
+said Harry.
+
+John smiled as he replied: "I knew you would come to that sooner or
+later, so I prepared a little sketch (Fig. 7), which shows the bow of a
+vessel, and the tall mast. The lines from A to B give an angle with the
+vertical line of the mast, which will enable you to determine how far
+the ship is from any point."
+
+"But I am still in the dark as to how, even if we have that distance, we
+can thereby tell by triangulation, on the vessel, how far one point is
+from another on the land."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 7. Triangulation from a Vessel._]
+
+"After the distance from the vessel to the point is determined, as I
+have shown, then the length of the ship itself is used as the two points
+to sight from, and the two lines thus projected, from the opposite ends
+of the vessel, together with the line lengthwise along the ship, form a
+triangle, the same as the triangle lines 1, 2, 3, in the sketch (Fig.
+5)."
+
+It might be well at this place to describe the equipment of the party as
+it left the boat. The natives carried a plentiful supply of provisions.
+Each had a gun, the best kind of breech loaders, and also a spear.
+
+The natives love to handle spears better than anything else in the way
+of a weapon, and each also had a knife, and some carried the inevitable
+bolo, that primitive form of hatchet which is known all over the world
+where steel or iron is available, and the people have arrived at such a
+state that they are able to make metal articles.
+
+John and the boys also carried guns, but the boys had revolvers, seven
+shooters, not of large bore, but very convenient weapons, in close
+quarters. Each carried also a knife, and belt to contain the cartridges
+for the guns.
+
+Harry carried a camera, which he had brought from the States, and George
+had the field glass strapped across the shoulders. John felt that they
+had a force large enough to make a fairly effective stand against a
+pretty strong force of natives, the entire party counting, in this
+instance, sixteen.
+
+As they advanced into the interior, it was evident that they were
+gradually ascending, so that at about six miles from the landing place
+they reached the crest of the rising ground. Beyond, where the nature of
+the ground permitted they saw clearly that the distance beyond had a
+lower altitude than the place where they stood.
+
+During this trip there was no evidence that the island was occupied, but
+they saw the most amazing evidences of tropical fruits and trees.
+Magnificent trees were in evidence everywhere, and the woods, besides
+mahogany, and ebony, were of the most valuable character.
+
+John noted all these things, but the boys were most interested in the
+birds and animals which roamed about. The latter were not large or
+vicious looking, but it was not permitted to shoot any of them lest it
+might alarm Uraso, who was at the landing.
+
+Ahead could be seen several ridges, one of them heavily wooded. Reaching
+the summit they beheld a beautiful valley below, and opposite on a
+shelving rock, stood a type of mountain deer like a sentinel, while a
+dozen or more were feeding on the green slope beneath.
+
+Frequently on the march the boys would take side trips, in the attempt
+to run down some of the curious animals, but they were careful to keep
+the main force in sight.
+
+Thus they tramped on fully five miles beyond the crest of the ridge, and
+occasionally John would stop to examine some suspicious-looking
+indication of habitation.
+
+"It would surprise me very much to find that the island is not
+inhabited," he said, as he examined what appeared to be a path.
+
+At this juncture one of the native scouts came up and showed John a
+curious stone formation. John took it, and turned it over several times.
+"That is part of a stone hatchet." The scout nodded assent with a
+smile.
+
+All now became intent on searching. This finally resulted in bringing to
+light a well-formed spear, not unlike those originally used on Wonder
+Island among the native tribes.
+
+Surely they were getting evidence pretty fast now. Then, while crossing
+a little rivulet, one of the scouts plainly saw the print of a native
+foot, which was unmistakable. True, it had been made days before,
+probably a month, but there it was, and now it was incumbent on them to
+find out where the people were.
+
+The entire party scattered along the little stream, and searched both
+banks for a considerable distance, the boys taking an active part in the
+work. Usually the boys kept together, and entertained each other, but on
+this occasion all were so intent on discovering where, and in what
+direction the footprints would lead, that they quite forgot to watch
+each other.
+
+John gave a customary whistle, as he was in the habit of doing, when it
+was desired to call the party together, and all of the scouts promptly
+returned, as well as Harry. George was nowhere to be seen. John
+questioned Harry. He had first missed him at the bend in the stream not
+two hundred feet to the north.
+
+He rushed back in that direction, while John gave another blast on the
+whistle, and then listened intently for a reply. Harry came back without
+any intelligence, and almost frantic. John and the scouts then broke
+into a run, and Harry turned with them.
+
+That instant a shot rang out. "That must be George," exclaimed John.
+"Forward as quickly as possible."
+
+The party turned the bend of the river. All along this part of the
+stream the banks were cut up by ridges and diminutive cliffs, and in
+many places were large shelving rocks which came up close to the stream.
+
+Immediately after the shot John stopped, and listened for some sound,
+and the natives, usually so alert to recognize noises, did likewise.
+
+"That shot means that George is in some danger," said John.
+
+"But why does he not answer the whistle? Why should he shoot, and then
+not call to us, if there is any danger," said Harry in despair.
+
+They turned the bend, and searched to and fro. The shot could not have
+been more than eight hundred feet away. The searchers spread out into a
+fan-shaped formation. One of the scouts ran up hurriedly and called to
+John, who went forward, and there, alongside of a huge rock, where there
+was little grass, he saw unmistakable evidence of a scuffle.
+
+"These are the footprints of George's shoes," remarked Harry.
+
+"Yes, and here are the prints of the native feet," said John, as one of
+the scouts distinctly pointed out two or three well defined marks.
+
+"They are, undoubtedly, near at hand. We must now be on our guard," said
+John, as he pondered on the situation.
+
+"I wonder why they didn't attack us?" asked Harry.
+
+"The reason, no doubt, is that it is a small party. A larger body would
+not have attempted to capture one of us by stealth."
+
+John turned to Hasmo, one of the fleetest runners, and instructed him to
+go back to the landing place at once, and advise Uraso to bring his men
+and provisions, as well as additional ammunition, and to hold the ship
+until additional word should be sent.
+
+Hasmo was off in an instant, and then John issued additional
+instructions. "It is evident," he said, "that we must look for the
+people to the east or, more likely, toward the southeast. That is the
+reason why I had the boat held at the place where we have just landed.
+There is also another reason why I think the tribes, if there are any,
+are to the south, and that is, in this latitude they are much less
+exposed to the effects of the great winds that occur at certain portions
+of the year."
+
+Harry wandered about, not knowing what to do, at this terrible
+catastrophe. George in the hands of the savages! He could hardly believe
+it.
+
+"Don't worry about George too much," said John consolingly. "I am
+inclined to think he has had enough experience within the past two years
+to help him out of immediate trouble, and we will then be able to take a
+hand."
+
+This somewhat relieved Harry. It is possible that George might be able
+to take care of himself. "But suppose they kill him?" This was his great
+fear.
+
+"It is not at all likely they will do that," remarked Muro. "Those who
+captured him form only a small party, and it is not at all likely that
+there was a chief with them. Under the circumstances they would not dare
+kill him until the Chief ordered it."
+
+John smiled as he nodded at the explanation given by Muro. After all, it
+was not as bad as it might be. Now to the rescue. Muro begged permission
+to do scouting work until Uraso arrived, and selecting Stut as his
+companion, they glided through the forest directly to the east.
+
+They were now fully twelve miles from the boat, and the runner could be
+depended on to reach Uraso within an hour, if not hindered on the
+journey. It would then take, possibly, two hours more for the party to
+return, so that it was safe to assume that they would have to remain in
+the vicinity for the next three hours.
+
+John decided that the time should be spent in exploring the directions
+to the southeast and to the northeast as well, so they might be well
+informed when the reinforcements arrived.
+
+Hasmo glided through the forest like a deer. He knew that it was
+imperative to reach the shore before one o'clock, because at that time
+the vessel would leave for the southeastern point. To get there too late
+would mean a trip for fifteen miles or more along the shore to reach the
+next landing.
+
+The dense forest near the shore prevented him from seeing the vessel
+until he crossed the last ridge, and when he finally came within view
+of the harbor the ship had disappeared. He stopped and glanced to the
+south, but no ship was in sight. This was a situation which had been
+considered, from the point of view of the departure of the vessel; but
+where had it gone?
+
+He went to the shore, where Uraso's party had been, and then,
+laboriously ascended the point beyond, and from which he could get a
+clear view of the sea. There, far beyond, was the _Pioneer_, sailing to
+the southeast under a strong breeze.
+
+He tore off his jacket, and seizing a branch, began to wave it back and
+forth. The ship went on, and there was no indication that they noticed
+him. He remained thus for nearly a quarter of an hour, and then knew
+that he must follow the ship until he reached the next landing place.
+
+The trip along the shore was a most difficult one, as he could not
+follow the beach. Many of the rocks along the shore were licked by the
+waves, so that he had to take a course beyond the cliffs, and the land
+was not only rough, but numerous gulleys, or draws, as they are called,
+were washed out, making speed impossible.
+
+It required more than two hours to make the trip, and it was
+considerably after three when he hailed the boat from the shore, and
+hurriedly told the story of George's capture.
+
+Uraso was not slow in gathering the men needed for the expedition, and
+when the guns and ammunition were brought out all of the men actually
+begged to go along, but he knew that John would not sanction leaving the
+vessel without a crew.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+John and his scouts impatiently awaited the return of the men and during
+this time received the reports from the scouts as they came in. It was
+evident from the slight traces found that the band which captured George
+had gone east. It was no doubt from some indication to this effect
+obtained by Muro, that induced him to take his course in that direction,
+also.
+
+All had departed but Muro: Four o'clock came, and then five, but neither
+Muro nor Uraso appeared. This did, indeed, look strange to John, who
+could, in a measure, account for Muro's non-appearance; but he could not
+understand why Uraso did not come. It then occurred that after all Hasmo
+might not have been able to reach the landing before sailing time, and
+with this theory he consoled Harry, who was constantly on the alert,
+waiting for tidings.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+CAPTURE OF GEORGE BY THE NATIVES
+
+
+Let us now follow George. He went along the stream on its westerly side,
+while Harry was examining the eastern shore. Coming to a little rivulet,
+which flowed into the main stream at this point, he passed alongside the
+projecting ledges of rock, that for the moment hid him from the view of
+Harry.
+
+Here he saw some peculiar rocks, and outcroppings, which reminded him so
+forcibly of the early days on Wonder Island, when the Professor so
+strongly impressed on them the value of investigation. The gun was stood
+up, leaning against the rocks, when he was seized by two strong arms,
+and a hand placed over his mouth.
+
+In the struggle his hand touched the gun, and as his captor drew him
+back, he took the gun with him, and no effort was made to dispossess him
+of the weapon. He was carried along, one hand pinioned to his side,
+while the other hand carrying the gun was free, but he was unable to use
+it.
+
+He could not have been carried more than a hundred feet, before he heard
+John's whistle. This startled his captors, for he now saw that there
+were two burly specimens, almost wholly naked, and for the moment the
+hold on the imprisoned arm was relaxed.
+
+Quick as a flash he drew up the gun and fired. This was the shot heard
+by John and Harry. The shot was such a surprise that the savages were
+almost paralyzed, and dropped their hold, but it was only for an
+instant. Realizing that the noise was made by George's weapon, and not
+caused by any of the boy's companions, the nearest savage swung around
+viciously, and poor George was knocked unconscious by the blow.
+
+How long he remained in this state he did not know. When consciousness
+returned he was lying, on some tufted grass, and a half dozen vicious
+looking savages stood around him. Then he remembered the circumstances
+of his capture.
+
+He eyed them for a time, and then slowly sat up. One of the party had
+George's field glasses slung around him, just as he himself had them on
+when captured. One of them was fondling the gun, but it was evident from
+the manner in which he held it that he had no knowledge of its uses.
+
+His cartridge belt graced the form of one of the other savages, and it
+was evident that they considered the things thus taken more in the
+nature of ornaments than as weapons. He slowly felt his pockets and was
+surprised that they had removed nothing.
+
+While he was rising to a sitting posture he could feel his revolver, and
+wondered why he had not been disarmed. A glimmer of joy shot through
+him. His hands were free, and he had no pain, except the sore feeling
+that was keen on the side of his head, and which was, no doubt, caused
+by the blow.
+
+Not a word was spoken by either. He hoped something would be said and
+probably he would be able to recognize the language, as his two years'
+experience in Wonder Island gave him a fairly good understanding of the
+native tongues.
+
+He pronounced some words, in the Saboro and also in the Illya dialect,
+but they stared at each other, and answered in some words that were
+utterly unlike anything known on their own island.
+
+Soon, after a conversation among themselves, he was raised up and urged
+forward. The first thing that George did was to note the position of the
+sun, and he then stealthily drew out his watch.
+
+When the savages, who were closely watching him, saw the watch two of
+them pounced upon him, and in the struggle, one of them tore it from the
+chain. The holder of the chain threw it away, and attacked the one who
+had the watch.
+
+This was certainly an interesting struggle for George to witness. He had
+his thoughts, however. Now was the time to make a strike for liberty, so
+he quietly moved his hand toward the revolver. George was not aware that
+a pair of eyes was intently watching him while the struggle was going
+on.
+
+Before the hand reached the revolver, the savage leaped forward. His
+heart sank. The opportunity was lost. He dove down into the pocket and
+brought forth a knife, and it was hardly out of his pocket until the
+prying native had it in his hand.
+
+George gave a forced smile. The native saw it, and looked admiringly at
+the beautiful handle. He turned it around and viewed it from every
+side, and then deftly drew a strand of material from his clout and,
+winding it around the knife, threw the loop of the strand over his head.
+
+This, too, then, was an ornament! They did not know the uses of the
+knife. George kept up the smile, and soon the savage smiled in return.
+This was a good beginning, surely! But what surprised him most of all
+was the perfectly natural manner in which the defeated party in the
+contest after the watch took his loss.
+
+The victor fashioned it as a pendant, and the other looked calmly on
+while his opponent admired it. There was not a particle of resentment in
+the loser.
+
+George did not show any alarm to the savages, although it would be too
+much to say that he was entirely at ease. The instructions received from
+John, the experiences of Tom and Ralph when they were captured, were
+lessons for him, so, when the savages smiled back at him he pointed to
+the knife, and made motions as though he intended to open the blade.
+
+All savages are curious. Many of them have this trait developed to a
+remarkable degree. George's motions attracted the man. Then he leaned
+forward, and removed the knife from the loop. He held it up, exactly
+like a magician would exhibit some article that he intended should
+disappear.
+
+Then, as the savage's mouth was now open, he inserted his thumb nail
+into the crease of the large knife, and opened the blade. Then he
+extended out his hand, and offered the open knife to the savage.
+
+To say that he was merely surprised is putting it mildly. He could not
+possibly open his eyes wider, and instead of taking it, drew back. Then
+George quickly closed the blade again, and offered it in that way, and
+he was induced to slowly take it back, while he glanced at George
+suspiciously.
+
+The burly individual who carried the field glass was then approached by
+George. The latter took the glasses and put them to his eyes. At this
+act the savages set up a whoop, and the glass was snatched from him.
+Evidently they thought it was something like the gun.
+
+George smiled, and again made the motion, as though he desired to take
+the glass. The savage took the loop from his neck, and handed the
+instrument to George. The latter put it to his eyes and pointed them to
+the east, carefully adjusting them to get the proper focus.
+
+To his surprise he saw the evidences of a village in the far distant
+landscape, and, beyond it, the sea. What a discovery this was, indeed!
+
+The glasses were then presented to the burly savage, who now claimed its
+ownership, and tried to induce him to look through it. In this George
+finally succeeded, and after he saw the effect of the distant landscape,
+the attitude of the man changed, and he looked on George with a species
+of admiration and wonderment.
+
+George walked about them, in the most careless manner imaginable, but
+they never took their eyes from him. He smiled at them, again took the
+knife and performed the feat over and over again, and then instructed
+the savage how to do it.
+
+Suddenly he thought of the match safe. What a jolly trick that would be
+to spring on them. But it would be more effective at night, he
+reflected, and so he refrained from taking it out. It was evident,
+however, that he was making a hit of some kind. Whether it would aid him
+in escaping he did not know, but he tried every means possible to
+ingratiate himself, and to show that he had no fear. The view of the
+village which he had accidentally discovered impressed itself on him
+with startling force. If he once reached the village escape would be
+difficult, and consequently he viewed the searching eyes of his captors
+with great uneasiness.
+
+This was evident by the cat-like action of the one who got the knife. If
+he made the slightest move of his hands, he could see the eyes following
+them. Once he stumbled as they were marching along. This was purposely
+done, in the hope that during the time he was recovering his erect
+position he could draw the revolver.
+
+He had his course of action all planned out. He had no desire to kill,
+and he made up his mind that he would first cover them and then by
+motions wave them away, but it would be necessary to depend upon mimicry
+for this.
+
+He had learned from John that savages are naturally the most expert
+pantomimists, and are able to express many things by gestures, this
+faculty having been made the more acute because the different tribes
+are frequently brought into contact without any connecting link in the
+dialects or languages.
+
+If they refused, or made any attempt to seize him, he would then shoot
+the leader, and thus strike terror into the others. But while he was
+thus arranging all the details in his mind, he was startled at seeing a
+whole group of savages leap from the side of the ill-defined path, which
+they were now traveling, and they speedily surrounded the captor and
+captive.
+
+Then began a bedlam of explanations as they crowded around George. Some
+came up and felt his arms, and other portions of his body. He smiled
+meanwhile. It was the only thing he could do, and he knew it would be
+useless to look troubled.
+
+The next moment the visitors were examining the glass, the cartridge
+belt, the knife and the watch, and George was, temporarily forgotten,
+although surrounded so that he could not possibly force his way through.
+
+He thought it a remarkable thing that they should thus hold and watch
+him with such tenacity. While thus discussing him, a new party appeared,
+and now for the first time there was an attempt to show deference.
+
+The leader of the party was the most powerful savage George had ever
+seen. Uraso was a powerful warrior, and Chum was also noted for his
+strength, but it seemed that the man now coming up must be a giant. Some
+of the immediate party rushed up to him, and after making a respectful
+bow, told him of the capture.
+
+He approached with dignity, and those around George moved away.
+
+Without a moment's hesitation George moved toward the Chief, and when
+ten feet away, he stopped, straightened himself erect, and with a most
+courtly bow smiled as he recovered his position.
+
+The strong and resolute manner in which this was done was really a cause
+for marvel in the savage. He looked at his people, and spoke a few
+words, and those who had been his guards came forward most
+deferentially, and, so far as George could understand, told of the
+circumstances surrounding his capture.
+
+But there was one thing which struck George as a peculiar thing. The
+three men who had participated in the loot of his valuables did not
+exhibit them while talking to the Chief.
+
+There was a long palaver, and many gestures indulged in. The question
+occurred to him: What had become of the articles which they had taken?
+Did they purposely hide them?
+
+At the close of the conversation two of the Chief's immediate associates
+came forward, and began to investigate his belongings. The first thing
+they brought out was the revolver, and at this George was almost on the
+point of breaking down. Then he grew bitter.
+
+The silver match box was the next to attract the attention of the
+searchers; and so they went through from one pocket to the other in the
+most approved style.
+
+These were laid before the Chief who grunted his approval at the
+different things, and his admiration, judging from the character of his
+remarks, was unbounded at the silver-plated revolver.
+
+From the curious way in which he handled it George was alarmed. It was
+an automatic, and if the Chief once pulled the trigger there would be
+trouble for some one. George held up a warning hand, and the Chief
+looked up from the weapon.
+
+The only thing he could do was to point to the revolver, and vigorously
+shake his head. The Chief looked around as though inquiring the meaning
+of such a sign. He was not interfered with as he walked up to the
+savage, and held out his hand. The Chief handed him the weapon.
+
+Then, picking up a leaf, he motioned to one near him to place it on the
+side of a tree. At a word from the Chief the man did so, but George
+motioned to him to carry it still further away. He took deliberate aim,
+and thanks to his long and regular practice, the leaf received the
+impress of the bullet, while the savages jumped in all directions at the
+report.
+
+Only the Chief remained impassive. He never moved, but when the leaf was
+brought to him, he looked on the youth with a kindly smile. George was
+quick to notice this. He again walked over to the Chief, and placed the
+weapon in his hand, and guided his finger to the trigger, while at the
+same time holding up his hand so as to sight it.
+
+This time the shot was directed to the nearest tree. The savages
+scurried to give them room. When the Chief pulled the trigger and the
+discharge followed, George caught him by the arm, and took him to the
+tree, pointing out the hole made by the bullet.
+
+There was a wondering look on the Chief's face. He looked at the weapon,
+and then at the hole. There was a question in the peculiar guttural
+sounds of his language, which slowly came from his lips. Evidently the
+Chief wanted to know something.
+
+Ah! he knew what it was. What made the hole? George took the weapon, and
+extracted one of the bullets, and then pointed to the hole in the tree.
+It was plain that even this did not satisfy him. Better still; why not
+dig out the bullet; and as he thought of it he instinctively reached in
+his pocket for the knife.
+
+Then he remembered. One of his captors had it. Without any ceremony he
+walked over to the man who had it, and by motions indicated that he
+wanted the knife. The savage was mute. He boldly searched the folds of
+the rude clout, and without a protest on the part of the savage he
+brought forth the coveted knife.
+
+This action was indeed a surprise to the Chief. A frown gathered on the
+Chief's face. George saw it, and really trembled for the first time, as
+he saw the eyes of the Giant riveted on the knife, and then turned to
+the culprit. The latter fell to the ground, and muttered something, and
+instantly the two others were also seized, as they uncovered the other
+belongings and laid them before the Chief.
+
+George looked on the scene with genuine regret. The culprits were led
+away, and he speculated on their fate. But the Chief's eyes immediately
+returned to the hole in the tree, while the gaze of the others rested on
+the cartridges, the watch and the field glasses. The knife was in
+George's hand, and he slowly opened it whereat the appearance of the
+blade startled the Chief. He was all eagerness now, so George closed the
+blade and opened it again, and then cut a circle around the bullet hole
+and chipped the wood away.
+
+There was the bullet, and he slowly drew it forth, a shapeless bit of
+lead. When he had deposited it in the Chief's hand, he laid one of the
+cartridges alongside, and also showed the empty shell. Then he quietly
+laid the closed knife in the Chief's hand and stood back with his arms
+folded, as though he owned the entire Island.
+
+If the action of the Chief counted for anything the boy did have
+everything in sight. The Chief returned the revolver to George, and then
+began to examine the articles before him. The most interesting appeared
+to be the cartridge belt. He looked at the revolver and cartridges, and
+then turned over the revolver bullet and shell which George had
+exhibited.
+
+It was now plain that the Chief could not understand the use of the
+large cartridges. George's mind was working by this time. He did not
+recall that the gun was in evidence at any time after they met the first
+crowd on the road.
+
+The Chief pointed to the cartridges, and George looked toward the group
+which had captured him. This was enough for the wily savage. A stern
+command was issued, and in an incredible short space of time the gun
+appeared. Where it could have been hidden was a marvel. Certainly these
+people must be adepts in the art of concealment.
+
+The Chief handled the gun in a most awkward fashion and George politely
+took it from his hand, and after glancing about for a moment, saw a bird
+on a branch. This he brought down, upon which one of the men ran
+forward, picked it up and brought it to the Chief. After this the weapon
+was turned over to him, and the peculiar chuckle that followed was,
+undoubtedly, the savage's way of expressing delight.
+
+One of the attendants then came forward at the order of the Chief, who,
+after the articles were gathered up, indicated to George that he should
+follow, and turned toward the village. George did not regard the
+prerogatives of royalty, but he took up a most democratic position by
+the side of the Chief, to which the latter did not object.
+
+It required nearly an hour before they reached the village. Women and
+children, and boys his own age were in evidence everywhere. They came
+out of the huts and followed the procession, on the way to the Chief's
+quarters.
+
+Singularly George did not now feel the slightest bit of fear. On the
+other hand, there was confidence, a sort of assurance that he could not
+express. This feeling came to him, not so much from the general demeanor
+of the Chief, as on account of the one act, namely, the return to him of
+the revolver.
+
+The Chief's home was an entirely different sort of affair from the other
+dwellings. It was noted that, the homes of the ordinary people were made
+singularly like those of the tribes on Wonder Island, usually of twigs
+braided and brought together at the upper end so as to form cone-like
+enclosures, and all were covered with clay, so as to keep out the rains.
+
+Outside of these houses appeared to be the sleeping quarters, and a
+glance at some of them impressed George as being exceedingly filthy. The
+houses were intended only for the rainy season, apparently, as was the
+custom in many places on their own island.
+
+But the Chief's dwelling was a most pretentious affair, judged by the
+surrounding homes. It had a large interior court, without a roof, but
+the immediate dwelling had four or more rooms. The Chief walked through
+one room, and entered the court, where George was embarrassed to see two
+girls, and several boys, together with three women, all of whom stared
+at him, the girls giggling exactly as he had seen them do at home.
+
+The articles taken from him were then deposited upon the floor, and the
+Chief reclined on a sort of raised couch. George glanced around and the
+first thing that his eyes met was a chair, in one corner of the room,
+and then some articles that he knew could not have been made on the
+island.
+
+This was his introduction to the home of the Chief. He then fell to
+wondering how it would be possible to talk and tell him about his
+friends.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+FIGHT OF THE NATIVES FOR THE TRINKETS
+
+
+Scouting in an unknown country, with assurances that foes may be in
+ambush at every turn, is not a rapid way of marching. Ordinarily, in the
+open road, a man will walk three or four miles an hour. But in a forest,
+where every tree may conceal a foe, it is quite different.
+
+Muro was an expert in scouting work. He had had years of experience in
+this sort of life, and, moreover, was a chief of one of the most
+powerful tribes on the island.
+
+He and his companion went directly east, in the most stealthy fashion,
+and, a half mile beyond they circled to the south, next swinging around
+to the north, so as to take in as wide a sweep as possible.
+
+Before dark they obtained the first real traces of the tramp of feet,
+and as it was now too late to enable them to follow up the trail they
+went back toward the scene of the capture, so that they might thus be
+able to follow the trail easily the next morning.
+
+It was very dark when they crept in and were halted by the sentries
+which John had posted. Harry was the first to greet Muro. "Have you
+found anything?"
+
+"Yes," answered Muro. "We know the direction they have gone. In the
+morning we can go on from the place where we discovered the trail."
+
+"How far is it from here?"
+
+"More than ten miles."
+
+The distance mentioned was in itself sufficient evidence that Muro had
+not wasted time.
+
+They spent the remaining hours of the evening awaiting further news and
+it was fully ten o'clock before the sentry to the south reported the
+probable approach of Uraso. Harry leaped out from the circle, and
+followed the sentry. It was, indeed, Uraso who had been reporter.
+
+"Tell me all about it," he requested, and Harry, with a voice full of
+pathos, told him how it happened. When he had finished, Uraso said:
+
+"I was told by my father that somewhere here in the seas was an island
+where were found most terrible people, who killed every one they
+captured. I hope this is not the place." And Uraso did not say this to
+excite Harry's fears, but, like many natives, he was frank, and open in
+his speech.
+
+"I hope there will be no trouble," was Harry's response.
+
+"We need not worry about George," added Uraso. "The way that he was
+taken shows that they are taking him to the Chief. A boy like George
+would be likely to interest the Chief, at first for a time, and time is
+all we want."
+
+"I am glad you have the same opinion as John," answered Harry.
+
+John, Muro and Uraso held a conference that night. As a result Harry was
+comforted to know and feel that George was safe, and that within a day
+or two at most, they would be able to come up with the tribe.
+
+The entire party now numbered thirty-five, all well armed. In the
+morning, as soon as it was light enough to see they were up, and after a
+quick breakfast Muro directed them along the trail made the night
+before, and the spot where Muro found the trace was reached about nine
+o'clock.
+
+John and his party now spread out so as to take in a wide expanse, and
+they marched toward the east for fully two hours. Sometimes all traces
+would be lost, and then there would be a halt and a search, and the
+native wit of the scouts was generally acute enough to recover the
+trail.
+
+During these periodical searches, one of the men bounded forward with a
+cry, as he held up a hand in which something was swinging.
+
+As usual Harry was there like a shot. "That is George's chain," he cried
+out.
+
+"Where did you find this?" asked John.
+
+The scout rushed over to the place, and all followed. The ground about
+plainly showed the evidences of the struggle where George's captors
+fought for the possession of the watch.
+
+The trail was beginning to get warm. It was readily followed for several
+miles, and then disappeared, but after patient hunting it came to light,
+and shortly after noon the spot was reached where the Chief came on the
+scene, and the appearance of the ground indicated that there must have
+been a large number in the party.
+
+Here was an occasion where one great quality of many savage tribes
+stands out so prominently, and that is in determining the number of
+their enemies by the foot prints. Hundreds of imprints on the soil,
+crossing and recrossing each other, will to the untrained seem a
+hopeless riddle.
+
+On one occasion on Wonder Island, John stated that one of a party they
+were trailing, was wounded in one of his legs. The explanation was
+simple: The pressure of the foot in the soil was less on the lame than
+on the sound leg, and the stride was uneven.
+
+But the scouts had to decipher the peculiar imprint of each foot, and
+then compare it with all the others, in turn.
+
+"I could tell the difference in the shape of a shoe from another," said
+Harry, "but I do not see how it is possible to tell one foot print from
+another."
+
+"How do you distinguish people?" asked John.
+
+"Well, usually, by their faces."
+
+"Quite true. Now feet are just as different as faces are. But there are
+other ways by which we recognize people."
+
+"Yes," was the response. "I can tell who many people are at distances so
+great that I cannot see their faces."
+
+"How do you do that?"
+
+"By the way they walk, by their size, or by some action that seems to be
+peculiar to them."
+
+"The observations are correct," answered John. "At the same time, if all
+the men you knew happened to be in a crowd, and moving around among each
+other, you would be able to recognize and place each without any
+difficulty; is not that true!"
+
+"Yes; and I think I understand the trend of your remark now."
+
+"And what is that?"
+
+"You mean to say that if the scouts are able to read, or to become
+acquainted with the foot prints, they can read them as readily as I
+would read the faces of my friends."
+
+"That is the exact inference I wish to draw."
+
+"Well, I want to see that done," and Harry followed up Uraso, and
+watched Muro, and the most intelligent of the scouts, while they
+carefully stepped over the ground, each being careful while doing so to
+step in the foot marks of the preceding scout.
+
+"That is a curious thing to do," he remarked, as he turned to John.
+
+"What is that?" the latter asked.
+
+"Stepping in the tracks made by the leader."
+
+"That is for the purpose of keeping the surface of the ground absolutely
+the same as the tribe left it."
+
+"Well the boys seem to understand detective work pretty well."
+
+All of them laughed at this complimentary allusion, as it must be
+understood that all the scouts taken from the island had learned to
+speak the English language, and some of them, like Uraso, were
+exceptionally skilled.
+
+When the different ones had gone over the ground thoroughly, John asked
+the opinion of the searchers.
+
+"From my count there must have been twenty-four," remarked Uraso.
+
+Muro smiled, as he said: "Uraso is mistaken, there are twenty-five."
+Uraso was not at all perturbed, but walked over to the surveyed plot and
+said: "The most prominent one is the fellow with the spreading toes.
+See! here is his left foot. See that broad foot is all around the place.
+This broad foot with a toe missing, is another fellow; and here are two
+with rather long feet, you can see them all about, and they are, no
+doubt, active fellows."
+
+"Well, that is picking them out plainly enough," remarked Harry.
+
+"But," continued Uraso, "I want you to look at this foot. It is the
+largest I ever saw."
+
+"I am satisfied that fellow is the Chief," remarked Muro.
+
+"There is evidence of that here too," said Uraso, as Muro nodded his
+head.
+
+Harry looked on in bewilderment. "Assuredly that is something new. How
+do you know _that_?" he asked.
+
+"The best indication is," said Uraso, "that the fellow with the big feet
+does very little walking, and all the other fellows have danced about
+him."
+
+Harry laughed, and was satisfied. "That was certainly clever," he
+remarked. "But why shouldn't they be clever. These boys are the finest
+and bravest in the world," and Uraso and Muro smiled and were happy at
+this encomium of the boy they all loved so much.
+
+"The last foot I have counted is that little sawed-off sample that has
+danced all around the edge; see it here, and here!"
+
+Muro walked forward, and, stooping down, pointed to the imprint of a
+shoe, said: "That is our boy's shoe."
+
+Uraso laughed, as he admitted neglecting George's presence in the crowd
+of prints. "But I have found something else. George has had an interview
+with the Chief. He has been making some explanations to the Chief about
+his revolver."
+
+John smiled, and kept his eye on a tree to the right.
+
+"And how do you know that?" asked Harry.
+
+Uraso walked over to the tree, after picking up something, and pointed
+to a cut-out in the side of the tree. It was the mark of the bullet, and
+the circular cut which George had made that John had observed, and which
+had been noticed by Uraso and Muro.
+
+"The scene here looks very promising to me," said John.
+
+"Yes, it is better and better," remarked Muro.
+
+"But you haven't told us yet, how you know that George was interviewing
+the Chief."
+
+"Come here and I will show you. Now look closely at the foot prints of
+George. Then observe the indications as to the attitude of the Chief.
+George goes up to the Chief. They turn around. Here is a shell. Beyond
+is the tree where they had the mark, and here are the tracks of the
+Chief and George as they go up to the tree."
+
+Harry was now convinced. It must be said, however, that many of the
+marks made were so illy-defined, that it required extraordinary vision
+to observe them, and this is what Harry marveled at.
+
+"What you say only proves the value of minute observation," remarked
+John. "Those who are not accustomed to see these things, can not detect
+what are very plain markings. Sometimes a slightly torn leaf, under
+certain conditions, will tell a story in itself,--just such a
+commonplace and ordinary thing as a ruptured leaf."
+
+The consensus of opinion was that there were fully twenty-five in the
+party counting George, and it is remarkable that when the matter was
+afterwards investigated it was found that Uraso's count was right.
+
+There were six in the party which took George, twelve who surrounded the
+party before the Chief arrived, and five more were with him when he came
+up.
+
+Another consultation was held. John remarked: "I am of the opinion that
+the people who have captured George are not at all bad, or vindictive.
+Therefore we must exercise care and not needlessly injure any of them. I
+need not say that it is our purpose here to aid the people, to make
+friends of them, and not enemies."
+
+"That is in accordance with our wish," said Uraso, with the approval of
+all present.
+
+"It is perfectly evident that these people, in taking George, did what
+most people in a savage condition would do. The great and overshadowing
+trait in humanity is to acquire something. It is just possible that the
+cartridge belt, or the field glasses, or the buttons on his coat were of
+more importance to them than George himself."
+
+"Then you mean they had to get George to get the buttons," said Harry,
+laughing in his relief.
+
+"Of course," answered John, and Muro laughed aloud, as he recalled his
+first experiences with the boys.
+
+"John has hit upon the very thing which is at the bottom of the whole
+business. All we wanted was to get the trinket, and the prisoner
+belonged to the Chief."
+
+"Or to the Krishnos," remarked Muro.
+
+"Well we might as well go on if we can find the trail," remarked John.
+
+"Yes, it is plain enough now," answered one of them.
+
+"But let us exercise caution," remarked John. "Move along slowly and
+keep a sharp lookout on our flanks."
+
+Harry was walking by the side of Uraso. There had always been a warm
+friendship between the two. Lolo, Uraso's favorite son, was Harry's age,
+and the two were companions, and this was a source of great joy to the
+Chief, for Uraso was the head man of the Osagas, and one of the most
+progressive of all the prominent men.
+
+Harry was dangling the chain which had been found in the morning. "I
+have been wondering why he dropped this!" he asked.
+
+"I have an idea that it was lost in the fight for the possession of the
+watch."
+
+"The fight? Why did they have a fight?"
+
+"Well, the ground where the chain was found looked very much like it."
+
+"I don't see why the fellows don't agree to divide up things properly
+when they get them, instead of scrambling for them in that way!"
+
+"You can see it is perfectly natural for them to fight for it under the
+circumstances. They do not understand anything but power."
+
+"I should think the loser would be resentful, and try to even it up on
+the other fellow," remarked Harry.
+
+"On the other hand, the moment the stronger fellow wins, that is the end
+of the dispute. The best one won. In his creed there is no other
+argument. That is the savage's religion. You people have told us
+differently. The Professor has often said: 'There is only this
+difference between us, with you, might is right; with us right is
+might.'"
+
+"Well, what do you really think about it now?" asked Harry.
+
+Uraso did not smile, as he remarked somewhat sadly: "It took me a long
+time to understand that. How could right be might? At first it looked
+foolish, and Muro and I talked it over many times. Then Oma, and Tastoa
+and Oroto, the other Chiefs, spoke to me about it. But while I did not
+understand it I had faith in the Professor.
+
+"Then we went to Unity, and built the town, and the people began to go
+there, and when we saw the Professor, and the way he treated every one,
+never doing a wrong to anybody, we could not believe that he was sane.
+But everywhere we went we heard people talking about him, and the way he
+acted, and we saw all the white people do the same as the Professor did,
+we noticed that no one would dare say a word against the Professor, or
+John.
+
+"We marveled at that. The Professor went out among the people of all the
+tribes, and never carried a weapon of any kind. But no one would have
+dared to injure him. If a man had even attempted to injure him the
+people would have torn him to pieces. Then I understood. Right was and
+is _Might_, but it takes a savage a long time to understand it, and he
+must learn it from something practical that comes to him in every day
+life; he will never know it in any other way."
+
+Harry walked on in silence.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE GIANT CHIEF AND HIS "PALACE"
+
+
+We must now return to George and see how he fared during the first night
+of his captivity. After the Chief had seated himself, and had begun to
+examine the articles taken from George, the latter had an opportunity to
+examine the surroundings more closely.
+
+The Chief made no remarks to him, nor did he ask him to be seated. At
+the moment he entered the room he noticed the chair. As the Chief did
+not pay any attention to him after they entered, George walked over and
+deliberately sat down on it.
+
+The two attendants who carried in the articles, stared at him, and the
+women and children, particularly the latter, seemed to be paralyzed at
+his attitude seated in the chair. It was covered with dust, an evidence
+that it was never used for the purposes of a seat. On reflection, he
+thought that must be the reason they looked at him so queerly.
+
+The Chief, however, gave no indication that his act was a rude or
+questionable one. He tried on the cartridge belt, but it was far too
+short for his corpulent body, and George could hardly repress a laugh,
+as he noticed the attempt to adjust it.
+
+The field glasses came in for a share of attention, then the silver
+match box, and the women craned their heads forward, as it glittered.
+The Chief held it off from his eyes, so he could properly view it; just
+as George had often seen women do in trying to match articles.
+
+All the while the Chief was emitting grunts betokening pleasure and
+satisfaction. The adjusting screw on the field glass next attracted his
+attention. The turning moved the barrels in and out, and this was, in
+all probability, the most remarkable thing he ever saw.
+
+George could stand it no longer. He left his seat, the younger children
+shrinking back as he arose, and quietly walked to the Chief, and sat
+down in front of him. As he did so he pointed to the match safe which
+the Chief held in his left hand.
+
+The latter did not resist the attempt to take it, but looked on
+wonderingly as George pressed the point, and the lid flew open. Then,
+taking one of the matches from the receptacle, he held the box in one
+hand, exhibited the match in the other, for a moment, and then drew the
+match across the box, and ignited it.
+
+The Chief actually drew in a breath that was audible everywhere in that
+neighborhood. He nodded with approval. Harry closed the box and handed
+it back; he then directed the Chief's attention to the little point, and
+pressed it, when the lid again flew open.
+
+This time the Chief closed it, and he pressed the point. The success of
+the experiment was so great that he eventually called his wife to
+witness it, for she came over, while he performed the miraculous thing.
+
+He took out a match. Its use was just as great a mystery. He was taught
+just what to do, and the primitive man sat there and struck the matches,
+one after the other, in the greatest delight. What amused George more
+than anything else was, that every time a match was struck, he closed
+the box, and then opened it before extracting another.
+
+George noted the imitative quality so marked in all savages. It did not,
+apparently, occur to him that he could strike two matches without the
+lid flying open in the period intervening the two operations.
+
+It was now growing dark, and soon an attendant came in with several
+curiously-arranged lights, made from some sort of weed or vegetation,
+the smoke of which appeared to be most agreeable. From an adjoining
+room, an appetizing odor reached George and, staring in that direction,
+the Chief noticed the boy's expectant attitude.
+
+The Chief arose, his mighty frame towering above the rest, and a command
+was given. Almost immediately two servitors came through the opening,
+one of them carrying a large bowl of the most savory stew. The bowl was
+not of native manufacture, and George, observing this, suddenly
+remembered what John had said, that the Chief was always sure to get the
+best and most valuable parts of the wreckages along the shore, and he
+felt sure that this was salvage from some shipwreck.
+
+The Chief smiled, as the bowl was set before him. It was smoking hot,
+and George smiled back as he noticed the friendly look, and saw that the
+Chief's wife graciously arranged the accompanying vegetables, although
+he had no idea what the latter were.
+
+A second attendant brought pointed sticks, and two paddle-shaped blades.
+The Chief without ceremony dived into the mess and speared a piece of
+the meat, and waved it to and fro, to cool it. Here was an opportunity
+to follow the example thus set, and George was glad to take the hint.
+
+He didn't look around to inquire for a plate, nor did he ask for a
+napkin. The meat was good, the vegetables appetizing, and the
+conversation lagged so much that there was no chance for unseasonable
+interruptions during the meal.
+
+If George had never before that hour witnessed a savage eat, he would
+have been mortified at the small amount he himself was capable of
+putting away, when he compared the relative amounts consumed. He was of
+the opinion, before they began, that the bowl was intended for the whole
+family, but the Chief ate all of it, except the small part that George
+disposed of in the meantime.
+
+But he was perfectly content. He ate until he could eat no more, and
+then to his extreme disgust, a wooden platter of fruit was set before
+them. Bananas were the only things he recognized. A small pear-shaped
+fruit attracted him, and then an egg-shaped, brown-colored fruit, with a
+sweet, strong perfume, was among the varieties.
+
+The Chief was graciousness itself, exhibiting not one trait of
+selfishness, as he forced the fruit on George. When the Chief had
+finished the fruit George was relieved, but uncomfortable. He had eaten
+beyond his capacity. The articles containing the food were removed, and
+the Chief, who, during this time, was in a reclining position, slowly
+sank down, and was soon asleep.
+
+The family sat around for a time, and then all slowly disappeared and he
+could hear the jumble of voices in the adjoining apartment, as they were
+undoubtedly engaged in their meal.
+
+What a peculiar position to be placed in. Alone with the sleeping
+savage! Still, he did not seem to be so very savage. There was no one in
+sight. He arose and walked toward the opening. Not even a guard
+prevented him from leaving.
+
+He stepped out. He still had his revolver, but that was all. Now was the
+time to effect his escape. He turned the corner of the main structure,
+and there stood one of the Chief's girls, the one who had attracted
+George's attention when he was first ushered into the palace, as George
+named the place in his mind.
+
+As this girl will have an important place in reciting this history, it
+may be well to describe her. She was about the height of George, with a
+much lighter skin than the majority of those whom he had seen thus far.
+Her eyes were large and beautiful, and while her hair, intensely black
+and very profuse, was not at all kinky. It should be said that the
+savages on the island, like those on Wonder Island, while dark, did not
+have curly hair of the Ethiopian, so that they were not of the negroid
+type but more nearly allied to the Malay family.
+
+She smiled, and George, abashed for the moment, went up to her, and she
+did not at all shrink from him. Now that he had made the advance he was
+at a loss what to do. The only thing that both perfectly understood, was
+to smile, and smile they did.
+
+But why not say something. He tried it, and those great eyes appeared to
+open still wider. George turned and waved his hand, and affrighted,
+apparently, she darted into the side entrance. The darkness prevented
+him from seeing what was there, and he dared not enter. The moon was
+shining brightly.
+
+The desire to escape again took possession of him. But why try to
+escape? He felt sure the Chief meant no harm, and then he wandered to
+the other side of the building, and there lay the great ocean, the shore
+of which was not a thousand feet away.
+
+He sat down on a log, and pondered and, feeling fatigued from the
+unusual efforts of the day, he lay down for a nap. How long he remained
+there it was impossible to tell, for when he awoke, he found himself by
+the side of the trunk, and near him two of the body guard who
+accompanied the Chief the day before.
+
+He sat up, rubbed his eyes, arose, and without any suggestion or command
+on the part of the watchers, marched back to the Chief's palace, and
+entered the room to see the latter awake and reclining at his place on
+the floor.
+
+He offered a salutation to George, and the latter smiled and bowed
+graciously. One of the attendants touched him on the arm, and he was led
+to a room, adjoining the court; but there was no door, by means of which
+he could close the room, nor did he discover a window, or anything
+suggesting an opening at the other side of the apartment.
+
+A delightful odor came from some kind of grass which was piled in one
+corner. He examined it, and concluded that it had been placed there for
+his particular benefit. This was indeed a thoughtful thing on the
+Chief's part. They were making a home for him, that was evident.
+
+But he was too tired to reflect long on these things. Without removing
+his clothes he threw himself down on the sweet, clean grass, and he knew
+no more until, when the morning sun flooded the court, he could peer
+out, and see the family moving to and fro, but the Chief was nowhere in
+sight.
+
+While they had not ventured to tell him what was just the correct thing
+to do, he walked out, and then wandered to the open portal at the front.
+No one seemed to heed him. He walked down toward the ocean, and saw some
+women carrying water in curiously-shaped gourds.
+
+He followed the path, which led to a spring; delicious, cool and
+refreshing. Then he bathed his face, and washed his hands. But he missed
+the soap. He had not, however, forgotten the early days on Wonder
+Island, when the Professor found the soap tree.
+
+He glanced around. There, sure enough, was the identical bush, and
+breaking off several twigs, the small branches were crushed up together
+with the leaves, and with these he returned to the brook and had a good
+soap wash.
+
+This peculiar action was witnessed by some of the women, and the tale
+was quickly told, and became current in the village. When George visited
+the same spot, the bush had entirely disappeared.
+
+The Chief had not returned when he went back, but his breakfast was
+ready, and the maiden with the great round eyes, and the mother,
+evidently, waited on him.
+
+George looked toward the Chief's place. She understood, and pointed to
+the west. He mused awhile. What could she mean! It must not be supposed
+that during all this time George was not thinking of Harry, and John,
+and the boys who came over with them on this trip.
+
+They always called each other "boys." All the natives on Wonder Island
+were boys to them, and it was amusing to hear them say the word in
+return. They were all boys, Uraso, and Muro, as well; all but the
+Professor, John and Blakely.
+
+When George went out after breakfast he was surprised to note the
+absence of the men. No one but women and children were about. Then the
+truth flashed on him. The Chief had gone out, on hearing of the approach
+of John and his party.
+
+He rushed out toward the western path that led from the village, and he
+had not gone three hundred yards before the men, all armed with spears,
+came back, with the Chief at their head. All were in consternation.
+
+George knew what this meant now. He held up his hand as they hurriedly
+moved toward him, and pointed to the west. He did this smiling to assure
+him of the friendly character of the visit. The Chief stopped. George
+moved through the group and beckoned the Chief to follow.
+
+He hesitated but a moment, and then gave the necessary command. Coming
+through the forest beyond were John and the "Boys." When they were still
+too far for hailing distance George raised his hat and waved it.
+
+When John and his party were still a hundred yards away, they stopped at
+the unusual sight. Meanwhile George and the Chief moved on. Harry could
+not restrain himself, and broke from the party, in his mad rush to
+welcome George.
+
+"Bow, Harry; bow; he is a dandy Chief."
+
+Harry obediently made a gracious bow, and the Chief acknowledged the
+salute.
+
+All that Harry could say, was: "Oh, George!"
+
+John and the company came up, and George rushed to John, as he said: "I
+have had the nicest time in the world, but I am afraid the Chief does
+not know whether you are friends or enemies."
+
+John turned to the men, and quietly said: "This man is a friend, and we
+must treat him as a Chief. All give him a respectful greeting." The
+Chief stood still, as all the warriors ranged themselves in front and
+all bowed low, to the obvious relief of the savage.
+
+Then John brought Uraso and Muro forward, and by well timed gestures
+indicated to the Chief that they were also Chiefs, and he instantly
+showed that he recognized the pantomimic language, and deferentially
+bowed, as he had seen George do.
+
+Uraso stepped forward and went up to the burly form, and pressed his
+nose against his nose. Then, he spoke a few words. The Chief looked at
+him for a moment, and then answered. Muro was not slow to follow the
+example, and he also addressed the Chief.
+
+When Uraso turned and took John's hand and in a dialect, which both
+seemed to understand, he told about John and the boys, the Chief turned
+to his men and said a dozen words, which were instantly recognized by
+Uraso and Muro. They smiled.
+
+"What did he say?" asked George.
+
+"He told them to go to the village and prepare food."
+
+All but a half dozen of the immediate followers of the Chief turned and
+darted back to the village.
+
+"Do you know the Chief's language?" asked Harry, as Uraso gave way to
+Muro.
+
+"We can understand each other pretty well. There are many words which
+are the same, but he uses some which are new to me."
+
+"Do you suppose they are the same people as are on our island?"
+
+"I do not know that. We have heard that all the people in the different
+islands came from the same place, but where we do not know."
+
+Then the boys crowded around George, and insisted on having him tell his
+story. Did you ever hear a boy tell a thrilling story of his own
+adventures? Well George was in his heaven of delight as he told of his
+treatment, and how he had dined with the Chief, and slept in his palace.
+
+"His palace?" queried Harry.
+
+"Yes, palace! It isn't a common house!" And George dilated on it to such
+an extent that Harry actually grew envious at the big time that George
+had at their expense.
+
+The party wended its way down the hill, and when the village was reached
+the sight there astounded George. He had left it a sleepy place. Now all
+was bustle. Fires were being built; the men and women were busy
+preparing food. A species of hog, well known on Wonder Island, was being
+prepared and spitted, and hung over the heated coals.
+
+They saw the favorite native vegetable, the Taro root, and also, to
+their surprise, an abundance of Uraso's poison bulb, the Amarylla, which
+he had tried to prepare in stealth after he had been captured, and the
+telling of which was the occasion of many jokes at the expense of George
+and Harry.
+
+John, the two boys, together with Uraso and Muro, were ushered into the
+Chief's house.
+
+"And this is what you call a 'palace'?" remarked Harry.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"From your description I thought it might be on top of a big hill with
+graded steps leading up between rows of flowers, and the rooms filled
+with statuary, with a large fountain playing in the center of a fine
+banquet hall."
+
+George laughed at the joke. "The trouble with you is that you are not a
+philosopher, Harry. If you had been as well treated as I have been you
+would think the same as I do."
+
+John overheard the conversation, and remarked: "I must say that there is
+more philosophy in that view than even you, George, appreciate."
+
+"Have I said anything unusual?" he asked with a sort of mock gravity.
+
+"Quite so; have you ever heard the saying 'Handsome is, as handsome
+does'? Well, that is the root of all true actions in life. From the
+noble manner in which this Chief treated George, giving him the best
+that he had, and installing him in the finest room in the house, is
+doing all that any one can do."
+
+"That is the way I really felt about it at the time. I was tired and
+hungry, and instead of meeting an enemy, I met a friend."
+
+"Do you see, Harry? George did right in calling this a palace. If it so
+appears in his heart, and he feels that impulse, isn't that just as real
+as though you see it with your eyes?"
+
+"I didn't think of it in that way," said Harry, apologetically. "I like
+the old fellow. He is good enough to be a white man."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+PECULIARITIES OF THE NATIVE TRIBE
+
+
+Within an hour the feast was ready, and the men in the open were already
+making merry with the maidens who prepared the meal. George and Harry
+frequently nudged each other, as they caught the eyes of some of the
+native boys who were very attentive to the gentler sex.
+
+Within the Chief's dwelling there was the most animated conversation
+indulged in by the Chief, Uraso and John, and to this number were added
+the Chief's brother, and a handsome man who was probably one of the
+Chief's principal advisors. Muro and Uraso were the interpreters.
+
+The latter, by turns, told the Chief where they sailed from, and what
+their history had been for the past three years. They told about the
+wonderful Professor, and all concerning John, and what part the two boys
+had taken in the transformation of the island.
+
+"But where is this wonderful ship?" asked the Chief.
+
+"On the other side of the island," answered Uraso.
+
+"Then why do you not bring it here?"
+
+"We should have done so, but we did not know we had a friend here."
+
+"I want to see the wonderful place you have told me about,--your home,
+and how you make people happy," said the Chief.
+
+John's face lit up when this was interpreted to him.
+
+"What do your people work at?" the Chief abruptly asked Muro.
+
+"We make many curious things, like the articles you have here," and he
+pointed to George's belongings, which were still lying about.
+
+The Chief hurriedly gathered them up and handed them to George. The
+latter, after turning to John, refused to take them, and addressing
+Uraso, said: "Tell him that I want him to take them, and my gun, as
+well."
+
+The Chief could not understand this, and at first refused, but John, as
+well as Uraso, insisted, and the latter said:
+
+"These boys can make these things, and they do not feel that they are
+sacrificing anything, beyond what it is their duty to do."
+
+The Chief looked doubtfully at the boys, as he remarked: "Do you tell me
+that these _memees_, (Boys) made these things?"
+
+Uraso and Muro both assured them that such was the case, and added: "And
+still more wonderful things."
+
+After some conversation Uraso turned to John and said: "The Chief wishes
+to send a runner to bring the ship to the harbor here. Hasmo may
+accompany him."
+
+This arrangement had John's approval, and when Hasmo was advised of the
+mission, he jumped up with delight, and, together with the Chief's
+fleetest messenger, speeded off to make the intervening twenty-five
+miles.
+
+It was not much of a task for the two men. In less than four hours,
+Sutoto saw two men on the shore, one of them waving a signal that he
+understood. A boat was put off, and when the runners came aboard, and
+the news imparted, all on board sprang to their places, the anchor was
+hurriedly taken up, and the _Pioneer_ soon rounded the point, while they
+all eagerly scanned the shore.
+
+The Chief and his visitors remained in the "palace" for three hours,
+while the latter told and retold the stories which so much interested
+the chieftain. Then John began to question him upon matters that more
+nearly concerned their visit.
+
+"Ask him," he said, "if they have any Krishnos here?"
+
+"He does not know what they are," answered Muro.
+
+"Does he believe in a Great Spirit?"
+
+"No he has never heard anything of that kind."
+
+"Ask him if he knows who makes the rain and the sunshine, and the
+clouds."
+
+"He says that the questions are surprising to him."
+
+"Has he never thought of those things?"
+
+"No; all he knows is that he lives and that he is a Chief and is the one
+who must govern the people."
+
+"Does he know why he is the Chief?"
+
+"Yes; because he is stronger than any one else."
+
+"That would certainly make him a Chief," remarked Harry. "I never saw
+such a big man."
+
+"Do they have any big holes in the ground!"
+
+When the question was asked he waited a moment, and then slowly shook
+his head.
+
+"They have nothing of that kind to his knowledge."
+
+The countenances of Harry and George fell. John noticed it, and smiled
+at the disappointment.
+
+"There are no caves around here," said George.
+
+"Are there any mountains on the island?"
+
+"There are high hills."
+
+"Have they any neighbors, or different tribes?"
+
+"Yes; to the north, (pointing in that direction) are some bad people,
+but they belong to him."
+
+"Why do they not live near to the village!"
+
+"Because they would make the people bad."
+
+"What did they do that was so bad?"
+
+"They stole and lied."
+
+"From whom did they steal?"
+
+"From the Chief."
+
+"Did they steal from each other?"
+
+"No; they could not steal from each other."
+
+At this remark the boys laughed. John began to be interested now in his
+questionings.
+
+"Do you mean it is not wrong to steal from each other, but only from the
+Chief?"
+
+He nodded an assent. This was a curious bit of reasoning. It needed
+some explanation. John continued:
+
+"Why is it wrong to steal from the Chief and not from each other?"
+
+At this question the Chief did not answer as promptly as usual. He
+weighed the question in his mind. He smiled as though to say: How can it
+be wrong for people to take things from each other? They do not own
+anything. No one but the Chief owns things.
+
+His answer, when finally given, was not at all clear, at least so the
+boys thought.
+
+"The Chief in his wisdom gives to all alike; and when he gives it the
+property still belongs to him and not the people; but if they take it
+from the Chief then they are robbers."
+
+"Ask him," said John, "whether, if when he gives anything to one of his
+people, and it still belongs to him, after he gives it, why it is not
+stealing from him, if some one takes it away from the one he gave it
+to?"
+
+The Chief was not at all taken aback at this question. Pointing to the
+sun, he said:
+
+"That is a great Chief. He gives seed to the people, and they plant it.
+But the great Chief does not forget it. The seed comes up to see its
+father. It still belongs to him. When he gives that seed to the people
+it is for their use. Every one has a right to take it and use it, and it
+is no crime. But if he takes it away from the Chief, he destroys what
+belongs to him, and he then does a wrong which must be punished."
+
+"This may not be very clear to you," said John, "but it means that
+whoever takes it away and destroys it wilfully, is guilty of a crime.
+Whatever the Great Chief gives willingly, like the fruits of the earth,
+is intended for all alike, and men should not be called criminals for
+taking what they need, if they do not wilfully destroy it."
+
+"That is a wonderful idea, when I come to think of it," remarked George.
+"And to think that a savage could work that out in his mind."
+
+"But there is one thing that looks a little queer to me. He said he did
+not know or believe in a Great Spirit, and yet he talks of the sun as a
+Great Spirit," remarked Harry.
+
+"I will put the question to him," said John. "You said that you did not
+believe in a Great Spirit, but now you speak about the sun as a Great
+Chief. Do you not believe in him?"
+
+"No; I only know that he is there; I do not believe in him any more than
+in the carago (moon)."
+
+A great noise was heard outside; the Chief looked up, as an attendant
+entered. He spoke to Uraso, and the latter turned to John and said:
+
+"Our ship is coming."
+
+This announcement broke up the interview. It was exciting and
+interesting from first to last, and when they emerged from the dwelling
+the host and visitors were friends that the future never could sever. It
+gave a new inspiration to the boys, and it showed them that even a low
+state of man was capable of expressing things that were worthy of
+consideration.
+
+The entire village went to the seashore. The inhabitants wondered at the
+great vessel, and were impressed at the manner in which it was handled.
+
+"I am anxious to see the man who can row such a vessel," said the Chief.
+
+"He is one of the men from our island," answered Muro.
+
+This seemed to be an astonishing thing to him. He had seen vessels
+before, but in the distance. At long intervals parts of ships had come
+ashore; but this was the first time that a vessel had ever landed,
+within his recollection.
+
+As it drew near he marveled at its size. He could see the man at the
+bow-sprit who was constantly throwing something attached to a line
+overboard, and then drawing it in again.
+
+He questioned the reason for such a strange action, and was told that
+the man was trying the depth of the water, so that they might not come
+too close to the shore, and strike the bottom. Then some of the sailors
+dropped something overboard, with a great splash, and a huge sail fell
+down like magic, and the ship still moved toward the shore and turned
+around.
+
+The Chief was inquisitive concerning every action. Why did the ship act
+like a human and turn around? He could hardly believe the statement when
+told that the anchor was a giant claw, and that when it reached the
+bottom it took hold and had sufficient strength to stop the ship and
+make it swing around, as he had witnessed.
+
+A boat was lowered, and the last one to descend was Sutoto. Uraso
+pointed out his figure, and the Chief kept his eyes on him. The first
+man to leave the boat was Sutoto, and both boys rushed down to meet him.
+It was the course they always pursued, to be in the lead to welcome
+anyone.
+
+They led him to the Chief, and he put his great arms about Sutoto, to
+the latter's great embarrassment. But what affected Sutoto more than
+anything else, were the eyes of the Chief's daughter, who had acted so
+shyly to George the night before. From that moment Sutoto saw no one
+else, and she,--well, Harry and George laughed, and slyly caressed
+Sutoto, as they saw her admiring glances.
+
+Sutoto was the handsomest native on Wonder Island. He was the brave and
+fleet runner who undertook the mission to pass through the three savage
+tribes to carry a message, written on a plaintain leaf by the Professor,
+to John and the boys while they were surrounded by the hostiles.
+
+The friendship between him and the boys grew stronger and better from
+that day on. The tribute to him was one which the boys enjoyed for his
+sake, and because he deserved it.
+
+There was a feast that night, unparalleled in the knowledge of the boys.
+It was like going to a new world, and meeting new people. Only one
+little thing seemed to mar the joyous occasion for the boys for a time.
+When they were returning from the beach, they saw three of the natives,
+together with their wives and children, with their hands bound, and in
+charge of a half dozen warriors.
+
+George recognized the three as his captors. Then was impressed upon him
+the fact that they were about to pay the penalty for stealing his things
+and hiding the theft from the Chief. They were to be exiled to the place
+where the bad people lived.
+
+George hurriedly told Uraso the story of the theft, and begged him to
+intercede with the Chief. Instantly, when he learned that George
+requested it, he turned to Uraso, and said: "He may release them."
+
+He rushed up to the now bewildered culprits, in order to sever the
+bonds, and then recalling that he had given his knife to the Chief, he
+called to Harry, and together they freed the limbs of the captives and
+the Chief, with a few words of admonition, dismissed them. The boys
+never forgot the grateful looks that came from the men and their wives.
+
+When they had departed Muro said: "Under their law the women and
+children of the culprits are criminals also, and so they were doomed to
+go together."
+
+It would be a difficult matter to describe the food prepared and eaten
+at this banquet. Several varieties of fowl, all wild types, and the wild
+boar, as well as the 'possum, provided the meats. Of course taro and
+amarylla were the chief vegetables; and of nuts, the well known Brazil
+species was found everywhere, and to be seen in all dwellings.
+
+The outer portion of the shell of the Brazil nut formed bowls and cups,
+which the boys early learned to utilize. There were bananas, a species
+of fig, and loquats.
+
+"What surprises me is that they have no fish, or sea food of any kind,"
+observed Harry.
+
+John mused for a while, and then said: "It is likely that the people
+here have the same aversion to fish as some natives along the Australian
+continent, and in the islands near there."
+
+"What is that?" asked George.
+
+"The natives of New Guinea, for instance, worship snakes, lizards,
+sharks and crocodiles, and there is a strict law among them not to
+injure anything, of that kind. As a result, they are afraid to eat
+anything that approaches the shape of these animals."
+
+"Well, if they worship the snakes they must have some kind of religion,"
+ventured Harry.
+
+"Yes; and with them go the witch doctors who practice on the people and
+charge fees just the same as the physicians do in our country."
+
+"Do they claim there is a Great Spirit, like some of the people here!"
+
+"No; they have a God called Baigona, who lives in the mountains, and
+instead of being a good God, is a bad one; he has the power to speak
+without being heard, to strike without being seen, and he loves and
+hates, just like human beings. He gives the witch doctor the power to do
+anything, without being wrong, and without being liable to punishment."
+
+"Well, that is a pretty convenient God to have," said Harry, as he mused
+at the idea.
+
+The peculiar thing about the absence of sea food at the banquet could
+not be understood, particularly as the natives on Wonder Island were
+great fish eaters, and were also the bitter enemies of snakes.
+
+"We must consult the Chief about that," said John.
+
+At the first opportunity the subject was brought up, and it was
+discovered that the people were afraid to eat anything that came from
+the sea. And then another thing was learned. There were no rivers of any
+consequence on the island; only a few streams, that were dry most of the
+year.
+
+"I can understand," said John, "that in such a case you do not have
+fresh water fish."
+
+The Chief was, in many respects, a remarkable character. Most natives
+are extremely superstitious, and it is particularly true of those who
+have a belief in some form of God. While he would marvel at new things
+they did not occur to him as being the result of some new occult force.
+
+In this respect he differed from the natives of Wonder Island, all of
+whom believed, more or less, in the tales of the Medicine Men, and of
+the witch doctors. Old Suros, of the Berees tribe, was the only one who
+did not believe in the existence of a being who could rule him.
+
+But the Chief had other qualities which were remarkable in a savage, if
+such he was. He governed according to some law, and yet he did not know
+what law was. The only thing in that community was the will of that one
+man.
+
+If he said something, in adjusting any matter, it was always remembered
+by the people, and that ruling became a guide for them in the future.
+Take, for instance, the theft of the articles from George. The three who
+participated in it, knew that it was not wrong, according to the light
+they had, to take it from George.
+
+Indeed, the Chief had distinctly said that they could not steal from
+each other, but only from him, hence the theft of the articles which
+George owned was not a crime. On what ground, then, were they guilty?
+
+George thought he had solved the problem, when discussing the matter
+with John. "The Chief found them guilty of trying to hide what they had
+done, and they were caught at it."
+
+"But the Chief was not covetous. He admitted he did not care for the
+things, and one of the men told Muro that the Chief never took things
+from his people without paying for them."
+
+"Well, then, he punished them for trying to deceive him."
+
+"There, that is one of the crimes which the Chief referred to. I think
+he is a wonderful character, and I hope we shall be able to unite him
+with us."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+SUTOTO AND THE CHIEF'S DAUGHTER
+
+
+It was plain that Sutoto was not the same being. During the three days
+they remained at the port, and formed the exploring expeditions into the
+interior, with the co-operation of the Chief, Sutoto did not take a
+part.
+
+He begged to be allowed to remain near the ship. That was a sly
+suggestion which John understood. Even though he might have been blind
+he would have known the true reason, for the boys were continuously
+joking Sutoto all of which he took good-naturedly, and John often burst
+out in fits of laughter, as he witnessed Sutoto's discomfiture.
+
+The Chief's name was Beralsee, and the big-eyed maiden was known as
+Cinda, the meaning of which was, as explained by Beralsee, the Beautiful
+Star. The Chief had four other children, one a man of twenty-one, and
+the others younger than Cinda.
+
+The eldest, Calmo, was tall and lithe, like Sutoto. Like his father he
+was original in his ways, and to him the Chief entrusted the care of the
+expeditions which were made at the suggestion of John. The latter
+explained that they had seen the wonderful products growing on the
+island, coffee, cocoa, spices, and particularly the various fibres.
+
+The recital of the tales, of how the white man used these things to
+make the various needed articles, and how the great ships were employed
+to carry the goods to and fro, and how the different things were
+exchanged, interested him.
+
+Many of the subjects were not within his comprehension. Why were all
+these things done? What was the object of having so many products?
+
+John told him that when men had everything they really needed to keep
+them alive and in comfort, they still wanted something more, and those
+things were called luxuries; then, after they and their children used
+these luxuries for a while, they found them to be absolutely essential
+and they then became necessaries. In that way men learned the use of so
+many, many things, that the whole world was being searched to find
+products which would serve to make the needed things.
+
+"Do you mean," said the Chief, "that your people are trying to find
+things they do not need, so they can buy them, and try to make some use
+of them?"
+
+John could not help but smile at the acuteness of the question. "That,
+in effect, is just what they do. It is not so considered, however, by
+our people. It is difficult to say just where necessity ends and luxury
+begins. But each year, yes every month, new things are brought out, and
+people begin to buy them, because the traders and the people who sell
+are shrewd and know how to cultivate taste and the desire for new and
+startling things."
+
+"But how do the people get the articles to exchange for these things?"
+
+"The people do not accumulate articles to buy other articles with.
+Instead, they work to get money, and with this money they buy the
+things."
+
+"I do not know what you mean by that. What is 'money'?"
+
+"It is an article which tells what everything else is worth."
+
+"Then it must be wonderful. I would like to see that remarkable thing
+which can tell what everything else is worth."
+
+John took some of the coins from his pocket. "Here is some of it, which
+we use on Wonder Island."
+
+The Chief smiled. He held them in his hand. He knew the meaning of the
+hole in the center. They were intended, as he thought, to be threaded on
+a string, and used as an ornament.
+
+They fascinated him. He had never seen anything so attractive. He looked
+at John, while he thought, but did not speak. Then John said: "This is
+worth one cent, and this larger one five cents."
+
+He compared the two. Finally, he said: "What makes this worth so much
+more than the other, and why are they worth anything?"
+
+"Because there is so much metal,--so much copper, in each."
+
+"But copper is of no use. I cannot eat it, and it will not clothe me."
+
+"No, but if you have this money then you can get the clothes, and the
+size of them will tell just how much clothing you can get."
+
+"I do not understand it. Where can I go and get clothing with these
+round pieces!"
+
+"You must go where the clothing is, or the goods must be brought to
+you."
+
+"Well, if we are here, at a place where there should be no clothing, or
+no food, this _money_, as you call it, would not enable me to clothe or
+feed myself?"
+
+"Assuredly not."
+
+"Then it has no value?"
+
+"No; it merely measures the value of something which I can eat or wear,
+or use."
+
+"Then why not use a taro root, or a fowl, or wisps of fibre?"
+
+"That would be all right, if we could have a common understanding
+between us of how much a taro bulb was worth by the side of a bundle of
+fibre, and how large the bundle should be to exchange fairly with an
+armful of Amarylla tubers."
+
+On the third day the boys, together with John, a party of the boys, and
+three natives under the lead of Calmo, started for the northern end of
+the island. John had now learned that the island was entirely unlike the
+Wonder Island formation.
+
+The latter was fairly circular in form, whereas the one they were now
+about to explore was narrow and long. That part of the southern portion
+which they had carefully examined, in order to learn its agricultural
+possibilities, was rolling, and in many places had level plateaus, not
+anywhere at a greater altitude than three or four hundred feet above sea
+level.
+
+There was higher ground to the north, where the climate was uninviting,
+so Beralsee said, and it was for that reason they made it a convict
+colony.
+
+John was anxious to see the people who were exiled from their homes on
+account of their crimes. Furthermore, he was impressed with the idea
+that the upper end showed volcanic upheavals, which would be likely to
+expose mineral formations.
+
+Gruesome tales were current of the ferocity of the convicts. It was no
+wonder that the poor victims, whom George had prevented from being
+expelled several days before, regarded their deliverance as such a great
+blessing.
+
+No one, once condemned, was ever permitted to come back. The
+condemnation was for all time. Furthermore, it was part of the Chief's
+unwritten code, that no one who transgressed the law could ever make
+atonement, or recover his rights.
+
+To be able to meet people so condemned, and to talk with them and get
+their views, was worth an exertion, surely, and Harry and George were
+just as enthusiastic at the prospects of the journey.
+
+"That may be some recompense for not finding any caves," said George.
+
+Harry laughed, as he looked at George. "To hear you talk people might
+think you had caves on the brain."
+
+"Well the caves are the only thing that we have had in the way of sport.
+And then the treasures!"
+
+"I know that; but I shall not be disappointed if there isn't a cave
+within five hundred miles."
+
+"Nor I; but John is very anxious, for some reason, to find some
+particular cave. I'll bet anything that skull we found on the southeast
+peak of Wonder Island has something to do with it, judging by the way he
+is caring for the skull, and spending hours in examining it."
+
+"I had forgotten about that," responded Harry. "That brings back my
+interest, now. But John does not think there are any caves on this
+island, but he believes that there is another island farther south."
+
+"Is that so!"
+
+"I am sure of it."
+
+"How sure?"
+
+"Well, the chart which John made has this island on it, and a mark which
+shows something like it directly to the south. I saw that several days
+ago."
+
+"When did he make the drawing?"
+
+"Since he has been on this island."
+
+Harry emitted a low whistle. "I thought John had something in his mind
+all along. What do you suppose he expects to find in that particular
+cave?"
+
+"Well, not money; that's sure. It might be a good idea to do some
+thinking and searching on our own account."
+
+"I have often wondered, since we have been on Wonder Island, and more
+particularly, since we landed here, whether it would not be possible to
+trace some of the unsolved mysteries of Wonder Island to this, or some
+other island."
+
+"Yes, I have often thought of that. We have gone over every part of that
+island, and found no trace of the other boat load, that is of the boys
+who came ashore on the _Investigator's_ No. 3. None of the tribes ever
+knew or heard of that boat, nor was there ever a trace of the members of
+that crew.
+
+"That is the mystery. Some one brought the boat to the island. Some one
+took it inland. Some one, a man by the name of Walter, wrote a note
+addressed to Wright, who was one of the companions of John when he was
+shipwrecked, but Wright knew nothing of Walter. If the solution of this
+matter does not lie in some other island, we might as well give it up."
+
+Before describing the events of the journey it is necessary to make a
+digression, so that we may be able to recount some things which had a
+bearing on the adventures and experiences of the two boys after they
+returned.
+
+The natives on Wonder Island, as well as on the island where they now
+were, wore the most primitive kinds of clothing. The men had the
+simplest clothing, merely a breech clout, worn about the loins, and the
+Chiefs usually wore some distinguishing clothing about their shoulders,
+and usually on their arms.
+
+The women, however, had short skirts, and like their white sisters,
+abounded in ornaments. Some of them had jackets, to which the trinkets
+were attached. All delighted in bracelets. These were usually formed
+like bands around their arms and limbs, and the wealth and importance of
+the dame was judged from the number so employed.
+
+As a result, when they became great and wealthy, more and more clothing
+had to be used, to enable them to attach the ornaments. It might be
+said, that clothing was worn, not for the purpose of covering the body,
+or for comfort, but in order to serve as a vehicle to attach the much
+desired trinkets, and the dangling character of these articles seemed to
+be the great attraction.
+
+For this reason bright and sparkling bits of jewelry were the most
+sought. It mattered not what they were made of, but the glistening
+surface had its value to them. Singularly enough, the women on the new
+island strove to decorate themselves in like manner, and presumably, for
+the same purpose.
+
+When the savages in Wonder Island were brought out of their crude state,
+the Professor and George knew that they could not change that
+fundamental law of nature, nor did they attempt to work a revolution in
+the minds and characters of the people in this respect.
+
+Within certain limitations such a desire to ornament and render
+themselves attractive is most laudable. They knew that among the few
+peoples in the world, where that quality is entirely lacking, they are
+of the lowest type, and possessed of the least intellect, and that all
+such are the hardest to cultivate.
+
+Here, as on Wonder Island, the natives understood weaving, the fabrics
+being of the coarsest character, both in the matter of quality and
+appearance. The work was necessarily slow and tedious, and the principal
+work of the women was to weave these articles of wear with the simple
+tools they had.
+
+When the boys built the looms, and the natives saw the wonderful goods
+produced, and the dyes prepared to give the fabrics the different hues,
+the women became most expert weavers, and the natural result was that
+they vied with each other to make the best articles, and to form them
+into the most fashionable garments.
+
+When the _Pioneer_, and later their new steamer, _Wonder_, which was now
+regularly running to one of the great seaports, began to bring in such
+products as they could not make in the islands, a new impetus was given
+to the dress designed for women.
+
+Before the boys left for Wonder Island, that place attracted immigrants
+from the north; they brought their families, and began to engage in the
+business of exporting the fruits and the fibres, as well as the ores and
+the dyes from the island. From the white women the native women learned
+the new art of dressing, and of adornment.
+
+Their coming was not needed to give them the desire, but they were not
+slow to recognize that their fair-skinned sisters could teach them the
+refining process.
+
+Muro's wife was the sister of Uraso, the latter a man of naturally
+strong intellect, and his sister was not behind him in her particular
+domain. She was at all times the leading spirit in the development of
+her people, and to her the Professor imparted many of the great secrets,
+that might be of service.
+
+Stut, the brother of Muro, was second in command of the vessel, and
+before they left on the mission into the interior, John called in Stut,
+and in presence of the boys imparted a scheme that met with hearty
+approval.
+
+It was now an open secret that Sutoto and Cinda were in love. If the
+Chief knew of it he did not exhibit any alarm, or offer any objections.
+John knew that courtships on the islands were not usually of long
+duration. He thought it would be a fine thing to make the wedding a
+"state affair."
+
+"Now, Stut, I want to entrust you with a mission to the Professor and
+Muro's wife, to whom you can explain the situation. She must prepare a
+suitable outfit for the bride, and tell her I think she and the other
+women that she might choose should also come over. They must not forget
+to bring the proper costumes for Cinda's mother and for all the
+attendants.
+
+"The Professor will know what is suitable to send over for the Chief.
+All this will take some time to arrange, and it must be done without
+letting Sutoto know. I will arrange the matter with him so that he will
+not suspect your real mission.
+
+"Our work at the northern part of the island will take about ten days,
+and probably less. If you have no trouble, and this time of the year is
+not a stormy one, you can easily make the trip there in a day and a
+half, and return in the same time, thus giving you a full week to
+prepare the articles."
+
+Stut was in raptures at the announcement. John knew that he was capable,
+and trusted him. Shortly afterwards Sutoto was sent for, and John said:
+"It is necessary for the _Pioneer_ to return to Wonder Island to get
+some things of importance for us. It would please me better to have you
+remain, and Stut can take your place for the trip; but if you prefer to
+go, it will be satisfactory."
+
+Sutoto hesitated for a moment. He eyed John for a moment, and the boys
+begged him to remain. They knew, as did John, that their entreaties were
+not necessary. Finally, with a most suspicious glance, he consented to
+stay. Stut was notified, and he came in.
+
+"Stut, I have some very valuable papers which must be delivered to the
+Professor, who will send some things back, and I have arranged with
+Sutoto that he shall remain and help us in our investigations here,
+while you sail the _Pioneer_ to Unity."
+
+Stut looked at Sutoto for a moment, as though taken by surprise, and
+announced his willingness to go. "Then start at once," remarked John,
+"and return as soon as possible."
+
+Sutoto called Stut aside, after they left John. "Will you get some
+things for me?" he asked.
+
+"Certainly, what can I do for you?"
+
+Then Sutoto imparted the secret of his coming marriage to Stut, and the
+latter with well concealed surprise, promised secrecy, and assured him
+that he would get the clothing necessary and the particular presents
+that seemed to be of more importance to him than his garments.
+
+Within two hours the ship was ready, and as they were leaving the vessel
+Stut told the boys of the commission which he had undertaken at Sutoto's
+request.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE SKELETON BENEATH THE BOAT
+
+
+The present journey reminded the boys of the time when they began their
+wanderings in the unknown wilds of their own island. Then they were
+inexperienced, lacking the most ordinary knowledge of life in the open,
+afraid of slightest noise when in unknown places, and constantly fearing
+attack by wild men or beasts.
+
+What a difference now! They had been successful, and had abundant
+treasures at their command. Something told them that they were to find
+still greater treasures, and the zest was one beyond expression.
+
+The course was directed due north. The boys knew that they were to
+investigate the mountains, the hills and the streams. They were to learn
+what fruits and vegetation might be found in their native state on the
+island; the kinds and varieties of animals, and the qualities of the
+minerals, if the geological formations offered them for inspection.
+
+From the first day that they landed, the boys had heard a peculiar
+guttural sound, impossible to describe. The sound was almost annoying
+after they had heard it for a time. Passing the limb of a tree during
+the first hour of the march they heard the same cry.
+
+"I see what it is," remarked George. "It is a bird. See it on that
+limb?"
+
+John looked, and then turned to George. "Why certainly, that is the
+Kagu."
+
+"Why its bill and feet are red, while the rest of the body is gray. What
+a funny feather it has running back from its head!"
+
+Harry laughed, as he remarked: "I wonder if our women took their hat
+fashions from the Kagu?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 8. The Kagu._]
+
+"You have made a correct observation. Some species of the hornbill have
+feathers which project up into the air like sentinels, and the same
+feathers are used in exactly the same fashion by makers of millinery.
+Now, I am not an authority on the fashions, but I have often thought
+that if the leaders in styles would build those wonderful head
+decorations something like the patterns furnished by nature they would
+be more beautiful and becoming."
+
+"I wonder if it has only one leg?"
+
+John laughed. "I imagine it has two. It is the custom of many birds of
+this species to stand for hours on one leg. It is of the same family as
+the stork, the heron and the ibis."
+
+"Why don't we see more animals?"
+
+"The island is not, probably, large enough. These small islands have
+only the smallest kinds. Besides, the larger animals are found where the
+nature of the country permits them to conceal themselves."
+
+George stopped before a large bush which had rows of yellow flowers
+growing up all along the stems, and at each flower was a seed.
+
+"Ah! you have found a most valuable plant," said John, as he broke off
+one of the stems. "Feel the crushed leaves."
+
+"It is just like grease."
+
+"It is an oil. It is one of the products largely used in the United
+States, as a substitute for olive oil, and for soap making."
+
+"What is it called?"
+
+"The plant is known as Benne. The product is Sesame oil. The peculiarity
+of the plant is that nearly one-half of the leaf is a pure oil, and it
+can remain exposed a long time before it turns rancid."
+
+"I wonder if that is what they use in their cooking!"
+
+"Yes; it is absolutely inodorous, and is better than lard for table
+uses. Look at the seeds. They are classed with the most nutritious in
+the world."
+
+"The Chief had them, and I tried some of them the first night I dined
+with him."
+
+The route led to an upper plateau, well wooded, many of the trees being
+of the palm variety, with plenty of silver-leafed families so common
+everywhere.
+
+"Do look at the Coffee trees?" exclaimed Harry.
+
+The Chief's son was consulted. He had no knowledge of the use of the
+berry. "We must take a lot of the berries back with us. This will be a
+treat at the celebration." John stopped short, and the boys commenced to
+laugh. He had almost given away the scheme for the wedding feast. Sutoto
+did not catch the force of the allusion.
+
+George and Harry were now on the quest for new things in every
+direction, and the natives aided them in carrying out their every wish.
+After they had reached a small stream flowing to the north it became
+evident that they had passed the highest point of the plateau, and were
+now descending.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne._]
+
+One of the natives pointed out a peculiarly-shaped tree, tall, with
+immense leaves, and at each leaf cluster there was an immense white
+flower.
+
+"Here is a tree with yellow flowers. We must have some of these as
+specimens," said Harry.
+
+The trees were exceedingly tall. "The men are asking if you want some of
+the flowers," said Sutoto.
+
+"By all means," answered George. Without a moment's hesitation a young
+athlete made his way to the top, and gathered a dozen branches, which he
+dropped to the ground.
+
+The beauty of these flowers is difficult to describe. The tree body is
+perfectly straight, and the limbs grow out uniformly on three sides, the
+leaves being very rough.
+
+"This is a species which belongs to the Indicus family," remarked John,
+as he cut off one of the leaves. "It would be a good tree for carpenters
+to raise."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree._]
+
+"Why so?" asked George.
+
+"You see it is just like sand-paper."
+
+"Well, that is something to know. But will it really smooth down wood?"
+
+"It is frequently used for that purpose, and you might take some along
+and try it."
+
+At intervals John was observed taking up bits of soil, which he
+carefully wrapped up and deposited in one of the receptacles.
+
+"I am curious to know what you are taking dirt for?" said Harry.
+
+"I should have told you that a knowledge of the nature of the soil is
+one of the things that is very important to the agriculturist. Many men
+have made failures because they planted things which the earth was not
+adapted to grow."
+
+"It has always been a wonder to me why things really do grow up out of
+the dirt," said Harry.
+
+"That is not difficult to understand, if you will consider that the
+ground contains food, and that a plant can grow only where it can get
+the right kind. Then, there may be plenty of food but not the kind it
+can digest."
+
+"Well, that is news to me. Do plants digest food?"
+
+"Yes, just the same as what we call living animals. The tree is somewhat
+different from animals, in the particular that it digests its food first
+and then consumes it afterwards. In this particular certain larvæ act
+the same as trees, that is digest it before they consume it."
+
+"What do you mean by larva?"
+
+"The early form of certain living organisms, before they are fully
+developed. Thus, the tadpole is the larva of the frog. A great many
+insects are bred from what are called grubs, or caterpillars. All these
+are called larva."
+
+"What kind of food is found in the earth?"
+
+"Many, many kinds. Carbon, nitrogen, the various salts, such as lime,
+magnesia, strontia, and the like, and when the little feelers shoot out
+from the roots, they are in search of something to eat."
+
+At this point they were interrupted by shouting and laughter from one
+section of the searching party, and the boys ran out across the open to
+learn its cause. Two of the natives were carrying a dark brown object,
+about half the size of an ordinary hog.
+
+It was kicking vigorously, but did not appear to be at all vicious.
+
+"Why, it looks just like a little bear," said George as he danced about.
+"Let us keep it for a pet."
+
+"It is a bear," said John. "It is the Bruang, or the sun-bear of the
+Malayan peninsula."
+
+"But doesn't it grow any bigger?"
+
+"No; that is a full size specimen; in fact, it is a pretty large
+specimen, I should judge."
+
+"What beautiful fur, and so soft! Will it bite?"
+
+"I am of the opinion they can bite, but they are easily tamed and make
+great pets. Hasn't it a fine white spot on its breast?"
+
+The men stood about and allowed it to move about within the circle. It
+cast its eyes around, as much as to say: "Well, what are you going to do
+about it?"
+
+George cried out: "Hold it for a minute," and he pounced on one of the
+provision bags, and brought out a pot of honey. He forced his way in
+among the watchers, and with a stick dipped into the honey held it up
+before the animal.
+
+It smelled the honey, and began to lick the stick, and then it darted
+for the pot. "What a tongue," exclaimed Harry.
+
+"That is what they are noted for. The tongue is made for the very
+purpose of going into deep holes, and the greatest use is to rob the
+hives of the wild honey bee."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear._]
+
+The antics of George and the bear were most amusing to the watchers, and
+occasioned roars of laughter. When the pot was emptied he wanted more,
+and nosed around George until the latter could hardly keep his feet.
+
+"He is getting to be a mighty close friend," said John, when he could
+find time to stop laughing for a moment.
+
+"Well, don't let him get away," cried George, as he saw the cordon
+around the animal broken up, leaving plenty of opening for it to get
+away.
+
+But, of course, the natives didn't understand him, and soon Mr. Bear had
+all the opportunity in the world to go home. But he didn't. He walked
+alongside of George, and the latter liked to stroke his soft fur, to
+which no objection was offered.
+
+The bear followed and was by his side every minute of the time for the
+next hour, and while they sat down to lunch little Sunny, as George
+named him, was at the feast. He had samples of everything in sight, and
+the menu tasted good, from honey at the beginning of the repast, to
+honey at the end of it.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The progress was necessarily slow, because there were so many things to
+examine and to make notes of. They went out of the way from the direct
+route, so as to cover as wide an area as possible. Before camping for
+the night they had ascended a slight elevation, and there, to the right
+and to the left they saw the wide stretches of the great ocean.
+
+Directly ahead was a narrow tongue of land, leading to a broadening
+area, and off in the dim distance was a high point. The Chief's son
+pointed there and said:
+
+"On the other side of that high place is where the bad people live."
+
+"That must be a long way off," said John. When this was interpreted he
+answered: "Another day's march."
+
+The gentle breeze from the eastern shore was a great relief.
+
+They had marched during the day mostly through forests, and everywhere
+the atmosphere was close and still, so that the open space was
+appreciated.
+
+All slept soundly that night, and morning came only too soon for the
+wearied boys, but they enjoyed the trip too much to delay moving at the
+earliest opportunity. While breakfast was being prepared the boys
+sauntered over to the sloping shore to the west, which was not more than
+a half mile away.
+
+They enjoyed walking along the pure white sand, and after disrobing had
+a jolly time in the mildly moving surf. It was not often that they had
+opportunities to take a sea bath.
+
+The bathing place was a deeply-indented bay, with a long sloping
+beach,--an ideal spot, with the camp plainly visible to the east. "Why
+not take a stroll to the southern end of the bay?" remarked Harry, after
+they were ready to return. "We might be able to see the headland to the
+south where we first sighted land."
+
+"Well, then, here goes it," and George started on a strong sprint to the
+south.
+
+Harry was by far the fleeter, and reached the tufted grass ahead of
+George, and then turned to the right, to gain the elevation. It was
+while thus moving through the brush and débris, which was far above the
+normal level of the sea, that they were attracted by an unusual deposit
+of brush, and other accumulations.
+
+"Stop, Harry; here is something we ought to investigate."
+
+Harry turned and came back. In the early days of their investigation
+such a mass would have meant diligent search. It was more from a
+recurrence of the old habit that dictated the idea to George.
+
+It was well they did so, for not far from the top, and covered over with
+seaweed and leaves, was a boxlike structure, evidently some part of a
+wreckage. They worked feverishly at the surrounding mass, and uncovered
+it.
+
+Harry started back. "Do you know what this is?" he asked. George stooped
+over, and stared.
+
+"It is part of the boat which was taken from South River."
+
+When that boat disappeared, only to be found miles away from its
+original location, the two boxlike compartments which they had made in
+it, and the oars used by them, had been taken away, and instead they
+found entirely different oars, and a rope, of which they knew nothing.
+
+Here was one of the boxes. "Let's open it," said George in the most
+intense tone. That was easily done, and there they found, to their
+surprise, one of their original shell hatchets, part of a coarsely-woven
+cloth, which they recognized as one of their early productions on the
+first loom, and a dozen or more gourds, in which food had been placed,
+and all exactly as it had been stored away by them. The food had
+disappeared, of course, but it had been lost by the action of the sea,
+and decomposition, as it was evident that the contents had not been
+disturbed by any one.
+
+"Let us call John," said Harry, and he bounded up the beach, and ran
+over the crest, waving his arms as he did so. He had not gone half the
+distance before those at the camp saw Harry running, and John, and most
+of those in sight started on a run, George meanwhile industriously
+dragging away the débris.
+
+"We have found it," cried Harry, as John came within hailing distance,
+and without waiting for them to come up he bolted back.
+
+"Now what have you discovered?" asked John as he came up breathless.
+
+"Part of our old boat."
+
+"We thought George had met with some accident."
+
+"We got this by accident," answered George. "See, here are some more
+things. This is the oar we had. How can you explain that?"
+
+It was certainly a poser. Why the exchange of oars? John shook his head.
+For once he had no theory even to offer. "Come, boys, let us take away
+all this stuff."
+
+All gave a hand, Sutoto wondering why there should be so much ado about
+a bit of wreckage. George explained the affair, as well as he could.
+
+"What is that board?" exclaimed John. "No, not a board; that is part of
+a boat," he added as more of the accumulation was torn away.
+
+"It's a boat; it's a boat!" almost shrieked George.
+
+"Come to this end and take away this lot of seaweed," called out Harry.
+
+They soon uncovered a boat with one end embedded in the sand so it was
+difficult to turn it over, owing to the rotten condition of the wood.
+Only here and there was any paint visible. The action of the elements
+had done its work.
+
+"What kind of a boat was this?" asked Harry.
+
+John did not answer, but peered down on the sand where the prow had
+rested. "Take away the sand carefully here," he said, and when he
+pointed the boys saw something white protruding an inch or two.
+
+As the sand was scraped away they first saw the thigh bone of a
+skeleton, and soon the whole frame was laid bare, the interstices filled
+with sand. A peculiar rope was around the frame, and John grasped it.
+
+The boys eagerly looked at it as John intently examined it. "It is the
+same," he said.
+
+"The same as what?" asked Harry.
+
+"The same as the rope found on the boat when you discovered it on the
+beach."
+
+That was the first time that the boys knew that John had any idea about
+the loss of the boat, or of the strange rope. It was possible, however,
+that the Professor had told John about it, as they were accustomed to
+talk over these strange things.
+
+"But the boat?" asked George. "What do you think of the boat?"
+
+"It is the exact counterpart of the _Investigator's_ Life boat No. 3."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+A CONVICT COLONY OF NATIVES
+
+
+The Chief's son was present. "Did you ever know of a boat load of
+castaways on the island?" asked John.
+
+"We never knew of anything like that," was his reply.
+
+Every scrap in that mass of wreckage was gone over. There was nothing
+else visible by which they could gain the slightest clue. The skeleton
+was minutely examined. It was that of a strong, well-developed man, but
+from all appearances one leg was shorter than the other.
+
+The bones of the shortened leg were closely investigated. "The bones
+show that this man met with an accident in early life, or before he was
+fully grown, or, he may have had some disease before he attained full
+growth, so that his right leg is shorter because not fully developed,"
+said John, as he continued the examination.
+
+"He must have been a soldier or an adventurer, as he has three bullet
+marks, one here in the right shoulder, one in the ankle, and the other
+on the cheek bone. All of the wounds were healed before he met his
+death."
+
+"But there is one thing which is still more remarkable. This man was a
+captive. He was tied in the boat and it was set adrift, and was likely
+on the open sea and washed ashore during one of the monsoons."
+
+"Why do you think so?" asked Harry, as soon as he could recover breath
+after this announcement.
+
+"This rope tells the story."
+
+"But how does it happen that he and the boat were together. It seems to
+me that if the waves were high enough to bring the boat clear up to this
+point, he would be freed from the boat long before it reached this
+place."
+
+"He was tied to the boat."
+
+One mystery was solved, and another more terrible in its aspect came
+upon its heels. There was but one thing to do, and that was to bury the
+skeleton, and John ordered this done, as soon as he had taken the
+complete measurements of the remains.
+
+"We don't want the box or the things in it now," said Harry.
+
+"Indeed, I want the hatchet," answered George.
+
+"Yes, and the rope," added John.
+
+The boys went back to the camp with thoughtful expressions on their
+faces.
+
+"This seems to be a Wonder Island, too," said George, more to himself
+than to any one else.
+
+They descended the incline, and crossed the narrow neck of land that
+joined the two parts of the island. Beyond, as they advanced the ground
+grew more uneven and rugged. Occasionally rocks appeared, the first that
+they had noticed except around the place where George was captured.
+
+Nevertheless, vegetation grew in even greater profusion than on the
+other branch of the island. There were more berries upon which all the
+natives feasted, and the boys were not slow to pick them as they passed.
+
+In traveling alongside of a hill Harry was the first to call attention
+to a peculiar leaf on a plant, which bore rose-shaped flowers. "This is
+something new to me. There is nothing like it on Wonder Island. Did you
+notice it, John?"
+
+The latter took a branch, and gazed at it for a long time. "I am
+surprised to find this growing here. It is a plant well known in
+Palestine, and is called the Rose of Jericho."
+
+"What a delightful perfume it has," said Harry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho._]
+
+"It is not noted on that account, however. It is the _resurrection_
+plant."
+
+"How singular; and in what way did it get that name?"
+
+"It may be dried up entirely, and if placed in water it will again
+appear to revive and raise itself up. This is, of course, due to its
+power to absorb a vast amount of water. It is found near the shores of
+the Dead Sea, and I recall that when I was in Jerusalem it was a common
+thing to see the plant in its dried-up state, sold to pilgrims who were
+instructed how to resurrect it."
+
+Here was caught the second and only other animal on the trip. It was
+somewhat smaller than Sunny, and the latter danced about the dead
+animal, as the "boys" brought it in.
+
+"And what is this big-eared fellow?" asked George.
+
+John laughed as he recognized the apt description. "It is a kind of
+Australian kangaroo. It inhabits trees, but is very clumsy in appearance
+and in action. It is a kind of sloth, or wombat."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 13. The Koala._]
+
+"Isn't that a dandy fur?"
+
+"The fur is not so valuable as its skin. There is nothing to compare
+with the softness of the hide when tanned. It feels like the finest
+velvet, and is very strong and durable."
+
+They were now ascending a series of hills, each more difficult than the
+last, and the ground became extremely rough and broken. There was a lone
+path, in many places nearly obliterated. It was the uninviting road to
+the land of sorrow.
+
+The Chief's son tried to be in the company of the boys at all times, and
+while he could not understand their chatter, Sutoto was a willing
+interpreter. He enjoyed the jolly freedom of the two chums, and their
+uniform good nature.
+
+George and Harry were ever on the alert to make him feel at ease and so
+they talked with him, and told of the things which John explained, and
+it was plainly seen that he marveled at things which were described.
+
+Referring to the exiled people, George asked: "Do those people never
+return after they are once condemned?"
+
+"They are never permitted to come back."
+
+"Do they stay there of their own free will?"
+
+"No; I am told that they long to be at home again."
+
+"Well, what would you do if they tried to come back?"
+
+"We would drive them away. One time they tried to come back, all of
+them, and we had to kill some of them," and he said it in a tone of
+regret.
+
+"Don't you believe in killing?"
+
+He looked at George for a moment, and then looked up into Sutoto's eyes,
+as he said: "No; it would do no good. Would that be the right way?" he
+asked with a sort of innocence that brought a blush to George's cheeks.
+
+"No; we do not believe in killing, except when we must to protect
+ourselves."
+
+"But do you have to make such wonderful things as those (pointing to
+the guns) to protect yourselves?"
+
+John threw back his head and tried to prevent a loud laugh, at this
+perfectly obvious question, while he looked at the boys to see what sort
+of an answer would be given.
+
+George was non-plussed for a minute. John had no business to disconcert
+him in that way. He turned and expected Harry to answer, but it seemed
+as though he had imperfectly understood it. There was no way out of it,
+and George tried to get his body into a proper position to answer it
+with dignity.
+
+"Well, you see, the guns were not made for the purpose of killing
+people, but for sporting purposes."
+
+"Do you have many wild animals in your country?" he asked naïvely.
+
+"Not many now."
+
+John laughed a little so as not to be too undignified, and George saw
+the humor of the situation. He did not want to pursue the subject any
+further, and John graciously turned the conversation by announcing the
+discovery of the Upas tree.
+
+"I didn't know the Upas tree was of such immense size," said Harry. "Is
+it really true that it kills everything that comes near it?"
+
+"No, that is greatly exaggerated. The only time when it gives forth any
+harmful exudations, is when it is cut down, or when the bark is torn
+away, or it is wounded in such a way that the sap comes into contact
+with the body."
+
+The illustration shows a flowering branch of the tree, and gives an idea
+of the silk-like leaves.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree._]
+
+They were still going upwardly. On both sides, to the east and to the
+west could be seen the rolling sea. Ahead was the mountain, if such it
+might be called. Rocks began to appear everywhere. John stopped long at
+some of those dark gray walls, and chipped off many specimens.
+
+There were now fewer birds and animals, except very small species, such
+as squirrels, and a variety of weasel, quick in its movements and
+reddish in color.
+
+"This begins to look promising," remarked John, as he crawled around the
+ledges.
+
+"Do you think we shall find any caves here?" asked George.
+
+"I shall be very much surprised if we do not," he answered.
+
+"Isn't it singular that the natives never knew about them, if there are
+any here?"
+
+"No; I do not think that is strange; they do not believe in the witch
+doctors, and they have no Krishnos here, so that the caves are of no
+value to them."
+
+"But do you find much that is valuable in the way of ores?"
+
+"The hills here are full of the most valuable minerals. The little
+prospecting I have done is sufficient to satisfy me on that point. I am
+trying to make a fair estimate so I can give an accurate report when we
+return."
+
+It was late in the afternoon when they reached the summit of the
+mountain which they had viewed from the south. It was green to the very
+summit, and from the elevation where they stood they could see a long
+and narrow stretch to the north, the distance in that direction being
+much farther than they had traveled from the little bight of land on the
+south.
+
+"It does look inviting in that part of the island," said Harry. "Were
+you ever there, in the bad place?" asked Harry as the Chief's son came
+up.
+
+"No; but I have heard much about it."
+
+One of the natives who heard the conversation said: "It is a beautiful
+place."
+
+"Have you ever been there?" he was asked.
+
+"I was a guard on two occasions when we took prisoners there," he
+answered.
+
+"Tell us about it," said George.
+
+"I have never been in the village, but within an hour's march of it. The
+Chief warned us never to go into the place itself."
+
+Aside from the village the place which interested John and the boys most
+was the mountain on which they were now standing. This must be explored.
+It was now late in the afternoon, and at John's suggestion they
+encamped, and only short excursions were made by the boys in the quest
+for something new.
+
+It was a delightful night. The elevation gave them the advantage of a
+beautiful breeze, and the odors wafted to them, from some unknown
+source, on the mild trade wind from the north, was almost like a
+narcotic, so soothing and restful.
+
+"Did you ever visit a more delightful spot?" asked Harry, as he inhaled
+the beautiful perfume.
+
+"It does not seem to me that the criminal colony is in a very bad place,
+if this is any indication of it. Isn't that way of dealing with crime a
+strange thing?" remarked George.
+
+"Why so?" asked John. "Is it anything peculiar for the wrongdoers to be
+banished from a community?"
+
+"No; but it seems wrong to condemn the innocent women and children. Why
+should they be punished along with the guilty?"
+
+"Probably, in the majority of cases, the women and children would prefer
+to accompany their husband and father. That does not seem to be so
+cruel, when it is considered that they are left free to live as much so
+as in their own community."
+
+"That is what I cannot understand. What is the use of sending them away,
+if they are not locked up?"
+
+"Do you not know that among the ancients, banishment from a country was
+the greatest punishment; greater even than death, in the opinion of
+many; and there are many cases where suicide was preferable. The odium
+of banishment was so great in those days that only the strongest and the
+greatest of men could live it down."
+
+"It makes me feel, when I smell this delightful perfume, that the home
+of the bad people over there must be a beautiful place," said George.
+
+"To give such an opinion, just because of the fragrance that comes from
+the north is proper for a sentimentalist," said John, as he laughed.
+
+"Well, that is a pretty big name to give, and I suppose it means having
+some notion that hasn't any sense in it, but just theory?"
+
+"That is a fairly close description, but I didn't mean it in that way."
+
+The boys never felt resentful at anything that John might say, as they
+knew and appreciated his noble character and disposition too well not to
+understand that his remarks were never born of malice.
+
+After a restful night preparations were made for a complete survey of
+the mountain, if it might be so dignified. Its greatest altitude did not
+exceed eight or nine hundred feet, and the width of the island at this
+point did not exceed two miles. It was quite rugged toward the east, but
+on the western side of the island the descent was sloping, and offered
+easy examination.
+
+The natives were instructed what to do, and were told that they should
+particularly hunt for caves, or great holes, or entrances into the
+hills. Four search parties were thus organized, John being at the head
+of one, and George, Harry and Sutoto, each being a leader in the others.
+
+Sutoto was most competent for work of this kind, as he had accompanied
+the boys on many expeditions, and was anxious to be of service in the
+quest.
+
+John took a direction to the northeast, and Sutoto to the southeast,
+thus leaving Harry and George with their parties to explore the region
+to the west, and northwest.
+
+As they were separating George slyly remarked: "John must have had some
+particular reason for taking the direction he did."
+
+Harry smiled. "I hope we shall find the first caves."
+
+Before separating John told them that he was desirous of finding a
+cavern which had certain peculiar markings therein, and the description
+showed it to be Cross-shaped. This must not be forgotten.
+
+They entered into the undertaking with the greatest enthusiasm.
+
+The boys simply danced, as they went down the hill, so great was the joy
+and the freedom of that beautiful spot. What a wonderful sensation is
+produced by beautiful odors. It is like a thought which transports you.
+On the other hand, when the odors are disagreeable how it depresses and
+disgusts.
+
+A great French physician has said that in his observations, the real
+happy people are those who delight in beautiful odors; and while it is
+not true that criminals are devoid of the elevating influence of
+delightful perfumes, still, they are less influenced thereby.
+
+In a number of tests made some years ago, a curious fact was observed:
+Sweet odors were allowed to Teach sleeping patients, which, when they
+did excite dreams, made them feel that they were living in a world of
+bliss, and surrounded by all the luxuries of life. On the other hand,
+when exposed to evil smelling odors, they dreamed of miseries, and of
+trouble and disgrace.
+
+It was understood that the different expeditions were to report at the
+camp at midday, and that in the event of any accident, or other mishap,
+the firing of the guns would be sufficient warning to the party at the
+camp and to those who were searching.
+
+George had with him two of his own "boys," and two of the natives, and
+Harry was also accompanied by several of his particular favorites.
+Harry, with his party, was the energetic one, as he was exceedingly wiry
+and a good walker. He did not intend to permit the others to encroach on
+any of his territory.
+
+Not a vestige of anything was found which even so much as pointed to a
+cave or to the sign of human occupancy in that section. George, on the
+other hand, was more fortunate. In his area the shelving rocks were
+more numerous, and he also knew that the rocks were limestone, and that
+caves were more likely to exist in limestone formation than in trap
+rock, or either in granite or sandstone formations.
+
+He was, therefore, fully prepared, when, in the early part of his
+investigation, to find, what appeared to be entrances, but in all cases
+they were blind leads,--that is they led in for short distances only,
+many of them being mere cleavages of the rocks.
+
+The real cave is the one where the limestone is eaten out by the erosive
+action of the water attacking the calcium of the rock. Furthermore, he
+felt that he must go down nearer sea level to be assured of success, and
+he acted on that impulse.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+A WHITE PARALYTIC IN THE CONVICT COLONY
+
+
+It would be useless to recount the experiences of all of the parties.
+They had four hours of search before them. This would, at least, give
+some idea as to the nature of the mountain, and enable John to decide
+whether it would be wise to give that project further consideration.
+
+At midday the parties began to appear, first Harry, then Sutoto,
+followed by John, and finally George. The latter was the only one who
+was smiling. The three early parties had no news to impart.
+
+"What have you found?" were the hailing words of George, as he
+approached.
+
+"Nothing! nothing!" were the answers.
+
+"It takes me to bring home the goods," he remarked, and Harry laughed in
+derision.
+
+"No; but I mean it," he continued. "I have captured a modern, good-sized
+cave, and it is now awaiting to be explored."
+
+John could not believe the tale. "You are to be congratulated. Good
+boy!" Needless to add, George was the happiest person in that camp.
+
+"Let us go down to see it at once," said George in his eagerness. "It
+is quite a distance, as it is not more than five hundred feet from the
+seashore."
+
+"Luncheon first," remarked John, and no one interposed an objection, as
+the trip had sharpened the appetites of all.
+
+The meal over little time was lost in making a start, and George led the
+way with his boys. Truly enough, there was the open mouth, and it was
+cave-like. Now for the mysteries within. "We went in only about a
+hundred feet, so as to be sure we weren't fooled," said George, in
+reference to his discovery.
+
+The lamps were then prepared, and all the preparations made, the boys
+being veterans in this sort of work, and John was ahead, as was
+generally the custom in these expeditions.
+
+"This is as far as we went," said George. Beyond was still a wall which
+glistened from the streaming lights.
+
+Gradually the walls came closer together; the track was a narrow one; so
+they had to march in single file. John called a halt. "I am afraid this
+is a blind hole," he said, but George could not believe it, so the side
+walls were searched, for indications of some opening.
+
+"This is the end of the cave. Note the side walls. If they should be
+pressed against each other they would fit exactly, showing that it is an
+opening caused by a fissure and not by erosion."
+
+Harry could not help but laugh. All this time lost on a blind lead, and
+the laugh was on George.
+
+Harry could not help jesting him. "If you are a good tribe finder it is
+no sign that caves are in your line."
+
+John enjoyed the laugh on George, but the latter retorted: "I think the
+joke is on you, for traveling all this distance to see a hole in the
+ground."
+
+There was not the sign of a cave on the island, aside from the one
+discovered (?) by George, so the party remained that night at the
+mountain top, and in the morning descended the hill, and slowly marched
+to the north. Before noon they entered a beautiful stretch of woodland,
+with luxurious grass growing all around in profusion.
+
+"This is as far as the guards have been permitted to go," said one of
+the natives, who had volunteered the information about the place the day
+before.
+
+Thus far not a human being was visible. An hour's march would bring them
+to the village of the criminals, and the boys began to examine their
+weapons, and to look apprehensive.
+
+The wild fruits of the tropics were now seen in abundance in every
+direction. Bananas, the Bread Fruit, Cocoa, and Date Palm, on every
+hand.
+
+The most astonishing thing, however, was the profusion of flowers, of
+every variety, seemingly, and the air was scented as with one vast
+bouquet.
+
+Sutoto stopped and pointed ahead: "They are in the trees gathering
+fruit." The party halted, and looked, and then proceeded.
+
+They were, undoubtedly, the first of the criminals. A half mile beyond,
+and in a plain road, were several of the inhabitants. Those in the
+trees, two men and a boy, descended, and, together with two women,
+walked across the field, to witness the newly-arrived criminals, as they
+supposed.
+
+They were astounded at the appearance of the party. The Chief's son
+addressed the men, and told them who they were, and their mission. As
+this was the first time that such a visit had ever been made, the man
+instructed the boy to run to the village and inform the people, and he
+scurried away.
+
+Meantime the party moved on, and, as they proceeded, more and more of
+the inhabitants were seen. To the right were people in the fields,
+engaged in some sort of work there. This was singular. Nothing of that
+kind was seen in the village where Beralsee was chief.
+
+"What is the name of this town where the convicts live?" asked Harry.
+
+"Hutoton," replied Calmo.
+
+"And what is the name of your town?"
+
+"Sasite."
+
+"Rather queer names, I should say," exclaimed Harry.
+
+John laughed and glanced at Harry, as he said: "I wonder how _Unity_,
+and _Pioneer_, and _Mayfield_, and the queer English names sound to
+them!"
+
+"Oh, I suppose they have some good reason for having such names."
+
+"Yes; for the same reason that we apply names to certain things. See
+what a wonderful expression there is in the word 'Harsh,' and how
+expressive it is compared with its opposite 'soft.' How the first word
+grates, and the second comes out so smoothly. Then, compare 'swift' and
+'slow'; or 'sweet' and 'sour.' Ugh! I can almost taste the last word."
+
+John roared, as he saw the serious aspect of Harry's face. But other
+sights now attracted their attention. A group of men and women appeared.
+How strange the natives looked. They were well dressed, that is, judged
+from the people in Sasite, and they were people of good deportment, if
+those of the inhabitants that accompanied them were fair specimens.
+
+At the head of the villagers was a man of striking appearance, tall,
+with white hair, such as you would call distinguished, because he
+differed from most around him. The women were well clad, and the
+children plump and vigorous in their actions.
+
+Something must be wrong! These people were not criminals! The old man
+came forward, and gave a respectful bow. He looked at John and said a
+few words. Calmo responded, his words when translated being: "These are
+friends of my father, and they have come to visit you."
+
+At this the man gave another bow, and John went up and held out his
+hand, which the man took in a simple and unaffected manner.
+
+"We welcome you to our village," was his reply.
+
+The boys looked at each other and relaxed their hold on the guns. Was
+this, after all, the wicked place that had been described to them? As
+they marched down to the village they were enchanted at the flowers
+which greeted them on all sides.
+
+Here and there were garden spots, carefully kept, and when the first
+huts appeared beyond the grove, the boys simply gasped, and could hardly
+believe their senses. Hundreds of Magnolia trees were in bloom; and the
+gentle breeze blowing in from the sea, moderated the rays of the sun,
+and wafted the odor of the plants many miles inland.
+
+The homes were not rudely built, and, although they were on the same
+general plan of those in Sasite, they had every appearance of comfort.
+
+The head man of the village led them to a more pretentious home,
+probably his own dwelling. This was soon confirmed, as they were invited
+to enter and repose themselves on slightly elevated couches, so much
+like Chief Beralsee's court.
+
+Within a short time there was a great commotion in the village. The boys
+looked around startled, and the old man noticed it, for he turned to
+Calmo, and said: "The villagers are preparing a feast for you. Let them
+go out and mingle with the people."
+
+The boys were happy at this opportunity of satisfying their curiosity.
+Sutoto accompanied them, and with Calmo, they placed themselves under
+the guidance of a young man named Anasa, who, Calmo said, was the son of
+the old man.
+
+They passed down the main street, for there was some semblance of order
+in the location of the huts. Around the huts were flowers, just as they
+had seen on the path leading from the mountain, and here and there
+patches of growing vegetables. After passing one rather attractive
+looking hut, Anasa paused for a moment, and then turned back, motioning
+for them to follow. He entered, and the boys saw a villager, and two
+women within.
+
+Anasa pointed to the figure of a man seated in a chair, and upon seeing
+it both boys started back in amazement.
+
+"That is a white man," cried Harry.
+
+Anasa nodded, his manner indicating that he felt sure that the boys
+would recognize him as belonging to their race. George went up to him,
+and held out his hand. In response the man gave a listless look, and
+slowly raised the left hand, which was grasped by George, who said: "I
+am glad to see you. Who are you? We are white, the same as you are."
+
+The man made no sign, and his arm dropped to his side as George relaxed
+his grasp. Harry touched George on the shoulder, as he said: "There is
+something the matter with him. Ask Anasa about him."
+
+Calmo put the question, and this was the reply: "We found the poor
+fellow on the beach many moons ago. We brought him here, and tried to
+heal him, but he does not speak, and one side of him has no life."
+
+The man made no show of recognition, and the only motion observable was
+a twitching jerk of the left arm, and a slightly swaying motion of the
+head.
+
+"John must know about this," said George.
+
+"By all means," was the reply.
+
+Calmo was told about the wonderful man John, and that he should be
+called at once, so one of the accompanying natives was instructed to
+bring John, and he speeded away on the errand.
+
+George stood outside of the hut when John came up. "This is a remarkable
+thing. Did they tell you about it?"
+
+"No."
+
+"There is a white man here."
+
+"Where?" asked John in astonishment.
+
+"In the hut, and he is paralyzed and cannot speak."
+
+John did not wait for more, and as he went the head man followed him in.
+Then they told him the story, and John stood there and gazed at the man.
+To the boys who were by John's side he remarked: "I do not know him. I
+do not think I ever saw him before. How long has he been in this
+condition?" The old man responded: "Ever since we picked him up on the
+shore, about _tuta romama_ ago."
+
+"And how long ago was that?"
+
+George informed him that Calmo received the information that it was over
+two years prior to that time, and as John received this information he
+passed his hand over his head, and, turning to Harry, said: "We shall,
+probably, get at the bottom of another mystery."
+
+"What is it? Why do you think so?" asked George in astonishment.
+
+"Not now; not now!" answered John, wishing to defer discussion until
+they were out of the stricken man's hearing.
+
+The latter, however, did not in the least appreciate who were before
+him. He was not at all perturbed by his visitors, nor when John quietly
+passed his hand along the poor man's arm and body to satisfy himself of
+the extent of the paralytic stroke.
+
+He winced but slightly when the examination of the left side was made,
+otherwise there was no sign of comprehension on his part.
+
+"This is a remarkable thing," said John, as they were returning to the
+old man's dwelling.
+
+"Why, is it a peculiar case?"
+
+"The ailment itself is not remarkable; but there is something which
+passes my comprehension."
+
+"What is it!" asked the boys in, unison.
+
+"These people are savages."
+
+"Yes; answered the boys."
+
+"And they are criminals," he said as he stopped and looked at the boys,
+with an earnestness that surprised them.
+
+It did not take more words to make them understand what John meant.
+These people had taken this shipwrecked man, and tenderly cared for him
+during a period of more than two years. This was done without hope of
+reward. John learned later on that the natives of the town had made
+provision for the shipwrecked man and had compensated the people at
+whose home he was then living.
+
+After the evening meal, John walked around the village, observing the
+people, and he found happiness everywhere. Everything seemed to be
+arranged according to a system. The old man was not a chief, but was
+looked upon as their advisor and guide; but he was a criminal, as were
+all the others in that town.
+
+That evening when all were present John had the first opportunity to
+talk with the venerable chief of the town.
+
+"How long have you been here?" he was asked.
+
+He was silent for a moment and then answered: "Thirty years."
+
+It must be understood that the questions and answers had to be
+translated and as the natives knew nothing about the division of time in
+months or years it was necessary to convert the time which was given by
+nature into terms of years and months.
+
+Thus, they understood what a day meant, and they could calculate time,
+as all savages do, by the phases of the moon, and in many cases they
+were able to indicate time by the position of the sun, in which they
+recognized three phases only, namely, when the sun was directly above
+them, and when it reached the extreme northern and southern points.
+
+"Why were you sent here?"
+
+"Because I committed a crime."
+
+John was almost startled at the frankness of the confession, which the
+old man made without the least perceptible show of feeling or shame.
+
+"Would you like to go back again?"
+
+"Go back where?"
+
+"To your home."
+
+He looked bewildered for a moment, and then answered: "This is my home."
+
+"But I mean your old home at Sasite."
+
+The old man shook his head vigorously, and answered: "No! no! There is
+no place like Hutoton."
+
+"Do you know what 'Hutoton' means?"
+
+"Yes; it means 'the place of death.'"
+
+The boys were startled at the reply. John turned to them, when he saw
+their expression, and smiled. The old man, too, smiled.
+
+"Do any of your people want to go back?"
+
+He looked surprised at the question. "Do they want to go back?" he
+repeated the query. "No; but you should ask them. I do not know of any
+one who wishes to return. We love our Chief too much to wish for such a
+thing."
+
+"Do you know what the people in Sasite think of this place?"
+
+"No; not altogether; I am curious to know."
+
+"They believe it is a terrible place, and that the people who are sent
+here never have another day of peace or happiness."
+
+"And have they not changed their opinions? I used to think so too, and
+we believed it of those who went before us; but we thought they might
+have changed their opinions, because we felt that people were growing
+better and not worse. It is a long time since they sent us real
+criminals, and we thought the Chief's people were growing wiser and
+happier."
+
+"When did the last criminals come here?"
+
+"Nearly one year ago."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+SAVAGE MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
+
+
+It was impossible to describe the effect of these revelations on the
+boys. It was so different from anything they had been led to expect. It
+brought one thing forcibly to their minds; that because these people had
+committed some crime, or some wrong against society, they were still
+human beings, and were worthy of being treated as men and women.
+
+John related to them that various governments had tried the plan of
+sending convicts to some foreign lands, and placing them in situations
+where they might work out their own salvation; that all such efforts
+were successful, where real opportunities were bestowed.
+
+"The idea is," remarked John, "that they are banished from the society
+in which they resided, or in which they were raised, for the purpose of
+helping them. The reason for inflicting punishment on criminals has been
+to protect society but apparently no efforts have been made to cure the
+criminals or to help them to better themselves."
+
+"I heard the Professor say, at one of the trials at Wonder Island, that
+some scientists consider crime a disease," said George.
+
+"Exactly; now suppose we treated people suffering from smallpox, or
+scarlet fever, or some other like disease, just like we treat
+criminals, it would be regarded as brutal. To lock them up, and deprive
+them of the pleasures of living, simply to protect society, is wrong."
+
+"But the smallpox and scarlet fever patients are taken away so they will
+not give the complaints to others," observed Harry.
+
+"And that is right. I favor that and advocate that same thing with
+criminals. But the patients are not deprived of the things they have
+been accustomed to, and they are restored, when cured. It is not so with
+the poor unfortunate who errs. When he does come back he is hounded and
+looked upon as a tainted individual, although he may, in heart, be
+better than his accusers."
+
+During that day and the next, the natives and those who accompanied John
+associated with each other, and had many conversations. What interested
+them was the presence of the unfortunate paralytic who was unable to
+speak for himself.
+
+The boys did not believe that he was one of the crew of the school ship
+_Investigator_. What connection, if any, did he have with the skeleton
+they found the day before? was another of their queries.
+
+On the second day they were taken to the beach where the white man was
+found. There, as explained, he was found, with wreckage all about,
+during one of the raging monsoons with which the boys were so well
+acquainted, but aside from that there was not a vestige to show his name
+or where he was from.
+
+All the clothing worn by him originally, and of that there was scarcely
+any when found, had been worn threadbare, and he was now dressed in
+native garments. The chair in which he was reclining was undoubtedly
+from some wrecked ship, and had been in the possession of the villagers
+for years.
+
+John spoke to the old man concerning the patient, and advised him that
+they would soon call to take him away. They would thus relieve them of
+the burden, and endeavor to restore him to health, if it were possible
+to do so.
+
+The old man was thankful for the kind words uttered by John, and the
+latter assured him that before many moons passed he would return and
+show his appreciation for their kindness to a fellow creature.
+
+"But we do not feel that we have done anything which especially merits
+praise. He is one like ourselves, who was in distress, and we helped
+him."
+
+"Yes; you have done that which is right. We intend to reward you not
+that you should be paid for doing what is right, but to show that we
+appreciate your noble actions," answered John.
+
+The party, after many wishes and hearty good-byes, filed out of the
+village, some of them loath to go.
+
+Calmo was silent. He was not the same as before they marched through the
+village. John noticed it, but he wisely refrained from commenting on the
+sights they had witnessed. There was cleanliness and order in Hutoton;
+and filth and disorder in Sasite. It was impossible to be unconscious
+of the difference between the industry in one place, and the utter
+shiftlessness in the other.
+
+As it required two days to make the return journey, they were absent
+from Sasite nearly seven days, and, according to the calculations, the
+_Pioneer_ would be in from Unity within the next two days.
+
+During the intervening time the boys roamed at will through the island,
+and on the second day went directly south, so as to scour the sea front
+below the village.
+
+In the afternoon, as they were about to return, they saw a sail, George
+being the first to catch a glimpse of it. "The _Pioneer_," he cried,
+upon which they danced about in sheer joy and started for the village,
+which was distant several miles.
+
+They were almost out of breath when they rushed through the village, and
+cried out the news. Everybody was expectant; all were eager to see the
+vessel come in and Sutoto was the first to reach the landing.
+
+During the visit of the boys on the island, John had a crude dock
+constructed, and as the _Pioneer_ was of light draft, this was not a
+difficult thing to do, so that the passengers could land from the ship
+directly on the solid platform.
+
+The Chief was among the merry villagers. "Who is that man with the white
+hair!" he asked of Uraso.
+
+The latter was just as much surprised as his questioner, when he
+recognized the Professor, and he informed the Chief of the treat he
+would experience in meeting him. "He is the Great Wise man," added
+Uraso, "whom everybody loves."
+
+Muro, too, was astounded as the Professor came down. But a still greater
+surprise awaited the two chiefs. Muro's wife hailed him, and then
+Uraso's wife waved her handkerchief. This was too much for them, and
+waving aside all dignity they rushed forward to greet them.
+
+The whole thing had been so admirably arranged, that no one knew of the
+affair which had been planned by John. Sutoto joined in the merriment,
+but he was too anxious to see Stut to pay much attention to the
+greetings.
+
+The visitors discreetly refrained from saying a word to Sutoto,
+concerning the coming event. Besides the Chief's wives, there were
+several other women, of the Tribes in Wonder Island, together with some
+white men and their wives, who had been invited at the request of
+Blakely.
+
+The latter greeted John with that hearty expression so characteristic of
+the true commercial man, and he was not with John a minute before he was
+plying all sorts of questions about the resources of the island, the
+kind and number of inhabitants the nature of the soil, and the
+possibilities of mineral development.
+
+The Professor came down and was introduced to the Chief by Uraso.
+
+The great burly chief was fascinated. He gazed on the Professor and
+almost gasped, then turning to Uraso he said: "Ah! I know why he is a
+wise man."
+
+To Uraso this remark was indeed a puzzle; to think that the Chief had
+discovered the secret of the wisdom in the Professor! He was quick to
+ask why he knew it.
+
+"Because he has double eyes."
+
+Uraso laughed, and turned to the Professor, to whom he related the
+incident. Instantly the Professor removed the glasses, and courteously
+handed them to the Chief, and Uraso adjusted them to the Chief's eyes.
+
+He glanced around, through the lens, and forced out one expression of
+delight after the other. He was oblivious of everything else. He forgot
+that there were dozens of the visitors ready in line to be introduced to
+him; but all enjoyed the great pleasure he experienced in the new sight.
+
+But suddenly he stopped in his enthusiasm, and with an apology took off
+the glasses and held them up, in the act of handing them back. The
+Professor returned them, and took another pair from his pocket which he
+put on.
+
+It was not likely that the Chief could have received a more acceptable
+present, as his eyesight was failing, and the glasses seemed like the
+opening of a new world to him. Later on the Professor provided a pair of
+glasses better adapted to his sight.
+
+The Chief then became concerned about the comfort of his guests, so
+Uraso said: "Do not feel worried about the visitors. They will sleep on
+the vessel where they have comfortable rooms."
+
+The Chief could hardly believe the statements, as he muttered: "This is,
+indeed, wonderful."
+
+It would require pages to record the incidents that came to his
+attention about the wonders of these new people. The surprising thing
+was, that Uraso, and the natives of Wonder Island were dressed like the
+white people and acted like them, and yet he was told that all that
+wonderful change had come about in a little over two years' time.
+
+Muro's wife was quickly made acquainted with the Chief's wife, and the
+day following she had a consultation with her. Mida, who was Muro's
+wife, said: "I do not know whether or not you know of Sutoto's affection
+for Cinda, but we learned about it, and have come over to attend the
+ceremony."
+
+Linnea, the Chief's wife, smiled as Mida spoke to her. "Yes, I know of
+it, but the Chief has not yet been told."
+
+It seems that they had very curious and at the same time different
+customs among the various tribes, and Mida's object was to learn what
+their etiquette called for as to betrothals. Among some of the Wonder
+Island tribes, the Chief was the only one who has the right to consent
+to the marriage of the females, although the males could go to other
+tribes and secure wives without the consent of the Chief.
+
+In other tribes the women, the mothers, are the sole judges, and it is
+not infrequent for the parents of the bride to demand a payment,
+dependent on the rank or the riches of the father.
+
+Then the question of ceremonies is always an important one. It would be
+sacrilegious to perform the rite except in exact accordance with the
+prescribed rules. Sometimes those rules are so extremely different to
+those of another tribe that intermarriage between members of such tribes
+is impossible.
+
+Thus, a Tuolo could never marry a Saboro, nor could an Illya warrior
+take an Osaga for a bride. On all these points the women were adepts. It
+is more than likely, however, that Cinda and Sutoto had all that matter
+fully understood between them.
+
+"Did Stut tell you about Sutoto?" asked George.
+
+Harry laughed. "No; but I have a good one to tell you. What did he say?"
+
+"Well, you know he hired Stut to get him a wedding outfit, and a
+present?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"When the people left the vessel Sutoto sneaked back, and hunted up
+Stut. Of course Stut had the package all done up, and he is now taking
+it over to his hut."
+
+"I have something better than that. Sutoto is going to be married
+to-night."
+
+"How do you know?"
+
+"Cinda told one of her girl friends, and it frightened her so that she
+told Uraso."
+
+"Why that would spoil all the plans."
+
+"So it would, but Uraso told his sister."
+
+"Are you sure of that?"
+
+"Of course I am; I was there."
+
+"What did she say?"
+
+"She simply said 'I will take care of that.'"
+
+"Of course she will; she's a brick."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+SUTOTO AND CINDA'S MARRIAGE; AND THE SURPRISE
+
+
+Mida had learned the situation. Their customs as to marriages closely
+resembled that of the Saboros. In that tribe the Chief was the sole
+authority. To marry without his consent meant exile for the disobedient
+warrior, and for the bride as well.
+
+Sutoto was a member of the Berees, and there the mother was the
+matchmaker. She prescribed all the requirements. The first thing that
+Mida did was to insist that the Chief should be informed of the desires
+of the young people.
+
+To the delight of the two women he consented to the match, and he was
+then told that the people had come over from Wonder Island to take part
+in the ceremony. But when he was told that they intended to marry that
+night, by stealth, his brow was clouded.
+
+His law was that no one should marry without his consent, and he could
+not believe that Cinda could thus attempt to take the matter into her
+own hand. It was hard to think that his own child should be the first to
+break his law.
+
+The women pleaded with him, and then Mida confided her plan to him. The
+tribe's marriage ceremony was a very curious one. First, there must be a
+gift of fruit, then of fowl, and next of game. This must be brought to
+the door of the bride by the groom blindfolded.
+
+He must remain blindfolded while she prepares them for the table. Not a
+word must be spoken, or they must separate forever. A part of the
+ceremony requires that the invited guests are to resort to every sort of
+device to make them speak. The slightest sound by either is a sign that
+they will quarrel, and means the end of the affair.
+
+If they pass this test, the second comes when the bridegroom's eyes are
+uncovered. They are then to converse with each other, and they must not
+for a moment relax the talk. Neither has any knowledge of the time that
+this test must continue. There must be no faltering, or hesitancy.
+
+Mida conferred with John and the boys, as she told of these necessary
+requirements, and the boys laughed as they listened.
+
+"What is the object of all that?" inquired George.
+
+John was chuckling at the idea, but it stirred up a reminiscence. "That
+is a custom, in some of its features, that I learned about some tribes
+in central Africa. I can see the object of that rite. The taking of the
+gifts blindfolded signifies that he enters the marriage state blindly,
+and that he must do so in silence, and without asking any questions."
+
+"Of course, then, there is not any likelihood of them quarreling," said
+Harry.
+
+"That is what the Chief's wife said," replied Mida.
+
+"But what does all the talking mean?"
+
+[Illustration: "_The rites were progressing very satisfactorily_"
+                                                    [See p. 196]]
+
+"That is perfectly obvious. To show they can perfectly agree, even
+though they do talk."
+
+"But that is all before the real ceremony itself," said George. "How do
+they get married? That is the main thing."
+
+"Why," said Mida, "that is part of the marrying."
+
+"But they haven't promised anything. Marrying is promising."
+
+This occasioned another roar of merriment. "Yes; marriage is a contract
+under our law, but not so with these people. The only question with them
+is whether they are suited to each other."
+
+"But suppose they should not want to marry each other, or one of them
+should object," interposed Harry.
+
+"Ah! don't you see there is where the prospective bride or groom, in
+that case has a chance. If, in the first test he should speak, or in the
+last trial she should fail to keep up the conversation, then it would be
+all off."
+
+Mida confided her plans to the Chief and his wife. They were assured
+that Cinda would not think of overriding the well-known laws as to the
+gifts, and the two tests, and so it was arranged that Sutoto should be
+permitted to bring his offerings, which he would no doubt do, by
+stealth, while the Chief and all the visitors were to partake of the
+banquet on board of the vessel that evening.
+
+Sutoto and Cinda knew of the arrangements for the banquet, and that
+appeared to be a suitable occasion for them. When Sutoto appeared with
+the gifts he and Cinda were to be arrested by the Chief's warriors and
+brought aboard the vessel, charged with violating the law of the Chief
+in not first obtaining his permission.
+
+The boys remained ashore, and carefully watched the proceedings. How
+Sutoto got the presents the boys did not know, but they had a suspicion
+that Cinda had a hand in it. The boys laughed as they saw what a
+ridiculously short distance he had to go in a blindfolded state.
+
+Securely hidden in what was George's chamber, where he passed the first
+night of his captivity, they saw Sutoto with the offerings. Cinda took
+them, in silence, and disappeared, only to return instantly with the
+smoking viands.
+
+"I call that quick work," said Harry.
+
+"Yes, that's swift cooking," suggested George.
+
+They ate in silence. "I wonder where the bridesmaid is who intends to
+make them talk?"
+
+"Why don't you see her standing behind Cinda?"
+
+"You mean the servant?"
+
+"Of course."
+
+This was almost too amusing for the boys. The rites were progressing
+very satisfactorily. Then Cinda removed the bandage, and an ineffable
+smile stole over Sutoto's features.
+
+They commenced to talk. The maid said a few words, but the lovers paid
+no attention. The ceremony was going along just as-a perfect one should,
+when four stalwart warriors rushed in and seized Sutoto. Cinda knew who
+they were, and she sprang at them, as two seized her also.
+
+One of them addressed a word to Sutoto, and then spoke to Cinda, and
+without further ceremony they were taken out through the open portal,
+and hurried to the ship.
+
+The boys followed at a respectful distance, and when the pair had
+reached the deck the boys scrambled up, and hurriedly made their way to
+the large room, or cabin, where the Chief and the visitors were
+assembled, and which was brilliantly lighted for the occasion.
+
+The criminals were brought before the Chief, who arose, and with a
+severe countenance began to upbraid Sutoto for his crime. Cinda
+meanwhile glanced around at the brilliant sight. She saw nothing to
+excite fear. Both were free from the warriors and stood there side by
+side, a handsome couple, as every one admitted.
+
+Sutoto saw the boys. Just like boys are apt to be on such an occasion,
+they could not repress their laughter, although it was a silent
+exhibition of mirth. Then Sutoto knew, and so did Cinda, for she was not
+too much abashed to look up at Sutoto, while she leaned over and rested
+her head against him, and laid her hand on his arm.
+
+Then the boys stopped laughing. There was nothing laughable about it
+now. It seemed too beautiful to laugh at, and when the great Chief went
+over, and rubbed his nose against Sutoto's every one knew that the
+compact was sealed.
+
+I wish it were possible to describe the delight shown in the eyes of the
+bride and groom when they were led to the table containing the wedding
+gifts that came to them from Wonder Island.
+
+"Oh! I am so sorry!" said Harry.
+
+"Sorry for what? Yes, yes, I know now. We have nothing to give Sutoto,
+as our presents." And George said it with genuine grief.
+
+Most of the articles exhibited were for the use of the bride, and
+designed for the home, of the new couple; but there was a fine array of
+the little trinkets which so delight the feminine heart.
+
+The party sat down to the feast, with Sutoto and Cinda at one end of the
+table, while Mida presided at the other, the Chief being at her right,
+and his wife at her left.
+
+For the first time in their lives they were to eat their food with
+knives and forks. They were adepts with the sharpened stick, which
+George had noted, and there was amusement at the many incidents that the
+new order brought forth.
+
+"I remember," said George, "that the Professor told us the Italians,
+about the year 1700, were the first to use forks."
+
+"Yes," replied John. "As late as the year 1800 the English did not use
+the fork, but the knife, for conveying food to the mouth; but the
+new-fangled idea, when once introduced, became universal, soon after
+that time; and it was then the custom for travelers to carry their own
+knives and forks when traveling."
+
+The Professor said, addressing the Chief: "I am surprised that you use a
+fork at the table. While we do so universally, it was not originally our
+custom."
+
+"I can remember," replied the Chief, "when it was not the habit to use
+any implement, but all were required to take food from the same dish
+with the hands. But at that time food was not served hot, but allowed to
+cool. But we found that the eating of hot articles became a custom, and
+then we had to use the pointed forks."
+
+"I am curious to know what gives the roast such a beautiful flavor!"
+asked the Chief's wife. "I am told that you do not use leaves for
+flavoring."
+
+"No," said Mida. "We now use spices, and the flavor is made more
+distinct by adding salt."
+
+"What kinds of spices are used?"
+
+"For meats, principally pepper, of which I have no doubt you have plenty
+on your island."
+
+Of course, there was coffee, which grew in abundance in Wonder Island,
+and numerous trees of which had been discovered by the boys of the
+Chief's island. When this was brought out, and the natives first tasted
+it, there was some doubt on their part as to its food value.
+
+Added interest was given to it when the Chief was induced to try it with
+a bountiful supply of cream and sugar. Then these articles attracted
+their attention.
+
+"Is this a fruit?" he asked as a lump of sugar was handed him.
+
+"No, it is made from cane, or from some vegetables."
+
+"Made from vegetables? How can it be made from them? There is part of
+the flavor of fruit, but I cannot taste any vegetables in it."
+
+Then the Professor explained that all fruit, as well as vegetables, had
+the same taste, and that they took out only that part and left the
+other.
+
+"But what is this white liquid which you use in the new drink?"
+
+"It is called 'cream,' and the cream is made from milk?"
+
+"And what is milk made of?"
+
+"It is taken from cows, a large animal, that people raise for that
+purpose."
+
+As there was nothing on the island that was as large as a cow, or that
+resembled it in any manner, the Chief's curiosity was unbounded.
+
+"I would like to see the animal from which this was obtained."
+
+"But we have no animal with us."
+
+"Then it never spoils?"
+
+"Oh, yes, it will quickly grow sour and unpleasant if allowed to remain
+in a warm place."
+
+He looked around in bewilderment, and the Professor seeing his
+embarrassment, continued: "In the ship we have a way to prevent the
+cream and the milk, as well, from spoiling. We will show you that."
+
+Thus one article after the other called for some comment, and
+explanation. To the natives from Wonder Island this meal was an object
+lesson of only a few of the many things which they had learned from the
+white people.
+
+But Sutoto and his bride could not be forgotten. When the meal was
+finished, the Professor arose, and said: "I have some news to impart to
+you. When the white people first came to Wonder Island, they found
+Uraso, and Muro, and they were the first to come to our aid against
+powerful tribes."
+
+"One of their neighbors had at its head a wise Chief, Suros, known and
+respected by friend and foe alike, and he readily adopted the ideas of
+the white men, and offered his tribe to save us from destruction at the
+hands of those who were unfriendly."
+
+"Sutoto was the nephew of the wise Chief Suros, and I have come to tell
+you that he is dead, and that we have been mourning for him."
+
+Every one who glanced at Sutoto, saw that it greatly affected him. This
+address was translated to the Chief, by Uraso, as the Professor
+proceeded, the latter speaking it in such measured sentences, that it
+could be quickly grasped by the interpreter.
+
+"We have all been sad, since his death, and we shall erect a suitable
+monument to his memory on our return."
+
+The Chief looked at the Professor, and the latter instantly divined that
+he wanted some enlightenment.
+
+"What does the white Chief mean by that?"
+
+"It is the custom of the white man to put up something that all the
+people may look at, for years and years afterwards, so as to remind them
+that he has lived, and to tell the people what good he has done."
+
+"And why should the people do that?"
+
+"So as to teach people the example, and try to make them be good as he
+was."
+
+"Do your people need to have such examples to make them do good?"
+
+"That may not be necessary," replied the Professor, as he vainly tried
+to hide the smile that was trying to manifest itself.
+
+"But do you not find it necessary to set the people a good example?"
+asked the Professor.
+
+For a moment he looked around at the company in bewilderment, and he
+slowly replied: "No, I do not think it would do any good. If the people
+are bad, and they want to be bad, it will do them no good to tell them
+that I have always tried to do right."
+
+There was a respectful silence, at this avowal, and the Professor
+continued: "There are many who think as you do, and we had one great
+teacher, called Confucius, who said: 'Do good not for the hope of
+reward, but because it is right.' Then we have also a precept which,
+interpreted, means: that happiness is in the heart."
+
+"I do not know what that means," he replied.
+
+"It means that the desire and the wish must come from within, and not
+from without." And the savage nodded an assent.
+
+"But," continued the Professor, "I have some news to impart, that makes
+us all happy again. It is something that pertains to Sutoto, and I know
+you will all join in wishing him all happiness in the good fortune which
+Wonder Island brings to him, while this island is vying with us to make
+him happy."
+
+What was this happy thing that the Professor portended? There was
+intense eagerness in the eyes of all who had left Wonder Island when the
+_Pioneer_ sailed away, three weeks before.
+
+"I want to present to you Sutoto, the new Chief of the Berees." The
+Professor could get no further. George and Harry were wild with
+excitement, and they bounded over to him and actually hugged him. Poor
+Cinda did not for the moment know what all this excitement meant.
+
+She supposed that this was the white man's part of the ceremony, and
+quietly submitted. But she was quickly informed, and as she glanced at
+her father and mother, and the people came by and affectionately greeted
+them, she was so happy that tears actually flowed.
+
+Then John came forward with a large box, which he carefully opened, and
+drew forth two packages, one of which he unwrapped, while Mida took the
+strings from the other.
+
+"We want to present you these tokens, the presents of George and Harry.
+You are to wear these as an emblem of your authority." And George and
+Mida placed the most beautiful crown shaped hats on the heads of the
+couple.
+
+"Is this part of the ceremony too?" asked Cinda, as she slyly glanced at
+Sutoto.
+
+It is impossible to say who were the most surprised people, the boys or
+Sutoto, since these presents had been prepared without their knowledge,
+and it atoned in a way for their neglect in not thinking of the gifts
+before.
+
+But there were also other agreeable surprises in store for them. The
+wives of Uraso and Muro led Cinda to the table on which the presents
+were exposed, and also exhibited the many beautiful garments which had
+been prepared for her.
+
+Her bewilderment was still greater when she was directed to turn, and
+found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror which the boys had
+brought up, under the Professor's directions.
+
+Her image in the mirror startled the bride beyond measure, and she
+innocently asked Sutoto whether this was also a part of the wedding
+ceremony.
+
+According to the custom of the tribe, the couple had to go through the
+ordeal of the tribal dance, and when the boys learned of this they
+regretted that provision had not been made for the event. They were now
+in for everything which belonged to this unique wedding. The entire
+party broke up, and the boys regretted that the affair came to an end so
+soon.
+
+As they filed down the steps and marched along the dock to the shore
+they noticed that the entire village was shining brightly with hundreds
+of the native candles, and everywhere were the well-known lamps, which
+the boys knew came from Wonder Island.
+
+"What does all that mean?" asked Harry, as John came up.
+
+"That means the dance, that is the final requirement of the wedding
+ceremony."
+
+"But where are the dancers? Are we to take part?"
+
+"Oh, no; no one who has partaken of the feast is permitted to take
+part."
+
+"Well, that is certainly queer."
+
+"Not more so than among many white people, where the dancers are those
+who have been specially selected for the purpose, and are professionals.
+In Biblical times the Jews had dancing as part of the religious
+ceremony, and that which took place in the Temple was participated in
+only by special ones set apart for that purpose."
+
+No one was in sight, however, and the Chief led the entire company to a
+large green space, not far from his dwelling, and after a circle had
+been formed, they heard a peculiar humming sound, which seemed to be all
+about them, and this increased in intensity, and when at its height, two
+dozen or more of the native girls rushed in with a gliding, swaying
+motion, and circled around with peculiar grace, continuously giving
+forth the weird sounds that have been described.
+
+It was intensely dramatic, and fascinated the boys. They had never seen
+anything so remarkable in its character, and for once they were unable
+to question its meaning, or ask for information concerning it.
+
+For an hour this continued, until the boys thought the performers would
+certainly drop dead with fatigue; then, one after the other disappeared,
+and with each disappearance the sound of the humming grew less until but
+one remained. In some way, unknown to the boys she made the last circle
+around the green, bearing a wreath of leaves, and as she approached
+Sutoto and Cinda, wheeled about, and threw it over them.
+
+"That is the final act," said John. "See, they are both within the
+wreath, and it signifies that they are bound together forever, even as
+the wreath, which has no end."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+HUTOTON; THE PLACE OF DEATH
+
+
+But the boys knew that they had some important things to attend to. The
+pleasures of life have an important part, but they were now engaged in
+serious work. The fact that they had accomplished so much was a great
+incentive to go on and investigate other things which were still
+mysteries, and which might be of great value to them.
+
+The coming of the Professor had been a great pleasure to them. The
+developments of the past two weeks were ever in their minds and they
+could not repress the curiosity to visit the other islands, if such
+could be found.
+
+Now that Sutoto was married they knew he would not be with them for a
+time, and they had not talked over the future plans. When, the next day,
+they and the Professor and John were together to consider the next step,
+it was with joy that the Professor informed them of the purpose of John
+to continue the investigations throughout that part of the ocean.
+
+"It seems that your interpretation of Walter's note was entirely wrong,"
+said John. "In any event it is certain that we are more than thirty
+leagues from Wonder Island, and not in the direction he pointed out."
+
+"Then it is likely that if there is an island which will fit the place,
+it must be to the north," said Harry.
+
+"That would be a natural conclusion," he answered. "It has occurred to
+me that the natural place for an island would be to the north."
+
+The boys looked at him with surprise. "What makes you think so?" asked
+George.
+
+"I judged so, merely from the conformation of this island."
+
+"What is there in the island that makes you think so?"
+
+"You have noticed that the island is very narrow east and west, and very
+much longer north and south."
+
+"Yes; but that still does not make it plain to me."
+
+"The island may be like the ridge of a mountain cropping out of the
+ocean. For instance, the Andes and the Sierras in the United States run
+north and south. Now suppose the ocean should cover the land, those
+mountains would form islands which would naturally be north and south of
+each other, and the islands themselves would be longer north and south
+than east and west."
+
+"I see the idea. But we might find them to the south of this island, as
+well."
+
+"Certainly; but as the northern section brings us nearer the supposed
+thirty leagues, we should, I think, make the investigation there first."
+
+It was necessary that Sutoto should go back to Wonder Island. His
+position as Chief of the Berees made this essential. Furthermore, the
+age of the Professor made traveling and the hardships of investigating
+on foot a hard task, and besides it was necessary to take back the
+visitors.
+
+"I have suggested to the Chief that we shall return, and have invited
+him to accompany us, and I am gratified to say that he has accepted. We
+shall, therefore, be ready to return within a few days," said the
+Professor.
+
+"Have you said anything to him about the contemplated visit to Hutoton?"
+asked John.
+
+"No; but I shall do so at once."
+
+"Oh! that will give us an opportunity to take the paralytic back with
+us," suggested Harry.
+
+"Yes; that will be the reason for our stopping there."
+
+"Wouldn't it be a good idea to sail to the north, and investigate in
+that direction, on our way home?" remarked George.
+
+"That has occurred to me."
+
+The Chief gave careful instructions to his son, Calmo, in view of his
+proposed trip, and informed the Professor that he was anxious to
+accompany them at the earliest opportunity.
+
+Two days thereafter, the entire party boarded the ship, and the course
+was set for the northern part of the island. There the Chief had the
+first opportunity to see the dreadful place where the criminals of his
+community had been sent.
+
+There was no resentment on the part of the convicts. On the other hand,
+there was the most effusive welcome extended, and when the Chief saw the
+happiness and prosperity there, which he could not help but contrast
+with his own people, he was amazed.
+
+The unfortunate patient was carefully taken to the ship, and during his
+removal did not in the least indicate by any sign that he knew what was
+going on about him.
+
+John took many stores from the ship, and particularly garments, and
+articles of food for the people. All participated in the division, and
+the old man was delighted when he saw the gifts, the more so when John
+told him that they would soon be visited and other stores provided.
+
+When the rolling motion of the boat was felt by the stricken man, he
+showed the first symptoms of consciousness. Sometimes he would look
+about him, and try to grasp something. On several occasions the
+Professor saw him open his eyes with a sort of questioning look.
+
+But we cannot dwell too long on the result of the patient's progress, at
+this time. John felt, as did the Professor, that from that man they
+would be able to learn something, if he could ever regain his faculties.
+The boys gathered that much from the conversation, so that, for the
+present, he must be left to the tender care of the Professor, until
+later events are recorded.
+
+From Hutoton the ship sailed directly north, it being understood that if
+no land was sighted before evening it would be useless to go farther in
+that direction. The _Pioneer_ was a good sailer, and could easily, with
+a fair wind, make ten miles an hour, so they would have fully seven
+hours' run to test out their theory of land in that direction.
+
+Before five o'clock John, who was constantly on the watch, came to the
+Professor and remarked that he believed the haze to the north indicated
+the presence of land. This was soon communicated to the boys, and there
+was no more idleness from that time on.
+
+John's theory was correct. Slowly certain fixed objects appeared and
+some outlines that looked like mountains, and the boys could not repress
+their anxiety at the anticipated shore.
+
+"Then we were right, after all," said Harry.
+
+John smiled, as he replied: "I do not know; the calculations have not
+yet been made."
+
+"I would like to know how our position can be found out from an
+examination of the sun," remarked George.
+
+"That will require a long answer to explain fully but I shall try to
+answer it in a simple manner. The sailor takes an observation of the sun
+in two directions, namely, north and south, and east and west. You know,
+of course, that the sun moves north in the summer and south in the
+winter, and that the extreme southern point is in midwinter, Dec. 20:
+that in the spring, or March 20, it is directly above the equator, and
+in midsummer, or, on June 20, it is as far north as it can go."
+
+"You mean," said George, "that it would be north of the equator."
+
+"As we have the same calendar over the entire world, it is true
+everywhere. The difference is, of course, that summer and winter, and
+spring and autumn are reversed, north and south of the equator. All
+estimates as to locations are made by measuring angles."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun._]
+
+"Then it must be something like surveying?"
+
+"Yes; the same principles are applied. Here is a sketch, which shows the
+earth A, and B is the equatorial line. C is the position of the sun on
+September 20, or on June 20."
+
+"Why are they in the same position on both days?"
+
+"Yes; the sun crosses the equator September 20, on its way south, and
+then it again recrosses the equator coming north six months afterwards.
+On either of those days, if a person should stand at D, and look at the
+sun, there would be a line E, which projects out from the earth to the
+sun, and that is called the equatorial line."
+
+"It is exactly at right angles to F, which passes through the poles. Now
+the drawing shows two other positions, namely G and H. These represent
+the extreme points of the travel of the sun north and south, or the
+positions that the sun occupy on Dec. 20, and June 20 of each year."
+
+"I see," said Harry. "The points G and H are just 23 degrees north and
+south of the equator."
+
+"That is correct, and there is another thing which can be learned from
+their positions."
+
+"I know what it is."
+
+"What?"
+
+"It gives another line, or angle."
+
+"So now we have two angles, this, and the equatorial line. Then, we know
+the exact distance of the sun from the earth, and this gives the first
+measurement, and with the angle formed by the line I, taken in
+connection with the line E, it is easy to determine just where, or how
+far the sun is to the north or to the south, and if you did not, for
+instance, know the time of the year, a man could by such a measurement,
+tell, by the angle thus formed, the exact date."
+
+"I understand that now," remarked George. "The sailor, in getting the
+angle, simply measures that, and if he knows where the sun is on that
+day he will then have two angles, one that he knows beforehand, and the
+other that he finds out by looking at the sun."
+
+"That is correct. The Nautical Chart gives all that information, so that
+it saves a large amount of work in making the calculations."
+
+"That gives the way to determine positions north and south. But how
+about east and west?"
+
+"In the same manner exactly so far as the angle measurements are
+concerned, but in this case, instead of taking the time, in days or in
+months, as in reckoning north and south, we must take time in minutes,
+and to do that the entire globe is laid off in minutes and degrees,
+which the nautical tables give, and the mariner knows when he obtains a
+certain angle just how far east or west he is located by the chart."
+
+"But if he has no chart?"
+
+"Then he must figure out the position for himself, which he can do if he
+has what is called Greenwich, or standard time, and has, also the
+correct time of the day where his ship is."
+
+Land was beyond; there was no question of that. It rose out of the water
+higher than the island they had just left, which the boys had named
+_Venture_ Island.
+
+The Chief knew nothing of the land before them. He had told John that
+years before he learned that there was a land where there were many bad
+people, who killed and ate each other, but he did not know the exact
+direction.
+
+The vessel was sailed along the coast, and the field glasses were used
+to scan the land. It had the appearance of the other islands which they
+now knew. Vegetation was magnificent, and growing everywhere, but there
+was not the sign of a habitation anywhere.
+
+After an hour's sail they rounded a point, and beyond was the first
+cove, or indentation along the coast. To that John directed the course
+of the vessel, and they ran in very close, since he knew from the abrupt
+sloping beach that it must be a deep bay.
+
+The men could scarcely man the boat quickly enough. A dozen of them,
+together with John, Muro and Uraso, took the first boat, while a second
+boat was filled with the warriors who also were accompanied by some of
+the natives of Venture island.
+
+The Professor and the others remained on board, while the party made the
+preliminary examinations of the immediate neighborhood. John formed two
+parties, one under command of Muro, and the other of Uraso. The boys
+were with Uraso, while he was with Muro. The object was to find out as
+quickly as possible what they would have to meet, and the result would
+enable them to determine the future plans.
+
+"It is understood, now," remarked John, "that the two exploring parties
+shall take the two courses outlined, Muro and his men, to go directly
+east, while Uraso will take a course to the northeast, and proceed in
+that direction for three hours, and then the two parties are to turn
+toward each other, and mutually report. This will give us an
+opportunity to find out something, unless the island is a very large
+one, and requires subsequent exploration to ascertain whether it is
+inhabited."
+
+John had purposely selected the route to the east, as he saw the high
+elevation in that direction, and George laughed, as he said, slyly:
+"John is still after the caves," and Harry laughed, as he recalled the
+keenness with which John had arranged the trips.
+
+John did make his way to the highest points, and soon learned, from the
+observations, that the island was inhabited, but the trip of the boys
+was more exciting, so we shall more particularly detail their
+adventures.
+
+Before they had gone two hours evidences grew thick and fast that tribes
+inhabited the island. Muro, and the different men, were continually
+finding traces, none of them, however, which indicated that the people
+were near at hand, or that the telltale marks had been recently made.
+
+But now signs began to be apparent to the boys also; the bones of
+animals, lying around the spot where a fire had been gave them the first
+real sensation. Muro glanced at the boys, and at some bones, and the
+action on his part was so peculiar, that George quietly remarked:
+
+"Muro looked so peculiarly at me when I glanced at the bones, over
+there, that I wonder what he meant?"
+
+"I saw it too," answered Harry. "Let us have another look at them;" and
+acting on the suggestion they went over. Muro followed. They did not
+appear to pay any attention to him; but he was quick to join them, and
+as he did so he slowly nodded his head.
+
+"Are they human remains?" said Harry, as he turned to Muro,
+questioningly.
+
+"Yes; and this is not the first we have seen," he answered. "We may find
+them now at any time. I am now sure that there are several tribes here."
+
+"What makes you believe so?"
+
+"Because we have found different kinds of hair, which is usually the
+best evidence of the differences in the tribes, as each has its own
+peculiarity."
+
+"Savages, and cannibals!" said George reflectively.
+
+"But we must go on. We have still an hour in this direction before we
+turn to the south and east," said Harry.
+
+There was more caution now exercised, and the speed was accordingly
+reduced, in view of the especial care which they took. In order to
+understand what happened the reader should know something of the nature
+of the country.
+
+Some places in Wonder Island had the same sort of timber and
+undergrowth, and they went through some dense forests, in which vines
+and small brush made traveling difficult. They had to cut their way
+through some of this vegetation.
+
+The land was not low or flat. If it had been there would have been a
+dense jungle. Sometimes they passed through half-grown forests, and
+these places were the most difficult to scour, because an enemy might
+be within fifty feet, and not be discovered.
+
+It was in just such a place that they received their first surprise; a
+shower of arrows, so thick that they instantly knew it could not have
+been made by only a dozen or so. Some of the arrows found their marks,
+and two of the men sank down, while Muro coolly drew one of the crude
+missiles from his arm.
+
+"Drop down!" cried Muro.
+
+There was not a savage in sight; still a number of arrows fell around
+them. "Remain quiet, and I will find them?" said Muro, as he crept
+forward quietly through the dense grass.
+
+George and Harry followed, although it was evident it was not Muro's
+wish. Before they had gone ten feet, Muro turned, and pointed ahead.
+"They are there; at least one party. Get ready for a shot."
+
+The savages, noting the quiet in their front, now cautiously peered
+through the bush, and the boys saw the most hideous countenances. "We
+might give them a round," said Muro, and after carefully aiming, the
+guns spoke.
+
+The simultaneous explosion of the three guns, raised pandemonium on all
+sides. They were now surrounded by at least a hundred of the savages,
+but for some reason the little party of twenty awed them, and instead of
+making a charge, they rushed toward the place where the three victims of
+the gunshots lay.
+
+[Illustration: "_She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval
+mirror_" [See p. 204]]
+
+Muro's arm was bleeding profusely, and George quickly bound it up,
+while the enemy were hesitating. "Do not shoot, unless they rush at us.
+I will talk: to them, and try to get an understanding."
+
+Then, in a loud voice Muro called to them, saying they were friends, and
+not enemies. There was no response. Thinking that they knew nothing of
+the dialect, he tried another, and the only response was the evident
+determination of the savages to attack again.
+
+The boys and Muro could plainly hear their chattering, but the latter
+said that what they were saying was not intelligible to him, and that
+they must now prepare for a fight.
+
+"Get your guns ready, and be prepared for a charge. If they come so
+close that you cannot use the guns, then we must be prepared to meet
+them with our knives, and we must all stand together, and not become
+separated."
+
+Instead of attacking, however, there was silence, after the first
+excitement. "They are trying to find, out what struck their comrades
+when we fired," remarked Muro.
+
+"Yes; I think it was a big surprise."
+
+"I recall," continued Muro, "when we had our first brush with you that
+we could not find the arrow which we supposed was made by your bullet.
+That frightened us more than anything else."
+
+There was not the slightest movement on the part of an enemy for a full
+half hour. This is the most trying sort of tactics. If you can see the
+enemy, or note that he is doing something, there is some relief to the
+tension, but where he can neither be seen, nor heard, it tries the
+nerves of the strongest man.
+
+Muro knew that this inactivity on the part of the savages had its
+purpose. Probably, they intended to remain there until night, and
+overwhelm them in the rush. Muro had other plans, however.
+
+"We cannot remain here. We must make the attack. Remain here, and permit
+me to feel out their positions, and also to determine what they are
+doing." He glided away from them noiselessly, and how he kept the tall
+grass and weeds from swaying, the boys could not determine at that time.
+
+It did not take Muro long to see the situation. They were surrounded by
+a cordon of savages, and while spying, saw a new lot of them coming up.
+The plan was plain enough, and it meant a fight now, or a night defense.
+
+When he returned, he had his plans formed. "They are being reinforced,
+and we have, probably, a hundred and fifty, or more, around us. John is,
+no doubt, too far away to come to our assistance, and our only hope is
+to attack them now, so we might as well take the necessary steps."
+
+While on his investigations Muro had discovered a fallen tree, which was
+not more than fifty feet to their left. "We must reach that tree, and by
+digging a shallow trench at one side, can easily defend ourselves, as
+well as pick them off at our leisure."
+
+Slowly they moved, in crawling attitudes, toward the place indicated.
+The tree was not a large one, but it made an admirable breastworks, and
+with their knives each man dug out a shallow hole, piling up the earth
+beyond the hole, so as to shelter them from the arrows, which they knew
+would be rained on them.
+
+This work required a full half hour, and when it was completed, and Muro
+had satisfied himself that each one was supplied with sufficient
+ammunition, he was ready for the second stage of the game.
+
+"We must attract them, by some form of action. I will take three with
+me, and crawl forward, until we can catch glimpse of some of the
+watchers. Those we will attack, and then fall back, and do the same on
+the other sides."
+
+Muro indicated those who were to follow, and after going only a short
+distance the boys heard the shots, then four more. This brought the
+sounds of voices from every direction. Muro and his men, during the
+excitement, crawled to another portion of the line, and repeated the
+manoeuver.
+
+This, for the moment threw them into consternation, but they quickly
+rallied, and now it was plain that they were pressing forward to rush
+the position occupied by the boys. It was now obvious that the
+precaution of making the defensive position, as Muro had suggested, was
+their only salvation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+DISCOVERY OF A NEW ISLAND, AND A SAVAGE TRIBE
+
+
+Nothing could describe the uproar that the second volley created in the
+ranks of the besiegers. Yell after yell came from the hundreds of
+throats that were about them. It was now war to the end. There could be
+no compromise.
+
+While the boys had been in many difficult and trying experiences before,
+this was the first time that they grew pale, and had strong misgivings.
+They knew, however, that the object of the shrieks and yells of savages
+were for the purpose of driving terror into the hearts of their foes.
+
+In this respect it might not thus affect them, but when they considered
+the overwhelming numbers around them, we cannot blame them for feeling
+alarmed.
+
+They were coming forward, and on all sides. "Remember, what John used to
+tell us: it is the shots that hit which count. Fire deliberately, and
+keep together. Do not use your revolvers until they are close, and you
+cannot use the guns."
+
+Closer and closer they came, and Muro and the men were silent. "Now, get
+ready! Shoot deliberately!"
+
+The first salvo was fired. It was a staggering blow. They reloaded,
+while the enemy was trying to recover, and the second volley belched
+forth.
+
+Then, when the execution was noticed, and they saw their people fall all
+about them, they charged forward in one mass, and the boys looked at
+each other, for a moment, and George reached over and gave Harry's hand
+one pressure, and then turned away and began to fire as fast as he could
+aim the weapon.
+
+They were still coming on. The demons were nearly up to the log. For
+some reason the savages did not heed those who fell. It had not struck
+terror into their hearts, as the boys hoped. How would this end? The
+enemy was now too close to make their guns of any use. The revolvers
+were drawn, and the cracks from them became almost a continuous roar.
+
+They were still coming. Soon the ammunition would be gone. The boys
+realized this. They were determined to die fighting, and they began to
+feel for their knives which must be the final act in the great tragedy.
+
+Then they heard something louder than the cracks of their own weapons
+and the shrieks of the devils around them. Some one was shooting. They
+could see the startled faces of the savages, as they turned and swung
+around. The attack ceased, and Muro sprang up on the log, with a yell.
+
+Could he be mad? The boys were stupefied. "Come on!" cried Muro. "Here
+is John!"
+
+This announcement, coming at an unexpected moment, was such a reaction
+to the poor boys, that they could hardly raise themselves. Another
+volley; they could hear it now. There was another yell from the savages,
+and then they could be seen rushing through the brush.
+
+The men with John ran up, and John struggled forward through the weeds.
+"Are you hurt?" asked John, as he sprang to the side of the boys.
+
+"No! no!" cried George, and he fell down, overcome with the excitement,
+while Harry could not speak for a moment.
+
+"That was a close call," said John. "We heard the first shots an hour
+ago, and we turned to take this direction. Then we heard nothing for a
+long time, and as we were coming over the hill beyond the firing
+commenced but we could see nothing, so we hurried forward and soon saw
+the smoke, and then the savages coming from the bush, and directly to
+the east we noticed fifty or more coming this way, but they are not here
+yet."
+
+"I wonder how many attacked us?" asked George.
+
+"It is difficult to tell, but it is safe to say that there were at least
+two hundred in the fight. Oh, no; the boys will not follow them up very
+far," said John, as Harry looked apprehensively toward the direction
+that John's men were going.
+
+He blew the whistle, and gradually the men straggled in, reporting that
+the savages appeared terror-stricken, as they had had no idea that there
+was another force in the neighborhood, and they did not stop to consider
+the possible number.
+
+"I am sorry for these poor people," remarked John. "We must hunt up the
+wounded."
+
+Searchers were set to work, and the wounded, when found, were carried to
+an open place beyond, and their hurts examined and bandaged. At first
+terror showed itself on their faces, but as John and Muro, together with
+the boys, washed their wounds, and wrapped bandages around the limbs,
+they lay there and marveled at the actions of their enemies.
+
+More than two dozen had been killed, and forty-two wounded, nearly all
+in the legs or bodies, those having arm wounds being enabled to get
+away.
+
+On Muro's orders a watch was set on the movements of the savages, and
+from time to time reports were brought in concerning them. They had
+retreated eastwardly, and were now off less than a half mile, where they
+were assembled, and evidently debating the situation.
+
+John and Muro well knew that their present force, now numbering
+forty-one, and all well armed, would be more than a match for the savage
+force, still, it would not be advisable to prolong the explorations for
+the day, as it was desirable to report the situation of affairs to the
+Professor.
+
+After making the sufferers comfortable they started on the march back to
+the ship. During the period while caring for the wounded, John and Muro
+tried to engage the savages in conversation but all attempts to learn
+their language failed, and, as they were about to leave, John said to
+Muro:
+
+"Do you think that man is a chief?"
+
+"I know he is; I spotted him from the first, and saw from his actions,
+and the fact of his being obeyed, that he was a man of some authority."
+
+"I agree with you," said Uraso, "that he is the one we must take with
+us."
+
+A litter was quickly improvised and the savage gently laid on, and with
+this, as their only encumbrance, they started for the return march. Five
+of the men had been wounded, all in the arms and body, and none of them
+dangerously, so that there was no trouble in the march.
+
+They filed out to the west, avoiding as much exposure as possible.
+Muro's men had been on the observing line, and at Muro's suggestion they
+occasionally showed themselves, so as to assure the natives that they
+were still holding their ground.
+
+As the two forces were starting for the ship, Muro prepared a decoy, so
+that the savages could see what appeared to be two figures. Then he
+hurriedly told John what he had done, and the march began, as rapidly as
+possible, at first, and a rear guard was provided to watch the movements
+of their enemies.
+
+Two miles beyond the scene of the fight the party halted, and George was
+assisted to climb a tree, from which point they might be seen.
+
+"I can see them plainly," he called down. "They are now around the
+wounded. I cannot see what they are doing, but there is a big crowd."
+
+He waited for some time, and then cried out: "I believe they are coming
+this way. I think it is time for us to be moving." And George slipped
+down, as John gave the order to go on.
+
+The rear guard, with John and Uraso, were now following up behind the
+marchers. "Go on, without stopping," he said, as they took up their
+positions.
+
+The boys begged to be permitted to remain with the rear guard, but John
+refused to have them exposed. In an hour and a half they ascended an
+elevation from which the ship could be seen in the bay to the southwest.
+
+During that time only once had the runner returned from John to notify
+them of the progress of the natives. The last information, therefore,
+was about a half hour before, and it was now obvious that the savages
+were determined to follow them up, and this would bring them within view
+of the vessel.
+
+Before descending the last declivity that led to the beach, John and the
+Chief appeared, and told the boys that all of the tribe was behind them,
+and that the cause of the pursuit was, unquestionably, to recover the
+Chief who had been taken along.
+
+At the suggestion of John three shots were fired to attract the
+attention of those on the boat, while several of the fleetest runners
+speeded down the beach and quickly advised the Professor of the
+situation.
+
+Two boat loads of warriors were quickly sent to shore, and when John and
+the party with him came up to the beach, the savages had reached the
+crest of the hill, and ranged up in line, but halted to witness the
+spectacle before them.
+
+The wounded chief was taken to the vessel, and the Professor immediately
+gave him the best care, but he remarked: "This man is desperately
+wounded, and will require the best of attention to enable him to pull
+through."
+
+All the men were finally placed on board, and their experiences related.
+An immediate consultation was held. John and the boys insisted on
+remaining with a sufficient force to enable them to carry out their
+explorations, but the Professor seemed to oppose it.
+
+"I quite agree with you that, from what John has said, there are reasons
+aside from the cannibals over there, why we should explore it from one
+end to the other."
+
+The boys cast a side glance at John. Did John find something that made
+him so insistent to remain? They repressed their curiosity, however, for
+the time. To their minds they thought the natives were the incentive,
+notwithstanding the terrible fight they had just engaged in, although
+they were willing to take the risk.
+
+But it was finally settled. John was to have the force now on board, and
+he, with the boys, was to explore, and, if need be, to conquer the
+natives on the island. The _Pioneer_ would, in the meantime, sail to
+Wonder Island, and return with food and ammunition, and reinforcements.
+
+There was thus left at their disposal fifty-five men, with a fair supply
+of ammunition. Uraso and Muro were to be of the party, as events just
+related showed that there was serious work to do before they might be
+able to return.
+
+That night, while making the final arrangements on the vessel, the boys
+sought John, and asked him more particularly concerning his trip.
+
+"We have had no opportunity to speak to you, but the Professor said you
+had learned enough about the island to determine you to explore it
+fully," said George.
+
+"That is true. I have found what I believe to be the identical spot
+described in the charts, and I have found the solution, I think, of
+Walter's note and of the skull."
+
+This was, indeed, something of importance to them, but John informed
+them that for certain reasons it might be better to defer the
+explanation until they had made the final explorations.
+
+The boys knew he must have some pretty good reason for thus explaining
+and laying the matter before them, and they forebore further
+questionings.
+
+The next morning, when all the supplies and ammunition had been taken
+off, and the final good-byes were said, the party stood on the shore
+while the _Pioneer_ slowly moved out, and was soon racing before the
+wind on its way to Wonder Island.
+
+A council was held before they attempted to march into the interior. "I
+have every reason to believe that the band which we met yesterday is in
+the immediate vicinity, and that they have been watching our movements,"
+remarked John.
+
+"In that case," remarked Uraso, "I favor the route to the east, which,
+while it may offer us still greater obstacles, in view of our
+observations there, still it might enable us the more quickly to
+overcome the tribe we have just met."
+
+The boys looked at each other significantly. "I wonder what Uraso can be
+talking about? There must be something very much out of the usual, in
+the eastern part of the island."
+
+"I am interested in knowing what he means by 'the observation' they made
+there," responded Harry.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+FIGHT WITH NATIVES AND RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND
+
+
+When the _Pioneer_ sailed for Unity it was with the understanding that
+she was to return within a week or ten days. At a cliff in the headland,
+which jutted out on the southern side of the bay, a sort of post office
+station was established, because if the ship should return while they
+were in the interior, it would be well for the commander of the
+_Pioneer_ to know where to go in the event that the eastern or the
+northern coast should be much more convenient for John and his party.
+
+It was nearly a hundred miles from the Island to Wonder Island, and
+there would be no occasion for the Professor to hurry back a relief,
+except to supply additional ammunition, because they did not for an
+instant expect to meet a tribe that would give them such a fight.
+
+There was still enough to provide, probably five rounds per man, so that
+it made them a pretty respectable fighting force. The weather was such
+that the force on the island did not require tents for shelter, and with
+the native fruits the party could well subsist for quite a time without
+assistance.
+
+It was agreed that the party should keep together, and no straggling be
+permitted, as it was evident they had a very bitter foe to deal with.
+The severely wounded Chief, who was taken along, was under the personal
+charge of the Professor, the understanding being that as soon as his
+wounds were satisfactorily progressing, an effort would be made to open
+up communication with him, and through that channel they could reach the
+inhabitants of the island, and thus advise them that they did not mean
+to do them an injury.
+
+"I wonder if that isn't the real reason why John does not want to go for
+the fellows who attacked us," asked George.
+
+"That may be so. It never occurred to me before. It seems to me,
+though," answered Harry, "that they will get but little out of that
+fellow in a week's time. You know they are very much reserved at times."
+
+"Or stubborn," suggested George.
+
+One of the things that John was careful about related to the
+organization of the force, so that it would at all times be ready for
+action. In order to carry out this idea and make it effectual, he
+divided the fighters into two squads of twenty-five men each, under the
+commands of Uraso and Muro, the arrangement being such that one squad
+should have charge of the patrolling and picketing for a period of two
+days, and then the other should take charge for a like time.
+
+There was always the most perfect accord between the two Chiefs, and
+John wisely allowed them to arrange those matters in such a way as would
+be most satisfactory to them.
+
+Before noon the following day the force marched out from Security
+Harbor, as they had named the bay, and took up the trail made by John
+and his party two days before.
+
+"We have names for the two islands, and for about all the principal
+points, but we have no name for this place," said Harry, as they were
+marching along.
+
+"Quite true," answered George, reflectively. Then, with a laugh, he
+said: "As they have cannibals here, according to the evidence so far
+gathered, I think _Maneta_ would be a name that would tell the story
+about as well as anything." And George laughed as he made the
+suggestion.
+
+He was an adept in applying names, being generally the first to make
+suggestions in that direction, and he was rarely at a loss for an apt
+designation.
+
+The route was over a country which was rich in vegetation. During the
+first ten miles the ascent was gradual, and the fruit and nuts were
+abundant, while new species of trees and flowers attracted the boys.
+
+"Harry and I have found a plant that has flies and other insects all
+over the leaves, and I believe it actually catches and holds. Here is a
+sample," said George, as he presented a branch to John.
+
+John examined it carefully. Then he said: "This is a plant of which we
+have several in the United States, but none which are as active. This is
+called Venus' Fly Trap."
+
+"That is curious," remarked Harry. "I wouldn't have paid any attention
+to it but I saw a fly alight on it, and these little feelers seemed to
+close around it, and hold it."
+
+"It works on that plan exactly. It is in that way it gets its food."
+
+"But why should the feelers be able to grasp the fly the moment it
+touches the leaf?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap._]
+
+"Do you recall about what the Professor told you of the peculiar power
+of plants to absorb food of particular kinds by a faculty called
+_irritability_?"
+
+"Yes; I remember."
+
+"By means of that, plants are enabled to select just the kinds of
+substances that they want, and can digest. If you will carefully notice
+the leaf, after it has seized a fly it will be observed that the leaf
+exudes a watery substance, and that has the property of digesting the
+fly, or of converting the liquid part of the insect into a form of food
+which is taken through the leaf, and from the leaf it goes into the
+plant itself."
+
+"I thought plants got their food from the roots only?"
+
+"Leaves are just the same as roots. They are terminals, and moisture as
+well as foods, such, for instance, as nitrogen, is absorbed and fed to
+the plant through the leaves."
+
+As they progressed they could see evidences of human occupation, and in
+many places the remains of fire. It was while making a detour from the
+regular route taken by John that they saw the first startling thing.
+
+It was found at a place where a rude hut was discovered in a dilapidated
+condition. Directly behind the hut was a raised sort of dais, supported
+on two posts, and this was filled with human skulls, all in an advanced
+stage of decay.
+
+It was noticed only by accident, as the area around the hut was thickly
+grown up by the vegetation. The boys were naturally startled at the
+sight.
+
+"What does that mean?" asked Harry.
+
+John replied: "This is evidence that the people here are head hunters."
+
+"What do you mean by _head hunters_?"
+
+"Certain savages have the belief that their importance depends on the
+number of heads they can capture."
+
+"Where do they get them?"
+
+"It is necessary for them to kill their enemies, and impale the heads,
+or nail them up to their huts."
+
+"Is it a religious ceremony?"
+
+"In some cases that is so. In some tribes the object is merely to show
+bravery and manliness. The more heads a man possesses the braver he is."
+
+The vicinity of the hut was carefully examined, and Uraso brought to
+John a very curiously arranged shell, with a handle to it. It was, in
+fact, a rattle. John took the article, and after examining it for some
+time, remarked:
+
+"These people will be difficult to deal with; very difficult."
+
+"Why do you form that conclusion from the examination of the rattle?"
+
+"This is a vele."
+
+"A _vele_; and what in the world is that?"
+
+"A vele is a sort of hoodoo; it is something that many natives believe
+in with such tenacity that if any one having this rattle points to him
+and declares him veleed, and announces that the veleed one will die the
+next day, he will lay down and actually expire as predicted."
+
+"Do you believe such tales?" asked Harry.
+
+"Of course those stories are hard to understand, but the missionaries on
+the Melanesian Islands vouch for many things similar to that. In 1871,
+Bishop Patterson, one of the missionaries, was murdered by the natives
+of those islands, and many of the facts in regard to their customs were
+then established."
+
+"But how do they work the vele?"
+
+"The place where the vele is worked to the most unlimited extent is in
+the Island of Guadalcaner, one of the Solomon Islands, although it has
+its counterpart in many other places. The vele rattler is carefully kept
+in a bamboo box, and when the owner wishes to destroy an enemy he takes
+the vele, and searches for him.
+
+"In doing so he must not be seen by any one. If he is seen the vele will
+not be effective. When he finds his enemy the vele is pointed to the
+man, and the rattles shaken, and while doing so the one exorcising the
+spell must turn his face away and utter curses. As soon as his enemy
+hears this, he turns to see who has veleed him, and he then glances
+around to see if any one has seen the vele."
+
+"Are you sure that the rattle is for that purpose?"
+
+"There is no question of it, and it is an evidence that the natives are
+intensely superstitious, and such people are very difficult to deal
+with."
+
+"I suppose we shall have witch doctors to deal with here?" asked George.
+
+"That is a very natural supposition."
+
+"Did you see some of these things when you came over here yesterday?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+It was evident to both boys that they were going direct to the
+mountains, and the general character of the surroundings reminded them
+so much of the mountains on Wonder Island, that they felt assured John
+would be able to find the cave for which he was searching.
+
+That night they encamped on a small stream which was, no doubt, formed
+by a spring, as its waters were deliciously cool, and refreshing.
+
+During that night, shortly after twelve o'clock, the boys heard the most
+peculiar noises, like a doleful, continuous cry, echoed and reechoed
+from hill to mountain,--something indescribable, but they refrained
+from saying anything to John about it.
+
+Some of the boys who were present and heard it were singularly affected,
+and it must be said that the boys themselves, notwithstanding the
+experiences they had passed through, were not altogether composed in
+their minds.
+
+When Uraso and Muro appeared next morning, after a night of scouting,
+they were startled by the accounts which were furnished, as to the
+number and warlike character of the inhabitants, and a council was held
+to decide whether it would be advisable to proceed with their limited
+force.
+
+If they knew, beyond question, that the island was occupied by another
+tribe, it might enable them to make peace with one of them, and thus
+pave the way for approaching these people.
+
+It was unfortunate that the first contact with the natives brought them
+into open hostilities, much as they desired to avoid it, but it was too
+late now.
+
+"From your investigations," said John, addressing the two chiefs, "can
+you give any idea of the number of natives in this tribe?"
+
+"We were unable to get near the village, but during the night we touched
+three different parties, one over by the high ridge, one a mile to the
+front, and the other over in the open ground not far from the place we
+had the fight. If I can judge anything by that I should say they have a
+number of warriors," answered Uraso.
+
+"That does, indeed, look as though they are ready to meet us from
+whatever direction we may attack them," remarked John.
+
+"The thing which is the most singular to me," remarked Muro, "is the way
+they are coming at us after the fight over there. If they were a weak
+lot they would draw off, and keep away from us, and that makes me think
+they have a lot of warriors, and are simply waiting until they can
+collect all of them."
+
+"We must do one of two things," ventured John, on reflection. "Either to
+go on with the men we have, or to wait until the _Pioneer_ returns, and
+then go back with her and fit out a force of ample size to meet them. It
+is our wish to win over the people by peaceful means, but our weakness
+may be the worst possible way of accomplishing that purpose."
+
+Uraso and Muro were both in favor of returning and waiting for the
+_Pioneer_, as they knew it would be likely to show up within the next
+three days, and their views decided the matter.
+
+"Under the circumstances we must leave this place before it is too late
+in the day, or we may have trouble in reaching the landing, although we
+can easily hold them off with our rifles, but we must avoid bloodshed,"
+and on this point John was insistent.
+
+The camp was astir and all the equipment in hand within fifteen minutes,
+although they had not yet partaken of breakfast. Uraso took the first
+turn, as commander of the rear guard, while the main body hurried on to
+cross the valley, before the savages could get the first notice of the
+retirement.
+
+Notwithstanding the great caution displayed, several shots were heard
+before the slope on the other side was reached, and they knew that Uraso
+was engaged.
+
+It is difficult, sometimes, to know just how information travels among
+savage people, but in this case, the peculiar beatings of the drums
+which could be heard in the dim distance, was sufficient to satisfy Muro
+that they had watchers, and a signaling means from treetops and from the
+crests of the great hills all around them.
+
+An hour afterwards Uraso's men were seen in the distance, and, although
+they had fired no more shots, it was evident that the natives were now
+in force and pressing against him with all their might. Only the
+consummate skill of Uraso prevented them from rushing the men under his
+command.
+
+But the top of the hill was reached; the landing was not much more than
+a mile beyond that, and John hurriedly took a half dozen men, and George
+and Harry with him, in order to select the final line of defense within
+reach of the landing place, while Uraso and Muro held them in check.
+
+The boys were ahead of the little party, swinging along and trying to
+get to the elevated point which John indicated as the most available
+place, when two powerful natives sprang across their path, and before
+either could draw a weapon, they were pounced upon and seized by two
+more who approached from the rear.
+
+With great presence of mind Harry cocked and fired the gun which his
+captors were struggling for. The shot went through the arm of the native
+who had seized George, and the latter, now free, raised his rifle and
+brought it down with all force on the nearest one.
+
+John and the men with him needed no further information as to the
+situation. They were practically surrounded. That was his first thought;
+but, as no more natives appeared, and the two remaining savages started
+on a run it began to be evident that they were only scouts who expected
+an easy capture of the two boys.
+
+There was no more straggling or running ahead after that. Uraso and the
+rear guard came up with a rush on hearing the shots, but were reassured
+when they saw the party intact.
+
+The heights were gained, and before they could arrange for the defense
+the natives appeared from three quarters, and held off a quarter of a
+mile beyond.
+
+During the following day John tried to establish communications with the
+natives, but they rebuffed all efforts, and the arrival of the _Pioneer_
+was anxiously awaited.
+
+On the third day the natives were observed closer at various points, and
+they began to grow bolder, but at noon of the fourth day the sharp eyes
+of Muro discovered the glimpse of a sail to the west.
+
+Within two hours the form of the ship could be seen. The _Pioneer_ was
+making for the landing, and a cheer went up from the men at the welcome
+sight.
+
+There was not much difficulty in descending the cliffs and establishing
+communications with the vessel, and within an hour they were aboard and
+the natives could plainly be seen coming down the opposite slope waving
+defiance to the ship.
+
+The next day the _Pioneer_ sailed up Enterprise River. The people in
+Unity were anxious to learn of the new island, and to hear of the
+exploits with the savage tribe which the boys had encountered.
+
+"The Treasures of the Islands," the next book in this series, relates
+the further experiences of the boys upon their return to Rescue Island.
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS
+
+By ELBERT FISHER
+
+_12mo. Cloth. Many Illustrations. 60c. per Volume_
+
+
+This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
+make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet
+with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
+adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter
+relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
+through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of
+boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
+books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each
+chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the
+author, and four striking halftones.
+
+1. FROM NEW YORK TO THE GOLDEN GATE, takes in many of the principal
+points between New York and California, and contains a highly
+entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a
+little useful information.
+
+2. FROM SAN FRANCISCO TO JAPAN, relates the experiences of the two boys
+at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii,
+Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and
+a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text.
+
+3. FROM TOKIO TO BOMBAY. This book covers their interesting experiences
+in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hongkong and
+finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field
+seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great
+Hyderabad region of South India.
+
+4. FROM INDIA TO THE WAR ZONE, describes their trip toward the Persian
+Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site
+of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan
+through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where
+they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa,
+and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully
+described.
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
+
+BY J. S. ZERBE
+
+
+CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
+
+A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all
+subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of
+tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles
+involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the
+rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty
+illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a
+complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most
+comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
+
+
+ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
+
+The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the
+work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been
+developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using
+technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It
+has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred
+original drawings.
+
+
+PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
+
+This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
+shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
+shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
+and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every
+subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a
+glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature
+that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully
+illustrated.
+
+_12mo, cloth.     Price 60 cents per volume_
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+The Ethel Morton Books
+
+By MABELL S. C. SMITH
+
+
+This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls.
+Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our
+young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their
+accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know.
+
+In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the
+entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of
+swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted
+as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are
+illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text.
+
+LIST OF TITLES
+
+  ETHEL MORTON AT CHAUTAUQUA
+  ETHEL MORTON AND THE CHRISTMAS SHIP
+  ETHEL MORTON'S HOLIDAYS
+  ETHEL MORTON AT ROSE HOUSE
+  ETHEL MORTON'S ENTERPRISE
+  ETHEL MORTON AT SWEET BRIER LODGE
+
+_Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+  PUBLISHED BY
+  The New York Book Company
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK, N.Y.
+
+
+
+
+The Mountain Boys Series
+
+
+  1. PHIL BRADLEY'S MOUNTAIN BOYS
+  2. PHIL BRADLEY AT THE WHEEL
+  3. PHIL BRADLEY'S SHOOTING BOX
+  4. PHIL BRADLEY'S SNOW-SHOE TRAIL
+
+These books describe with interesting detail the experiences of a party
+of boys among the mountain pines.
+
+They teach the young reader how to protect himself against the elements,
+what to do and what to avoid, and above all to become self-reliant and
+manly.
+
+_12mo .'. .'. .'. Cloth._
+
+_40 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES
+ON STRANGE ISLANDS***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 21760-8.txt or 21760-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/21760-8.zip b/21760-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2582936
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-8.zip
diff --git a/21760-h.zip b/21760-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..286d3a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h.zip
diff --git a/21760-h/21760-h.htm b/21760-h/21760-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fa5de1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/21760-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,9877 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange Islands, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+      @media print {
+         .pagenum         {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit;
+                            text-align: right; color: gray; display: none; visibility: hidden; }
+       }
+      @media screen {
+        .pagenum        {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit;
+                         text-align: right; color: gray; display: inline; visibility: visible;}
+        .pagenum a       {text-decoration:none; color:#444;}
+        .pagenum a:hover {color:#F00;}
+       }
+
+       div.frontmatter {max-width: 40em;
+          margin-left: auto;
+          margin-right: auto;
+          page-break-before: always; }
+
+       body > p { text-align: justify; text-indent: .5em;
+                  max-width: 40em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+       p             {margin-top: .33em; font-size: medium; margin-bottom: 0em;}
+       p.noindent    {text-indent: 0em;}
+       p.center      {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;}
+       p.titleblock  {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; line-height: 125%;}
+       p.titleblockl {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: left; line-height: 125%;}
+       p.chapter     {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; line-height: 100%;}
+
+       h2+p, h3+p { text-indent: 0; }
+
+       h1,h2,h3,h4 {
+            text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+            clear: both; /* font-weight: normal; */ page-break-after: avoid ! important;}
+       hr {width: 33%;
+           margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;
+           margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
+           clear: both;}
+       hr.chapter {width: 55%; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 0em; page-break-before: always;}
+       hr.sorta   {width: 45%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;}
+       hr.minor   {width: 30%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;}
+
+       table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+       td.chap {text-align: left; padding-left: 10px;}
+       td.pr {text-align: right; padding-left: 6px; }
+       td.abstract p {letter-spacing: 0.02em; text-align: justify;
+                     margin-left: 14%; margin-right: 0%; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: 0.75em;}
+
+       body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+       a {text-decoration: none;}
+
+       .center {text-align: center;}
+       .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
+       .u     {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+       .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+       .figleft {margin: auto; float: left; text-align: left;}
+       .caption {font-size: 80%; font-weight: bold;}
+       .scribedcaption {font-size: 100%; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;}
+       img {border: none;}
+    hr.full { width: 100%;
+              margin-top: 3em;
+              margin-bottom: 0em;
+              margin-left: auto;
+              margin-right: auto;
+              height: 4px;
+              border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */
+              border-style: solid;
+              border-color: #000000;
+              clear: both; }
+    pre      {font-size: 85%;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange
+Islands, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1>
+<pre>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre>
+<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange Islands</p>
+<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p>
+<p>Release Date: June 7, 2007  [eBook #21760]</p>
+<p>Language: English</p>
+<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p>
+<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS***</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo<br />
+    and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br />
+    (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 550px;">
+<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="550" height="796" alt="Cover" title="Cover" />
+</div>
+<hr class="major" />
+<p class="center">
+<span style="font-size: 150%;">THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</span><br /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">By</span> ROGER T. FINLAY</span>
+</p>
+
+<div class="frontmatter">
+
+<p class="noindent" style="margin-bottom:2em;">
+A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating
+the remarkable experiences of two boys and a man,
+who are cast upon an island in the South Seas with
+absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
+exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning
+clothing, tools and weapons and not only do they train
+nature's forces to work for them but they subdue and
+finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The books
+contain two thousand items of interest that every boy
+ought to know.</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+                  The Castaways<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+               Exploring the Island<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+                  The Tribesmen<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+              The Capture and Pursuit<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+            The Conquest of the Savages<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+          Adventures on Strange Islands<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+             Treasures of the Islands<br />
+<br /><br />
+    <i>Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.</i><br />
+           <i>60 cents per vol., postpaid.</i><br />
+<br />
+<span style="font-size: 70%;">PUBLISHED BY</span><br />
+<span style="font-size: 115%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span><br />
+<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;      New York</span></span>
+</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<h2>ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS</h2>
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<table width="450" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page" border="1">
+  <col style="width:80%;" />
+  <tr>
+    <td align="center">
+<br /><br />
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600;
+font-size: 180%; margin-bottom: .5em; font-variant: small-caps; word-spacing: 0.4em;">The Wonder Island Boys</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 145%; margin-bottom: 1em;">ADVENTURES ON<br />STRANGE ISLANDS</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 0em;">BY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0em; font-size: 110%;">ROGER T. FINLAY</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 3em;">ILLUSTRATED</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 119px;">
+<img src="images/inybc.png" width="119" height="116" alt="N Y B Co." title="" />
+<span class="caption">N Y B Co.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 5em; font-size: 85%; margin-bottom: 0em;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0px; font-size: 85%; font-variant: small-caps;  margin-bottom: 2em;">New York</p>
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;" >
+<span class="smcap" style="font-size: 110%;">Copyright, 1915, by</span>
+<br /><span style="font-size: 110%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span>
+</p>
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+<h3>CONTENTS</h3>
+<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents">
+<col style="width:5%;" />
+<col style="width:80%;" />
+<col style="width:15%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left" style="font-size: small">CHAPTER</td>
+  <td colspan="2" class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">I.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><span class="smcap">The Strange Oars and Ropes</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_15">Page 15</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The charted island. Previous history of the boys. The professor.
+Mysteries. The strange oars and ropes. Experiments. The various
+trips through the Island. Meeting the natives. The caves.
+Finding metals and ores. A strange village.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">II.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><span class="smcap">A Mysterious Message</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_26">Page 26</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Town of Unity. Enterprises on the island. Building a ship.
+Homesick. Considering the question of other islands. Treasure
+hunting. The Krishnos. Their beliefs and practices. The
+comparison of customs with the white people. Preparing to launch
+the vessel. The professor decides to remain. Angel. The message.
+Blakely. A scrap of paper with illegible words. The V-shaped
+tracing. Guessing the contents of the note.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">III.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><span class="smcap">The Arrow on the Sheet</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_38">Page 38</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Deciphering the discolored paper. The arrow on the
+sheet. The first Walter letter. The comparison. Dimensions
+of the vessel. The engine. The professor and
+John's error. Pointing to an island. Convinced of the
+correctness of the boys' views. Launching of the vessel.
+The feast day. Putting up the rigging. Selecting a crew.
+Preliminary trials. The day for departure. The trip to
+Valparaiso. Reshipping to New York. Telegrams home
+after three years. Angels and the wonders of New York.
+The great change in the boys. The return to Wonder
+Island. Reaching Valparaiso. Meeting Blakely. The new
+steamer. Installation of a line to Wonder Island. The
+return trip.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">IV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><span class="smcap">The Skull with the Cryptic Writing</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_51">Page 51</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Steaming up Enterprise River. Unity in sight. The natives
+at the wharf. The enthusiasm. The chiefs witness
+the arrival. A "Grand Homecoming." The boys visit the
+natives. Contemplating voyages to discover other islands.
+Native sailors. Sutoto captain of the <i>Pioneer</i>. Rumors
+about the boys. Plans for the proposed trips. The force
+for the expedition. A cargo of copper. The trip to the
+copper treasure cave. Tides. Fireflies. Explanation of
+the light. Light without heat The problem of light.
+Advantages of light which generates no heat. Color of
+daylight. Phosphorescent glow. Catching fireflies.
+Scaling the heights. The spot where the Walter note
+was found. A skull with mysterious characters on it.
+The mark on the skull and the mark in the message.
+The star. Cryptic signs.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">V.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><span class="smcap">The Trip to the New Island</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_63">Page 63</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Sutoto at the top of the peak. The telescope. The view
+of Unity. The Illyas' village. The visit to the last captured
+village. The reception. The kindness of the chief.
+The great change in the village. The feast of John and
+the boys. Happiness of the people. The Illyas at work.
+Return of the <i>Wonder</i> to Unity. The <i>Pioneer</i> on its way
+to other Islands. Seasickness of the crew. Trying the
+new cure. Atrophine, and how administered. Explaining
+its origin, and how it acts. The effect on the crew.
+Driven out of their course. A light in the dense darkness.
+Land ahead. Awaiting the morning. Fifty leagues
+from Wonder Island. The cove in the shore line. Anchoring.
+The two boats sent ashore. Signs to indicate that
+people lived on the island. Reminiscences of the Yaks and
+bears. The discovery of coffee trees. The wild variety.
+Identity of vegetation in widely-separated countries.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><span class="smcap">Discovery of the Island and Explorations</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_78">Page 75</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Return to the landing. John's advice. Surveying the
+island. The cardinal points of the compass. Laying out
+the coast line by triangulation. What measurement of
+angles means. Transferring the angles to paper. Making
+plans by means of a scale. Proportionate lengths of the
+different limbs of the angles. The shore line to the south.
+Instructions to Sutoto. The party to explore the interior.
+Starting on their mission. The equipment of the party.
+The spears, and bolos. The camera and field glasses.
+Amazing tropical vegetation and fruit. Stone hatchet
+found. Independent exploits of the boys. Temporary
+separation. Disappearance of George. A pistol shot in
+the distance. The search. Evidences of a scuffle.
+George's tracks found. The footprints of natives. Muro
+scouting in the direction of the natives. The runner to
+the ship. The <i>Pioneer</i> sailing away. The new landing
+place. Uraso advised of the capture.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><span class="smcap">Capture of George by the Natives</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_89">Page 89</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>George's capture. Hearing John's whistle. Firing the
+gun. The surprise of the natives. Rendered unconscious.
+He recovers. Sees his gun and glasses in the hands of the
+natives. Discovers that his revolver is still in his pocket.
+The natives see him trying to discover the time by his
+watch. The fight of the savages for the watch. George's
+determination to escape. The natives discover the revolver.
+He surprises the natives by explaining the knife
+and glasses. While explaining the glasses accidentally
+discovers the ocean in the distance. The matchsafe. Discovers
+the village. Tries to escape before reaching there.
+Planning the details. Surprised at the appearance of
+another party. All hope lost. A powerful Chief. George
+and the Chief. Investigating George's belongings. How
+George unwittingly told the Chief about the gun and
+glasses. The Chief arrests the captors. George explains
+the weapons. Returns the revolver to George. Invites
+him to the village. In the home of the Chieftain. Description
+of the "Palace."</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><span class="smcap">Fight of the Natives for the Trinkets</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_102">Page 102</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Scouting. Muro's work. The first traces. Arrival of
+Uraso. His grief at the news. The conference. John
+and party march to the east. Finding George's chain.
+Evidences of a struggle. Determining the number of enemies
+by the footprints. Reading characters by feet.
+How people are distinguished. Observing peculiarities of
+actions. Estimating the number of natives in the party
+which captured George. Discovering the Chief's footmarks.
+Judging of the safety of George by the marks of
+the feet. Uraso discovers the tree where George exhibited
+the power of the bullet to the Chief. Inferences as to the
+characters of the natives who captured George. The
+trinkets and buttons of more importance to the savages
+than the person of the captive. Power as the great factor
+with savages. Why right is might.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">IX.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><span class="smcap">The Giant Chief and His "Palace"</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_113">Page 113</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Chief interested in George's belongings. Discovery of
+a ship's chair. The matchsafe in the Chief's hands. The
+imitative quality. The first meal. The peculiar knives
+and forks. The Chief's capacity for food. The character
+of the meal. The siesta after the meal. George's opportunity.
+Stealing from the Chief's house. The daughter
+of the Chief. Wandering from the Chief's house. His
+midnight sleep from exhaustion. The watchers at his bedside.
+Finding the soap plant. Breakfast. Absence of
+the Chief. George's suspicions. Follows the Chief. The
+appearance of John and Harry. The meeting. George introduces
+the party to the Chief. Uraso and Muro able to
+converse with the Chief. George's story. "The Palace."
+The village. The feast.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">X.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><span class="smcap">Peculiarities of the Native Tribe</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_125">Page 125</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>How the feast was served. John relates the story of the
+boys to the Chief. The Chief interested in the wonderful
+ship. The story of the island. The runner to the ship.
+No Krishnos on the islands. Sutoto sees the runners.
+Sails for the village. The Chief does not believe in a great
+spirit. His philosophy. Strength is the only right. No
+caves on the island. Disappointment of the boys. Bad
+people to the north. Their own kin, but convicts. Stealing
+and lying the only crimes. No crime to steal from
+each other, only from the Chief. The sun as a great Chief.
+The coming of the ship. The natives on the seashore.
+Casting of the anchor. Sutoto sees the Chief's daughter.
+George's captors on the way to the convict colony. Intercession
+on the part of the boys. The food at the banquet.
+The natives' aversion to fish. Snake worshippers.
+Witch doctors. The bad god Baigona. Peculiar ideas
+of right and wrong among the natives. The survey of the
+southern part of the island. Triangulation from the
+mast of a ship.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><span class="smcap">Sutoto and the Chief's Daughter</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_137">Page 137</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Sutoto's love affair. Cinda, the Chief's daughter. The
+Chief is told of the wonders of Wonder Island. About the
+activities of the natives on that island. His curiosity.
+John tells him how the white people live. The acute
+questionings of the Chief. Teaching him how trade and
+commerce is carried on. Money and its uses. How it
+gets its value. Why it is a measure only. The trip to
+the north in charge of the Chief's son. Gruesome tales
+of the ferocity of the convicts. John still anxious to
+find some particular cave. His chart. The unsolved
+mystery of the boat. The clothing of the natives.
+Bracelets. Glitter to attract natives. Weaving, the
+only industry. The aptness of native women to adopt
+fancy articles of dress and ornament. John's scheme,
+anticipating the wedding of Sutoto and Cinda. A
+"State affair." The mission to the Professor. Sending
+the <i>Pioneer</i> to Wonder Island. Stut captain of the ship.
+Sutoto's secret mission through Stut.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><span class="smcap">The Skeleton Beneath the Boat</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_148">Page 148</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>How the present journey reminded the boys of their first
+adventure on Wonder Island. Peculiar animals. The
+kagu. The fashionable millinery styles. Singular habit
+of the bird. The benne plant. Its remarkable properties.
+Lard from trees. The coffee trees. A tree with
+sandpaper leaves. The indicus. Analyzing soils. How
+plants digest food. Larv&aelig;. The early forms of many
+animals. Kinds of food in the earth. The bruang.
+The sun-bear of Malay. The bear and the honey pot.
+How it was tamed. The sport. The ocean. George and
+Harry at the beach. Bathing in the surf. The discovery
+of the wreck of an upturned boat. Finding the compartments
+belonging to their lost boat on Wonder
+Island. Sending for John. The skeleton beneath the
+upturned boat. The bound skeleton. The startling discovery
+of the same kinds of ropes found in their lost
+boat. Evidence of a crime.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><span class="smcap">A Convict Colony of Natives</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_161">Page 161</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Describing the skeleton. A soldier or an adventurer.
+Their first hatchet. The narrow neck of land. The Rose
+of Jericho. The resurrection plant. The Australian
+kangaroo. The exiled people. The Chief's son tells about
+them. Explains they do not believe in killing except in
+self-defense. The upas tree. Its flowering branch. Valuable
+mineral in the hills. Description of the convict's
+home. Banishment one of the most serious forms of
+punishment for crimes. The survey of the mountains.
+Hunting for caves. How the parties, were organized.
+The influence of odors on human actions. Tests of odors
+on patients. How they affect dreams. Calcareous formations.
+Where the real caves are found. Erosive action
+of water on limestone.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><span class="smcap">A White Paralytic in the Convict Colony</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_174">Page 174</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The wide search for the caves. George finds a cave
+entrance. Preparing to explore the cave. The lamps.
+A blind lead. A fissure, not an erosion. The joke on
+George. The first sight of the location of the dreaded
+criminal colony. The magnificent wild fruits. The
+beautiful flowers. The first criminals. The industry of
+the people. Cultivating fruit and vegetables. Hutoton.
+Peculiarity in names. Well-dressed natives. The distinguished
+head of the village. His dignity. The welcome
+to the village. The well-kept huts. The garden
+plots and bowers of flowers. The criminals preparing a
+feast of welcome. The boys discover a white man. A
+paralytic patient. How the convicts cared for him. Surprised
+to learn that the convicts rewarded the men who
+rescued the paralytic. How the savages calculated time.
+The movement of the sun, and how it gave them the time.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><span class="smcap">Savage Marriage Customs</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_185">Page 185</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Criminal Colonies. The effects on the people. Its advantages.
+The principles of punishment. Protecting society.
+Isolating patients who have contagious or infectious
+diseases. Trying to ascertain the identity of the
+paralytic. John's promise to reward the people for the
+care bestowed on the white man. Refusing to be paid,
+for taking care of him. Contrasting Hutoton with Sasite,
+the home of the Chief. Returning to Sasite. The first
+glimpse of the returning <i>Pioneer</i>. The interesting party
+aboard. The Chief and the entire village at the seashore.
+The Professor. Muro's wife. Blakely. The Chief meets
+the Professor. The Chief knows why the Professor is a
+wise man. The double eyes, spectacles. The Chief with
+the spectacles. Muro's wife meets the Chief's wife. They
+confer about Cinda and Sutoto. The savage customs in
+marriage. The ceremonies. Stut tells the boys about
+Sutoto's mission to procure his wedding outfit. The surprising
+news that Sutoto and Cinda were to be secretly
+married that night. The plot. Muro's wife informed.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><span class="smcap">Sutoto and Cinda's Marriage; and the Surprise</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_193">Page 193</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Chief's wife gets the news. The Chief brought into
+the conference. His will the only law on the matter of
+marriage. He consents to their plan. The two requirements
+in the ceremony of marriage according to their
+rites. The gift of fruit, of fowl, and of game. The
+blindfolding of the bridegroom. The absolute silence
+when eating. Preparation for the banquet that night.
+Sutoto and Cinda arrange to be married that night while
+the people are at the banquet. Decide to conform strictly
+to the rites of the tribe. The boys learn of the stealthy
+plans. Witness the ceremony in Cinda's home. The
+Chief arrests the bridal couple and takes them aboard the
+ship. The criminals before the Chief. The Chief upbraids
+Sutoto. The reconciliation. The presents brought
+over from Wonder Island. Grief of the boys because
+they had forgotten a present. The surprise of the natives
+at the beautiful silver forks. Spices. Coffee.
+Cream and sugar. Curiosity about the cows. The great
+surprise to Sutoto. He is made Chief of his tribe. Monuments.
+The presents. The great mirror, the present
+of the boys. The crowns. The final ceremony. The
+dance. Originally a religious ceremony. The encircling
+wreath.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><span class="smcap">Hutoton; the Place of Death</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_207">Page 207</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Preparations for further explorations. Consulting the
+charts. Determine to sail northward, on way to Wonder
+Island. Reasons from shape of the island why an island
+might be to the north. Geological formations. Upheavals.
+Islands mere ridges. Sutoto to return to
+Wonder Island. The Chief agrees to go to Wonder Island.
+His family to accompany him. Proposed visit to Hutoton.
+Boarding the ship. The welcome of the convicts. Taking
+the paralytic to the ship. Stores from the ships for
+the convict colony. The <i>Pioneer</i> sails to the north. Discovery
+of a new island. Taking observations from the
+sun. The calendar. Summer and winter. Taking the
+angle of the sun, and what it means. Triangulation.
+The nautical chart. Greenwich or Standard time. The
+island which they had left named <i>Venture</i>. The new
+island and its magnificent vegetation. John, with the
+boys and two boatloads, land. The exploring parties
+formed. The boys and Muro at the head of one party.
+Traces of savages. Appearances that cannibals were
+there. A shower of arrows their first surprise. The
+volley and the disappearance of the natives. Reappearance
+of the savages. Surrounded. Preparing for defense.
+The second attack. The fight. The natives apparently
+preparing to rush them.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><span class="smcap">Discovery of a New Island, and a Savage Tribe</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_222">Page 222</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The effect of the second volley. The determination of the
+attacking party. The fire on all sides. The ammunition
+getting low. The relief party under John. Hearing the
+sounds of firing. The surprise of the natives. The savages
+repulsed. Muro and the men follow the fleeing
+natives. Recalled by John. Aiding the wounded. Taking
+along a wounded Chief. The litter. The decoy. Returning
+to the ship. Observing the enemy from a tree-top.
+Following up the party. A rear guard. The runner
+reports the determination of the natives to follow.
+The signal shots to the ship. Reinforcements. The determination
+to explore the island and meet the natives.
+John with the boys and a strong party remain. The
+<i>Pioneer</i> sails for Wonder Island. Holding a council.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIX.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><span class="smcap">Fight with Natives and Return to Wonder Island</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_231">Page 231</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Arrangements for the <i>Pioneer</i> to return. Ammunition
+needed. The arrangement of the men for scouting and
+picketing. Leaving security harbor. A plant which devours
+insects. Venus's fly-trap. How plants absorb
+food. Irritability. How the leaf digests the fly. Food
+absorbed by leaves as well as by roots. A cache of
+human skulls. Head hunters. The vele. A hoodoo.
+The rattle. The vele and the bamboo box. How it is
+worked to produce the charm. Evidences of extreme
+superstitions. Witch doctors. Peculiar noises. Doleful
+sounds. Speculating on the mysteries of the island.
+</p></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h3>
+<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations">
+<col style="width:75%;" />
+<col style="width:25%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">He turned it over and examined every portion</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-075">75</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The rites were progressing very satisfactorily</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-195">195</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-218">218</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="pr">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;1. The Mysterious Message.</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig1">28</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;2. The Walter Letter.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig2">40</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;3. The Fire-fly.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig3">57</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;4. Inscription on the Skull.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig4">60</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;5. Measuring by Triangulation.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig4">76</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;6. The Second Limb.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig6">78</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;7. Triangulation from a Vessel.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig7">80</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;8. The Kagu.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig8">109</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;&nbsp;9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig9">119</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;10. Flower of Indica Tree.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig10">152</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig11">155</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;12. Rose of Jericho.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig12">163</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;13. The Koala.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig13">164</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;14. The Flower of the Upas Tree.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig14">167</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig15">212</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Fig.&nbsp;16. Venus' Fly-Trap.</td><td class="pr"><a href="#illus-fig16">234</a></td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+</div>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_15" id="p_15">p. 15</a></span></p>
+<h2>ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS</h2>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+<h3>THE STRANGE OARS AND ROPES</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">"I am</span> awfully anxious to know where the charted
+islands can be that John spoke about," remarked
+George, as Harry was consulting the plans of the
+boat they were building.</p>
+
+<p>"They must be in this section of the southern seas,
+or his party wouldn't have sailed in this direction,"
+answered Harry, after a pause.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think he would be offended if we spoke to
+him about it!"</p>
+
+<p>"No;" answered Harry, after some reflection.
+"He has spoken to me about it several times. But
+why do you ask!"</p>
+
+<p>"For the reason that I think it would be a grand
+thing to hunt them up."</p>
+
+<p>Harry laughed, and then slowly said: "That
+would be a big thing to undertake. But what about
+going home?"</p>
+
+<p>"I hadn't forgotten that. I meant that when we
+came back it would be proper for us to undertake."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_16" id="p_16">p. 16</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Well, haven't you had enough trouble during the
+past two years?" And Harry laughed, just as
+though they hadn't gone through sufficient trials to
+last a life time.</p>
+
+<p>"I wouldn't mind going through the same experiences,
+when I remember what we have learned
+and what all of us have accomplished," responded
+George, as he looked through the window, reflectively,
+and watched the natives at work.</p>
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+
+<p>It will be difficult to understand the force of the
+above conversation, unless the reader knows the
+situation in which the boys were placed at the time
+it took place, and the locality of the scene where the
+conversation was held.</p>
+
+<p>Over two years previously two boys, George Mayfield
+and Harry Crandall, were members of a school
+training ship which left the Harbor of New York,
+for a cruise in southern waters, the object being to
+instruct the crew of seventy boys in the art of seamanship,
+as well as to give them a foundation knowledge
+in the arts and sciences.</p>
+
+<p>On board they became intimate with a gray-haired
+Professor, who became very ill. They were particularly
+attracted to him, and waited upon him, until
+they reached the Pacific Ocean, where, for some reason
+the ship met a catastrophe, and the crew were
+compelled to take to open boats.</p>
+
+<p>The two boys, with several companions, and the
+Professor, were together in one of the life boats,
+and after leaving the sinking ship a terrific gale,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_17" id="p_17">p. 17</a></span>
+one of the great monsoons, separated them from the
+companion boats, and for six days they were driven
+about in the vast ocean, absolutely helpless. During
+this time all their young companions were washed
+overboard, and they were driven to the point of despair,
+when they were cast ashore on an island.</p>
+
+<p>They were thus placed on an unknown land, with
+nothing but their scanty clothing, and devoid even
+of a knife. There is no indication that the land was
+inhabited, and for the first three months, while recuperating,
+they had no opportunity to go far from
+the spot where they landed.</p>
+
+<p>After the Professor had regained his health, they
+began to make a few necessary things, and hunt for
+the food which was necessary to preserve life. As
+they grew bolder, however, they fashioned crude implements,
+like bows and arrows, and primitive articles
+of utility.</p>
+
+<p>They made a few trips into the interior, and then
+saw the first indications which pointed to the presence
+of inhabitants. From some of the traces it was
+evident that the people must be savages, and then
+they saw the necessity of preparing themselves to
+meet hostile neighbors.</p>
+
+<p>Then began the most remarkable series of adventures
+on the part of the boys, under the instruction
+of the Professor, to provide not only the necessaries
+of life, but many of the luxuries. While engaged
+in the different enterprises they undertook
+numerous excursions, all of which confirmed them
+in the first intimations that they had landed on an<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_18" id="p_18">p. 18</a></span>
+island, and that it contained one or more savage
+tribes.</p>
+
+<p>To recount all that the boys did, even in the briefest
+space, would be impossible in this book, and it is
+not necessary, in order to relate the happenings
+from this time on; but some things are necessary,
+because we shall have to deal with incidents which
+took place during their adventures, and this volume
+also brings into the scene several characters, in addition
+to the three which have been named, as the
+principal participants.</p>
+
+<p>The incidents referred to were called by the boys
+"the mysteries." When they landed on the island
+they erected a flag pole, and improvised a flag which
+was kept at half mast, and mounted on a high point,
+so that it would attract passing ships, if their island
+chanced to be in the path of vessels. During one of
+their excursions the flag pole and staff disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>For the purpose of making one of the trips by
+water a boat was built, and they sailed it up a large
+stream, only to find that within ten miles of their
+home was an immense cataract, or falls, around
+which they could not porter the vessel. It was left
+below the falls in a secure position, and ten days
+later, when they went for it, were surprised at its
+disappearance.</p>
+
+<p>Later on it was found miles away, but the little
+closets which they had built in to hold their food and
+clothing, had disappeared, and they were still more
+startled to find a pair of oars, which they could not
+have made, attached to the boat.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_19" id="p_19">p. 19</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In repairing the boat a note was discovered, written
+by some one who could not have been a member
+of their ill-fated vessel. This added to their perplexities,
+for it indicated that white people had been
+on the island, as well as savages.</p>
+
+<p>Then they found strange ropes, evidently fashioned
+by a crude hand; a skull of a well-developed
+man was picked up on the shore not far from their
+home; part of the wreckage of a vessel was discovered;
+a herd of yaks was captured and a mysterious
+brand deciphered on one of them.</p>
+
+<p>But in their wanderings they found the entrance
+to a cavern, and this was explored, resulting in finding
+that it was formerly a pirates' lair, and they
+were astounded at finding immense wealth in its
+hidden recesses.</p>
+
+<p>They industriously searched the island, and found
+numerous ores which were dug out and smelted and
+from which they were able to build many things that
+added to their comfort; and finally, firearms were
+constructed, and powder made.</p>
+
+<p>They spent much of the time in chemical experiments,
+in hunting for and gathering the different
+vegetables, and fibres, and from the latter learned
+how to weave cloth, to make felt, and to turn skins
+into leather from the animals which they hunted.</p>
+
+<p>Their adventures were not wholly devoid of the
+amusing things of life. In one of the expeditions
+they captured a young Orang-outang. This was
+carefully taught to do many things, and it became not
+only a valuable assistant, and a wonderful scout in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_20" id="p_20">p. 20</a></span>
+their wanderings, but it afforded them immense
+amusement, which was appreciated by the boys.</p>
+
+<p>And now, having been provided with suitable
+weapons, they determined to go on voyages of discovery,
+being prompted in this course, because they
+found in the wreckage along one of the rivers, and
+far in the interior, a life boat which was a companion
+to their own which had been lost when they were
+stranded in the great tempest.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident to them that some of their companions
+were on the island, and probably, captives.
+This made the quest a most exciting one, so every
+energy was bent toward the end of helping the unfortunates.</p>
+
+<p>On the initial expedition, after the completion of
+the first weapons, they came into contact with several
+tribes of savages, one of whom was captured, after
+being wounded. It developed that he was a chief of
+one of the tribes which at that time were at war with
+each other.</p>
+
+<p>Returning from this trip they discovered at their
+home a distinguished looking white man in rags,
+totally devoid of intellect, and unable to speak. It
+was evident that he had met with some accident, but
+he was entirely harmless, and obediently took up
+and performed every sort of manual labor,&mdash;in fact,
+was an expert in any sort of mechanical operation
+required of him.</p>
+
+<p>In hunting, or in scouting, he was a perfect specimen
+of the hunter, or the soldier. It seemed to be
+an instinct with him to render every kind of service<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_21" id="p_21">p. 21</a></span>
+that might be needed, with the gun, or the tools which
+were all about him. In the absence of a better name
+they christened him John.</p>
+
+<p>On the second trip into the unknown portions of
+the island they met three of the savage tribes, with
+whom they had several battles, and one of the natives
+was wounded and captured. While wandering
+through the forests, in their efforts to return to their
+home, they ran into a savage village, where they were
+successful in rescuing two boys who had been shipmates
+on the <i>Investigator</i> which went down months
+before.</p>
+
+<p>While this was a source of joy it was clouded by
+the information that they were not the ones who came
+to the island in the life boat that the boys had found
+in the river. This was evidence that others must
+still be in the island, and probably held as captives.</p>
+
+<p>Some months after the silent John came to them,
+his reason and the ability to speak returned to him,
+and he told a wonderful tale of his wanderings, and
+that which impressed the boys most was the information
+that he had shipped in a vessel which was designed
+to search out the treasures hidden in the
+islands of the South seas.</p>
+
+<p>From hints which he dropped from time to time,
+the islands containing the treasure were charted,
+and later on, one of the caves so charted was found
+on the island they now occupied, although they also
+found several which were not alluded to and could
+not be recognized by the description, according to
+the story told by John.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_22" id="p_22">p. 22</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John was an educated man, an arch&aelig;ologist, and,
+next to the Professor, had the most varied knowledge
+of any one the boys ever met, and it can be understood,
+that their association with men of that class
+made them remarkably active in seeking out and understanding
+the wonderful things that nature presents
+in every field of human activity.</p>
+
+<p>In order to be as brief as possible with this part of
+the story, it is necessary to add that the rescue of
+the two boys, and the restoration of John's faculties,
+made a strong party, and new weapons were made,
+and the real expeditions through the island begun.</p>
+
+<p>During the first extended trip, the Professor was
+captured. Out of this misadventure grew some of
+the most remarkable series of events, but finally, they
+were successful in rescuing four more of their former
+companions, and two of John's shipwrecked companions.</p>
+
+<p>The capture of the Chief, formerly alluded to, and
+the subsequent rescue of a chief who was about to be
+offered up as a sacrifice, served as a means to bring
+two of the tribes to the rescue of those in the expedition,
+and the Professor, by his wisdom, was able
+to enlist the services of the tribe which had captured
+him.</p>
+
+<p>The events which lead directly up to the beginning
+of this volume were brought about by the enmity of
+two of the most bitter and vindictive tribes, which
+compelled the Professor and the boys to form an
+expedition against those hostiles, in which four other
+tribes assisted.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_23" id="p_23">p. 23</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They captured the Chief, and rescued two of their
+former companions, and then built a town called
+Unity, where the advantages of civilization were
+taught the natives, and to which place many of the
+families of the natives emigrated.</p>
+
+<p>All the chiefs formed an alliance of peace, and the
+Professor was made the chief magistrate. After
+peace and order had been restored, the boys again
+began to long for home. Prior to this they had determined
+to build a ship large enough to take them to
+the nearest shipping point, and they were now feverishly
+engaged in the work with the aid of the natives,
+who were eager to learn how the white men built the
+wonderful things which they saw all about them.</p>
+
+<p>It will, therefore, be understood, that the remarks
+of George, at the opening of this chapter, had reference
+to the fact that the most important of the
+islands, or the ones having the most of the treasures
+could not be the one on which they resided, but pertained
+to some other localities.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if there is anything I am interested in, it
+is to know why the wonderful buildings we found at
+the Illyas' village were put up at that place, and what
+caused all trace of them to be lost," said Harry, after
+George had expressed his last opinion.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you remember what John said, after we came
+out of the cave below the village?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; what was it!"</p>
+
+<p>"He said the copper in the cave might explain it."</p>
+
+<p>After the capture of the last tribe, John demanded
+that the Chief inform them of the location of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_24" id="p_24">p. 24</a></span>
+Hoodoo, or Medicine Men of the tribe, and he reluctantly
+consented, but the Chief warned them, that to
+attempt to enter the cave would mean Death.</p>
+
+<p>John knew that the Chief and the people believed
+the death tales told by the Medicine Men, as it was
+tales of this kind which enabled them to maintain
+such a hold on the people. In order to destroy the
+power of those people, who really had been the cause
+of much of their troubles, John announced that he
+would take the Chief and his followers to the cave,
+and that he would then go into the cave alone, and
+come out again, to prove that the Medicine Men had
+lied to him.</p>
+
+<p>John entered the cave, and single-handed captured
+the Krishnos, as they were called, and brought them
+out, thus verifying his statement that those men had
+deceived the people. Soon thereafter John and the
+boys entered the cave, which, from the description he
+had, contained an immense amount of treasure, but
+they were unable to discover any trace of it if it
+existed.</p>
+
+<p>By accident the calcareous deposit was broken off
+at one part in their search, and below was found a
+dark material, which, after examination, was found
+to be copper. It was not in its native state, but was
+a product produced by smelting the ore, and they uncovered
+an immense quantity of it, sufficient to show
+that the portion of the cave in which it was found
+was really a storehouse.</p>
+
+<p>Not more than a mile away was the Native village,
+where they held the tribe captive. The village was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_25" id="p_25">p. 25</a></span>
+absolutely unlike anything else in the form of habitations
+found in the island. Three of the buildings
+were large structures, built in three of the well-known
+types of architecture, and the other parts of the village
+were laid off regularly.</p>
+
+<p>Surrounding the village was a strong embankment,
+as though originally used as a fortification, and the
+village itself was located on the side of a hill, betokening
+sanitary considerations.</p>
+
+<p>"But I do not see," observed George, "what the
+copper in the cave had to do with the town?"</p>
+
+<p>"Nor do I," responded Harry. "Suppose we see
+John at the first opportunity. There are other
+things besides the copper I would like to know. John
+has asked every one that he has come into contact
+with about the different wrecks that have come
+ashore within the past two years, and no one seems
+to have any idea that more than two of the <i>Investigator's</i>
+boats came ashore."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if they did it isn't at all likely that they
+could come to the southern shore, when the wrecked
+vessel was to the north of the island."</p>
+
+<p>"It is just for that reason," responded George,
+"that I believe we shall find other islands in the
+vicinity, and who knows but some of the boats
+reached those islands?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am with you," said Harry. "Shall we talk to
+John about it?"</p>
+
+<p>"By all means. But stop! Why not have a talk
+with the Professor first?"</p>
+
+<p>"Good idea. We owe everything to him."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_26" id="p_26">p. 26</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+<h3>A MYSTERIOUS MESSAGE</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">The</span> town of Unity was located about ten miles
+from the sea, on a little stream, which had a waterfall,
+from which they derived the power for turning
+the machinery which had been put up. This consisted
+of a saw mill, a small foundry, a machine shop,
+as well as grist mill and other mechanism suitable for
+a town.</p>
+
+<p>All these enterprises were now being operated by
+the natives. The leading commercial genius of the
+town was Blakely, who was one of the owners of the
+vessel on which John had sailed from San Francisco,
+and which was also wrecked by the same monsoon
+which sent the schoolship <i>Investigator</i> to the bottom.</p>
+
+<p>It was Blakely's idea that the work of the natives
+could be profitably turned to raising coffee, cocoa,
+and the different fibres which naturally grew all over
+the island, and in order to take advantage of the
+crops which could be grown there it would be necessary
+to open communication with the outside world.</p>
+
+<p>To do this meant that they must build a ship, and
+thus reach civilization, and vessels could then bring
+such things to the islands as the natives could use,
+and take away the produce that the natives could
+turn out.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_27" id="p_27">p. 27</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Such a plan was one which was heartily seconded
+by all the boys, who, although they had been engaged
+in the most wonderful experiences, were homesick,
+and longed to see their parents in the States, and
+thus relieve them of their anxiety, after an absence
+of more than two years.</p>
+
+<p>It was with a will that all took a hand in the work,
+and the ship was nearing completion. They had no
+facilities for making a large engine, so the vessel was
+a sailer, with a small propeller, and the largest size
+engine they could turn out was to be used as an
+auxiliary.</p>
+
+<p>The next evening while the Professor, John and the
+boys were together, Harry brought up the subject of
+the talk of the previous evening.</p>
+
+<p>"George and I have been talking about making a
+voyage of discovery."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor looked at Harry with that genial
+smile which the boys had learned to love. Without
+answering for the moment, the old man turned to
+John, as the latter's face lit up.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought you boys were homesick?" he said.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, yes," answered George. "But only for a
+little while."</p>
+
+<p>"Only homesick for a little while?" and the Professor's
+hearty laugh followed.</p>
+
+<p>"I mean we are homesick,&mdash;that is, we can be
+cured of it in a little while."</p>
+
+<p>Without relaxing that broad smile, the Professor
+continued: "I suppose you want to be cured before
+you go on the voyage of discovery? Is that it?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_28" id="p_28">p. 28</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"But what do you expect to discover!" asked
+John, gravely.</p>
+
+<p>"Just what you suggested on one occasion," said
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"We want to know where the treasures are on the
+islands," remarked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Then, there is another thing," ventured Harry.
+"I don't think all the boats of our ship were lost, and
+it is likely that they found refuge on some other
+island."</p>
+
+<p>"But how do you know there are other islands
+near here?" asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I don't know, only from what John has
+said."</p>
+
+<p>John looked at Harry for a moment quizzically,
+and then said: "When did I say so?" he asked with
+a smile.</p>
+
+<p>"When you told about the charts of the treasure
+caves."</p>
+
+<p>"But we have found them, haven't we?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but not all of them."</p>
+
+<p>"That is true; and your argument is correct. Unquestionably,
+there are other islands, probably not
+in the immediate vicinity, but near enough that they
+could have caught some of the boats. I quite agree
+with you that we ought to make the attempt. The
+Professor and I have just been talking of taking up
+the matter in order to relieve any who might have
+been so unfortunate as to be east away."</p>
+
+<p>"I am surprised," said the Professor, "that you<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_29" id="p_29">p. 29</a></span>
+are not through with treasure hunting, and want
+some more of it."</p>
+
+<p>"But you know, Professor, that some of the most
+interesting times we had were during the investigations
+we made at the big cave at the Cataract on
+Wonder Island!"</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true; but think of the immense riches you
+now have. In the vault beneath the floor of the main
+shop you have the combined treasure of the two
+caves," continued the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and that shall be taken back by you to your
+homes in the States, and you will want to enjoy it,"
+and John said this with a most sincere air, as he
+looked at the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"That would be nice," said Harry reflectively.
+"But if we are there the only thing we can do is to
+spend it, and there is no particular fun in doing
+that."</p>
+
+<p>"What? No fun in spending the money?" exclaimed
+the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, we haven't spent a cent since we have been
+here, and we have enjoyed every hour of the time,
+except&mdash;except&mdash;" and George hung his head for a
+moment.</p>
+
+<p>"I know," said the dear old Professor; "I know
+what you mean. Home still has a warm place in
+your heart. That is right. You must see your
+home, and then,&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Then we want to come back," broke in Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"It makes me happy to see that the lessons of the
+past while we have been together has impressed on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_30" id="p_30">p. 30</a></span>
+your minds one thing; that it is not riches which give
+happiness."</p>
+
+<p>"I know that," said Harry. "When I go out and
+see these poor people here, and I meet smiles on
+every face, and a welcome everywhere, the thought
+that we have tried to make them feel and know that
+wars were wrong, and that true happiness consists in
+trying to make others happy, it gives me more
+pleasure than all the gold which we took from the
+caves of the Buccaneers."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and there is another thing, that I have been
+thinking about," said George. "I really don't think
+the people here are so bad, and never have thought
+so."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, they have been doing some pretty bad
+things," remarked John. "I would like to know
+what makes you think as you do."</p>
+
+<p>"I mean, that if it wasn't for certain classes, like
+the Krishnos, say, the people would not be trying to
+sacrifice each other. Those fellows are the ones who
+lie to the people, just as the fellows at the last cave
+told the people and the Chiefs that if they went into
+the cave the Great Spirit would destroy them."</p>
+
+<p>John and the Professor both laughed, while the
+boys looked on. There did not seem to be anything
+amusing about that, and they wondered why they
+should laugh at George's remark.</p>
+
+<p>"Did it ever occur to you how like that is to the
+white man's way of doing things?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"I never thought of that!" said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Do the white people act that way, too?" inquired<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_31" id="p_31">p. 31</a></span>
+George. "I never knew that we had people who
+tried to deceive others so they could give them up as
+a sacrifice?"</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think the Krishnos deceive the
+people for?" asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"So as to give them the power," answered George.</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true. But what is the object of that
+power?"</p>
+
+<p>"So they can rule?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but what gives them the power to rule?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I see now! They get paid for it! And
+that is why the Krishnos have all the best things, and
+are better cared for than even the chiefs are?"</p>
+
+<p>"You have given the right answer. The Krishnos
+don't want to sacrifice human life because they love
+to do it, but because in the doing of it they inspire
+fear, and through fear they can get what they want."</p>
+
+<p>"But, Professor, you haven't yet told us how that
+is like the white people do it."</p>
+
+<p>"In exactly the same way. The Krishnos own the
+big gun factories, and they tell the chiefs that the
+people across the river, or on the other side of the
+mountain are going to rise up against them, and they
+must arm the people and attack them. You see the
+white man's Krishnos have a great cave, called a gun
+factory, and while he does not want to offer up any
+sacrifices for the love of it, he does so because it is
+his business to make guns, and ammunition, and
+shells which explode with terrific force, and destroy
+hundreds at every shot."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, after all, we are not much better than the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_32" id="p_32">p. 32</a></span>
+savages here, are we?" said Harry, as he looked
+around, with a sad expression.</p>
+
+<p>"We have advanced a little beyond them," interpolated
+John. "We have tried to systematize the
+killing. The savage goes at it without regard. But
+the white man has set rules to conduct the slaughter.
+Of course, the rules do not say that they shall not kill
+but it does point out the impolite ways of killing."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor smiled at this homely way of putting
+it, but the boys looked doubtfully at John's exposition,
+and then George ventured to remark: "I
+can see the force of it, and it is my opinion that the
+savage way is, after all, the most reasonable."</p>
+
+<p>"If it is not the most reasonable," answered the
+Professor, "it is certainly the most logical. But we
+are getting away from our subject. I understand
+from what John says that within the next week we
+shall be able to launch the vessel!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Harry. "Everything is now so
+far ahead that in two weeks more we can be ready
+to sail."</p>
+
+<p>"That is well. I hear there is considerable rivalry
+among the men to go with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"But aren't you going with us?" asked George in
+a voice of alarm.</p>
+
+<p>"No; my place is here. I have no desire to go
+back. I have induced John, much against his will, I
+know, to go with you, but I cannot leave my people
+here. I will welcome you only the more gladly when
+you return."</p>
+
+<p>Harry was almost in tears, as he said: "But we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_33" id="p_33">p. 33</a></span>
+wanted you to go back with us so we could take you to
+our homes and let our people see you. They would
+be so happy to see you and to hear you talk."</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you so much for the kind invitation.
+Sometime in the future, when everything is properly
+settled here, and I can see my way clear, I will consider
+it an honor to visit your homes, and enjoy the
+friendship of your dear ones; but not now."</p>
+
+<p>The door opened quietly, and Angel stepped in,
+Angel being the Orang-outang to which we have alluded.
+He was now nearly as tall as George. He
+gravely shambled over to the Professor, and placed
+an envelope in his hand.</p>
+
+<p>Angel was the most wonderful character in that
+community. He was the pet and the playmate of
+all the children. No one dared to harm him or offer
+an insult. Such a thing would have caused an
+insurrection in that town.</p>
+
+<p>While he could not speak, he could understand
+practically everything that was told him. Daily he
+performed many extraordinary tasks, thanks to the
+training and care that George had bestowed upon
+him from the day he had become a captive.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor opened the envelope, and adjusted
+his glasses. As he read his eyes opened wider and
+wider, while John and the boys drew closer. While
+reading one of the sheets the Professor was slowly
+unfolding a scrap of dark colored material, smaller
+than the sheet he was reading.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The letter is from Blakely," he said as he passed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_34" id="p_34">p. 34</a></span>
+the papers to John. "And what do you think it is
+about?"</p>
+
+<p>All eagerly peered at the letter and then at the
+brown missive, whatever it was.</p>
+
+<p>"Read it aloud," said the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>John handed it to George, and this is Blakely's letter:</p>
+
+<p>
+"<span class="smcap">South Mountain</span>,<br />
+Below Illya.<br />
+<br />
+"My Dear Professor:<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>"I felt sure that my view as to the character of
+the mountain range below the town was correct.
+Copper outcroppings were found as far south as the
+range can be seen, and there is also silver in abundance.
+This will surely be a profitable field for the
+natives. Yesterday, while prospecting on the southeastern
+side of the main ridge, I was surprised to
+find a part of a metal pot, evidently of cast iron.
+Quite a number of articles, of no particular value
+were lying near, but within the fragment of the pot,
+and protected by a shale of rock, was the enclosed
+scrap, which I thought might interest you, as you
+have a leaning in the direction of finding out hidden
+and abstruse things. Probably, you can decipher
+what it says. All the men are well, and are feeling
+jolly. We may be ready to return in a week. I
+hope the old ship is coming along all right.</p>
+
+<p>
+"Hurriedly, as ever,</p>
+<p>"<span class="smcap">Blakely.</span>"<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>"That is satisfactory. Blakely is the right man
+for his job," remarked John.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_35" id="p_35">p. 35</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Now, let us see what the scrap has to say," said
+the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>John held the scrap up to the light, and all peered
+at it. "I think there are cross lines on it, although
+I am not quite sure," he said, as he again held it up
+so the light could flash through it.</p>
+
+<p>"What difference would that make whether it had
+or it hadn't cross lines?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Simply this: I wanted to satisfy myself whether
+or not it was taken from a ship's pad, which is generally
+ruled both ways."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the object of having paper ruled both
+ways?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is a convenient way of making calculations
+where measurements are necessary, as is the case
+in figuring out and placing the different celestial
+marks which guide the sailors. I think this is a
+marine pad. Now, let us see what it contains, before
+we go further."</p>
+
+<p>"See the name signed at the bottom," cried out
+George. "W-a-l-t. That must be a 't'. But the
+rest is blurred."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if that isn't Walter?" said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Who is Walter?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Walter? Why he is the man who signed the
+note we found on the <i>Investigator's</i> life boat No.
+3 and from whom we have never heard."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember now," said John, reflectively. "He
+mentioned Wright who was one of my companions.
+But I did not know Walter,&mdash;but what is this?"
+All craned forward now. "Here is a line; it looks<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_36" id="p_36">p. 36</a></span>
+like a large V, pointing to the south;&mdash;that is if the
+upper part of the paper is the north."</p>
+
+<p>"There is some sort of tracing on it," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"Your eyesight is good, George, see if you can see
+any figures on the sheet that will explain the V, and
+the reason for the name below."</p>
+
+<p>"There is the slightest sign of a figure, or a word
+just below the point of the V. It looks like '30'.
+This seems to be an arrow, which points to the right
+diagonally."</p>
+
+<p>"Now you boys have something to occupy your
+minds. Yon have been interested in the Walter note
+for a year; now is the time to do some investigating."</p>
+
+<p>"I have an idea," said Harry, jumping up.
+"Where can we find the original Walter's note?
+We can compare the signature, and that will tell
+whether it is Walter or not."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor smiled as he noticed the eagerness
+of the boys. They rushed out of the room and went
+over to the shop to reclaim the note that had given
+them so much concern fourteen months before.</p>
+
+<p>When they had gone John said: "I presume you
+have already guessed what the note contains?"</p>
+
+<p>"Unquestionably it has reference to the location of
+the main ledge of copper or other ore which is measured
+from some point in that vicinity, and which may
+be determined later on by noting the place where the
+missive was found, or from some natural landmark."</p>
+
+<p>"That is my view, but I felt it would be better for<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_37" id="p_37">p. 37</a></span>
+the boys to dig it out for themselves," replied John.</p>
+
+<p>The wonderful nature of the instruction which the
+boys had obtained during their stay on the island,
+was characterized by this little incident. Everything
+learned by one's own exertions is not only more valuable
+because of that fact, but the facts thus gleaned
+will leave a stronger impress upon the mind.</p>
+
+<p>The boys thus learned by doing things themselves,
+that they became strong and self reliant, and it made
+them happy to think that they were able to pick up
+the threads, however tangled, and weave them into
+a harmonious whole. It is the secret of doing things
+well.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_38" id="p_38">p. 38</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+<h3>THE ARROW ON THE SHEET</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">When</span> the boys reached their rooms they set to
+work to decipher the colored paper. It was about
+four by six inches in size, and had been folded twice,
+as the creases plainly showed. Assuring themselves
+that it was paper which had been crossruled, as suggested
+by John, they tried to decipher the straggling
+letters and form them into some coherent form.</p>
+
+<p>The paper had the following appearance when they
+received it:</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 373px;">
+<a id="illus-fig1" name="illus-fig1" />
+<a href="#p_38">
+<img src="images/illus-fig1-p038.png" width="373" height="221"
+alt="Fig. 1.  The Mysterious Message" title="Fig. 1.  The Mysterious Message" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 1. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mysterious</span> <span class="u">Message</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The words, or parts of words "dire," in the first
+line, and "30 gues" in the second line, together with<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_39" id="p_39">p. 39</a></span>
+the letters "Walt" are the only absolutely clear
+things to be noticed.</p>
+
+<p>"The writing is right across the V-shaped marks,
+and the arrow is plain enough. It may be though,
+that the arrow has nothing to do with the V-shaped
+mark." And George held the paper away from his
+eyes to get the proper effect at a distance.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder how close the mountain is to the sea?"
+ventured Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see what difference that would make,"
+replied George. "That <i>30</i> must mean some measurement.
+It is either feet, or miles, or yards, or,&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Why can't you see that 'gues' is a part of the
+word 'leagues.'"</p>
+
+<p>Harry jumped up as though shot. "Well, that
+was stupid of us, sure enough."</p>
+
+<p>"With that key before us, we can make some headway.
+I believe the V-shape is the lower end of the
+mountain, probably a headland, and the arrow points
+to a place 30 leagues to the,&mdash;see here, in the last line
+is a W. and there is a blur before it and after it.
+That may be SWE, EWS, SWW, SWS, and,&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't go so fast," shrieked Harry. "What do
+you suppose the capital I stands for at the beginning
+of the third line?"</p>
+
+<p>"I&mdash;I&mdash;, why,&mdash;<i>Island</i>, of course," said George,
+with an air of superiority. "But it cannot be west."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, the arrow points southeast."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know?" asked George, dubiously.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, that word at the extreme top must be
+'north,' and if so then the arrow is pointing south,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_40" id="p_40">p. 40</a></span>
+and the 'W' belongs to something in that direction."</p>
+
+<p>"There, in the second line is a word that looks
+like 'land.' Can it be a part of the word 'Island'?"</p>
+
+<p>"It doesn't seem so, as there is too much space
+before the letters. It seems to me though, that it
+reads 'land 30 leagues' but what does 'se' mean?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys were up late that night, and they went
+to bed with the missive still unsolved. Before retiring
+Harry said: "Let us wait until daylight.
+The sun may help us out."</p>
+
+<p>When they awoke the first thing that occurred to
+George was the original Walter letter, so that the
+writing could be compared. It was found, and
+George came in with an exultant bound.</p>
+
+<p>"I am sure now that it was Walter. Here it is."
+The original letter was as follows:</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 377px;">
+<a id="illus-fig2" name="illus-fig2" />
+<a href="#p_40">
+<img src="images/illus-fig2-p040.png" width="377" height="253"
+alt="Fig. 2. Walter Letter.
+
+Go directly south from the large
+river which flows to the east,
+west of the mountains. We
+are too closely watched to
+escape. The tribe at war with
+our captors are to the west
+of. If I escape I will follow
+the river to the sea so you
+will understand where I am.
+
+Walter." title="Fig. 2. Walter Letter." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 2. <span class="u">Walter</span> <span class="u">Letter</span>.</span>
+</div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_41" id="p_41">p. 41</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Compare the two and you will see they look
+alike," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"What shall we tell the Professor!" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Well but I am not yet through with the paper.
+Suppose we moisten it, and that may bring out something
+we didn't see before."</p>
+
+<p>This was done, but it made the entire document
+worse than before.</p>
+
+<p>"Too bad we have spoiled it," remarked Harry, "but
+I think we are safe in telling the Professor and John
+what we have found out."</p>
+
+<p>For the time being, however, the boys had other
+urgent work to do. The day for launching had been
+set, and every working hour was valuable, so they
+were over at the ship yard early, and the boys did
+not see either John or the Professor during the
+day.</p>
+
+<p>The vessel as designed by Harry, and supervised
+by John, was ninety feet long, and had a beam of
+eighteen feet, with a very deep keel, and high bulwarks.
+It was constructed of a species of oak, found
+in abundance in the forest west of the town, and was
+cut up into boards, and dried in specially-prepared
+kilns which were put up for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p>While lumber dried in this way is not the best for
+ordinary uses, it will serve for shipping purposes,
+because there is always more or less moisture present
+in the hull of the vessel, and the object was to enable
+them to get the material in the speediest way.</p>
+
+<p>The saw mill was one of their first experiments in
+building machinery, and it was in constant service<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_42" id="p_42">p. 42</a></span>
+from the day it was first erected, getting out lumber
+for building purposes.</p>
+
+<p>The engine was designed only for auxiliary purposes,
+and the boiler was intended to use coal, of
+which they found an ample supply in the northern
+portion of the island, as explained in a previous
+book.</p>
+
+<p>When the boys returned to their rooms late that
+afternoon, the first thing that interested them was
+the message. When it was brought in it was dry,
+and a slight change was noticed in its appearance.
+Now, what appeared to be the first word of the message,
+was discernible, the word "Take," and the
+word "Head" could be made out before and as a part
+of "land," in the second line.</p>
+
+<p>"We have it," cried Harry, as he jumped up.
+"Now let them know about it."</p>
+
+<p>They were across the open space, without any
+ceremony, and without taking trouble to announce
+themselves, were in the Professor's room.</p>
+
+<p>"We have it,&mdash;we have made it out," was the announcement,
+as Harry held up the message.</p>
+
+<p>"Does it tell you where the Copper mine is located?"
+asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Copper mine!" exclaimed George. "What has
+a copper mine to do with it?"</p>
+
+<p>"John and I concluded, from certain markings on
+the paper, that it contained a diagram of the mine!"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you were mistaken," said Harry with a
+chuckle. "It is something about an island, thirty
+leagues to the southeast, somewhere."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_43" id="p_43">p. 43</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Is that so?" exclaimed the Professor in surprise.
+"Get John. He will be surprised."</p>
+
+<p>John came hurriedly at the announcement, and
+the contents of the missive pointed out. "This is
+certainly good news," he said. "That was fine work
+on your part."</p>
+
+<p>"You see the arrow, and the part of the word
+'leagues.' That couldn't mean feet or yards, or
+miles."</p>
+
+<p>"Quite evident," said John, as he mused for a
+while. "This confirms, in a measure, the information
+that we have as to the proximity of these islands,
+but the charts show them farther away."</p>
+
+<p>"Undoubtedly, if Walter knew what he was talking
+about, we have an interesting problem to decipher,
+and the determination to make the voyage is a
+wise and timely one," interposed the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Now for the ship," said Harry. "Every day is
+a hundred, in my mind."</p>
+
+<p>As may be imagined, the boys now worked with
+feverish haste. Other islands here, and waiting for
+them! Sometimes they were almost tempted to give
+up the trip home, but the Professor would not hear
+of it.</p>
+
+<p>"Do not change your plans, if you have any good
+conclusions when you start out. Don't oscillate from
+one thing to another. Always make up your minds
+and then take a wise, persistent course. It is that
+which always serves you best."</p>
+
+<p>"No; we will go home first, and <i>then</i> for the islands,"
+said Harry, who felt relieved that the im<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_44" id="p_44">p. 44</a></span>petuous
+nature of George could be brought to their
+way of thinking, although George was by far the
+most homesick of the entire lot.</p>
+
+<p>All the boys were on hand when the vessel was
+launched. It rode the water beautifully, and the
+natives were the most enthusiastic helpers. They
+felt proud of their work. Uraso and Muro, the two
+chiefs, who were the most prominent men in the community,
+and particularly Sutoto, the intelligent Beree,
+and Stut, the brother-in-law of Muro, were on
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>It was a great feast day for the people. Tears
+actually flowed from the Professor's eyes, as he saw
+the women and children crowd about him. He was
+almost a God to them. They were accustomed to receive
+visits from him in his weekly rounds, and how
+at such times he loved to tell them how to make and
+arrange things about the house, which contributed
+to their comfort.</p>
+
+<p>Everybody was at work; all were happy, and no
+one appreciated this more than the women, who had
+been lifted out of the bonds of slavery and elevated
+through the wise administration of the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>Angel, too, was in evidence. He was the first to
+climb the mast, as the ship floated in the stream.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder whether Angel remembers the first trip
+he took with us on boat No. 1?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Angel bestowed a knowing look on Harry. "I
+believe he knows what you said," remarked George.</p>
+
+<p>In another week the rigging had been put up, and
+the boiler and engine were installed before the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_45" id="p_45">p. 45</a></span>
+launching, so that the necessary work required to
+enable the ship to sail, was the provisioning. John
+suggested that what was of far more importance
+would be the work of training a crew to handle the
+ship, so they turned their minds toward the solution
+of this question.</p>
+
+<p>The selection of a crew was a most difficult task,
+because all the men were willing to volunteer. It
+was decided, however, that only the unmarried men
+should be taken, and this at once eliminated many
+who might otherwise have been selected.</p>
+
+<p>For three days the ship was taken out to sea, under
+sail only, and John found no trouble in maneuvering
+the vessel with his new crew. John was a sailor, and
+had once been owner of a vessel, so that they were in
+competent hands.</p>
+
+<p>But the final day came, when they must go. It
+was a most trying time for the poor boys. Almost
+at the last moment, Harry and George walked back
+to the Professor's room, and broke out into tears.</p>
+
+<p>"Everybody is leaving you," said Harry, "and I
+cannot bear to go and leave you in this way."</p>
+
+<p>All the rescued boys were on board, as well as
+Blakely, since the Professor had insisted that the
+latter should go, for business reasons, so that the
+Professor was left alone, the only white man on Wonder
+Island, when the ship sailed down the river.</p>
+
+<p>True, there was no reason to fear for his safety.
+The natives loved him too devotedly, but the boys
+felt that he must often be lonely in his new surroundings,
+with no one but the natives about him. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_46" id="p_46">p. 46</a></span>
+little knew that the solace and comfort of the grand
+old man was the knowledge that he had helped his
+fellow man, though the color of the skin was darker
+than his own.</p>
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+
+<p>Their voyage was accompanied by favoring winds
+and perfect weather. Valparaiso, Chile, was the
+first port at which they landed, and as a trip around
+the Horn, or even through the Straits of Magellan,
+and up along the Atlantic coast, would mean several
+months, with their own vessel, they shipped in one of
+the line steamers, and within seven weeks they saw
+Sandy Hook lightship, and then the forts which lined
+the opposite shore at the Narrows.</p>
+
+<p>Telegrams to their parents created paroxysms of
+joy in many homes which had been robbed when the
+<i>Investigator</i> went down. There were no happier
+homes than the ones Harry and George were welcomed
+to.</p>
+
+<p>The papers told the stories of the boys in pages
+and pages of descriptions, and they showed the
+photos, and told what the boys had done in their temporary
+home. The hero of all this wonderful home-coming
+was Angel.</p>
+
+<p>The people, the houses, the wonderful automobiles
+which he saw on every hand, at first alarmed him,
+but when he saw that George did not seem a bit
+afraid, he reconciled himself to the situation.</p>
+
+<p>His first automobile ride was a revelation to him.
+He held on tightly to George, at first, but soon the
+sensation became one of joy, and he could not get<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_47" id="p_47">p. 47</a></span>
+enough of it. The boys were certainly f&ecirc;ted, but
+when they told their parents that they must go back,
+the proposition met with strong opposition.</p>
+
+<p>The parents forgot that the boys were now over
+two years older than when they went away, and it
+seemed singular that the surroundings did not seem
+the same to them as before the happy boyhood days
+before they left home.</p>
+
+<p>For business reasons the parents knew that it
+would be prudent to permit them to return and they
+were influenced by the remarkable change they saw
+in the manners and actions of the boys. They saw
+the youths were strong and self reliant, ever ready
+to act and to carry out their resolutions. These boys
+had been transformed into men.</p>
+
+<p>They spent many days going over old scenes and
+visiting friends. They enjoyed to the utmost the
+reunion with their families, but they could not cease
+talking about the Professor. They now realized in
+full what he had been to them, and what his example
+and teaching meant to them. There was really a
+feeling amounting almost to jealousy on the part of
+the people at home against the Professor, but it was
+not one of bitterness.</p>
+
+<p>One who could exert such a healthy influence on
+the lives of the young, as he possessed, was worthy
+of the adulation that the boys bestowed. But John
+was not forgotten in these periods of happiness.</p>
+
+<p>They were never happy when telling the tales of
+their adventures except when John was present, and
+the latter was the most sought-for individual, be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_48" id="p_48">p. 48</a></span>cause
+when he once began to tell some of his vivid
+tales the people would not let him stop.</p>
+
+<p>Finally the time for departure came. A merry
+party gathered upon the dock when the explorers
+were about to depart. They would write at least
+once a month, as Blakely had assured them that he
+would arrange to have a steamer run a round trip
+each four weeks, to take care of the commodities
+which would be made up by the natives.</p>
+
+<p>The steamship <i>Panama</i> slowly moved out into the
+bay, and the boys remembered the memorable event
+which took place at that same dock thirty months
+before. Then they left with a sort of half joy in
+their hearts, and now they were going away to finish
+up the great adventures which they had started when
+they reached the island of Wonder.</p>
+
+<p>All hearts were anxious as the ship neared Valparaiso,
+because there they would leave the liner
+from New York, and again ship in the boat they had
+built. They keenly scanned the pier as the vessel
+was being warped in.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah! there is Blakely on the dock," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"But I don't see the <i>Pioneer</i> here!" responded
+George.</p>
+
+<p><i>Pioneer</i> was the name of the vessel they had built,
+and which brought them to that port from their island
+home.</p>
+
+<p>The moment the vessel came alongside the dock,
+George called to Blakely: "Where is our boat?"</p>
+
+<p>"At Wonder Island," was the reply.</p>
+
+<p>"At Wonder Island?" said Harry, and the boys<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_49" id="p_49">p. 49</a></span>
+looked at each other in amazement. And now they
+must wait several weeks, probably, until it returns.
+This was disappointing, indeed.</p>
+
+<p>The boys rushed off. "And where shall we go
+now?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Over to our ship," replied Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>They followed his gaze to a dock beyond, where
+lay a beautiful vessel, a steamer, all decked out with
+flags.</p>
+
+<p>"Is that our vessel!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and I have been to Wonder Island on her
+since you left. We just arrived two days ago. We
+are ready to steam out within two hours."</p>
+
+<p>"Then don't let us waste a moment's time," said
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought you might want to take a look over the
+town," said Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>"I have no wish to do so, as long as we have the
+islands in view," remarked George. "And how is
+the Professor," he continued in an eager tone.</p>
+
+<p>"He is well and happy. But I have no doubt he
+longs for you, as he frequently goes over to your
+rooms, and wanders around the shop, a thing which
+he never did while you were there."</p>
+
+<p>This was joyful news to the boys. How they
+longed to sail up Enterprise River. The steamer
+which Blakely had bought, and which was destined to
+ply between Wonder Island and the nearest trans-shipping
+point, was called the <i>Wonder</i>, a thing which
+the boys had not noticed until they were nearing the
+vessel.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_50" id="p_50">p. 50</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It was a saucy little steamer, and as they drew
+near Blakely said: "What speed do you think she
+will make?"</p>
+
+<p>"Fifteen miles at least," remarked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I am guaranteed eighteen miles an hour at the
+least."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't that fine," said George. "What does she
+burn?"</p>
+
+<p>"Either wood, coal or petroleum."</p>
+
+<p>"Now would be the time to look up the oil deposits
+on the island," remarked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour the ship was under way, greatly to
+the delight of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the ship was sent forward under
+full steam, the speed was far too slow for the impatient
+boys. They were on the bridge most of the
+time with the Captain who had been employed to run
+the vessel. He proved to be a jolly, red-faced tar,
+who loved the antics of the boys.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_51" id="p_51">p. 51</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SKULL WITH THE CRYPTIC WRITING</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was at the latter part of May when the <i>Wonder</i>
+steamed up the broad river which led to the town of
+Unity. When they were within two miles of the
+town, where they could begin to see the beautiful
+white houses in the distance, Blakely came up to the
+bridge, and suggested that it would be time to give
+the town a salute.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain gave the order and the great whistle
+began to make a horrible din, and kept it up for a full
+half mile. Long before the boat came into sight of
+the dock itself the boys could see the people of the
+town hurrying down to the wharf.</p>
+
+<p>When they saw the boys on the bridge pandemonium
+was let loose.</p>
+
+<p>"This looks and acts just like a real American
+town," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"See the Professor," said Harry, as he rushed to
+the end of the bridge, and frantically waved his hat.</p>
+
+<p>The plank was swung and fastened, and the crew
+of natives rushed off and met their friends, but
+George and Harry were not permitted to walk down
+the gang plank. The joy at seeing them again was
+so intense that the people took them on their shoulders,
+and the Professor had a hard time to get near
+enough to grasp them and bid a welcome.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_52" id="p_52">p. 52</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The people marveled at the boys. They were
+dressed up in regulation American style, and the
+Professor asked them if they had brought the "latest"
+cuts to put in the show windows.</p>
+
+<p>Everybody followed, and the bantering and cheering
+made a continuous performance for them until
+they reached their home. All the chiefs were there,
+dressed up for the occasion, and what delighted them
+more than anything else was the fact that the Krishnos,
+the former witch doctors of the tribes, and who
+were now the teachers for the children, were the first
+to offer congratulations on their return.</p>
+
+<p>There was no work in the town that day. Everybody
+determined to celebrate, and it was with hearts
+full of joy that the boys witnessed the demonstrations
+in their behalf.</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't this a glorious home-coming?" said George.
+"It was worth the trip here to witness it."</p>
+
+<p>"It does seem strange to call it a 'home-coming,'
+but that is just what it is," answered Harry. "How
+happy the people are. They seem to appreciate
+everything that has been done for them, and it is such
+a pleasure to do things for those who appreciate it."</p>
+
+<p>The stories which John brought to the Professor
+were so beguiling that he promised the boys that he
+would probably be able during the next year to make
+a visit with them to their homes, and this delighted
+them beyond measure.</p>
+
+<p>Although they had been absent four months, they
+noted many improvements made during their absence.
+The boys, on their own initiative, visited<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_53" id="p_53">p. 53</a></span>
+many of the homes, and talked to the people, and told
+them of the visit home. And how those simple people
+enjoyed this kindly act, and cherished it for
+months afterwards.</p>
+
+<p>But it was now time to think seriously of the contemplated
+voyage of discovery, which was ever uppermost
+in the minds of the boys. While conversing
+on the subject a few evenings after their return,
+Harry remarked: "I suppose we must use the
+<i>Pioneer</i> for our trip, as the <i>Wonder</i> will have to make
+the regular trips?"</p>
+
+<p>"John and I think that would be the wisest plan.
+The native sailors are now well adapted to handle
+her, and do you know that Sutoto sailed her around
+the island?"</p>
+
+<p>This was pleasing to the boys, who liked Sutoto.</p>
+
+<p>"And who are the others that went with him?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why Lolo was one of them, and Stut and Chump.
+Oh, they had a jolly time; so they said, and I can
+believe it, because they are simply crazy to make
+another trip." And the Professor beamed as he
+related many of the incidents which they told him of
+their experiences.</p>
+
+<p>While they were talking, Sutoto appeared, and
+was immediately admitted. After some talk, Sutoto
+said: "The Professor said that when you returned
+you would have some work for me with the <i>Pioneer</i>."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and you shall command her," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto could not but show his pleasure. "I knew
+you would come back, but so many here said you
+would not."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_54" id="p_54">p. 54</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At this point Professor explained that there were
+many rumors among the people to the effect that the
+boys would never again come back, and all showed
+grief at the news. I assured them that you were just
+as anxious to return as they were to have you and I
+then told Sutoto that I knew you had plans which
+would require his services, but I thought it would be
+more agreeable if you imparted the nature of it to
+him.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were not slow to outline the plans to him,
+but advised him to keep the information to himself,
+which he promised to do. It was enough for him to
+know that he would command the ship. It was this
+that induced Sutoto to take out the ship, and finally
+to circumnavigate the island, so as to try out the
+sailors and properly to fit them for the work when
+the boys returned.</p>
+
+<p>"Now that being settled, Sutoto, we are going to
+leave the work of provisioning the <i>Pioneer</i> to you.
+We must take a supply of guns and ammunition, as
+well, and probably it would be wise to have a small
+troop of the best soldiers," was Harry's instruction.</p>
+
+<p>"Uraso wants to go. I am sure he would be the
+best one to take.</p>
+
+<p>"What will Muro say to that?" asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, take him along, by all means," said George,
+"because I want Lolo to go with us."</p>
+
+<p>It was then settled that they were to take a small
+force, sufficient for immediate purposes, and if it was
+found that the islands discovered were too well set<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_55" id="p_55">p. 55</a></span>tled
+with hostiles it would be an easy matter to remain
+aloof, or return for reinforcements.</p>
+
+<p>While arrangements were being made for the departure
+of the expedition Blakely informed the Professor
+that it would be good policy to make up part
+of the cargo of the <i>Wonder</i> with copper, and that
+both vessels could proceed to the southeastern part
+of the island, and the men aboard could be used to
+transport the copper to the sea.</p>
+
+<p>In this way the expedition would serve a double
+purpose. No one attempted to go contrary to the
+wishes of Blakely on matters which touched upon the
+commercial ventures in which they were engaged.</p>
+
+<p>John was only too glad that Blakely had hit upon
+that idea, as he was anxious to visit that part of the
+coast, contiguous to the copper deposit, and what was
+more, he wanted to see the place where Blakely found
+the missive which the boys had translated.</p>
+
+<p>As there was still a week before the <i>Wonder</i> would
+sail for its northern port of call, both of the ships
+wended their way to the east, skirting the coast as
+closely as possible, John on the <i>Pioneer</i> with the
+boys.</p>
+
+<p>They now had an opportunity to see the Great
+South Mountains from the sea. They remembered
+when they last saw them on land, during the campaign
+against the Illyas, and also the wonderful village
+on the western side of the mountains. What
+would their present wanderings bring forth?</p>
+
+<p>That evening they landed within a cove, both vessels
+being brought as near the shore as possible.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_56" id="p_56">p. 56</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We can safely go in close this evening, because the
+tide is now out," said John.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto, while he had navigated the vessel, and had
+shown remarkable skill, was, nevertheless, not well
+versed in tides and the action of the moon.</p>
+
+<p>Quick to learn, he asked John why the tides thus
+changed. John explained the reason that the tides
+flowed in and out twice during each twenty-four
+hours, or a little less than that time, so that high
+water, or low water would always be at a time a little
+later each day, and then stated that it would be
+an easy matter to so make the calculations that they
+would be able to tell ahead for a whole year just
+when during each day the highest or lowest water
+would be.</p>
+
+<p>While waiting on the ship during the hours of the
+evening they were interested in the magnificent fire
+flies which they saw on the shore and along the mountain
+side. This was not an unfamiliar sight to them
+as they had witnessed such scenes many times before.</p>
+
+<p>But now they saw such sights as they had never
+before observed. They must have been giant glow
+birds, because some of the lights flew at least hundreds
+of feet emitting continuous streams of light,
+and this was not all, many of the lights were colored,
+particularly red and blue or simply faint tinges of
+those tints.</p>
+
+<p>"I have often thought that there is nothing more
+wonderful than the fire fly," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"But what do you think makes it so wonderful?"
+asked John.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_57" id="p_57">p. 57</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Well, I suppose the wonderful part is that it has
+strength enough to make a light," answered Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"No, the remarkable thing is that the light which
+it emits is absolutely cool.
+Experiments which have
+been made go to show that
+there is no heat. In every
+form of light which man
+has been able to produce
+thus far artificially, a
+great heat is evolved, and
+it would be a most valuable
+discovery to find out
+why these insects are able to do it without raising the
+temperature."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 176px;">
+<a id="illus-fig3" name="illus-fig3" />
+<a href="#p_57">
+<img src="images/illus-fig3-p057.png" width="176" height="178"
+alt="Fig. 3. The Fire-fly." title="Fig 3. The Fire-fly." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 3. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Fire</span>-<span class="u">fly</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"But what difference does it make if heat is produced?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The production of heat means the loss of power.
+The heat generated takes up more of the power than
+the light which is produced, so that it would be a
+great economy if the heat could be dispensed with."</p>
+
+<p>"But if there was no heat in the light produced
+would it make any difference in the lamps themselves?"</p>
+
+<p>"Unquestionably. The lamps would last much
+longer."</p>
+
+<p>"What are the things which must be learned in
+order to get the secret of cold light?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, there are number of questions which must
+be determined. While it is known that the fire fly
+and the glow worm emit what is called a phosphores<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_58" id="p_58">p. 58</a></span>cent
+light, this fact is a mere prelude to the knowledge
+of what is the exact color of daylight."</p>
+
+<p>"Color of Daylight? Why, I supposed it was
+white."</p>
+
+<p>"But the light of the glow worm and fire fly are
+not white."</p>
+
+<p>They watched them, and soon appreciated that
+John's statement was true.</p>
+
+<p>"You asked what were some of the things to be
+solved? Well, to find out the secret of the phosphorescent
+glow. That is one thing. What is the best
+artificial light, is the next. Then, what substance
+will have the most intense glow when a current
+passes through it, and give out the least heat."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, has no one attempted to explain any of
+these things?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; many explanations have been offered, but
+all of them leave the subject dark somewhere." And
+John laughed as he saw that the boys appreciated his
+little attempt at witticism.</p>
+
+<p>"But the time will come when man will find out
+this, as everything in his way. When you think of it,
+that electricians, chemists, metallurgists, physiologists,
+engineers, physicists and microscopists, are all
+working on the problem, we should be able to extract
+the secret sooner or later."</p>
+
+<p>"I am going to have some of those fellows,"
+shouted George, and when the natives on board
+heard the request of George there was a scramble for
+the boats, and John was delighted to give them instructions
+for capturing the insects.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_59" id="p_59">p. 59</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Early the next day the entire party landed, and
+Blakely, together with John and the boys, started
+for the high peak, the one visible for miles from the
+west, and which John and the boys often wished to
+visit.</p>
+
+<p>One of the things which the boys brought with
+them from the States, was a pair of strong glasses,
+and these were constantly in use.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you say to scaling that point?" said
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Just what I have been thinking about," said
+George.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto, who was with the party, showed by his
+glowing eyes that he wanted to be of the party.
+"Certainly you shall go," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Before going we must visit the place where the
+Walter note was found," called out John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys had forgotten this. "Most assuredly,"
+answered George, "I had almost forgotten that."</p>
+
+<p>Blakely led the way up alongside the rugged cliff.
+"See that bluish green outcropping," he said as they
+were pulling themselves up.</p>
+
+<p>John stopped and chipped off some specimens.
+"Wonderful!" he exclaimed. "Better than anything
+I have ever found in Mexico. These hills remind
+me of the formation all along western Chihuahua,
+and through northeastern Sonora."</p>
+
+<p>The ledge on which they finally emerged was fully
+six hundred feet above sea level. When they turned
+around and viewed the sea below them, and saw the
+ships at anchor, they were delirious with joy. How<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_60" id="p_60">p. 60</a></span>
+Sutoto enjoyed the scene. He had never seen anything
+like it before and he was amazed and stupefied.
+He turned and grasped George by the hand. He was
+too full to speak.</p>
+
+<p>"But wait, Sutoto, until we get to the top," said
+Harry, as he saw his countenance. As they looked
+up at the top they wondered what they might see
+from the elevation.</p>
+
+<p>"Here is the spot," cried out Blakely. "This is
+the pot in which the message was found. And here
+is something that I dug up afterwards."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 367px;">
+<a id="illus-fig4" name="illus-fig4" />
+<a href="#p_60">
+<img src="images/illus-fig4-p060.png" width="367" height="157"
+alt="Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull." title="Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 4. <span class="u">Inscription</span> <span class="u">on</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Skull</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The boys crowded around. It was a skull on
+which was engraved the characters ABCC, followed
+by a star.</p>
+
+<p>All looked at John, thinking he might offer some
+solution. He turned it over, and examined every
+portion. Not a word was spoken. "Tell me the exact
+position in which this was found," he asked, as
+he looked at Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>"The first thing I found was the pot, which was
+simply turned upside down, in exactly this way.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_61" id="p_61">p. 61</a></span>
+This is the place. It rested on this flat stone. The
+skull was behind it on this upper shelf."</p>
+
+<p>"And was there nothing else on the shelf?"</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing whatever."</p>
+
+<p>John stooped down and carefully examined the
+shelf. All followed his motions. "Do you see that
+mark?" he said, pointing to a heavy scratch, which
+was now plain. "That mark is associated with the
+skull, if not with the message. I am unable at this
+time fully to decipher the marks on the skull, but I
+have an idea of the meaning."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if the scratch across that is in the same
+direction as the arrow in the letter?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Unquestionably: let me see your glasses," and
+George unslung them as John took them and gazed
+long in the direction of the line on the shelf.</p>
+
+<p>He lowered the glasses and slowly shook his head.
+Something was forming itself in his mind, this was
+evident. He walked around the ledge and back
+again. Finally, he said: "I wish it were night, it
+might help to solve the riddle."</p>
+
+<p>"And why?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Those letters have reference to the star which
+follows."</p>
+
+<p>"It seems to me to be a singular thing that anyone
+should leave this here in the hope or expectation
+that it could be a guide for any one," remarked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"There is certainly one explanation of that," answered
+John. "It is evident that the articles were
+placed there as a form of note to others, and it is a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_62" id="p_62">p. 62</a></span>
+sort of cryptic sign, intelligible only to those who
+have the key. The fact that these signs are here
+denote several things, one of which is that something
+important, such, for instance, as treasures, or the
+location of hidden wealth, or the directions necessary
+to find mining lodes, or even to point out the
+direction and distances of other islands in the distance."</p>
+
+<p>"But," said Harry, "the fact that we have found
+these things here looks as though there were other
+parties besides Walter and that he was associated
+with them in some sort of enterprise."</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true; but I am not at all satisfied that the
+Walter note has anything to do with the skull. In
+fact there is every evidence to me that they are entirely
+disconnected with each other."</p>
+
+<p>This announcement was the most surprising to
+Blakely, who now added a few points of information.
+"I should have said that the skull was not exposed
+as you now see it on the shelf. After I went up the
+side of the hill, I returned and landed on the ledge,
+and then I noticed the skull through the apertures
+formed by the stones now lying at the side."</p>
+
+<p>"That is evidence to my mind, that Walter knew
+nothing of the existence of the skull at the time he
+left the message, and yet, singular as it may seem,
+both the skull and Walter's message point to the
+same thing."</p>
+
+<p>This announcement was certainly curious and interesting,
+and keyed up the listeners to a high pitch
+of expectation.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_63" id="p_63">p. 63</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+<h3>THE TRIP TO THE NEW ISLAND</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Exciting</span> as were the events alluded to in the last
+chapter, the boys insisted on taking Sutoto to the top
+of the peak. John and Blakely gathered up the fragments,
+and when the boys left they were busily engaged
+in making careful measurements of the stone
+and ledges.</p>
+
+<p>It was not an easy task to gain the summit, but
+when they reached it, there was spread before them
+the most remarkable panorama. To the north they
+could see South River, the first stream they discovered
+when they came to the island.</p>
+
+<p>They looked on it almost lovingly. "If it were not
+for the mountain range to the north we could see
+clear to Cataract," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The dear old place!" exclaimed George. Sutoto
+smiled. He had been there, and he shared the views
+of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me have the glasses," shouted Harry, as he
+adjusted them and turned to the west. "Unity,"
+was the only thing he said, as he handed the glasses
+to Sutoto. The latter looked, and stepped back in
+surprise. George kept his eyes on Sutoto, as the latter
+bent forward in his eagerness to see the town<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_64" id="p_64">p. 64</a></span>
+which was now so plain to him, although more than
+fifty miles away.</p>
+
+<p>George leisurely took the glasses, as Sutoto said
+slowly, and with proper emphasis, "Wonderful!
+wonderful!"</p>
+
+<p>He turned the glasses to the southeast, hoping to
+catch a glimpse of the land of treasures, but they saw
+nothing but the wide open sea, calm and peaceful,
+and he wondered that it could ever be so angry and
+tempestuous as they had known it to be on two
+momentous occasions.</p>
+
+<p>They remained there for a long time, and viewed
+every portion of the island. When they descended
+they took a route leading to the west, and when
+nearly at the bottom, heard the unmistakable sounds
+of voices below them. For a moment the boys were
+alarmed, but Sutoto set up a shout, his quick ears
+having detected the voices of their friends. It was
+the first caravan load of copper which they were
+taking from the great cave near the Illyas' village.</p>
+
+<p>"Glory! we are near the Illyas' village," said
+Harry, as he stumbled down the mountain side, and
+saw the train of men with the loads.</p>
+
+<p>They would now do some more visiting. They
+must surely go over to the village where they captured
+the last of the hostile tribes. As they neared
+the village they were surprised to see Oma coming
+toward them. He greeted them like a monarch, and
+led them into the village.</p>
+
+<p>"I am glad to welcome you," he said. The boys
+were astounded at the words. This man, the most<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_65" id="p_65">p. 65</a></span>
+vindictive and bitter of all the tribesmen, had learned
+to speak, and showed by his actions that he was glad
+to welcome them.</p>
+
+<p>But when they came to the village, the surprise of
+the boys was so great that they could hardly speak.
+Instead of filth and uncleanliness everywhere, they
+saw carefully attended lawns, and houses, instead of
+huts. The people came out and greeted them with
+laughter.</p>
+
+<p>And then the boys recognized many of the men
+who had lived in Unity, and who had worked for
+them in the shops, and in the fields. The Chief then
+escorted them to the large building, the same one in
+which the Chief was captured by the boys, the year
+before.</p>
+
+<p>What a change! Formerly the furniture in the
+room was one jumbled mass of d&eacute;bris, and the household
+arrangements were only such as savage conditions
+warranted. Now, the large interior had been
+cut up into rooms, and they were furnished with
+comfortable belongings.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief saw the curiosity of the boys, and he
+read their thoughts. "You wonder at the difference?
+Yes; it is a difference. We owe it to that
+wonderful Chief, and to you, and to John."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; John will be here soon," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"I have seen him. He will be here. We are preparing
+a great feast for him," and the boys opened
+their eyes and smiled as they heard this announcement.</p>
+
+<p>The people flocked about them, and the men who<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_66" id="p_66">p. 66</a></span>
+knew the boys were only too proud to be recognized
+by them. Thus they visited every nook and corner
+of the town, surprised and glad to see that the Chief
+had insisted on his people going to Unity and learning
+the ways of the white people.</p>
+
+<p>There was a further reason why the coming of
+John and of Blake was a joyous event. Oma had
+been informed that the great copper mines were to
+be opened in the mountains, which would insure work
+for every one, and that they would be able to buy
+every sort of luxury and enjoy all the comforts of the
+white people.</p>
+
+<p>Late that evening John and Blakely came accompanied
+by two hundred of the Illyas who had actually
+been engaged during the day in transporting
+copper from the cave to the hold of the <i>Wonder</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The feast and the celebration that night in a village
+which, only a few months before, was of the
+most savage character, was, indeed, a marvel. Oma
+could scarcely express himself with enough earnestness,
+and the women were following the boys with
+their eyes, and actually caressing them, in their
+eagerness to show appreciation.</p>
+
+<p>When the time came for them to leave, the Chief
+accompanied the men to the shore below South
+Mountain to witness their departure. Before they
+left the village, the things which had been brought
+there by the ships for the Illyas were placed in the
+Chief's storehouse, and Blakely paid the members of
+the party who had assisted them. This, also, was
+the occasion for much rejoicing.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_67" id="p_67">p. 67</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Blakely, on board the <i>Wonder</i>, waved an adieu to
+the boys and John as the boats separated, and Sutoto
+gave the order to sail directly southeast.</p>
+
+<p>During the afternoon the sea was calm and afforded
+a beautiful sail, but during the night a strong
+breeze came up and its intensity varied during the
+night. The next day, however, the sea became
+choppy, and over two-thirds of the natives were rolling
+around on the deck in the agonies of sea-sickness.</p>
+
+<p>"This will give us an opportunity to try the new
+cure for the malady," said John.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Simply atrophine."</p>
+
+<p>"How is it administered?"</p>
+
+<p>"By injecting it."</p>
+
+<p>"What is atrophine?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a crystalline, bitter and poisonous alkaloid,
+taken from the deadly nightshade, and the same
+principle is also found in the thorn apple."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't it the same as belladonna?" remarked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"No; but belladonna is also an extract of nightshade."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you any of it here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I brought some, together with the other
+drugs that the Professor ordered, and I am anxious
+to try it. The remedy was discovered by Prof.
+Fischer, of Munich, and also simultaneously by Dr.
+Reginald Pollard, of South Kensington, England."</p>
+
+<p>Accompanied by the boys John went among the
+sufferers, and administered the medicine, giving at<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_68" id="p_68">p. 68</a></span>
+each injection about 1-64th of a grain. It was remarkable
+in its effects. Within a half hour the
+sickening feeling in the stomach disappeared, the
+eyes began to grow bright again, the pulse full, and
+the patient became strong and vigorous.</p>
+
+<p>None of them objected to John's ministrations.
+Their confidence in his ability was sufficient for them
+and the results justified their faith.</p>
+
+<p>When the boys came on deck in the morning, they
+strained their eyes looking toward the horizon for
+land but there was no land in sight. John was already
+on deck and he smiled as he saw them ascend
+the ladder. "And where is your island?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"How far have we gone?"</p>
+
+<p>"We have been driven somewhat out of our course,
+it is true; but we are more than a hundred miles from
+Wonder Island, and have sailed past the place where
+the other island ought to be, according to Walter's
+letter." And John chuckled somewhat, at the crestfallen
+looks of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are we going now?"</p>
+
+<p>"I told Sutoto we would better tack to the southwest.
+We can use up a day at that course, and then
+double back, probably thirty or forty miles to the
+south, and in that way we can cover a wide area."</p>
+
+<p>While sailing in that direction they had to go
+pretty much into the face of the wind, but it was considered
+wise to explore that region to the south of
+the islands first, and then take another section to the
+east or to the west.</p>
+
+<p>Night came on without any indications of land, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_69" id="p_69">p. 69</a></span>
+the course was altered directly to the east. The boys
+remained up until nearly twelve that night, but no
+light or evidence of land came in sight. Tired with
+the exertions of the day, they retired, and were soon
+asleep.</p>
+
+<p>How long they slept was immaterial to them. Sutoto
+came into their cabin, and awakened them, saying,
+"We can see some lights in the east." They
+heard the voice, and its earnest expression, and without
+waiting to dress scrambled out. Far off to the
+southeast was a faint glimmer, then it died away.</p>
+
+<p>After a moment or two it appeared again, somewhat
+brighter than before. The night was intensely
+dark, and the wind was blowing a steady gale, so
+that the boat not only rocked but it moved forward
+into the lines of waves across their path.</p>
+
+<p>John was above, and they hurriedly rushed to see
+him. He was smiling, as they approached, and he
+greeted them by saying "We have reached your island,
+probably."</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you seen the light?" asked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"A half hour, or more," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were not in the mood now to return to
+bed, so they went back to dress, and then returned,
+meanwhile watching the light with eager eyes. The
+course of the ship was directed toward it, and every
+one on board had now heard the news.</p>
+
+<p>Soon the watch on the port side sang out: "Land
+ahead," and every one sprang to the left side.
+There, plainly in the darkness, was a headland, or a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_70" id="p_70">p. 70</a></span>
+spur, which they were passing at almost right angles.
+The most intense excitement prevailed.</p>
+
+<p>Still the light was directly ahead, and, apparently,
+a long distance from them. John told Sutoto to haul
+in the sails, and to take a course directly to the
+south. He explained that it would be wise to stand
+off the shore as long as possible, as the ship's clock
+showed that it was now past four o'clock so that
+within the next hour they might be able to view the
+land clearly enough to determine their future course.</p>
+
+<p>Impatiently they awaited that period of gloom
+which is said to be the darkest time,&mdash;just before the
+dawn. This seemed to be so to the watchers, but
+shortly after five the curtain lifted. A slight haze
+was over the land, but they had found an island, at
+least.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know our position?" asked Harry, as
+John approached. "Yes; I have just figured it out.
+We are fifty leagues (one hundred and fifty miles)
+southeast of Wonder Island."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other. Evidently Walter
+was wrong, or they had read his letter incorrectly.
+But they saw land, and John assured them that there
+was no land between that place and their own island.</p>
+
+<p>Anxiously they awaited daylight, and when it came
+they gazed out on a barren waste,&mdash;a rocky and uninviting
+shore.</p>
+
+<p>"Steer for the little cove beyond the great rock,"
+said John.</p>
+
+<p>The sails were hoisted, and the vessel slowly moved<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_71" id="p_71">p. 71</a></span>
+south, and rounded into the waters bounded by the
+circular shore line. The anchor was soon cast, and
+then began the launching of the boats.</p>
+
+<p>John called the men before him, and gave a few
+words of advice. "We have no knowledge of the
+character of the land, or of the people who may live
+there. Two boats will be manned, and ten will take
+their places in each. Uraso will have charge of one,
+and Muro of the other. When we reach the shore
+Muro will remain with the men under his command,
+while Uraso will follow me. It will be understood
+that so long as no shots are heard by Muro and his
+party that our expedition is safe, but should any firing
+be heard, then the ship must be signaled and
+those in the vessel here must come to shore, and Muro
+with his soldiers will at once come to our relief. I
+hope we shall have no occasion for calling on you,
+but we must be prepared for any emergency."</p>
+
+<p>The two boats pulled for the shore. After landing
+John, with Uraso's men the boys quickly scrambled
+up the rough cliffs beyond. When the heights
+were gained they looked over a beautifully wooded
+landscape, but it was still, except for the birds and
+the small animals which looked at them in a startled
+manner, and then scurried for cover.</p>
+
+<p>"I doubt whether there are any people living
+here," remarked Harry. "There is not a sign of
+living beings."</p>
+
+<p>"You are quite mistaken there," said John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at John. "Have you seen any
+signs?" asked George.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_72" id="p_72">p. 72</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes; did you notice how the animals fled at our
+approach?"</p>
+
+<p>They had noticed it, but neglected to draw any inference
+from it.</p>
+
+<p>"That is one of the surest signs. Do you now
+remember how differently the animals acted in the
+region around Cataract from those in the southwest
+portion of Wonder Island?"</p>
+
+<p>"I now remember that is so. Don't you remember,
+George, when we came across the first herd of
+yaks, that they hardly noticed us? I am sure that
+the animals out at West River didn't wait to interview
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I remember the big bear was very anxious
+to make our acquaintance," said George, and Harry
+smiled, as he remembered how the big fellow took
+his revenge by tearing up their baggage.</p>
+
+<p>John directed the men to the right, and in the direction
+of an elevation which seemed to be clear of timber.
+From that point they searched the intervening
+wooded area, and caught sight of a still higher tableland
+miles beyond.</p>
+
+<p>"Your glasses would be serviceable here," said
+John. George handed them to John, and he gazed
+through them long and earnestly. "I am unable to
+find any traces of human beings, and I cannot account
+for the light which we saw during the night,
+and which must have been nearly ahead of us."</p>
+
+<p>He walked forward, the men following. They
+marched for more than a mile, every object being
+examined. Fallen trees were particularly investi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_73" id="p_73">p. 73</a></span>gated,
+and clumps of trees were searched, even the
+bark of trees being minutely gone over by John.</p>
+
+<p>The natives, generally so keen to discover evidences
+of their kind, walked along, and shook their
+heads, to indicate the absence of all signs. The land
+in the interior was elevated, but it was not rough or
+broken, the only place where an upheaval had taken
+place appearing to be the west coast.</p>
+
+<p>"This seems to look bad for our purposes," said
+John, as he turned to the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think there are any caves in this section,"
+he answered. "But we might as well investigate
+farther to the right, and see what the land looks
+like."</p>
+
+<p>"Aren't those coffee trees?" said George, in great
+eagerness, as he bounded forwardly.</p>
+
+<p>There, not a hundred feet away, were the beautiful
+trees with white clusters all over them. Thousands
+of these trees were in sight.</p>
+
+<p>"I believe we have struck a coffee plantation," exclaimed
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John did not answer, but went up to one of the
+trees and carefully examined it. "No, these trees
+have grown wild, and no one has ever gathered the
+berries."</p>
+
+<p>"But what an opportunity there would be here for
+gathering coffee! Too bad Blakely isn't here," said
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"We never saw anything like it on Wonder Island,"
+suggested Harry. "Now, why is it that co<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_74" id="p_74">p. 74</a></span>coa
+will grow in wonderful profusion on one island,
+and none on the next, and the other island will have
+bananas and the other not?"</p>
+
+<p>"The explanation of that has been the means of
+bringing out a wonderful study, that is explained by
+the nature of the soil itself. In every country certain
+sections will spontaneously produce product
+alike, in almost every essential quality. Thus, flax,
+for instance, is found, identical in its character, in
+Kamscatska, and in Minnesota; in the Siberian wilds
+and in Central America; on the heights of the Himalayas,
+and in the lowest plains of South America."</p>
+
+<p>"But how do you explain the similarity? They
+must have come from seed, and how did the seeds get
+from place to place, when there were no ships to
+carry them?"</p>
+
+<p>"There can be only one explanation. The soil itself,
+if identical in its character, will, eventually,
+produce the same vegetables and vegetation. Thus,
+it has been found that the localities where this wild
+flax was found, had soil which was the same in its
+nature, and calculated to produce the same in kind."</p>
+
+<p>For four hours the little band marched to the
+south, and came back along a track nearer the sea,
+without discovering the slightest indication of human
+habitations, except the frightened looks and
+actions of the animals in their path.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px; margin-top: 1.5em;  margin-bottom: 1.5em;">
+<a id="illus-075" name="illus-075" />
+<a href="images/illus-p075-large.jpg">
+<img src="images/illus-p075.jpg" width="395" height="596" alt="He turned it over and examined every portion"
+title="He turned it over and examined every portion" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">&quot;He turned it over and examined every portion&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_60">See p. 60</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_75" id="p_75">p. 75</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+<h3>DISCOVERY OF THE ISLAND AND EXPLORATIONS</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Weary</span>, they dragged themselves over the cliffs
+and down to the waiting natives. Muro was surprised
+to learn that they had found no signs of people,
+so they rowed back to the ship, and after a
+hearty meal, retired for the night.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning when they asked John for his opinion,
+he said, "The only course is to sail south, and
+circumnavigate the island. In doing so we shall effect
+a landing every ten miles or so, and then go into
+the interior. This will thus enable us to learn all
+about the land. At the same time we must survey
+the island, so as to learn its extent, as well as its
+general shape and outline."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we survey it without the instruments?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is readily done, by observing the headlands,
+or some special coast line marks, and then taking
+the angles from those points."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that will be interesting, at least. How
+shall we start?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you see that point to the south which may
+be five or ten miles away?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Now, examine the compass, and turn it so that<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_76" id="p_76">p. 76</a></span>
+the cardinal points are directly north and south.
+Now sight across the face of the compass so that you
+get the exact line between this point and yonder object.
+What do you make it to be?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why I make it out to be S. E."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 393px;">
+<a id="illus-fig5" name="illus-fig5" />
+<a href="#p_76">
+<img src="images/illus-fig5-p076.png" width="393" height="339"
+alt="Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation."
+title="Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 5. <span class="u">Measuring</span> <span class="u">by</span> <span class="u">Triangulation</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"That is correct. The line 1 is south by east."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we find out how long line 1 is?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Why by triangulation," said George, quickly.</p>
+
+<p>"I know that, but how can we do it on sea?"</p>
+
+<p>"It can be done on sea, as well as on land, but we
+had better go and make the first measurement by tri<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_77" id="p_77">p. 77</a></span>angulation
+correctly, and do this in our subsequent
+measurements, unless it should be necessary to make
+the measurements at sea. The plan followed on
+shipboard will be found similar to the plan followed
+on land."</p>
+
+<p>The boat was manned and the boys with a crew of
+the men and John made for the shore, and together
+they went inland to a point marked B (<a href="#illus-fig5">Fig. 5</a>), and
+sighted across to the same object C that was noted
+of the ship. This, then, gave three lines, 1, 2 and
+3, forming a triangle.</p>
+
+<p>"If these angles are placed on a paper the distance
+from A to C can be determined on the principles
+of proportion," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"How is that done?"</p>
+
+<p>"We will assume that the lines 1, 2, are at right
+angles to each other. This is not necessary, but it
+happens to be so in this case. Let us first measure
+the distance along the line 2, which may be any number
+of inches, or feet. Suppose we call the line one
+inch long. Then draw the line 1, so that it will be
+sufficiently long to be sure and meet the line 3."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I now see how it is done," remarked George,
+with enthusiasm. "If the line 3 is drawn at the
+angle we got, when we looked at C, from B, the line
+will cross line 1 at C."</p>
+
+<p>"That is correct. Now, if it is one inch from A to
+B, we may use that inch as a measurement to get the
+distance along the line."</p>
+
+<p>"Let me step it off," said Harry. "I find it is
+just two and three-quarters inches."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_78" id="p_78">p. 78</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What was the distance, in feet from A to B?"
+asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"I have the figures here," said George. "We
+found it was six hundred and ninety feet."</p>
+
+<p>"If, now, you will multiply 690 by 2-3/4, we shall
+have the distance from this point A, and yonder
+point, or headland C."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;">
+<a id="illus-fig6" name="illus-fig6" />
+<a href="#p_78">
+<img src="images/illus-fig6-p078.png" width="361" height="279"
+alt="Fig. 6. The Second Limb." title="Fig. 6. The Second Limb." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 6. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Second</span> <span class="u">Limb</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"I make it out to be just 1897.5," was Harry's conclusion.</p>
+
+<p>The boys, together with John and a half dozen of
+the natives, went along the shore, and mounted the
+point C, and from that place selected another point
+in a southerly direction, and again made the same
+calculations.</p>
+
+<p>The vessel in the meantime was put under sail and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_79" id="p_79">p. 79</a></span>
+anchored a mile below, giving the surveying party
+time to make several triangulations, and late in the
+afternoon the party came on board, tired and ready
+to take a rest.</p>
+
+<p>From the position taken up by the ship they could
+see a long stretch of shore line, practically straight,
+trending toward the southeast, and with their glass
+could see, miles away, a headland which afforded a
+pronounced point for observation.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning the same parties rowed to the
+shore, and Uraso was left with the party to guard the
+shore boat, while Muro accompanied John and the
+boys. On this occasion John issued the following
+instruction:</p>
+
+<p>"The long point which you see in the distance
+is, probably, 15 miles beyond. It is not more than
+that, but this clear atmosphere is liable to deceive. I
+have instructed Sutoto to wait until one o'clock today,
+and if by that time there is no word from us
+Uraso will return to the ship, and you will take up
+anchor and steer for the headland beyond."</p>
+
+<p>"So that you may understand our movements, we
+will strike into the interior, taking a course due east,
+for ten miles, or thereabout, and then turn to the
+south, and reach the sea near the place where the
+vessel will be located."</p>
+
+<p>"I understand, now, how the distance can be
+measured by triangulation on land; but how to get
+the distances, on shipboard, is what puzzles me,"
+said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John smiled as he replied: "I knew you would<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_80" id="p_80">p. 80</a></span>
+come to that sooner or later, so I prepared a little
+sketch (<a href="#illus-fig7">Fig. 7</a>), which shows the bow of a vessel,
+and the tall mast. The lines from A to B give an
+angle with the vertical line of the mast, which will
+enable you to determine how far the ship is from any
+point."</p>
+
+<p>"But I am still in the dark as to how, even if we
+have that distance, we can thereby tell by triangulation,
+on the vessel, how far one point is from another
+on the land."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 391px;">
+<a id="illus-fig7" name="illus-fig7" />
+<a href="#p_80">
+<img src="images/illus-fig7-p080.png" width="391" height="188"
+alt="Fig. 7. Triangulation from a Vessel." title="" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 7. <span class="u">Triangulation</span> <span class="u">from</span> <span class="u">a</span> <span class="u">Vessel</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"After the distance from the vessel to the point is
+determined, as I have shown, then the length of the
+ship itself is used as the two points to sight from, and
+the two lines thus projected, from the opposite ends
+of the vessel, together with the line lengthwise along
+the ship, form a triangle, the same as the triangle
+lines 1, 2, 3, in the sketch (<a href="#illus-fig5">Fig. 5</a>)."</p>
+
+<p>It might be well at this place to describe the equipment
+of the party as it left the boat. The natives
+carried a plentiful supply of provisions. Each had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_81" id="p_81">p. 81</a></span>
+a gun, the best kind of breech loaders, and also a
+spear.</p>
+
+<p>The natives love to handle spears better than anything
+else in the way of a weapon, and each also had
+a knife, and some carried the inevitable bolo, that
+primitive form of hatchet which is known all over the
+world where steel or iron is available, and the people
+have arrived at such a state that they are able to
+make metal articles.</p>
+
+<p>John and the boys also carried guns, but the boys
+had revolvers, seven shooters, not of large bore, but
+very convenient weapons, in close quarters. Each
+carried also a knife, and belt to contain the cartridges
+for the guns.</p>
+
+<p>Harry carried a camera, which he had brought
+from the States, and George had the field glass
+strapped across the shoulders. John felt that they
+had a force large enough to make a fairly effective
+stand against a pretty strong force of natives, the
+entire party counting, in this instance, sixteen.</p>
+
+<p>As they advanced into the interior, it was evident
+that they were gradually ascending, so that at about
+six miles from the landing place they reached the
+crest of the rising ground. Beyond, where the nature
+of the ground permitted they saw clearly that
+the distance beyond had a lower altitude than the
+place where they stood.</p>
+
+<p>During this trip there was no evidence that the
+island was occupied, but they saw the most amazing
+evidences of tropical fruits and trees. Magnificent
+trees were in evidence everywhere, and the woods,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_82" id="p_82">p. 82</a></span>
+besides mahogany, and ebony, were of the most valuable
+character.</p>
+
+<p>John noted all these things, but the boys were
+most interested in the birds and animals which
+roamed about. The latter were not large or vicious
+looking, but it was not permitted to shoot any of
+them lest it might alarm Uraso, who was at the landing.</p>
+
+<p>Ahead could be seen several ridges, one of them
+heavily wooded. Reaching the summit they beheld
+a beautiful valley below, and opposite on a shelving
+rock, stood a type of mountain deer like a sentinel,
+while a dozen or more were feeding on the green
+slope beneath.</p>
+
+<p>Frequently on the march the boys would take side
+trips, in the attempt to run down some of the curious
+animals, but they were careful to keep the main
+force in sight.</p>
+
+<p>Thus they tramped on fully five miles beyond the
+crest of the ridge, and occasionally John would stop
+to examine some suspicious-looking indication of
+habitation.</p>
+
+<p>"It would surprise me very much to find that the
+island is not inhabited," he said, as he examined
+what appeared to be a path.</p>
+
+<p>At this juncture one of the native scouts came up
+and showed John a curious stone formation. John
+took it, and turned it over several times. "That is
+part of a stone hatchet." The scout nodded assent
+with a smile.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_83" id="p_83">p. 83</a></span></p>
+
+<p>All now became intent on searching. This finally
+resulted in bringing to light a well-formed spear, not
+unlike those originally used on Wonder Island among
+the native tribes.</p>
+
+<p>Surely they were getting evidence pretty fast now.
+Then, while crossing a little rivulet, one of the scouts
+plainly saw the print of a native foot, which was
+unmistakable. True, it had been made days before,
+probably a month, but there it was, and now it was
+incumbent on them to find out where the people were.</p>
+
+<p>The entire party scattered along the little stream,
+and searched both banks for a considerable distance,
+the boys taking an active part in the work. Usually
+the boys kept together, and entertained each other,
+but on this occasion all were so intent on discovering
+where, and in what direction the footprints would
+lead, that they quite forgot to watch each other.</p>
+
+<p>John gave a customary whistle, as he was in the
+habit of doing, when it was desired to call the party
+together, and all of the scouts promptly returned, as
+well as Harry. George was nowhere to be seen.
+John questioned Harry. He had first missed him at
+the bend in the stream not two hundred feet to the
+north.</p>
+
+<p>He rushed back in that direction, while John gave
+another blast on the whistle, and then listened intently
+for a reply. Harry came back without any
+intelligence, and almost frantic. John and the
+scouts then broke into a run, and Harry turned with
+them.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_84" id="p_84">p. 84</a></span></p>
+
+<p>That instant a shot rang out. "That must be
+George," exclaimed John. "Forward as quickly as
+possible."</p>
+
+<p>The party turned the bend of the river. All along
+this part of the stream the banks were cut up by
+ridges and diminutive cliffs, and in many places were
+large shelving rocks which came up close to the
+stream.</p>
+
+<p>Immediately after the shot John stopped, and
+listened for some sound, and the natives, usually so
+alert to recognize noises, did likewise.</p>
+
+<p>"That shot means that George is in some danger,"
+said John.</p>
+
+<p>"But why does he not answer the whistle? Why
+should he shoot, and then not call to us, if there is
+any danger," said Harry in despair.</p>
+
+<p>They turned the bend, and searched to and fro.
+The shot could not have been more than eight hundred
+feet away. The searchers spread out into a
+fan-shaped formation. One of the scouts ran up
+hurriedly and called to John, who went forward, and
+there, alongside of a huge rock, where there was little
+grass, he saw unmistakable evidence of a scuffle.</p>
+
+<p>"These are the footprints of George's shoes," remarked
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and here are the prints of the native feet,"
+said John, as one of the scouts distinctly pointed out
+two or three well defined marks.</p>
+
+<p>"They are, undoubtedly, near at hand. We must
+now be on our guard," said John, as he pondered
+on the situation.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_85" id="p_85">p. 85</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I wonder why they didn't attack us?" asked
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The reason, no doubt, is that it is a small party.
+A larger body would not have attempted to capture
+one of us by stealth."</p>
+
+<p>John turned to Hasmo, one of the fleetest runners,
+and instructed him to go back to the landing place
+at once, and advise Uraso to bring his men and provisions,
+as well as additional ammunition, and to hold
+the ship until additional word should be sent.</p>
+
+<p>Hasmo was off in an instant, and then John issued
+additional instructions. "It is evident," he said,
+"that we must look for the people to the east or,
+more likely, toward the southeast. That is the
+reason why I had the boat held at the place where we
+have just landed. There is also another reason why
+I think the tribes, if there are any, are to the south,
+and that is, in this latitude they are much less exposed
+to the effects of the great winds that occur at
+certain portions of the year."</p>
+
+<p>Harry wandered about, not knowing what to do, at
+this terrible catastrophe. George in the hands of the
+savages! He could hardly believe it.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't worry about George too much," said John
+consolingly. "I am inclined to think he has had
+enough experience within the past two years to help
+him out of immediate trouble, and we will then be
+able to take a hand."</p>
+
+<p>This somewhat relieved Harry. It is possible that
+George might be able to take care of himself. "But
+suppose they kill him?" This was his great fear.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_86" id="p_86">p. 86</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"It is not at all likely they will do that," remarked
+Muro. "Those who captured him form only a small
+party, and it is not at all likely that there was a chief
+with them. Under the circumstances they would not
+dare kill him until the Chief ordered it."</p>
+
+<p>John smiled as he nodded at the explanation
+given by Muro. After all, it was not as bad as it
+might be. Now to the rescue. Muro begged permission
+to do scouting work until Uraso arrived, and
+selecting Stut as his companion, they glided through
+the forest directly to the east.</p>
+
+<p>They were now fully twelve miles from the boat,
+and the runner could be depended on to reach Uraso
+within an hour, if not hindered on the journey. It
+would then take, possibly, two hours more for the
+party to return, so that it was safe to assume that
+they would have to remain in the vicinity for the next
+three hours.</p>
+
+<p>John decided that the time should be spent in exploring
+the directions to the southeast and to the
+northeast as well, so they might be well informed
+when the reinforcements arrived.</p>
+
+<p>Hasmo glided through the forest like a deer. He
+knew that it was imperative to reach the shore before
+one o'clock, because at that time the vessel would
+leave for the southeastern point. To get there too
+late would mean a trip for fifteen miles or more along
+the shore to reach the next landing.</p>
+
+<p>The dense forest near the shore prevented him
+from seeing the vessel until he crossed the last ridge,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_87" id="p_87">p. 87</a></span>
+and when he finally came within view of the harbor
+the ship had disappeared. He stopped and glanced
+to the south, but no ship was in sight. This was a
+situation which had been considered, from the point
+of view of the departure of the vessel; but where had
+it gone?</p>
+
+<p>He went to the shore, where Uraso's party had
+been, and then, laboriously ascended the point beyond,
+and from which he could get a clear view of the
+sea. There, far beyond, was the <i>Pioneer</i>, sailing to
+the southeast under a strong breeze.</p>
+
+<p>He tore off his jacket, and seizing a branch, began
+to wave it back and forth. The ship went on, and
+there was no indication that they noticed him. He
+remained thus for nearly a quarter of an hour, and
+then knew that he must follow the ship until he
+reached the next landing place.</p>
+
+<p>The trip along the shore was a most difficult one,
+as he could not follow the beach. Many of the rocks
+along the shore were licked by the waves, so that he
+had to take a course beyond the cliffs, and the land
+was not only rough, but numerous gulleys, or draws,
+as they are called, were washed out, making speed
+impossible.</p>
+
+<p>It required more than two hours to make the trip,
+and it was considerably after three when he hailed
+the boat from the shore, and hurriedly told the story
+of George's capture.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso was not slow in gathering the men needed
+for the expedition, and when the guns and ammuni<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_88" id="p_88">p. 88</a></span>tion
+were brought out all of the men actually begged
+to go along, but he knew that John would not sanction
+leaving the vessel without a crew.</p>
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+
+<p>John and his scouts impatiently awaited the return
+of the men and during this time received the reports
+from the scouts as they came in. It was evident
+from the slight traces found that the band which captured
+George had gone east. It was no doubt from
+some indication to this effect obtained by Muro, that
+induced him to take his course in that direction, also.</p>
+
+<p>All had departed but Muro: Four o'clock came,
+and then five, but neither Muro nor Uraso appeared.
+This did, indeed, look strange to John, who could, in
+a measure, account for Muro's non-appearance; but
+he could not understand why Uraso did not come.
+It then occurred that after all Hasmo might not have
+been able to reach the landing before sailing time,
+and with this theory he consoled Harry, who was constantly
+on the alert, waiting for tidings.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_89" id="p_89">p. 89</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+<h3>CAPTURE OF GEORGE BY THE NATIVES</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Let</span> us now follow George. He went along the
+stream on its westerly side, while Harry was examining
+the eastern shore. Coming to a little rivulet,
+which flowed into the main stream at this point, he
+passed alongside the projecting ledges of rock, that
+for the moment hid him from the view of Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Here he saw some peculiar rocks, and outcroppings,
+which reminded him so forcibly of the early
+days on Wonder Island, when the Professor so
+strongly impressed on them the value of investigation.
+The gun was stood up, leaning against the
+rocks, when he was seized by two strong arms, and a
+hand placed over his mouth.</p>
+
+<p>In the struggle his hand touched the gun, and as
+his captor drew him back, he took the gun with him,
+and no effort was made to dispossess him of the
+weapon. He was carried along, one hand pinioned to
+his side, while the other hand carrying the gun was
+free, but he was unable to use it.</p>
+
+<p>He could not have been carried more than a hundred
+feet, before he heard John's whistle. This
+startled his captors, for he now saw that there were
+two burly specimens, almost wholly naked, and for
+the moment the hold on the imprisoned arm was relaxed.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_90" id="p_90">p. 90</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Quick as a flash he drew up the gun and fired.
+This was the shot heard by John and Harry. The
+shot was such a surprise that the savages were almost
+paralyzed, and dropped their hold, but it was only
+for an instant. Realizing that the noise was made
+by George's weapon, and not caused by any of the
+boy's companions, the nearest savage swung around
+viciously, and poor George was knocked unconscious
+by the blow.</p>
+
+<p>How long he remained in this state he did not
+know. When consciousness returned he was lying,
+on some tufted grass, and a half dozen vicious looking
+savages stood around him. Then he remembered
+the circumstances of his capture.</p>
+
+<p>He eyed them for a time, and then slowly sat up.
+One of the party had George's field glasses slung
+around him, just as he himself had them on when
+captured. One of them was fondling the gun, but
+it was evident from the manner in which he held it
+that he had no knowledge of its uses.</p>
+
+<p>His cartridge belt graced the form of one of the
+other savages, and it was evident that they considered
+the things thus taken more in the nature of ornaments
+than as weapons. He slowly felt his pockets
+and was surprised that they had removed nothing.</p>
+
+<p>While he was rising to a sitting posture he could
+feel his revolver, and wondered why he had not been
+disarmed. A glimmer of joy shot through him. His
+hands were free, and he had no pain, except the sore
+feeling that was keen on the side of his head, and
+which was, no doubt, caused by the blow.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_91" id="p_91">p. 91</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Not a word was spoken by either. He hoped something
+would be said and probably he would be able
+to recognize the language, as his two years' experience
+in Wonder Island gave him a fairly good understanding
+of the native tongues.</p>
+
+<p>He pronounced some words, in the Saboro and also
+in the Illya dialect, but they stared at each other, and
+answered in some words that were utterly unlike anything
+known on their own island.</p>
+
+<p>Soon, after a conversation among themselves, he
+was raised up and urged forward. The first thing
+that George did was to note the position of the sun,
+and he then stealthily drew out his watch.</p>
+
+<p>When the savages, who were closely watching him,
+saw the watch two of them pounced upon him, and in
+the struggle, one of them tore it from the chain. The
+holder of the chain threw it away, and attacked the
+one who had the watch.</p>
+
+<p>This was certainly an interesting struggle for
+George to witness. He had his thoughts, however.
+Now was the time to make a strike for liberty, so he
+quietly moved his hand toward the revolver. George
+was not aware that a pair of eyes was intently watching
+him while the struggle was going on.</p>
+
+<p>Before the hand reached the revolver, the savage
+leaped forward. His heart sank. The opportunity
+was lost. He dove down into the pocket and brought
+forth a knife, and it was hardly out of his pocket
+until the prying native had it in his hand.</p>
+
+<p>George gave a forced smile. The native saw it,
+and looked admiringly at the beautiful handle. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_92" id="p_92">p. 92</a></span>
+turned it around and viewed it from every side, and
+then deftly drew a strand of material from his clout
+and, winding it around the knife, threw the loop of
+the strand over his head.</p>
+
+<p>This, too, then, was an ornament! They did not
+know the uses of the knife. George kept up the
+smile, and soon the savage smiled in return. This
+was a good beginning, surely! But what surprised
+him most of all was the perfectly natural manner in
+which the defeated party in the contest after the
+watch took his loss.</p>
+
+<p>The victor fashioned it as a pendant, and the other
+looked calmly on while his opponent admired it.
+There was not a particle of resentment in the loser.</p>
+
+<p>George did not show any alarm to the savages,
+although it would be too much to say that he was entirely
+at ease. The instructions received from John,
+the experiences of Tom and Ralph when they were
+captured, were lessons for him, so, when the savages
+smiled back at him he pointed to the knife, and made
+motions as though he intended to open the blade.</p>
+
+<p>All savages are curious. Many of them have this
+trait developed to a remarkable degree. George's
+motions attracted the man. Then he leaned forward,
+and removed the knife from the loop. He held it up,
+exactly like a magician would exhibit some article
+that he intended should disappear.</p>
+
+<p>Then, as the savage's mouth was now open, he inserted
+his thumb nail into the crease of the large
+knife, and opened the blade. Then he extended out
+his hand, and offered the open knife to the savage.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_93" id="p_93">p. 93</a></span></p>
+
+<p>To say that he was merely surprised is putting it
+mildly. He could not possibly open his eyes wider,
+and instead of taking it, drew back. Then George
+quickly closed the blade again, and offered it in that
+way, and he was induced to slowly take it back, while
+he glanced at George suspiciously.</p>
+
+<p>The burly individual who carried the field glass
+was then approached by George. The latter took
+the glasses and put them to his eyes. At this act
+the savages set up a whoop, and the glass was
+snatched from him. Evidently they thought it was
+something like the gun.</p>
+
+<p>George smiled, and again made the motion, as
+though he desired to take the glass. The savage
+took the loop from his neck, and handed the instrument
+to George. The latter put it to his eyes and
+pointed them to the east, carefully adjusting them to
+get the proper focus.</p>
+
+<p>To his surprise he saw the evidences of a village
+in the far distant landscape, and, beyond it, the sea.
+What a discovery this was, indeed!</p>
+
+<p>The glasses were then presented to the burly savage,
+who now claimed its ownership, and tried to
+induce him to look through it. In this George finally
+succeeded, and after he saw the effect of the distant
+landscape, the attitude of the man changed, and he
+looked on George with a species of admiration and
+wonderment.</p>
+
+<p>George walked about them, in the most careless
+manner imaginable, but they never took their eyes
+from him. He smiled at them, again took the knife<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_94" id="p_94">p. 94</a></span>
+and performed the feat over and over again, and
+then instructed the savage how to do it.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly he thought of the match safe. What a
+jolly trick that would be to spring on them. But it
+would be more effective at night, he reflected, and so
+he refrained from taking it out. It was evident,
+however, that he was making a hit of some kind.
+Whether it would aid him in escaping he did not
+know, but he tried every means possible to ingratiate
+himself, and to show that he had no fear.
+The view of the village which he had accidentally
+discovered impressed itself on him with startling
+force. If he once reached the village escape would
+be difficult, and consequently he viewed the searching
+eyes of his captors with great uneasiness.</p>
+
+<p>This was evident by the cat-like action of the one
+who got the knife. If he made the slightest move of
+his hands, he could see the eyes following them.
+Once he stumbled as they were marching along.
+This was purposely done, in the hope that during the
+time he was recovering his erect position he could
+draw the revolver.</p>
+
+<p>He had his course of action all planned out. He
+had no desire to kill, and he made up his mind that
+he would first cover them and then by motions wave
+them away, but it would be necessary to depend upon
+mimicry for this.</p>
+
+<p>He had learned from John that savages are
+naturally the most expert pantomimists, and are able
+to express many things by gestures, this faculty having
+been made the more acute because the different<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_95" id="p_95">p. 95</a></span>
+tribes are frequently brought into contact without
+any connecting link in the dialects or languages.</p>
+
+<p>If they refused, or made any attempt to seize him,
+he would then shoot the leader, and thus strike terror
+into the others. But while he was thus arranging
+all the details in his mind, he was startled at seeing
+a whole group of savages leap from the side of the
+ill-defined path, which they were now traveling, and
+they speedily surrounded the captor and captive.</p>
+
+<p>Then began a bedlam of explanations as they
+crowded around George. Some came up and felt his
+arms, and other portions of his body. He smiled
+meanwhile. It was the only thing he could do, and
+he knew it would be useless to look troubled.</p>
+
+<p>The next moment the visitors were examining the
+glass, the cartridge belt, the knife and the watch, and
+George was, temporarily forgotten, although surrounded
+so that he could not possibly force his way
+through.</p>
+
+<p>He thought it a remarkable thing that they should
+thus hold and watch him with such tenacity. While
+thus discussing him, a new party appeared, and now
+for the first time there was an attempt to show deference.</p>
+
+<p>The leader of the party was the most powerful
+savage George had ever seen. Uraso was a powerful
+warrior, and Chum was also noted for his
+strength, but it seemed that the man now coming up
+must be a giant. Some of the immediate party
+rushed up to him, and after making a respectful bow,
+told him of the capture.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_96" id="p_96">p. 96</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He approached with dignity, and those around
+George moved away.</p>
+
+<p>Without a moment's hesitation George moved
+toward the Chief, and when ten feet away, he
+stopped, straightened himself erect, and with a most
+courtly bow smiled as he recovered his position.</p>
+
+<p>The strong and resolute manner in which this was
+done was really a cause for marvel in the savage.
+He looked at his people, and spoke a few words, and
+those who had been his guards came forward most
+deferentially, and, so far as George could understand,
+told of the circumstances surrounding his capture.</p>
+
+<p>But there was one thing which struck George as a
+peculiar thing. The three men who had participated
+in the loot of his valuables did not exhibit them while
+talking to the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>There was a long palaver, and many gestures indulged
+in. The question occurred to him: What
+had become of the articles which they had taken?
+Did they purposely hide them?</p>
+
+<p>At the close of the conversation two of the Chief's
+immediate associates came forward, and began to investigate
+his belongings. The first thing they
+brought out was the revolver, and at this George was
+almost on the point of breaking down. Then he grew
+bitter.</p>
+
+<p>The silver match box was the next to attract the
+attention of the searchers; and so they went through
+from one pocket to the other in the most approved
+style.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_97" id="p_97">p. 97</a></span></p>
+
+<p>These were laid before the Chief who grunted his
+approval at the different things, and his admiration,
+judging from the character of his remarks, was unbounded
+at the silver-plated revolver.</p>
+
+<p>From the curious way in which he handled it
+George was alarmed. It was an automatic, and if
+the Chief once pulled the trigger there would be
+trouble for some one. George held up a warning
+hand, and the Chief looked up from the weapon.</p>
+
+<p>The only thing he could do was to point to the
+revolver, and vigorously shake his head. The Chief
+looked around as though inquiring the meaning of
+such a sign. He was not interfered with as he
+walked up to the savage, and held out his hand. The
+Chief handed him the weapon.</p>
+
+<p>Then, picking up a leaf, he motioned to one near
+him to place it on the side of a tree. At a word from
+the Chief the man did so, but George motioned to him
+to carry it still further away. He took deliberate
+aim, and thanks to his long and regular practice, the
+leaf received the impress of the bullet, while the savages
+jumped in all directions at the report.</p>
+
+<p>Only the Chief remained impassive. He never
+moved, but when the leaf was brought to him, he
+looked on the youth with a kindly smile. George was
+quick to notice this. He again walked over to the
+Chief, and placed the weapon in his hand, and
+guided his finger to the trigger, while at the same
+time holding up his hand so as to sight it.</p>
+
+<p>This time the shot was directed to the nearest tree.
+The savages scurried to give them room. When the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_98" id="p_98">p. 98</a></span>
+Chief pulled the trigger and the discharge followed,
+George caught him by the arm, and took him to the
+tree, pointing out the hole made by the bullet.</p>
+
+<p>There was a wondering look on the Chief's face.
+He looked at the weapon, and then at the hole.
+There was a question in the peculiar guttural sounds
+of his language, which slowly came from his lips.
+Evidently the Chief wanted to know something.</p>
+
+<p>Ah! he knew what it was. What made the hole?
+George took the weapon, and extracted one of the
+bullets, and then pointed to the hole in the tree. It
+was plain that even this did not satisfy him. Better
+still; why not dig out the bullet; and as he thought of
+it he instinctively reached in his pocket for the knife.</p>
+
+<p>Then he remembered. One of his captors had it.
+Without any ceremony he walked over to the man
+who had it, and by motions indicated that he wanted
+the knife. The savage was mute. He boldly
+searched the folds of the rude clout, and without a
+protest on the part of the savage he brought forth the
+coveted knife.</p>
+
+<p>This action was indeed a surprise to the Chief. A
+frown gathered on the Chief's face. George saw it,
+and really trembled for the first time, as he saw the
+eyes of the Giant riveted on the knife, and then
+turned to the culprit. The latter fell to the ground,
+and muttered something, and instantly the two others
+were also seized, as they uncovered the other belongings
+and laid them before the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>George looked on the scene with genuine regret.
+The culprits were led away, and he speculated on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_99" id="p_99">p. 99</a></span>
+their fate. But the Chief's eyes immediately returned
+to the hole in the tree, while the gaze of the
+others rested on the cartridges, the watch and the
+field glasses. The knife was in George's hand, and
+he slowly opened it whereat the appearance of the
+blade startled the Chief. He was all eagerness now,
+so George closed the blade and opened it again, and
+then cut a circle around the bullet hole and chipped
+the wood away.</p>
+
+<p>There was the bullet, and he slowly drew it forth,
+a shapeless bit of lead. When he had deposited it in
+the Chief's hand, he laid one of the cartridges alongside,
+and also showed the empty shell. Then he
+quietly laid the closed knife in the Chief's hand and
+stood back with his arms folded, as though he owned
+the entire Island.</p>
+
+<p>If the action of the Chief counted for anything the
+boy did have everything in sight. The Chief returned
+the revolver to George, and then began to
+examine the articles before him. The most interesting
+appeared to be the cartridge belt. He looked at
+the revolver and cartridges, and then turned over the
+revolver bullet and shell which George had exhibited.</p>
+
+<p>It was now plain that the Chief could not understand
+the use of the large cartridges. George's
+mind was working by this time. He did not recall
+that the gun was in evidence at any time after they
+met the first crowd on the road.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief pointed to the cartridges, and George
+looked toward the group which had captured him.
+This was enough for the wily savage. A stern com<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_100" id="p_100">p. 100</a></span>mand
+was issued, and in an incredible short space of
+time the gun appeared. Where it could have been
+hidden was a marvel. Certainly these people must
+be adepts in the art of concealment.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief handled the gun in a most awkward
+fashion and George politely took it from his hand,
+and after glancing about for a moment, saw a bird
+on a branch. This he brought down, upon which one
+of the men ran forward, picked it up and brought
+it to the Chief. After this the weapon was turned
+over to him, and the peculiar chuckle that followed
+was, undoubtedly, the savage's way of expressing
+delight.</p>
+
+<p>One of the attendants then came forward at the
+order of the Chief, who, after the articles were gathered
+up, indicated to George that he should follow,
+and turned toward the village. George did not regard
+the prerogatives of royalty, but he took up a
+most democratic position by the side of the Chief,
+to which the latter did not object.</p>
+
+<p>It required nearly an hour before they reached the
+village. Women and children, and boys his own age
+were in evidence everywhere. They came out of the
+huts and followed the procession, on the way to the
+Chief's quarters.</p>
+
+<p>Singularly George did not now feel the slightest
+bit of fear. On the other hand, there was confidence,
+a sort of assurance that he could not express. This
+feeling came to him, not so much from the general
+demeanor of the Chief, as on account of the one act,
+namely, the return to him of the revolver.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_101" id="p_101">p. 101</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Chief's home was an entirely different sort of
+affair from the other dwellings. It was noted that,
+the homes of the ordinary people were made singularly
+like those of the tribes on Wonder Island, usually
+of twigs braided and brought together at the
+upper end so as to form cone-like enclosures, and all
+were covered with clay, so as to keep out the rains.</p>
+
+<p>Outside of these houses appeared to be the sleeping
+quarters, and a glance at some of them impressed
+George as being exceedingly filthy. The houses
+were intended only for the rainy season, apparently,
+as was the custom in many places on their own
+island.</p>
+
+<p>But the Chief's dwelling was a most pretentious
+affair, judged by the surrounding homes. It had a
+large interior court, without a roof, but the immediate
+dwelling had four or more rooms. The Chief
+walked through one room, and entered the court,
+where George was embarrassed to see two girls, and
+several boys, together with three women, all of whom
+stared at him, the girls giggling exactly as he had
+seen them do at home.</p>
+
+<p>The articles taken from him were then deposited
+upon the floor, and the Chief reclined on a sort of
+raised couch. George glanced around and the first
+thing that his eyes met was a chair, in one corner of
+the room, and then some articles that he knew could
+not have been made on the island.</p>
+
+<p>This was his introduction to the home of the Chief.
+He then fell to wondering how it would be possible
+to talk and tell him about his friends.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_102" id="p_102">p. 102</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+<h3>FIGHT OF THE NATIVES FOR THE TRINKETS</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Scouting</span> in an unknown country, with assurances
+that foes may be in ambush at every turn, is not a
+rapid way of marching. Ordinarily, in the open
+road, a man will walk three or four miles an hour.
+But in a forest, where every tree may conceal a foe,
+it is quite different.</p>
+
+<p>Muro was an expert in scouting work. He had
+had years of experience in this sort of life, and,
+moreover, was a chief of one of the most powerful
+tribes on the island.</p>
+
+<p>He and his companion went directly east, in the
+most stealthy fashion, and, a half mile beyond they
+circled to the south, next swinging around to the
+north, so as to take in as wide a sweep as possible.</p>
+
+<p>Before dark they obtained the first real traces of
+the tramp of feet, and as it was now too late to enable
+them to follow up the trail they went back toward
+the scene of the capture, so that they might
+thus be able to follow the trail easily the next morning.</p>
+
+<p>It was very dark when they crept in and were
+halted by the sentries which John had posted.
+Harry was the first to greet Muro. "Have you
+found anything?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_103" id="p_103">p. 103</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Muro. "We know the direction
+they have gone. In the morning we can go on from
+the place where we discovered the trail."</p>
+
+<p>"How far is it from here?"</p>
+
+<p>"More than ten miles."</p>
+
+<p>The distance mentioned was in itself sufficient evidence
+that Muro had not wasted time.</p>
+
+<p>They spent the remaining hours of the evening
+awaiting further news and it was fully ten o'clock
+before the sentry to the south reported the probable
+approach of Uraso. Harry leaped out from the
+circle, and followed the sentry. It was, indeed,
+Uraso who had been reporter.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell me all about it," he requested, and Harry,
+with a voice full of pathos, told him how it happened.
+When he had finished, Uraso said:</p>
+
+<p>"I was told by my father that somewhere here in
+the seas was an island where were found most terrible
+people, who killed every one they captured. I
+hope this is not the place." And Uraso did not say
+this to excite Harry's fears, but, like many natives,
+he was frank, and open in his speech.</p>
+
+<p>"I hope there will be no trouble," was Harry's
+response.</p>
+
+<p>"We need not worry about George," added Uraso.
+"The way that he was taken shows that they are taking
+him to the Chief. A boy like George would be
+likely to interest the Chief, at first for a time, and
+time is all we want."</p>
+
+<p>"I am glad you have the same opinion as John,"
+answered Harry.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_104" id="p_104">p. 104</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John, Muro and Uraso held a conference that
+night. As a result Harry was comforted to know
+and feel that George was safe, and that within a
+day or two at most, they would be able to come up
+with the tribe.</p>
+
+<p>The entire party now numbered thirty-five, all well
+armed. In the morning, as soon as it was light
+enough to see they were up, and after a quick breakfast
+Muro directed them along the trail made the
+night before, and the spot where Muro found the
+trace was reached about nine o'clock.</p>
+
+<p>John and his party now spread out so as to take
+in a wide expanse, and they marched toward the east
+for fully two hours. Sometimes all traces would be
+lost, and then there would be a halt and a search, and
+the native wit of the scouts was generally acute
+enough to recover the trail.</p>
+
+<p>During these periodical searches, one of the men
+bounded forward with a cry, as he held up a hand in
+which something was swinging.</p>
+
+<p>As usual Harry was there like a shot. "That is
+George's chain," he cried out.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you find this?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>The scout rushed over to the place, and all followed.
+The ground about plainly showed the evidences
+of the struggle where George's captors fought
+for the possession of the watch.</p>
+
+<p>The trail was beginning to get warm. It was readily
+followed for several miles, and then disappeared,
+but after patient hunting it came to light, and shortly<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_105" id="p_105">p. 105</a></span>
+after noon the spot was reached where the Chief
+came on the scene, and the appearance of the ground
+indicated that there must have been a large number
+in the party.</p>
+
+<p>Here was an occasion where one great quality of
+many savage tribes stands out so prominently, and
+that is in determining the number of their enemies by
+the foot prints. Hundreds of imprints on the soil,
+crossing and recrossing each other, will to the untrained
+seem a hopeless riddle.</p>
+
+<p>On one occasion on Wonder Island, John stated
+that one of a party they were trailing, was wounded
+in one of his legs. The explanation was simple:
+The pressure of the foot in the soil was less on the
+lame than on the sound leg, and the stride was uneven.</p>
+
+<p>But the scouts had to decipher the peculiar imprint
+of each foot, and then compare it with all the
+others, in turn.</p>
+
+<p>"I could tell the difference in the shape of a shoe
+from another," said Harry, "but I do not see how it
+is possible to tell one foot print from another."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you distinguish people?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, usually, by their faces."</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true. Now feet are just as different as
+faces are. But there are other ways by which we
+recognize people."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," was the response. "I can tell who many
+people are at distances so great that I cannot see
+their faces."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_106" id="p_106">p. 106</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"How do you do that?"</p>
+
+<p>"By the way they walk, by their size, or by some
+action that seems to be peculiar to them."</p>
+
+<p>"The observations are correct," answered John.
+"At the same time, if all the men you knew happened
+to be in a crowd, and moving around among
+each other, you would be able to recognize and place
+each without any difficulty; is not that true!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and I think I understand the trend of your
+remark now."</p>
+
+<p>"And what is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"You mean to say that if the scouts are able to
+read, or to become acquainted with the foot prints,
+they can read them as readily as I would read the
+faces of my friends."</p>
+
+<p>"That is the exact inference I wish to draw."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I want to see that done," and Harry followed
+up Uraso, and watched Muro, and the most intelligent
+of the scouts, while they carefully stepped
+over the ground, each being careful while doing so
+to step in the foot marks of the preceding scout.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a curious thing to do," he remarked, as
+he turned to John.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" the latter asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Stepping in the tracks made by the leader."</p>
+
+<p>"That is for the purpose of keeping the surface
+of the ground absolutely the same as the tribe left
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well the boys seem to understand detective work
+pretty well."</p>
+
+<p>All of them laughed at this complimentary allu<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_107" id="p_107">p. 107</a></span>sion,
+as it must be understood that all the scouts
+taken from the island had learned to speak the English
+language, and some of them, like Uraso, were exceptionally
+skilled.</p>
+
+<p>When the different ones had gone over the ground
+thoroughly, John asked the opinion of the searchers.</p>
+
+<p>"From my count there must have been twenty-four,"
+remarked Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>Muro smiled, as he said: "Uraso is mistaken,
+there are twenty-five." Uraso was not at all perturbed,
+but walked over to the surveyed plot and
+said: "The most prominent one is the fellow with
+the spreading toes. See! here is his left foot. See
+that broad foot is all around the place. This broad
+foot with a toe missing, is another fellow; and here
+are two with rather long feet, you can see them all
+about, and they are, no doubt, active fellows."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is picking them out plainly enough,"
+remarked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"But," continued Uraso, "I want you to look at
+this foot. It is the largest I ever saw."</p>
+
+<p>"I am satisfied that fellow is the Chief," remarked
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"There is evidence of that here too," said Uraso,
+as Muro nodded his head.</p>
+
+<p>Harry looked on in bewilderment. "Assuredly
+that is something new. How do you know <i>that</i>?" he
+asked.</p>
+
+<p>"The best indication is," said Uraso, "that the
+fellow with the big feet does very little walking, and
+all the other fellows have danced about him."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_108" id="p_108">p. 108</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Harry laughed, and was satisfied. "That was certainly
+clever," he remarked. "But why shouldn't
+they be clever. These boys are the finest and bravest
+in the world," and Uraso and Muro smiled and
+were happy at this encomium of the boy they all
+loved so much.</p>
+
+<p>"The last foot I have counted is that little sawed-off
+sample that has danced all around the edge; see
+it here, and here!"</p>
+
+<p>Muro walked forward, and, stooping down, pointed
+to the imprint of a shoe, said: "That is our boy's
+shoe."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso laughed, as he admitted neglecting George's
+presence in the crowd of prints. "But I have found
+something else. George has had an interview with
+the Chief. He has been making some explanations
+to the Chief about his revolver."</p>
+
+<p>John smiled, and kept his eye on a tree to the
+right.</p>
+
+<p>"And how do you know that?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso walked over to the tree, after picking up
+something, and pointed to a cut-out in the side of the
+tree. It was the mark of the bullet, and the circular
+cut which George had made that John had observed,
+and which had been noticed by Uraso and Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"The scene here looks very promising to me," said
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, it is better and better," remarked Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"But you haven't told us yet, how you know that
+George was interviewing the Chief."</p>
+
+<p>"Come here and I will show you. Now look<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_109" id="p_109">p. 109</a></span>
+closely at the foot prints of George. Then observe
+the indications as to the attitude of the Chief.
+George goes up to the Chief. They turn around.
+Here is a shell. Beyond is the tree where they had
+the mark, and here are the tracks of the Chief and
+George as they go up to the tree."</p>
+
+<p>Harry was now convinced. It must be said, however,
+that many of the marks made were so illy-defined,
+that it required extraordinary vision to observe
+them, and this is what Harry marveled at.</p>
+
+<p>"What you say only proves the value of minute
+observation," remarked John. "Those who are not
+accustomed to see these things, can not detect what
+are very plain markings. Sometimes a slightly torn
+leaf, under certain conditions, will tell a story in itself,&mdash;just
+such a commonplace and ordinary thing
+as a ruptured leaf."</p>
+
+<p>The consensus of opinion was that there were fully
+twenty-five in the party counting George, and it is
+remarkable that when the matter was afterwards
+investigated it was found that Uraso's count was
+right.</p>
+
+<p>There were six in the party which took George,
+twelve who surrounded the party before the Chief
+arrived, and five more were with him when he came
+up.</p>
+
+<p>Another consultation was held. John remarked:
+"I am of the opinion that the people who have captured
+George are not at all bad, or vindictive.
+Therefore we must exercise care and not needlessly
+injure any of them. I need not say that it is our<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_110" id="p_110">p. 110</a></span>
+purpose here to aid the people, to make friends of
+them, and not enemies."</p>
+
+<p>"That is in accordance with our wish," said
+Uraso, with the approval of all present.</p>
+
+<p>"It is perfectly evident that these people, in taking
+George, did what most people in a savage condition
+would do. The great and overshadowing trait
+in humanity is to acquire something. It is just possible
+that the cartridge belt, or the field glasses, or
+the buttons on his coat were of more importance to
+them than George himself."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you mean they had to get George to get
+the buttons," said Harry, laughing in his relief.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course," answered John, and Muro laughed
+aloud, as he recalled his first experiences with the
+boys.</p>
+
+<p>"John has hit upon the very thing which is at the
+bottom of the whole business. All we wanted was
+to get the trinket, and the prisoner belonged to the
+Chief."</p>
+
+<p>"Or to the Krishnos," remarked Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"Well we might as well go on if we can find the
+trail," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, it is plain enough now," answered one of
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"But let us exercise caution," remarked John.
+"Move along slowly and keep a sharp lookout on our
+flanks."</p>
+
+<p>Harry was walking by the side of Uraso. There
+had always been a warm friendship between the two.
+Lolo, Uraso's favorite son, was Harry's age, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_111" id="p_111">p. 111</a></span>
+two were companions, and this was a source of great
+joy to the Chief, for Uraso was the head man of the
+Osagas, and one of the most progressive of all the
+prominent men.</p>
+
+<p>Harry was dangling the chain which had been
+found in the morning. "I have been wondering why
+he dropped this!" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"I have an idea that it was lost in the fight for
+the possession of the watch."</p>
+
+<p>"The fight? Why did they have a fight?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, the ground where the chain was found
+looked very much like it."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see why the fellows don't agree to divide
+up things properly when they get them, instead of
+scrambling for them in that way!"</p>
+
+<p>"You can see it is perfectly natural for them to
+fight for it under the circumstances. They do not
+understand anything but power."</p>
+
+<p>"I should think the loser would be resentful, and
+try to even it up on the other fellow," remarked
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"On the other hand, the moment the stronger fellow
+wins, that is the end of the dispute. The best
+one won. In his creed there is no other argument.
+That is the savage's religion. You people have told
+us differently. The Professor has often said:
+'There is only this difference between us, with you,
+might is right; with us right is might.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what do you really think about it now?"
+asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso did not smile, as he remarked somewhat<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_112" id="p_112">p. 112</a></span>
+sadly: "It took me a long time to understand that.
+How could right be might? At first it looked foolish,
+and Muro and I talked it over many times. Then
+Oma, and Tastoa and Oroto, the other Chiefs, spoke
+to me about it. But while I did not understand it I
+had faith in the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we went to Unity, and built the town, and
+the people began to go there, and when we saw the
+Professor, and the way he treated every one, never
+doing a wrong to anybody, we could not believe that
+he was sane. But everywhere we went we heard
+people talking about him, and the way he acted, and
+we saw all the white people do the same as the Professor
+did, we noticed that no one would dare say a
+word against the Professor, or John.</p>
+
+<p>"We marveled at that. The Professor went out
+among the people of all the tribes, and never carried
+a weapon of any kind. But no one would have dared
+to injure him. If a man had even attempted to injure
+him the people would have torn him to pieces.
+Then I understood. Right was and is <i>Might</i>, but it
+takes a savage a long time to understand it, and he
+must learn it from something practical that comes to
+him in every day life; he will never know it in any
+other way."</p>
+
+<p>Harry walked on in silence.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_113" id="p_113">p. 113</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+<h3>THE GIANT CHIEF AND HIS "PALACE"</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">We</span> must now return to George and see how he
+fared during the first night of his captivity. After
+the Chief had seated himself, and had begun to examine
+the articles taken from George, the latter had
+an opportunity to examine the surroundings more
+closely.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief made no remarks to him, nor did he ask
+him to be seated. At the moment he entered the
+room he noticed the chair. As the Chief did not pay
+any attention to him after they entered, George
+walked over and deliberately sat down on it.</p>
+
+<p>The two attendants who carried in the articles,
+stared at him, and the women and children, particularly
+the latter, seemed to be paralyzed at his attitude
+seated in the chair. It was covered with dust,
+an evidence that it was never used for the purposes
+of a seat. On reflection, he thought that must be
+the reason they looked at him so queerly.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief, however, gave no indication that his act
+was a rude or questionable one. He tried on the
+cartridge belt, but it was far too short for his corpulent
+body, and George could hardly repress a laugh,
+as he noticed the attempt to adjust it.</p>
+
+<p>The field glasses came in for a share of attention,
+then the silver match box, and the women craned<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_114" id="p_114">p. 114</a></span>
+their heads forward, as it glittered. The Chief held
+it off from his eyes, so he could properly view it;
+just as George had often seen women do in trying to
+match articles.</p>
+
+<p>All the while the Chief was emitting grunts betokening
+pleasure and satisfaction. The adjusting
+screw on the field glass next attracted his attention.
+The turning moved the barrels in and out, and this
+was, in all probability, the most remarkable thing he
+ever saw.</p>
+
+<p>George could stand it no longer. He left his seat,
+the younger children shrinking back as he arose, and
+quietly walked to the Chief, and sat down in front
+of him. As he did so he pointed to the match safe
+which the Chief held in his left hand.</p>
+
+<p>The latter did not resist the attempt to take it, but
+looked on wonderingly as George pressed the point,
+and the lid flew open. Then, taking one of the
+matches from the receptacle, he held the box in one
+hand, exhibited the match in the other, for a moment,
+and then drew the match across the box, and ignited
+it.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief actually drew in a breath that was audible
+everywhere in that neighborhood. He nodded
+with approval. Harry closed the box and handed it
+back; he then directed the Chief's attention to the
+little point, and pressed it, when the lid again flew
+open.</p>
+
+<p>This time the Chief closed it, and he pressed the
+point. The success of the experiment was so great
+that he eventually called his wife to witness it, for<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_115" id="p_115">p. 115</a></span>
+she came over, while he performed the miraculous
+thing.</p>
+
+<p>He took out a match. Its use was just as great
+a mystery. He was taught just what to do, and the
+primitive man sat there and struck the matches, one
+after the other, in the greatest delight. What
+amused George more than anything else was, that
+every time a match was struck, he closed the box,
+and then opened it before extracting another.</p>
+
+<p>George noted the imitative quality so marked in
+all savages. It did not, apparently, occur to him
+that he could strike two matches without the lid flying
+open in the period intervening the two operations.</p>
+
+<p>It was now growing dark, and soon an attendant
+came in with several curiously-arranged lights, made
+from some sort of weed or vegetation, the smoke of
+which appeared to be most agreeable. From an adjoining
+room, an appetizing odor reached George
+and, staring in that direction, the Chief noticed the
+boy's expectant attitude.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief arose, his mighty frame towering above
+the rest, and a command was given. Almost immediately
+two servitors came through the opening,
+one of them carrying a large bowl of the most savory
+stew. The bowl was not of native manufacture,
+and George, observing this, suddenly remembered
+what John had said, that the Chief was always sure
+to get the best and most valuable parts of the wreckages
+along the shore, and he felt sure that this was
+salvage from some shipwreck.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_116" id="p_116">p. 116</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Chief smiled, as the bowl was set before him.
+It was smoking hot, and George smiled back as he
+noticed the friendly look, and saw that the Chief's
+wife graciously arranged the accompanying vegetables,
+although he had no idea what the latter were.</p>
+
+<p>A second attendant brought pointed sticks, and
+two paddle-shaped blades. The Chief without ceremony
+dived into the mess and speared a piece of the
+meat, and waved it to and fro, to cool it. Here was
+an opportunity to follow the example thus set, and
+George was glad to take the hint.</p>
+
+<p>He didn't look around to inquire for a plate, nor
+did he ask for a napkin. The meat was good, the
+vegetables appetizing, and the conversation lagged
+so much that there was no chance for unseasonable
+interruptions during the meal.</p>
+
+<p>If George had never before that hour witnessed
+a savage eat, he would have been mortified at the
+small amount he himself was capable of putting
+away, when he compared the relative amounts consumed.
+He was of the opinion, before they began,
+that the bowl was intended for the whole family, but
+the Chief ate all of it, except the small part that
+George disposed of in the meantime.</p>
+
+<p>But he was perfectly content. He ate until he
+could eat no more, and then to his extreme disgust,
+a wooden platter of fruit was set before them.
+Bananas were the only things he recognized. A
+small pear-shaped fruit attracted him, and then an
+egg-shaped, brown-colored fruit, with a sweet, strong
+perfume, was among the varieties.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_117" id="p_117">p. 117</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Chief was graciousness itself, exhibiting not
+one trait of selfishness, as he forced the fruit on
+George. When the Chief had finished the fruit
+George was relieved, but uncomfortable. He had
+eaten beyond his capacity. The articles containing
+the food were removed, and the Chief, who, during
+this time, was in a reclining position, slowly sank
+down, and was soon asleep.</p>
+
+<p>The family sat around for a time, and then all
+slowly disappeared and he could hear the jumble of
+voices in the adjoining apartment, as they were undoubtedly
+engaged in their meal.</p>
+
+<p>What a peculiar position to be placed in. Alone
+with the sleeping savage! Still, he did not seem to
+be so very savage. There was no one in sight. He
+arose and walked toward the opening. Not even a
+guard prevented him from leaving.</p>
+
+<p>He stepped out. He still had his revolver, but that
+was all. Now was the time to effect his escape. He
+turned the corner of the main structure, and there
+stood one of the Chief's girls, the one who had attracted
+George's attention when he was first ushered
+into the palace, as George named the place in his
+mind.</p>
+
+<p>As this girl will have an important place in reciting
+this history, it may be well to describe her.
+She was about the height of George, with a much
+lighter skin than the majority of those whom he had
+seen thus far. Her eyes were large and beautiful,
+and while her hair, intensely black and very profuse,
+was not at all kinky. It should be said that the sav<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_118" id="p_118">p. 118</a></span>ages
+on the island, like those on Wonder Island,
+while dark, did not have curly hair of the Ethiopian,
+so that they were not of the negroid type but more
+nearly allied to the Malay family.</p>
+
+<p>She smiled, and George, abashed for the moment,
+went up to her, and she did not at all shrink from
+him. Now that he had made the advance he was at
+a loss what to do. The only thing that both perfectly
+understood, was to smile, and smile they did.</p>
+
+<p>But why not say something. He tried it, and
+those great eyes appeared to open still wider.
+George turned and waved his hand, and affrighted,
+apparently, she darted into the side entrance. The
+darkness prevented him from seeing what was there,
+and he dared not enter. The moon was shining
+brightly.</p>
+
+<p>The desire to escape again took possession of him.
+But why try to escape? He felt sure the Chief meant
+no harm, and then he wandered to the other side of
+the building, and there lay the great ocean, the shore
+of which was not a thousand feet away.</p>
+
+<p>He sat down on a log, and pondered and, feeling
+fatigued from the unusual efforts of the day, he lay
+down for a nap. How long he remained there it was
+impossible to tell, for when he awoke, he found himself
+by the side of the trunk, and near him two of
+the body guard who accompanied the Chief the day
+before.</p>
+
+<p>He sat up, rubbed his eyes, arose, and without any
+suggestion or command on the part of the watchers,
+marched back to the Chief's palace, and entered the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_119" id="p_119">p. 119</a></span>
+room to see the latter awake and reclining at his
+place on the floor.</p>
+
+<p>He offered a salutation to George, and the latter
+smiled and bowed graciously. One of the attendants
+touched him on the arm, and he was led to a room,
+adjoining the court; but there was no door, by means
+of which he could close the room, nor did he discover
+a window, or anything suggesting an opening at the
+other side of the apartment.</p>
+
+<p>A delightful odor came from some kind of grass
+which was piled in one corner. He examined it, and
+concluded that it had been placed there for his particular
+benefit. This was indeed a thoughtful thing
+on the Chief's part. They were making a home for
+him, that was evident.</p>
+
+<p>But he was too tired to reflect long on these things.
+Without removing his clothes he threw himself down
+on the sweet, clean grass, and he knew no more until,
+when the morning sun flooded the court, he could peer
+out, and see the family moving to and fro, but the
+Chief was nowhere in sight.</p>
+
+<p>While they had not ventured to tell him what was
+just the correct thing to do, he walked out, and then
+wandered to the open portal at the front. No one
+seemed to heed him. He walked down toward the
+ocean, and saw some women carrying water in curiously-shaped
+gourds.</p>
+
+<p>He followed the path, which led to a spring; delicious,
+cool and refreshing. Then he bathed his
+face, and washed his hands. But he missed the soap.
+He had not, however, forgotten the early days on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_120" id="p_120">p. 120</a></span>
+Wonder Island, when the Professor found the soap
+tree.</p>
+
+<p>He glanced around. There, sure enough, was the
+identical bush, and breaking off several twigs, the
+small branches were crushed up together with the
+leaves, and with these he returned to the brook and
+had a good soap wash.</p>
+
+<p>This peculiar action was witnessed by some of the
+women, and the tale was quickly told, and became
+current in the village. When George visited the
+same spot, the bush had entirely disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief had not returned when he went back,
+but his breakfast was ready, and the maiden with
+the great round eyes, and the mother, evidently,
+waited on him.</p>
+
+<p>George looked toward the Chief's place. She understood,
+and pointed to the west. He mused awhile.
+What could she mean! It must not be supposed that
+during all this time George was not thinking of
+Harry, and John, and the boys who came over with
+them on this trip.</p>
+
+<p>They always called each other "boys." All the
+natives on Wonder Island were boys to them, and it
+was amusing to hear them say the word in return.
+They were all boys, Uraso, and Muro, as well; all
+but the Professor, John and Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>When George went out after breakfast he was surprised
+to note the absence of the men. No one but
+women and children were about. Then the truth
+flashed on him. The Chief had gone out, on hearing
+of the approach of John and his party.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_121" id="p_121">p. 121</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He rushed out toward the western path that led
+from the village, and he had not gone three hundred
+yards before the men, all armed with spears, came
+back, with the Chief at their head. All were in consternation.</p>
+
+<p>George knew what this meant now. He held up
+his hand as they hurriedly moved toward him, and
+pointed to the west. He did this smiling to assure
+him of the friendly character of the visit. The
+Chief stopped. George moved through the group
+and beckoned the Chief to follow.</p>
+
+<p>He hesitated but a moment, and then gave the necessary
+command. Coming through the forest beyond
+were John and the "Boys." When they were
+still too far for hailing distance George raised his
+hat and waved it.</p>
+
+<p>When John and his party were still a hundred
+yards away, they stopped at the unusual sight.
+Meanwhile George and the Chief moved on. Harry
+could not restrain himself, and broke from the party,
+in his mad rush to welcome George.</p>
+
+<p>"Bow, Harry; bow; he is a dandy Chief."</p>
+
+<p>Harry obediently made a gracious bow, and the
+Chief acknowledged the salute.</p>
+
+<p>All that Harry could say, was: "Oh, George!"</p>
+
+<p>John and the company came up, and George
+rushed to John, as he said: "I have had the nicest
+time in the world, but I am afraid the Chief does
+not know whether you are friends or enemies."</p>
+
+<p>John turned to the men, and quietly said: "This
+man is a friend, and we must treat him as a Chief.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_122" id="p_122">p. 122</a></span>
+All give him a respectful greeting." The Chief stood
+still, as all the warriors ranged themselves in front
+and all bowed low, to the obvious relief of the savage.</p>
+
+<p>Then John brought Uraso and Muro forward, and
+by well timed gestures indicated to the Chief that
+they were also Chiefs, and he instantly showed that
+he recognized the pantomimic language, and deferentially
+bowed, as he had seen George do.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso stepped forward and went up to the burly
+form, and pressed his nose against his nose. Then,
+he spoke a few words. The Chief looked at him for
+a moment, and then answered. Muro was not slow
+to follow the example, and he also addressed the
+Chief.</p>
+
+<p>When Uraso turned and took John's hand and in
+a dialect, which both seemed to understand, he told
+about John and the boys, the Chief turned to his
+men and said a dozen words, which were instantly
+recognized by Uraso and Muro. They smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"What did he say?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"He told them to go to the village and prepare
+food."</p>
+
+<p>All but a half dozen of the immediate followers of
+the Chief turned and darted back to the village.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know the Chief's language?" asked
+Harry, as Uraso gave way to Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"We can understand each other pretty well.
+There are many words which are the same, but he
+uses some which are new to me."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you suppose they are the same people as are
+on our island?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_123" id="p_123">p. 123</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I do not know that. We have heard that all the
+people in the different islands came from the same
+place, but where we do not know."</p>
+
+<p>Then the boys crowded around George, and insisted
+on having him tell his story. Did you ever
+hear a boy tell a thrilling story of his own adventures?
+Well George was in his heaven of delight as
+he told of his treatment, and how he had dined with
+the Chief, and slept in his palace.</p>
+
+<p>"His palace?" queried Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, palace! It isn't a common house!" And
+George dilated on it to such an extent that Harry
+actually grew envious at the big time that George
+had at their expense.</p>
+
+<p>The party wended its way down the hill, and when
+the village was reached the sight there astounded
+George. He had left it a sleepy place. Now all
+was bustle. Fires were being built; the men and
+women were busy preparing food. A species of hog,
+well known on Wonder Island, was being prepared
+and spitted, and hung over the heated coals.</p>
+
+<p>They saw the favorite native vegetable, the Taro
+root, and also, to their surprise, an abundance of
+Uraso's poison bulb, the Amarylla, which he had
+tried to prepare in stealth after he had been captured,
+and the telling of which was the occasion of
+many jokes at the expense of George and Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John, the two boys, together with Uraso and Muro,
+were ushered into the Chief's house.</p>
+
+<p>"And this is what you call a 'palace'?" remarked
+Harry.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_124" id="p_124">p. 124</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"From your description I thought it might be on
+top of a big hill with graded steps leading up between
+rows of flowers, and the rooms filled with statuary,
+with a large fountain playing in the center of
+a fine banquet hall."</p>
+
+<p>George laughed at the joke. "The trouble with
+you is that you are not a philosopher, Harry. If
+you had been as well treated as I have been you
+would think the same as I do."</p>
+
+<p>John overheard the conversation, and remarked:
+"I must say that there is more philosophy in that
+view than even you, George, appreciate."</p>
+
+<p>"Have I said anything unusual?" he asked with
+a sort of mock gravity.</p>
+
+<p>"Quite so; have you ever heard the saying 'Handsome
+is, as handsome does'? Well, that is the root
+of all true actions in life. From the noble manner in
+which this Chief treated George, giving him the best
+that he had, and installing him in the finest room
+in the house, is doing all that any one can do."</p>
+
+<p>"That is the way I really felt about it at the time.
+I was tired and hungry, and instead of meeting an
+enemy, I met a friend."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you see, Harry? George did right in calling
+this a palace. If it so appears in his heart, and he
+feels that impulse, isn't that just as real as though
+you see it with your eyes?"</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't think of it in that way," said Harry,
+apologetically. "I like the old fellow. He is good
+enough to be a white man."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_125" id="p_125">p. 125</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+<h3>PECULIARITIES OF THE NATIVE TRIBE</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Within</span> an hour the feast was ready, and the men
+in the open were already making merry with the
+maidens who prepared the meal. George and Harry
+frequently nudged each other, as they caught the
+eyes of some of the native boys who were very attentive
+to the gentler sex.</p>
+
+<p>Within the Chief's dwelling there was the most
+animated conversation indulged in by the Chief,
+Uraso and John, and to this number were added the
+Chief's brother, and a handsome man who was probably
+one of the Chief's principal advisors. Muro
+and Uraso were the interpreters.</p>
+
+<p>The latter, by turns, told the Chief where they
+sailed from, and what their history had been for the
+past three years. They told about the wonderful
+Professor, and all concerning John, and what part
+the two boys had taken in the transformation of the
+island.</p>
+
+<p>"But where is this wonderful ship?" asked the
+Chief.</p>
+
+<p>"On the other side of the island," answered Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>"Then why do you not bring it here?"</p>
+
+<p>"We should have done so, but we did not know we
+had a friend here."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_126" id="p_126">p. 126</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I want to see the wonderful place you have told
+me about,&mdash;your home, and how you make people
+happy," said the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>John's face lit up when this was interpreted to
+him.</p>
+
+<p>"What do your people work at?" the Chief
+abruptly asked Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"We make many curious things, like the articles
+you have here," and he pointed to George's belongings,
+which were still lying about.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief hurriedly gathered them up and handed
+them to George. The latter, after turning to John,
+refused to take them, and addressing Uraso, said:
+"Tell him that I want him to take them, and my gun,
+as well."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief could not understand this, and at first
+refused, but John, as well as Uraso, insisted, and the
+latter said:</p>
+
+<p>"These boys can make these things, and they do
+not feel that they are sacrificing anything, beyond
+what it is their duty to do."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief looked doubtfully at the boys, as he
+remarked: "Do you tell me that these <i>memees</i>,
+(Boys) made these things?"</p>
+
+<p>Uraso and Muro both assured them that such was
+the case, and added: "And still more wonderful
+things."</p>
+
+<p>After some conversation Uraso turned to John
+and said: "The Chief wishes to send a runner to
+bring the ship to the harbor here. Hasmo may accompany
+him."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_127" id="p_127">p. 127</a></span></p>
+
+<p>This arrangement had John's approval, and when
+Hasmo was advised of the mission, he jumped up
+with delight, and, together with the Chief's fleetest
+messenger, speeded off to make the intervening
+twenty-five miles.</p>
+
+<p>It was not much of a task for the two men. In
+less than four hours, Sutoto saw two men on the
+shore, one of them waving a signal that he understood.
+A boat was put off, and when the runners
+came aboard, and the news imparted, all on board
+sprang to their places, the anchor was hurriedly
+taken up, and the <i>Pioneer</i> soon rounded the point,
+while they all eagerly scanned the shore.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief and his visitors remained in the "palace"
+for three hours, while the latter told and retold
+the stories which so much interested the chieftain.
+Then John began to question him upon matters that
+more nearly concerned their visit.</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him," he said, "if they have any Krishnos
+here?"</p>
+
+<p>"He does not know what they are," answered
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"Does he believe in a Great Spirit?"</p>
+
+<p>"No he has never heard anything of that kind."</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him if he knows who makes the rain and the
+sunshine, and the clouds."</p>
+
+<p>"He says that the questions are surprising to
+him."</p>
+
+<p>"Has he never thought of those things?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; all he knows is that he lives and that he is
+a Chief and is the one who must govern the people."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_128" id="p_128">p. 128</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Does he know why he is the Chief?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; because he is stronger than any one else."</p>
+
+<p>"That would certainly make him a Chief," remarked
+Harry. "I never saw such a big man."</p>
+
+<p>"Do they have any big holes in the ground!"</p>
+
+<p>When the question was asked he waited a moment,
+and then slowly shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"They have nothing of that kind to his knowledge."</p>
+
+<p>The countenances of Harry and George fell. John
+noticed it, and smiled at the disappointment.</p>
+
+<p>"There are no caves around here," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"Are there any mountains on the island?"</p>
+
+<p>"There are high hills."</p>
+
+<p>"Have they any neighbors, or different tribes?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; to the north, (pointing in that direction)
+are some bad people, but they belong to him."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do they not live near to the village!"</p>
+
+<p>"Because they would make the people bad."</p>
+
+<p>"What did they do that was so bad?"</p>
+
+<p>"They stole and lied."</p>
+
+<p>"From whom did they steal?"</p>
+
+<p>"From the Chief."</p>
+
+<p>"Did they steal from each other?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they could not steal from each other."</p>
+
+<p>At this remark the boys laughed. John began
+to be interested now in his questionings.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean it is not wrong to steal from each
+other, but only from the Chief?"</p>
+
+<p>He nodded an assent. This was a curious bit of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_129" id="p_129">p. 129</a></span>
+reasoning. It needed some explanation. John continued:</p>
+
+<p>"Why is it wrong to steal from the Chief and not
+from each other?"</p>
+
+<p>At this question the Chief did not answer as
+promptly as usual. He weighed the question in his
+mind. He smiled as though to say: How can it
+be wrong for people to take things from each other?
+They do not own anything. No one but the Chief
+owns things.</p>
+
+<p>His answer, when finally given, was not at all
+clear, at least so the boys thought.</p>
+
+<p>"The Chief in his wisdom gives to all alike; and
+when he gives it the property still belongs to him and
+not the people; but if they take it from the Chief then
+they are robbers."</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him," said John, "whether, if when he gives
+anything to one of his people, and it still belongs to
+him, after he gives it, why it is not stealing from
+him, if some one takes it away from the one he gave
+it to?"</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was not at all taken aback at this question.
+Pointing to the sun, he said:</p>
+
+<p>"That is a great Chief. He gives seed to the people,
+and they plant it. But the great Chief does not
+forget it. The seed comes up to see its father. It
+still belongs to him. When he gives that seed to the
+people it is for their use. Every one has a right to
+take it and use it, and it is no crime. But if he takes
+it away from the Chief, he destroys what belongs to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_130" id="p_130">p. 130</a></span>
+him, and he then does a wrong which must be punished."</p>
+
+<p>"This may not be very clear to you," said John,
+"but it means that whoever takes it away and destroys
+it wilfully, is guilty of a crime. Whatever
+the Great Chief gives willingly, like the fruits of the
+earth, is intended for all alike, and men should not
+be called criminals for taking what they need, if
+they do not wilfully destroy it."</p>
+
+<p>"That is a wonderful idea, when I come to think
+of it," remarked George. "And to think that a savage
+could work that out in his mind."</p>
+
+<p>"But there is one thing that looks a little queer
+to me. He said he did not know or believe in a
+Great Spirit, and yet he talks of the sun as a Great
+Spirit," remarked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I will put the question to him," said John.
+"You said that you did not believe in a Great Spirit,
+but now you speak about the sun as a Great Chief.
+Do you not believe in him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; I only know that he is there; I do not believe
+in him any more than in the carago (moon)."</p>
+
+<p>A great noise was heard outside; the Chief looked
+up, as an attendant entered. He spoke to Uraso,
+and the latter turned to John and said:</p>
+
+<p>"Our ship is coming."</p>
+
+<p>This announcement broke up the interview. It
+was exciting and interesting from first to last, and
+when they emerged from the dwelling the host and
+visitors were friends that the future never could
+sever. It gave a new inspiration to the boys, and it<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_131" id="p_131">p. 131</a></span>
+showed them that even a low state of man was capable
+of expressing things that were worthy of consideration.</p>
+
+<p>The entire village went to the seashore. The inhabitants
+wondered at the great vessel, and were impressed
+at the manner in which it was handled.</p>
+
+<p>"I am anxious to see the man who can row such
+a vessel," said the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>"He is one of the men from our island," answered
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>This seemed to be an astonishing thing to him.
+He had seen vessels before, but in the distance. At
+long intervals parts of ships had come ashore; but
+this was the first time that a vessel had ever landed,
+within his recollection.</p>
+
+<p>As it drew near he marveled at its size. He could
+see the man at the bow-sprit who was constantly
+throwing something attached to a line overboard,
+and then drawing it in again.</p>
+
+<p>He questioned the reason for such a strange action,
+and was told that the man was trying the depth of
+the water, so that they might not come too close to
+the shore, and strike the bottom. Then some of the
+sailors dropped something overboard, with a great
+splash, and a huge sail fell down like magic, and the
+ship still moved toward the shore and turned around.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was inquisitive concerning every action.
+Why did the ship act like a human and turn around?
+He could hardly believe the statement when told that
+the anchor was a giant claw, and that when it reached
+the bottom it took hold and had sufficient strength<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_132" id="p_132">p. 132</a></span>
+to stop the ship and make it swing around, as he had
+witnessed.</p>
+
+<p>A boat was lowered, and the last one to descend
+was Sutoto. Uraso pointed out his figure, and the
+Chief kept his eyes on him. The first man to leave
+the boat was Sutoto, and both boys rushed down to
+meet him. It was the course they always pursued,
+to be in the lead to welcome anyone.</p>
+
+<p>They led him to the Chief, and he put his great
+arms about Sutoto, to the latter's great embarrassment.
+But what affected Sutoto more than anything
+else, were the eyes of the Chief's daughter,
+who had acted so shyly to George the night before.
+From that moment Sutoto saw no one else, and she,&mdash;well,
+Harry and George laughed, and slyly caressed
+Sutoto, as they saw her admiring glances.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto was the handsomest native on Wonder Island.
+He was the brave and fleet runner who undertook
+the mission to pass through the three savage
+tribes to carry a message, written on a plaintain leaf
+by the Professor, to John and the boys while they
+were surrounded by the hostiles.</p>
+
+<p>The friendship between him and the boys grew
+stronger and better from that day on. The tribute
+to him was one which the boys enjoyed for his sake,
+and because he deserved it.</p>
+
+<p>There was a feast that night, unparalleled in the
+knowledge of the boys. It was like going to a new
+world, and meeting new people. Only one little thing
+seemed to mar the joyous occasion for the boys for a
+time. When they were returning from the beach,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_133" id="p_133">p. 133</a></span>
+they saw three of the natives, together with their
+wives and children, with their hands bound, and in
+charge of a half dozen warriors.</p>
+
+<p>George recognized the three as his captors. Then
+was impressed upon him the fact that they were
+about to pay the penalty for stealing his things and
+hiding the theft from the Chief. They were to be
+exiled to the place where the bad people lived.</p>
+
+<p>George hurriedly told Uraso the story of the theft,
+and begged him to intercede with the Chief. Instantly,
+when he learned that George requested it, he
+turned to Uraso, and said: "He may release
+them."</p>
+
+<p>He rushed up to the now bewildered culprits, in
+order to sever the bonds, and then recalling that he
+had given his knife to the Chief, he called to Harry,
+and together they freed the limbs of the captives and
+the Chief, with a few words of admonition, dismissed
+them. The boys never forgot the grateful looks that
+came from the men and their wives.</p>
+
+<p>When they had departed Muro said: "Under
+their law the women and children of the culprits are
+criminals also, and so they were doomed to go together."</p>
+
+<p>It would be a difficult matter to describe the food
+prepared and eaten at this banquet. Several varieties
+of fowl, all wild types, and the wild boar, as well
+as the 'possum, provided the meats. Of course taro
+and amarylla were the chief vegetables; and of nuts,
+the well known Brazil species was found everywhere,
+and to be seen in all dwellings.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_134" id="p_134">p. 134</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The outer portion of the shell of the Brazil nut
+formed bowls and cups, which the boys early learned
+to utilize. There were bananas, a species of fig, and
+loquats.</p>
+
+<p>"What surprises me is that they have no fish, or
+sea food of any kind," observed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John mused for a while, and then said: "It is
+likely that the people here have the same aversion
+to fish as some natives along the Australian continent,
+and in the islands near there."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"The natives of New Guinea, for instance, worship
+snakes, lizards, sharks and crocodiles, and there is
+a strict law among them not to injure anything, of
+that kind. As a result, they are afraid to eat anything
+that approaches the shape of these animals."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if they worship the snakes they must have
+some kind of religion," ventured Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and with them go the witch doctors who
+practice on the people and charge fees just the same
+as the physicians do in our country."</p>
+
+<p>"Do they claim there is a Great Spirit, like some
+of the people here!"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they have a God called Baigona, who lives
+in the mountains, and instead of being a good God,
+is a bad one; he has the power to speak without being
+heard, to strike without being seen, and he loves
+and hates, just like human beings. He gives the
+witch doctor the power to do anything, without being
+wrong, and without being liable to punishment."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_135" id="p_135">p. 135</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is a pretty convenient God to have,"
+said Harry, as he mused at the idea.</p>
+
+<p>The peculiar thing about the absence of sea food
+at the banquet could not be understood, particularly
+as the natives on Wonder Island were great fish eaters,
+and were also the bitter enemies of snakes.</p>
+
+<p>"We must consult the Chief about that," said
+John.</p>
+
+<p>At the first opportunity the subject was brought
+up, and it was discovered that the people were afraid
+to eat anything that came from the sea. And then
+another thing was learned. There were no rivers of
+any consequence on the island; only a few streams,
+that were dry most of the year.</p>
+
+<p>"I can understand," said John, "that in such a
+case you do not have fresh water fish."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was, in many respects, a remarkable
+character. Most natives are extremely superstitious,
+and it is particularly true of those who have
+a belief in some form of God. While he would marvel
+at new things they did not occur to him as being
+the result of some new occult force.</p>
+
+<p>In this respect he differed from the natives of
+Wonder Island, all of whom believed, more or less,
+in the tales of the Medicine Men, and of the witch
+doctors. Old Suros, of the Berees tribe, was the
+only one who did not believe in the existence of a
+being who could rule him.</p>
+
+<p>But the Chief had other qualities which were remarkable
+in a savage, if such he was. He governed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_136" id="p_136">p. 136</a></span>
+according to some law, and yet he did not know what
+law was. The only thing in that community was the
+will of that one man.</p>
+
+<p>If he said something, in adjusting any matter, it
+was always remembered by the people, and that ruling
+became a guide for them in the future. Take,
+for instance, the theft of the articles from George.
+The three who participated in it, knew that it was
+not wrong, according to the light they had, to take
+it from George.</p>
+
+<p>Indeed, the Chief had distinctly said that they
+could not steal from each other, but only from him,
+hence the theft of the articles which George owned
+was not a crime. On what ground, then, were they
+guilty?</p>
+
+<p>George thought he had solved the problem, when
+discussing the matter with John. "The Chief found
+them guilty of trying to hide what they had done, and
+they were caught at it."</p>
+
+<p>"But the Chief was not covetous. He admitted he
+did not care for the things, and one of the men told
+Muro that the Chief never took things from his people
+without paying for them."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, then, he punished them for trying to deceive
+him."</p>
+
+<p>"There, that is one of the crimes which the Chief
+referred to. I think he is a wonderful character, and
+I hope we shall be able to unite him with us."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_137" id="p_137">p. 137</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+<h3>SUTOTO AND THE CHIEF'S DAUGHTER</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was plain that Sutoto was not the same being.
+During the three days they remained at the port, and
+formed the exploring expeditions into the interior,
+with the co-operation of the Chief, Sutoto did not
+take a part.</p>
+
+<p>He begged to be allowed to remain near the ship.
+That was a sly suggestion which John understood.
+Even though he might have been blind he would
+have known the true reason, for the boys were continuously
+joking Sutoto all of which he took good-naturedly,
+and John often burst out in fits of laughter,
+as he witnessed Sutoto's discomfiture.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief's name was Beralsee, and the big-eyed
+maiden was known as Cinda, the meaning of which
+was, as explained by Beralsee, the Beautiful Star.
+The Chief had four other children, one a man of
+twenty-one, and the others younger than Cinda.</p>
+
+<p>The eldest, Calmo, was tall and lithe, like Sutoto.
+Like his father he was original in his ways, and to
+him the Chief entrusted the care of the expeditions
+which were made at the suggestion of John. The
+latter explained that they had seen the wonderful
+products growing on the island, coffee, cocoa, spices,
+and particularly the various fibres.</p>
+
+<p>The recital of the tales, of how the white man used<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_138" id="p_138">p. 138</a></span>
+these things to make the various needed articles, and
+how the great ships were employed to carry the
+goods to and fro, and how the different things were
+exchanged, interested him.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the subjects were not within his comprehension.
+Why were all these things done? What
+was the object of having so many products?</p>
+
+<p>John told him that when men had everything they
+really needed to keep them alive and in comfort, they
+still wanted something more, and those things were
+called luxuries; then, after they and their children
+used these luxuries for a while, they found them to
+be absolutely essential and they then became necessaries.
+In that way men learned the use of so
+many, many things, that the whole world was being
+searched to find products which would serve to make
+the needed things.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean," said the Chief, "that your people
+are trying to find things they do not need, so they
+can buy them, and try to make some use of them?"</p>
+
+<p>John could not help but smile at the acuteness of
+the question. "That, in effect, is just what they do.
+It is not so considered, however, by our people. It
+is difficult to say just where necessity ends and luxury
+begins. But each year, yes every month, new
+things are brought out, and people begin to buy
+them, because the traders and the people who sell
+are shrewd and know how to cultivate taste and the
+desire for new and startling things."</p>
+
+<p>"But how do the people get the articles to exchange
+for these things?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_139" id="p_139">p. 139</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"The people do not accumulate articles to buy
+other articles with. Instead, they work to get
+money, and with this money they buy the things."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know what you mean by that. What is
+'money'?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is an article which tells what everything else
+is worth."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it must be wonderful. I would like to see
+that remarkable thing which can tell what everything
+else is worth."</p>
+
+<p>John took some of the coins from his pocket.
+"Here is some of it, which we use on Wonder Island."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief smiled. He held them in his hand. He
+knew the meaning of the hole in the center. They
+were intended, as he thought, to be threaded on a
+string, and used as an ornament.</p>
+
+<p>They fascinated him. He had never seen anything
+so attractive. He looked at John, while he
+thought, but did not speak. Then John said: "This
+is worth one cent, and this larger one five cents."</p>
+
+<p>He compared the two. Finally, he said: "What
+makes this worth so much more than the other, and
+why are they worth anything?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because there is so much metal,&mdash;so much copper,
+in each."</p>
+
+<p>"But copper is of no use. I cannot eat it, and it
+will not clothe me."</p>
+
+<p>"No, but if you have this money then you can get
+the clothes, and the size of them will tell just how
+much clothing you can get."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_140" id="p_140">p. 140</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I do not understand it. Where can I go and get
+clothing with these round pieces!"</p>
+
+<p>"You must go where the clothing is, or the goods
+must be brought to you."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if we are here, at a place where there
+should be no clothing, or no food, this <i>money</i>, as you
+call it, would not enable me to clothe or feed myself?"</p>
+
+<p>"Assuredly not."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it has no value?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; it merely measures the value of something
+which I can eat or wear, or use."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why not use a taro root, or a fowl, or wisps
+of fibre?"</p>
+
+<p>"That would be all right, if we could have a common
+understanding between us of how much a taro
+bulb was worth by the side of a bundle of fibre, and
+how large the bundle should be to exchange fairly
+with an armful of Amarylla tubers."</p>
+
+<p>On the third day the boys, together with John, a
+party of the boys, and three natives under the lead
+of Calmo, started for the northern end of the island.
+John had now learned that the island was
+entirely unlike the Wonder Island formation.</p>
+
+<p>The latter was fairly circular in form, whereas the
+one they were now about to explore was narrow and
+long. That part of the southern portion which they
+had carefully examined, in order to learn its agricultural
+possibilities, was rolling, and in many places
+had level plateaus, not anywhere at a greater altitude
+than three or four hundred feet above sea level.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_141" id="p_141">p. 141</a></span></p>
+
+<p>There was higher ground to the north, where the
+climate was uninviting, so Beralsee said, and it was
+for that reason they made it a convict colony.</p>
+
+<p>John was anxious to see the people who were exiled
+from their homes on account of their crimes.
+Furthermore, he was impressed with the idea that
+the upper end showed volcanic upheavals, which
+would be likely to expose mineral formations.</p>
+
+<p>Gruesome tales were current of the ferocity of the
+convicts. It was no wonder that the poor victims,
+whom George had prevented from being expelled
+several days before, regarded their deliverance as
+such a great blessing.</p>
+
+<p>No one, once condemned, was ever permitted to
+come back. The condemnation was for all time.
+Furthermore, it was part of the Chief's unwritten
+code, that no one who transgressed the law could
+ever make atonement, or recover his rights.</p>
+
+<p>To be able to meet people so condemned, and to
+talk with them and get their views, was worth an
+exertion, surely, and Harry and George were just as
+enthusiastic at the prospects of the journey.</p>
+
+<p>"That may be some recompense for not finding
+any caves," said George.</p>
+
+<p>Harry laughed, as he looked at George. "To hear
+you talk people might think you had caves on the
+brain."</p>
+
+<p>"Well the caves are the only thing that we have
+had in the way of sport. And then the treasures!"</p>
+
+<p>"I know that; but I shall not be disappointed if
+there isn't a cave within five hundred miles."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_142" id="p_142">p. 142</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Nor I; but John is very anxious, for some reason,
+to find some particular cave. I'll bet anything
+that skull we found on the southeast peak of Wonder
+Island has something to do with it, judging by
+the way he is caring for the skull, and spending
+hours in examining it."</p>
+
+<p>"I had forgotten about that," responded Harry.
+"That brings back my interest, now. But John does
+not think there are any caves on this island, but he
+believes that there is another island farther south."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that so!"</p>
+
+<p>"I am sure of it."</p>
+
+<p>"How sure?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, the chart which John made has this island
+on it, and a mark which shows something like it directly
+to the south. I saw that several days ago."</p>
+
+<p>"When did he make the drawing?"</p>
+
+<p>"Since he has been on this island."</p>
+
+<p>Harry emitted a low whistle. "I thought John
+had something in his mind all along. What do you
+suppose he expects to find in that particular cave?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, not money; that's sure. It might be a
+good idea to do some thinking and searching on our
+own account."</p>
+
+<p>"I have often wondered, since we have been on
+Wonder Island, and more particularly, since we
+landed here, whether it would not be possible to trace
+some of the unsolved mysteries of Wonder Island to
+this, or some other island."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I have often thought of that. We have gone
+over every part of that island, and found no trace<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_143" id="p_143">p. 143</a></span>
+of the other boat load, that is of the boys who came
+ashore on the <i>Investigator's</i> No. 3. None of the
+tribes ever knew or heard of that boat, nor was there
+ever a trace of the members of that crew.</p>
+
+<p>"That is the mystery. Some one brought the boat
+to the island. Some one took it inland. Some one,
+a man by the name of Walter, wrote a note addressed
+to Wright, who was one of the companions
+of John when he was shipwrecked, but Wright knew
+nothing of Walter. If the solution of this matter
+does not lie in some other island, we might as well
+give it up."</p>
+
+<p>Before describing the events of the journey it is
+necessary to make a digression, so that we may be
+able to recount some things which had a bearing on
+the adventures and experiences of the two boys after
+they returned.</p>
+
+<p>The natives on Wonder Island, as well as on the
+island where they now were, wore the most primitive
+kinds of clothing. The men had the simplest clothing,
+merely a breech clout, worn about the loins, and
+the Chiefs usually wore some distinguishing clothing
+about their shoulders, and usually on their arms.</p>
+
+<p>The women, however, had short skirts, and like
+their white sisters, abounded in ornaments. Some
+of them had jackets, to which the trinkets were attached.
+All delighted in bracelets. These were usually
+formed like bands around their arms and limbs,
+and the wealth and importance of the dame was
+judged from the number so employed.</p>
+
+<p>As a result, when they became great and wealthy,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_144" id="p_144">p. 144</a></span>
+more and more clothing had to be used, to enable
+them to attach the ornaments. It might be said, that
+clothing was worn, not for the purpose of covering
+the body, or for comfort, but in order to serve as a
+vehicle to attach the much desired trinkets, and the
+dangling character of these articles seemed to be the
+great attraction.</p>
+
+<p>For this reason bright and sparkling bits of jewelry
+were the most sought. It mattered not what
+they were made of, but the glistening surface had its
+value to them. Singularly enough, the women on the
+new island strove to decorate themselves in like
+manner, and presumably, for the same purpose.</p>
+
+<p>When the savages in Wonder Island were brought
+out of their crude state, the Professor and George
+knew that they could not change that fundamental
+law of nature, nor did they attempt to work a revolution
+in the minds and characters of the people in
+this respect.</p>
+
+<p>Within certain limitations such a desire to ornament
+and render themselves attractive is most laudable.
+They knew that among the few peoples in the
+world, where that quality is entirely lacking, they
+are of the lowest type, and possessed of the least intellect,
+and that all such are the hardest to cultivate.</p>
+
+<p>Here, as on Wonder Island, the natives understood
+weaving, the fabrics being of the coarsest character,
+both in the matter of quality and appearance. The
+work was necessarily slow and tedious, and the principal
+work of the women was to weave these articles
+of wear with the simple tools they had.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_145" id="p_145">p. 145</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the boys built the looms, and the natives
+saw the wonderful goods produced, and the dyes prepared
+to give the fabrics the different hues, the
+women became most expert weavers, and the natural
+result was that they vied with each other to make the
+best articles, and to form them into the most fashionable
+garments.</p>
+
+<p>When the <i>Pioneer</i>, and later their new steamer,
+<i>Wonder</i>, which was now regularly running to one of
+the great seaports, began to bring in such products
+as they could not make in the islands, a new impetus
+was given to the dress designed for women.</p>
+
+<p>Before the boys left for Wonder Island, that place
+attracted immigrants from the north; they brought
+their families, and began to engage in the business of
+exporting the fruits and the fibres, as well as the ores
+and the dyes from the island. From the white
+women the native women learned the new art of
+dressing, and of adornment.</p>
+
+<p>Their coming was not needed to give them the desire,
+but they were not slow to recognize that their
+fair-skinned sisters could teach them the refining
+process.</p>
+
+<p>Muro's wife was the sister of Uraso, the latter a
+man of naturally strong intellect, and his sister was
+not behind him in her particular domain. She was
+at all times the leading spirit in the development of
+her people, and to her the Professor imparted many
+of the great secrets, that might be of service.</p>
+
+<p>Stut, the brother of Muro, was second in command
+of the vessel, and before they left on the mis<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_146" id="p_146">p. 146</a></span>sion
+into the interior, John called in Stut, and in
+presence of the boys imparted a scheme that met with
+hearty approval.</p>
+
+<p>It was now an open secret that Sutoto and Cinda
+were in love. If the Chief knew of it he did not exhibit
+any alarm, or offer any objections. John knew
+that courtships on the islands were not usually of
+long duration. He thought it would be a fine thing
+to make the wedding a "state affair."</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Stut, I want to entrust you with a mission
+to the Professor and Muro's wife, to whom you can
+explain the situation. She must prepare a suitable
+outfit for the bride, and tell her I think she and the
+other women that she might choose should also come
+over. They must not forget to bring the proper
+costumes for Cinda's mother and for all the attendants.</p>
+
+<p>"The Professor will know what is suitable to send
+over for the Chief. All this will take some time to
+arrange, and it must be done without letting Sutoto
+know. I will arrange the matter with him so that he
+will not suspect your real mission.</p>
+
+<p>"Our work at the northern part of the island will
+take about ten days, and probably less. If you have
+no trouble, and this time of the year is not a stormy
+one, you can easily make the trip there in a day and
+a half, and return in the same time, thus giving you a
+full week to prepare the articles."</p>
+
+<p>Stut was in raptures at the announcement. John
+knew that he was capable, and trusted him. Shortly
+afterwards Sutoto was sent for, and John said: "It<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_147" id="p_147">p. 147</a></span>
+is necessary for the <i>Pioneer</i> to return to Wonder Island
+to get some things of importance for us. It
+would please me better to have you remain, and Stut
+can take your place for the trip; but if you prefer
+to go, it will be satisfactory."</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto hesitated for a moment. He eyed John for
+a moment, and the boys begged him to remain. They
+knew, as did John, that their entreaties were not necessary.
+Finally, with a most suspicious glance, he
+consented to stay. Stut was notified, and he came in.</p>
+
+<p>"Stut, I have some very valuable papers which
+must be delivered to the Professor, who will send
+some things back, and I have arranged with Sutoto
+that he shall remain and help us in our investigations
+here, while you sail the <i>Pioneer</i> to Unity."</p>
+
+<p>Stut looked at Sutoto for a moment, as though
+taken by surprise, and announced his willingness to
+go. "Then start at once," remarked John, "and return
+as soon as possible."</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto called Stut aside, after they left John.
+"Will you get some things for me?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly, what can I do for you?"</p>
+
+<p>Then Sutoto imparted the secret of his coming
+marriage to Stut, and the latter with well concealed
+surprise, promised secrecy, and assured him that he
+would get the clothing necessary and the particular
+presents that seemed to be of more importance to
+him than his garments.</p>
+
+<p>Within two hours the ship was ready, and as they
+were leaving the vessel Stut told the boys of the commission
+which he had undertaken at Sutoto's request.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_148" id="p_148">p. 148</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SKELETON BENEATH THE BOAT</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">The</span> present journey reminded the boys of the
+time when they began their wanderings in the unknown
+wilds of their own island. Then they were inexperienced,
+lacking the most ordinary knowledge of
+life in the open, afraid of slightest noise when in unknown
+places, and constantly fearing attack by wild
+men or beasts.</p>
+
+<p>What a difference now! They had been successful,
+and had abundant treasures at their command.
+Something told them that they were to find still
+greater treasures, and the zest was one beyond expression.</p>
+
+<p>The course was directed due north. The boys
+knew that they were to investigate the mountains,
+the hills and the streams. They were to learn what
+fruits and vegetation might be found in their native
+state on the island; the kinds and varieties of animals,
+and the qualities of the minerals, if the geological
+formations offered them for inspection.</p>
+
+<p>From the first day that they landed, the boys had
+heard a peculiar guttural sound, impossible to describe.
+The sound was almost annoying after they
+had heard it for a time. Passing the limb of a tree
+during the first hour of the march they heard the
+same cry.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_149" id="p_149">p. 149</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I see what it is," remarked George. "It is a
+bird. See it on that limb?"</p>
+
+<p>John looked, and then turned to George. "Why
+certainly, that is the Kagu."</p>
+
+<p>"Why its bill and feet are red, while the rest of
+the body is gray. What
+a funny feather it has
+running back from its
+head!"</p>
+
+<p>Harry laughed, as he
+remarked: "I wonder if
+our women took their
+hat fashions from the
+Kagu?"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 180px;">
+<a id="illus-fig8" name="illus-fig8" />
+<a href="#p_149">
+<img src="images/illus-fig8-p149.png" width="180" height="234"
+alt="Fig. 8. The Kagu." title="Fig. 8. The Kagu." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 8. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Kagu</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"You have made a correct
+observation. Some
+species of the hornbill
+have feathers which project
+up into the air like sentinels, and the same
+feathers are used in exactly the same fashion by
+makers of millinery. Now, I am not an authority on
+the fashions, but I have often thought that if the
+leaders in styles would build those wonderful head
+decorations something like the patterns furnished by
+nature they would be more beautiful and becoming."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if it has only one leg?"</p>
+
+<p>John laughed. "I imagine it has two. It is the
+custom of many birds of this species to stand for
+hours on one leg. It is of the same family as the
+stork, the heron and the ibis."</p>
+
+<p>"Why don't we see more animals?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_150" id="p_150">p. 150</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"The island is not, probably, large enough. These
+small islands have only the smallest kinds. Besides,
+the larger animals are found where the nature of the
+country permits them to conceal themselves."</p>
+
+<p>George stopped before a large bush which had rows
+of yellow flowers growing up all along the stems, and
+at each flower was a seed.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah! you have found a most valuable plant," said
+John, as he broke off one of the stems. "Feel the
+crushed leaves."</p>
+
+<p>"It is just like grease."</p>
+
+<p>"It is an oil. It is one of the products largely
+used in the United States, as a substitute for olive
+oil, and for soap making."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it called?"</p>
+
+<p>"The plant is known as Benne. The product is
+Sesame oil. The peculiarity of the plant is that
+nearly one-half of the leaf is a pure oil, and it can
+remain exposed a long time before it turns rancid."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if that is what they use in their cooking!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; it is absolutely inodorous, and is better than
+lard for table uses. Look at the seeds. They are
+classed with the most nutritious in the world."</p>
+
+<p>"The Chief had them, and I tried some of them
+the first night I dined with him."</p>
+
+<p>The route led to an upper plateau, well wooded,
+many of the trees being of the palm variety, with
+plenty of silver-leafed families so common everywhere.</p>
+
+<p>"Do look at the Coffee trees?" exclaimed Harry.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_151" id="p_151">p. 151</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Chief's son was consulted. He had no knowledge
+of the use of the berry. "We must take a lot
+of the berries back with us. This will be a treat at
+the celebration." John stopped short, and the boys
+commenced to laugh. He had almost given away the
+scheme for the wedding feast. Sutoto did not catch
+the force of the allusion.</p>
+
+<p>George and Harry were now on the quest for new
+things in every direction, and the natives aided them
+in carrying out their every wish. After they had
+reached a small stream flowing to the north it became
+evident that they had passed the highest point of the
+plateau, and were now descending.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 351px;">
+<a id="illus-fig9" name="illus-fig9" />
+<a href="#p_151">
+<img src="images/illus-fig9-p151.png" width="351" height="261"
+alt="Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne." title="Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 9. <span class="u">Sesame</span> <span class="u">Oil</span> <span class="u">Plant</span>.
+<span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Benne</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>One of the natives pointed out a peculiarly-shaped
+tree, tall, with immense leaves, and at each leaf
+cluster there was an immense white flower.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_152" id="p_152">p. 152</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Here is a tree with yellow flowers. We must
+have some of these as specimens," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>The trees were exceedingly tall. "The men are
+asking if you want some of the flowers," said Sutoto.</p>
+
+<p>"By all means," answered George. Without a
+moment's hesitation a young athlete made his way to
+the top, and gathered a dozen branches, which he
+dropped to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>The beauty of these flowers is difficult to describe.
+The tree body is perfectly straight, and the limbs
+grow out uniformly
+on three
+sides, the leaves
+being very rough.</p>
+
+<p>"This is a species
+which belongs
+to the Indicus
+family," remarked
+John, as
+he cut off one of
+the leaves. "It
+would be a good
+tree for carpenters
+to raise."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 229px;">
+<a id="illus-fig10" name="illus-fig10" />
+<a href="#p_152">
+<img src="images/illus-fig10-p152.png" width="229" height="291"
+alt="Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree." title="Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 10. <span class="u">Flower</span> <span class="u">of</span>
+<span class="u">Indica</span> <span class="u">Tree</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Why so?"
+asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"You see it is just like sand-paper."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is something to know. But will it
+really smooth down wood?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is frequently used for that purpose, and you
+might take some along and try it."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_153" id="p_153">p. 153</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At intervals John was observed taking up bits of
+soil, which he carefully wrapped up and deposited in
+one of the receptacles.</p>
+
+<p>"I am curious to know what you are taking dirt
+for?" said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I should have told you that a knowledge of the
+nature of the soil is one of the things that is very
+important to the agriculturist. Many men have
+made failures because they planted things which the
+earth was not adapted to grow."</p>
+
+<p>"It has always been a wonder to me why things
+really do grow up out of the dirt," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That is not difficult to understand, if you will consider
+that the ground contains food, and that a plant
+can grow only where it can get the right kind. Then,
+there may be plenty of food but not the kind it can
+digest."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is news to me. Do plants digest
+food?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, just the same as what we call living animals.
+The tree is somewhat different from animals, in the
+particular that it digests its food first and then consumes
+it afterwards. In this particular certain
+larv&aelig; act the same as trees, that is digest it before
+they consume it."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean by larva?"</p>
+
+<p>"The early form of certain living organisms, before
+they are fully developed. Thus, the tadpole is
+the larva of the frog. A great many insects are
+bred from what are called grubs, or caterpillars.
+All these are called larva."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_154" id="p_154">p. 154</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What kind of food is found in the earth?"</p>
+
+<p>"Many, many kinds. Carbon, nitrogen, the various
+salts, such as lime, magnesia, strontia, and the
+like, and when the little feelers shoot out from the
+roots, they are in search of something to eat."</p>
+
+<p>At this point they were interrupted by shouting
+and laughter from one section of the searching party,
+and the boys ran out across the open to learn its
+cause. Two of the natives were carrying a dark
+brown object, about half the size of an ordinary hog.</p>
+
+<p>It was kicking vigorously, but did not appear to be
+at all vicious.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, it looks just like a little bear," said George
+as he danced about. "Let us keep it for a pet."</p>
+
+<p>"It is a bear," said John. "It is the Bruang, or
+the sun-bear of the Malayan peninsula."</p>
+
+<p>"But doesn't it grow any bigger?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; that is a full size specimen; in fact, it is a
+pretty large specimen, I should judge."</p>
+
+<p>"What beautiful fur, and so soft! Will it bite?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am of the opinion they can bite, but they are
+easily tamed and make great pets. Hasn't it a fine
+white spot on its breast?"</p>
+
+<p>The men stood about and allowed it to move about
+within the circle. It cast its eyes around, as much as
+to say: "Well, what are you going to do about it?"</p>
+
+<p>George cried out: "Hold it for a minute," and
+he pounced on one of the provision bags, and
+brought out a pot of honey. He forced his way in
+among the watchers, and with a stick dipped into the
+honey held it up before the animal.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_155" id="p_155">p. 155</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It smelled the honey, and began to lick the stick,
+and then it darted for the pot. "What a tongue,"
+exclaimed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what they are noted for. The tongue is
+made for the very purpose of going into deep holes,
+and the greatest use is to rob the hives of the wild
+honey bee."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 354px;">
+<a id="illus-fig11" name="illus-fig11" />
+<a href="#p_155">
+<img src="images/illus-fig11-p155.png" width="354" height="276"
+alt="Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear." title="Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 11. <span class="u">Bruang.</span> <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Malayan</span>
+<span class="u">Bear</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The antics of George and the bear were most amusing
+to the watchers, and occasioned roars of laughter.
+When the pot was emptied he wanted more, and
+nosed around George until the latter could hardly
+keep his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"He is getting to be a mighty close friend," said
+John, when he could find time to stop laughing for
+a moment.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_156" id="p_156">p. 156</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Well, don't let him get away," cried George, as
+he saw the cordon around the animal broken up, leaving
+plenty of opening for it to get away.</p>
+
+<p>But, of course, the natives didn't understand him,
+and soon Mr. Bear had all the opportunity in the
+world to go home. But he didn't. He walked alongside
+of George, and the latter liked to stroke his soft
+fur, to which no objection was offered.</p>
+
+<p>The bear followed and was by his side every
+minute of the time for the next hour, and while they
+sat down to lunch little Sunny, as George named him,
+was at the feast. He had samples of everything in
+sight, and the menu tasted good, from honey at the
+beginning of the repast, to honey at the end of it.</p>
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+
+<p>The progress was necessarily slow, because there
+were so many things to examine and to make notes
+of. They went out of the way from the direct route,
+so as to cover as wide an area as possible. Before
+camping for the night they had ascended a slight elevation,
+and there, to the right and to the left they saw
+the wide stretches of the great ocean.</p>
+
+<p>Directly ahead was a narrow tongue of land, leading
+to a broadening area, and off in the dim distance
+was a high point. The Chief's son pointed there and
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"On the other side of that high place is where the
+bad people live."</p>
+
+<p>"That must be a long way off," said John. When
+this was interpreted he answered: "Another day's
+march."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_157" id="p_157">p. 157</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The gentle breeze from the eastern shore was a
+great relief.</p>
+
+<p>They had marched during the day mostly through
+forests, and everywhere the atmosphere was close
+and still, so that the open space was appreciated.</p>
+
+<p>All slept soundly that night, and morning came
+only too soon for the wearied boys, but they enjoyed
+the trip too much to delay moving at the earliest opportunity.
+While breakfast was being prepared the
+boys sauntered over to the sloping shore to the west,
+which was not more than a half mile away.</p>
+
+<p>They enjoyed walking along the pure white sand,
+and after disrobing had a jolly time in the mildly
+moving surf. It was not often that they had opportunities
+to take a sea bath.</p>
+
+<p>The bathing place was a deeply-indented bay, with
+a long sloping beach,&mdash;an ideal spot, with the camp
+plainly visible to the east. "Why not take a stroll to
+the southern end of the bay?" remarked Harry, after
+they were ready to return. "We might be able to
+see the headland to the south where we first sighted
+land."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, then, here goes it," and George started
+on a strong sprint to the south.</p>
+
+<p>Harry was by far the fleeter, and reached the
+tufted grass ahead of George, and then turned to the
+right, to gain the elevation. It was while thus moving
+through the brush and d&eacute;bris, which was far
+above the normal level of the sea, that they were
+attracted by an unusual deposit of brush, and other
+accumulations.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_158" id="p_158">p. 158</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Stop, Harry; here is something we ought to investigate."</p>
+
+<p>Harry turned and came back. In the early days
+of their investigation such a mass would have meant
+diligent search. It was more from a recurrence of
+the old habit that dictated the idea to George.</p>
+
+<p>It was well they did so, for not far from the top,
+and covered over with seaweed and leaves, was a boxlike
+structure, evidently some part of a wreckage.
+They worked feverishly at the surrounding mass,
+and uncovered it.</p>
+
+<p>Harry started back. "Do you know what this
+is?" he asked. George stooped over, and stared.</p>
+
+<p>"It is part of the boat which was taken from
+South River."</p>
+
+<p>When that boat disappeared, only to be found
+miles away from its original location, the two boxlike
+compartments which they had made in it, and the
+oars used by them, had been taken away, and instead
+they found entirely different oars, and a rope, of
+which they knew nothing.</p>
+
+<p>Here was one of the boxes. "Let's open it," said
+George in the most intense tone. That was easily
+done, and there they found, to their surprise, one of
+their original shell hatchets, part of a coarsely-woven
+cloth, which they recognized as one of their early
+productions on the first loom, and a dozen or more
+gourds, in which food had been placed, and all exactly
+as it had been stored away by them. The food
+had disappeared, of course, but it had been lost by
+the action of the sea, and decomposition, as it was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_159" id="p_159">p. 159</a></span>
+evident that the contents had not been disturbed by
+any one.</p>
+
+<p>"Let us call John," said Harry, and he bounded
+up the beach, and ran over the crest, waving his arms
+as he did so. He had not gone half the distance
+before those at the camp saw Harry running, and
+John, and most of those in sight started on a run,
+George meanwhile industriously dragging away the
+d&eacute;bris.</p>
+
+<p>"We have found it," cried Harry, as John came
+within hailing distance, and without waiting for them
+to come up he bolted back.</p>
+
+<p>"Now what have you discovered?" asked John as
+he came up breathless.</p>
+
+<p>"Part of our old boat."</p>
+
+<p>"We thought George had met with some accident."</p>
+
+<p>"We got this by accident," answered George.
+"See, here are some more things. This is the oar we
+had. How can you explain that?"</p>
+
+<p>It was certainly a poser. Why the exchange of
+oars? John shook his head. For once he had no
+theory even to offer. "Come, boys, let us take away
+all this stuff."</p>
+
+<p>All gave a hand, Sutoto wondering why there
+should be so much ado about a bit of wreckage.
+George explained the affair, as well as he could.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that board?" exclaimed John. "No, not
+a board; that is part of a boat," he added as more of
+the accumulation was torn away.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a boat; it's a boat!" almost shrieked George.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_160" id="p_160">p. 160</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Come to this end and take away this lot of seaweed,"
+called out Harry.</p>
+
+<p>They soon uncovered a boat with one end embedded
+in the sand so it was difficult to turn it over,
+owing to the rotten condition of the wood. Only
+here and there was any paint visible. The action of
+the elements had done its work.</p>
+
+<p>"What kind of a boat was this?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John did not answer, but peered down on the sand
+where the prow had rested. "Take away the sand
+carefully here," he said, and when he pointed the
+boys saw something white protruding an inch or two.</p>
+
+<p>As the sand was scraped away they first saw the
+thigh bone of a skeleton, and soon the whole frame
+was laid bare, the interstices filled with sand. A
+peculiar rope was around the frame, and John
+grasped it.</p>
+
+<p>The boys eagerly looked at it as John intently examined
+it. "It is the same," he said.</p>
+
+<p>"The same as what?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The same as the rope found on the boat when you
+discovered it on the beach."</p>
+
+<p>That was the first time that the boys knew that
+John had any idea about the loss of the boat, or of
+the strange rope. It was possible, however, that the
+Professor had told John about it, as they were accustomed
+to talk over these strange things.</p>
+
+<p>"But the boat?" asked George. "What do you
+think of the boat?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is the exact counterpart of the <i>Investigator's</i>
+Life boat No. 3."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_161" id="p_161">p. 161</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+<h3>A CONVICT COLONY OF NATIVES</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">The</span> Chief's son was present. "Did you ever
+know of a boat load of castaways on the island?"
+asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"We never knew of anything like that," was his
+reply.</p>
+
+<p>Every scrap in that mass of wreckage was gone
+over. There was nothing else visible by which they
+could gain the slightest clue. The skeleton was
+minutely examined. It was that of a strong, well-developed
+man, but from all appearances one leg was
+shorter than the other.</p>
+
+<p>The bones of the shortened leg were closely investigated.
+"The bones show that this man met with
+an accident in early life, or before he was fully
+grown, or, he may have had some disease before he
+attained full growth, so that his right leg is shorter
+because not fully developed," said John, as he continued
+the examination.</p>
+
+<p>"He must have been a soldier or an adventurer,
+as he has three bullet marks, one here in the right
+shoulder, one in the ankle, and the other on the cheek
+bone. All of the wounds were healed before he met
+his death."</p>
+
+<p>"But there is one thing which is still more remark<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_162" id="p_162">p. 162</a></span>able.
+This man was a captive. He was tied in the
+boat and it was set adrift, and was likely on the open
+sea and washed ashore during one of the monsoons."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you think so?" asked Harry, as soon as
+he could recover breath after this announcement.</p>
+
+<p>"This rope tells the story."</p>
+
+<p>"But how does it happen that he and the boat
+were together. It seems to me that if the waves were
+high enough to bring the boat clear up to this point,
+he would be freed from the boat long before it
+reached this place."</p>
+
+<p>"He was tied to the boat."</p>
+
+<p>One mystery was solved, and another more terrible
+in its aspect came upon its heels. There was but one
+thing to do, and that was to bury the skeleton, and
+John ordered this done, as soon as he had taken the
+complete measurements of the remains.</p>
+
+<p>"We don't want the box or the things in it now,"
+said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed, I want the hatchet," answered George.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and the rope," added John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys went back to the camp with thoughtful
+expressions on their faces.</p>
+
+<p>"This seems to be a Wonder Island, too," said
+George, more to himself than to any one else.</p>
+
+<p>They descended the incline, and crossed the narrow
+neck of land that joined the two parts of the island.
+Beyond, as they advanced the ground grew more
+uneven and rugged. Occasionally rocks appeared,
+the first that they had noticed except around the place
+where George was captured.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_163" id="p_163">p. 163</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Nevertheless, vegetation grew in even greater profusion
+than on the other branch of the island. There
+were more berries upon which all the natives feasted,
+and the boys were not slow to pick them as they
+passed.</p>
+
+<p>In traveling alongside of a hill Harry was the first
+to call attention to a peculiar leaf on a plant, which
+bore rose-shaped flowers. "This is something new
+to me. There is nothing like it on Wonder Island.
+Did you notice it,
+John?"</p>
+
+<p>The latter took a
+branch, and gazed at
+it for a long time. "I
+am surprised to find
+this growing here. It
+is a plant well known
+in Palestine, and is
+called the Rose of
+Jericho."</p>
+
+<p>"What a delightful
+perfume it has," said
+Harry.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 229px;">
+<a id="illus-fig12" name="illus-fig12" />
+<a href="#p_163">
+<img src="images/illus-fig12-p163.png" width="229" height="263"
+alt="Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho." title="Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 12. <span class="u">Rose</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Jericho</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"It is not noted on
+that account, however. It is the <i>resurrection</i> plant."</p>
+
+<p>"How singular; and in what way did it get that
+name?"</p>
+
+<p>"It may be dried up entirely, and if placed in
+water it will again appear to revive and raise itself
+up. This is, of course, due to its power to absorb a
+vast amount of water. It is found near the shores of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_164" id="p_164">p. 164</a></span>
+the Dead Sea, and I recall that when I was in Jerusalem
+it was a common thing to see the plant in its
+dried-up state, sold to pilgrims who were instructed
+how to resurrect it."</p>
+
+<p>Here was caught the second and only other animal
+on the trip. It was somewhat smaller than Sunny,
+and the latter danced about the dead animal, as the
+"boys" brought it in.</p>
+
+<p>"And what is this big-eared fellow?" asked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>John laughed as he recognized the apt description.
+"It is a kind of Australian kangaroo. It inhabits
+trees, but is very
+clumsy in appearance
+and in action.
+It is a kind of sloth,
+or wombat."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 235px;">
+<a id="illus-fig13" name="illus-fig13" />
+<a href="#p_164">
+<img src="images/illus-fig13-p164.png" width="235" height="213"
+alt="Fig. 13. The Koala." title="Fig. 13. The Koala." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 13. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Koala</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Isn't that a
+dandy fur?"</p>
+
+<p>"The fur is not
+so valuable as its
+skin. There is
+nothing to compare
+with the softness
+of the hide when tanned. It feels like the finest
+velvet, and is very strong and durable."</p>
+
+<p>They were now ascending a series of hills, each
+more difficult than the last, and the ground became
+extremely rough and broken. There was a lone
+path, in many places nearly obliterated. It was the
+uninviting road to the land of sorrow.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_165" id="p_165">p. 165</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Chief's son tried to be in the company of the
+boys at all times, and while he could not understand
+their chatter, Sutoto was a willing interpreter. He
+enjoyed the jolly freedom of the two chums, and
+their uniform good nature.</p>
+
+<p>George and Harry were ever on the alert to make
+him feel at ease and so they talked with him, and told
+of the things which John explained, and it was
+plainly seen that he marveled at things which were
+described.</p>
+
+<p>Referring to the exiled people, George asked:
+"Do those people never return after they are once
+condemned?"</p>
+
+<p>"They are never permitted to come back."</p>
+
+<p>"Do they stay there of their own free will?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; I am told that they long to be at home
+again."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what would you do if they tried to come
+back?"</p>
+
+<p>"We would drive them away. One time they tried
+to come back, all of them, and we had to kill some
+of them," and he said it in a tone of regret.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you believe in killing?"</p>
+
+<p>He looked at George for a moment, and then looked
+up into Sutoto's eyes, as he said: "No; it would do
+no good. Would that be the right way?" he asked
+with a sort of innocence that brought a blush to
+George's cheeks.</p>
+
+<p>"No; we do not believe in killing, except when we
+must to protect ourselves."</p>
+
+<p>"But do you have to make such wonderful things<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_166" id="p_166">p. 166</a></span>
+as those (pointing to the guns) to protect yourselves?"</p>
+
+<p>John threw back his head and tried to prevent a
+loud laugh, at this perfectly obvious question, while
+he looked at the boys to see what sort of an answer
+would be given.</p>
+
+<p>George was non-plussed for a minute. John had
+no business to disconcert him in that way. He
+turned and expected Harry to answer, but it seemed
+as though he had imperfectly understood it. There
+was no way out of it, and George tried to get his body
+into a proper position to answer it with dignity.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you see, the guns were not made for the
+purpose of killing people, but for sporting purposes."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you have many wild animals in your country?"
+he asked na&iuml;vely.</p>
+
+<p>"Not many now."</p>
+
+<p>John laughed a little so as not to be too undignified,
+and George saw the humor of the situation. He
+did not want to pursue the subject any further, and
+John graciously turned the conversation by announcing
+the discovery of the Upas tree.</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't know the Upas tree was of such immense
+size," said Harry. "Is it really true that it kills
+everything that comes near it?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, that is greatly exaggerated. The only time
+when it gives forth any harmful exudations, is when
+it is cut down, or when the bark is torn away, or it is
+wounded in such a way that the sap comes into contact
+with the body."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_167" id="p_167">p. 167</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The illustration shows a flowering branch of the
+tree, and gives an idea of the silk-like leaves.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;">
+<a id="illus-fig14" name="illus-fig14" />
+<a href="#p_167">
+<img src="images/illus-fig14-p167.png" width="380" height="267"
+alt="Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree." title="Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 14. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Flower</span> <span class="u">of</span>
+<span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Upas</span> <span class="u">Tree</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>They were still going upwardly. On both sides, to
+the east and to the west could be seen the rolling sea.
+Ahead was the mountain, if such it might be called.
+Rocks began to appear everywhere. John stopped
+long at some of those dark gray walls, and chipped
+off many specimens.</p>
+
+<p>There were now fewer birds and animals, except
+very small species, such as squirrels, and a variety
+of weasel, quick in its movements and reddish in
+color.</p>
+
+<p>"This begins to look promising," remarked John,
+as he crawled around the ledges.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we shall find any caves here?"
+asked George.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_168" id="p_168">p. 168</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I shall be very much surprised if we do not," he
+answered.</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't it singular that the natives never knew
+about them, if there are any here?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; I do not think that is strange; they do not
+believe in the witch doctors, and they have no Krishnos
+here, so that the caves are of no value to them."</p>
+
+<p>"But do you find much that is valuable in the way
+of ores?"</p>
+
+<p>"The hills here are full of the most valuable minerals.
+The little prospecting I have done is sufficient
+to satisfy me on that point. I am trying to make a
+fair estimate so I can give an accurate report when
+we return."</p>
+
+<p>It was late in the afternoon when they reached the
+summit of the mountain which they had viewed from
+the south. It was green to the very summit, and
+from the elevation where they stood they could see
+a long and narrow stretch to the north, the distance
+in that direction being much farther than they had
+traveled from the little bight of land on the south.</p>
+
+<p>"It does look inviting in that part of the island,"
+said Harry. "Were you ever there, in the bad
+place?" asked Harry as the Chief's son came up.</p>
+
+<p>"No; but I have heard much about it."</p>
+
+<p>One of the natives who heard the conversation
+said: "It is a beautiful place."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you ever been there?" he was asked.</p>
+
+<p>"I was a guard on two occasions when we took
+prisoners there," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell us about it," said George.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_169" id="p_169">p. 169</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I have never been in the village, but within an
+hour's march of it. The Chief warned us never to
+go into the place itself."</p>
+
+<p>Aside from the village the place which interested
+John and the boys most was the mountain on which
+they were now standing. This must be explored. It
+was now late in the afternoon, and at John's suggestion
+they encamped, and only short excursions were
+made by the boys in the quest for something new.</p>
+
+<p>It was a delightful night. The elevation gave
+them the advantage of a beautiful breeze, and the
+odors wafted to them, from some unknown source,
+on the mild trade wind from the north, was almost
+like a narcotic, so soothing and restful.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you ever visit a more delightful spot?"
+asked Harry, as he inhaled the beautiful perfume.</p>
+
+<p>"It does not seem to me that the criminal colony
+is in a very bad place, if this is any indication of it.
+Isn't that way of dealing with crime a strange
+thing?" remarked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Why so?" asked John. "Is it anything peculiar
+for the wrongdoers to be banished from a community?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; but it seems wrong to condemn the innocent
+women and children. Why should they be punished
+along with the guilty?"</p>
+
+<p>"Probably, in the majority of cases, the women
+and children would prefer to accompany their husband
+and father. That does not seem to be so cruel,
+when it is considered that they are left free to live
+as much so as in their own community."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_170" id="p_170">p. 170</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That is what I cannot understand. What is the
+use of sending them away, if they are not locked
+up?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you not know that among the ancients, banishment
+from a country was the greatest punishment;
+greater even than death, in the opinion of many; and
+there are many cases where suicide was preferable.
+The odium of banishment was so great in those days
+that only the strongest and the greatest of men could
+live it down."</p>
+
+<p>"It makes me feel, when I smell this delightful perfume,
+that the home of the bad people over there
+must be a beautiful place," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"To give such an opinion, just because of the
+fragrance that comes from the north is proper for a
+sentimentalist," said John, as he laughed.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is a pretty big name to give, and I
+suppose it means having some notion that hasn't any
+sense in it, but just theory?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is a fairly close description, but I didn't
+mean it in that way."</p>
+
+<p>The boys never felt resentful at anything that John
+might say, as they knew and appreciated his noble
+character and disposition too well not to understand
+that his remarks were never born of malice.</p>
+
+<p>After a restful night preparations were made for
+a complete survey of the mountain, if it might be so
+dignified. Its greatest altitude did not exceed eight
+or nine hundred feet, and the width of the island at
+this point did not exceed two miles. It was quite
+rugged toward the east, but on the western side of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_171" id="p_171">p. 171</a></span>
+the island the descent was sloping, and offered easy
+examination.</p>
+
+<p>The natives were instructed what to do, and were
+told that they should particularly hunt for caves, or
+great holes, or entrances into the hills. Four search
+parties were thus organized, John being at the head
+of one, and George, Harry and Sutoto, each being a
+leader in the others.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto was most competent for work of this kind,
+as he had accompanied the boys on many expeditions,
+and was anxious to be of service in the
+quest.</p>
+
+<p>John took a direction to the northeast, and Sutoto
+to the southeast, thus leaving Harry and George with
+their parties to explore the region to the west, and
+northwest.</p>
+
+<p>As they were separating George slyly remarked:
+"John must have had some particular reason for
+taking the direction he did."</p>
+
+<p>Harry smiled. "I hope we shall find the first
+caves."</p>
+
+<p>Before separating John told them that he was
+desirous of finding a cavern which had certain peculiar
+markings therein, and the description showed
+it to be Cross-shaped. This must not be forgotten.</p>
+
+<p>They entered into the undertaking with the greatest
+enthusiasm.</p>
+
+<p>The boys simply danced, as they went down the
+hill, so great was the joy and the freedom of that
+beautiful spot. What a wonderful sensation is produced
+by beautiful odors. It is like a thought which<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_172" id="p_172">p. 172</a></span>
+transports you. On the other hand, when the odors
+are disagreeable how it depresses and disgusts.</p>
+
+<p>A great French physician has said that in his
+observations, the real happy people are those who
+delight in beautiful odors; and while it is not true
+that criminals are devoid of the elevating influence of
+delightful perfumes, still, they are less influenced
+thereby.</p>
+
+<p>In a number of tests made some years ago, a curious
+fact was observed: Sweet odors were allowed to
+Teach sleeping patients, which, when they did excite
+dreams, made them feel that they were living in a
+world of bliss, and surrounded by all the luxuries of
+life. On the other hand, when exposed to evil smelling
+odors, they dreamed of miseries, and of trouble
+and disgrace.</p>
+
+<p>It was understood that the different expeditions
+were to report at the camp at midday, and that in
+the event of any accident, or other mishap, the firing
+of the guns would be sufficient warning to the party
+at the camp and to those who were searching.</p>
+
+<p>George had with him two of his own "boys," and
+two of the natives, and Harry was also accompanied
+by several of his particular favorites. Harry, with
+his party, was the energetic one, as he was exceedingly
+wiry and a good walker. He did not intend to
+permit the others to encroach on any of his territory.</p>
+
+<p>Not a vestige of anything was found which even
+so much as pointed to a cave or to the sign of human
+occupancy in that section. George, on the other
+hand, was more fortunate. In his area the shelving<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_173" id="p_173">p. 173</a></span>
+rocks were more numerous, and he also knew that
+the rocks were limestone, and that caves were more
+likely to exist in limestone formation than in trap
+rock, or either in granite or sandstone formations.</p>
+
+<p>He was, therefore, fully prepared, when, in the
+early part of his investigation, to find, what appeared
+to be entrances, but in all cases they were blind leads,&mdash;that
+is they led in for short distances only, many of
+them being mere cleavages of the rocks.</p>
+
+<p>The real cave is the one where the limestone is
+eaten out by the erosive action of the water attacking
+the calcium of the rock. Furthermore, he felt that
+he must go down nearer sea level to be assured of
+success, and he acted on that impulse.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_174" id="p_174">p. 174</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2>
+
+<h3>A WHITE PARALYTIC IN THE CONVICT COLONY</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">It</span> would be useless to recount the experiences of
+all of the parties. They had four hours of search
+before them. This would, at least, give some idea
+as to the nature of the mountain, and enable John to
+decide whether it would be wise to give that project
+further consideration.</p>
+
+<p>At midday the parties began to appear, first
+Harry, then Sutoto, followed by John, and finally
+George. The latter was the only one who was smiling.
+The three early parties had no news to impart.</p>
+
+<p>"What have you found?" were the hailing words
+of George, as he approached.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing! nothing!" were the answers.</p>
+
+<p>"It takes me to bring home the goods," he remarked,
+and Harry laughed in derision.</p>
+
+<p>"No; but I mean it," he continued. "I have captured
+a modern, good-sized cave, and it is now awaiting
+to be explored."</p>
+
+<p>John could not believe the tale. "You are to be
+congratulated. Good boy!" Needless to add,
+George was the happiest person in that camp.</p>
+
+<p>"Let us go down to see it at once," said George in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_175" id="p_175">p. 175</a></span>
+his eagerness. "It is quite a distance, as it is not
+more than five hundred feet from the seashore."</p>
+
+<p>"Luncheon first," remarked John, and no one interposed
+an objection, as the trip had sharpened the
+appetites of all.</p>
+
+<p>The meal over little time was lost in making a
+start, and George led the way with his boys. Truly
+enough, there was the open mouth, and it was cave-like.
+Now for the mysteries within. "We went in
+only about a hundred feet, so as to be sure we weren't
+fooled," said George, in reference to his discovery.</p>
+
+<p>The lamps were then prepared, and all the preparations
+made, the boys being veterans in this sort of
+work, and John was ahead, as was generally the custom
+in these expeditions.</p>
+
+<p>"This is as far as we went," said George. Beyond
+was still a wall which glistened from the
+streaming lights.</p>
+
+<p>Gradually the walls came closer together; the
+track was a narrow one; so they had to march in
+single file. John called a halt. "I am afraid this is
+a blind hole," he said, but George could not believe
+it, so the side walls were searched, for indications of
+some opening.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the end of the cave. Note the side walls.
+If they should be pressed against each other they
+would fit exactly, showing that it is an opening
+caused by a fissure and not by erosion."</p>
+
+<p>Harry could not help but laugh. All this time lost
+on a blind lead, and the laugh was on George.</p>
+
+<p>Harry could not help jesting him. "If you are a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_176" id="p_176">p. 176</a></span>
+good tribe finder it is no sign that caves are in your
+line."</p>
+
+<p>John enjoyed the laugh on George, but the latter
+retorted: "I think the joke is on you, for traveling
+all this distance to see a hole in the ground."</p>
+
+<p>There was not the sign of a cave on the island,
+aside from the one discovered (?) by George, so the
+party remained that night at the mountain top, and
+in the morning descended the hill, and slowly
+marched to the north. Before noon they entered a
+beautiful stretch of woodland, with luxurious grass
+growing all around in profusion.</p>
+
+<p>"This is as far as the guards have been permitted
+to go," said one of the natives, who had volunteered
+the information about the place the day before.</p>
+
+<p>Thus far not a human being was visible. An
+hour's march would bring them to the village of the
+criminals, and the boys began to examine their
+weapons, and to look apprehensive.</p>
+
+<p>The wild fruits of the tropics were now seen in
+abundance in every direction. Bananas, the Bread
+Fruit, Cocoa, and Date Palm, on every hand.</p>
+
+<p>The most astonishing thing, however, was the profusion
+of flowers, of every variety, seemingly, and
+the air was scented as with one vast bouquet.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto stopped and pointed ahead: "They are in
+the trees gathering fruit." The party halted, and
+looked, and then proceeded.</p>
+
+<p>They were, undoubtedly, the first of the criminals.
+A half mile beyond, and in a plain road, were several
+of the inhabitants. Those in the trees, two men and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_177" id="p_177">p. 177</a></span>
+a boy, descended, and, together with two women,
+walked across the field, to witness the newly-arrived
+criminals, as they supposed.</p>
+
+<p>They were astounded at the appearance of the
+party. The Chief's son addressed the men, and told
+them who they were, and their mission. As this was
+the first time that such a visit had ever been made,
+the man instructed the boy to run to the village and
+inform the people, and he scurried away.</p>
+
+<p>Meantime the party moved on, and, as they proceeded,
+more and more of the inhabitants were seen.
+To the right were people in the fields, engaged in
+some sort of work there. This was singular. Nothing
+of that kind was seen in the village where Beralsee
+was chief.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the name of this town where the convicts
+live?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Hutoton," replied Calmo.</p>
+
+<p>"And what is the name of your town?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sasite."</p>
+
+<p>"Rather queer names, I should say," exclaimed
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John laughed and glanced at Harry, as he said:
+"I wonder how <i>Unity</i>, and <i>Pioneer</i>, and <i>Mayfield</i>,
+and the queer English names sound to them!"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I suppose they have some good reason for
+having such names."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; for the same reason that we apply names to
+certain things. See what a wonderful expression
+there is in the word 'Harsh,' and how expressive it
+is compared with its opposite 'soft.' How the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_178" id="p_178">p. 178</a></span>
+word grates, and the second comes out so smoothly.
+Then, compare 'swift' and 'slow'; or 'sweet' and
+'sour.' Ugh! I can almost taste the last word."</p>
+
+<p>John roared, as he saw the serious aspect of
+Harry's face. But other sights now attracted their
+attention. A group of men and women appeared.
+How strange the natives looked. They were well
+dressed, that is, judged from the people in Sasite,
+and they were people of good deportment, if those of
+the inhabitants that accompanied them were fair
+specimens.</p>
+
+<p>At the head of the villagers was a man of striking
+appearance, tall, with white hair, such as you would
+call distinguished, because he differed from most
+around him. The women were well clad, and the
+children plump and vigorous in their actions.</p>
+
+<p>Something must be wrong! These people were
+not criminals! The old man came forward, and
+gave a respectful bow. He looked at John and said
+a few words. Calmo responded, his words when
+translated being: "These are friends of my father,
+and they have come to visit you."</p>
+
+<p>At this the man gave another bow, and John went
+up and held out his hand, which the man took in a
+simple and unaffected manner.</p>
+
+<p>"We welcome you to our village," was his reply.</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other and relaxed their
+hold on the guns. Was this, after all, the wicked
+place that had been described to them? As they
+marched down to the village they were enchanted at
+the flowers which greeted them on all sides.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_179" id="p_179">p. 179</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Here and there were garden spots, carefully kept,
+and when the first huts appeared beyond the grove,
+the boys simply gasped, and could hardly believe
+their senses. Hundreds of Magnolia trees were in
+bloom; and the gentle breeze blowing in from the sea,
+moderated the rays of the sun, and wafted the odor
+of the plants many miles inland.</p>
+
+<p>The homes were not rudely built, and, although
+they were on the same general plan of those in Sasite,
+they had every appearance of comfort.</p>
+
+<p>The head man of the village led them to a more
+pretentious home, probably his own dwelling. This
+was soon confirmed, as they were invited to enter and
+repose themselves on slightly elevated couches, so
+much like Chief Beralsee's court.</p>
+
+<p>Within a short time there was a great commotion
+in the village. The boys looked around startled, and
+the old man noticed it, for he turned to Calmo, and
+said: "The villagers are preparing a feast for you.
+Let them go out and mingle with the people."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were happy at this opportunity of satisfying
+their curiosity. Sutoto accompanied them,
+and with Calmo, they placed themselves under the
+guidance of a young man named Anasa, who, Calmo
+said, was the son of the old man.</p>
+
+<p>They passed down the main street, for there was
+some semblance of order in the location of the huts.
+Around the huts were flowers, just as they had seen
+on the path leading from the mountain, and here
+and there patches of growing vegetables. After
+passing one rather attractive looking hut, Anasa<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_180" id="p_180">p. 180</a></span>
+paused for a moment, and then turned back, motioning
+for them to follow. He entered, and the boys
+saw a villager, and two women within.</p>
+
+<p>Anasa pointed to the figure of a man seated in a
+chair, and upon seeing it both boys started back in
+amazement.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a white man," cried Harry.</p>
+
+<p>Anasa nodded, his manner indicating that he felt
+sure that the boys would recognize him as belonging
+to their race. George went up to him, and held out
+his hand. In response the man gave a listless look,
+and slowly raised the left hand, which was grasped
+by George, who said: "I am glad to see you. Who
+are you? We are white, the same as you are."</p>
+
+<p>The man made no sign, and his arm dropped to
+his side as George relaxed his grasp. Harry touched
+George on the shoulder, as he said: "There is something
+the matter with him. Ask Anasa about him."</p>
+
+<p>Calmo put the question, and this was the reply:
+"We found the poor fellow on the beach many moons
+ago. We brought him here, and tried to heal him,
+but he does not speak, and one side of him has no
+life."</p>
+
+<p>The man made no show of recognition, and the
+only motion observable was a twitching jerk of the
+left arm, and a slightly swaying motion of the head.</p>
+
+<p>"John must know about this," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"By all means," was the reply.</p>
+
+<p>Calmo was told about the wonderful man John,
+and that he should be called at once, so one of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_181" id="p_181">p. 181</a></span>
+accompanying natives was instructed to bring John,
+and he speeded away on the errand.</p>
+
+<p>George stood outside of the hut when John came
+up. "This is a remarkable thing. Did they tell you
+about it?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"There is a white man here."</p>
+
+<p>"Where?" asked John in astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>"In the hut, and he is paralyzed and cannot
+speak."</p>
+
+<p>John did not wait for more, and as he went the
+head man followed him in. Then they told him the
+story, and John stood there and gazed at the man.
+To the boys who were by John's side he remarked:
+"I do not know him. I do not think I ever saw him
+before. How long has he been in this condition?"
+The old man responded: "Ever since we picked
+him up on the shore, about <i>tuta romama</i> ago."</p>
+
+<p>"And how long ago was that?"</p>
+
+<p>George informed him that Calmo received the information
+that it was over two years prior to that
+time, and as John received this information he
+passed his hand over his head, and, turning to Harry,
+said: "We shall, probably, get at the bottom of
+another mystery."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it? Why do you think so?" asked
+George in astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>"Not now; not now!" answered John, wishing to
+defer discussion until they were out of the stricken
+man's hearing.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_182" id="p_182">p. 182</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The latter, however, did not in the least appreciate
+who were before him. He was not at all perturbed
+by his visitors, nor when John quietly passed his
+hand along the poor man's arm and body to satisfy
+himself of the extent of the paralytic stroke.</p>
+
+<p>He winced but slightly when the examination of
+the left side was made, otherwise there was no sign
+of comprehension on his part.</p>
+
+<p>"This is a remarkable thing," said John, as they
+were returning to the old man's dwelling.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, is it a peculiar case?"</p>
+
+<p>"The ailment itself is not remarkable; but there
+is something which passes my comprehension."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it!" asked the boys in, unison.</p>
+
+<p>"These people are savages."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; answered the boys."</p>
+
+<p>"And they are criminals," he said as he stopped
+and looked at the boys, with an earnestness that surprised
+them.</p>
+
+<p>It did not take more words to make them understand
+what John meant. These people had taken
+this shipwrecked man, and tenderly cared for him
+during a period of more than two years. This was
+done without hope of reward. John learned later
+on that the natives of the town had made provision
+for the shipwrecked man and had compensated the
+people at whose home he was then living.</p>
+
+<p>After the evening meal, John walked around the
+village, observing the people, and he found happiness
+everywhere. Everything seemed to be arranged
+according to a system. The old man was not a chief,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_183" id="p_183">p. 183</a></span>
+but was looked upon as their advisor and guide; but
+he was a criminal, as were all the others in that town.</p>
+
+<p>That evening when all were present John had the
+first opportunity to talk with the venerable chief of
+the town.</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been here?" he was asked.</p>
+
+<p>He was silent for a moment and then answered:
+"Thirty years."</p>
+
+<p>It must be understood that the questions and
+answers had to be translated and as the natives knew
+nothing about the division of time in months or years
+it was necessary to convert the time which was given
+by nature into terms of years and months.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, they understood what a day meant, and they
+could calculate time, as all savages do, by the phases
+of the moon, and in many cases they were able to
+indicate time by the position of the sun, in which
+they recognized three phases only, namely, when the
+sun was directly above them, and when it reached the
+extreme northern and southern points.</p>
+
+<p>"Why were you sent here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because I committed a crime."</p>
+
+<p>John was almost startled at the frankness of the
+confession, which the old man made without the least
+perceptible show of feeling or shame.</p>
+
+<p>"Would you like to go back again?"</p>
+
+<p>"Go back where?"</p>
+
+<p>"To your home."</p>
+
+<p>He looked bewildered for a moment, and then
+answered: "This is my home."</p>
+
+<p>"But I mean your old home at Sasite."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_184" id="p_184">p. 184</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The old man shook his head vigorously, and answered:
+"No! no! There is no place like Hutoton."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what 'Hutoton' means?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; it means 'the place of death.'"</p>
+
+<p>The boys were startled at the reply. John turned
+to them, when he saw their expression, and smiled.
+The old man, too, smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"Do any of your people want to go back?"</p>
+
+<p>He looked surprised at the question. "Do they
+want to go back?" he repeated the query. "No;
+but you should ask them. I do not know of any one
+who wishes to return. We love our Chief too much
+to wish for such a thing."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what the people in Sasite think of
+this place?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; not altogether; I am curious to know."</p>
+
+<p>"They believe it is a terrible place, and that the
+people who are sent here never have another day
+of peace or happiness."</p>
+
+<p>"And have they not changed their opinions? I
+used to think so too, and we believed it of those who
+went before us; but we thought they might have
+changed their opinions, because we felt that people
+were growing better and not worse. It is a long time
+since they sent us real criminals, and we thought
+the Chief's people were growing wiser and happier."</p>
+
+<p>"When did the last criminals come here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Nearly one year ago."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_185" id="p_185">p. 185</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2>
+
+<h3>SAVAGE MARRIAGE CUSTOMS</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was impossible to describe the effect of these
+revelations on the boys. It was so different from
+anything they had been led to expect. It brought
+one thing forcibly to their minds; that because these
+people had committed some crime, or some wrong
+against society, they were still human beings, and
+were worthy of being treated as men and women.</p>
+
+<p>John related to them that various governments
+had tried the plan of sending convicts to some foreign
+lands, and placing them in situations where they
+might work out their own salvation; that all such efforts
+were successful, where real opportunities were
+bestowed.</p>
+
+<p>"The idea is," remarked John, "that they are
+banished from the society in which they resided, or
+in which they were raised, for the purpose of helping
+them. The reason for inflicting punishment on
+criminals has been to protect society but apparently
+no efforts have been made to cure the criminals or
+to help them to better themselves."</p>
+
+<p>"I heard the Professor say, at one of the trials at
+Wonder Island, that some scientists consider crime a
+disease," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly; now suppose we treated people suffering
+from smallpox, or scarlet fever, or some other<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_186" id="p_186">p. 186</a></span>
+like disease, just like we treat criminals, it would
+be regarded as brutal. To lock them up, and deprive
+them of the pleasures of living, simply to protect
+society, is wrong."</p>
+
+<p>"But the smallpox and scarlet fever patients are
+taken away so they will not give the complaints to
+others," observed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"And that is right. I favor that and advocate
+that same thing with criminals. But the patients are
+not deprived of the things they have been accustomed
+to, and they are restored, when cured. It is not so
+with the poor unfortunate who errs. When he does
+come back he is hounded and looked upon as a
+tainted individual, although he may, in heart, be better
+than his accusers."</p>
+
+<p>During that day and the next, the natives and those
+who accompanied John associated with each other,
+and had many conversations. What interested them
+was the presence of the unfortunate paralytic who
+was unable to speak for himself.</p>
+
+<p>The boys did not believe that he was one of the
+crew of the school ship <i>Investigator</i>. What connection,
+if any, did he have with the skeleton they found
+the day before? was another of their queries.</p>
+
+<p>On the second day they were taken to the beach
+where the white man was found. There, as explained,
+he was found, with wreckage all about, during
+one of the raging monsoons with which the boys
+were so well acquainted, but aside from that there
+was not a vestige to show his name or where he
+was from.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_187" id="p_187">p. 187</a></span></p>
+
+<p>All the clothing worn by him originally, and of
+that there was scarcely any when found, had been
+worn threadbare, and he was now dressed in native
+garments. The chair in which he was reclining was
+undoubtedly from some wrecked ship, and had been
+in the possession of the villagers for years.</p>
+
+<p>John spoke to the old man concerning the patient,
+and advised him that they would soon call to take him
+away. They would thus relieve them of the burden,
+and endeavor to restore him to health, if it were possible
+to do so.</p>
+
+<p>The old man was thankful for the kind words uttered
+by John, and the latter assured him that before
+many moons passed he would return and show his
+appreciation for their kindness to a fellow creature.</p>
+
+<p>"But we do not feel that we have done anything
+which especially merits praise. He is one like ourselves,
+who was in distress, and we helped him."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; you have done that which is right. We intend
+to reward you not that you should be paid for
+doing what is right, but to show that we appreciate
+your noble actions," answered John.</p>
+
+<p>The party, after many wishes and hearty good-byes,
+filed out of the village, some of them loath to
+go.</p>
+
+<p>Calmo was silent. He was not the same as before
+they marched through the village. John noticed
+it, but he wisely refrained from commenting
+on the sights they had witnessed. There was cleanliness
+and order in Hutoton; and filth and disorder
+in Sasite. It was impossible to be unconscious of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_188" id="p_188">p. 188</a></span>
+the difference between the industry in one place, and
+the utter shiftlessness in the other.</p>
+
+<p>As it required two days to make the return journey,
+they were absent from Sasite nearly seven days,
+and, according to the calculations, the <i>Pioneer</i> would
+be in from Unity within the next two days.</p>
+
+<p>During the intervening time the boys roamed at
+will through the island, and on the second day went
+directly south, so as to scour the sea front below
+the village.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon, as they were about to return,
+they saw a sail, George being the first to catch a
+glimpse of it. "The <i>Pioneer</i>," he cried, upon which
+they danced about in sheer joy and started for the
+village, which was distant several miles.</p>
+
+<p>They were almost out of breath when they rushed
+through the village, and cried out the news. Everybody
+was expectant; all were eager to see the vessel
+come in and Sutoto was the first to reach the landing.</p>
+
+<p>During the visit of the boys on the island, John
+had a crude dock constructed, and as the <i>Pioneer</i>
+was of light draft, this was not a difficult thing to
+do, so that the passengers could land from the ship
+directly on the solid platform.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief was among the merry villagers. "Who
+is that man with the white hair!" he asked of Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>The latter was just as much surprised as his questioner,
+when he recognized the Professor, and he informed
+the Chief of the treat he would experience in
+meeting him. "He is the Great Wise man," added
+Uraso, "whom everybody loves."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_189" id="p_189">p. 189</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Muro, too, was astounded as the Professor came
+down. But a still greater surprise awaited the two
+chiefs. Muro's wife hailed him, and then Uraso's
+wife waved her handkerchief. This was too much
+for them, and waving aside all dignity they rushed
+forward to greet them.</p>
+
+<p>The whole thing had been so admirably arranged,
+that no one knew of the affair which had been
+planned by John. Sutoto joined in the merriment,
+but he was too anxious to see Stut to pay much attention
+to the greetings.</p>
+
+<p>The visitors discreetly refrained from saying a
+word to Sutoto, concerning the coming event. Besides
+the Chief's wives, there were several other
+women, of the Tribes in Wonder Island, together
+with some white men and their wives, who had been
+invited at the request of Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>The latter greeted John with that hearty expression
+so characteristic of the true commercial man,
+and he was not with John a minute before he was
+plying all sorts of questions about the resources of
+the island, the kind and number of inhabitants the
+nature of the soil, and the possibilities of mineral
+development.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor came down and was introduced to
+the Chief by Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>The great burly chief was fascinated. He gazed
+on the Professor and almost gasped, then turning
+to Uraso he said: "Ah! I know why he is a wise
+man."</p>
+
+<p>To Uraso this remark was indeed a puzzle; to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_190" id="p_190">p. 190</a></span>
+think that the Chief had discovered the secret of the
+wisdom in the Professor! He was quick to ask why
+he knew it.</p>
+
+<p>"Because he has double eyes."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso laughed, and turned to the Professor, to
+whom he related the incident. Instantly the Professor
+removed the glasses, and courteously handed
+them to the Chief, and Uraso adjusted them to the
+Chief's eyes.</p>
+
+<p>He glanced around, through the lens, and forced
+out one expression of delight after the other. He
+was oblivious of everything else. He forgot that
+there were dozens of the visitors ready in line to be
+introduced to him; but all enjoyed the great pleasure
+he experienced in the new sight.</p>
+
+<p>But suddenly he stopped in his enthusiasm, and
+with an apology took off the glasses and held them
+up, in the act of handing them back. The Professor
+returned them, and took another pair from his pocket
+which he put on.</p>
+
+<p>It was not likely that the Chief could have received
+a more acceptable present, as his eyesight was failing,
+and the glasses seemed like the opening of a new
+world to him. Later on the Professor provided a
+pair of glasses better adapted to his sight.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief then became concerned about the comfort
+of his guests, so Uraso said: "Do not feel
+worried about the visitors. They will sleep on the
+vessel where they have comfortable rooms."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief could hardly believe the statements, as
+he muttered: "This is, indeed, wonderful."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_191" id="p_191">p. 191</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It would require pages to record the incidents that
+came to his attention about the wonders of these
+new people. The surprising thing was, that Uraso,
+and the natives of Wonder Island were dressed like
+the white people and acted like them, and yet he was
+told that all that wonderful change had come about
+in a little over two years' time.</p>
+
+<p>Muro's wife was quickly made acquainted with the
+Chief's wife, and the day following she had a consultation
+with her. Mida, who was Muro's wife,
+said: "I do not know whether or not you know of
+Sutoto's affection for Cinda, but we learned about
+it, and have come over to attend the ceremony."</p>
+
+<p>Linnea, the Chief's wife, smiled as Mida spoke to
+her. "Yes, I know of it, but the Chief has not yet
+been told."</p>
+
+<p>It seems that they had very curious and at the
+same time different customs among the various
+tribes, and Mida's object was to learn what their etiquette
+called for as to betrothals. Among some of
+the Wonder Island tribes, the Chief was the only one
+who has the right to consent to the marriage of the
+females, although the males could go to other tribes
+and secure wives without the consent of the Chief.</p>
+
+<p>In other tribes the women, the mothers, are the
+sole judges, and it is not infrequent for the parents
+of the bride to demand a payment, dependent on
+the rank or the riches of the father.</p>
+
+<p>Then the question of ceremonies is always an important
+one. It would be sacrilegious to perform
+the rite except in exact accordance with the pre<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_192" id="p_192">p. 192</a></span>scribed
+rules. Sometimes those rules are so extremely
+different to those of another tribe that intermarriage
+between members of such tribes is impossible.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, a Tuolo could never marry a Saboro, nor
+could an Illya warrior take an Osaga for a bride.
+On all these points the women were adepts. It is
+more than likely, however, that Cinda and Sutoto
+had all that matter fully understood between them.</p>
+
+<p>"Did Stut tell you about Sutoto?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>Harry laughed. "No; but I have a good one to
+tell you. What did he say?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you know he hired Stut to get him a wedding
+outfit, and a present?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"When the people left the vessel Sutoto sneaked
+back, and hunted up Stut. Of course Stut had the
+package all done up, and he is now taking it over to
+his hut."</p>
+
+<p>"I have something better than that. Sutoto is
+going to be married to-night."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know?"</p>
+
+<p>"Cinda told one of her girl friends, and it frightened
+her so that she told Uraso."</p>
+
+<p>"Why that would spoil all the plans."</p>
+
+<p>"So it would, but Uraso told his sister."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sure of that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Of course I am; I was there."</p>
+
+<p>"What did she say?"</p>
+
+<p>"She simply said 'I will take care of that.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Of course she will; she's a brick."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_193" id="p_193">p. 193</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2>
+
+<h3>SUTOTO AND CINDA'S MARRIAGE; AND THE SURPRISE</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Mida</span> had learned the situation. Their customs as
+to marriages closely resembled that of the Saboros.
+In that tribe the Chief was the sole authority. To
+marry without his consent meant exile for the disobedient
+warrior, and for the bride as well.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto was a member of the Berees, and there
+the mother was the matchmaker. She prescribed all
+the requirements. The first thing that Mida did was
+to insist that the Chief should be informed of the
+desires of the young people.</p>
+
+<p>To the delight of the two women he consented to
+the match, and he was then told that the people had
+come over from Wonder Island to take part in the
+ceremony. But when he was told that they intended
+to marry that night, by stealth, his brow was clouded.</p>
+
+<p>His law was that no one should marry without his
+consent, and he could not believe that Cinda could
+thus attempt to take the matter into her own hand.
+It was hard to think that his own child should be the
+first to break his law.</p>
+
+<p>The women pleaded with him, and then Mida
+confided her plan to him. The tribe's marriage ceremony
+was a very curious one. First, there must be
+a gift of fruit, then of fowl, and next of game. This<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_194" id="p_194">p. 194</a></span>
+must be brought to the door of the bride by the groom
+blindfolded.</p>
+
+<p>He must remain blindfolded while she prepares
+them for the table. Not a word must be spoken, or
+they must separate forever. A part of the ceremony
+requires that the invited guests are to resort to every
+sort of device to make them speak. The slightest
+sound by either is a sign that they will quarrel,
+and means the end of the affair.</p>
+
+<p>If they pass this test, the second comes when the
+bridegroom's eyes are uncovered. They are then to
+converse with each other, and they must not for a
+moment relax the talk. Neither has any knowledge
+of the time that this test must continue. There must
+be no faltering, or hesitancy.</p>
+
+<p>Mida conferred with John and the boys, as she
+told of these necessary requirements, and the boys
+laughed as they listened.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the object of all that?" inquired George.</p>
+
+<p>John was chuckling at the idea, but it stirred up a
+reminiscence. "That is a custom, in some of its
+features, that I learned about some tribes in central
+Africa. I can see the object of that rite. The taking
+of the gifts blindfolded signifies that he enters
+the marriage state blindly, and that he must do so
+in silence, and without asking any questions."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, then, there is not any likelihood of
+them quarreling," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That is what the Chief's wife said," replied
+Mida.</p>
+
+<p>"But what does all the talking mean?"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px; margin-top: 1.5em;  margin-bottom: 1.5em;">
+<a id="illus-195" name="illus-195" />
+<a href="images/illus-p195-large.jpg">
+<img src="images/illus-p195.png" width="395" height="598"
+alt="The rites were progressing very satisfactorily"
+title="The rites were progressing very satisfactorily" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">&quot;The rites were progressing very satisfactorily&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_196">See p. 196</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_195" id="p_195">p. 195</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That is perfectly obvious. To show they can
+perfectly agree, even though they do talk."</p>
+
+<p>"But that is all before the real ceremony itself,"
+said George. "How do they get married? That is
+the main thing."</p>
+
+<p>"Why," said Mida, "that is part of the marrying."</p>
+
+<p>"But they haven't promised anything. Marrying
+is promising."</p>
+
+<p>This occasioned another roar of merriment.
+"Yes; marriage is a contract under our law, but not
+so with these people. The only question with them
+is whether they are suited to each other."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose they should not want to marry each
+other, or one of them should object," interposed
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah! don't you see there is where the prospective
+bride or groom, in that case has a chance. If,
+in the first test he should speak, or in the last trial
+she should fail to keep up the conversation, then it
+would be all off."</p>
+
+<p>Mida confided her plans to the Chief and his wife.
+They were assured that Cinda would not think of
+overriding the well-known laws as to the gifts, and
+the two tests, and so it was arranged that Sutoto
+should be permitted to bring his offerings, which
+he would no doubt do, by stealth, while the Chief
+and all the visitors were to partake of the banquet
+on board of the vessel that evening.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto and Cinda knew of the arrangements for
+the banquet, and that appeared to be a suitable oc<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_196" id="p_196">p. 196</a></span>casion
+for them. When Sutoto appeared with the
+gifts he and Cinda were to be arrested by the Chief's
+warriors and brought aboard the vessel, charged
+with violating the law of the Chief in not first obtaining
+his permission.</p>
+
+<p>The boys remained ashore, and carefully watched
+the proceedings. How Sutoto got the presents the
+boys did not know, but they had a suspicion that
+Cinda had a hand in it. The boys laughed as they
+saw what a ridiculously short distance he had to go
+in a blindfolded state.</p>
+
+<p>Securely hidden in what was George's chamber,
+where he passed the first night of his captivity, they
+saw Sutoto with the offerings. Cinda took them, in
+silence, and disappeared, only to return instantly
+with the smoking viands.</p>
+
+<p>"I call that quick work," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, that's swift cooking," suggested George.</p>
+
+<p>They ate in silence. "I wonder where the bridesmaid
+is who intends to make them talk?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why don't you see her standing behind Cinda?"</p>
+
+<p>"You mean the servant?"</p>
+
+<p>"Of course."</p>
+
+<p>This was almost too amusing for the boys. The
+rites were progressing very satisfactorily. Then
+Cinda removed the bandage, and an ineffable smile
+stole over Sutoto's features.</p>
+
+<p>They commenced to talk. The maid said a few
+words, but the lovers paid no attention. The ceremony
+was going along just as-a perfect one should,
+when four stalwart warriors rushed in and seized<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_197" id="p_197">p. 197</a></span>
+Sutoto. Cinda knew who they were, and she sprang
+at them, as two seized her also.</p>
+
+<p>One of them addressed a word to Sutoto, and then
+spoke to Cinda, and without further ceremony they
+were taken out through the open portal, and hurried
+to the ship.</p>
+
+<p>The boys followed at a respectful distance, and
+when the pair had reached the deck the boys scrambled
+up, and hurriedly made their way to the large
+room, or cabin, where the Chief and the visitors were
+assembled, and which was brilliantly lighted for the
+occasion.</p>
+
+<p>The criminals were brought before the Chief, who
+arose, and with a severe countenance began to upbraid
+Sutoto for his crime. Cinda meanwhile
+glanced around at the brilliant sight. She saw nothing
+to excite fear. Both were free from the warriors
+and stood there side by side, a handsome couple, as
+every one admitted.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto saw the boys. Just like boys are apt to be
+on such an occasion, they could not repress their
+laughter, although it was a silent exhibition of mirth.
+Then Sutoto knew, and so did Cinda, for she was
+not too much abashed to look up at Sutoto, while
+she leaned over and rested her head against him,
+and laid her hand on his arm.</p>
+
+<p>Then the boys stopped laughing. There was nothing
+laughable about it now. It seemed too beautiful
+to laugh at, and when the great Chief went over, and
+rubbed his nose against Sutoto's every one knew
+that the compact was sealed.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_198" id="p_198">p. 198</a></span></p>
+
+<p>I wish it were possible to describe the delight
+shown in the eyes of the bride and groom when they
+were led to the table containing the wedding gifts
+that came to them from Wonder Island.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh! I am so sorry!" said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Sorry for what? Yes, yes, I know now. We
+have nothing to give Sutoto, as our presents." And
+George said it with genuine grief.</p>
+
+<p>Most of the articles exhibited were for the use of
+the bride, and designed for the home, of the new
+couple; but there was a fine array of the little trinkets
+which so delight the feminine heart.</p>
+
+<p>The party sat down to the feast, with Sutoto and
+Cinda at one end of the table, while Mida presided
+at the other, the Chief being at her right, and his
+wife at her left.</p>
+
+<p>For the first time in their lives they were to eat
+their food with knives and forks. They were adepts
+with the sharpened stick, which George had noted,
+and there was amusement at the many incidents that
+the new order brought forth.</p>
+
+<p>"I remember," said George, "that the Professor
+told us the Italians, about the year 1700, were the
+first to use forks."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied John. "As late as the year 1800
+the English did not use the fork, but the knife, for
+conveying food to the mouth; but the new-fangled
+idea, when once introduced, became universal, soon
+after that time; and it was then the custom for travelers
+to carry their own knives and forks when traveling."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_199" id="p_199">p. 199</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Professor said, addressing the Chief: "I am
+surprised that you use a fork at the table. While
+we do so universally, it was not originally our custom."</p>
+
+<p>"I can remember," replied the Chief, "when it
+was not the habit to use any implement, but all were
+required to take food from the same dish with the
+hands. But at that time food was not served hot,
+but allowed to cool. But we found that the eating
+of hot articles became a custom, and then we had
+to use the pointed forks."</p>
+
+<p>"I am curious to know what gives the roast such
+a beautiful flavor!" asked the Chief's wife. "I am
+told that you do not use leaves for flavoring."</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mida. "We now use spices, and the
+flavor is made more distinct by adding salt."</p>
+
+<p>"What kinds of spices are used?"</p>
+
+<p>"For meats, principally pepper, of which I have
+no doubt you have plenty on your island."</p>
+
+<p>Of course, there was coffee, which grew in abundance
+in Wonder Island, and numerous trees of
+which had been discovered by the boys of the Chief's
+island. When this was brought out, and the natives
+first tasted it, there was some doubt on their part as
+to its food value.</p>
+
+<p>Added interest was given to it when the Chief was
+induced to try it with a bountiful supply of cream
+and sugar. Then these articles attracted their attention.</p>
+
+<p>"Is this a fruit?" he asked as a lump of sugar was
+handed him.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_200" id="p_200">p. 200</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No, it is made from cane, or from some vegetables."</p>
+
+<p>"Made from vegetables? How can it be made
+from them? There is part of the flavor of fruit, but
+I cannot taste any vegetables in it."</p>
+
+<p>Then the Professor explained that all fruit, as well
+as vegetables, had the same taste, and that they took
+out only that part and left the other.</p>
+
+<p>"But what is this white liquid which you use in
+the new drink?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is called 'cream,' and the cream is made from
+milk?"</p>
+
+<p>"And what is milk made of?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is taken from cows, a large animal, that people
+raise for that purpose."</p>
+
+<p>As there was nothing on the island that was as
+large as a cow, or that resembled it in any manner,
+the Chief's curiosity was unbounded.</p>
+
+<p>"I would like to see the animal from which this
+was obtained."</p>
+
+<p>"But we have no animal with us."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it never spoils?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes, it will quickly grow sour and unpleasant
+if allowed to remain in a warm place."</p>
+
+<p>He looked around in bewilderment, and the Professor
+seeing his embarrassment, continued: "In
+the ship we have a way to prevent the cream and
+the milk, as well, from spoiling. We will show you
+that."</p>
+
+<p>Thus one article after the other called for some
+comment, and explanation. To the natives from<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_201" id="p_201">p. 201</a></span>
+Wonder Island this meal was an object lesson of only
+a few of the many things which they had learned
+from the white people.</p>
+
+<p>But Sutoto and his bride could not be forgotten.
+When the meal was finished, the Professor arose, and
+said: "I have some news to impart to you. When
+the white people first came to Wonder Island, they
+found Uraso, and Muro, and they were the first to
+come to our aid against powerful tribes."</p>
+
+<p>"One of their neighbors had at its head a wise
+Chief, Suros, known and respected by friend and
+foe alike, and he readily adopted the ideas of the
+white men, and offered his tribe to save us from
+destruction at the hands of those who were unfriendly."</p>
+
+<p>"Sutoto was the nephew of the wise Chief Suros,
+and I have come to tell you that he is dead, and that
+we have been mourning for him."</p>
+
+<p>Every one who glanced at Sutoto, saw that it
+greatly affected him. This address was translated
+to the Chief, by Uraso, as the Professor proceeded,
+the latter speaking it in such measured sentences,
+that it could be quickly grasped by the interpreter.</p>
+
+<p>"We have all been sad, since his death, and we
+shall erect a suitable monument to his memory on
+our return."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief looked at the Professor, and the latter
+instantly divined that he wanted some enlightenment.</p>
+
+<p>"What does the white Chief mean by that?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is the custom of the white man to put up some<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_202" id="p_202">p. 202</a></span>thing
+that all the people may look at, for years and
+years afterwards, so as to remind them that he has
+lived, and to tell the people what good he has done."</p>
+
+<p>"And why should the people do that?"</p>
+
+<p>"So as to teach people the example, and try to
+make them be good as he was."</p>
+
+<p>"Do your people need to have such examples to
+make them do good?"</p>
+
+<p>"That may not be necessary," replied the Professor,
+as he vainly tried to hide the smile that was
+trying to manifest itself.</p>
+
+<p>"But do you not find it necessary to set the people
+a good example?" asked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment he looked around at the company
+in bewilderment, and he slowly replied: "No, I do
+not think it would do any good. If the people are
+bad, and they want to be bad, it will do them no good
+to tell them that I have always tried to do right."</p>
+
+<p>There was a respectful silence, at this avowal, and
+the Professor continued: "There are many who
+think as you do, and we had one great teacher, called
+Confucius, who said: 'Do good not for the hope of
+reward, but because it is right.' Then we have also
+a precept which, interpreted, means: that happiness
+is in the heart."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know what that means," he replied.</p>
+
+<p>"It means that the desire and the wish must come
+from within, and not from without." And the savage
+nodded an assent.</p>
+
+<p>"But," continued the Professor, "I have some
+news to impart, that makes us all happy again. It is<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_203" id="p_203">p. 203</a></span>
+something that pertains to Sutoto, and I know you
+will all join in wishing him all happiness in the good
+fortune which Wonder Island brings to him, while
+this island is vying with us to make him happy."</p>
+
+<p>What was this happy thing that the Professor portended?
+There was intense eagerness in the eyes
+of all who had left Wonder Island when the <i>Pioneer</i>
+sailed away, three weeks before.</p>
+
+<p>"I want to present to you Sutoto, the new Chief
+of the Berees." The Professor could get no further.
+George and Harry were wild with excitement,
+and they bounded over to him and actually hugged
+him. Poor Cinda did not for the moment know what
+all this excitement meant.</p>
+
+<p>She supposed that this was the white man's part
+of the ceremony, and quietly submitted. But she
+was quickly informed, and as she glanced at her
+father and mother, and the people came by and affectionately
+greeted them, she was so happy that
+tears actually flowed.</p>
+
+<p>Then John came forward with a large box, which
+he carefully opened, and drew forth two packages,
+one of which he unwrapped, while Mida took the
+strings from the other.</p>
+
+<p>"We want to present you these tokens, the presents
+of George and Harry. You are to wear these
+as an emblem of your authority." And George and
+Mida placed the most beautiful crown shaped hats on
+the heads of the couple.</p>
+
+<p>"Is this part of the ceremony too?" asked Cinda,
+as she slyly glanced at Sutoto.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_204" id="p_204">p. 204</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It is impossible to say who were the most surprised
+people, the boys or Sutoto, since these presents
+had been prepared without their knowledge,
+and it atoned in a way for their neglect in not thinking
+of the gifts before.</p>
+
+<p>But there were also other agreeable surprises in
+store for them. The wives of Uraso and Muro led
+Cinda to the table on which the presents were exposed,
+and also exhibited the many beautiful garments
+which had been prepared for her.</p>
+
+<p>Her bewilderment was still greater when she was
+directed to turn, and found herself standing in front
+of a tall oval mirror which the boys had brought up,
+under the Professor's directions.</p>
+
+<p>Her image in the mirror startled the bride beyond
+measure, and she innocently asked Sutoto whether
+this was also a part of the wedding ceremony.</p>
+
+<p>According to the custom of the tribe, the couple
+had to go through the ordeal of the tribal dance,
+and when the boys learned of this they regretted
+that provision had not been made for the event.
+They were now in for everything which belonged to
+this unique wedding. The entire party broke up,
+and the boys regretted that the affair came to an end
+so soon.</p>
+
+<p>As they filed down the steps and marched along
+the dock to the shore they noticed that the entire
+village was shining brightly with hundreds of the
+native candles, and everywhere were the well-known
+lamps, which the boys knew came from Wonder Island.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_205" id="p_205">p. 205</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What does all that mean?" asked Harry, as John
+came up.</p>
+
+<p>"That means the dance, that is the final requirement
+of the wedding ceremony."</p>
+
+<p>"But where are the dancers? Are we to take
+part?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no; no one who has partaken of the feast
+is permitted to take part."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is certainly queer."</p>
+
+<p>"Not more so than among many white people,
+where the dancers are those who have been specially
+selected for the purpose, and are professionals. In
+Biblical times the Jews had dancing as part of the
+religious ceremony, and that which took place in
+the Temple was participated in only by special ones
+set apart for that purpose."</p>
+
+<p>No one was in sight, however, and the Chief led
+the entire company to a large green space, not far
+from his dwelling, and after a circle had been
+formed, they heard a peculiar humming sound, which
+seemed to be all about them, and this increased in
+intensity, and when at its height, two dozen or more
+of the native girls rushed in with a gliding, swaying
+motion, and circled around with peculiar grace,
+continuously giving forth the weird sounds that have
+been described.</p>
+
+<p>It was intensely dramatic, and fascinated the boys.
+They had never seen anything so remarkable in its
+character, and for once they were unable to question
+its meaning, or ask for information concerning
+it.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_206" id="p_206">p. 206</a></span></p>
+
+<p>For an hour this continued, until the boys thought
+the performers would certainly drop dead with fatigue;
+then, one after the other disappeared, and
+with each disappearance the sound of the humming
+grew less until but one remained. In some way,
+unknown to the boys she made the last circle around
+the green, bearing a wreath of leaves, and as she
+approached Sutoto and Cinda, wheeled about, and
+threw it over them.</p>
+
+<p>"That is the final act," said John. "See, they are
+both within the wreath, and it signifies that they are
+bound together forever, even as the wreath, which
+has no end."</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_207" id="p_207">p. 207</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2>
+
+<h3>HUTOTON; THE PLACE OF DEATH</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">But</span> the boys knew that they had some important
+things to attend to. The pleasures of life have an
+important part, but they were now engaged in serious
+work. The fact that they had accomplished so much
+was a great incentive to go on and investigate other
+things which were still mysteries, and which might
+be of great value to them.</p>
+
+<p>The coming of the Professor had been a great
+pleasure to them. The developments of the past two
+weeks were ever in their minds and they could not
+repress the curiosity to visit the other islands, if
+such could be found.</p>
+
+<p>Now that Sutoto was married they knew he would
+not be with them for a time, and they had not talked
+over the future plans. When, the next day, they
+and the Professor and John were together to consider
+the next step, it was with joy that the Professor
+informed them of the purpose of John to continue
+the investigations throughout that part of the
+ocean.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems that your interpretation of Walter's
+note was entirely wrong," said John. "In any event
+it is certain that we are more than thirty leagues
+from Wonder Island, and not in the direction he
+pointed out."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_208" id="p_208">p. 208</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Then it is likely that if there is an island which
+will fit the place, it must be to the north," said
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That would be a natural conclusion," he answered.
+"It has occurred to me that the natural
+place for an island would be to the north."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at him with surprise. "What
+makes you think so?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"I judged so, merely from the conformation of this
+island."</p>
+
+<p>"What is there in the island that makes you think
+so?"</p>
+
+<p>"You have noticed that the island is very narrow
+east and west, and very much longer north and
+south."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but that still does not make it plain to
+me."</p>
+
+<p>"The island may be like the ridge of a mountain
+cropping out of the ocean. For instance, the Andes
+and the Sierras in the United States run north and
+south. Now suppose the ocean should cover the
+land, those mountains would form islands which
+would naturally be north and south of each other,
+and the islands themselves would be longer north
+and south than east and west."</p>
+
+<p>"I see the idea. But we might find them to the
+south of this island, as well."</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly; but as the northern section brings us
+nearer the supposed thirty leagues, we should, I
+think, make the investigation there first."</p>
+
+<p>It was necessary that Sutoto should go back to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_209" id="p_209">p. 209</a></span>
+Wonder Island. His position as Chief of the Berees
+made this essential. Furthermore, the age of the
+Professor made traveling and the hardships of investigating
+on foot a hard task, and besides it was
+necessary to take back the visitors.</p>
+
+<p>"I have suggested to the Chief that we shall return,
+and have invited him to accompany us, and I
+am gratified to say that he has accepted. We shall,
+therefore, be ready to return within a few days,"
+said the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you said anything to him about the contemplated
+visit to Hutoton?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"No; but I shall do so at once."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh! that will give us an opportunity to take the
+paralytic back with us," suggested Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; that will be the reason for our stopping
+there."</p>
+
+<p>"Wouldn't it be a good idea to sail to the north,
+and investigate in that direction, on our way home?"
+remarked George.</p>
+
+<p>"That has occurred to me."</p>
+
+<p>The Chief gave careful instructions to his son,
+Calmo, in view of his proposed trip, and informed
+the Professor that he was anxious to accompany
+them at the earliest opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>Two days thereafter, the entire party boarded the
+ship, and the course was set for the northern part
+of the island. There the Chief had the first opportunity
+to see the dreadful place where the criminals
+of his community had been sent.</p>
+
+<p>There was no resentment on the part of the con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_210" id="p_210">p. 210</a></span>victs.
+On the other hand, there was the most effusive
+welcome extended, and when the Chief saw the
+happiness and prosperity there, which he could not
+help but contrast with his own people, he was
+amazed.</p>
+
+<p>The unfortunate patient was carefully taken to
+the ship, and during his removal did not in the least
+indicate by any sign that he knew what was going
+on about him.</p>
+
+<p>John took many stores from the ship, and particularly
+garments, and articles of food for the people.
+All participated in the division, and the old
+man was delighted when he saw the gifts, the more
+so when John told him that they would soon be
+visited and other stores provided.</p>
+
+<p>When the rolling motion of the boat was felt by
+the stricken man, he showed the first symptoms of
+consciousness. Sometimes he would look about him,
+and try to grasp something. On several occasions
+the Professor saw him open his eyes with a sort of
+questioning look.</p>
+
+<p>But we cannot dwell too long on the result of the
+patient's progress, at this time. John felt, as did
+the Professor, that from that man they would be
+able to learn something, if he could ever regain his
+faculties. The boys gathered that much from the
+conversation, so that, for the present, he must be left
+to the tender care of the Professor, until later events
+are recorded.</p>
+
+<p>From Hutoton the ship sailed directly north, it
+being understood that if no land was sighted before<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_211" id="p_211">p. 211</a></span>
+evening it would be useless to go farther in that direction.
+The <i>Pioneer</i> was a good sailer, and could
+easily, with a fair wind, make ten miles an hour,
+so they would have fully seven hours' run to test out
+their theory of land in that direction.</p>
+
+<p>Before five o'clock John, who was constantly on
+the watch, came to the Professor and remarked that
+he believed the haze to the north indicated the presence
+of land. This was soon communicated to the
+boys, and there was no more idleness from that time
+on.</p>
+
+<p>John's theory was correct. Slowly certain fixed
+objects appeared and some outlines that looked like
+mountains, and the boys could not repress their
+anxiety at the anticipated shore.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we were right, after all," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John smiled, as he replied: "I do not know; the
+calculations have not yet been made."</p>
+
+<p>"I would like to know how our position can be
+found out from an examination of the sun," remarked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"That will require a long answer to explain fully
+but I shall try to answer it in a simple manner. The
+sailor takes an observation of the sun in two directions,
+namely, north and south, and east and west.
+You know, of course, that the sun moves north in
+the summer and south in the winter, and that the
+extreme southern point is in midwinter, Dec. 20:
+that in the spring, or March 20, it is directly above
+the equator, and in midsummer, or, on June 20, it
+is as far north as it can go."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_212" id="p_212">p. 212</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You mean," said George, "that it would be north
+of the equator."</p>
+
+<p>"As we have the same calendar over the entire
+world, it is true everywhere. The difference is, of
+course, that summer and winter, and spring and
+autumn are reversed, north and south of the equator.
+All estimates as to locations are made by measuring
+angles."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 381px;">
+<a id="illus-fig15" name="illus-fig15" />
+<a href="#p_212">
+<img src="images/illus-fig15-p212.png" width="381" height="276"
+alt="Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun."
+title="Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 15. <span class="u">Getting</span> <span class="u">Angle</span>
+<span class="u">from</span> <span class="u">Position</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Sun</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Then it must be something like surveying?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; the same principles are applied. Here is a
+sketch, which shows the earth A, and B is the equatorial
+line. C is the position of the sun on September
+20, or on June 20."</p>
+
+<p>"Why are they in the same position on both
+days?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; the sun crosses the equator September 20,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_213" id="p_213">p. 213</a></span>
+on its way south, and then it again recrosses the
+equator coming north six months afterwards. On
+either of those days, if a person should stand at
+D, and look at the sun, there would be a line E,
+which projects out from the earth to the sun, and
+that is called the equatorial line."</p>
+
+<p>"It is exactly at right angles to F, which passes
+through the poles. Now the drawing shows two
+other positions, namely G and H. These represent
+the extreme points of the travel of the sun north
+and south, or the positions that the sun occupy on
+Dec. 20, and June 20 of each year."</p>
+
+<p>"I see," said Harry. "The points G and H are
+just 23 degrees north and south of the equator."</p>
+
+<p>"That is correct, and there is another thing which
+can be learned from their positions."</p>
+
+<p>"I know what it is."</p>
+
+<p>"What?"</p>
+
+<p>"It gives another line, or angle."</p>
+
+<p>"So now we have two angles, this, and the equatorial
+line. Then, we know the exact distance of the
+sun from the earth, and this gives the first measurement,
+and with the angle formed by the line I, taken
+in connection with the line E, it is easy to determine
+just where, or how far the sun is to the north or to
+the south, and if you did not, for instance, know
+the time of the year, a man could by such a measurement,
+tell, by the angle thus formed, the exact date."</p>
+
+<p>"I understand that now," remarked George.
+"The sailor, in getting the angle, simply measures
+that, and if he knows where the sun is on that day<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_214" id="p_214">p. 214</a></span>
+he will then have two angles, one that he knows beforehand,
+and the other that he finds out by looking
+at the sun."</p>
+
+<p>"That is correct. The Nautical Chart gives all
+that information, so that it saves a large amount of
+work in making the calculations."</p>
+
+<p>"That gives the way to determine positions north
+and south. But how about east and west?"</p>
+
+<p>"In the same manner exactly so far as the angle
+measurements are concerned, but in this case, instead
+of taking the time, in days or in months, as in
+reckoning north and south, we must take time in
+minutes, and to do that the entire globe is laid off
+in minutes and degrees, which the nautical tables
+give, and the mariner knows when he obtains a certain
+angle just how far east or west he is located by
+the chart."</p>
+
+<p>"But if he has no chart?"</p>
+
+<p>"Then he must figure out the position for himself,
+which he can do if he has what is called Greenwich,
+or standard time, and has, also the correct time of
+the day where his ship is."</p>
+
+<p>Land was beyond; there was no question of that.
+It rose out of the water higher than the island they
+had just left, which the boys had named <i>Venture</i> Island.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief knew nothing of the land before them.
+He had told John that years before he learned that
+there was a land where there were many bad people,
+who killed and ate each other, but he did not know
+the exact direction.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_215" id="p_215">p. 215</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The vessel was sailed along the coast, and the
+field glasses were used to scan the land. It had the
+appearance of the other islands which they now
+knew. Vegetation was magnificent, and growing
+everywhere, but there was not the sign of a habitation
+anywhere.</p>
+
+<p>After an hour's sail they rounded a point, and
+beyond was the first cove, or indentation along the
+coast. To that John directed the course of the vessel,
+and they ran in very close, since he knew from
+the abrupt sloping beach that it must be a deep bay.</p>
+
+<p>The men could scarcely man the boat quickly
+enough. A dozen of them, together with John, Muro
+and Uraso, took the first boat, while a second boat
+was filled with the warriors who also were accompanied
+by some of the natives of Venture island.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor and the others remained on board,
+while the party made the preliminary examinations
+of the immediate neighborhood. John formed two
+parties, one under command of Muro, and the other
+of Uraso. The boys were with Uraso, while he was
+with Muro. The object was to find out as quickly
+as possible what they would have to meet, and the
+result would enable them to determine the future
+plans.</p>
+
+<p>"It is understood, now," remarked John, "that
+the two exploring parties shall take the two courses
+outlined, Muro and his men, to go directly east,
+while Uraso will take a course to the northeast, and
+proceed in that direction for three hours, and then
+the two parties are to turn toward each other, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_216" id="p_216">p. 216</a></span>
+mutually report. This will give us an opportunity
+to find out something, unless the island is a very
+large one, and requires subsequent exploration to
+ascertain whether it is inhabited."</p>
+
+<p>John had purposely selected the route to the east,
+as he saw the high elevation in that direction, and
+George laughed, as he said, slyly: "John is still
+after the caves," and Harry laughed, as he recalled
+the keenness with which John had arranged the trips.</p>
+
+<p>John did make his way to the highest points, and
+soon learned, from the observations, that the island
+was inhabited, but the trip of the boys was more exciting,
+so we shall more particularly detail their
+adventures.</p>
+
+<p>Before they had gone two hours evidences grew
+thick and fast that tribes inhabited the island.
+Muro, and the different men, were continually finding
+traces, none of them, however, which indicated
+that the people were near at hand, or that the telltale
+marks had been recently made.</p>
+
+<p>But now signs began to be apparent to the boys
+also; the bones of animals, lying around the spot
+where a fire had been gave them the first real sensation.
+Muro glanced at the boys, and at some bones,
+and the action on his part was so peculiar, that
+George quietly remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"Muro looked so peculiarly at me when I glanced
+at the bones, over there, that I wonder what he
+meant?"</p>
+
+<p>"I saw it too," answered Harry. "Let us have
+another look at them;" and acting on the suggestion<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_217" id="p_217">p. 217</a></span>
+they went over. Muro followed. They did not appear
+to pay any attention to him; but he was quick
+to join them, and as he did so he slowly nodded his
+head.</p>
+
+<p>"Are they human remains?" said Harry, as he
+turned to Muro, questioningly.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and this is not the first we have seen," he
+answered. "We may find them now at any time.
+I am now sure that there are several tribes here."</p>
+
+<p>"What makes you believe so?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because we have found different kinds of hair,
+which is usually the best evidence of the differences
+in the tribes, as each has its own peculiarity."</p>
+
+<p>"Savages, and cannibals!" said George reflectively.</p>
+
+<p>"But we must go on. We have still an hour in
+this direction before we turn to the south and east,"
+said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>There was more caution now exercised, and the
+speed was accordingly reduced, in view of the especial
+care which they took. In order to understand
+what happened the reader should know something of
+the nature of the country.</p>
+
+<p>Some places in Wonder Island had the same sort
+of timber and undergrowth, and they went through
+some dense forests, in which vines and small brush
+made traveling difficult. They had to cut their way
+through some of this vegetation.</p>
+
+<p>The land was not low or flat. If it had been there
+would have been a dense jungle. Sometimes they
+passed through half-grown forests, and these places<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_218" id="p_218">p. 218</a></span>
+were the most difficult to scour, because an enemy
+might be within fifty feet, and not be discovered.</p>
+
+<p>It was in just such a place that they received their
+first surprise; a shower of arrows, so thick that
+they instantly knew it could not have been made by
+only a dozen or so. Some of the arrows found their
+marks, and two of the men sank down, while Muro
+coolly drew one of the crude missiles from his arm.</p>
+
+<p>"Drop down!" cried Muro.</p>
+
+<p>There was not a savage in sight; still a number of
+arrows fell around them. "Remain quiet, and I will
+find them?" said Muro, as he crept forward quietly
+through the dense grass.</p>
+
+<p>George and Harry followed, although it was evident
+it was not Muro's wish. Before they had gone
+ten feet, Muro turned, and pointed ahead. "They
+are there; at least one party. Get ready for a
+shot."</p>
+
+<p>The savages, noting the quiet in their front, now
+cautiously peered through the bush, and the boys
+saw the most hideous countenances. "We might
+give them a round," said Muro, and after carefully
+aiming, the guns spoke.</p>
+
+<p>The simultaneous explosion of the three guns,
+raised pandemonium on all sides. They were now
+surrounded by at least a hundred of the savages, but
+for some reason the little party of twenty awed them,
+and instead of making a charge, they rushed toward
+the place where the three victims of the gunshots
+lay.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px; margin-top: 1.5em;  margin-bottom: 1.5em;">
+<a id="illus-218" name="illus-218" />
+<a href="images/illus-p218-large.jpg">
+<img src="images/illus-p218.png" width="395" height="619"
+alt="She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror"
+title="She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">&quot;She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_204">See p. 204</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>Muro's arm was bleeding profusely, and George<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_219" id="p_219">p. 219</a></span>
+quickly bound it up, while the enemy were hesitating.
+"Do not shoot, unless they rush at us. I will talk:
+to them, and try to get an understanding."</p>
+
+<p>Then, in a loud voice Muro called to them, saying
+they were friends, and not enemies. There was no
+response. Thinking that they knew nothing of the
+dialect, he tried another, and the only response was
+the evident determination of the savages to attack
+again.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and Muro could plainly hear their chattering,
+but the latter said that what they were saying
+was not intelligible to him, and that they must
+now prepare for a fight.</p>
+
+<p>"Get your guns ready, and be prepared for a
+charge. If they come so close that you cannot use
+the guns, then we must be prepared to meet them
+with our knives, and we must all stand together, and
+not become separated."</p>
+
+<p>Instead of attacking, however, there was silence,
+after the first excitement. "They are trying to find,
+out what struck their comrades when we fired," remarked
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I think it was a big surprise."</p>
+
+<p>"I recall," continued Muro, "when we had our
+first brush with you that we could not find the arrow
+which we supposed was made by your bullet. That
+frightened us more than anything else."</p>
+
+<p>There was not the slightest movement on the part
+of an enemy for a full half hour. This is the most
+trying sort of tactics. If you can see the enemy, or
+note that he is doing something, there is some relief<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_220" id="p_220">p. 220</a></span>
+to the tension, but where he can neither be seen, nor
+heard, it tries the nerves of the strongest man.</p>
+
+<p>Muro knew that this inactivity on the part of the
+savages had its purpose. Probably, they intended to
+remain there until night, and overwhelm them in
+the rush. Muro had other plans, however.</p>
+
+<p>"We cannot remain here. We must make the attack.
+Remain here, and permit me to feel out their
+positions, and also to determine what they are doing."
+He glided away from them noiselessly, and
+how he kept the tall grass and weeds from swaying,
+the boys could not determine at that time.</p>
+
+<p>It did not take Muro long to see the situation.
+They were surrounded by a cordon of savages, and
+while spying, saw a new lot of them coming up. The
+plan was plain enough, and it meant a fight now, or
+a night defense.</p>
+
+<p>When he returned, he had his plans formed.
+"They are being reinforced, and we have, probably,
+a hundred and fifty, or more, around us. John is,
+no doubt, too far away to come to our assistance,
+and our only hope is to attack them now, so we
+might as well take the necessary steps."</p>
+
+<p>While on his investigations Muro had discovered a
+fallen tree, which was not more than fifty feet to
+their left. "We must reach that tree, and by digging
+a shallow trench at one side, can easily defend
+ourselves, as well as pick them off at our leisure."</p>
+
+<p>Slowly they moved, in crawling attitudes, toward
+the place indicated. The tree was not a large one,
+but it made an admirable breastworks, and with their<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_221" id="p_221">p. 221</a></span>
+knives each man dug out a shallow hole, piling up
+the earth beyond the hole, so as to shelter them from
+the arrows, which they knew would be rained on
+them.</p>
+
+<p>This work required a full half hour, and when
+it was completed, and Muro had satisfied himself
+that each one was supplied with sufficient ammunition,
+he was ready for the second stage of the game.</p>
+
+<p>"We must attract them, by some form of action.
+I will take three with me, and crawl forward, until
+we can catch glimpse of some of the watchers.
+Those we will attack, and then fall back, and do the
+same on the other sides."</p>
+
+<p>Muro indicated those who were to follow, and
+after going only a short distance the boys heard the
+shots, then four more. This brought the sounds of
+voices from every direction. Muro and his men,
+during the excitement, crawled to another portion
+of the line, and repeated the man&#339;uver.</p>
+
+<p>This, for the moment threw them into consternation,
+but they quickly rallied, and now it was plain
+that they were pressing forward to rush the position
+occupied by the boys. It was now obvious that the
+precaution of making the defensive position, as
+Muro had suggested, was their only salvation.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_222" id="p_222">p. 222</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>DISCOVERY OF A NEW ISLAND, AND A SAVAGE TRIBE</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Nothing</span> could describe the uproar that the second
+volley created in the ranks of the besiegers. Yell
+after yell came from the hundreds of throats that
+were about them. It was now war to the end.
+There could be no compromise.</p>
+
+<p>While the boys had been in many difficult and trying
+experiences before, this was the first time that
+they grew pale, and had strong misgivings. They
+knew, however, that the object of the shrieks and
+yells of savages were for the purpose of driving
+terror into the hearts of their foes.</p>
+
+<p>In this respect it might not thus affect them, but
+when they considered the overwhelming numbers
+around them, we cannot blame them for feeling
+alarmed.</p>
+
+<p>They were coming forward, and on all sides.
+"Remember, what John used to tell us: it is the shots
+that hit which count. Fire deliberately, and keep
+together. Do not use your revolvers until they are
+close, and you cannot use the guns."</p>
+
+<p>Closer and closer they came, and Muro and the
+men were silent. "Now, get ready! Shoot deliberately!"</p>
+
+<p>The first salvo was fired. It was a staggering<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_223" id="p_223">p. 223</a></span>
+blow. They reloaded, while the enemy was trying
+to recover, and the second volley belched forth.</p>
+
+<p>Then, when the execution was noticed, and they
+saw their people fall all about them, they charged
+forward in one mass, and the boys looked at each
+other, for a moment, and George reached over and
+gave Harry's hand one pressure, and then turned
+away and began to fire as fast as he could aim the
+weapon.</p>
+
+<p>They were still coming on. The demons were
+nearly up to the log. For some reason the savages
+did not heed those who fell. It had not struck terror
+into their hearts, as the boys hoped. How would
+this end? The enemy was now too close to make
+their guns of any use. The revolvers were drawn,
+and the cracks from them became almost a continuous
+roar.</p>
+
+<p>They were still coming. Soon the ammunition
+would be gone. The boys realized this. They were
+determined to die fighting, and they began to feel
+for their knives which must be the final act in the
+great tragedy.</p>
+
+<p>Then they heard something louder than the cracks
+of their own weapons and the shrieks of the devils
+around them. Some one was shooting. They could
+see the startled faces of the savages, as they turned
+and swung around. The attack ceased, and Muro
+sprang up on the log, with a yell.</p>
+
+<p>Could he be mad? The boys were stupefied.
+"Come on!" cried Muro. "Here is John!"</p>
+
+<p>This announcement, coming at an unexpected mo<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_224" id="p_224">p. 224</a></span>ment,
+was such a reaction to the poor boys, that they
+could hardly raise themselves. Another volley; they
+could hear it now. There was another yell from
+the savages, and then they could be seen rushing
+through the brush.</p>
+
+<p>The men with John ran up, and John struggled
+forward through the weeds. "Are you hurt?"
+asked John, as he sprang to the side of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"No! no!" cried George, and he fell down, overcome
+with the excitement, while Harry could not
+speak for a moment.</p>
+
+<p>"That was a close call," said John. "We heard
+the first shots an hour ago, and we turned to take this
+direction. Then we heard nothing for a long time,
+and as we were coming over the hill beyond the
+firing commenced but we could see nothing, so we
+hurried forward and soon saw the smoke, and then
+the savages coming from the bush, and directly to
+the east we noticed fifty or more coming this way,
+but they are not here yet."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder how many attacked us?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"It is difficult to tell, but it is safe to say that
+there were at least two hundred in the fight. Oh,
+no; the boys will not follow them up very far," said
+John, as Harry looked apprehensively toward the
+direction that John's men were going.</p>
+
+<p>He blew the whistle, and gradually the men straggled
+in, reporting that the savages appeared terror-stricken,
+as they had had no idea that there was
+another force in the neighborhood, and they did not
+stop to consider the possible number.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_225" id="p_225">p. 225</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I am sorry for these poor people," remarked
+John. "We must hunt up the wounded."</p>
+
+<p>Searchers were set to work, and the wounded,
+when found, were carried to an open place beyond,
+and their hurts examined and bandaged. At first
+terror showed itself on their faces, but as John and
+Muro, together with the boys, washed their wounds,
+and wrapped bandages around the limbs, they lay
+there and marveled at the actions of their enemies.</p>
+
+<p>More than two dozen had been killed, and forty-two
+wounded, nearly all in the legs or bodies, those
+having arm wounds being enabled to get away.</p>
+
+<p>On Muro's orders a watch was set on the movements
+of the savages, and from time to time reports
+were brought in concerning them. They had retreated
+eastwardly, and were now off less than a half
+mile, where they were assembled, and evidently debating
+the situation.</p>
+
+<p>John and Muro well knew that their present force,
+now numbering forty-one, and all well armed, would
+be more than a match for the savage force, still, it
+would not be advisable to prolong the explorations
+for the day, as it was desirable to report the situation
+of affairs to the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>After making the sufferers comfortable they
+started on the march back to the ship. During the
+period while caring for the wounded, John and
+Muro tried to engage the savages in conversation
+but all attempts to learn their language failed, and,
+as they were about to leave, John said to Muro:</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think that man is a chief?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_226" id="p_226">p. 226</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I know he is; I spotted him from the first, and
+saw from his actions, and the fact of his being
+obeyed, that he was a man of some authority."</p>
+
+<p>"I agree with you," said Uraso, "that he is the
+one we must take with us."</p>
+
+<p>A litter was quickly improvised and the savage
+gently laid on, and with this, as their only encumbrance,
+they started for the return march. Five of
+the men had been wounded, all in the arms and body,
+and none of them dangerously, so that there was no
+trouble in the march.</p>
+
+<p>They filed out to the west, avoiding as much exposure
+as possible. Muro's men had been on the
+observing line, and at Muro's suggestion they occasionally
+showed themselves, so as to assure the natives
+that they were still holding their ground.</p>
+
+<p>As the two forces were starting for the ship, Muro
+prepared a decoy, so that the savages could see what
+appeared to be two figures. Then he hurriedly told
+John what he had done, and the march began, as
+rapidly as possible, at first, and a rear guard was
+provided to watch the movements of their enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Two miles beyond the scene of the fight the party
+halted, and George was assisted to climb a tree,
+from which point they might be seen.</p>
+
+<p>"I can see them plainly," he called down. "They
+are now around the wounded. I cannot see what
+they are doing, but there is a big crowd."</p>
+
+<p>He waited for some time, and then cried out: "I
+believe they are coming this way. I think it is time<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_227" id="p_227">p. 227</a></span>
+for us to be moving." And George slipped down,
+as John gave the order to go on.</p>
+
+<p>The rear guard, with John and Uraso, were now
+following up behind the marchers. "Go on, without
+stopping," he said, as they took up their positions.</p>
+
+<p>The boys begged to be permitted to remain with
+the rear guard, but John refused to have them exposed.
+In an hour and a half they ascended an elevation
+from which the ship could be seen in the bay
+to the southwest.</p>
+
+<p>During that time only once had the runner returned
+from John to notify them of the progress of
+the natives. The last information, therefore, was
+about a half hour before, and it was now obvious that
+the savages were determined to follow them up, and
+this would bring them within view of the vessel.</p>
+
+<p>Before descending the last declivity that led to the
+beach, John and the Chief appeared, and told the
+boys that all of the tribe was behind them, and that
+the cause of the pursuit was, unquestionably, to recover
+the Chief who had been taken along.</p>
+
+<p>At the suggestion of John three shots were fired
+to attract the attention of those on the boat, while
+several of the fleetest runners speeded down the
+beach and quickly advised the Professor of the situation.</p>
+
+<p>Two boat loads of warriors were quickly sent to
+shore, and when John and the party with him came
+up to the beach, the savages had reached the crest
+of the hill, and ranged up in line, but halted to witness
+the spectacle before them.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_228" id="p_228">p. 228</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The wounded chief was taken to the vessel, and
+the Professor immediately gave him the best care,
+but he remarked: "This man is desperately
+wounded, and will require the best of attention to enable
+him to pull through."</p>
+
+<p>All the men were finally placed on board, and their
+experiences related. An immediate consultation
+was held. John and the boys insisted on remaining
+with a sufficient force to enable them to carry out
+their explorations, but the Professor seemed to oppose
+it.</p>
+
+<p>"I quite agree with you that, from what John has
+said, there are reasons aside from the cannibals
+over there, why we should explore it from one end to
+the other."</p>
+
+<p>The boys cast a side glance at John. Did John
+find something that made him so insistent to remain?
+They repressed their curiosity, however, for the time.
+To their minds they thought the natives were the
+incentive, notwithstanding the terrible fight they had
+just engaged in, although they were willing to take
+the risk.</p>
+
+<p>But it was finally settled. John was to have the
+force now on board, and he, with the boys, was to
+explore, and, if need be, to conquer the natives on the
+island. The <i>Pioneer</i> would, in the meantime, sail to
+Wonder Island, and return with food and ammunition,
+and reinforcements.</p>
+
+<p>There was thus left at their disposal fifty-five men,
+with a fair supply of ammunition. Uraso and Muro
+were to be of the party, as events just related showed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_229" id="p_229">p. 229</a></span>
+that there was serious work to do before they might
+be able to return.</p>
+
+<p>That night, while making the final arrangements
+on the vessel, the boys sought John, and asked him
+more particularly concerning his trip.</p>
+
+<p>"We have had no opportunity to speak to you,
+but the Professor said you had learned enough about
+the island to determine you to explore it fully," said
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"That is true. I have found what I believe to be
+the identical spot described in the charts, and I have
+found the solution, I think, of Walter's note and of
+the skull."</p>
+
+<p>This was, indeed, something of importance to
+them, but John informed them that for certain
+reasons it might be better to defer the explanation
+until they had made the final explorations.</p>
+
+<p>The boys knew he must have some pretty good
+reason for thus explaining and laying the matter
+before them, and they forebore further questionings.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning, when all the supplies and ammunition
+had been taken off, and the final good-byes
+were said, the party stood on the shore while the
+<i>Pioneer</i> slowly moved out, and was soon racing before
+the wind on its way to Wonder Island.</p>
+
+<p>A council was held before they attempted to march
+into the interior. "I have every reason to believe
+that the band which we met yesterday is in the immediate
+vicinity, and that they have been watching our
+movements," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"In that case," remarked Uraso, "I favor the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_230" id="p_230">p. 230</a></span>
+route to the east, which, while it may offer us still
+greater obstacles, in view of our observations there,
+still it might enable us the more quickly to overcome
+the tribe we have just met."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other significantly. "I
+wonder what Uraso can be talking about? There
+must be something very much out of the usual, in
+the eastern part of the island."</p>
+
+<p>"I am interested in knowing what he means by
+'the observation' they made there," responded
+Harry.</p>
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_231" id="p_231">p. 231</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX</h2>
+
+<h3>FIGHT WITH NATIVES AND RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND</h3>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">When</span> the <i>Pioneer</i> sailed for Unity it was with the
+understanding that she was to return within a week
+or ten days. At a cliff in the headland, which jutted
+out on the southern side of the bay, a sort of post
+office station was established, because if the ship
+should return while they were in the interior, it
+would be well for the commander of the <i>Pioneer</i> to
+know where to go in the event that the eastern or
+the northern coast should be much more convenient
+for John and his party.</p>
+
+<p>It was nearly a hundred miles from the Island to
+Wonder Island, and there would be no occasion for
+the Professor to hurry back a relief, except to supply
+additional ammunition, because they did not for an
+instant expect to meet a tribe that would give them
+such a fight.</p>
+
+<p>There was still enough to provide, probably five
+rounds per man, so that it made them a pretty respectable
+fighting force. The weather was such that
+the force on the island did not require tents for
+shelter, and with the native fruits the party could
+well subsist for quite a time without assistance.</p>
+
+<p>It was agreed that the party should keep together,
+and no straggling be permitted, as it was evident
+they had a very bitter foe to deal with. The severely<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_232" id="p_232">p. 232</a></span>
+wounded Chief, who was taken along, was under the
+personal charge of the Professor, the understanding
+being that as soon as his wounds were satisfactorily
+progressing, an effort would be made to open up
+communication with him, and through that channel
+they could reach the inhabitants of the island, and
+thus advise them that they did not mean to do them
+an injury.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if that isn't the real reason why John
+does not want to go for the fellows who attacked us,"
+asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"That may be so. It never occurred to me before.
+It seems to me, though," answered Harry, "that
+they will get but little out of that fellow in a week's
+time. You know they are very much reserved at
+times."</p>
+
+<p>"Or stubborn," suggested George.</p>
+
+<p>One of the things that John was careful about related
+to the organization of the force, so that it would
+at all times be ready for action. In order to carry
+out this idea and make it effectual, he divided the
+fighters into two squads of twenty-five men each,
+under the commands of Uraso and Muro, the arrangement
+being such that one squad should have
+charge of the patrolling and picketing for a period
+of two days, and then the other should take charge
+for a like time.</p>
+
+<p>There was always the most perfect accord between
+the two Chiefs, and John wisely allowed them to arrange
+those matters in such a way as would be most
+satisfactory to them.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_233" id="p_233">p. 233</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Before noon the following day the force marched
+out from Security Harbor, as they had named the
+bay, and took up the trail made by John and his
+party two days before.</p>
+
+<p>"We have names for the two islands, and for
+about all the principal points, but we have no name
+for this place," said Harry, as they were marching
+along.</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true," answered George, reflectively.
+Then, with a laugh, he said: "As they have cannibals
+here, according to the evidence so far gathered,
+I think <i>Maneta</i> would be a name that would
+tell the story about as well as anything." And
+George laughed as he made the suggestion.</p>
+
+<p>He was an adept in applying names, being generally
+the first to make suggestions in that direction,
+and he was rarely at a loss for an apt designation.</p>
+
+<p>The route was over a country which was rich in
+vegetation. During the first ten miles the ascent
+was gradual, and the fruit and nuts were abundant,
+while new species of trees and flowers attracted the
+boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Harry and I have found a plant that has flies
+and other insects all over the leaves, and I believe
+it actually catches and holds. Here is a sample,"
+said George, as he presented a branch to John.</p>
+
+<p>John examined it carefully. Then he said:
+"This is a plant of which we have several in the
+United States, but none which are as active. This is
+called Venus' Fly Trap."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_234" id="p_234">p. 234</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That is curious," remarked Harry. "I wouldn't
+have paid any attention to it but I saw a fly
+alight on it, and these little feelers seemed to close
+around it, and hold
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"It works on that
+plan exactly. It is in
+that way it gets its
+food."</p>
+
+<p>"But why should
+the feelers be able to
+grasp the fly the moment
+it touches the
+leaf?"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 213px;">
+<a id="illus-fig16" name="illus-fig16" />
+<a href="#p_234">
+<img src="images/illus-fig16-p234.png" width="213" height="205"
+alt="Fig. 16. Venus&#39; Fly-Trap." title="Fig. 16. Venus&#39; Fly-Trap." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 16. <span class="u">Venus&#39;</span> <span class="u">Fly</span>-<span class="u">Trap</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Do you recall
+about what the Professor told you of the peculiar
+power of plants to absorb food of particular kinds
+by a faculty called <i>irritability</i>?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I remember."</p>
+
+<p>"By means of that, plants are enabled to select
+just the kinds of substances that they want, and can
+digest. If you will carefully notice the leaf, after it
+has seized a fly it will be observed that the leaf
+exudes a watery substance, and that has the property
+of digesting the fly, or of converting the liquid part
+of the insect into a form of food which is taken
+through the leaf, and from the leaf it goes into the
+plant itself."</p>
+
+<p>"I thought plants got their food from the roots
+only?"</p>
+
+<p>"Leaves are just the same as roots. They are<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_235" id="p_235">p. 235</a></span>
+terminals, and moisture as well as foods, such, for
+instance, as nitrogen, is absorbed and fed to the plant
+through the leaves."</p>
+
+<p>As they progressed they could see evidences of
+human occupation, and in many places the remains
+of fire. It was while making a detour from the regular
+route taken by John that they saw the first
+startling thing.</p>
+
+<p>It was found at a place where a rude hut was discovered
+in a dilapidated condition. Directly behind
+the hut was a raised sort of dais, supported on two
+posts, and this was filled with human skulls, all in
+an advanced stage of decay.</p>
+
+<p>It was noticed only by accident, as the area around
+the hut was thickly grown up by the vegetation.
+The boys were naturally startled at the sight.</p>
+
+<p>"What does that mean?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>John replied: "This is evidence that the people
+here are head hunters."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean by <i>head hunters</i>?"</p>
+
+<p>"Certain savages have the belief that their importance
+depends on the number of heads they can
+capture."</p>
+
+<p>"Where do they get them?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is necessary for them to kill their enemies, and
+impale the heads, or nail them up to their huts."</p>
+
+<p>"Is it a religious ceremony?"</p>
+
+<p>"In some cases that is so. In some tribes the
+object is merely to show bravery and manliness.
+The more heads a man possesses the braver he is."</p>
+
+<p>The vicinity of the hut was carefully examined,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_236" id="p_236">p. 236</a></span>
+and Uraso brought to John a very curiously arranged
+shell, with a handle to it. It was, in fact, a
+rattle. John took the article, and after examining
+it for some time, remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"These people will be difficult to deal with; very
+difficult."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you form that conclusion from the examination
+of the rattle?"</p>
+
+<p>"This is a vele."</p>
+
+<p>"A <i>vele</i>; and what in the world is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"A vele is a sort of hoodoo; it is something that
+many natives believe in with such tenacity that if
+any one having this rattle points to him and declares
+him veleed, and announces that the veleed one
+will die the next day, he will lay down and actually
+expire as predicted."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you believe such tales?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course those stories are hard to understand,
+but the missionaries on the Melanesian Islands vouch
+for many things similar to that. In 1871, Bishop
+Patterson, one of the missionaries, was murdered by
+the natives of those islands, and many of the facts
+in regard to their customs were then established."</p>
+
+<p>"But how do they work the vele?"</p>
+
+<p>"The place where the vele is worked to the most
+unlimited extent is in the Island of Guadalcaner, one
+of the Solomon Islands, although it has its counterpart
+in many other places. The vele rattler is carefully
+kept in a bamboo box, and when the owner
+wishes to destroy an enemy he takes the vele, and
+searches for him.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_237" id="p_237">p. 237</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"In doing so he must not be seen by any one. If
+he is seen the vele will not be effective. When he
+finds his enemy the vele is pointed to the man, and the
+rattles shaken, and while doing so the one exorcising
+the spell must turn his face away and utter curses.
+As soon as his enemy hears this, he turns to see who
+has veleed him, and he then glances around to see
+if any one has seen the vele."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sure that the rattle is for that purpose?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is no question of it, and it is an evidence
+that the natives are intensely superstitious, and such
+people are very difficult to deal with."</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose we shall have witch doctors to deal
+with here?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a very natural supposition."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you see some of these things when you came
+over here yesterday?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>It was evident to both boys that they were going
+direct to the mountains, and the general character
+of the surroundings reminded them so much of the
+mountains on Wonder Island, that they felt assured
+John would be able to find the cave for which he was
+searching.</p>
+
+<p>That night they encamped on a small stream which
+was, no doubt, formed by a spring, as its waters were
+deliciously cool, and refreshing.</p>
+
+<p>During that night, shortly after twelve o'clock, the
+boys heard the most peculiar noises, like a doleful,
+continuous cry, echoed and reechoed from hill to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_238" id="p_238">p. 238</a></span>
+mountain,&mdash;something indescribable, but they refrained
+from saying anything to John about it.</p>
+
+<p>Some of the boys who were present and heard it
+were singularly affected, and it must be said that the
+boys themselves, notwithstanding the experiences
+they had passed through, were not altogether composed
+in their minds.</p>
+
+<p>When Uraso and Muro appeared next morning,
+after a night of scouting, they were startled by the
+accounts which were furnished, as to the number and
+warlike character of the inhabitants, and a council
+was held to decide whether it would be advisable to
+proceed with their limited force.</p>
+
+<p>If they knew, beyond question, that the island was
+occupied by another tribe, it might enable them to
+make peace with one of them, and thus pave the way
+for approaching these people.</p>
+
+<p>It was unfortunate that the first contact with the
+natives brought them into open hostilities, much as
+they desired to avoid it, but it was too late now.</p>
+
+<p>"From your investigations," said John, addressing
+the two chiefs, "can you give any idea of the
+number of natives in this tribe?"</p>
+
+<p>"We were unable to get near the village, but during
+the night we touched three different parties, one
+over by the high ridge, one a mile to the front, and
+the other over in the open ground not far from the
+place we had the fight. If I can judge anything by
+that I should say they have a number of warriors,"
+answered Uraso.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_239" id="p_239">p. 239</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That does, indeed, look as though they are ready
+to meet us from whatever direction we may attack
+them," remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>"The thing which is the most singular to me,"
+remarked Muro, "is the way they are coming at us
+after the fight over there. If they were a weak lot
+they would draw off, and keep away from us, and
+that makes me think they have a lot of warriors, and
+are simply waiting until they can collect all of
+them."</p>
+
+<p>"We must do one of two things," ventured John,
+on reflection. "Either to go on with the men we have,
+or to wait until the <i>Pioneer</i> returns, and then go
+back with her and fit out a force of ample size to meet
+them. It is our wish to win over the people by
+peaceful means, but our weakness may be the worst
+possible way of accomplishing that purpose."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso and Muro were both in favor of returning
+and waiting for the <i>Pioneer</i>, as they knew it would
+be likely to show up within the next three days, and
+their views decided the matter.</p>
+
+<p>"Under the circumstances we must leave this
+place before it is too late in the day, or we may have
+trouble in reaching the landing, although we can
+easily hold them off with our rifles, but we must
+avoid bloodshed," and on this point John was insistent.</p>
+
+<p>The camp was astir and all the equipment in hand
+within fifteen minutes, although they had not yet
+partaken of breakfast. Uraso took the first turn, as<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_240" id="p_240">p. 240</a></span>
+commander of the rear guard, while the main body
+hurried on to cross the valley, before the savages
+could get the first notice of the retirement.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the great caution displayed, several
+shots were heard before the slope on the other
+side was reached, and they knew that Uraso was
+engaged.</p>
+
+<p>It is difficult, sometimes, to know just how information
+travels among savage people, but in this
+case, the peculiar beatings of the drums which could
+be heard in the dim distance, was sufficient to satisfy
+Muro that they had watchers, and a signaling means
+from treetops and from the crests of the great hills
+all around them.</p>
+
+<p>An hour afterwards Uraso's men were seen in the
+distance, and, although they had fired no more shots,
+it was evident that the natives were now in force and
+pressing against him with all their might. Only the
+consummate skill of Uraso prevented them from
+rushing the men under his command.</p>
+
+<p>But the top of the hill was reached; the landing
+was not much more than a mile beyond that, and
+John hurriedly took a half dozen men, and George
+and Harry with him, in order to select the final line
+of defense within reach of the landing place, while
+Uraso and Muro held them in check.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were ahead of the little party, swinging
+along and trying to get to the elevated point which
+John indicated as the most available place, when two
+powerful natives sprang across their path, and before
+either could draw a weapon, they were pounced<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_241" id="p_241">p. 241</a></span>
+upon and seized by two more who approached from
+the rear.</p>
+
+<p>With great presence of mind Harry cocked and
+fired the gun which his captors were struggling for.
+The shot went through the arm of the native who had
+seized George, and the latter, now free, raised his
+rifle and brought it down with all force on the nearest
+one.</p>
+
+<p>John and the men with him needed no further information
+as to the situation. They were practically
+surrounded. That was his first thought; but, as no
+more natives appeared, and the two remaining savages
+started on a run it began to be evident that they
+were only scouts who expected an easy capture of
+the two boys.</p>
+
+<p>There was no more straggling or running ahead
+after that. Uraso and the rear guard came up with
+a rush on hearing the shots, but were reassured when
+they saw the party intact.</p>
+
+<p>The heights were gained, and before they could
+arrange for the defense the natives appeared from
+three quarters, and held off a quarter of a mile beyond.</p>
+
+<p>During the following day John tried to establish
+communications with the natives, but they rebuffed
+all efforts, and the arrival of the <i>Pioneer</i> was anxiously
+awaited.</p>
+
+<p>On the third day the natives were observed closer
+at various points, and they began to grow bolder, but
+at noon of the fourth day the sharp eyes of Muro discovered
+the glimpse of a sail to the west.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_242" id="p_242">p. 242</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Within two hours the form of the ship could be
+seen. The <i>Pioneer</i> was making for the landing, and
+a cheer went up from the men at the welcome sight.</p>
+
+<p>There was not much difficulty in descending the
+cliffs and establishing communications with the vessel,
+and within an hour they were aboard and the
+natives could plainly be seen coming down the opposite
+slope waving defiance to the ship.</p>
+
+<p>The next day the <i>Pioneer</i> sailed up Enterprise
+River. The people in Unity were anxious to learn of
+the new island, and to hear of the exploits with the
+savage tribe which the boys had encountered.</p>
+
+<p>"The Treasures of the Islands," the next book in
+this series, relates the further experiences of the
+boys upon their return to Rescue Island.</p>
+
+<p class="center">THE END</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<h2>THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS</h2>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By ELBERT FISHER</p>
+<p class="titleblock"><i>12mo, Cloth.     Many Illustrations.     60c. per Volume</i></p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: 1.5em">This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
+make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They
+meet with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
+adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive
+matter relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
+through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports
+of boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
+books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each chapter,
+there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the author, and four
+striking halftones.</p>
+
+<p><b>1. From New York to the Golden Gate</b>, takes in many of the principal
+points between New York and California, and contains a highly
+entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a little
+useful information.</p>
+
+<p><b>2. From San Francisco to Japan</b>, relates the experiences of the two
+boys at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to
+Hawaii, Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent
+at sea, and a large amount of interesting information appears throughout
+the text.</p>
+
+<p><b>3. From Tokio to Bombay</b>. This book covers their interesting
+experiences in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong
+and finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a
+field seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the
+great Hyderabad region of South India.</p>
+
+<p><b>4. From India to the War Zone</b>, describes their trip toward the
+Persian Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the
+supposed site of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves
+with a caravan through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing
+the Holy Land, where they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean
+port of Joppa, and their experiences thereafter within the war
+zone are fully described.</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p>
+<p class="titleblock">147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner
+all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care
+and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work;
+the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures,
+and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two
+hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and
+includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the
+art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published
+for boys.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically
+applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the
+knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various
+phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within
+the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and
+is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of
+practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure
+and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized
+to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work
+is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building
+explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of
+cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in
+explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+<br />
+<i>Price 60 cents per volume</i>
+<br />
+<br />
+THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY<br />
+<span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;  New York</span>
+</p>
+
+<table  style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;"
+width="380" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Morton" border="1">
+<tr><td>
+
+<h2>The Ethel Morton Books</h2>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By MABELL S. C. SMITH</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">This series strikes a new note in the publication of books
+for girls. Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing
+experiences of our young friends are combined with a
+fund of information relating their accomplishment of things
+every girl wishes to know.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with
+many of the entertaining features of handcraft, elements
+of cooking, also of swimming, boating and similar pastimes.
+This information is so imparted as to hold the interest
+throughout. Many of the subjects treated are illustrated
+by halftones and line engravings throughout the
+text.</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1.5em;"><span class="smcap">LIST OF TITLES</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Chautauqua</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Holidays</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Rose House</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Enterprise</span></p>
+<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;"><i>Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid</i></p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: .5em;">PUBLISHED BY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em; font-size: 130%">The New York Book Company</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: 1em;">147 <span class="smcap">Fourth Avenue</span>     <span class="smcap">New York, N. Y.</span></p>
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;"
+ width="380" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Mountain Boys" border="1">
+<tr><td>
+<h2><span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mountain</span> <span class="u">Boys</span> <span class="u">Series</span></h2>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">1. Phil Bradley's Mountain Boys</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">2. Phil Bradley at the Wheel</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">3. Phil Bradley's Shooting Box</span></p>
+
+<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">4. Phil Bradley's Snow-Shoe Trail</span></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">These books describe with interesting
+detail the experiences of a party of boys
+among the mountain pines.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">They teach the young reader how to
+protect himself against the elements, what
+to do and what to avoid, and above all to
+become self-reliant and manly.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>12mo. * * * Cloth.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 1em;"><i>40 cents per volume; postpaid</i></p>
+
+<p class="center"  style="margin-top: 2em; font-size: 135%">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p>
+
+<p class="center"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue     New York</span></p>
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS***</p>
+<p>******* This file should be named 21760-h.txt or 21760-h.zip *******</p>
+<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br />
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/7/6/21760</a></p>
+<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.</p>
+
+<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.</p>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>.
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a>
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a>
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a>
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/21760-h/images/cover.jpg b/21760-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..225ea17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/cover.jpg
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig1-p038.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig1-p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a18b94f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig1-p038.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig10-p152.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig10-p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..154ebcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig10-p152.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig11-p155.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig11-p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8e6f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig11-p155.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig12-p163.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig12-p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2bb1790
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig12-p163.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig13-p164.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig13-p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83d8559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig13-p164.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig14-p167.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig14-p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c0283e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig14-p167.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig15-p212.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig15-p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5db6f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig15-p212.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig16-p234.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig16-p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1afe1f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig16-p234.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig2-p040.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig2-p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6a35b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig2-p040.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig3-p057.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig3-p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f1815d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig3-p057.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig4-p060.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig4-p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..223ce0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig4-p060.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig5-p076.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig5-p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc6f583
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig5-p076.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig6-p078.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig6-p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e696972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig6-p078.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig7-p080.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig7-p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a13b3fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig7-p080.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig8-p149.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig8-p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e6d3a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig8-p149.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-fig9-p151.png b/21760-h/images/illus-fig9-p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14d08b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-fig9-p151.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p075-large.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p075-large.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d045074
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p075-large.jpg
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p075.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p075.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a9c6985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p075.jpg
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p195-large.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p195-large.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73be164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p195-large.jpg
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p195.png b/21760-h/images/illus-p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26e2110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p195.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p218-large.jpg b/21760-h/images/illus-p218-large.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2322f3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p218-large.jpg
diff --git a/21760-h/images/illus-p218.png b/21760-h/images/illus-p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e15b3ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/illus-p218.png
diff --git a/21760-h/images/inybc.png b/21760-h/images/inybc.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a9077e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-h/images/inybc.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/c001.jpg b/21760-page-images/c001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3432e15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/c001.jpg
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f001.png b/21760-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa677d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f002.png b/21760-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dbf30e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f003.png b/21760-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e8a972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f004.png b/21760-page-images/f004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10e3e9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f004.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f005.png b/21760-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48c944d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f006.png b/21760-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db50fe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f007.png b/21760-page-images/f007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76f322d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f007.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f008.png b/21760-page-images/f008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..edd0b2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f008.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f009.png b/21760-page-images/f009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0e3ae2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f009.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f010.png b/21760-page-images/f010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90a7575
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f010.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f011.png b/21760-page-images/f011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88fdb8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f011.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f012.png b/21760-page-images/f012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87d21d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f012.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/f013.png b/21760-page-images/f013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3d6c46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/f013.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p015.png b/21760-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa240c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p016.png b/21760-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..add6a99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p017.png b/21760-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7333a35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p018.png b/21760-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4eb20a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p019.png b/21760-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c33b00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p020.png b/21760-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c615956
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p021.png b/21760-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ac4160
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p022.png b/21760-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6fab8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p023.png b/21760-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..720053c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p024.png b/21760-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a411bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p025.png b/21760-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c21a06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p026.png b/21760-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b34c3a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p027.png b/21760-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c02c9c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p028.png b/21760-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcce281
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p029.png b/21760-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94cef0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p030.png b/21760-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..778d8cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p031.png b/21760-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..298adec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p032.png b/21760-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db76f3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p033.png b/21760-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44f1b5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p034.png b/21760-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbfd9bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p035.png b/21760-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a294095
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p036.png b/21760-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bfc62df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p037.png b/21760-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84712de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p038-image.png b/21760-page-images/p038-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a18b94f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p038-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p038.png b/21760-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aadf546
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p039.png b/21760-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c225e4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p040-image.png b/21760-page-images/p040-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6a35b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p040-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p040.png b/21760-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f264f59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p041.png b/21760-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a250d0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p042.png b/21760-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..78a20ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p043.png b/21760-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3b0981
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p044.png b/21760-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e65bb3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p045.png b/21760-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cc968b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p046.png b/21760-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81948e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p047.png b/21760-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1bafdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p048.png b/21760-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..55ceb19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p049.png b/21760-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad1a371
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p050.png b/21760-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..785847e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p051.png b/21760-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab2f81e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p052.png b/21760-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3799ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p053.png b/21760-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f58b6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p054.png b/21760-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73dcf74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p055.png b/21760-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f737c4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p056.png b/21760-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff3f173
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p057-image.png b/21760-page-images/p057-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f1815d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p057-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p057.png b/21760-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65c217c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p058.png b/21760-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25e0ae4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p059.png b/21760-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e207cbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p060-image.png b/21760-page-images/p060-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..223ce0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p060-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p060.png b/21760-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa21668
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p061.png b/21760-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4687142
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p062.png b/21760-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d089f08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p063.png b/21760-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8227b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p064.png b/21760-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..986bcf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p065.png b/21760-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba8fe3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p066.png b/21760-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5898480
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p067.png b/21760-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e50207
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p068.png b/21760-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e76941
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p069.png b/21760-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6768c36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p070.png b/21760-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92a6ec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p071.png b/21760-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9b4c46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p072.png b/21760-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf9257d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p073.png b/21760-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..339aaa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p074-insert.png b/21760-page-images/p074-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8289f5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p074-insert.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p074.png b/21760-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef91c35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p075.png b/21760-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6ae5bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p076-image.png b/21760-page-images/p076-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc6f583
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p076-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p076.png b/21760-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cd65ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p077.png b/21760-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ffb42d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p078-image.png b/21760-page-images/p078-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e696972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p078-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p078.png b/21760-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe8d8e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p079.png b/21760-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff7f81a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p080-image.png b/21760-page-images/p080-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a13b3fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p080-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p080.png b/21760-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da659b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p081.png b/21760-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2f829a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p082.png b/21760-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bacd113
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p083.png b/21760-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4644863
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p084.png b/21760-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..821a3d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p085.png b/21760-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..186beed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p086.png b/21760-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2093886
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p087.png b/21760-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71132e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p088.png b/21760-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ef8b81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p089.png b/21760-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bfb713d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p090.png b/21760-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9d0669
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p091.png b/21760-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34da0a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p092.png b/21760-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5216a9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p093.png b/21760-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f9da21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p094.png b/21760-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5948d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p095.png b/21760-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5854bbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p096.png b/21760-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a056c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p097.png b/21760-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..416756e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p098.png b/21760-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3937fd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p099.png b/21760-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a023e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p100.png b/21760-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf609a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p101.png b/21760-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1328c64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p102.png b/21760-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61763d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p103.png b/21760-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1331719
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p104.png b/21760-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0aad5a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p105.png b/21760-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89a0c52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p106.png b/21760-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..600c68a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p107.png b/21760-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e4e7a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p108.png b/21760-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04f3d6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p109.png b/21760-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94cb994
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p110.png b/21760-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61d7b1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p111.png b/21760-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1acc852
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p112.png b/21760-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad5ab46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p113.png b/21760-page-images/p113.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df22eb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p113.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p114.png b/21760-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30090de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p115.png b/21760-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91c1f91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p116.png b/21760-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72b394b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p117.png b/21760-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..560e0cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p118.png b/21760-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..440e443
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p119.png b/21760-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f77ad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p120.png b/21760-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..42cc299
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p121.png b/21760-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bd3a95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p122.png b/21760-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b7ca53f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p123.png b/21760-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c20cf7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p124.png b/21760-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb40c2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p125.png b/21760-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..709c0a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p126.png b/21760-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a59f6a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p127.png b/21760-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0c2384
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p128.png b/21760-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3465ecd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p129.png b/21760-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..345ef66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p130.png b/21760-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f058d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p131.png b/21760-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84c35dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p132.png b/21760-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61f9d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p133.png b/21760-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f07855
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p134.png b/21760-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0a8052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p135.png b/21760-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0417e81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p136.png b/21760-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d6043d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p137.png b/21760-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a293f0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p138.png b/21760-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eded428
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p139.png b/21760-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14f101a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p140.png b/21760-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7dbf934
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p141.png b/21760-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1abd124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p142.png b/21760-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1340bc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p143.png b/21760-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4a4162
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p144.png b/21760-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31ef750
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p145.png b/21760-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f18556
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p146.png b/21760-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b292079
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p147.png b/21760-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f447d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p148.png b/21760-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e595fea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p149-image.png b/21760-page-images/p149-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e6d3a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p149-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p149.png b/21760-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b748429
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p150.png b/21760-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e283891
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p151-image.png b/21760-page-images/p151-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14d08b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p151-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p151.png b/21760-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..526deea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p152-image.png b/21760-page-images/p152-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..154ebcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p152-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p152.png b/21760-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d352b19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p153.png b/21760-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf14132
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p154.png b/21760-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12a631b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p155-image.png b/21760-page-images/p155-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2928e05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p155-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p155.png b/21760-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84c104d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p156.png b/21760-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6306dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p157.png b/21760-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5c84d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p158.png b/21760-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..097125f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p159.png b/21760-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d5ce58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p160.png b/21760-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e9386e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p161.png b/21760-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e18cb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p162.png b/21760-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0d5b8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p163-image.png b/21760-page-images/p163-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2bb1790
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p163-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p163.png b/21760-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..77d3bfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p164-image.png b/21760-page-images/p164-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83d8559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p164-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p164.png b/21760-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34e6e8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p165.png b/21760-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f170aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p166.png b/21760-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f318612
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p167-image.png b/21760-page-images/p167-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c0283e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p167-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p167.png b/21760-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f13491f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p168.png b/21760-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0ca327
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p169.png b/21760-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30a20c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p170.png b/21760-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9418c4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p171.png b/21760-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35db0a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p172.png b/21760-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b2f17a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p173.png b/21760-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6423155
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p174.png b/21760-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79e994f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p175.png b/21760-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d1f8df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p176.png b/21760-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61f4063
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p177.png b/21760-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5470e54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p178.png b/21760-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4acdbac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p179.png b/21760-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e97eef6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p180.png b/21760-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b3c236
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p181.png b/21760-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..379f8b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p182.png b/21760-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa1988a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p183.png b/21760-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3670adc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p184.png b/21760-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aac85c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p185.png b/21760-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7a52cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p186.png b/21760-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93ec7b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p187.png b/21760-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0135700
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p188.png b/21760-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8510240
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p189.png b/21760-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..69d49f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p190.png b/21760-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6045610
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p191.png b/21760-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0203725
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p192.png b/21760-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72b8380
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p193.png b/21760-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9658bfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p194.png b/21760-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64e1871
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p195-insert.png b/21760-page-images/p195-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70557e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p195-insert.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p195.png b/21760-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd31ae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p196.png b/21760-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10c31a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p197.png b/21760-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..934b48b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p198.png b/21760-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5efe73e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p199.png b/21760-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cc585a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p200.png b/21760-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e50305
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p201.png b/21760-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7576712
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p202.png b/21760-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5087c4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p203.png b/21760-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15a9a5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p204.png b/21760-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee832e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p205.png b/21760-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f858dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p206.png b/21760-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..347f15e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p207.png b/21760-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a08f2e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p208.png b/21760-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad9b926
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p209.png b/21760-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab3de3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p210.png b/21760-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85bcc21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p211.png b/21760-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f993acb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p212-image.png b/21760-page-images/p212-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc34702
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p212-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p212.png b/21760-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a53ca34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p213.png b/21760-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..631cbae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p214.png b/21760-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee68fbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p215.png b/21760-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c78607e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p216.png b/21760-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..737aad5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p217.png b/21760-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7d5395
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p218-insert.png b/21760-page-images/p218-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd94851
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p218-insert.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p218.png b/21760-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3b9374
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p219.png b/21760-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09c5d3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p220.png b/21760-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61a5cb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p221.png b/21760-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4116637
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p222.png b/21760-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9898415
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p223.png b/21760-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef6e53c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p224.png b/21760-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..17c1770
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p225.png b/21760-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45527c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p226.png b/21760-page-images/p226.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c88a582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p226.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p227.png b/21760-page-images/p227.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f89097
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p227.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p228.png b/21760-page-images/p228.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..729f858
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p228.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p229.png b/21760-page-images/p229.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4330c4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p229.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p230.png b/21760-page-images/p230.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1a146a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p230.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p231.png b/21760-page-images/p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06d96a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p231.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p232.png b/21760-page-images/p232.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83efef7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p232.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p233.png b/21760-page-images/p233.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfcad21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p233.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p234-image.png b/21760-page-images/p234-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1afe1f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p234-image.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p234.png b/21760-page-images/p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4490198
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p234.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p235.png b/21760-page-images/p235.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7d60eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p235.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p236.png b/21760-page-images/p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0fd8ccf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p236.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p237.png b/21760-page-images/p237.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93ad4b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p237.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p238.png b/21760-page-images/p238.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d3229b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p238.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p239.png b/21760-page-images/p239.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ca866f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p239.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p240.png b/21760-page-images/p240.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..faa8c27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p240.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p241.png b/21760-page-images/p241.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..113f682
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p241.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p242.png b/21760-page-images/p242.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2067bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p242.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p243.png b/21760-page-images/p243.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14756ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p243.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p244.png b/21760-page-images/p244.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68e22b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p244.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p245.png b/21760-page-images/p245.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3749a23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p245.png
diff --git a/21760-page-images/p246.png b/21760-page-images/p246.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1eb6a1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760-page-images/p246.png
diff --git a/21760.txt b/21760.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70bd0ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7795 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange
+Islands, by Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Adventures on Strange Islands
+
+
+Author: Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+
+Release Date: June 7, 2007  [eBook #21760]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES
+ON STRANGE ISLANDS***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Joe Longo and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes the original illustrations.
+      See 21760-h.htm or 21760-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760/21760-h/21760-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760/21760-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable
+experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the
+South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
+exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools
+and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them
+but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The
+books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to
+know.
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Castaways
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+               Exploring the Island
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Tribesmen
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+              The Capture and Pursuit
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Conquest of the Savages
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+          Adventures on Strange Islands
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+             Treasures of the Islands
+
+       _Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations._
+           _60 cents per vol., postpaid._
+
+                    PUBLISHED BY
+             THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+           147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+Illustrated
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: NYBC]
+
+
+The New York Book Company
+New York
+
+Copyright, 1915, by
+The New York Book Company
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+CHAPTER
+
+I. THE STRANGE OARS AND ROPES                         Page 15
+
+       The charted island. Previous history of the boys. The professor.
+       Mysteries. The strange oars and ropes. Experiments. The various
+       trips through the Island. Meeting the natives. The caves.
+       Finding metals and ores. A strange village.
+
+II. A MYSTERIOUS MESSAGE                              Page 26
+
+       The Town of Unity. Enterprises on the island. Building a ship.
+       Homesick. Considering the question of other islands. Treasure
+       hunting. The Krishnos. Their beliefs and practices. The
+       comparison of customs with the white people. Preparing to launch
+       the vessel. The professor decides to remain. Angel. The message.
+       Blakely. A scrap of paper with illegible words. The V-shaped
+       tracing. Guessing the contents of the note.
+
+III. THE ARROW ON THE SHEET                           Page 38
+
+       Deciphering the discolored paper. The arrow on the sheet. The
+       first Walter letter. The comparison. Dimensions of the vessel.
+       The engine. The professor and John's error. Pointing to an
+       island. Convinced of the correctness of the boys' views.
+       Launching of the vessel. The feast day. Putting up the rigging.
+       Selecting a crew. Preliminary trials. The day for departure. The
+       trip to Valparaiso. Reshipping to New York. Telegrams home after
+       three years. Angels and the wonders of New York. The great
+       change in the boys. The return to Wonder Island. Reaching
+       Valparaiso. Meeting Blakely. The new steamer. Installation of a
+       line to Wonder Island. The return trip.
+
+IV. THE SKULL WITH THE CRYPTIC WRITING                Page 51
+
+       Steaming up Enterprise River. Unity in sight. The natives at the
+       wharf. The enthusiasm. The chiefs witness the arrival. A "Grand
+       Homecoming." The boys visit the natives. Contemplating voyages
+       to discover other islands. Native sailors. Sutoto captain of the
+       _Pioneer_. Rumors about the boys. Plans for the proposed trips.
+       The force for the expedition. A cargo of copper. The trip to the
+       copper treasure cave. Tides. Fireflies. Explanation of the
+       light. Light without heat The problem of light. Advantages of
+       light which generates no heat. Color of daylight. Phosphorescent
+       glow. Catching fireflies. Scaling the heights. The spot where
+       the Walter note was found. A skull with mysterious characters on
+       it. The mark on the skull and the mark in the message. The star.
+       Cryptic signs.
+
+V. THE TRIP TO THE NEW ISLAND                         Page 63
+
+       Sutoto at the top of the peak. The telescope. The view of Unity.
+       The Illyas' village. The visit to the last captured village. The
+       reception. The kindness of the chief. The great change in the
+       village. The feast of John and the boys. Happiness of the
+       people. The Illyas at work. Return of the _Wonder_ to Unity. The
+       _Pioneer_ on its way to other Islands. Seasickness of the crew.
+       Trying the new cure. Atrophine, and how administered. Explaining
+       its origin, and how it acts. The effect on the crew. Driven out
+       of their course. A light in the dense darkness. Land ahead.
+       Awaiting the morning. Fifty leagues from Wonder Island. The cove
+       in the shore line. Anchoring. The two boats sent ashore. Signs
+       to indicate that people lived on the island. Reminiscences of
+       the Yaks and bears. The discovery of coffee trees. The wild
+       variety. Identity of vegetation in widely-separated countries.
+
+VI. DISCOVERY OF THE ISLAND AND EXPLORATIONS          Page 75
+
+       Return to the landing. John's advice. Surveying the island. The
+       cardinal points of the compass. Laying out the coast line by
+       triangulation. What measurement of angles means. Transferring
+       the angles to paper. Making plans by means of a scale.
+       Proportionate lengths of the different limbs of the angles. The
+       shore line to the south. Instructions to Sutoto. The party to
+       explore the interior. Starting on their mission. The equipment
+       of the party. The spears, and bolos. The camera and field
+       glasses. Amazing tropical vegetation and fruit. Stone hatchet
+       found. Independent exploits of the boys. Temporary separation.
+       Disappearance of George. A pistol shot in the distance. The
+       search. Evidences of a scuffle. George's tracks found. The
+       footprints of natives. Muro scouting in the direction of the
+       natives. The runner to the ship. The _Pioneer_ sailing away. The
+       new landing place. Uraso advised of the capture.
+
+VII. CAPTURE OF GEORGE BY THE NATIVES                 Page 89
+
+       George's capture. Hearing John's whistle. Firing the gun. The
+       surprise of the natives. Rendered unconscious. He recovers. Sees
+       his gun and glasses in the hands of the natives. Discovers that
+       his revolver is still in his pocket. The natives see him trying
+       to discover the time by his watch. The fight of the savages for
+       the watch. George's determination to escape. The natives
+       discover the revolver. He surprises the natives by explaining
+       the knife and glasses. While explaining the glasses accidentally
+       discovers the ocean in the distance. The matchsafe. Discovers
+       the village. Tries to escape before reaching there. Planning the
+       details. Surprised at the appearance of another party. All hope
+       lost. A powerful Chief. George and the Chief. Investigating
+       George's belongings. How George unwittingly told the Chief about
+       the gun and glasses. The Chief arrests the captors. George
+       explains the weapons. Returns the revolver to George. Invites
+       him to the village. In the home of the Chieftain. Description of
+       the "Palace."
+
+VIII. FIGHT OF THE NATIVES FOR THE TRINKETS          Page 102
+
+       Scouting. Muro's work. The first traces. Arrival of Uraso. His
+       grief at the news. The conference. John and party march to the
+       east. Finding George's chain. Evidences of a struggle.
+       Determining the number of enemies by the footprints. Reading
+       characters by feet. How people are distinguished. Observing
+       peculiarities of actions. Estimating the number of natives in
+       the party which captured George. Discovering the Chief's
+       footmarks. Judging of the safety of George by the marks of the
+       feet. Uraso discovers the tree where George exhibited the power
+       of the bullet to the Chief. Inferences as to the characters of
+       the natives who captured George. The trinkets and buttons of
+       more importance to the savages than the person of the captive.
+       Power as the great factor with savages. Why right is might.
+
+IX. THE GIANT CHIEF AND HIS "PALACE"                 Page 113
+
+       The Chief interested in George's belongings. Discovery of a
+       ship's chair. The matchsafe in the Chief's hands. The imitative
+       quality. The first meal. The peculiar knives and forks. The
+       Chief's capacity for food. The character of the meal. The siesta
+       after the meal. George's opportunity. Stealing from the Chief's
+       house. The daughter of the Chief. Wandering from the Chief's
+       house. His midnight sleep from exhaustion. The watchers at his
+       bedside. Finding the soap plant. Breakfast. Absence of the
+       Chief. George's suspicions. Follows the Chief. The appearance of
+       John and Harry. The meeting. George introduces the party to the
+       Chief. Uraso and Muro able to converse with the Chief. George's
+       story. "The Palace." The village. The feast.
+
+X. PECULIARITIES OF THE NATIVE TRIBE                 Page 125
+
+       How the feast was served. John relates the story of the boys to
+       the Chief. The Chief interested in the wonderful ship. The story
+       of the island. The runner to the ship. No Krishnos on the
+       islands. Sutoto sees the runners. Sails for the village. The
+       Chief does not believe in a great spirit. His philosophy.
+       Strength is the only right. No caves on the island.
+       Disappointment of the boys. Bad people to the north. Their own
+       kin, but convicts. Stealing and lying the only crimes. No crime
+       to steal from each other, only from the Chief. The sun as a
+       great Chief. The coming of the ship. The natives on the
+       seashore. Casting of the anchor. Sutoto sees the Chief's
+       daughter. George's captors on the way to the convict colony.
+       Intercession on the part of the boys. The food at the banquet.
+       The natives' aversion to fish. Snake worshippers. Witch doctors.
+       The bad god Baigona. Peculiar ideas of right and wrong among the
+       natives. The survey of the southern part of the island.
+       Triangulation from the mast of a ship.
+
+XI. SUTOTO AND THE CHIEF'S DAUGHTER                  Page 137
+
+       Sutoto's love affair. Cinda, the Chief's daughter. The Chief is
+       told of the wonders of Wonder Island. About the activities of
+       the natives on that island. His curiosity. John tells him how
+       the white people live. The acute questionings of the Chief.
+       Teaching him how trade and commerce is carried on. Money and its
+       uses. How it gets its value. Why it is a measure only. The trip
+       to the north in charge of the Chief's son. Gruesome tales of the
+       ferocity of the convicts. John still anxious to find some
+       particular cave. His chart. The unsolved mystery of the boat.
+       The clothing of the natives. Bracelets. Glitter to attract
+       natives. Weaving, the only industry. The aptness of native women
+       to adopt fancy articles of dress and ornament. John's scheme,
+       anticipating the wedding of Sutoto and Cinda. A "State affair."
+       The mission to the Professor. Sending the _Pioneer_ to Wonder
+       Island. Stut captain of the ship. Sutoto's secret mission
+       through Stut.
+
+XII. THE SKELETON BENEATH THE BOAT                   Page 148
+
+       How the present journey reminded the boys of their first
+       adventure on Wonder Island. Peculiar animals. The kagu. The
+       fashionable millinery styles. Singular habit of the bird. The
+       benne plant. Its remarkable properties. Lard from trees. The
+       coffee trees. A tree with sandpaper leaves. The indicus.
+       Analyzing soils. How plants digest food. Larvae. The early forms
+       of many animals. Kinds of food in the earth. The bruang. The
+       sun-bear of Malay. The bear and the honey pot. How it was tamed.
+       The sport. The ocean. George and Harry at the beach. Bathing in
+       the surf. The discovery of the wreck of an upturned boat.
+       Finding the compartments belonging to their lost boat on Wonder
+       Island. Sending for John. The skeleton beneath the upturned
+       boat. The bound skeleton. The startling discovery of the same
+       kinds of ropes found in their lost boat. Evidence of a crime.
+
+XIII. A CONVICT COLONY OF NATIVES                    Page 161
+
+       Describing the skeleton. A soldier or an adventurer. Their first
+       hatchet. The narrow neck of land. The Rose of Jericho. The
+       resurrection plant. The Australian kangaroo. The exiled people.
+       The Chief's son tells about them. Explains they do not believe
+       in killing except in self-defense. The upas tree. Its flowering
+       branch. Valuable mineral in the hills. Description of the
+       convict's home. Banishment one of the most serious forms of
+       punishment for crimes. The survey of the mountains. Hunting for
+       caves. How the parties, were organized. The influence of odors
+       on human actions. Tests of odors on patients. How they affect
+       dreams. Calcareous formations. Where the real caves are found.
+       Erosive action of water on limestone.
+
+XIV. A WHITE PARALYTIC IN THE CONVICT COLONY         Page 174
+
+       The wide search for the caves. George finds a cave entrance.
+       Preparing to explore the cave. The lamps. A blind lead. A
+       fissure, not an erosion. The joke on George. The first sight of
+       the location of the dreaded criminal colony. The magnificent
+       wild fruits. The beautiful flowers. The first criminals. The
+       industry of the people. Cultivating fruit and vegetables.
+       Hutoton. Peculiarity in names. Well-dressed natives. The
+       distinguished head of the village. His dignity. The welcome to
+       the village. The well-kept huts. The garden plots and bowers of
+       flowers. The criminals preparing a feast of welcome. The boys
+       discover a white man. A paralytic patient. How the convicts
+       cared for him. Surprised to learn that the convicts rewarded the
+       men who rescued the paralytic. How the savages calculated time.
+       The movement of the sun, and how it gave them the time.
+
+XV. SAVAGE MARRIAGE CUSTOMS                          Page 185
+
+       Criminal Colonies. The effects on the people. Its advantages.
+       The principles of punishment. Protecting society. Isolating
+       patients who have contagious or infectious diseases. Trying to
+       ascertain the identity of the paralytic. John's promise to
+       reward the people for the care bestowed on the white man.
+       Refusing to be paid, for taking care of him. Contrasting Hutoton
+       with Sasite, the home of the Chief. Returning to Sasite. The
+       first glimpse of the returning _Pioneer_. The interesting party
+       aboard. The Chief and the entire village at the seashore. The
+       Professor. Muro's wife. Blakely. The Chief meets the Professor.
+       The Chief knows why the Professor is a wise man. The double
+       eyes, spectacles. The Chief with the spectacles. Muro's wife
+       meets the Chief's wife. They confer about Cinda and Sutoto. The
+       savage customs in marriage. The ceremonies. Stut tells the boys
+       about Sutoto's mission to procure his wedding outfit. The
+       surprising news that Sutoto and Cinda were to be secretly
+       married that night. The plot. Muro's wife informed.
+
+XVI. SUTOTO AND CINDA'S MARRIAGE; AND THE SURPRISE   Page 193
+
+       The Chief's wife gets the news. The Chief brought into the
+       conference. His will the only law on the matter of marriage. He
+       consents to their plan. The two requirements in the ceremony of
+       marriage according to their rites. The gift of fruit, of fowl,
+       and of game. The blindfolding of the bridegroom. The absolute
+       silence when eating. Preparation for the banquet that night.
+       Sutoto and Cinda arrange to be married that night while the
+       people are at the banquet. Decide to conform strictly to the
+       rites of the tribe. The boys learn of the stealthy plans.
+       Witness the ceremony in Cinda's home. The Chief arrests the
+       bridal couple and takes them aboard the ship. The criminals
+       before the Chief. The Chief upbraids Sutoto. The reconciliation.
+       The presents brought over from Wonder Island. Grief of the boys
+       because they had forgotten a present. The surprise of the
+       natives at the beautiful silver forks. Spices. Coffee. Cream and
+       sugar. Curiosity about the cows. The great surprise to Sutoto.
+       He is made Chief of his tribe. Monuments. The presents. The
+       great mirror, the present of the boys. The crowns. The final
+       ceremony. The dance. Originally a religious ceremony. The
+       encircling wreath.
+
+XVII. HUTOTON; THE PLACE OF DEATH                    Page 207
+
+       Preparations for further explorations. Consulting the charts.
+       Determine to sail northward, on way to Wonder Island. Reasons
+       from shape of the island why an island might be to the north.
+       Geological formations. Upheavals. Islands mere ridges. Sutoto to
+       return to Wonder Island. The Chief agrees to go to Wonder
+       Island. His family to accompany him. Proposed visit to Hutoton.
+       Boarding the ship. The welcome of the convicts. Taking the
+       paralytic to the ship. Stores from the ships for the convict
+       colony. The _Pioneer_ sails to the north. Discovery of a new
+       island. Taking observations from the sun. The calendar. Summer
+       and winter. Taking the angle of the sun, and what it means.
+       Triangulation. The nautical chart. Greenwich or Standard time.
+       The island which they had left named _Venture_. The new island
+       and its magnificent vegetation. John, with the boys and two
+       boatloads, land. The exploring parties formed. The boys and Muro
+       at the head of one party. Traces of savages. Appearances that
+       cannibals were there. A shower of arrows their first surprise.
+       The volley and the disappearance of the natives. Reappearance of
+       the savages. Surrounded. Preparing for defense. The second
+       attack. The fight. The natives apparently preparing to rush
+       them.
+
+XVIII. DISCOVERY OF A NEW ISLAND, AND A SAVAGE TRIBE Page 222
+
+       The effect of the second volley. The determination of the
+       attacking party. The fire on all sides. The ammunition getting
+       low. The relief party under John. Hearing the sounds of firing.
+       The surprise of the natives. The savages repulsed. Muro and the
+       men follow the fleeing natives. Recalled by John. Aiding the
+       wounded. Taking along a wounded Chief. The litter. The decoy.
+       Returning to the ship. Observing the enemy from a tree-top.
+       Following up the party. A rear guard. The runner reports the
+       determination of the natives to follow. The signal shots to the
+       ship. Reinforcements. The determination to explore the island
+       and meet the natives. John with the boys and a strong party
+       remain. The _Pioneer_ sails for Wonder Island. Holding a
+       council.
+
+XIX. FIGHT WITH NATIVES AND RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND  Page 231
+
+       Arrangements for the _Pioneer_ to return. Ammunition needed. The
+       arrangement of the men for scouting and picketing. Leaving
+       security harbor. A plant which devours insects. Venus's
+       fly-trap. How plants absorb food. Irritability. How the leaf
+       digests the fly. Food absorbed by leaves as well as by roots. A
+       cache of human skulls. Head hunters. The vele. A hoodoo. The
+       rattle. The vele and the bamboo box. How it is worked to produce
+       the charm. Evidences of extreme superstitions. Witch doctors.
+       Peculiar noises. Doleful sounds. Speculating on the mysteries of
+       the island.
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+                                                                 PAGE
+  He turned it over and examined every portion                     75
+  The rites were progressing very satisfactorily                  195
+  She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror   218
+
+  Fig.  1. The Mysterious Message.                                 28
+  Fig.  2. The Walter Letter.                                      40
+  Fig.  3. The Fire-fly.                                           57
+  Fig.  4. Inscription on the Skull.                               60
+  Fig.  5. Measuring by Triangulation.                             76
+  Fig.  6. The Second Limb                                         78
+  Fig.  7. Triangulation from a Vessel.                            80
+  Fig.  8. The Kagu.                                              149
+  Fig.  9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne.                           119
+  Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree.                                 152
+  Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear.                              155
+  Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho.                                       163
+  Fig. 13. The Koala.                                             164
+  Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree.                           167
+  Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun.                212
+  Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap.                                       234
+
+
+
+
+ADVENTURES ON STRANGE ISLANDS
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE STRANGE OARS AND ROPES
+
+
+"I am awfully anxious to know where the charted islands can be that John
+spoke about," remarked George, as Harry was consulting the plans of the
+boat they were building.
+
+"They must be in this section of the southern seas, or his party
+wouldn't have sailed in this direction," answered Harry, after a pause.
+
+"Do you think he would be offended if we spoke to him about it!"
+
+"No;" answered Harry, after some reflection. "He has spoken to me about
+it several times. But why do you ask!"
+
+"For the reason that I think it would be a grand thing to hunt them up."
+
+Harry laughed, and then slowly said: "That would be a big thing to
+undertake. But what about going home?"
+
+"I hadn't forgotten that. I meant that when we came back it would be
+proper for us to undertake."
+
+"Well, haven't you had enough trouble during the past two years?" And
+Harry laughed, just as though they hadn't gone through sufficient trials
+to last a life time.
+
+"I wouldn't mind going through the same experiences, when I remember
+what we have learned and what all of us have accomplished," responded
+George, as he looked through the window, reflectively, and watched the
+natives at work.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+It will be difficult to understand the force of the above conversation,
+unless the reader knows the situation in which the boys were placed at
+the time it took place, and the locality of the scene where the
+conversation was held.
+
+Over two years previously two boys, George Mayfield and Harry Crandall,
+were members of a school training ship which left the Harbor of New
+York, for a cruise in southern waters, the object being to instruct the
+crew of seventy boys in the art of seamanship, as well as to give them a
+foundation knowledge in the arts and sciences.
+
+On board they became intimate with a gray-haired Professor, who became
+very ill. They were particularly attracted to him, and waited upon him,
+until they reached the Pacific Ocean, where, for some reason the ship
+met a catastrophe, and the crew were compelled to take to open boats.
+
+The two boys, with several companions, and the Professor, were together
+in one of the life boats, and after leaving the sinking ship a terrific
+gale, one of the great monsoons, separated them from the companion
+boats, and for six days they were driven about in the vast ocean,
+absolutely helpless. During this time all their young companions were
+washed overboard, and they were driven to the point of despair, when
+they were cast ashore on an island.
+
+They were thus placed on an unknown land, with nothing but their scanty
+clothing, and devoid even of a knife. There is no indication that the
+land was inhabited, and for the first three months, while recuperating,
+they had no opportunity to go far from the spot where they landed.
+
+After the Professor had regained his health, they began to make a few
+necessary things, and hunt for the food which was necessary to preserve
+life. As they grew bolder, however, they fashioned crude implements,
+like bows and arrows, and primitive articles of utility.
+
+They made a few trips into the interior, and then saw the first
+indications which pointed to the presence of inhabitants. From some of
+the traces it was evident that the people must be savages, and then they
+saw the necessity of preparing themselves to meet hostile neighbors.
+
+Then began the most remarkable series of adventures on the part of the
+boys, under the instruction of the Professor, to provide not only the
+necessaries of life, but many of the luxuries. While engaged in the
+different enterprises they undertook numerous excursions, all of which
+confirmed them in the first intimations that they had landed on an
+island, and that it contained one or more savage tribes.
+
+To recount all that the boys did, even in the briefest space, would be
+impossible in this book, and it is not necessary, in order to relate the
+happenings from this time on; but some things are necessary, because we
+shall have to deal with incidents which took place during their
+adventures, and this volume also brings into the scene several
+characters, in addition to the three which have been named, as the
+principal participants.
+
+The incidents referred to were called by the boys "the mysteries." When
+they landed on the island they erected a flag pole, and improvised a
+flag which was kept at half mast, and mounted on a high point, so that
+it would attract passing ships, if their island chanced to be in the
+path of vessels. During one of their excursions the flag pole and staff
+disappeared.
+
+For the purpose of making one of the trips by water a boat was built,
+and they sailed it up a large stream, only to find that within ten miles
+of their home was an immense cataract, or falls, around which they could
+not porter the vessel. It was left below the falls in a secure position,
+and ten days later, when they went for it, were surprised at its
+disappearance.
+
+Later on it was found miles away, but the little closets which they had
+built in to hold their food and clothing, had disappeared, and they were
+still more startled to find a pair of oars, which they could not have
+made, attached to the boat.
+
+In repairing the boat a note was discovered, written by some one who
+could not have been a member of their ill-fated vessel. This added to
+their perplexities, for it indicated that white people had been on the
+island, as well as savages.
+
+Then they found strange ropes, evidently fashioned by a crude hand; a
+skull of a well-developed man was picked up on the shore not far from
+their home; part of the wreckage of a vessel was discovered; a herd of
+yaks was captured and a mysterious brand deciphered on one of them.
+
+But in their wanderings they found the entrance to a cavern, and this
+was explored, resulting in finding that it was formerly a pirates' lair,
+and they were astounded at finding immense wealth in its hidden
+recesses.
+
+They industriously searched the island, and found numerous ores which
+were dug out and smelted and from which they were able to build many
+things that added to their comfort; and finally, firearms were
+constructed, and powder made.
+
+They spent much of the time in chemical experiments, in hunting for and
+gathering the different vegetables, and fibres, and from the latter
+learned how to weave cloth, to make felt, and to turn skins into leather
+from the animals which they hunted.
+
+Their adventures were not wholly devoid of the amusing things of life.
+In one of the expeditions they captured a young Orang-outang. This was
+carefully taught to do many things, and it became not only a valuable
+assistant, and a wonderful scout in their wanderings, but it afforded
+them immense amusement, which was appreciated by the boys.
+
+And now, having been provided with suitable weapons, they determined to
+go on voyages of discovery, being prompted in this course, because they
+found in the wreckage along one of the rivers, and far in the interior,
+a life boat which was a companion to their own which had been lost when
+they were stranded in the great tempest.
+
+It was evident to them that some of their companions were on the island,
+and probably, captives. This made the quest a most exciting one, so
+every energy was bent toward the end of helping the unfortunates.
+
+On the initial expedition, after the completion of the first weapons,
+they came into contact with several tribes of savages, one of whom was
+captured, after being wounded. It developed that he was a chief of one
+of the tribes which at that time were at war with each other.
+
+Returning from this trip they discovered at their home a distinguished
+looking white man in rags, totally devoid of intellect, and unable to
+speak. It was evident that he had met with some accident, but he was
+entirely harmless, and obediently took up and performed every sort of
+manual labor,--in fact, was an expert in any sort of mechanical
+operation required of him.
+
+In hunting, or in scouting, he was a perfect specimen of the hunter, or
+the soldier. It seemed to be an instinct with him to render every kind
+of service that might be needed, with the gun, or the tools which were
+all about him. In the absence of a better name they christened him John.
+
+On the second trip into the unknown portions of the island they met
+three of the savage tribes, with whom they had several battles, and one
+of the natives was wounded and captured. While wandering through the
+forests, in their efforts to return to their home, they ran into a
+savage village, where they were successful in rescuing two boys who had
+been shipmates on the _Investigator_ which went down months before.
+
+While this was a source of joy it was clouded by the information that
+they were not the ones who came to the island in the life boat that the
+boys had found in the river. This was evidence that others must still be
+in the island, and probably held as captives.
+
+Some months after the silent John came to them, his reason and the
+ability to speak returned to him, and he told a wonderful tale of his
+wanderings, and that which impressed the boys most was the information
+that he had shipped in a vessel which was designed to search out the
+treasures hidden in the islands of the South seas.
+
+From hints which he dropped from time to time, the islands containing
+the treasure were charted, and later on, one of the caves so charted was
+found on the island they now occupied, although they also found several
+which were not alluded to and could not be recognized by the
+description, according to the story told by John.
+
+John was an educated man, an archaeologist, and, next to the Professor,
+had the most varied knowledge of any one the boys ever met, and it can
+be understood, that their association with men of that class made them
+remarkably active in seeking out and understanding the wonderful things
+that nature presents in every field of human activity.
+
+In order to be as brief as possible with this part of the story, it is
+necessary to add that the rescue of the two boys, and the restoration of
+John's faculties, made a strong party, and new weapons were made, and
+the real expeditions through the island begun.
+
+During the first extended trip, the Professor was captured. Out of this
+misadventure grew some of the most remarkable series of events, but
+finally, they were successful in rescuing four more of their former
+companions, and two of John's shipwrecked companions.
+
+The capture of the Chief, formerly alluded to, and the subsequent rescue
+of a chief who was about to be offered up as a sacrifice, served as a
+means to bring two of the tribes to the rescue of those in the
+expedition, and the Professor, by his wisdom, was able to enlist the
+services of the tribe which had captured him.
+
+The events which lead directly up to the beginning of this volume were
+brought about by the enmity of two of the most bitter and vindictive
+tribes, which compelled the Professor and the boys to form an expedition
+against those hostiles, in which four other tribes assisted.
+
+They captured the Chief, and rescued two of their former companions, and
+then built a town called Unity, where the advantages of civilization
+were taught the natives, and to which place many of the families of the
+natives emigrated.
+
+All the chiefs formed an alliance of peace, and the Professor was made
+the chief magistrate. After peace and order had been restored, the boys
+again began to long for home. Prior to this they had determined to build
+a ship large enough to take them to the nearest shipping point, and they
+were now feverishly engaged in the work with the aid of the natives, who
+were eager to learn how the white men built the wonderful things which
+they saw all about them.
+
+It will, therefore, be understood, that the remarks of George, at the
+opening of this chapter, had reference to the fact that the most
+important of the islands, or the ones having the most of the treasures
+could not be the one on which they resided, but pertained to some other
+localities.
+
+"Well, if there is anything I am interested in, it is to know why the
+wonderful buildings we found at the Illyas' village were put up at that
+place, and what caused all trace of them to be lost," said Harry, after
+George had expressed his last opinion.
+
+"Do you remember what John said, after we came out of the cave below the
+village?"
+
+"No; what was it!"
+
+"He said the copper in the cave might explain it."
+
+After the capture of the last tribe, John demanded that the Chief inform
+them of the location of the Hoodoo, or Medicine Men of the tribe, and
+he reluctantly consented, but the Chief warned them, that to attempt to
+enter the cave would mean Death.
+
+John knew that the Chief and the people believed the death tales told by
+the Medicine Men, as it was tales of this kind which enabled them to
+maintain such a hold on the people. In order to destroy the power of
+those people, who really had been the cause of much of their troubles,
+John announced that he would take the Chief and his followers to the
+cave, and that he would then go into the cave alone, and come out again,
+to prove that the Medicine Men had lied to him.
+
+John entered the cave, and single-handed captured the Krishnos, as they
+were called, and brought them out, thus verifying his statement that
+those men had deceived the people. Soon thereafter John and the boys
+entered the cave, which, from the description he had, contained an
+immense amount of treasure, but they were unable to discover any trace
+of it if it existed.
+
+By accident the calcareous deposit was broken off at one part in their
+search, and below was found a dark material, which, after examination,
+was found to be copper. It was not in its native state, but was a
+product produced by smelting the ore, and they uncovered an immense
+quantity of it, sufficient to show that the portion of the cave in which
+it was found was really a storehouse.
+
+Not more than a mile away was the Native village, where they held the
+tribe captive. The village was absolutely unlike anything else in the
+form of habitations found in the island. Three of the buildings were
+large structures, built in three of the well-known types of
+architecture, and the other parts of the village were laid off
+regularly.
+
+Surrounding the village was a strong embankment, as though originally
+used as a fortification, and the village itself was located on the side
+of a hill, betokening sanitary considerations.
+
+"But I do not see," observed George, "what the copper in the cave had to
+do with the town?"
+
+"Nor do I," responded Harry. "Suppose we see John at the first
+opportunity. There are other things besides the copper I would like to
+know. John has asked every one that he has come into contact with about
+the different wrecks that have come ashore within the past two years,
+and no one seems to have any idea that more than two of the
+_Investigator's_ boats came ashore."
+
+"Well, if they did it isn't at all likely that they could come to the
+southern shore, when the wrecked vessel was to the north of the island."
+
+"It is just for that reason," responded George, "that I believe we shall
+find other islands in the vicinity, and who knows but some of the boats
+reached those islands?"
+
+"I am with you," said Harry. "Shall we talk to John about it?"
+
+"By all means. But stop! Why not have a talk with the Professor first?"
+
+"Good idea. We owe everything to him."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+A MYSTERIOUS MESSAGE
+
+
+The town of Unity was located about ten miles from the sea, on a little
+stream, which had a waterfall, from which they derived the power for
+turning the machinery which had been put up. This consisted of a saw
+mill, a small foundry, a machine shop, as well as grist mill and other
+mechanism suitable for a town.
+
+All these enterprises were now being operated by the natives. The
+leading commercial genius of the town was Blakely, who was one of the
+owners of the vessel on which John had sailed from San Francisco, and
+which was also wrecked by the same monsoon which sent the schoolship
+_Investigator_ to the bottom.
+
+It was Blakely's idea that the work of the natives could be profitably
+turned to raising coffee, cocoa, and the different fibres which
+naturally grew all over the island, and in order to take advantage of
+the crops which could be grown there it would be necessary to open
+communication with the outside world.
+
+To do this meant that they must build a ship, and thus reach
+civilization, and vessels could then bring such things to the islands as
+the natives could use, and take away the produce that the natives could
+turn out.
+
+Such a plan was one which was heartily seconded by all the boys, who,
+although they had been engaged in the most wonderful experiences, were
+homesick, and longed to see their parents in the States, and thus
+relieve them of their anxiety, after an absence of more than two years.
+
+It was with a will that all took a hand in the work, and the ship was
+nearing completion. They had no facilities for making a large engine, so
+the vessel was a sailer, with a small propeller, and the largest size
+engine they could turn out was to be used as an auxiliary.
+
+The next evening while the Professor, John and the boys were together,
+Harry brought up the subject of the talk of the previous evening.
+
+"George and I have been talking about making a voyage of discovery."
+
+The Professor looked at Harry with that genial smile which the boys had
+learned to love. Without answering for the moment, the old man turned to
+John, as the latter's face lit up.
+
+"I thought you boys were homesick?" he said.
+
+"Well, yes," answered George. "But only for a little while."
+
+"Only homesick for a little while?" and the Professor's hearty laugh
+followed.
+
+"I mean we are homesick,--that is, we can be cured of it in a little
+while."
+
+Without relaxing that broad smile, the Professor continued: "I suppose
+you want to be cured before you go on the voyage of discovery? Is that
+it?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"But what do you expect to discover!" asked John, gravely.
+
+"Just what you suggested on one occasion," said Harry.
+
+"We want to know where the treasures are on the islands," remarked
+George.
+
+"Then, there is another thing," ventured Harry. "I don't think all the
+boats of our ship were lost, and it is likely that they found refuge on
+some other island."
+
+"But how do you know there are other islands near here?" asked the
+Professor.
+
+"Well, I don't know, only from what John has said."
+
+John looked at Harry for a moment quizzically, and then said: "When did
+I say so?" he asked with a smile.
+
+"When you told about the charts of the treasure caves."
+
+"But we have found them, haven't we?"
+
+"Yes; but not all of them."
+
+"That is true; and your argument is correct. Unquestionably, there are
+other islands, probably not in the immediate vicinity, but near enough
+that they could have caught some of the boats. I quite agree with you
+that we ought to make the attempt. The Professor and I have just been
+talking of taking up the matter in order to relieve any who might have
+been so unfortunate as to be east away."
+
+"I am surprised," said the Professor, "that you are not through with
+treasure hunting, and want some more of it."
+
+"But you know, Professor, that some of the most interesting times we had
+were during the investigations we made at the big cave at the Cataract
+on Wonder Island!"
+
+"Quite true; but think of the immense riches you now have. In the vault
+beneath the floor of the main shop you have the combined treasure of the
+two caves," continued the Professor.
+
+"Yes; and that shall be taken back by you to your homes in the States,
+and you will want to enjoy it," and John said this with a most sincere
+air, as he looked at the boys.
+
+"That would be nice," said Harry reflectively. "But if we are there the
+only thing we can do is to spend it, and there is no particular fun in
+doing that."
+
+"What? No fun in spending the money?" exclaimed the Professor.
+
+"Why, we haven't spent a cent since we have been here, and we have
+enjoyed every hour of the time, except--except--" and George hung his
+head for a moment.
+
+"I know," said the dear old Professor; "I know what you mean. Home still
+has a warm place in your heart. That is right. You must see your home,
+and then,--"
+
+"Then we want to come back," broke in Harry.
+
+"It makes me happy to see that the lessons of the past while we have
+been together has impressed on your minds one thing; that it is not
+riches which give happiness."
+
+"I know that," said Harry. "When I go out and see these poor people
+here, and I meet smiles on every face, and a welcome everywhere, the
+thought that we have tried to make them feel and know that wars were
+wrong, and that true happiness consists in trying to make others happy,
+it gives me more pleasure than all the gold which we took from the caves
+of the Buccaneers."
+
+"Yes, and there is another thing, that I have been thinking about," said
+George. "I really don't think the people here are so bad, and never have
+thought so."
+
+"Well, they have been doing some pretty bad things," remarked John. "I
+would like to know what makes you think as you do."
+
+"I mean, that if it wasn't for certain classes, like the Krishnos, say,
+the people would not be trying to sacrifice each other. Those fellows
+are the ones who lie to the people, just as the fellows at the last cave
+told the people and the Chiefs that if they went into the cave the Great
+Spirit would destroy them."
+
+John and the Professor both laughed, while the boys looked on. There did
+not seem to be anything amusing about that, and they wondered why they
+should laugh at George's remark.
+
+"Did it ever occur to you how like that is to the white man's way of
+doing things?" asked John.
+
+"I never thought of that!" said Harry.
+
+"Do the white people act that way, too?" inquired George. "I never knew
+that we had people who tried to deceive others so they could give them
+up as a sacrifice?"
+
+"What do you think the Krishnos deceive the people for?" asked the
+Professor.
+
+"So as to give them the power," answered George.
+
+"Quite true. But what is the object of that power?"
+
+"So they can rule?"
+
+"Yes; but what gives them the power to rule?"
+
+"Oh, I see now! They get paid for it! And that is why the Krishnos have
+all the best things, and are better cared for than even the chiefs are?"
+
+"You have given the right answer. The Krishnos don't want to sacrifice
+human life because they love to do it, but because in the doing of it
+they inspire fear, and through fear they can get what they want."
+
+"But, Professor, you haven't yet told us how that is like the white
+people do it."
+
+"In exactly the same way. The Krishnos own the big gun factories, and
+they tell the chiefs that the people across the river, or on the other
+side of the mountain are going to rise up against them, and they must
+arm the people and attack them. You see the white man's Krishnos have a
+great cave, called a gun factory, and while he does not want to offer up
+any sacrifices for the love of it, he does so because it is his business
+to make guns, and ammunition, and shells which explode with terrific
+force, and destroy hundreds at every shot."
+
+"Well, after all, we are not much better than the savages here, are
+we?" said Harry, as he looked around, with a sad expression.
+
+"We have advanced a little beyond them," interpolated John. "We have
+tried to systematize the killing. The savage goes at it without regard.
+But the white man has set rules to conduct the slaughter. Of course, the
+rules do not say that they shall not kill but it does point out the
+impolite ways of killing."
+
+The Professor smiled at this homely way of putting it, but the boys
+looked doubtfully at John's exposition, and then George ventured to
+remark: "I can see the force of it, and it is my opinion that the savage
+way is, after all, the most reasonable."
+
+"If it is not the most reasonable," answered the Professor, "it is
+certainly the most logical. But we are getting away from our subject. I
+understand from what John says that within the next week we shall be
+able to launch the vessel!"
+
+"Yes," answered Harry. "Everything is now so far ahead that in two weeks
+more we can be ready to sail."
+
+"That is well. I hear there is considerable rivalry among the men to go
+with you?"
+
+"But aren't you going with us?" asked George in a voice of alarm.
+
+"No; my place is here. I have no desire to go back. I have induced John,
+much against his will, I know, to go with you, but I cannot leave my
+people here. I will welcome you only the more gladly when you return."
+
+Harry was almost in tears, as he said: "But we wanted you to go back
+with us so we could take you to our homes and let our people see you.
+They would be so happy to see you and to hear you talk."
+
+"Thank you so much for the kind invitation. Sometime in the future, when
+everything is properly settled here, and I can see my way clear, I will
+consider it an honor to visit your homes, and enjoy the friendship of
+your dear ones; but not now."
+
+The door opened quietly, and Angel stepped in, Angel being the
+Orang-outang to which we have alluded. He was now nearly as tall as
+George. He gravely shambled over to the Professor, and placed an
+envelope in his hand.
+
+Angel was the most wonderful character in that community. He was the pet
+and the playmate of all the children. No one dared to harm him or offer
+an insult. Such a thing would have caused an insurrection in that town.
+
+While he could not speak, he could understand practically everything
+that was told him. Daily he performed many extraordinary tasks, thanks
+to the training and care that George had bestowed upon him from the day
+he had become a captive.
+
+The Professor opened the envelope, and adjusted his glasses. As he read
+his eyes opened wider and wider, while John and the boys drew closer.
+While reading one of the sheets the Professor was slowly unfolding a
+scrap of dark colored material, smaller than the sheet he was reading.
+
+"What is it?" asked Harry.
+
+"The letter is from Blakely," he said as he passed the papers to John.
+"And what do you think it is about?"
+
+All eagerly peered at the letter and then at the brown missive, whatever
+it was.
+
+"Read it aloud," said the Professor.
+
+John handed it to George, and this is Blakely's letter:
+
+                                                   "SOUTH MOUNTAIN,
+                                                        Below Illya.
+
+  "My Dear Professor:
+
+    "I felt sure that my view as to the character of the mountain range
+  below the town was correct. Copper outcroppings were found as far
+  south as the range can be seen, and there is also silver in abundance.
+  This will surely be a profitable field for the natives. Yesterday,
+  while prospecting on the southeastern side of the main ridge, I was
+  surprised to find a part of a metal pot, evidently of cast iron. Quite
+  a number of articles, of no particular value were lying near, but
+  within the fragment of the pot, and protected by a shale of rock, was
+  the enclosed scrap, which I thought might interest you, as you have a
+  leaning in the direction of finding out hidden and abstruse things.
+  Probably, you can decipher what it says. All the men are well, and are
+  feeling jolly. We may be ready to return in a week. I hope the old
+  ship is coming along all right.
+
+                                              "Hurriedly, as ever,
+
+                                                        "BLAKELY."
+
+"That is satisfactory. Blakely is the right man for his job," remarked
+John.
+
+"Now, let us see what the scrap has to say," said the Professor.
+
+John held the scrap up to the light, and all peered at it. "I think
+there are cross lines on it, although I am not quite sure," he said, as
+he again held it up so the light could flash through it.
+
+"What difference would that make whether it had or it hadn't cross
+lines?" asked Harry.
+
+"Simply this: I wanted to satisfy myself whether or not it was taken
+from a ship's pad, which is generally ruled both ways."
+
+"What is the object of having paper ruled both ways?"
+
+"It is a convenient way of making calculations where measurements are
+necessary, as is the case in figuring out and placing the different
+celestial marks which guide the sailors. I think this is a marine pad.
+Now, let us see what it contains, before we go further."
+
+"See the name signed at the bottom," cried out George. "W-a-l-t. That
+must be a 't'. But the rest is blurred."
+
+"I wonder if that isn't Walter?" said Harry.
+
+"Who is Walter?" asked John.
+
+"Walter? Why he is the man who signed the note we found on the
+_Investigator's_ life boat No. 3 and from whom we have never heard."
+
+"I remember now," said John, reflectively. "He mentioned Wright who was
+one of my companions. But I did not know Walter,--but what is this?" All
+craned forward now. "Here is a line; it looks like a large V, pointing
+to the south;--that is if the upper part of the paper is the north."
+
+"There is some sort of tracing on it," said George.
+
+"Your eyesight is good, George, see if you can see any figures on the
+sheet that will explain the V, and the reason for the name below."
+
+"There is the slightest sign of a figure, or a word just below the point
+of the V. It looks like '30'. This seems to be an arrow, which points to
+the right diagonally."
+
+"Now you boys have something to occupy your minds. Yon have been
+interested in the Walter note for a year; now is the time to do some
+investigating."
+
+"I have an idea," said Harry, jumping up. "Where can we find the
+original Walter's note? We can compare the signature, and that will tell
+whether it is Walter or not."
+
+The Professor smiled as he noticed the eagerness of the boys. They
+rushed out of the room and went over to the shop to reclaim the note
+that had given them so much concern fourteen months before.
+
+When they had gone John said: "I presume you have already guessed what
+the note contains?"
+
+"Unquestionably it has reference to the location of the main ledge of
+copper or other ore which is measured from some point in that vicinity,
+and which may be determined later on by noting the place where the
+missive was found, or from some natural landmark."
+
+"That is my view, but I felt it would be better for the boys to dig it
+out for themselves," replied John.
+
+The wonderful nature of the instruction which the boys had obtained
+during their stay on the island, was characterized by this little
+incident. Everything learned by one's own exertions is not only more
+valuable because of that fact, but the facts thus gleaned will leave a
+stronger impress upon the mind.
+
+The boys thus learned by doing things themselves, that they became
+strong and self reliant, and it made them happy to think that they were
+able to pick up the threads, however tangled, and weave them into a
+harmonious whole. It is the secret of doing things well.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE ARROW ON THE SHEET
+
+
+When the boys reached their rooms they set to work to decipher the
+colored paper. It was about four by six inches in size, and had been
+folded twice, as the creases plainly showed. Assuring themselves that it
+was paper which had been crossruled, as suggested by John, they tried to
+decipher the straggling letters and form them into some coherent form.
+
+The paper had the following appearance when they received it:
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 1. The Mysterious Message._]
+
+The words, or parts of words "dire," in the first line, and "30 gues" in
+the second line, together with the letters "Walt" are the only
+absolutely clear things to be noticed.
+
+"The writing is right across the V-shaped marks, and the arrow is plain
+enough. It may be though, that the arrow has nothing to do with the
+V-shaped mark." And George held the paper away from his eyes to get the
+proper effect at a distance.
+
+"I wonder how close the mountain is to the sea?" ventured Harry.
+
+"I don't see what difference that would make," replied George. "That
+_30_ must mean some measurement. It is either feet, or miles, or yards,
+or,--"
+
+"Why can't you see that 'gues' is a part of the word 'leagues.'"
+
+Harry jumped up as though shot. "Well, that was stupid of us, sure
+enough."
+
+"With that key before us, we can make some headway. I believe the
+V-shape is the lower end of the mountain, probably a headland, and the
+arrow points to a place 30 leagues to the,--see here, in the last line
+is a W. and there is a blur before it and after it. That may be SWE,
+EWS, SWW, SWS, and,--"
+
+"Don't go so fast," shrieked Harry. "What do you suppose the capital I
+stands for at the beginning of the third line?"
+
+"I--I--, why,--_Island_, of course," said George, with an air of
+superiority. "But it cannot be west."
+
+"Well, the arrow points southeast."
+
+"How do you know?" asked George, dubiously.
+
+"Why, that word at the extreme top must be 'north,' and if so then the
+arrow is pointing south, and the 'W' belongs to something in that
+direction."
+
+"There, in the second line is a word that looks like 'land.' Can it be a
+part of the word 'Island'?"
+
+"It doesn't seem so, as there is too much space before the letters. It
+seems to me though, that it reads 'land 30 leagues' but what does 'se'
+mean?"
+
+The boys were up late that night, and they went to bed with the missive
+still unsolved. Before retiring Harry said: "Let us wait until daylight.
+The sun may help us out."
+
+When they awoke the first thing that occurred to George was the original
+Walter letter, so that the writing could be compared. It was found, and
+George came in with an exultant bound.
+
+"I am sure now that it was Walter. Here it is." The original letter was
+as follows:
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 2. Walter Letter._
+  Go directly south from the large river which flows to the east,
+  west of the mountains. We are too closely watched to escape. The
+  tribe at war with our captors are to the west of. If I escape I
+  will follow the river to the sea so you will understand where I am.
+                                             Walter. ]
+
+"Compare the two and you will see they look alike," said George.
+
+"What shall we tell the Professor!" asked Harry.
+
+"Well but I am not yet through with the paper. Suppose we moisten it,
+and that may bring out something we didn't see before."
+
+This was done, but it made the entire document worse than before.
+
+"Too bad we have spoiled it," remarked Harry, "but I think we are safe
+in telling the Professor and John what we have found out."
+
+For the time being, however, the boys had other urgent work to do. The
+day for launching had been set, and every working hour was valuable, so
+they were over at the ship yard early, and the boys did not see either
+John or the Professor during the day.
+
+The vessel as designed by Harry, and supervised by John, was ninety feet
+long, and had a beam of eighteen feet, with a very deep keel, and high
+bulwarks. It was constructed of a species of oak, found in abundance in
+the forest west of the town, and was cut up into boards, and dried in
+specially-prepared kilns which were put up for the purpose.
+
+While lumber dried in this way is not the best for ordinary uses, it
+will serve for shipping purposes, because there is always more or less
+moisture present in the hull of the vessel, and the object was to enable
+them to get the material in the speediest way.
+
+The saw mill was one of their first experiments in building machinery,
+and it was in constant service from the day it was first erected,
+getting out lumber for building purposes.
+
+The engine was designed only for auxiliary purposes, and the boiler was
+intended to use coal, of which they found an ample supply in the
+northern portion of the island, as explained in a previous book.
+
+When the boys returned to their rooms late that afternoon, the first
+thing that interested them was the message. When it was brought in it
+was dry, and a slight change was noticed in its appearance. Now, what
+appeared to be the first word of the message, was discernible, the word
+"Take," and the word "Head" could be made out before and as a part of
+"land," in the second line.
+
+"We have it," cried Harry, as he jumped up. "Now let them know about
+it."
+
+They were across the open space, without any ceremony, and without
+taking trouble to announce themselves, were in the Professor's room.
+
+"We have it,--we have made it out," was the announcement, as Harry held
+up the message.
+
+"Does it tell you where the Copper mine is located?" asked the
+Professor.
+
+"Copper mine!" exclaimed George. "What has a copper mine to do with it?"
+
+"John and I concluded, from certain markings on the paper, that it
+contained a diagram of the mine!"
+
+"Well, you were mistaken," said Harry with a chuckle. "It is something
+about an island, thirty leagues to the southeast, somewhere."
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed the Professor in surprise. "Get John. He will be
+surprised."
+
+John came hurriedly at the announcement, and the contents of the missive
+pointed out. "This is certainly good news," he said. "That was fine work
+on your part."
+
+"You see the arrow, and the part of the word 'leagues.' That couldn't
+mean feet or yards, or miles."
+
+"Quite evident," said John, as he mused for a while. "This confirms, in
+a measure, the information that we have as to the proximity of these
+islands, but the charts show them farther away."
+
+"Undoubtedly, if Walter knew what he was talking about, we have an
+interesting problem to decipher, and the determination to make the
+voyage is a wise and timely one," interposed the Professor.
+
+"Now for the ship," said Harry. "Every day is a hundred, in my mind."
+
+As may be imagined, the boys now worked with feverish haste. Other
+islands here, and waiting for them! Sometimes they were almost tempted
+to give up the trip home, but the Professor would not hear of it.
+
+"Do not change your plans, if you have any good conclusions when you
+start out. Don't oscillate from one thing to another. Always make up
+your minds and then take a wise, persistent course. It is that which
+always serves you best."
+
+"No; we will go home first, and _then_ for the islands," said Harry, who
+felt relieved that the impetuous nature of George could be brought to
+their way of thinking, although George was by far the most homesick of
+the entire lot.
+
+All the boys were on hand when the vessel was launched. It rode the
+water beautifully, and the natives were the most enthusiastic helpers.
+They felt proud of their work. Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were
+the most prominent men in the community, and particularly Sutoto, the
+intelligent Beree, and Stut, the brother-in-law of Muro, were on hand.
+
+It was a great feast day for the people. Tears actually flowed from the
+Professor's eyes, as he saw the women and children crowd about him. He
+was almost a God to them. They were accustomed to receive visits from
+him in his weekly rounds, and how at such times he loved to tell them
+how to make and arrange things about the house, which contributed to
+their comfort.
+
+Everybody was at work; all were happy, and no one appreciated this more
+than the women, who had been lifted out of the bonds of slavery and
+elevated through the wise administration of the Professor.
+
+Angel, too, was in evidence. He was the first to climb the mast, as the
+ship floated in the stream.
+
+"I wonder whether Angel remembers the first trip he took with us on boat
+No. 1?" asked Harry.
+
+Angel bestowed a knowing look on Harry. "I believe he knows what you
+said," remarked George.
+
+In another week the rigging had been put up, and the boiler and engine
+were installed before the launching, so that the necessary work
+required to enable the ship to sail, was the provisioning. John
+suggested that what was of far more importance would be the work of
+training a crew to handle the ship, so they turned their minds toward
+the solution of this question.
+
+The selection of a crew was a most difficult task, because all the men
+were willing to volunteer. It was decided, however, that only the
+unmarried men should be taken, and this at once eliminated many who
+might otherwise have been selected.
+
+For three days the ship was taken out to sea, under sail only, and John
+found no trouble in maneuvering the vessel with his new crew. John was a
+sailor, and had once been owner of a vessel, so that they were in
+competent hands.
+
+But the final day came, when they must go. It was a most trying time for
+the poor boys. Almost at the last moment, Harry and George walked back
+to the Professor's room, and broke out into tears.
+
+"Everybody is leaving you," said Harry, "and I cannot bear to go and
+leave you in this way."
+
+All the rescued boys were on board, as well as Blakely, since the
+Professor had insisted that the latter should go, for business reasons,
+so that the Professor was left alone, the only white man on Wonder
+Island, when the ship sailed down the river.
+
+True, there was no reason to fear for his safety. The natives loved him
+too devotedly, but the boys felt that he must often be lonely in his new
+surroundings, with no one but the natives about him. They little knew
+that the solace and comfort of the grand old man was the knowledge that
+he had helped his fellow man, though the color of the skin was darker
+than his own.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Their voyage was accompanied by favoring winds and perfect weather.
+Valparaiso, Chile, was the first port at which they landed, and as a
+trip around the Horn, or even through the Straits of Magellan, and up
+along the Atlantic coast, would mean several months, with their own
+vessel, they shipped in one of the line steamers, and within seven weeks
+they saw Sandy Hook lightship, and then the forts which lined the
+opposite shore at the Narrows.
+
+Telegrams to their parents created paroxysms of joy in many homes which
+had been robbed when the _Investigator_ went down. There were no happier
+homes than the ones Harry and George were welcomed to.
+
+The papers told the stories of the boys in pages and pages of
+descriptions, and they showed the photos, and told what the boys had
+done in their temporary home. The hero of all this wonderful home-coming
+was Angel.
+
+The people, the houses, the wonderful automobiles which he saw on every
+hand, at first alarmed him, but when he saw that George did not seem a
+bit afraid, he reconciled himself to the situation.
+
+His first automobile ride was a revelation to him. He held on tightly to
+George, at first, but soon the sensation became one of joy, and he could
+not get enough of it. The boys were certainly feted, but when they told
+their parents that they must go back, the proposition met with strong
+opposition.
+
+The parents forgot that the boys were now over two years older than when
+they went away, and it seemed singular that the surroundings did not
+seem the same to them as before the happy boyhood days before they left
+home.
+
+For business reasons the parents knew that it would be prudent to permit
+them to return and they were influenced by the remarkable change they
+saw in the manners and actions of the boys. They saw the youths were
+strong and self reliant, ever ready to act and to carry out their
+resolutions. These boys had been transformed into men.
+
+They spent many days going over old scenes and visiting friends. They
+enjoyed to the utmost the reunion with their families, but they could
+not cease talking about the Professor. They now realized in full what he
+had been to them, and what his example and teaching meant to them. There
+was really a feeling amounting almost to jealousy on the part of the
+people at home against the Professor, but it was not one of bitterness.
+
+One who could exert such a healthy influence on the lives of the young,
+as he possessed, was worthy of the adulation that the boys bestowed. But
+John was not forgotten in these periods of happiness.
+
+They were never happy when telling the tales of their adventures except
+when John was present, and the latter was the most sought-for
+individual, because when he once began to tell some of his vivid tales
+the people would not let him stop.
+
+Finally the time for departure came. A merry party gathered upon the
+dock when the explorers were about to depart. They would write at least
+once a month, as Blakely had assured them that he would arrange to have
+a steamer run a round trip each four weeks, to take care of the
+commodities which would be made up by the natives.
+
+The steamship _Panama_ slowly moved out into the bay, and the boys
+remembered the memorable event which took place at that same dock thirty
+months before. Then they left with a sort of half joy in their hearts,
+and now they were going away to finish up the great adventures which
+they had started when they reached the island of Wonder.
+
+All hearts were anxious as the ship neared Valparaiso, because there
+they would leave the liner from New York, and again ship in the boat
+they had built. They keenly scanned the pier as the vessel was being
+warped in.
+
+"Ah! there is Blakely on the dock," said Harry.
+
+"But I don't see the _Pioneer_ here!" responded George.
+
+_Pioneer_ was the name of the vessel they had built, and which brought
+them to that port from their island home.
+
+The moment the vessel came alongside the dock, George called to Blakely:
+"Where is our boat?"
+
+"At Wonder Island," was the reply.
+
+"At Wonder Island?" said Harry, and the boys looked at each other in
+amazement. And now they must wait several weeks, probably, until it
+returns. This was disappointing, indeed.
+
+The boys rushed off. "And where shall we go now?" asked Harry.
+
+"Over to our ship," replied Blakely.
+
+They followed his gaze to a dock beyond, where lay a beautiful vessel, a
+steamer, all decked out with flags.
+
+"Is that our vessel!"
+
+"Yes, and I have been to Wonder Island on her since you left. We just
+arrived two days ago. We are ready to steam out within two hours."
+
+"Then don't let us waste a moment's time," said Harry.
+
+"I thought you might want to take a look over the town," said Blakely.
+
+"I have no wish to do so, as long as we have the islands in view,"
+remarked George. "And how is the Professor," he continued in an eager
+tone.
+
+"He is well and happy. But I have no doubt he longs for you, as he
+frequently goes over to your rooms, and wanders around the shop, a thing
+which he never did while you were there."
+
+This was joyful news to the boys. How they longed to sail up Enterprise
+River. The steamer which Blakely had bought, and which was destined to
+ply between Wonder Island and the nearest trans-shipping point, was
+called the _Wonder_, a thing which the boys had not noticed until they
+were nearing the vessel.
+
+It was a saucy little steamer, and as they drew near Blakely said: "What
+speed do you think she will make?"
+
+"Fifteen miles at least," remarked Harry.
+
+"I am guaranteed eighteen miles an hour at the least."
+
+"Isn't that fine," said George. "What does she burn?"
+
+"Either wood, coal or petroleum."
+
+"Now would be the time to look up the oil deposits on the island,"
+remarked Harry.
+
+Within an hour the ship was under way, greatly to the delight of the
+boys.
+
+Notwithstanding the ship was sent forward under full steam, the speed
+was far too slow for the impatient boys. They were on the bridge most of
+the time with the Captain who had been employed to run the vessel. He
+proved to be a jolly, red-faced tar, who loved the antics of the boys.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE SKULL WITH THE CRYPTIC WRITING
+
+
+It was at the latter part of May when the _Wonder_ steamed up the broad
+river which led to the town of Unity. When they were within two miles of
+the town, where they could begin to see the beautiful white houses in
+the distance, Blakely came up to the bridge, and suggested that it would
+be time to give the town a salute.
+
+The Captain gave the order and the great whistle began to make a
+horrible din, and kept it up for a full half mile. Long before the boat
+came into sight of the dock itself the boys could see the people of the
+town hurrying down to the wharf.
+
+When they saw the boys on the bridge pandemonium was let loose.
+
+"This looks and acts just like a real American town," said Harry.
+
+"See the Professor," said Harry, as he rushed to the end of the bridge,
+and frantically waved his hat.
+
+The plank was swung and fastened, and the crew of natives rushed off and
+met their friends, but George and Harry were not permitted to walk down
+the gang plank. The joy at seeing them again was so intense that the
+people took them on their shoulders, and the Professor had a hard time
+to get near enough to grasp them and bid a welcome.
+
+The people marveled at the boys. They were dressed up in regulation
+American style, and the Professor asked them if they had brought the
+"latest" cuts to put in the show windows.
+
+Everybody followed, and the bantering and cheering made a continuous
+performance for them until they reached their home. All the chiefs were
+there, dressed up for the occasion, and what delighted them more than
+anything else was the fact that the Krishnos, the former witch doctors
+of the tribes, and who were now the teachers for the children, were the
+first to offer congratulations on their return.
+
+There was no work in the town that day. Everybody determined to
+celebrate, and it was with hearts full of joy that the boys witnessed
+the demonstrations in their behalf.
+
+"Isn't this a glorious home-coming?" said George. "It was worth the trip
+here to witness it."
+
+"It does seem strange to call it a 'home-coming,' but that is just what
+it is," answered Harry. "How happy the people are. They seem to
+appreciate everything that has been done for them, and it is such a
+pleasure to do things for those who appreciate it."
+
+The stories which John brought to the Professor were so beguiling that
+he promised the boys that he would probably be able during the next year
+to make a visit with them to their homes, and this delighted them beyond
+measure.
+
+Although they had been absent four months, they noted many improvements
+made during their absence. The boys, on their own initiative, visited
+many of the homes, and talked to the people, and told them of the visit
+home. And how those simple people enjoyed this kindly act, and cherished
+it for months afterwards.
+
+But it was now time to think seriously of the contemplated voyage of
+discovery, which was ever uppermost in the minds of the boys. While
+conversing on the subject a few evenings after their return, Harry
+remarked: "I suppose we must use the _Pioneer_ for our trip, as the
+_Wonder_ will have to make the regular trips?"
+
+"John and I think that would be the wisest plan. The native sailors are
+now well adapted to handle her, and do you know that Sutoto sailed her
+around the island?"
+
+This was pleasing to the boys, who liked Sutoto.
+
+"And who are the others that went with him?"
+
+"Why Lolo was one of them, and Stut and Chump. Oh, they had a jolly
+time; so they said, and I can believe it, because they are simply crazy
+to make another trip." And the Professor beamed as he related many of
+the incidents which they told him of their experiences.
+
+While they were talking, Sutoto appeared, and was immediately admitted.
+After some talk, Sutoto said: "The Professor said that when you returned
+you would have some work for me with the _Pioneer_."
+
+"Yes, and you shall command her," said Harry.
+
+Sutoto could not but show his pleasure. "I knew you would come back, but
+so many here said you would not."
+
+At this point Professor explained that there were many rumors among the
+people to the effect that the boys would never again come back, and all
+showed grief at the news. I assured them that you were just as anxious
+to return as they were to have you and I then told Sutoto that I knew
+you had plans which would require his services, but I thought it would
+be more agreeable if you imparted the nature of it to him.
+
+The boys were not slow to outline the plans to him, but advised him to
+keep the information to himself, which he promised to do. It was enough
+for him to know that he would command the ship. It was this that induced
+Sutoto to take out the ship, and finally to circumnavigate the island,
+so as to try out the sailors and properly to fit them for the work when
+the boys returned.
+
+"Now that being settled, Sutoto, we are going to leave the work of
+provisioning the _Pioneer_ to you. We must take a supply of guns and
+ammunition, as well, and probably it would be wise to have a small troop
+of the best soldiers," was Harry's instruction.
+
+"Uraso wants to go. I am sure he would be the best one to take.
+
+"What will Muro say to that?" asked the Professor.
+
+"Oh, take him along, by all means," said George, "because I want Lolo to
+go with us."
+
+It was then settled that they were to take a small force, sufficient for
+immediate purposes, and if it was found that the islands discovered were
+too well settled with hostiles it would be an easy matter to remain
+aloof, or return for reinforcements.
+
+While arrangements were being made for the departure of the expedition
+Blakely informed the Professor that it would be good policy to make up
+part of the cargo of the _Wonder_ with copper, and that both vessels
+could proceed to the southeastern part of the island, and the men aboard
+could be used to transport the copper to the sea.
+
+In this way the expedition would serve a double purpose. No one
+attempted to go contrary to the wishes of Blakely on matters which
+touched upon the commercial ventures in which they were engaged.
+
+John was only too glad that Blakely had hit upon that idea, as he was
+anxious to visit that part of the coast, contiguous to the copper
+deposit, and what was more, he wanted to see the place where Blakely
+found the missive which the boys had translated.
+
+As there was still a week before the _Wonder_ would sail for its
+northern port of call, both of the ships wended their way to the east,
+skirting the coast as closely as possible, John on the _Pioneer_ with
+the boys.
+
+They now had an opportunity to see the Great South Mountains from the
+sea. They remembered when they last saw them on land, during the
+campaign against the Illyas, and also the wonderful village on the
+western side of the mountains. What would their present wanderings bring
+forth?
+
+That evening they landed within a cove, both vessels being brought as
+near the shore as possible.
+
+"We can safely go in close this evening, because the tide is now out,"
+said John.
+
+Sutoto, while he had navigated the vessel, and had shown remarkable
+skill, was, nevertheless, not well versed in tides and the action of the
+moon.
+
+Quick to learn, he asked John why the tides thus changed. John explained
+the reason that the tides flowed in and out twice during each
+twenty-four hours, or a little less than that time, so that high water,
+or low water would always be at a time a little later each day, and then
+stated that it would be an easy matter to so make the calculations that
+they would be able to tell ahead for a whole year just when during each
+day the highest or lowest water would be.
+
+While waiting on the ship during the hours of the evening they were
+interested in the magnificent fire flies which they saw on the shore and
+along the mountain side. This was not an unfamiliar sight to them as
+they had witnessed such scenes many times before.
+
+But now they saw such sights as they had never before observed. They
+must have been giant glow birds, because some of the lights flew at
+least hundreds of feet emitting continuous streams of light, and this
+was not all, many of the lights were colored, particularly red and blue
+or simply faint tinges of those tints.
+
+"I have often thought that there is nothing more wonderful than the fire
+fly," said George.
+
+"But what do you think makes it so wonderful?" asked John.
+
+"Well, I suppose the wonderful part is that it has strength enough to
+make a light," answered Harry.
+
+"No, the remarkable thing is that the light which it emits is absolutely
+cool. Experiments which have been made go to show that there is no heat.
+In every form of light which man has been able to produce thus far
+artificially, a great heat is evolved, and it would be a most valuable
+discovery to find out why these insects are able to do it without
+raising the temperature."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 3. The Fire-fly._]
+
+"But what difference does it make if heat is produced?" asked Harry.
+
+"The production of heat means the loss of power. The heat generated
+takes up more of the power than the light which is produced, so that it
+would be a great economy if the heat could be dispensed with."
+
+"But if there was no heat in the light produced would it make any
+difference in the lamps themselves?"
+
+"Unquestionably. The lamps would last much longer."
+
+"What are the things which must be learned in order to get the secret of
+cold light?"
+
+"Well, there are number of questions which must be determined. While it
+is known that the fire fly and the glow worm emit what is called a
+phosphorescent light, this fact is a mere prelude to the knowledge of
+what is the exact color of daylight."
+
+"Color of Daylight? Why, I supposed it was white."
+
+"But the light of the glow worm and fire fly are not white."
+
+They watched them, and soon appreciated that John's statement was true.
+
+"You asked what were some of the things to be solved? Well, to find out
+the secret of the phosphorescent glow. That is one thing. What is the
+best artificial light, is the next. Then, what substance will have the
+most intense glow when a current passes through it, and give out the
+least heat."
+
+"Well, has no one attempted to explain any of these things?"
+
+"Yes; many explanations have been offered, but all of them leave the
+subject dark somewhere." And John laughed as he saw that the boys
+appreciated his little attempt at witticism.
+
+"But the time will come when man will find out this, as everything in
+his way. When you think of it, that electricians, chemists,
+metallurgists, physiologists, engineers, physicists and microscopists,
+are all working on the problem, we should be able to extract the secret
+sooner or later."
+
+"I am going to have some of those fellows," shouted George, and when the
+natives on board heard the request of George there was a scramble for
+the boats, and John was delighted to give them instructions for
+capturing the insects.
+
+Early the next day the entire party landed, and Blakely, together with
+John and the boys, started for the high peak, the one visible for miles
+from the west, and which John and the boys often wished to visit.
+
+One of the things which the boys brought with them from the States, was
+a pair of strong glasses, and these were constantly in use.
+
+"What do you say to scaling that point?" said Harry.
+
+"Just what I have been thinking about," said George.
+
+Sutoto, who was with the party, showed by his glowing eyes that he
+wanted to be of the party. "Certainly you shall go," said Harry.
+
+"Before going we must visit the place where the Walter note was found,"
+called out John.
+
+The boys had forgotten this. "Most assuredly," answered George, "I had
+almost forgotten that."
+
+Blakely led the way up alongside the rugged cliff. "See that bluish
+green outcropping," he said as they were pulling themselves up.
+
+John stopped and chipped off some specimens. "Wonderful!" he exclaimed.
+"Better than anything I have ever found in Mexico. These hills remind me
+of the formation all along western Chihuahua, and through northeastern
+Sonora."
+
+The ledge on which they finally emerged was fully six hundred feet above
+sea level. When they turned around and viewed the sea below them, and
+saw the ships at anchor, they were delirious with joy. How Sutoto
+enjoyed the scene. He had never seen anything like it before and he was
+amazed and stupefied. He turned and grasped George by the hand. He was
+too full to speak.
+
+"But wait, Sutoto, until we get to the top," said Harry, as he saw his
+countenance. As they looked up at the top they wondered what they might
+see from the elevation.
+
+"Here is the spot," cried out Blakely. "This is the pot in which the
+message was found. And here is something that I dug up afterwards."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Inscription on the Skull._]
+
+The boys crowded around. It was a skull on which was engraved the
+characters ABCC, followed by a star.
+
+All looked at John, thinking he might offer some solution. He turned it
+over, and examined every portion. Not a word was spoken. "Tell me the
+exact position in which this was found," he asked, as he looked at
+Blakely.
+
+"The first thing I found was the pot, which was simply turned upside
+down, in exactly this way. This is the place. It rested on this flat
+stone. The skull was behind it on this upper shelf."
+
+"And was there nothing else on the shelf?"
+
+"Nothing whatever."
+
+John stooped down and carefully examined the shelf. All followed his
+motions. "Do you see that mark?" he said, pointing to a heavy scratch,
+which was now plain. "That mark is associated with the skull, if not
+with the message. I am unable at this time fully to decipher the marks
+on the skull, but I have an idea of the meaning."
+
+"I wonder if the scratch across that is in the same direction as the
+arrow in the letter?" asked George.
+
+"Unquestionably: let me see your glasses," and George unslung them as
+John took them and gazed long in the direction of the line on the shelf.
+
+He lowered the glasses and slowly shook his head. Something was forming
+itself in his mind, this was evident. He walked around the ledge and
+back again. Finally, he said: "I wish it were night, it might help to
+solve the riddle."
+
+"And why?" asked Harry.
+
+"Those letters have reference to the star which follows."
+
+"It seems to me to be a singular thing that anyone should leave this
+here in the hope or expectation that it could be a guide for any one,"
+remarked George.
+
+"There is certainly one explanation of that," answered John. "It is
+evident that the articles were placed there as a form of note to others,
+and it is a sort of cryptic sign, intelligible only to those who have
+the key. The fact that these signs are here denote several things, one
+of which is that something important, such, for instance, as treasures,
+or the location of hidden wealth, or the directions necessary to find
+mining lodes, or even to point out the direction and distances of other
+islands in the distance."
+
+"But," said Harry, "the fact that we have found these things here looks
+as though there were other parties besides Walter and that he was
+associated with them in some sort of enterprise."
+
+"Quite true; but I am not at all satisfied that the Walter note has
+anything to do with the skull. In fact there is every evidence to me
+that they are entirely disconnected with each other."
+
+This announcement was the most surprising to Blakely, who now added a
+few points of information. "I should have said that the skull was not
+exposed as you now see it on the shelf. After I went up the side of the
+hill, I returned and landed on the ledge, and then I noticed the skull
+through the apertures formed by the stones now lying at the side."
+
+"That is evidence to my mind, that Walter knew nothing of the existence
+of the skull at the time he left the message, and yet, singular as it
+may seem, both the skull and Walter's message point to the same thing."
+
+This announcement was certainly curious and interesting, and keyed up
+the listeners to a high pitch of expectation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE TRIP TO THE NEW ISLAND
+
+
+Exciting as were the events alluded to in the last chapter, the boys
+insisted on taking Sutoto to the top of the peak. John and Blakely
+gathered up the fragments, and when the boys left they were busily
+engaged in making careful measurements of the stone and ledges.
+
+It was not an easy task to gain the summit, but when they reached it,
+there was spread before them the most remarkable panorama. To the north
+they could see South River, the first stream they discovered when they
+came to the island.
+
+They looked on it almost lovingly. "If it were not for the mountain
+range to the north we could see clear to Cataract," said Harry.
+
+"The dear old place!" exclaimed George. Sutoto smiled. He had been
+there, and he shared the views of the boys.
+
+"Let me have the glasses," shouted Harry, as he adjusted them and turned
+to the west. "Unity," was the only thing he said, as he handed the
+glasses to Sutoto. The latter looked, and stepped back in surprise.
+George kept his eyes on Sutoto, as the latter bent forward in his
+eagerness to see the town which was now so plain to him, although more
+than fifty miles away.
+
+George leisurely took the glasses, as Sutoto said slowly, and with
+proper emphasis, "Wonderful! wonderful!"
+
+He turned the glasses to the southeast, hoping to catch a glimpse of the
+land of treasures, but they saw nothing but the wide open sea, calm and
+peaceful, and he wondered that it could ever be so angry and tempestuous
+as they had known it to be on two momentous occasions.
+
+They remained there for a long time, and viewed every portion of the
+island. When they descended they took a route leading to the west, and
+when nearly at the bottom, heard the unmistakable sounds of voices below
+them. For a moment the boys were alarmed, but Sutoto set up a shout, his
+quick ears having detected the voices of their friends. It was the first
+caravan load of copper which they were taking from the great cave near
+the Illyas' village.
+
+"Glory! we are near the Illyas' village," said Harry, as he stumbled
+down the mountain side, and saw the train of men with the loads.
+
+They would now do some more visiting. They must surely go over to the
+village where they captured the last of the hostile tribes. As they
+neared the village they were surprised to see Oma coming toward them. He
+greeted them like a monarch, and led them into the village.
+
+"I am glad to welcome you," he said. The boys were astounded at the
+words. This man, the most vindictive and bitter of all the tribesmen,
+had learned to speak, and showed by his actions that he was glad to
+welcome them.
+
+But when they came to the village, the surprise of the boys was so great
+that they could hardly speak. Instead of filth and uncleanliness
+everywhere, they saw carefully attended lawns, and houses, instead of
+huts. The people came out and greeted them with laughter.
+
+And then the boys recognized many of the men who had lived in Unity, and
+who had worked for them in the shops, and in the fields. The Chief then
+escorted them to the large building, the same one in which the Chief was
+captured by the boys, the year before.
+
+What a change! Formerly the furniture in the room was one jumbled mass
+of debris, and the household arrangements were only such as savage
+conditions warranted. Now, the large interior had been cut up into
+rooms, and they were furnished with comfortable belongings.
+
+The Chief saw the curiosity of the boys, and he read their thoughts.
+"You wonder at the difference? Yes; it is a difference. We owe it to
+that wonderful Chief, and to you, and to John."
+
+"Yes; John will be here soon," said George.
+
+"I have seen him. He will be here. We are preparing a great feast for
+him," and the boys opened their eyes and smiled as they heard this
+announcement.
+
+The people flocked about them, and the men who knew the boys were only
+too proud to be recognized by them. Thus they visited every nook and
+corner of the town, surprised and glad to see that the Chief had
+insisted on his people going to Unity and learning the ways of the white
+people.
+
+There was a further reason why the coming of John and of Blake was a
+joyous event. Oma had been informed that the great copper mines were to
+be opened in the mountains, which would insure work for every one, and
+that they would be able to buy every sort of luxury and enjoy all the
+comforts of the white people.
+
+Late that evening John and Blakely came accompanied by two hundred of
+the Illyas who had actually been engaged during the day in transporting
+copper from the cave to the hold of the _Wonder_.
+
+The feast and the celebration that night in a village which, only a few
+months before, was of the most savage character, was, indeed, a marvel.
+Oma could scarcely express himself with enough earnestness, and the
+women were following the boys with their eyes, and actually caressing
+them, in their eagerness to show appreciation.
+
+When the time came for them to leave, the Chief accompanied the men to
+the shore below South Mountain to witness their departure. Before they
+left the village, the things which had been brought there by the ships
+for the Illyas were placed in the Chief's storehouse, and Blakely paid
+the members of the party who had assisted them. This, also, was the
+occasion for much rejoicing.
+
+Blakely, on board the _Wonder_, waved an adieu to the boys and John as
+the boats separated, and Sutoto gave the order to sail directly
+southeast.
+
+During the afternoon the sea was calm and afforded a beautiful sail, but
+during the night a strong breeze came up and its intensity varied during
+the night. The next day, however, the sea became choppy, and over
+two-thirds of the natives were rolling around on the deck in the agonies
+of sea-sickness.
+
+"This will give us an opportunity to try the new cure for the malady,"
+said John.
+
+"What is that?" asked George.
+
+"Simply atrophine."
+
+"How is it administered?"
+
+"By injecting it."
+
+"What is atrophine?" asked Harry.
+
+"It is a crystalline, bitter and poisonous alkaloid, taken from the
+deadly nightshade, and the same principle is also found in the thorn
+apple."
+
+"Isn't it the same as belladonna?" remarked George.
+
+"No; but belladonna is also an extract of nightshade."
+
+"Have you any of it here?"
+
+"Yes; I brought some, together with the other drugs that the Professor
+ordered, and I am anxious to try it. The remedy was discovered by Prof.
+Fischer, of Munich, and also simultaneously by Dr. Reginald Pollard, of
+South Kensington, England."
+
+Accompanied by the boys John went among the sufferers, and administered
+the medicine, giving at each injection about 1-64th of a grain. It was
+remarkable in its effects. Within a half hour the sickening feeling in
+the stomach disappeared, the eyes began to grow bright again, the pulse
+full, and the patient became strong and vigorous.
+
+None of them objected to John's ministrations. Their confidence in his
+ability was sufficient for them and the results justified their faith.
+
+When the boys came on deck in the morning, they strained their eyes
+looking toward the horizon for land but there was no land in sight. John
+was already on deck and he smiled as he saw them ascend the ladder. "And
+where is your island?" he asked.
+
+"How far have we gone?"
+
+"We have been driven somewhat out of our course, it is true; but we are
+more than a hundred miles from Wonder Island, and have sailed past the
+place where the other island ought to be, according to Walter's letter."
+And John chuckled somewhat, at the crestfallen looks of the boys.
+
+"Where are we going now?"
+
+"I told Sutoto we would better tack to the southwest. We can use up a
+day at that course, and then double back, probably thirty or forty miles
+to the south, and in that way we can cover a wide area."
+
+While sailing in that direction they had to go pretty much into the face
+of the wind, but it was considered wise to explore that region to the
+south of the islands first, and then take another section to the east or
+to the west.
+
+Night came on without any indications of land, and the course was
+altered directly to the east. The boys remained up until nearly twelve
+that night, but no light or evidence of land came in sight. Tired with
+the exertions of the day, they retired, and were soon asleep.
+
+How long they slept was immaterial to them. Sutoto came into their
+cabin, and awakened them, saying, "We can see some lights in the east."
+They heard the voice, and its earnest expression, and without waiting to
+dress scrambled out. Far off to the southeast was a faint glimmer, then
+it died away.
+
+After a moment or two it appeared again, somewhat brighter than before.
+The night was intensely dark, and the wind was blowing a steady gale, so
+that the boat not only rocked but it moved forward into the lines of
+waves across their path.
+
+John was above, and they hurriedly rushed to see him. He was smiling, as
+they approached, and he greeted them by saying "We have reached your
+island, probably."
+
+"How long have you seen the light?" asked George.
+
+"A half hour, or more," he answered.
+
+The boys were not in the mood now to return to bed, so they went back to
+dress, and then returned, meanwhile watching the light with eager eyes.
+The course of the ship was directed toward it, and every one on board
+had now heard the news.
+
+Soon the watch on the port side sang out: "Land ahead," and every one
+sprang to the left side. There, plainly in the darkness, was a headland,
+or a spur, which they were passing at almost right angles. The most
+intense excitement prevailed.
+
+Still the light was directly ahead, and, apparently, a long distance
+from them. John told Sutoto to haul in the sails, and to take a course
+directly to the south. He explained that it would be wise to stand off
+the shore as long as possible, as the ship's clock showed that it was
+now past four o'clock so that within the next hour they might be able to
+view the land clearly enough to determine their future course.
+
+Impatiently they awaited that period of gloom which is said to be the
+darkest time,--just before the dawn. This seemed to be so to the
+watchers, but shortly after five the curtain lifted. A slight haze was
+over the land, but they had found an island, at least.
+
+"Do you know our position?" asked Harry, as John approached. "Yes; I
+have just figured it out. We are fifty leagues (one hundred and fifty
+miles) southeast of Wonder Island."
+
+The boys looked at each other. Evidently Walter was wrong, or they had
+read his letter incorrectly. But they saw land, and John assured them
+that there was no land between that place and their own island.
+
+Anxiously they awaited daylight, and when it came they gazed out on a
+barren waste,--a rocky and uninviting shore.
+
+"Steer for the little cove beyond the great rock," said John.
+
+The sails were hoisted, and the vessel slowly moved south, and rounded
+into the waters bounded by the circular shore line. The anchor was soon
+cast, and then began the launching of the boats.
+
+John called the men before him, and gave a few words of advice. "We have
+no knowledge of the character of the land, or of the people who may live
+there. Two boats will be manned, and ten will take their places in each.
+Uraso will have charge of one, and Muro of the other. When we reach the
+shore Muro will remain with the men under his command, while Uraso will
+follow me. It will be understood that so long as no shots are heard by
+Muro and his party that our expedition is safe, but should any firing be
+heard, then the ship must be signaled and those in the vessel here must
+come to shore, and Muro with his soldiers will at once come to our
+relief. I hope we shall have no occasion for calling on you, but we must
+be prepared for any emergency."
+
+The two boats pulled for the shore. After landing John, with Uraso's men
+the boys quickly scrambled up the rough cliffs beyond. When the heights
+were gained they looked over a beautifully wooded landscape, but it was
+still, except for the birds and the small animals which looked at them
+in a startled manner, and then scurried for cover.
+
+"I doubt whether there are any people living here," remarked Harry.
+"There is not a sign of living beings."
+
+"You are quite mistaken there," said John.
+
+The boys looked at John. "Have you seen any signs?" asked George.
+
+"Yes; did you notice how the animals fled at our approach?"
+
+They had noticed it, but neglected to draw any inference from it.
+
+"That is one of the surest signs. Do you now remember how differently
+the animals acted in the region around Cataract from those in the
+southwest portion of Wonder Island?"
+
+"I now remember that is so. Don't you remember, George, when we came
+across the first herd of yaks, that they hardly noticed us? I am sure
+that the animals out at West River didn't wait to interview us."
+
+"Well, I remember the big bear was very anxious to make our
+acquaintance," said George, and Harry smiled, as he remembered how the
+big fellow took his revenge by tearing up their baggage.
+
+John directed the men to the right, and in the direction of an elevation
+which seemed to be clear of timber. From that point they searched the
+intervening wooded area, and caught sight of a still higher tableland
+miles beyond.
+
+"Your glasses would be serviceable here," said John. George handed them
+to John, and he gazed through them long and earnestly. "I am unable to
+find any traces of human beings, and I cannot account for the light
+which we saw during the night, and which must have been nearly ahead of
+us."
+
+He walked forward, the men following. They marched for more than a mile,
+every object being examined. Fallen trees were particularly
+investigated, and clumps of trees were searched, even the bark of trees
+being minutely gone over by John.
+
+The natives, generally so keen to discover evidences of their kind,
+walked along, and shook their heads, to indicate the absence of all
+signs. The land in the interior was elevated, but it was not rough or
+broken, the only place where an upheaval had taken place appearing to be
+the west coast.
+
+"This seems to look bad for our purposes," said John, as he turned to
+the boys.
+
+"What do you mean?" asked Harry.
+
+"I don't think there are any caves in this section," he answered. "But
+we might as well investigate farther to the right, and see what the land
+looks like."
+
+"Aren't those coffee trees?" said George, in great eagerness, as he
+bounded forwardly.
+
+There, not a hundred feet away, were the beautiful trees with white
+clusters all over them. Thousands of these trees were in sight.
+
+"I believe we have struck a coffee plantation," exclaimed Harry.
+
+John did not answer, but went up to one of the trees and carefully
+examined it. "No, these trees have grown wild, and no one has ever
+gathered the berries."
+
+"But what an opportunity there would be here for gathering coffee! Too
+bad Blakely isn't here," said George.
+
+"We never saw anything like it on Wonder Island," suggested Harry. "Now,
+why is it that cocoa will grow in wonderful profusion on one island,
+and none on the next, and the other island will have bananas and the
+other not?"
+
+"The explanation of that has been the means of bringing out a wonderful
+study, that is explained by the nature of the soil itself. In every
+country certain sections will spontaneously produce product alike, in
+almost every essential quality. Thus, flax, for instance, is found,
+identical in its character, in Kamscatska, and in Minnesota; in the
+Siberian wilds and in Central America; on the heights of the Himalayas,
+and in the lowest plains of South America."
+
+"But how do you explain the similarity? They must have come from seed,
+and how did the seeds get from place to place, when there were no ships
+to carry them?"
+
+"There can be only one explanation. The soil itself, if identical in its
+character, will, eventually, produce the same vegetables and vegetation.
+Thus, it has been found that the localities where this wild flax was
+found, had soil which was the same in its nature, and calculated to
+produce the same in kind."
+
+For four hours the little band marched to the south, and came back along
+a track nearer the sea, without discovering the slightest indication of
+human habitations, except the frightened looks and actions of the
+animals in their path.
+
+[Illustration: "_He turned it over and examined every portion_"
+                                                   [See p. 60]]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+DISCOVERY OF THE ISLAND AND EXPLORATIONS
+
+
+Weary, they dragged themselves over the cliffs and down to the waiting
+natives. Muro was surprised to learn that they had found no signs of
+people, so they rowed back to the ship, and after a hearty meal, retired
+for the night.
+
+In the morning when they asked John for his opinion, he said, "The only
+course is to sail south, and circumnavigate the island. In doing so we
+shall effect a landing every ten miles or so, and then go into the
+interior. This will thus enable us to learn all about the land. At the
+same time we must survey the island, so as to learn its extent, as well
+as its general shape and outline."
+
+"But how can we survey it without the instruments?"
+
+"That is readily done, by observing the headlands, or some special coast
+line marks, and then taking the angles from those points."
+
+"Well, that will be interesting, at least. How shall we start?"
+
+"Do you see that point to the south which may be five or ten miles
+away?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Now, examine the compass, and turn it so that the cardinal points are
+directly north and south. Now sight across the face of the compass so
+that you get the exact line between this point and yonder object. What
+do you make it to be?"
+
+"Why I make it out to be S. E."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 5. Measuring by Triangulation._]
+
+"That is correct. The line 1 is south by east."
+
+"But how can we find out how long line 1 is?" asked Harry.
+
+"Why by triangulation," said George, quickly.
+
+"I know that, but how can we do it on sea?"
+
+"It can be done on sea, as well as on land, but we had better go and
+make the first measurement by triangulation correctly, and do this in
+our subsequent measurements, unless it should be necessary to make the
+measurements at sea. The plan followed on shipboard will be found
+similar to the plan followed on land."
+
+The boat was manned and the boys with a crew of the men and John made
+for the shore, and together they went inland to a point marked B (Fig.
+5), and sighted across to the same object C that was noted of the ship.
+This, then, gave three lines, 1, 2 and 3, forming a triangle.
+
+"If these angles are placed on a paper the distance from A to C can be
+determined on the principles of proportion," remarked John.
+
+"How is that done?"
+
+"We will assume that the lines 1, 2, are at right angles to each other.
+This is not necessary, but it happens to be so in this case. Let us
+first measure the distance along the line 2, which may be any number of
+inches, or feet. Suppose we call the line one inch long. Then draw the
+line 1, so that it will be sufficiently long to be sure and meet the
+line 3."
+
+"Yes; I now see how it is done," remarked George, with enthusiasm. "If
+the line 3 is drawn at the angle we got, when we looked at C, from B,
+the line will cross line 1 at C."
+
+"That is correct. Now, if it is one inch from A to B, we may use that
+inch as a measurement to get the distance along the line."
+
+"Let me step it off," said Harry. "I find it is just two and
+three-quarters inches."
+
+"What was the distance, in feet from A to B?" asked John.
+
+"I have the figures here," said George. "We found it was six hundred and
+ninety feet."
+
+"If, now, you will multiply 690 by 2-3/4, we shall have the distance
+from this point A, and yonder point, or headland C."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 6. The Second Limb._]
+
+"I make it out to be just 1897.5," was Harry's conclusion.
+
+The boys, together with John and a half dozen of the natives, went along
+the shore, and mounted the point C, and from that place selected another
+point in a southerly direction, and again made the same calculations.
+
+The vessel in the meantime was put under sail and anchored a mile
+below, giving the surveying party time to make several triangulations,
+and late in the afternoon the party came on board, tired and ready to
+take a rest.
+
+From the position taken up by the ship they could see a long stretch of
+shore line, practically straight, trending toward the southeast, and
+with their glass could see, miles away, a headland which afforded a
+pronounced point for observation.
+
+The next morning the same parties rowed to the shore, and Uraso was left
+with the party to guard the shore boat, while Muro accompanied John and
+the boys. On this occasion John issued the following instruction:
+
+"The long point which you see in the distance is, probably, 15 miles
+beyond. It is not more than that, but this clear atmosphere is liable to
+deceive. I have instructed Sutoto to wait until one o'clock today, and
+if by that time there is no word from us Uraso will return to the ship,
+and you will take up anchor and steer for the headland beyond."
+
+"So that you may understand our movements, we will strike into the
+interior, taking a course due east, for ten miles, or thereabout, and
+then turn to the south, and reach the sea near the place where the
+vessel will be located."
+
+"I understand, now, how the distance can be measured by triangulation on
+land; but how to get the distances, on shipboard, is what puzzles me,"
+said Harry.
+
+John smiled as he replied: "I knew you would come to that sooner or
+later, so I prepared a little sketch (Fig. 7), which shows the bow of a
+vessel, and the tall mast. The lines from A to B give an angle with the
+vertical line of the mast, which will enable you to determine how far
+the ship is from any point."
+
+"But I am still in the dark as to how, even if we have that distance, we
+can thereby tell by triangulation, on the vessel, how far one point is
+from another on the land."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 7. Triangulation from a Vessel._]
+
+"After the distance from the vessel to the point is determined, as I
+have shown, then the length of the ship itself is used as the two points
+to sight from, and the two lines thus projected, from the opposite ends
+of the vessel, together with the line lengthwise along the ship, form a
+triangle, the same as the triangle lines 1, 2, 3, in the sketch (Fig.
+5)."
+
+It might be well at this place to describe the equipment of the party as
+it left the boat. The natives carried a plentiful supply of provisions.
+Each had a gun, the best kind of breech loaders, and also a spear.
+
+The natives love to handle spears better than anything else in the way
+of a weapon, and each also had a knife, and some carried the inevitable
+bolo, that primitive form of hatchet which is known all over the world
+where steel or iron is available, and the people have arrived at such a
+state that they are able to make metal articles.
+
+John and the boys also carried guns, but the boys had revolvers, seven
+shooters, not of large bore, but very convenient weapons, in close
+quarters. Each carried also a knife, and belt to contain the cartridges
+for the guns.
+
+Harry carried a camera, which he had brought from the States, and George
+had the field glass strapped across the shoulders. John felt that they
+had a force large enough to make a fairly effective stand against a
+pretty strong force of natives, the entire party counting, in this
+instance, sixteen.
+
+As they advanced into the interior, it was evident that they were
+gradually ascending, so that at about six miles from the landing place
+they reached the crest of the rising ground. Beyond, where the nature of
+the ground permitted they saw clearly that the distance beyond had a
+lower altitude than the place where they stood.
+
+During this trip there was no evidence that the island was occupied, but
+they saw the most amazing evidences of tropical fruits and trees.
+Magnificent trees were in evidence everywhere, and the woods, besides
+mahogany, and ebony, were of the most valuable character.
+
+John noted all these things, but the boys were most interested in the
+birds and animals which roamed about. The latter were not large or
+vicious looking, but it was not permitted to shoot any of them lest it
+might alarm Uraso, who was at the landing.
+
+Ahead could be seen several ridges, one of them heavily wooded. Reaching
+the summit they beheld a beautiful valley below, and opposite on a
+shelving rock, stood a type of mountain deer like a sentinel, while a
+dozen or more were feeding on the green slope beneath.
+
+Frequently on the march the boys would take side trips, in the attempt
+to run down some of the curious animals, but they were careful to keep
+the main force in sight.
+
+Thus they tramped on fully five miles beyond the crest of the ridge, and
+occasionally John would stop to examine some suspicious-looking
+indication of habitation.
+
+"It would surprise me very much to find that the island is not
+inhabited," he said, as he examined what appeared to be a path.
+
+At this juncture one of the native scouts came up and showed John a
+curious stone formation. John took it, and turned it over several times.
+"That is part of a stone hatchet." The scout nodded assent with a
+smile.
+
+All now became intent on searching. This finally resulted in bringing to
+light a well-formed spear, not unlike those originally used on Wonder
+Island among the native tribes.
+
+Surely they were getting evidence pretty fast now. Then, while crossing
+a little rivulet, one of the scouts plainly saw the print of a native
+foot, which was unmistakable. True, it had been made days before,
+probably a month, but there it was, and now it was incumbent on them to
+find out where the people were.
+
+The entire party scattered along the little stream, and searched both
+banks for a considerable distance, the boys taking an active part in the
+work. Usually the boys kept together, and entertained each other, but on
+this occasion all were so intent on discovering where, and in what
+direction the footprints would lead, that they quite forgot to watch
+each other.
+
+John gave a customary whistle, as he was in the habit of doing, when it
+was desired to call the party together, and all of the scouts promptly
+returned, as well as Harry. George was nowhere to be seen. John
+questioned Harry. He had first missed him at the bend in the stream not
+two hundred feet to the north.
+
+He rushed back in that direction, while John gave another blast on the
+whistle, and then listened intently for a reply. Harry came back without
+any intelligence, and almost frantic. John and the scouts then broke
+into a run, and Harry turned with them.
+
+That instant a shot rang out. "That must be George," exclaimed John.
+"Forward as quickly as possible."
+
+The party turned the bend of the river. All along this part of the
+stream the banks were cut up by ridges and diminutive cliffs, and in
+many places were large shelving rocks which came up close to the stream.
+
+Immediately after the shot John stopped, and listened for some sound,
+and the natives, usually so alert to recognize noises, did likewise.
+
+"That shot means that George is in some danger," said John.
+
+"But why does he not answer the whistle? Why should he shoot, and then
+not call to us, if there is any danger," said Harry in despair.
+
+They turned the bend, and searched to and fro. The shot could not have
+been more than eight hundred feet away. The searchers spread out into a
+fan-shaped formation. One of the scouts ran up hurriedly and called to
+John, who went forward, and there, alongside of a huge rock, where there
+was little grass, he saw unmistakable evidence of a scuffle.
+
+"These are the footprints of George's shoes," remarked Harry.
+
+"Yes, and here are the prints of the native feet," said John, as one of
+the scouts distinctly pointed out two or three well defined marks.
+
+"They are, undoubtedly, near at hand. We must now be on our guard," said
+John, as he pondered on the situation.
+
+"I wonder why they didn't attack us?" asked Harry.
+
+"The reason, no doubt, is that it is a small party. A larger body would
+not have attempted to capture one of us by stealth."
+
+John turned to Hasmo, one of the fleetest runners, and instructed him to
+go back to the landing place at once, and advise Uraso to bring his men
+and provisions, as well as additional ammunition, and to hold the ship
+until additional word should be sent.
+
+Hasmo was off in an instant, and then John issued additional
+instructions. "It is evident," he said, "that we must look for the
+people to the east or, more likely, toward the southeast. That is the
+reason why I had the boat held at the place where we have just landed.
+There is also another reason why I think the tribes, if there are any,
+are to the south, and that is, in this latitude they are much less
+exposed to the effects of the great winds that occur at certain portions
+of the year."
+
+Harry wandered about, not knowing what to do, at this terrible
+catastrophe. George in the hands of the savages! He could hardly believe
+it.
+
+"Don't worry about George too much," said John consolingly. "I am
+inclined to think he has had enough experience within the past two years
+to help him out of immediate trouble, and we will then be able to take a
+hand."
+
+This somewhat relieved Harry. It is possible that George might be able
+to take care of himself. "But suppose they kill him?" This was his great
+fear.
+
+"It is not at all likely they will do that," remarked Muro. "Those who
+captured him form only a small party, and it is not at all likely that
+there was a chief with them. Under the circumstances they would not dare
+kill him until the Chief ordered it."
+
+John smiled as he nodded at the explanation given by Muro. After all, it
+was not as bad as it might be. Now to the rescue. Muro begged permission
+to do scouting work until Uraso arrived, and selecting Stut as his
+companion, they glided through the forest directly to the east.
+
+They were now fully twelve miles from the boat, and the runner could be
+depended on to reach Uraso within an hour, if not hindered on the
+journey. It would then take, possibly, two hours more for the party to
+return, so that it was safe to assume that they would have to remain in
+the vicinity for the next three hours.
+
+John decided that the time should be spent in exploring the directions
+to the southeast and to the northeast as well, so they might be well
+informed when the reinforcements arrived.
+
+Hasmo glided through the forest like a deer. He knew that it was
+imperative to reach the shore before one o'clock, because at that time
+the vessel would leave for the southeastern point. To get there too late
+would mean a trip for fifteen miles or more along the shore to reach the
+next landing.
+
+The dense forest near the shore prevented him from seeing the vessel
+until he crossed the last ridge, and when he finally came within view
+of the harbor the ship had disappeared. He stopped and glanced to the
+south, but no ship was in sight. This was a situation which had been
+considered, from the point of view of the departure of the vessel; but
+where had it gone?
+
+He went to the shore, where Uraso's party had been, and then,
+laboriously ascended the point beyond, and from which he could get a
+clear view of the sea. There, far beyond, was the _Pioneer_, sailing to
+the southeast under a strong breeze.
+
+He tore off his jacket, and seizing a branch, began to wave it back and
+forth. The ship went on, and there was no indication that they noticed
+him. He remained thus for nearly a quarter of an hour, and then knew
+that he must follow the ship until he reached the next landing place.
+
+The trip along the shore was a most difficult one, as he could not
+follow the beach. Many of the rocks along the shore were licked by the
+waves, so that he had to take a course beyond the cliffs, and the land
+was not only rough, but numerous gulleys, or draws, as they are called,
+were washed out, making speed impossible.
+
+It required more than two hours to make the trip, and it was
+considerably after three when he hailed the boat from the shore, and
+hurriedly told the story of George's capture.
+
+Uraso was not slow in gathering the men needed for the expedition, and
+when the guns and ammunition were brought out all of the men actually
+begged to go along, but he knew that John would not sanction leaving the
+vessel without a crew.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+John and his scouts impatiently awaited the return of the men and during
+this time received the reports from the scouts as they came in. It was
+evident from the slight traces found that the band which captured George
+had gone east. It was no doubt from some indication to this effect
+obtained by Muro, that induced him to take his course in that direction,
+also.
+
+All had departed but Muro: Four o'clock came, and then five, but neither
+Muro nor Uraso appeared. This did, indeed, look strange to John, who
+could, in a measure, account for Muro's non-appearance; but he could not
+understand why Uraso did not come. It then occurred that after all Hasmo
+might not have been able to reach the landing before sailing time, and
+with this theory he consoled Harry, who was constantly on the alert,
+waiting for tidings.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+CAPTURE OF GEORGE BY THE NATIVES
+
+
+Let us now follow George. He went along the stream on its westerly side,
+while Harry was examining the eastern shore. Coming to a little rivulet,
+which flowed into the main stream at this point, he passed alongside the
+projecting ledges of rock, that for the moment hid him from the view of
+Harry.
+
+Here he saw some peculiar rocks, and outcroppings, which reminded him so
+forcibly of the early days on Wonder Island, when the Professor so
+strongly impressed on them the value of investigation. The gun was stood
+up, leaning against the rocks, when he was seized by two strong arms,
+and a hand placed over his mouth.
+
+In the struggle his hand touched the gun, and as his captor drew him
+back, he took the gun with him, and no effort was made to dispossess him
+of the weapon. He was carried along, one hand pinioned to his side,
+while the other hand carrying the gun was free, but he was unable to use
+it.
+
+He could not have been carried more than a hundred feet, before he heard
+John's whistle. This startled his captors, for he now saw that there
+were two burly specimens, almost wholly naked, and for the moment the
+hold on the imprisoned arm was relaxed.
+
+Quick as a flash he drew up the gun and fired. This was the shot heard
+by John and Harry. The shot was such a surprise that the savages were
+almost paralyzed, and dropped their hold, but it was only for an
+instant. Realizing that the noise was made by George's weapon, and not
+caused by any of the boy's companions, the nearest savage swung around
+viciously, and poor George was knocked unconscious by the blow.
+
+How long he remained in this state he did not know. When consciousness
+returned he was lying, on some tufted grass, and a half dozen vicious
+looking savages stood around him. Then he remembered the circumstances
+of his capture.
+
+He eyed them for a time, and then slowly sat up. One of the party had
+George's field glasses slung around him, just as he himself had them on
+when captured. One of them was fondling the gun, but it was evident from
+the manner in which he held it that he had no knowledge of its uses.
+
+His cartridge belt graced the form of one of the other savages, and it
+was evident that they considered the things thus taken more in the
+nature of ornaments than as weapons. He slowly felt his pockets and was
+surprised that they had removed nothing.
+
+While he was rising to a sitting posture he could feel his revolver, and
+wondered why he had not been disarmed. A glimmer of joy shot through
+him. His hands were free, and he had no pain, except the sore feeling
+that was keen on the side of his head, and which was, no doubt, caused
+by the blow.
+
+Not a word was spoken by either. He hoped something would be said and
+probably he would be able to recognize the language, as his two years'
+experience in Wonder Island gave him a fairly good understanding of the
+native tongues.
+
+He pronounced some words, in the Saboro and also in the Illya dialect,
+but they stared at each other, and answered in some words that were
+utterly unlike anything known on their own island.
+
+Soon, after a conversation among themselves, he was raised up and urged
+forward. The first thing that George did was to note the position of the
+sun, and he then stealthily drew out his watch.
+
+When the savages, who were closely watching him, saw the watch two of
+them pounced upon him, and in the struggle, one of them tore it from the
+chain. The holder of the chain threw it away, and attacked the one who
+had the watch.
+
+This was certainly an interesting struggle for George to witness. He had
+his thoughts, however. Now was the time to make a strike for liberty, so
+he quietly moved his hand toward the revolver. George was not aware that
+a pair of eyes was intently watching him while the struggle was going
+on.
+
+Before the hand reached the revolver, the savage leaped forward. His
+heart sank. The opportunity was lost. He dove down into the pocket and
+brought forth a knife, and it was hardly out of his pocket until the
+prying native had it in his hand.
+
+George gave a forced smile. The native saw it, and looked admiringly at
+the beautiful handle. He turned it around and viewed it from every
+side, and then deftly drew a strand of material from his clout and,
+winding it around the knife, threw the loop of the strand over his head.
+
+This, too, then, was an ornament! They did not know the uses of the
+knife. George kept up the smile, and soon the savage smiled in return.
+This was a good beginning, surely! But what surprised him most of all
+was the perfectly natural manner in which the defeated party in the
+contest after the watch took his loss.
+
+The victor fashioned it as a pendant, and the other looked calmly on
+while his opponent admired it. There was not a particle of resentment in
+the loser.
+
+George did not show any alarm to the savages, although it would be too
+much to say that he was entirely at ease. The instructions received from
+John, the experiences of Tom and Ralph when they were captured, were
+lessons for him, so, when the savages smiled back at him he pointed to
+the knife, and made motions as though he intended to open the blade.
+
+All savages are curious. Many of them have this trait developed to a
+remarkable degree. George's motions attracted the man. Then he leaned
+forward, and removed the knife from the loop. He held it up, exactly
+like a magician would exhibit some article that he intended should
+disappear.
+
+Then, as the savage's mouth was now open, he inserted his thumb nail
+into the crease of the large knife, and opened the blade. Then he
+extended out his hand, and offered the open knife to the savage.
+
+To say that he was merely surprised is putting it mildly. He could not
+possibly open his eyes wider, and instead of taking it, drew back. Then
+George quickly closed the blade again, and offered it in that way, and
+he was induced to slowly take it back, while he glanced at George
+suspiciously.
+
+The burly individual who carried the field glass was then approached by
+George. The latter took the glasses and put them to his eyes. At this
+act the savages set up a whoop, and the glass was snatched from him.
+Evidently they thought it was something like the gun.
+
+George smiled, and again made the motion, as though he desired to take
+the glass. The savage took the loop from his neck, and handed the
+instrument to George. The latter put it to his eyes and pointed them to
+the east, carefully adjusting them to get the proper focus.
+
+To his surprise he saw the evidences of a village in the far distant
+landscape, and, beyond it, the sea. What a discovery this was, indeed!
+
+The glasses were then presented to the burly savage, who now claimed its
+ownership, and tried to induce him to look through it. In this George
+finally succeeded, and after he saw the effect of the distant landscape,
+the attitude of the man changed, and he looked on George with a species
+of admiration and wonderment.
+
+George walked about them, in the most careless manner imaginable, but
+they never took their eyes from him. He smiled at them, again took the
+knife and performed the feat over and over again, and then instructed
+the savage how to do it.
+
+Suddenly he thought of the match safe. What a jolly trick that would be
+to spring on them. But it would be more effective at night, he
+reflected, and so he refrained from taking it out. It was evident,
+however, that he was making a hit of some kind. Whether it would aid him
+in escaping he did not know, but he tried every means possible to
+ingratiate himself, and to show that he had no fear. The view of the
+village which he had accidentally discovered impressed itself on him
+with startling force. If he once reached the village escape would be
+difficult, and consequently he viewed the searching eyes of his captors
+with great uneasiness.
+
+This was evident by the cat-like action of the one who got the knife. If
+he made the slightest move of his hands, he could see the eyes following
+them. Once he stumbled as they were marching along. This was purposely
+done, in the hope that during the time he was recovering his erect
+position he could draw the revolver.
+
+He had his course of action all planned out. He had no desire to kill,
+and he made up his mind that he would first cover them and then by
+motions wave them away, but it would be necessary to depend upon mimicry
+for this.
+
+He had learned from John that savages are naturally the most expert
+pantomimists, and are able to express many things by gestures, this
+faculty having been made the more acute because the different tribes
+are frequently brought into contact without any connecting link in the
+dialects or languages.
+
+If they refused, or made any attempt to seize him, he would then shoot
+the leader, and thus strike terror into the others. But while he was
+thus arranging all the details in his mind, he was startled at seeing a
+whole group of savages leap from the side of the ill-defined path, which
+they were now traveling, and they speedily surrounded the captor and
+captive.
+
+Then began a bedlam of explanations as they crowded around George. Some
+came up and felt his arms, and other portions of his body. He smiled
+meanwhile. It was the only thing he could do, and he knew it would be
+useless to look troubled.
+
+The next moment the visitors were examining the glass, the cartridge
+belt, the knife and the watch, and George was, temporarily forgotten,
+although surrounded so that he could not possibly force his way through.
+
+He thought it a remarkable thing that they should thus hold and watch
+him with such tenacity. While thus discussing him, a new party appeared,
+and now for the first time there was an attempt to show deference.
+
+The leader of the party was the most powerful savage George had ever
+seen. Uraso was a powerful warrior, and Chum was also noted for his
+strength, but it seemed that the man now coming up must be a giant. Some
+of the immediate party rushed up to him, and after making a respectful
+bow, told him of the capture.
+
+He approached with dignity, and those around George moved away.
+
+Without a moment's hesitation George moved toward the Chief, and when
+ten feet away, he stopped, straightened himself erect, and with a most
+courtly bow smiled as he recovered his position.
+
+The strong and resolute manner in which this was done was really a cause
+for marvel in the savage. He looked at his people, and spoke a few
+words, and those who had been his guards came forward most
+deferentially, and, so far as George could understand, told of the
+circumstances surrounding his capture.
+
+But there was one thing which struck George as a peculiar thing. The
+three men who had participated in the loot of his valuables did not
+exhibit them while talking to the Chief.
+
+There was a long palaver, and many gestures indulged in. The question
+occurred to him: What had become of the articles which they had taken?
+Did they purposely hide them?
+
+At the close of the conversation two of the Chief's immediate associates
+came forward, and began to investigate his belongings. The first thing
+they brought out was the revolver, and at this George was almost on the
+point of breaking down. Then he grew bitter.
+
+The silver match box was the next to attract the attention of the
+searchers; and so they went through from one pocket to the other in the
+most approved style.
+
+These were laid before the Chief who grunted his approval at the
+different things, and his admiration, judging from the character of his
+remarks, was unbounded at the silver-plated revolver.
+
+From the curious way in which he handled it George was alarmed. It was
+an automatic, and if the Chief once pulled the trigger there would be
+trouble for some one. George held up a warning hand, and the Chief
+looked up from the weapon.
+
+The only thing he could do was to point to the revolver, and vigorously
+shake his head. The Chief looked around as though inquiring the meaning
+of such a sign. He was not interfered with as he walked up to the
+savage, and held out his hand. The Chief handed him the weapon.
+
+Then, picking up a leaf, he motioned to one near him to place it on the
+side of a tree. At a word from the Chief the man did so, but George
+motioned to him to carry it still further away. He took deliberate aim,
+and thanks to his long and regular practice, the leaf received the
+impress of the bullet, while the savages jumped in all directions at the
+report.
+
+Only the Chief remained impassive. He never moved, but when the leaf was
+brought to him, he looked on the youth with a kindly smile. George was
+quick to notice this. He again walked over to the Chief, and placed the
+weapon in his hand, and guided his finger to the trigger, while at the
+same time holding up his hand so as to sight it.
+
+This time the shot was directed to the nearest tree. The savages
+scurried to give them room. When the Chief pulled the trigger and the
+discharge followed, George caught him by the arm, and took him to the
+tree, pointing out the hole made by the bullet.
+
+There was a wondering look on the Chief's face. He looked at the weapon,
+and then at the hole. There was a question in the peculiar guttural
+sounds of his language, which slowly came from his lips. Evidently the
+Chief wanted to know something.
+
+Ah! he knew what it was. What made the hole? George took the weapon, and
+extracted one of the bullets, and then pointed to the hole in the tree.
+It was plain that even this did not satisfy him. Better still; why not
+dig out the bullet; and as he thought of it he instinctively reached in
+his pocket for the knife.
+
+Then he remembered. One of his captors had it. Without any ceremony he
+walked over to the man who had it, and by motions indicated that he
+wanted the knife. The savage was mute. He boldly searched the folds of
+the rude clout, and without a protest on the part of the savage he
+brought forth the coveted knife.
+
+This action was indeed a surprise to the Chief. A frown gathered on the
+Chief's face. George saw it, and really trembled for the first time, as
+he saw the eyes of the Giant riveted on the knife, and then turned to
+the culprit. The latter fell to the ground, and muttered something, and
+instantly the two others were also seized, as they uncovered the other
+belongings and laid them before the Chief.
+
+George looked on the scene with genuine regret. The culprits were led
+away, and he speculated on their fate. But the Chief's eyes immediately
+returned to the hole in the tree, while the gaze of the others rested on
+the cartridges, the watch and the field glasses. The knife was in
+George's hand, and he slowly opened it whereat the appearance of the
+blade startled the Chief. He was all eagerness now, so George closed the
+blade and opened it again, and then cut a circle around the bullet hole
+and chipped the wood away.
+
+There was the bullet, and he slowly drew it forth, a shapeless bit of
+lead. When he had deposited it in the Chief's hand, he laid one of the
+cartridges alongside, and also showed the empty shell. Then he quietly
+laid the closed knife in the Chief's hand and stood back with his arms
+folded, as though he owned the entire Island.
+
+If the action of the Chief counted for anything the boy did have
+everything in sight. The Chief returned the revolver to George, and then
+began to examine the articles before him. The most interesting appeared
+to be the cartridge belt. He looked at the revolver and cartridges, and
+then turned over the revolver bullet and shell which George had
+exhibited.
+
+It was now plain that the Chief could not understand the use of the
+large cartridges. George's mind was working by this time. He did not
+recall that the gun was in evidence at any time after they met the first
+crowd on the road.
+
+The Chief pointed to the cartridges, and George looked toward the group
+which had captured him. This was enough for the wily savage. A stern
+command was issued, and in an incredible short space of time the gun
+appeared. Where it could have been hidden was a marvel. Certainly these
+people must be adepts in the art of concealment.
+
+The Chief handled the gun in a most awkward fashion and George politely
+took it from his hand, and after glancing about for a moment, saw a bird
+on a branch. This he brought down, upon which one of the men ran
+forward, picked it up and brought it to the Chief. After this the weapon
+was turned over to him, and the peculiar chuckle that followed was,
+undoubtedly, the savage's way of expressing delight.
+
+One of the attendants then came forward at the order of the Chief, who,
+after the articles were gathered up, indicated to George that he should
+follow, and turned toward the village. George did not regard the
+prerogatives of royalty, but he took up a most democratic position by
+the side of the Chief, to which the latter did not object.
+
+It required nearly an hour before they reached the village. Women and
+children, and boys his own age were in evidence everywhere. They came
+out of the huts and followed the procession, on the way to the Chief's
+quarters.
+
+Singularly George did not now feel the slightest bit of fear. On the
+other hand, there was confidence, a sort of assurance that he could not
+express. This feeling came to him, not so much from the general demeanor
+of the Chief, as on account of the one act, namely, the return to him of
+the revolver.
+
+The Chief's home was an entirely different sort of affair from the other
+dwellings. It was noted that, the homes of the ordinary people were made
+singularly like those of the tribes on Wonder Island, usually of twigs
+braided and brought together at the upper end so as to form cone-like
+enclosures, and all were covered with clay, so as to keep out the rains.
+
+Outside of these houses appeared to be the sleeping quarters, and a
+glance at some of them impressed George as being exceedingly filthy. The
+houses were intended only for the rainy season, apparently, as was the
+custom in many places on their own island.
+
+But the Chief's dwelling was a most pretentious affair, judged by the
+surrounding homes. It had a large interior court, without a roof, but
+the immediate dwelling had four or more rooms. The Chief walked through
+one room, and entered the court, where George was embarrassed to see two
+girls, and several boys, together with three women, all of whom stared
+at him, the girls giggling exactly as he had seen them do at home.
+
+The articles taken from him were then deposited upon the floor, and the
+Chief reclined on a sort of raised couch. George glanced around and the
+first thing that his eyes met was a chair, in one corner of the room,
+and then some articles that he knew could not have been made on the
+island.
+
+This was his introduction to the home of the Chief. He then fell to
+wondering how it would be possible to talk and tell him about his
+friends.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+FIGHT OF THE NATIVES FOR THE TRINKETS
+
+
+Scouting in an unknown country, with assurances that foes may be in
+ambush at every turn, is not a rapid way of marching. Ordinarily, in the
+open road, a man will walk three or four miles an hour. But in a forest,
+where every tree may conceal a foe, it is quite different.
+
+Muro was an expert in scouting work. He had had years of experience in
+this sort of life, and, moreover, was a chief of one of the most
+powerful tribes on the island.
+
+He and his companion went directly east, in the most stealthy fashion,
+and, a half mile beyond they circled to the south, next swinging around
+to the north, so as to take in as wide a sweep as possible.
+
+Before dark they obtained the first real traces of the tramp of feet,
+and as it was now too late to enable them to follow up the trail they
+went back toward the scene of the capture, so that they might thus be
+able to follow the trail easily the next morning.
+
+It was very dark when they crept in and were halted by the sentries
+which John had posted. Harry was the first to greet Muro. "Have you
+found anything?"
+
+"Yes," answered Muro. "We know the direction they have gone. In the
+morning we can go on from the place where we discovered the trail."
+
+"How far is it from here?"
+
+"More than ten miles."
+
+The distance mentioned was in itself sufficient evidence that Muro had
+not wasted time.
+
+They spent the remaining hours of the evening awaiting further news and
+it was fully ten o'clock before the sentry to the south reported the
+probable approach of Uraso. Harry leaped out from the circle, and
+followed the sentry. It was, indeed, Uraso who had been reporter.
+
+"Tell me all about it," he requested, and Harry, with a voice full of
+pathos, told him how it happened. When he had finished, Uraso said:
+
+"I was told by my father that somewhere here in the seas was an island
+where were found most terrible people, who killed every one they
+captured. I hope this is not the place." And Uraso did not say this to
+excite Harry's fears, but, like many natives, he was frank, and open in
+his speech.
+
+"I hope there will be no trouble," was Harry's response.
+
+"We need not worry about George," added Uraso. "The way that he was
+taken shows that they are taking him to the Chief. A boy like George
+would be likely to interest the Chief, at first for a time, and time is
+all we want."
+
+"I am glad you have the same opinion as John," answered Harry.
+
+John, Muro and Uraso held a conference that night. As a result Harry was
+comforted to know and feel that George was safe, and that within a day
+or two at most, they would be able to come up with the tribe.
+
+The entire party now numbered thirty-five, all well armed. In the
+morning, as soon as it was light enough to see they were up, and after a
+quick breakfast Muro directed them along the trail made the night
+before, and the spot where Muro found the trace was reached about nine
+o'clock.
+
+John and his party now spread out so as to take in a wide expanse, and
+they marched toward the east for fully two hours. Sometimes all traces
+would be lost, and then there would be a halt and a search, and the
+native wit of the scouts was generally acute enough to recover the
+trail.
+
+During these periodical searches, one of the men bounded forward with a
+cry, as he held up a hand in which something was swinging.
+
+As usual Harry was there like a shot. "That is George's chain," he cried
+out.
+
+"Where did you find this?" asked John.
+
+The scout rushed over to the place, and all followed. The ground about
+plainly showed the evidences of the struggle where George's captors
+fought for the possession of the watch.
+
+The trail was beginning to get warm. It was readily followed for several
+miles, and then disappeared, but after patient hunting it came to light,
+and shortly after noon the spot was reached where the Chief came on the
+scene, and the appearance of the ground indicated that there must have
+been a large number in the party.
+
+Here was an occasion where one great quality of many savage tribes
+stands out so prominently, and that is in determining the number of
+their enemies by the foot prints. Hundreds of imprints on the soil,
+crossing and recrossing each other, will to the untrained seem a
+hopeless riddle.
+
+On one occasion on Wonder Island, John stated that one of a party they
+were trailing, was wounded in one of his legs. The explanation was
+simple: The pressure of the foot in the soil was less on the lame than
+on the sound leg, and the stride was uneven.
+
+But the scouts had to decipher the peculiar imprint of each foot, and
+then compare it with all the others, in turn.
+
+"I could tell the difference in the shape of a shoe from another," said
+Harry, "but I do not see how it is possible to tell one foot print from
+another."
+
+"How do you distinguish people?" asked John.
+
+"Well, usually, by their faces."
+
+"Quite true. Now feet are just as different as faces are. But there are
+other ways by which we recognize people."
+
+"Yes," was the response. "I can tell who many people are at distances so
+great that I cannot see their faces."
+
+"How do you do that?"
+
+"By the way they walk, by their size, or by some action that seems to be
+peculiar to them."
+
+"The observations are correct," answered John. "At the same time, if all
+the men you knew happened to be in a crowd, and moving around among each
+other, you would be able to recognize and place each without any
+difficulty; is not that true!"
+
+"Yes; and I think I understand the trend of your remark now."
+
+"And what is that?"
+
+"You mean to say that if the scouts are able to read, or to become
+acquainted with the foot prints, they can read them as readily as I
+would read the faces of my friends."
+
+"That is the exact inference I wish to draw."
+
+"Well, I want to see that done," and Harry followed up Uraso, and
+watched Muro, and the most intelligent of the scouts, while they
+carefully stepped over the ground, each being careful while doing so to
+step in the foot marks of the preceding scout.
+
+"That is a curious thing to do," he remarked, as he turned to John.
+
+"What is that?" the latter asked.
+
+"Stepping in the tracks made by the leader."
+
+"That is for the purpose of keeping the surface of the ground absolutely
+the same as the tribe left it."
+
+"Well the boys seem to understand detective work pretty well."
+
+All of them laughed at this complimentary allusion, as it must be
+understood that all the scouts taken from the island had learned to
+speak the English language, and some of them, like Uraso, were
+exceptionally skilled.
+
+When the different ones had gone over the ground thoroughly, John asked
+the opinion of the searchers.
+
+"From my count there must have been twenty-four," remarked Uraso.
+
+Muro smiled, as he said: "Uraso is mistaken, there are twenty-five."
+Uraso was not at all perturbed, but walked over to the surveyed plot and
+said: "The most prominent one is the fellow with the spreading toes.
+See! here is his left foot. See that broad foot is all around the place.
+This broad foot with a toe missing, is another fellow; and here are two
+with rather long feet, you can see them all about, and they are, no
+doubt, active fellows."
+
+"Well, that is picking them out plainly enough," remarked Harry.
+
+"But," continued Uraso, "I want you to look at this foot. It is the
+largest I ever saw."
+
+"I am satisfied that fellow is the Chief," remarked Muro.
+
+"There is evidence of that here too," said Uraso, as Muro nodded his
+head.
+
+Harry looked on in bewilderment. "Assuredly that is something new. How
+do you know _that_?" he asked.
+
+"The best indication is," said Uraso, "that the fellow with the big feet
+does very little walking, and all the other fellows have danced about
+him."
+
+Harry laughed, and was satisfied. "That was certainly clever," he
+remarked. "But why shouldn't they be clever. These boys are the finest
+and bravest in the world," and Uraso and Muro smiled and were happy at
+this encomium of the boy they all loved so much.
+
+"The last foot I have counted is that little sawed-off sample that has
+danced all around the edge; see it here, and here!"
+
+Muro walked forward, and, stooping down, pointed to the imprint of a
+shoe, said: "That is our boy's shoe."
+
+Uraso laughed, as he admitted neglecting George's presence in the crowd
+of prints. "But I have found something else. George has had an interview
+with the Chief. He has been making some explanations to the Chief about
+his revolver."
+
+John smiled, and kept his eye on a tree to the right.
+
+"And how do you know that?" asked Harry.
+
+Uraso walked over to the tree, after picking up something, and pointed
+to a cut-out in the side of the tree. It was the mark of the bullet, and
+the circular cut which George had made that John had observed, and which
+had been noticed by Uraso and Muro.
+
+"The scene here looks very promising to me," said John.
+
+"Yes, it is better and better," remarked Muro.
+
+"But you haven't told us yet, how you know that George was interviewing
+the Chief."
+
+"Come here and I will show you. Now look closely at the foot prints of
+George. Then observe the indications as to the attitude of the Chief.
+George goes up to the Chief. They turn around. Here is a shell. Beyond
+is the tree where they had the mark, and here are the tracks of the
+Chief and George as they go up to the tree."
+
+Harry was now convinced. It must be said, however, that many of the
+marks made were so illy-defined, that it required extraordinary vision
+to observe them, and this is what Harry marveled at.
+
+"What you say only proves the value of minute observation," remarked
+John. "Those who are not accustomed to see these things, can not detect
+what are very plain markings. Sometimes a slightly torn leaf, under
+certain conditions, will tell a story in itself,--just such a
+commonplace and ordinary thing as a ruptured leaf."
+
+The consensus of opinion was that there were fully twenty-five in the
+party counting George, and it is remarkable that when the matter was
+afterwards investigated it was found that Uraso's count was right.
+
+There were six in the party which took George, twelve who surrounded the
+party before the Chief arrived, and five more were with him when he came
+up.
+
+Another consultation was held. John remarked: "I am of the opinion that
+the people who have captured George are not at all bad, or vindictive.
+Therefore we must exercise care and not needlessly injure any of them. I
+need not say that it is our purpose here to aid the people, to make
+friends of them, and not enemies."
+
+"That is in accordance with our wish," said Uraso, with the approval of
+all present.
+
+"It is perfectly evident that these people, in taking George, did what
+most people in a savage condition would do. The great and overshadowing
+trait in humanity is to acquire something. It is just possible that the
+cartridge belt, or the field glasses, or the buttons on his coat were of
+more importance to them than George himself."
+
+"Then you mean they had to get George to get the buttons," said Harry,
+laughing in his relief.
+
+"Of course," answered John, and Muro laughed aloud, as he recalled his
+first experiences with the boys.
+
+"John has hit upon the very thing which is at the bottom of the whole
+business. All we wanted was to get the trinket, and the prisoner
+belonged to the Chief."
+
+"Or to the Krishnos," remarked Muro.
+
+"Well we might as well go on if we can find the trail," remarked John.
+
+"Yes, it is plain enough now," answered one of them.
+
+"But let us exercise caution," remarked John. "Move along slowly and
+keep a sharp lookout on our flanks."
+
+Harry was walking by the side of Uraso. There had always been a warm
+friendship between the two. Lolo, Uraso's favorite son, was Harry's age,
+and the two were companions, and this was a source of great joy to the
+Chief, for Uraso was the head man of the Osagas, and one of the most
+progressive of all the prominent men.
+
+Harry was dangling the chain which had been found in the morning. "I
+have been wondering why he dropped this!" he asked.
+
+"I have an idea that it was lost in the fight for the possession of the
+watch."
+
+"The fight? Why did they have a fight?"
+
+"Well, the ground where the chain was found looked very much like it."
+
+"I don't see why the fellows don't agree to divide up things properly
+when they get them, instead of scrambling for them in that way!"
+
+"You can see it is perfectly natural for them to fight for it under the
+circumstances. They do not understand anything but power."
+
+"I should think the loser would be resentful, and try to even it up on
+the other fellow," remarked Harry.
+
+"On the other hand, the moment the stronger fellow wins, that is the end
+of the dispute. The best one won. In his creed there is no other
+argument. That is the savage's religion. You people have told us
+differently. The Professor has often said: 'There is only this
+difference between us, with you, might is right; with us right is
+might.'"
+
+"Well, what do you really think about it now?" asked Harry.
+
+Uraso did not smile, as he remarked somewhat sadly: "It took me a long
+time to understand that. How could right be might? At first it looked
+foolish, and Muro and I talked it over many times. Then Oma, and Tastoa
+and Oroto, the other Chiefs, spoke to me about it. But while I did not
+understand it I had faith in the Professor.
+
+"Then we went to Unity, and built the town, and the people began to go
+there, and when we saw the Professor, and the way he treated every one,
+never doing a wrong to anybody, we could not believe that he was sane.
+But everywhere we went we heard people talking about him, and the way he
+acted, and we saw all the white people do the same as the Professor did,
+we noticed that no one would dare say a word against the Professor, or
+John.
+
+"We marveled at that. The Professor went out among the people of all the
+tribes, and never carried a weapon of any kind. But no one would have
+dared to injure him. If a man had even attempted to injure him the
+people would have torn him to pieces. Then I understood. Right was and
+is _Might_, but it takes a savage a long time to understand it, and he
+must learn it from something practical that comes to him in every day
+life; he will never know it in any other way."
+
+Harry walked on in silence.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+THE GIANT CHIEF AND HIS "PALACE"
+
+
+We must now return to George and see how he fared during the first night
+of his captivity. After the Chief had seated himself, and had begun to
+examine the articles taken from George, the latter had an opportunity to
+examine the surroundings more closely.
+
+The Chief made no remarks to him, nor did he ask him to be seated. At
+the moment he entered the room he noticed the chair. As the Chief did
+not pay any attention to him after they entered, George walked over and
+deliberately sat down on it.
+
+The two attendants who carried in the articles, stared at him, and the
+women and children, particularly the latter, seemed to be paralyzed at
+his attitude seated in the chair. It was covered with dust, an evidence
+that it was never used for the purposes of a seat. On reflection, he
+thought that must be the reason they looked at him so queerly.
+
+The Chief, however, gave no indication that his act was a rude or
+questionable one. He tried on the cartridge belt, but it was far too
+short for his corpulent body, and George could hardly repress a laugh,
+as he noticed the attempt to adjust it.
+
+The field glasses came in for a share of attention, then the silver
+match box, and the women craned their heads forward, as it glittered.
+The Chief held it off from his eyes, so he could properly view it; just
+as George had often seen women do in trying to match articles.
+
+All the while the Chief was emitting grunts betokening pleasure and
+satisfaction. The adjusting screw on the field glass next attracted his
+attention. The turning moved the barrels in and out, and this was, in
+all probability, the most remarkable thing he ever saw.
+
+George could stand it no longer. He left his seat, the younger children
+shrinking back as he arose, and quietly walked to the Chief, and sat
+down in front of him. As he did so he pointed to the match safe which
+the Chief held in his left hand.
+
+The latter did not resist the attempt to take it, but looked on
+wonderingly as George pressed the point, and the lid flew open. Then,
+taking one of the matches from the receptacle, he held the box in one
+hand, exhibited the match in the other, for a moment, and then drew the
+match across the box, and ignited it.
+
+The Chief actually drew in a breath that was audible everywhere in that
+neighborhood. He nodded with approval. Harry closed the box and handed
+it back; he then directed the Chief's attention to the little point, and
+pressed it, when the lid again flew open.
+
+This time the Chief closed it, and he pressed the point. The success of
+the experiment was so great that he eventually called his wife to
+witness it, for she came over, while he performed the miraculous thing.
+
+He took out a match. Its use was just as great a mystery. He was taught
+just what to do, and the primitive man sat there and struck the matches,
+one after the other, in the greatest delight. What amused George more
+than anything else was, that every time a match was struck, he closed
+the box, and then opened it before extracting another.
+
+George noted the imitative quality so marked in all savages. It did not,
+apparently, occur to him that he could strike two matches without the
+lid flying open in the period intervening the two operations.
+
+It was now growing dark, and soon an attendant came in with several
+curiously-arranged lights, made from some sort of weed or vegetation,
+the smoke of which appeared to be most agreeable. From an adjoining
+room, an appetizing odor reached George and, staring in that direction,
+the Chief noticed the boy's expectant attitude.
+
+The Chief arose, his mighty frame towering above the rest, and a command
+was given. Almost immediately two servitors came through the opening,
+one of them carrying a large bowl of the most savory stew. The bowl was
+not of native manufacture, and George, observing this, suddenly
+remembered what John had said, that the Chief was always sure to get the
+best and most valuable parts of the wreckages along the shore, and he
+felt sure that this was salvage from some shipwreck.
+
+The Chief smiled, as the bowl was set before him. It was smoking hot,
+and George smiled back as he noticed the friendly look, and saw that the
+Chief's wife graciously arranged the accompanying vegetables, although
+he had no idea what the latter were.
+
+A second attendant brought pointed sticks, and two paddle-shaped blades.
+The Chief without ceremony dived into the mess and speared a piece of
+the meat, and waved it to and fro, to cool it. Here was an opportunity
+to follow the example thus set, and George was glad to take the hint.
+
+He didn't look around to inquire for a plate, nor did he ask for a
+napkin. The meat was good, the vegetables appetizing, and the
+conversation lagged so much that there was no chance for unseasonable
+interruptions during the meal.
+
+If George had never before that hour witnessed a savage eat, he would
+have been mortified at the small amount he himself was capable of
+putting away, when he compared the relative amounts consumed. He was of
+the opinion, before they began, that the bowl was intended for the whole
+family, but the Chief ate all of it, except the small part that George
+disposed of in the meantime.
+
+But he was perfectly content. He ate until he could eat no more, and
+then to his extreme disgust, a wooden platter of fruit was set before
+them. Bananas were the only things he recognized. A small pear-shaped
+fruit attracted him, and then an egg-shaped, brown-colored fruit, with a
+sweet, strong perfume, was among the varieties.
+
+The Chief was graciousness itself, exhibiting not one trait of
+selfishness, as he forced the fruit on George. When the Chief had
+finished the fruit George was relieved, but uncomfortable. He had eaten
+beyond his capacity. The articles containing the food were removed, and
+the Chief, who, during this time, was in a reclining position, slowly
+sank down, and was soon asleep.
+
+The family sat around for a time, and then all slowly disappeared and he
+could hear the jumble of voices in the adjoining apartment, as they were
+undoubtedly engaged in their meal.
+
+What a peculiar position to be placed in. Alone with the sleeping
+savage! Still, he did not seem to be so very savage. There was no one in
+sight. He arose and walked toward the opening. Not even a guard
+prevented him from leaving.
+
+He stepped out. He still had his revolver, but that was all. Now was the
+time to effect his escape. He turned the corner of the main structure,
+and there stood one of the Chief's girls, the one who had attracted
+George's attention when he was first ushered into the palace, as George
+named the place in his mind.
+
+As this girl will have an important place in reciting this history, it
+may be well to describe her. She was about the height of George, with a
+much lighter skin than the majority of those whom he had seen thus far.
+Her eyes were large and beautiful, and while her hair, intensely black
+and very profuse, was not at all kinky. It should be said that the
+savages on the island, like those on Wonder Island, while dark, did not
+have curly hair of the Ethiopian, so that they were not of the negroid
+type but more nearly allied to the Malay family.
+
+She smiled, and George, abashed for the moment, went up to her, and she
+did not at all shrink from him. Now that he had made the advance he was
+at a loss what to do. The only thing that both perfectly understood, was
+to smile, and smile they did.
+
+But why not say something. He tried it, and those great eyes appeared to
+open still wider. George turned and waved his hand, and affrighted,
+apparently, she darted into the side entrance. The darkness prevented
+him from seeing what was there, and he dared not enter. The moon was
+shining brightly.
+
+The desire to escape again took possession of him. But why try to
+escape? He felt sure the Chief meant no harm, and then he wandered to
+the other side of the building, and there lay the great ocean, the shore
+of which was not a thousand feet away.
+
+He sat down on a log, and pondered and, feeling fatigued from the
+unusual efforts of the day, he lay down for a nap. How long he remained
+there it was impossible to tell, for when he awoke, he found himself by
+the side of the trunk, and near him two of the body guard who
+accompanied the Chief the day before.
+
+He sat up, rubbed his eyes, arose, and without any suggestion or command
+on the part of the watchers, marched back to the Chief's palace, and
+entered the room to see the latter awake and reclining at his place on
+the floor.
+
+He offered a salutation to George, and the latter smiled and bowed
+graciously. One of the attendants touched him on the arm, and he was led
+to a room, adjoining the court; but there was no door, by means of which
+he could close the room, nor did he discover a window, or anything
+suggesting an opening at the other side of the apartment.
+
+A delightful odor came from some kind of grass which was piled in one
+corner. He examined it, and concluded that it had been placed there for
+his particular benefit. This was indeed a thoughtful thing on the
+Chief's part. They were making a home for him, that was evident.
+
+But he was too tired to reflect long on these things. Without removing
+his clothes he threw himself down on the sweet, clean grass, and he knew
+no more until, when the morning sun flooded the court, he could peer
+out, and see the family moving to and fro, but the Chief was nowhere in
+sight.
+
+While they had not ventured to tell him what was just the correct thing
+to do, he walked out, and then wandered to the open portal at the front.
+No one seemed to heed him. He walked down toward the ocean, and saw some
+women carrying water in curiously-shaped gourds.
+
+He followed the path, which led to a spring; delicious, cool and
+refreshing. Then he bathed his face, and washed his hands. But he missed
+the soap. He had not, however, forgotten the early days on Wonder
+Island, when the Professor found the soap tree.
+
+He glanced around. There, sure enough, was the identical bush, and
+breaking off several twigs, the small branches were crushed up together
+with the leaves, and with these he returned to the brook and had a good
+soap wash.
+
+This peculiar action was witnessed by some of the women, and the tale
+was quickly told, and became current in the village. When George visited
+the same spot, the bush had entirely disappeared.
+
+The Chief had not returned when he went back, but his breakfast was
+ready, and the maiden with the great round eyes, and the mother,
+evidently, waited on him.
+
+George looked toward the Chief's place. She understood, and pointed to
+the west. He mused awhile. What could she mean! It must not be supposed
+that during all this time George was not thinking of Harry, and John,
+and the boys who came over with them on this trip.
+
+They always called each other "boys." All the natives on Wonder Island
+were boys to them, and it was amusing to hear them say the word in
+return. They were all boys, Uraso, and Muro, as well; all but the
+Professor, John and Blakely.
+
+When George went out after breakfast he was surprised to note the
+absence of the men. No one but women and children were about. Then the
+truth flashed on him. The Chief had gone out, on hearing of the approach
+of John and his party.
+
+He rushed out toward the western path that led from the village, and he
+had not gone three hundred yards before the men, all armed with spears,
+came back, with the Chief at their head. All were in consternation.
+
+George knew what this meant now. He held up his hand as they hurriedly
+moved toward him, and pointed to the west. He did this smiling to assure
+him of the friendly character of the visit. The Chief stopped. George
+moved through the group and beckoned the Chief to follow.
+
+He hesitated but a moment, and then gave the necessary command. Coming
+through the forest beyond were John and the "Boys." When they were still
+too far for hailing distance George raised his hat and waved it.
+
+When John and his party were still a hundred yards away, they stopped at
+the unusual sight. Meanwhile George and the Chief moved on. Harry could
+not restrain himself, and broke from the party, in his mad rush to
+welcome George.
+
+"Bow, Harry; bow; he is a dandy Chief."
+
+Harry obediently made a gracious bow, and the Chief acknowledged the
+salute.
+
+All that Harry could say, was: "Oh, George!"
+
+John and the company came up, and George rushed to John, as he said: "I
+have had the nicest time in the world, but I am afraid the Chief does
+not know whether you are friends or enemies."
+
+John turned to the men, and quietly said: "This man is a friend, and we
+must treat him as a Chief. All give him a respectful greeting." The
+Chief stood still, as all the warriors ranged themselves in front and
+all bowed low, to the obvious relief of the savage.
+
+Then John brought Uraso and Muro forward, and by well timed gestures
+indicated to the Chief that they were also Chiefs, and he instantly
+showed that he recognized the pantomimic language, and deferentially
+bowed, as he had seen George do.
+
+Uraso stepped forward and went up to the burly form, and pressed his
+nose against his nose. Then, he spoke a few words. The Chief looked at
+him for a moment, and then answered. Muro was not slow to follow the
+example, and he also addressed the Chief.
+
+When Uraso turned and took John's hand and in a dialect, which both
+seemed to understand, he told about John and the boys, the Chief turned
+to his men and said a dozen words, which were instantly recognized by
+Uraso and Muro. They smiled.
+
+"What did he say?" asked George.
+
+"He told them to go to the village and prepare food."
+
+All but a half dozen of the immediate followers of the Chief turned and
+darted back to the village.
+
+"Do you know the Chief's language?" asked Harry, as Uraso gave way to
+Muro.
+
+"We can understand each other pretty well. There are many words which
+are the same, but he uses some which are new to me."
+
+"Do you suppose they are the same people as are on our island?"
+
+"I do not know that. We have heard that all the people in the different
+islands came from the same place, but where we do not know."
+
+Then the boys crowded around George, and insisted on having him tell his
+story. Did you ever hear a boy tell a thrilling story of his own
+adventures? Well George was in his heaven of delight as he told of his
+treatment, and how he had dined with the Chief, and slept in his palace.
+
+"His palace?" queried Harry.
+
+"Yes, palace! It isn't a common house!" And George dilated on it to such
+an extent that Harry actually grew envious at the big time that George
+had at their expense.
+
+The party wended its way down the hill, and when the village was reached
+the sight there astounded George. He had left it a sleepy place. Now all
+was bustle. Fires were being built; the men and women were busy
+preparing food. A species of hog, well known on Wonder Island, was being
+prepared and spitted, and hung over the heated coals.
+
+They saw the favorite native vegetable, the Taro root, and also, to
+their surprise, an abundance of Uraso's poison bulb, the Amarylla, which
+he had tried to prepare in stealth after he had been captured, and the
+telling of which was the occasion of many jokes at the expense of George
+and Harry.
+
+John, the two boys, together with Uraso and Muro, were ushered into the
+Chief's house.
+
+"And this is what you call a 'palace'?" remarked Harry.
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"From your description I thought it might be on top of a big hill with
+graded steps leading up between rows of flowers, and the rooms filled
+with statuary, with a large fountain playing in the center of a fine
+banquet hall."
+
+George laughed at the joke. "The trouble with you is that you are not a
+philosopher, Harry. If you had been as well treated as I have been you
+would think the same as I do."
+
+John overheard the conversation, and remarked: "I must say that there is
+more philosophy in that view than even you, George, appreciate."
+
+"Have I said anything unusual?" he asked with a sort of mock gravity.
+
+"Quite so; have you ever heard the saying 'Handsome is, as handsome
+does'? Well, that is the root of all true actions in life. From the
+noble manner in which this Chief treated George, giving him the best
+that he had, and installing him in the finest room in the house, is
+doing all that any one can do."
+
+"That is the way I really felt about it at the time. I was tired and
+hungry, and instead of meeting an enemy, I met a friend."
+
+"Do you see, Harry? George did right in calling this a palace. If it so
+appears in his heart, and he feels that impulse, isn't that just as real
+as though you see it with your eyes?"
+
+"I didn't think of it in that way," said Harry, apologetically. "I like
+the old fellow. He is good enough to be a white man."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+PECULIARITIES OF THE NATIVE TRIBE
+
+
+Within an hour the feast was ready, and the men in the open were already
+making merry with the maidens who prepared the meal. George and Harry
+frequently nudged each other, as they caught the eyes of some of the
+native boys who were very attentive to the gentler sex.
+
+Within the Chief's dwelling there was the most animated conversation
+indulged in by the Chief, Uraso and John, and to this number were added
+the Chief's brother, and a handsome man who was probably one of the
+Chief's principal advisors. Muro and Uraso were the interpreters.
+
+The latter, by turns, told the Chief where they sailed from, and what
+their history had been for the past three years. They told about the
+wonderful Professor, and all concerning John, and what part the two boys
+had taken in the transformation of the island.
+
+"But where is this wonderful ship?" asked the Chief.
+
+"On the other side of the island," answered Uraso.
+
+"Then why do you not bring it here?"
+
+"We should have done so, but we did not know we had a friend here."
+
+"I want to see the wonderful place you have told me about,--your home,
+and how you make people happy," said the Chief.
+
+John's face lit up when this was interpreted to him.
+
+"What do your people work at?" the Chief abruptly asked Muro.
+
+"We make many curious things, like the articles you have here," and he
+pointed to George's belongings, which were still lying about.
+
+The Chief hurriedly gathered them up and handed them to George. The
+latter, after turning to John, refused to take them, and addressing
+Uraso, said: "Tell him that I want him to take them, and my gun, as
+well."
+
+The Chief could not understand this, and at first refused, but John, as
+well as Uraso, insisted, and the latter said:
+
+"These boys can make these things, and they do not feel that they are
+sacrificing anything, beyond what it is their duty to do."
+
+The Chief looked doubtfully at the boys, as he remarked: "Do you tell me
+that these _memees_, (Boys) made these things?"
+
+Uraso and Muro both assured them that such was the case, and added: "And
+still more wonderful things."
+
+After some conversation Uraso turned to John and said: "The Chief wishes
+to send a runner to bring the ship to the harbor here. Hasmo may
+accompany him."
+
+This arrangement had John's approval, and when Hasmo was advised of the
+mission, he jumped up with delight, and, together with the Chief's
+fleetest messenger, speeded off to make the intervening twenty-five
+miles.
+
+It was not much of a task for the two men. In less than four hours,
+Sutoto saw two men on the shore, one of them waving a signal that he
+understood. A boat was put off, and when the runners came aboard, and
+the news imparted, all on board sprang to their places, the anchor was
+hurriedly taken up, and the _Pioneer_ soon rounded the point, while they
+all eagerly scanned the shore.
+
+The Chief and his visitors remained in the "palace" for three hours,
+while the latter told and retold the stories which so much interested
+the chieftain. Then John began to question him upon matters that more
+nearly concerned their visit.
+
+"Ask him," he said, "if they have any Krishnos here?"
+
+"He does not know what they are," answered Muro.
+
+"Does he believe in a Great Spirit?"
+
+"No he has never heard anything of that kind."
+
+"Ask him if he knows who makes the rain and the sunshine, and the
+clouds."
+
+"He says that the questions are surprising to him."
+
+"Has he never thought of those things?"
+
+"No; all he knows is that he lives and that he is a Chief and is the one
+who must govern the people."
+
+"Does he know why he is the Chief?"
+
+"Yes; because he is stronger than any one else."
+
+"That would certainly make him a Chief," remarked Harry. "I never saw
+such a big man."
+
+"Do they have any big holes in the ground!"
+
+When the question was asked he waited a moment, and then slowly shook
+his head.
+
+"They have nothing of that kind to his knowledge."
+
+The countenances of Harry and George fell. John noticed it, and smiled
+at the disappointment.
+
+"There are no caves around here," said George.
+
+"Are there any mountains on the island?"
+
+"There are high hills."
+
+"Have they any neighbors, or different tribes?"
+
+"Yes; to the north, (pointing in that direction) are some bad people,
+but they belong to him."
+
+"Why do they not live near to the village!"
+
+"Because they would make the people bad."
+
+"What did they do that was so bad?"
+
+"They stole and lied."
+
+"From whom did they steal?"
+
+"From the Chief."
+
+"Did they steal from each other?"
+
+"No; they could not steal from each other."
+
+At this remark the boys laughed. John began to be interested now in his
+questionings.
+
+"Do you mean it is not wrong to steal from each other, but only from the
+Chief?"
+
+He nodded an assent. This was a curious bit of reasoning. It needed
+some explanation. John continued:
+
+"Why is it wrong to steal from the Chief and not from each other?"
+
+At this question the Chief did not answer as promptly as usual. He
+weighed the question in his mind. He smiled as though to say: How can it
+be wrong for people to take things from each other? They do not own
+anything. No one but the Chief owns things.
+
+His answer, when finally given, was not at all clear, at least so the
+boys thought.
+
+"The Chief in his wisdom gives to all alike; and when he gives it the
+property still belongs to him and not the people; but if they take it
+from the Chief then they are robbers."
+
+"Ask him," said John, "whether, if when he gives anything to one of his
+people, and it still belongs to him, after he gives it, why it is not
+stealing from him, if some one takes it away from the one he gave it
+to?"
+
+The Chief was not at all taken aback at this question. Pointing to the
+sun, he said:
+
+"That is a great Chief. He gives seed to the people, and they plant it.
+But the great Chief does not forget it. The seed comes up to see its
+father. It still belongs to him. When he gives that seed to the people
+it is for their use. Every one has a right to take it and use it, and it
+is no crime. But if he takes it away from the Chief, he destroys what
+belongs to him, and he then does a wrong which must be punished."
+
+"This may not be very clear to you," said John, "but it means that
+whoever takes it away and destroys it wilfully, is guilty of a crime.
+Whatever the Great Chief gives willingly, like the fruits of the earth,
+is intended for all alike, and men should not be called criminals for
+taking what they need, if they do not wilfully destroy it."
+
+"That is a wonderful idea, when I come to think of it," remarked George.
+"And to think that a savage could work that out in his mind."
+
+"But there is one thing that looks a little queer to me. He said he did
+not know or believe in a Great Spirit, and yet he talks of the sun as a
+Great Spirit," remarked Harry.
+
+"I will put the question to him," said John. "You said that you did not
+believe in a Great Spirit, but now you speak about the sun as a Great
+Chief. Do you not believe in him?"
+
+"No; I only know that he is there; I do not believe in him any more than
+in the carago (moon)."
+
+A great noise was heard outside; the Chief looked up, as an attendant
+entered. He spoke to Uraso, and the latter turned to John and said:
+
+"Our ship is coming."
+
+This announcement broke up the interview. It was exciting and
+interesting from first to last, and when they emerged from the dwelling
+the host and visitors were friends that the future never could sever. It
+gave a new inspiration to the boys, and it showed them that even a low
+state of man was capable of expressing things that were worthy of
+consideration.
+
+The entire village went to the seashore. The inhabitants wondered at the
+great vessel, and were impressed at the manner in which it was handled.
+
+"I am anxious to see the man who can row such a vessel," said the Chief.
+
+"He is one of the men from our island," answered Muro.
+
+This seemed to be an astonishing thing to him. He had seen vessels
+before, but in the distance. At long intervals parts of ships had come
+ashore; but this was the first time that a vessel had ever landed,
+within his recollection.
+
+As it drew near he marveled at its size. He could see the man at the
+bow-sprit who was constantly throwing something attached to a line
+overboard, and then drawing it in again.
+
+He questioned the reason for such a strange action, and was told that
+the man was trying the depth of the water, so that they might not come
+too close to the shore, and strike the bottom. Then some of the sailors
+dropped something overboard, with a great splash, and a huge sail fell
+down like magic, and the ship still moved toward the shore and turned
+around.
+
+The Chief was inquisitive concerning every action. Why did the ship act
+like a human and turn around? He could hardly believe the statement when
+told that the anchor was a giant claw, and that when it reached the
+bottom it took hold and had sufficient strength to stop the ship and
+make it swing around, as he had witnessed.
+
+A boat was lowered, and the last one to descend was Sutoto. Uraso
+pointed out his figure, and the Chief kept his eyes on him. The first
+man to leave the boat was Sutoto, and both boys rushed down to meet him.
+It was the course they always pursued, to be in the lead to welcome
+anyone.
+
+They led him to the Chief, and he put his great arms about Sutoto, to
+the latter's great embarrassment. But what affected Sutoto more than
+anything else, were the eyes of the Chief's daughter, who had acted so
+shyly to George the night before. From that moment Sutoto saw no one
+else, and she,--well, Harry and George laughed, and slyly caressed
+Sutoto, as they saw her admiring glances.
+
+Sutoto was the handsomest native on Wonder Island. He was the brave and
+fleet runner who undertook the mission to pass through the three savage
+tribes to carry a message, written on a plaintain leaf by the Professor,
+to John and the boys while they were surrounded by the hostiles.
+
+The friendship between him and the boys grew stronger and better from
+that day on. The tribute to him was one which the boys enjoyed for his
+sake, and because he deserved it.
+
+There was a feast that night, unparalleled in the knowledge of the boys.
+It was like going to a new world, and meeting new people. Only one
+little thing seemed to mar the joyous occasion for the boys for a time.
+When they were returning from the beach, they saw three of the natives,
+together with their wives and children, with their hands bound, and in
+charge of a half dozen warriors.
+
+George recognized the three as his captors. Then was impressed upon him
+the fact that they were about to pay the penalty for stealing his things
+and hiding the theft from the Chief. They were to be exiled to the place
+where the bad people lived.
+
+George hurriedly told Uraso the story of the theft, and begged him to
+intercede with the Chief. Instantly, when he learned that George
+requested it, he turned to Uraso, and said: "He may release them."
+
+He rushed up to the now bewildered culprits, in order to sever the
+bonds, and then recalling that he had given his knife to the Chief, he
+called to Harry, and together they freed the limbs of the captives and
+the Chief, with a few words of admonition, dismissed them. The boys
+never forgot the grateful looks that came from the men and their wives.
+
+When they had departed Muro said: "Under their law the women and
+children of the culprits are criminals also, and so they were doomed to
+go together."
+
+It would be a difficult matter to describe the food prepared and eaten
+at this banquet. Several varieties of fowl, all wild types, and the wild
+boar, as well as the 'possum, provided the meats. Of course taro and
+amarylla were the chief vegetables; and of nuts, the well known Brazil
+species was found everywhere, and to be seen in all dwellings.
+
+The outer portion of the shell of the Brazil nut formed bowls and cups,
+which the boys early learned to utilize. There were bananas, a species
+of fig, and loquats.
+
+"What surprises me is that they have no fish, or sea food of any kind,"
+observed Harry.
+
+John mused for a while, and then said: "It is likely that the people
+here have the same aversion to fish as some natives along the Australian
+continent, and in the islands near there."
+
+"What is that?" asked George.
+
+"The natives of New Guinea, for instance, worship snakes, lizards,
+sharks and crocodiles, and there is a strict law among them not to
+injure anything, of that kind. As a result, they are afraid to eat
+anything that approaches the shape of these animals."
+
+"Well, if they worship the snakes they must have some kind of religion,"
+ventured Harry.
+
+"Yes; and with them go the witch doctors who practice on the people and
+charge fees just the same as the physicians do in our country."
+
+"Do they claim there is a Great Spirit, like some of the people here!"
+
+"No; they have a God called Baigona, who lives in the mountains, and
+instead of being a good God, is a bad one; he has the power to speak
+without being heard, to strike without being seen, and he loves and
+hates, just like human beings. He gives the witch doctor the power to do
+anything, without being wrong, and without being liable to punishment."
+
+"Well, that is a pretty convenient God to have," said Harry, as he mused
+at the idea.
+
+The peculiar thing about the absence of sea food at the banquet could
+not be understood, particularly as the natives on Wonder Island were
+great fish eaters, and were also the bitter enemies of snakes.
+
+"We must consult the Chief about that," said John.
+
+At the first opportunity the subject was brought up, and it was
+discovered that the people were afraid to eat anything that came from
+the sea. And then another thing was learned. There were no rivers of any
+consequence on the island; only a few streams, that were dry most of the
+year.
+
+"I can understand," said John, "that in such a case you do not have
+fresh water fish."
+
+The Chief was, in many respects, a remarkable character. Most natives
+are extremely superstitious, and it is particularly true of those who
+have a belief in some form of God. While he would marvel at new things
+they did not occur to him as being the result of some new occult force.
+
+In this respect he differed from the natives of Wonder Island, all of
+whom believed, more or less, in the tales of the Medicine Men, and of
+the witch doctors. Old Suros, of the Berees tribe, was the only one who
+did not believe in the existence of a being who could rule him.
+
+But the Chief had other qualities which were remarkable in a savage, if
+such he was. He governed according to some law, and yet he did not know
+what law was. The only thing in that community was the will of that one
+man.
+
+If he said something, in adjusting any matter, it was always remembered
+by the people, and that ruling became a guide for them in the future.
+Take, for instance, the theft of the articles from George. The three who
+participated in it, knew that it was not wrong, according to the light
+they had, to take it from George.
+
+Indeed, the Chief had distinctly said that they could not steal from
+each other, but only from him, hence the theft of the articles which
+George owned was not a crime. On what ground, then, were they guilty?
+
+George thought he had solved the problem, when discussing the matter
+with John. "The Chief found them guilty of trying to hide what they had
+done, and they were caught at it."
+
+"But the Chief was not covetous. He admitted he did not care for the
+things, and one of the men told Muro that the Chief never took things
+from his people without paying for them."
+
+"Well, then, he punished them for trying to deceive him."
+
+"There, that is one of the crimes which the Chief referred to. I think
+he is a wonderful character, and I hope we shall be able to unite him
+with us."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+SUTOTO AND THE CHIEF'S DAUGHTER
+
+
+It was plain that Sutoto was not the same being. During the three days
+they remained at the port, and formed the exploring expeditions into the
+interior, with the co-operation of the Chief, Sutoto did not take a
+part.
+
+He begged to be allowed to remain near the ship. That was a sly
+suggestion which John understood. Even though he might have been blind
+he would have known the true reason, for the boys were continuously
+joking Sutoto all of which he took good-naturedly, and John often burst
+out in fits of laughter, as he witnessed Sutoto's discomfiture.
+
+The Chief's name was Beralsee, and the big-eyed maiden was known as
+Cinda, the meaning of which was, as explained by Beralsee, the Beautiful
+Star. The Chief had four other children, one a man of twenty-one, and
+the others younger than Cinda.
+
+The eldest, Calmo, was tall and lithe, like Sutoto. Like his father he
+was original in his ways, and to him the Chief entrusted the care of the
+expeditions which were made at the suggestion of John. The latter
+explained that they had seen the wonderful products growing on the
+island, coffee, cocoa, spices, and particularly the various fibres.
+
+The recital of the tales, of how the white man used these things to
+make the various needed articles, and how the great ships were employed
+to carry the goods to and fro, and how the different things were
+exchanged, interested him.
+
+Many of the subjects were not within his comprehension. Why were all
+these things done? What was the object of having so many products?
+
+John told him that when men had everything they really needed to keep
+them alive and in comfort, they still wanted something more, and those
+things were called luxuries; then, after they and their children used
+these luxuries for a while, they found them to be absolutely essential
+and they then became necessaries. In that way men learned the use of so
+many, many things, that the whole world was being searched to find
+products which would serve to make the needed things.
+
+"Do you mean," said the Chief, "that your people are trying to find
+things they do not need, so they can buy them, and try to make some use
+of them?"
+
+John could not help but smile at the acuteness of the question. "That,
+in effect, is just what they do. It is not so considered, however, by
+our people. It is difficult to say just where necessity ends and luxury
+begins. But each year, yes every month, new things are brought out, and
+people begin to buy them, because the traders and the people who sell
+are shrewd and know how to cultivate taste and the desire for new and
+startling things."
+
+"But how do the people get the articles to exchange for these things?"
+
+"The people do not accumulate articles to buy other articles with.
+Instead, they work to get money, and with this money they buy the
+things."
+
+"I do not know what you mean by that. What is 'money'?"
+
+"It is an article which tells what everything else is worth."
+
+"Then it must be wonderful. I would like to see that remarkable thing
+which can tell what everything else is worth."
+
+John took some of the coins from his pocket. "Here is some of it, which
+we use on Wonder Island."
+
+The Chief smiled. He held them in his hand. He knew the meaning of the
+hole in the center. They were intended, as he thought, to be threaded on
+a string, and used as an ornament.
+
+They fascinated him. He had never seen anything so attractive. He looked
+at John, while he thought, but did not speak. Then John said: "This is
+worth one cent, and this larger one five cents."
+
+He compared the two. Finally, he said: "What makes this worth so much
+more than the other, and why are they worth anything?"
+
+"Because there is so much metal,--so much copper, in each."
+
+"But copper is of no use. I cannot eat it, and it will not clothe me."
+
+"No, but if you have this money then you can get the clothes, and the
+size of them will tell just how much clothing you can get."
+
+"I do not understand it. Where can I go and get clothing with these
+round pieces!"
+
+"You must go where the clothing is, or the goods must be brought to
+you."
+
+"Well, if we are here, at a place where there should be no clothing, or
+no food, this _money_, as you call it, would not enable me to clothe or
+feed myself?"
+
+"Assuredly not."
+
+"Then it has no value?"
+
+"No; it merely measures the value of something which I can eat or wear,
+or use."
+
+"Then why not use a taro root, or a fowl, or wisps of fibre?"
+
+"That would be all right, if we could have a common understanding
+between us of how much a taro bulb was worth by the side of a bundle of
+fibre, and how large the bundle should be to exchange fairly with an
+armful of Amarylla tubers."
+
+On the third day the boys, together with John, a party of the boys, and
+three natives under the lead of Calmo, started for the northern end of
+the island. John had now learned that the island was entirely unlike the
+Wonder Island formation.
+
+The latter was fairly circular in form, whereas the one they were now
+about to explore was narrow and long. That part of the southern portion
+which they had carefully examined, in order to learn its agricultural
+possibilities, was rolling, and in many places had level plateaus, not
+anywhere at a greater altitude than three or four hundred feet above sea
+level.
+
+There was higher ground to the north, where the climate was uninviting,
+so Beralsee said, and it was for that reason they made it a convict
+colony.
+
+John was anxious to see the people who were exiled from their homes on
+account of their crimes. Furthermore, he was impressed with the idea
+that the upper end showed volcanic upheavals, which would be likely to
+expose mineral formations.
+
+Gruesome tales were current of the ferocity of the convicts. It was no
+wonder that the poor victims, whom George had prevented from being
+expelled several days before, regarded their deliverance as such a great
+blessing.
+
+No one, once condemned, was ever permitted to come back. The
+condemnation was for all time. Furthermore, it was part of the Chief's
+unwritten code, that no one who transgressed the law could ever make
+atonement, or recover his rights.
+
+To be able to meet people so condemned, and to talk with them and get
+their views, was worth an exertion, surely, and Harry and George were
+just as enthusiastic at the prospects of the journey.
+
+"That may be some recompense for not finding any caves," said George.
+
+Harry laughed, as he looked at George. "To hear you talk people might
+think you had caves on the brain."
+
+"Well the caves are the only thing that we have had in the way of sport.
+And then the treasures!"
+
+"I know that; but I shall not be disappointed if there isn't a cave
+within five hundred miles."
+
+"Nor I; but John is very anxious, for some reason, to find some
+particular cave. I'll bet anything that skull we found on the southeast
+peak of Wonder Island has something to do with it, judging by the way he
+is caring for the skull, and spending hours in examining it."
+
+"I had forgotten about that," responded Harry. "That brings back my
+interest, now. But John does not think there are any caves on this
+island, but he believes that there is another island farther south."
+
+"Is that so!"
+
+"I am sure of it."
+
+"How sure?"
+
+"Well, the chart which John made has this island on it, and a mark which
+shows something like it directly to the south. I saw that several days
+ago."
+
+"When did he make the drawing?"
+
+"Since he has been on this island."
+
+Harry emitted a low whistle. "I thought John had something in his mind
+all along. What do you suppose he expects to find in that particular
+cave?"
+
+"Well, not money; that's sure. It might be a good idea to do some
+thinking and searching on our own account."
+
+"I have often wondered, since we have been on Wonder Island, and more
+particularly, since we landed here, whether it would not be possible to
+trace some of the unsolved mysteries of Wonder Island to this, or some
+other island."
+
+"Yes, I have often thought of that. We have gone over every part of that
+island, and found no trace of the other boat load, that is of the boys
+who came ashore on the _Investigator's_ No. 3. None of the tribes ever
+knew or heard of that boat, nor was there ever a trace of the members of
+that crew.
+
+"That is the mystery. Some one brought the boat to the island. Some one
+took it inland. Some one, a man by the name of Walter, wrote a note
+addressed to Wright, who was one of the companions of John when he was
+shipwrecked, but Wright knew nothing of Walter. If the solution of this
+matter does not lie in some other island, we might as well give it up."
+
+Before describing the events of the journey it is necessary to make a
+digression, so that we may be able to recount some things which had a
+bearing on the adventures and experiences of the two boys after they
+returned.
+
+The natives on Wonder Island, as well as on the island where they now
+were, wore the most primitive kinds of clothing. The men had the
+simplest clothing, merely a breech clout, worn about the loins, and the
+Chiefs usually wore some distinguishing clothing about their shoulders,
+and usually on their arms.
+
+The women, however, had short skirts, and like their white sisters,
+abounded in ornaments. Some of them had jackets, to which the trinkets
+were attached. All delighted in bracelets. These were usually formed
+like bands around their arms and limbs, and the wealth and importance of
+the dame was judged from the number so employed.
+
+As a result, when they became great and wealthy, more and more clothing
+had to be used, to enable them to attach the ornaments. It might be
+said, that clothing was worn, not for the purpose of covering the body,
+or for comfort, but in order to serve as a vehicle to attach the much
+desired trinkets, and the dangling character of these articles seemed to
+be the great attraction.
+
+For this reason bright and sparkling bits of jewelry were the most
+sought. It mattered not what they were made of, but the glistening
+surface had its value to them. Singularly enough, the women on the new
+island strove to decorate themselves in like manner, and presumably, for
+the same purpose.
+
+When the savages in Wonder Island were brought out of their crude state,
+the Professor and George knew that they could not change that
+fundamental law of nature, nor did they attempt to work a revolution in
+the minds and characters of the people in this respect.
+
+Within certain limitations such a desire to ornament and render
+themselves attractive is most laudable. They knew that among the few
+peoples in the world, where that quality is entirely lacking, they are
+of the lowest type, and possessed of the least intellect, and that all
+such are the hardest to cultivate.
+
+Here, as on Wonder Island, the natives understood weaving, the fabrics
+being of the coarsest character, both in the matter of quality and
+appearance. The work was necessarily slow and tedious, and the principal
+work of the women was to weave these articles of wear with the simple
+tools they had.
+
+When the boys built the looms, and the natives saw the wonderful goods
+produced, and the dyes prepared to give the fabrics the different hues,
+the women became most expert weavers, and the natural result was that
+they vied with each other to make the best articles, and to form them
+into the most fashionable garments.
+
+When the _Pioneer_, and later their new steamer, _Wonder_, which was now
+regularly running to one of the great seaports, began to bring in such
+products as they could not make in the islands, a new impetus was given
+to the dress designed for women.
+
+Before the boys left for Wonder Island, that place attracted immigrants
+from the north; they brought their families, and began to engage in the
+business of exporting the fruits and the fibres, as well as the ores and
+the dyes from the island. From the white women the native women learned
+the new art of dressing, and of adornment.
+
+Their coming was not needed to give them the desire, but they were not
+slow to recognize that their fair-skinned sisters could teach them the
+refining process.
+
+Muro's wife was the sister of Uraso, the latter a man of naturally
+strong intellect, and his sister was not behind him in her particular
+domain. She was at all times the leading spirit in the development of
+her people, and to her the Professor imparted many of the great secrets,
+that might be of service.
+
+Stut, the brother of Muro, was second in command of the vessel, and
+before they left on the mission into the interior, John called in Stut,
+and in presence of the boys imparted a scheme that met with hearty
+approval.
+
+It was now an open secret that Sutoto and Cinda were in love. If the
+Chief knew of it he did not exhibit any alarm, or offer any objections.
+John knew that courtships on the islands were not usually of long
+duration. He thought it would be a fine thing to make the wedding a
+"state affair."
+
+"Now, Stut, I want to entrust you with a mission to the Professor and
+Muro's wife, to whom you can explain the situation. She must prepare a
+suitable outfit for the bride, and tell her I think she and the other
+women that she might choose should also come over. They must not forget
+to bring the proper costumes for Cinda's mother and for all the
+attendants.
+
+"The Professor will know what is suitable to send over for the Chief.
+All this will take some time to arrange, and it must be done without
+letting Sutoto know. I will arrange the matter with him so that he will
+not suspect your real mission.
+
+"Our work at the northern part of the island will take about ten days,
+and probably less. If you have no trouble, and this time of the year is
+not a stormy one, you can easily make the trip there in a day and a
+half, and return in the same time, thus giving you a full week to
+prepare the articles."
+
+Stut was in raptures at the announcement. John knew that he was capable,
+and trusted him. Shortly afterwards Sutoto was sent for, and John said:
+"It is necessary for the _Pioneer_ to return to Wonder Island to get
+some things of importance for us. It would please me better to have you
+remain, and Stut can take your place for the trip; but if you prefer to
+go, it will be satisfactory."
+
+Sutoto hesitated for a moment. He eyed John for a moment, and the boys
+begged him to remain. They knew, as did John, that their entreaties were
+not necessary. Finally, with a most suspicious glance, he consented to
+stay. Stut was notified, and he came in.
+
+"Stut, I have some very valuable papers which must be delivered to the
+Professor, who will send some things back, and I have arranged with
+Sutoto that he shall remain and help us in our investigations here,
+while you sail the _Pioneer_ to Unity."
+
+Stut looked at Sutoto for a moment, as though taken by surprise, and
+announced his willingness to go. "Then start at once," remarked John,
+"and return as soon as possible."
+
+Sutoto called Stut aside, after they left John. "Will you get some
+things for me?" he asked.
+
+"Certainly, what can I do for you?"
+
+Then Sutoto imparted the secret of his coming marriage to Stut, and the
+latter with well concealed surprise, promised secrecy, and assured him
+that he would get the clothing necessary and the particular presents
+that seemed to be of more importance to him than his garments.
+
+Within two hours the ship was ready, and as they were leaving the vessel
+Stut told the boys of the commission which he had undertaken at Sutoto's
+request.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE SKELETON BENEATH THE BOAT
+
+
+The present journey reminded the boys of the time when they began their
+wanderings in the unknown wilds of their own island. Then they were
+inexperienced, lacking the most ordinary knowledge of life in the open,
+afraid of slightest noise when in unknown places, and constantly fearing
+attack by wild men or beasts.
+
+What a difference now! They had been successful, and had abundant
+treasures at their command. Something told them that they were to find
+still greater treasures, and the zest was one beyond expression.
+
+The course was directed due north. The boys knew that they were to
+investigate the mountains, the hills and the streams. They were to learn
+what fruits and vegetation might be found in their native state on the
+island; the kinds and varieties of animals, and the qualities of the
+minerals, if the geological formations offered them for inspection.
+
+From the first day that they landed, the boys had heard a peculiar
+guttural sound, impossible to describe. The sound was almost annoying
+after they had heard it for a time. Passing the limb of a tree during
+the first hour of the march they heard the same cry.
+
+"I see what it is," remarked George. "It is a bird. See it on that
+limb?"
+
+John looked, and then turned to George. "Why certainly, that is the
+Kagu."
+
+"Why its bill and feet are red, while the rest of the body is gray. What
+a funny feather it has running back from its head!"
+
+Harry laughed, as he remarked: "I wonder if our women took their hat
+fashions from the Kagu?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 8. The Kagu._]
+
+"You have made a correct observation. Some species of the hornbill have
+feathers which project up into the air like sentinels, and the same
+feathers are used in exactly the same fashion by makers of millinery.
+Now, I am not an authority on the fashions, but I have often thought
+that if the leaders in styles would build those wonderful head
+decorations something like the patterns furnished by nature they would
+be more beautiful and becoming."
+
+"I wonder if it has only one leg?"
+
+John laughed. "I imagine it has two. It is the custom of many birds of
+this species to stand for hours on one leg. It is of the same family as
+the stork, the heron and the ibis."
+
+"Why don't we see more animals?"
+
+"The island is not, probably, large enough. These small islands have
+only the smallest kinds. Besides, the larger animals are found where the
+nature of the country permits them to conceal themselves."
+
+George stopped before a large bush which had rows of yellow flowers
+growing up all along the stems, and at each flower was a seed.
+
+"Ah! you have found a most valuable plant," said John, as he broke off
+one of the stems. "Feel the crushed leaves."
+
+"It is just like grease."
+
+"It is an oil. It is one of the products largely used in the United
+States, as a substitute for olive oil, and for soap making."
+
+"What is it called?"
+
+"The plant is known as Benne. The product is Sesame oil. The peculiarity
+of the plant is that nearly one-half of the leaf is a pure oil, and it
+can remain exposed a long time before it turns rancid."
+
+"I wonder if that is what they use in their cooking!"
+
+"Yes; it is absolutely inodorous, and is better than lard for table
+uses. Look at the seeds. They are classed with the most nutritious in
+the world."
+
+"The Chief had them, and I tried some of them the first night I dined
+with him."
+
+The route led to an upper plateau, well wooded, many of the trees being
+of the palm variety, with plenty of silver-leafed families so common
+everywhere.
+
+"Do look at the Coffee trees?" exclaimed Harry.
+
+The Chief's son was consulted. He had no knowledge of the use of the
+berry. "We must take a lot of the berries back with us. This will be a
+treat at the celebration." John stopped short, and the boys commenced to
+laugh. He had almost given away the scheme for the wedding feast. Sutoto
+did not catch the force of the allusion.
+
+George and Harry were now on the quest for new things in every
+direction, and the natives aided them in carrying out their every wish.
+After they had reached a small stream flowing to the north it became
+evident that they had passed the highest point of the plateau, and were
+now descending.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 9. Sesame Oil Plant. The Benne._]
+
+One of the natives pointed out a peculiarly-shaped tree, tall, with
+immense leaves, and at each leaf cluster there was an immense white
+flower.
+
+"Here is a tree with yellow flowers. We must have some of these as
+specimens," said Harry.
+
+The trees were exceedingly tall. "The men are asking if you want some of
+the flowers," said Sutoto.
+
+"By all means," answered George. Without a moment's hesitation a young
+athlete made his way to the top, and gathered a dozen branches, which he
+dropped to the ground.
+
+The beauty of these flowers is difficult to describe. The tree body is
+perfectly straight, and the limbs grow out uniformly on three sides, the
+leaves being very rough.
+
+"This is a species which belongs to the Indicus family," remarked John,
+as he cut off one of the leaves. "It would be a good tree for carpenters
+to raise."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 10. Flower of Indica Tree._]
+
+"Why so?" asked George.
+
+"You see it is just like sand-paper."
+
+"Well, that is something to know. But will it really smooth down wood?"
+
+"It is frequently used for that purpose, and you might take some along
+and try it."
+
+At intervals John was observed taking up bits of soil, which he
+carefully wrapped up and deposited in one of the receptacles.
+
+"I am curious to know what you are taking dirt for?" said Harry.
+
+"I should have told you that a knowledge of the nature of the soil is
+one of the things that is very important to the agriculturist. Many men
+have made failures because they planted things which the earth was not
+adapted to grow."
+
+"It has always been a wonder to me why things really do grow up out of
+the dirt," said Harry.
+
+"That is not difficult to understand, if you will consider that the
+ground contains food, and that a plant can grow only where it can get
+the right kind. Then, there may be plenty of food but not the kind it
+can digest."
+
+"Well, that is news to me. Do plants digest food?"
+
+"Yes, just the same as what we call living animals. The tree is somewhat
+different from animals, in the particular that it digests its food first
+and then consumes it afterwards. In this particular certain larvae act
+the same as trees, that is digest it before they consume it."
+
+"What do you mean by larva?"
+
+"The early form of certain living organisms, before they are fully
+developed. Thus, the tadpole is the larva of the frog. A great many
+insects are bred from what are called grubs, or caterpillars. All these
+are called larva."
+
+"What kind of food is found in the earth?"
+
+"Many, many kinds. Carbon, nitrogen, the various salts, such as lime,
+magnesia, strontia, and the like, and when the little feelers shoot out
+from the roots, they are in search of something to eat."
+
+At this point they were interrupted by shouting and laughter from one
+section of the searching party, and the boys ran out across the open to
+learn its cause. Two of the natives were carrying a dark brown object,
+about half the size of an ordinary hog.
+
+It was kicking vigorously, but did not appear to be at all vicious.
+
+"Why, it looks just like a little bear," said George as he danced about.
+"Let us keep it for a pet."
+
+"It is a bear," said John. "It is the Bruang, or the sun-bear of the
+Malayan peninsula."
+
+"But doesn't it grow any bigger?"
+
+"No; that is a full size specimen; in fact, it is a pretty large
+specimen, I should judge."
+
+"What beautiful fur, and so soft! Will it bite?"
+
+"I am of the opinion they can bite, but they are easily tamed and make
+great pets. Hasn't it a fine white spot on its breast?"
+
+The men stood about and allowed it to move about within the circle. It
+cast its eyes around, as much as to say: "Well, what are you going to do
+about it?"
+
+George cried out: "Hold it for a minute," and he pounced on one of the
+provision bags, and brought out a pot of honey. He forced his way in
+among the watchers, and with a stick dipped into the honey held it up
+before the animal.
+
+It smelled the honey, and began to lick the stick, and then it darted
+for the pot. "What a tongue," exclaimed Harry.
+
+"That is what they are noted for. The tongue is made for the very
+purpose of going into deep holes, and the greatest use is to rob the
+hives of the wild honey bee."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 11. Bruang. The Malayan Bear._]
+
+The antics of George and the bear were most amusing to the watchers, and
+occasioned roars of laughter. When the pot was emptied he wanted more,
+and nosed around George until the latter could hardly keep his feet.
+
+"He is getting to be a mighty close friend," said John, when he could
+find time to stop laughing for a moment.
+
+"Well, don't let him get away," cried George, as he saw the cordon
+around the animal broken up, leaving plenty of opening for it to get
+away.
+
+But, of course, the natives didn't understand him, and soon Mr. Bear had
+all the opportunity in the world to go home. But he didn't. He walked
+alongside of George, and the latter liked to stroke his soft fur, to
+which no objection was offered.
+
+The bear followed and was by his side every minute of the time for the
+next hour, and while they sat down to lunch little Sunny, as George
+named him, was at the feast. He had samples of everything in sight, and
+the menu tasted good, from honey at the beginning of the repast, to
+honey at the end of it.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The progress was necessarily slow, because there were so many things to
+examine and to make notes of. They went out of the way from the direct
+route, so as to cover as wide an area as possible. Before camping for
+the night they had ascended a slight elevation, and there, to the right
+and to the left they saw the wide stretches of the great ocean.
+
+Directly ahead was a narrow tongue of land, leading to a broadening
+area, and off in the dim distance was a high point. The Chief's son
+pointed there and said:
+
+"On the other side of that high place is where the bad people live."
+
+"That must be a long way off," said John. When this was interpreted he
+answered: "Another day's march."
+
+The gentle breeze from the eastern shore was a great relief.
+
+They had marched during the day mostly through forests, and everywhere
+the atmosphere was close and still, so that the open space was
+appreciated.
+
+All slept soundly that night, and morning came only too soon for the
+wearied boys, but they enjoyed the trip too much to delay moving at the
+earliest opportunity. While breakfast was being prepared the boys
+sauntered over to the sloping shore to the west, which was not more than
+a half mile away.
+
+They enjoyed walking along the pure white sand, and after disrobing had
+a jolly time in the mildly moving surf. It was not often that they had
+opportunities to take a sea bath.
+
+The bathing place was a deeply-indented bay, with a long sloping
+beach,--an ideal spot, with the camp plainly visible to the east. "Why
+not take a stroll to the southern end of the bay?" remarked Harry, after
+they were ready to return. "We might be able to see the headland to the
+south where we first sighted land."
+
+"Well, then, here goes it," and George started on a strong sprint to the
+south.
+
+Harry was by far the fleeter, and reached the tufted grass ahead of
+George, and then turned to the right, to gain the elevation. It was
+while thus moving through the brush and debris, which was far above the
+normal level of the sea, that they were attracted by an unusual deposit
+of brush, and other accumulations.
+
+"Stop, Harry; here is something we ought to investigate."
+
+Harry turned and came back. In the early days of their investigation
+such a mass would have meant diligent search. It was more from a
+recurrence of the old habit that dictated the idea to George.
+
+It was well they did so, for not far from the top, and covered over with
+seaweed and leaves, was a boxlike structure, evidently some part of a
+wreckage. They worked feverishly at the surrounding mass, and uncovered
+it.
+
+Harry started back. "Do you know what this is?" he asked. George stooped
+over, and stared.
+
+"It is part of the boat which was taken from South River."
+
+When that boat disappeared, only to be found miles away from its
+original location, the two boxlike compartments which they had made in
+it, and the oars used by them, had been taken away, and instead they
+found entirely different oars, and a rope, of which they knew nothing.
+
+Here was one of the boxes. "Let's open it," said George in the most
+intense tone. That was easily done, and there they found, to their
+surprise, one of their original shell hatchets, part of a coarsely-woven
+cloth, which they recognized as one of their early productions on the
+first loom, and a dozen or more gourds, in which food had been placed,
+and all exactly as it had been stored away by them. The food had
+disappeared, of course, but it had been lost by the action of the sea,
+and decomposition, as it was evident that the contents had not been
+disturbed by any one.
+
+"Let us call John," said Harry, and he bounded up the beach, and ran
+over the crest, waving his arms as he did so. He had not gone half the
+distance before those at the camp saw Harry running, and John, and most
+of those in sight started on a run, George meanwhile industriously
+dragging away the debris.
+
+"We have found it," cried Harry, as John came within hailing distance,
+and without waiting for them to come up he bolted back.
+
+"Now what have you discovered?" asked John as he came up breathless.
+
+"Part of our old boat."
+
+"We thought George had met with some accident."
+
+"We got this by accident," answered George. "See, here are some more
+things. This is the oar we had. How can you explain that?"
+
+It was certainly a poser. Why the exchange of oars? John shook his head.
+For once he had no theory even to offer. "Come, boys, let us take away
+all this stuff."
+
+All gave a hand, Sutoto wondering why there should be so much ado about
+a bit of wreckage. George explained the affair, as well as he could.
+
+"What is that board?" exclaimed John. "No, not a board; that is part of
+a boat," he added as more of the accumulation was torn away.
+
+"It's a boat; it's a boat!" almost shrieked George.
+
+"Come to this end and take away this lot of seaweed," called out Harry.
+
+They soon uncovered a boat with one end embedded in the sand so it was
+difficult to turn it over, owing to the rotten condition of the wood.
+Only here and there was any paint visible. The action of the elements
+had done its work.
+
+"What kind of a boat was this?" asked Harry.
+
+John did not answer, but peered down on the sand where the prow had
+rested. "Take away the sand carefully here," he said, and when he
+pointed the boys saw something white protruding an inch or two.
+
+As the sand was scraped away they first saw the thigh bone of a
+skeleton, and soon the whole frame was laid bare, the interstices filled
+with sand. A peculiar rope was around the frame, and John grasped it.
+
+The boys eagerly looked at it as John intently examined it. "It is the
+same," he said.
+
+"The same as what?" asked Harry.
+
+"The same as the rope found on the boat when you discovered it on the
+beach."
+
+That was the first time that the boys knew that John had any idea about
+the loss of the boat, or of the strange rope. It was possible, however,
+that the Professor had told John about it, as they were accustomed to
+talk over these strange things.
+
+"But the boat?" asked George. "What do you think of the boat?"
+
+"It is the exact counterpart of the _Investigator's_ Life boat No. 3."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+A CONVICT COLONY OF NATIVES
+
+
+The Chief's son was present. "Did you ever know of a boat load of
+castaways on the island?" asked John.
+
+"We never knew of anything like that," was his reply.
+
+Every scrap in that mass of wreckage was gone over. There was nothing
+else visible by which they could gain the slightest clue. The skeleton
+was minutely examined. It was that of a strong, well-developed man, but
+from all appearances one leg was shorter than the other.
+
+The bones of the shortened leg were closely investigated. "The bones
+show that this man met with an accident in early life, or before he was
+fully grown, or, he may have had some disease before he attained full
+growth, so that his right leg is shorter because not fully developed,"
+said John, as he continued the examination.
+
+"He must have been a soldier or an adventurer, as he has three bullet
+marks, one here in the right shoulder, one in the ankle, and the other
+on the cheek bone. All of the wounds were healed before he met his
+death."
+
+"But there is one thing which is still more remarkable. This man was a
+captive. He was tied in the boat and it was set adrift, and was likely
+on the open sea and washed ashore during one of the monsoons."
+
+"Why do you think so?" asked Harry, as soon as he could recover breath
+after this announcement.
+
+"This rope tells the story."
+
+"But how does it happen that he and the boat were together. It seems to
+me that if the waves were high enough to bring the boat clear up to this
+point, he would be freed from the boat long before it reached this
+place."
+
+"He was tied to the boat."
+
+One mystery was solved, and another more terrible in its aspect came
+upon its heels. There was but one thing to do, and that was to bury the
+skeleton, and John ordered this done, as soon as he had taken the
+complete measurements of the remains.
+
+"We don't want the box or the things in it now," said Harry.
+
+"Indeed, I want the hatchet," answered George.
+
+"Yes, and the rope," added John.
+
+The boys went back to the camp with thoughtful expressions on their
+faces.
+
+"This seems to be a Wonder Island, too," said George, more to himself
+than to any one else.
+
+They descended the incline, and crossed the narrow neck of land that
+joined the two parts of the island. Beyond, as they advanced the ground
+grew more uneven and rugged. Occasionally rocks appeared, the first that
+they had noticed except around the place where George was captured.
+
+Nevertheless, vegetation grew in even greater profusion than on the
+other branch of the island. There were more berries upon which all the
+natives feasted, and the boys were not slow to pick them as they passed.
+
+In traveling alongside of a hill Harry was the first to call attention
+to a peculiar leaf on a plant, which bore rose-shaped flowers. "This is
+something new to me. There is nothing like it on Wonder Island. Did you
+notice it, John?"
+
+The latter took a branch, and gazed at it for a long time. "I am
+surprised to find this growing here. It is a plant well known in
+Palestine, and is called the Rose of Jericho."
+
+"What a delightful perfume it has," said Harry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 12. Rose of Jericho._]
+
+"It is not noted on that account, however. It is the _resurrection_
+plant."
+
+"How singular; and in what way did it get that name?"
+
+"It may be dried up entirely, and if placed in water it will again
+appear to revive and raise itself up. This is, of course, due to its
+power to absorb a vast amount of water. It is found near the shores of
+the Dead Sea, and I recall that when I was in Jerusalem it was a common
+thing to see the plant in its dried-up state, sold to pilgrims who were
+instructed how to resurrect it."
+
+Here was caught the second and only other animal on the trip. It was
+somewhat smaller than Sunny, and the latter danced about the dead
+animal, as the "boys" brought it in.
+
+"And what is this big-eared fellow?" asked George.
+
+John laughed as he recognized the apt description. "It is a kind of
+Australian kangaroo. It inhabits trees, but is very clumsy in appearance
+and in action. It is a kind of sloth, or wombat."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 13. The Koala._]
+
+"Isn't that a dandy fur?"
+
+"The fur is not so valuable as its skin. There is nothing to compare
+with the softness of the hide when tanned. It feels like the finest
+velvet, and is very strong and durable."
+
+They were now ascending a series of hills, each more difficult than the
+last, and the ground became extremely rough and broken. There was a lone
+path, in many places nearly obliterated. It was the uninviting road to
+the land of sorrow.
+
+The Chief's son tried to be in the company of the boys at all times, and
+while he could not understand their chatter, Sutoto was a willing
+interpreter. He enjoyed the jolly freedom of the two chums, and their
+uniform good nature.
+
+George and Harry were ever on the alert to make him feel at ease and so
+they talked with him, and told of the things which John explained, and
+it was plainly seen that he marveled at things which were described.
+
+Referring to the exiled people, George asked: "Do those people never
+return after they are once condemned?"
+
+"They are never permitted to come back."
+
+"Do they stay there of their own free will?"
+
+"No; I am told that they long to be at home again."
+
+"Well, what would you do if they tried to come back?"
+
+"We would drive them away. One time they tried to come back, all of
+them, and we had to kill some of them," and he said it in a tone of
+regret.
+
+"Don't you believe in killing?"
+
+He looked at George for a moment, and then looked up into Sutoto's eyes,
+as he said: "No; it would do no good. Would that be the right way?" he
+asked with a sort of innocence that brought a blush to George's cheeks.
+
+"No; we do not believe in killing, except when we must to protect
+ourselves."
+
+"But do you have to make such wonderful things as those (pointing to
+the guns) to protect yourselves?"
+
+John threw back his head and tried to prevent a loud laugh, at this
+perfectly obvious question, while he looked at the boys to see what sort
+of an answer would be given.
+
+George was non-plussed for a minute. John had no business to disconcert
+him in that way. He turned and expected Harry to answer, but it seemed
+as though he had imperfectly understood it. There was no way out of it,
+and George tried to get his body into a proper position to answer it
+with dignity.
+
+"Well, you see, the guns were not made for the purpose of killing
+people, but for sporting purposes."
+
+"Do you have many wild animals in your country?" he asked naively.
+
+"Not many now."
+
+John laughed a little so as not to be too undignified, and George saw
+the humor of the situation. He did not want to pursue the subject any
+further, and John graciously turned the conversation by announcing the
+discovery of the Upas tree.
+
+"I didn't know the Upas tree was of such immense size," said Harry. "Is
+it really true that it kills everything that comes near it?"
+
+"No, that is greatly exaggerated. The only time when it gives forth any
+harmful exudations, is when it is cut down, or when the bark is torn
+away, or it is wounded in such a way that the sap comes into contact
+with the body."
+
+The illustration shows a flowering branch of the tree, and gives an idea
+of the silk-like leaves.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 14. The Flower of the Upas Tree._]
+
+They were still going upwardly. On both sides, to the east and to the
+west could be seen the rolling sea. Ahead was the mountain, if such it
+might be called. Rocks began to appear everywhere. John stopped long at
+some of those dark gray walls, and chipped off many specimens.
+
+There were now fewer birds and animals, except very small species, such
+as squirrels, and a variety of weasel, quick in its movements and
+reddish in color.
+
+"This begins to look promising," remarked John, as he crawled around the
+ledges.
+
+"Do you think we shall find any caves here?" asked George.
+
+"I shall be very much surprised if we do not," he answered.
+
+"Isn't it singular that the natives never knew about them, if there are
+any here?"
+
+"No; I do not think that is strange; they do not believe in the witch
+doctors, and they have no Krishnos here, so that the caves are of no
+value to them."
+
+"But do you find much that is valuable in the way of ores?"
+
+"The hills here are full of the most valuable minerals. The little
+prospecting I have done is sufficient to satisfy me on that point. I am
+trying to make a fair estimate so I can give an accurate report when we
+return."
+
+It was late in the afternoon when they reached the summit of the
+mountain which they had viewed from the south. It was green to the very
+summit, and from the elevation where they stood they could see a long
+and narrow stretch to the north, the distance in that direction being
+much farther than they had traveled from the little bight of land on the
+south.
+
+"It does look inviting in that part of the island," said Harry. "Were
+you ever there, in the bad place?" asked Harry as the Chief's son came
+up.
+
+"No; but I have heard much about it."
+
+One of the natives who heard the conversation said: "It is a beautiful
+place."
+
+"Have you ever been there?" he was asked.
+
+"I was a guard on two occasions when we took prisoners there," he
+answered.
+
+"Tell us about it," said George.
+
+"I have never been in the village, but within an hour's march of it. The
+Chief warned us never to go into the place itself."
+
+Aside from the village the place which interested John and the boys most
+was the mountain on which they were now standing. This must be explored.
+It was now late in the afternoon, and at John's suggestion they
+encamped, and only short excursions were made by the boys in the quest
+for something new.
+
+It was a delightful night. The elevation gave them the advantage of a
+beautiful breeze, and the odors wafted to them, from some unknown
+source, on the mild trade wind from the north, was almost like a
+narcotic, so soothing and restful.
+
+"Did you ever visit a more delightful spot?" asked Harry, as he inhaled
+the beautiful perfume.
+
+"It does not seem to me that the criminal colony is in a very bad place,
+if this is any indication of it. Isn't that way of dealing with crime a
+strange thing?" remarked George.
+
+"Why so?" asked John. "Is it anything peculiar for the wrongdoers to be
+banished from a community?"
+
+"No; but it seems wrong to condemn the innocent women and children. Why
+should they be punished along with the guilty?"
+
+"Probably, in the majority of cases, the women and children would prefer
+to accompany their husband and father. That does not seem to be so
+cruel, when it is considered that they are left free to live as much so
+as in their own community."
+
+"That is what I cannot understand. What is the use of sending them away,
+if they are not locked up?"
+
+"Do you not know that among the ancients, banishment from a country was
+the greatest punishment; greater even than death, in the opinion of
+many; and there are many cases where suicide was preferable. The odium
+of banishment was so great in those days that only the strongest and the
+greatest of men could live it down."
+
+"It makes me feel, when I smell this delightful perfume, that the home
+of the bad people over there must be a beautiful place," said George.
+
+"To give such an opinion, just because of the fragrance that comes from
+the north is proper for a sentimentalist," said John, as he laughed.
+
+"Well, that is a pretty big name to give, and I suppose it means having
+some notion that hasn't any sense in it, but just theory?"
+
+"That is a fairly close description, but I didn't mean it in that way."
+
+The boys never felt resentful at anything that John might say, as they
+knew and appreciated his noble character and disposition too well not to
+understand that his remarks were never born of malice.
+
+After a restful night preparations were made for a complete survey of
+the mountain, if it might be so dignified. Its greatest altitude did not
+exceed eight or nine hundred feet, and the width of the island at this
+point did not exceed two miles. It was quite rugged toward the east, but
+on the western side of the island the descent was sloping, and offered
+easy examination.
+
+The natives were instructed what to do, and were told that they should
+particularly hunt for caves, or great holes, or entrances into the
+hills. Four search parties were thus organized, John being at the head
+of one, and George, Harry and Sutoto, each being a leader in the others.
+
+Sutoto was most competent for work of this kind, as he had accompanied
+the boys on many expeditions, and was anxious to be of service in the
+quest.
+
+John took a direction to the northeast, and Sutoto to the southeast,
+thus leaving Harry and George with their parties to explore the region
+to the west, and northwest.
+
+As they were separating George slyly remarked: "John must have had some
+particular reason for taking the direction he did."
+
+Harry smiled. "I hope we shall find the first caves."
+
+Before separating John told them that he was desirous of finding a
+cavern which had certain peculiar markings therein, and the description
+showed it to be Cross-shaped. This must not be forgotten.
+
+They entered into the undertaking with the greatest enthusiasm.
+
+The boys simply danced, as they went down the hill, so great was the joy
+and the freedom of that beautiful spot. What a wonderful sensation is
+produced by beautiful odors. It is like a thought which transports you.
+On the other hand, when the odors are disagreeable how it depresses and
+disgusts.
+
+A great French physician has said that in his observations, the real
+happy people are those who delight in beautiful odors; and while it is
+not true that criminals are devoid of the elevating influence of
+delightful perfumes, still, they are less influenced thereby.
+
+In a number of tests made some years ago, a curious fact was observed:
+Sweet odors were allowed to Teach sleeping patients, which, when they
+did excite dreams, made them feel that they were living in a world of
+bliss, and surrounded by all the luxuries of life. On the other hand,
+when exposed to evil smelling odors, they dreamed of miseries, and of
+trouble and disgrace.
+
+It was understood that the different expeditions were to report at the
+camp at midday, and that in the event of any accident, or other mishap,
+the firing of the guns would be sufficient warning to the party at the
+camp and to those who were searching.
+
+George had with him two of his own "boys," and two of the natives, and
+Harry was also accompanied by several of his particular favorites.
+Harry, with his party, was the energetic one, as he was exceedingly wiry
+and a good walker. He did not intend to permit the others to encroach on
+any of his territory.
+
+Not a vestige of anything was found which even so much as pointed to a
+cave or to the sign of human occupancy in that section. George, on the
+other hand, was more fortunate. In his area the shelving rocks were
+more numerous, and he also knew that the rocks were limestone, and that
+caves were more likely to exist in limestone formation than in trap
+rock, or either in granite or sandstone formations.
+
+He was, therefore, fully prepared, when, in the early part of his
+investigation, to find, what appeared to be entrances, but in all cases
+they were blind leads,--that is they led in for short distances only,
+many of them being mere cleavages of the rocks.
+
+The real cave is the one where the limestone is eaten out by the erosive
+action of the water attacking the calcium of the rock. Furthermore, he
+felt that he must go down nearer sea level to be assured of success, and
+he acted on that impulse.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+A WHITE PARALYTIC IN THE CONVICT COLONY
+
+
+It would be useless to recount the experiences of all of the parties.
+They had four hours of search before them. This would, at least, give
+some idea as to the nature of the mountain, and enable John to decide
+whether it would be wise to give that project further consideration.
+
+At midday the parties began to appear, first Harry, then Sutoto,
+followed by John, and finally George. The latter was the only one who
+was smiling. The three early parties had no news to impart.
+
+"What have you found?" were the hailing words of George, as he
+approached.
+
+"Nothing! nothing!" were the answers.
+
+"It takes me to bring home the goods," he remarked, and Harry laughed in
+derision.
+
+"No; but I mean it," he continued. "I have captured a modern, good-sized
+cave, and it is now awaiting to be explored."
+
+John could not believe the tale. "You are to be congratulated. Good
+boy!" Needless to add, George was the happiest person in that camp.
+
+"Let us go down to see it at once," said George in his eagerness. "It
+is quite a distance, as it is not more than five hundred feet from the
+seashore."
+
+"Luncheon first," remarked John, and no one interposed an objection, as
+the trip had sharpened the appetites of all.
+
+The meal over little time was lost in making a start, and George led the
+way with his boys. Truly enough, there was the open mouth, and it was
+cave-like. Now for the mysteries within. "We went in only about a
+hundred feet, so as to be sure we weren't fooled," said George, in
+reference to his discovery.
+
+The lamps were then prepared, and all the preparations made, the boys
+being veterans in this sort of work, and John was ahead, as was
+generally the custom in these expeditions.
+
+"This is as far as we went," said George. Beyond was still a wall which
+glistened from the streaming lights.
+
+Gradually the walls came closer together; the track was a narrow one; so
+they had to march in single file. John called a halt. "I am afraid this
+is a blind hole," he said, but George could not believe it, so the side
+walls were searched, for indications of some opening.
+
+"This is the end of the cave. Note the side walls. If they should be
+pressed against each other they would fit exactly, showing that it is an
+opening caused by a fissure and not by erosion."
+
+Harry could not help but laugh. All this time lost on a blind lead, and
+the laugh was on George.
+
+Harry could not help jesting him. "If you are a good tribe finder it is
+no sign that caves are in your line."
+
+John enjoyed the laugh on George, but the latter retorted: "I think the
+joke is on you, for traveling all this distance to see a hole in the
+ground."
+
+There was not the sign of a cave on the island, aside from the one
+discovered (?) by George, so the party remained that night at the
+mountain top, and in the morning descended the hill, and slowly marched
+to the north. Before noon they entered a beautiful stretch of woodland,
+with luxurious grass growing all around in profusion.
+
+"This is as far as the guards have been permitted to go," said one of
+the natives, who had volunteered the information about the place the day
+before.
+
+Thus far not a human being was visible. An hour's march would bring them
+to the village of the criminals, and the boys began to examine their
+weapons, and to look apprehensive.
+
+The wild fruits of the tropics were now seen in abundance in every
+direction. Bananas, the Bread Fruit, Cocoa, and Date Palm, on every
+hand.
+
+The most astonishing thing, however, was the profusion of flowers, of
+every variety, seemingly, and the air was scented as with one vast
+bouquet.
+
+Sutoto stopped and pointed ahead: "They are in the trees gathering
+fruit." The party halted, and looked, and then proceeded.
+
+They were, undoubtedly, the first of the criminals. A half mile beyond,
+and in a plain road, were several of the inhabitants. Those in the
+trees, two men and a boy, descended, and, together with two women,
+walked across the field, to witness the newly-arrived criminals, as they
+supposed.
+
+They were astounded at the appearance of the party. The Chief's son
+addressed the men, and told them who they were, and their mission. As
+this was the first time that such a visit had ever been made, the man
+instructed the boy to run to the village and inform the people, and he
+scurried away.
+
+Meantime the party moved on, and, as they proceeded, more and more of
+the inhabitants were seen. To the right were people in the fields,
+engaged in some sort of work there. This was singular. Nothing of that
+kind was seen in the village where Beralsee was chief.
+
+"What is the name of this town where the convicts live?" asked Harry.
+
+"Hutoton," replied Calmo.
+
+"And what is the name of your town?"
+
+"Sasite."
+
+"Rather queer names, I should say," exclaimed Harry.
+
+John laughed and glanced at Harry, as he said: "I wonder how _Unity_,
+and _Pioneer_, and _Mayfield_, and the queer English names sound to
+them!"
+
+"Oh, I suppose they have some good reason for having such names."
+
+"Yes; for the same reason that we apply names to certain things. See
+what a wonderful expression there is in the word 'Harsh,' and how
+expressive it is compared with its opposite 'soft.' How the first word
+grates, and the second comes out so smoothly. Then, compare 'swift' and
+'slow'; or 'sweet' and 'sour.' Ugh! I can almost taste the last word."
+
+John roared, as he saw the serious aspect of Harry's face. But other
+sights now attracted their attention. A group of men and women appeared.
+How strange the natives looked. They were well dressed, that is, judged
+from the people in Sasite, and they were people of good deportment, if
+those of the inhabitants that accompanied them were fair specimens.
+
+At the head of the villagers was a man of striking appearance, tall,
+with white hair, such as you would call distinguished, because he
+differed from most around him. The women were well clad, and the
+children plump and vigorous in their actions.
+
+Something must be wrong! These people were not criminals! The old man
+came forward, and gave a respectful bow. He looked at John and said a
+few words. Calmo responded, his words when translated being: "These are
+friends of my father, and they have come to visit you."
+
+At this the man gave another bow, and John went up and held out his
+hand, which the man took in a simple and unaffected manner.
+
+"We welcome you to our village," was his reply.
+
+The boys looked at each other and relaxed their hold on the guns. Was
+this, after all, the wicked place that had been described to them? As
+they marched down to the village they were enchanted at the flowers
+which greeted them on all sides.
+
+Here and there were garden spots, carefully kept, and when the first
+huts appeared beyond the grove, the boys simply gasped, and could hardly
+believe their senses. Hundreds of Magnolia trees were in bloom; and the
+gentle breeze blowing in from the sea, moderated the rays of the sun,
+and wafted the odor of the plants many miles inland.
+
+The homes were not rudely built, and, although they were on the same
+general plan of those in Sasite, they had every appearance of comfort.
+
+The head man of the village led them to a more pretentious home,
+probably his own dwelling. This was soon confirmed, as they were invited
+to enter and repose themselves on slightly elevated couches, so much
+like Chief Beralsee's court.
+
+Within a short time there was a great commotion in the village. The boys
+looked around startled, and the old man noticed it, for he turned to
+Calmo, and said: "The villagers are preparing a feast for you. Let them
+go out and mingle with the people."
+
+The boys were happy at this opportunity of satisfying their curiosity.
+Sutoto accompanied them, and with Calmo, they placed themselves under
+the guidance of a young man named Anasa, who, Calmo said, was the son of
+the old man.
+
+They passed down the main street, for there was some semblance of order
+in the location of the huts. Around the huts were flowers, just as they
+had seen on the path leading from the mountain, and here and there
+patches of growing vegetables. After passing one rather attractive
+looking hut, Anasa paused for a moment, and then turned back, motioning
+for them to follow. He entered, and the boys saw a villager, and two
+women within.
+
+Anasa pointed to the figure of a man seated in a chair, and upon seeing
+it both boys started back in amazement.
+
+"That is a white man," cried Harry.
+
+Anasa nodded, his manner indicating that he felt sure that the boys
+would recognize him as belonging to their race. George went up to him,
+and held out his hand. In response the man gave a listless look, and
+slowly raised the left hand, which was grasped by George, who said: "I
+am glad to see you. Who are you? We are white, the same as you are."
+
+The man made no sign, and his arm dropped to his side as George relaxed
+his grasp. Harry touched George on the shoulder, as he said: "There is
+something the matter with him. Ask Anasa about him."
+
+Calmo put the question, and this was the reply: "We found the poor
+fellow on the beach many moons ago. We brought him here, and tried to
+heal him, but he does not speak, and one side of him has no life."
+
+The man made no show of recognition, and the only motion observable was
+a twitching jerk of the left arm, and a slightly swaying motion of the
+head.
+
+"John must know about this," said George.
+
+"By all means," was the reply.
+
+Calmo was told about the wonderful man John, and that he should be
+called at once, so one of the accompanying natives was instructed to
+bring John, and he speeded away on the errand.
+
+George stood outside of the hut when John came up. "This is a remarkable
+thing. Did they tell you about it?"
+
+"No."
+
+"There is a white man here."
+
+"Where?" asked John in astonishment.
+
+"In the hut, and he is paralyzed and cannot speak."
+
+John did not wait for more, and as he went the head man followed him in.
+Then they told him the story, and John stood there and gazed at the man.
+To the boys who were by John's side he remarked: "I do not know him. I
+do not think I ever saw him before. How long has he been in this
+condition?" The old man responded: "Ever since we picked him up on the
+shore, about _tuta romama_ ago."
+
+"And how long ago was that?"
+
+George informed him that Calmo received the information that it was over
+two years prior to that time, and as John received this information he
+passed his hand over his head, and, turning to Harry, said: "We shall,
+probably, get at the bottom of another mystery."
+
+"What is it? Why do you think so?" asked George in astonishment.
+
+"Not now; not now!" answered John, wishing to defer discussion until
+they were out of the stricken man's hearing.
+
+The latter, however, did not in the least appreciate who were before
+him. He was not at all perturbed by his visitors, nor when John quietly
+passed his hand along the poor man's arm and body to satisfy himself of
+the extent of the paralytic stroke.
+
+He winced but slightly when the examination of the left side was made,
+otherwise there was no sign of comprehension on his part.
+
+"This is a remarkable thing," said John, as they were returning to the
+old man's dwelling.
+
+"Why, is it a peculiar case?"
+
+"The ailment itself is not remarkable; but there is something which
+passes my comprehension."
+
+"What is it!" asked the boys in, unison.
+
+"These people are savages."
+
+"Yes; answered the boys."
+
+"And they are criminals," he said as he stopped and looked at the boys,
+with an earnestness that surprised them.
+
+It did not take more words to make them understand what John meant.
+These people had taken this shipwrecked man, and tenderly cared for him
+during a period of more than two years. This was done without hope of
+reward. John learned later on that the natives of the town had made
+provision for the shipwrecked man and had compensated the people at
+whose home he was then living.
+
+After the evening meal, John walked around the village, observing the
+people, and he found happiness everywhere. Everything seemed to be
+arranged according to a system. The old man was not a chief, but was
+looked upon as their advisor and guide; but he was a criminal, as were
+all the others in that town.
+
+That evening when all were present John had the first opportunity to
+talk with the venerable chief of the town.
+
+"How long have you been here?" he was asked.
+
+He was silent for a moment and then answered: "Thirty years."
+
+It must be understood that the questions and answers had to be
+translated and as the natives knew nothing about the division of time in
+months or years it was necessary to convert the time which was given by
+nature into terms of years and months.
+
+Thus, they understood what a day meant, and they could calculate time,
+as all savages do, by the phases of the moon, and in many cases they
+were able to indicate time by the position of the sun, in which they
+recognized three phases only, namely, when the sun was directly above
+them, and when it reached the extreme northern and southern points.
+
+"Why were you sent here?"
+
+"Because I committed a crime."
+
+John was almost startled at the frankness of the confession, which the
+old man made without the least perceptible show of feeling or shame.
+
+"Would you like to go back again?"
+
+"Go back where?"
+
+"To your home."
+
+He looked bewildered for a moment, and then answered: "This is my home."
+
+"But I mean your old home at Sasite."
+
+The old man shook his head vigorously, and answered: "No! no! There is
+no place like Hutoton."
+
+"Do you know what 'Hutoton' means?"
+
+"Yes; it means 'the place of death.'"
+
+The boys were startled at the reply. John turned to them, when he saw
+their expression, and smiled. The old man, too, smiled.
+
+"Do any of your people want to go back?"
+
+He looked surprised at the question. "Do they want to go back?" he
+repeated the query. "No; but you should ask them. I do not know of any
+one who wishes to return. We love our Chief too much to wish for such a
+thing."
+
+"Do you know what the people in Sasite think of this place?"
+
+"No; not altogether; I am curious to know."
+
+"They believe it is a terrible place, and that the people who are sent
+here never have another day of peace or happiness."
+
+"And have they not changed their opinions? I used to think so too, and
+we believed it of those who went before us; but we thought they might
+have changed their opinions, because we felt that people were growing
+better and not worse. It is a long time since they sent us real
+criminals, and we thought the Chief's people were growing wiser and
+happier."
+
+"When did the last criminals come here?"
+
+"Nearly one year ago."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+SAVAGE MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
+
+
+It was impossible to describe the effect of these revelations on the
+boys. It was so different from anything they had been led to expect. It
+brought one thing forcibly to their minds; that because these people had
+committed some crime, or some wrong against society, they were still
+human beings, and were worthy of being treated as men and women.
+
+John related to them that various governments had tried the plan of
+sending convicts to some foreign lands, and placing them in situations
+where they might work out their own salvation; that all such efforts
+were successful, where real opportunities were bestowed.
+
+"The idea is," remarked John, "that they are banished from the society
+in which they resided, or in which they were raised, for the purpose of
+helping them. The reason for inflicting punishment on criminals has been
+to protect society but apparently no efforts have been made to cure the
+criminals or to help them to better themselves."
+
+"I heard the Professor say, at one of the trials at Wonder Island, that
+some scientists consider crime a disease," said George.
+
+"Exactly; now suppose we treated people suffering from smallpox, or
+scarlet fever, or some other like disease, just like we treat
+criminals, it would be regarded as brutal. To lock them up, and deprive
+them of the pleasures of living, simply to protect society, is wrong."
+
+"But the smallpox and scarlet fever patients are taken away so they will
+not give the complaints to others," observed Harry.
+
+"And that is right. I favor that and advocate that same thing with
+criminals. But the patients are not deprived of the things they have
+been accustomed to, and they are restored, when cured. It is not so with
+the poor unfortunate who errs. When he does come back he is hounded and
+looked upon as a tainted individual, although he may, in heart, be
+better than his accusers."
+
+During that day and the next, the natives and those who accompanied John
+associated with each other, and had many conversations. What interested
+them was the presence of the unfortunate paralytic who was unable to
+speak for himself.
+
+The boys did not believe that he was one of the crew of the school ship
+_Investigator_. What connection, if any, did he have with the skeleton
+they found the day before? was another of their queries.
+
+On the second day they were taken to the beach where the white man was
+found. There, as explained, he was found, with wreckage all about,
+during one of the raging monsoons with which the boys were so well
+acquainted, but aside from that there was not a vestige to show his name
+or where he was from.
+
+All the clothing worn by him originally, and of that there was scarcely
+any when found, had been worn threadbare, and he was now dressed in
+native garments. The chair in which he was reclining was undoubtedly
+from some wrecked ship, and had been in the possession of the villagers
+for years.
+
+John spoke to the old man concerning the patient, and advised him that
+they would soon call to take him away. They would thus relieve them of
+the burden, and endeavor to restore him to health, if it were possible
+to do so.
+
+The old man was thankful for the kind words uttered by John, and the
+latter assured him that before many moons passed he would return and
+show his appreciation for their kindness to a fellow creature.
+
+"But we do not feel that we have done anything which especially merits
+praise. He is one like ourselves, who was in distress, and we helped
+him."
+
+"Yes; you have done that which is right. We intend to reward you not
+that you should be paid for doing what is right, but to show that we
+appreciate your noble actions," answered John.
+
+The party, after many wishes and hearty good-byes, filed out of the
+village, some of them loath to go.
+
+Calmo was silent. He was not the same as before they marched through the
+village. John noticed it, but he wisely refrained from commenting on the
+sights they had witnessed. There was cleanliness and order in Hutoton;
+and filth and disorder in Sasite. It was impossible to be unconscious
+of the difference between the industry in one place, and the utter
+shiftlessness in the other.
+
+As it required two days to make the return journey, they were absent
+from Sasite nearly seven days, and, according to the calculations, the
+_Pioneer_ would be in from Unity within the next two days.
+
+During the intervening time the boys roamed at will through the island,
+and on the second day went directly south, so as to scour the sea front
+below the village.
+
+In the afternoon, as they were about to return, they saw a sail, George
+being the first to catch a glimpse of it. "The _Pioneer_," he cried,
+upon which they danced about in sheer joy and started for the village,
+which was distant several miles.
+
+They were almost out of breath when they rushed through the village, and
+cried out the news. Everybody was expectant; all were eager to see the
+vessel come in and Sutoto was the first to reach the landing.
+
+During the visit of the boys on the island, John had a crude dock
+constructed, and as the _Pioneer_ was of light draft, this was not a
+difficult thing to do, so that the passengers could land from the ship
+directly on the solid platform.
+
+The Chief was among the merry villagers. "Who is that man with the white
+hair!" he asked of Uraso.
+
+The latter was just as much surprised as his questioner, when he
+recognized the Professor, and he informed the Chief of the treat he
+would experience in meeting him. "He is the Great Wise man," added
+Uraso, "whom everybody loves."
+
+Muro, too, was astounded as the Professor came down. But a still greater
+surprise awaited the two chiefs. Muro's wife hailed him, and then
+Uraso's wife waved her handkerchief. This was too much for them, and
+waving aside all dignity they rushed forward to greet them.
+
+The whole thing had been so admirably arranged, that no one knew of the
+affair which had been planned by John. Sutoto joined in the merriment,
+but he was too anxious to see Stut to pay much attention to the
+greetings.
+
+The visitors discreetly refrained from saying a word to Sutoto,
+concerning the coming event. Besides the Chief's wives, there were
+several other women, of the Tribes in Wonder Island, together with some
+white men and their wives, who had been invited at the request of
+Blakely.
+
+The latter greeted John with that hearty expression so characteristic of
+the true commercial man, and he was not with John a minute before he was
+plying all sorts of questions about the resources of the island, the
+kind and number of inhabitants the nature of the soil, and the
+possibilities of mineral development.
+
+The Professor came down and was introduced to the Chief by Uraso.
+
+The great burly chief was fascinated. He gazed on the Professor and
+almost gasped, then turning to Uraso he said: "Ah! I know why he is a
+wise man."
+
+To Uraso this remark was indeed a puzzle; to think that the Chief had
+discovered the secret of the wisdom in the Professor! He was quick to
+ask why he knew it.
+
+"Because he has double eyes."
+
+Uraso laughed, and turned to the Professor, to whom he related the
+incident. Instantly the Professor removed the glasses, and courteously
+handed them to the Chief, and Uraso adjusted them to the Chief's eyes.
+
+He glanced around, through the lens, and forced out one expression of
+delight after the other. He was oblivious of everything else. He forgot
+that there were dozens of the visitors ready in line to be introduced to
+him; but all enjoyed the great pleasure he experienced in the new sight.
+
+But suddenly he stopped in his enthusiasm, and with an apology took off
+the glasses and held them up, in the act of handing them back. The
+Professor returned them, and took another pair from his pocket which he
+put on.
+
+It was not likely that the Chief could have received a more acceptable
+present, as his eyesight was failing, and the glasses seemed like the
+opening of a new world to him. Later on the Professor provided a pair of
+glasses better adapted to his sight.
+
+The Chief then became concerned about the comfort of his guests, so
+Uraso said: "Do not feel worried about the visitors. They will sleep on
+the vessel where they have comfortable rooms."
+
+The Chief could hardly believe the statements, as he muttered: "This is,
+indeed, wonderful."
+
+It would require pages to record the incidents that came to his
+attention about the wonders of these new people. The surprising thing
+was, that Uraso, and the natives of Wonder Island were dressed like the
+white people and acted like them, and yet he was told that all that
+wonderful change had come about in a little over two years' time.
+
+Muro's wife was quickly made acquainted with the Chief's wife, and the
+day following she had a consultation with her. Mida, who was Muro's
+wife, said: "I do not know whether or not you know of Sutoto's affection
+for Cinda, but we learned about it, and have come over to attend the
+ceremony."
+
+Linnea, the Chief's wife, smiled as Mida spoke to her. "Yes, I know of
+it, but the Chief has not yet been told."
+
+It seems that they had very curious and at the same time different
+customs among the various tribes, and Mida's object was to learn what
+their etiquette called for as to betrothals. Among some of the Wonder
+Island tribes, the Chief was the only one who has the right to consent
+to the marriage of the females, although the males could go to other
+tribes and secure wives without the consent of the Chief.
+
+In other tribes the women, the mothers, are the sole judges, and it is
+not infrequent for the parents of the bride to demand a payment,
+dependent on the rank or the riches of the father.
+
+Then the question of ceremonies is always an important one. It would be
+sacrilegious to perform the rite except in exact accordance with the
+prescribed rules. Sometimes those rules are so extremely different to
+those of another tribe that intermarriage between members of such tribes
+is impossible.
+
+Thus, a Tuolo could never marry a Saboro, nor could an Illya warrior
+take an Osaga for a bride. On all these points the women were adepts. It
+is more than likely, however, that Cinda and Sutoto had all that matter
+fully understood between them.
+
+"Did Stut tell you about Sutoto?" asked George.
+
+Harry laughed. "No; but I have a good one to tell you. What did he say?"
+
+"Well, you know he hired Stut to get him a wedding outfit, and a
+present?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"When the people left the vessel Sutoto sneaked back, and hunted up
+Stut. Of course Stut had the package all done up, and he is now taking
+it over to his hut."
+
+"I have something better than that. Sutoto is going to be married
+to-night."
+
+"How do you know?"
+
+"Cinda told one of her girl friends, and it frightened her so that she
+told Uraso."
+
+"Why that would spoil all the plans."
+
+"So it would, but Uraso told his sister."
+
+"Are you sure of that?"
+
+"Of course I am; I was there."
+
+"What did she say?"
+
+"She simply said 'I will take care of that.'"
+
+"Of course she will; she's a brick."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+SUTOTO AND CINDA'S MARRIAGE; AND THE SURPRISE
+
+
+Mida had learned the situation. Their customs as to marriages closely
+resembled that of the Saboros. In that tribe the Chief was the sole
+authority. To marry without his consent meant exile for the disobedient
+warrior, and for the bride as well.
+
+Sutoto was a member of the Berees, and there the mother was the
+matchmaker. She prescribed all the requirements. The first thing that
+Mida did was to insist that the Chief should be informed of the desires
+of the young people.
+
+To the delight of the two women he consented to the match, and he was
+then told that the people had come over from Wonder Island to take part
+in the ceremony. But when he was told that they intended to marry that
+night, by stealth, his brow was clouded.
+
+His law was that no one should marry without his consent, and he could
+not believe that Cinda could thus attempt to take the matter into her
+own hand. It was hard to think that his own child should be the first to
+break his law.
+
+The women pleaded with him, and then Mida confided her plan to him. The
+tribe's marriage ceremony was a very curious one. First, there must be a
+gift of fruit, then of fowl, and next of game. This must be brought to
+the door of the bride by the groom blindfolded.
+
+He must remain blindfolded while she prepares them for the table. Not a
+word must be spoken, or they must separate forever. A part of the
+ceremony requires that the invited guests are to resort to every sort of
+device to make them speak. The slightest sound by either is a sign that
+they will quarrel, and means the end of the affair.
+
+If they pass this test, the second comes when the bridegroom's eyes are
+uncovered. They are then to converse with each other, and they must not
+for a moment relax the talk. Neither has any knowledge of the time that
+this test must continue. There must be no faltering, or hesitancy.
+
+Mida conferred with John and the boys, as she told of these necessary
+requirements, and the boys laughed as they listened.
+
+"What is the object of all that?" inquired George.
+
+John was chuckling at the idea, but it stirred up a reminiscence. "That
+is a custom, in some of its features, that I learned about some tribes
+in central Africa. I can see the object of that rite. The taking of the
+gifts blindfolded signifies that he enters the marriage state blindly,
+and that he must do so in silence, and without asking any questions."
+
+"Of course, then, there is not any likelihood of them quarreling," said
+Harry.
+
+"That is what the Chief's wife said," replied Mida.
+
+"But what does all the talking mean?"
+
+[Illustration: "_The rites were progressing very satisfactorily_"
+                                                    [See p. 196]]
+
+"That is perfectly obvious. To show they can perfectly agree, even
+though they do talk."
+
+"But that is all before the real ceremony itself," said George. "How do
+they get married? That is the main thing."
+
+"Why," said Mida, "that is part of the marrying."
+
+"But they haven't promised anything. Marrying is promising."
+
+This occasioned another roar of merriment. "Yes; marriage is a contract
+under our law, but not so with these people. The only question with them
+is whether they are suited to each other."
+
+"But suppose they should not want to marry each other, or one of them
+should object," interposed Harry.
+
+"Ah! don't you see there is where the prospective bride or groom, in
+that case has a chance. If, in the first test he should speak, or in the
+last trial she should fail to keep up the conversation, then it would be
+all off."
+
+Mida confided her plans to the Chief and his wife. They were assured
+that Cinda would not think of overriding the well-known laws as to the
+gifts, and the two tests, and so it was arranged that Sutoto should be
+permitted to bring his offerings, which he would no doubt do, by
+stealth, while the Chief and all the visitors were to partake of the
+banquet on board of the vessel that evening.
+
+Sutoto and Cinda knew of the arrangements for the banquet, and that
+appeared to be a suitable occasion for them. When Sutoto appeared with
+the gifts he and Cinda were to be arrested by the Chief's warriors and
+brought aboard the vessel, charged with violating the law of the Chief
+in not first obtaining his permission.
+
+The boys remained ashore, and carefully watched the proceedings. How
+Sutoto got the presents the boys did not know, but they had a suspicion
+that Cinda had a hand in it. The boys laughed as they saw what a
+ridiculously short distance he had to go in a blindfolded state.
+
+Securely hidden in what was George's chamber, where he passed the first
+night of his captivity, they saw Sutoto with the offerings. Cinda took
+them, in silence, and disappeared, only to return instantly with the
+smoking viands.
+
+"I call that quick work," said Harry.
+
+"Yes, that's swift cooking," suggested George.
+
+They ate in silence. "I wonder where the bridesmaid is who intends to
+make them talk?"
+
+"Why don't you see her standing behind Cinda?"
+
+"You mean the servant?"
+
+"Of course."
+
+This was almost too amusing for the boys. The rites were progressing
+very satisfactorily. Then Cinda removed the bandage, and an ineffable
+smile stole over Sutoto's features.
+
+They commenced to talk. The maid said a few words, but the lovers paid
+no attention. The ceremony was going along just as-a perfect one should,
+when four stalwart warriors rushed in and seized Sutoto. Cinda knew who
+they were, and she sprang at them, as two seized her also.
+
+One of them addressed a word to Sutoto, and then spoke to Cinda, and
+without further ceremony they were taken out through the open portal,
+and hurried to the ship.
+
+The boys followed at a respectful distance, and when the pair had
+reached the deck the boys scrambled up, and hurriedly made their way to
+the large room, or cabin, where the Chief and the visitors were
+assembled, and which was brilliantly lighted for the occasion.
+
+The criminals were brought before the Chief, who arose, and with a
+severe countenance began to upbraid Sutoto for his crime. Cinda
+meanwhile glanced around at the brilliant sight. She saw nothing to
+excite fear. Both were free from the warriors and stood there side by
+side, a handsome couple, as every one admitted.
+
+Sutoto saw the boys. Just like boys are apt to be on such an occasion,
+they could not repress their laughter, although it was a silent
+exhibition of mirth. Then Sutoto knew, and so did Cinda, for she was not
+too much abashed to look up at Sutoto, while she leaned over and rested
+her head against him, and laid her hand on his arm.
+
+Then the boys stopped laughing. There was nothing laughable about it
+now. It seemed too beautiful to laugh at, and when the great Chief went
+over, and rubbed his nose against Sutoto's every one knew that the
+compact was sealed.
+
+I wish it were possible to describe the delight shown in the eyes of the
+bride and groom when they were led to the table containing the wedding
+gifts that came to them from Wonder Island.
+
+"Oh! I am so sorry!" said Harry.
+
+"Sorry for what? Yes, yes, I know now. We have nothing to give Sutoto,
+as our presents." And George said it with genuine grief.
+
+Most of the articles exhibited were for the use of the bride, and
+designed for the home, of the new couple; but there was a fine array of
+the little trinkets which so delight the feminine heart.
+
+The party sat down to the feast, with Sutoto and Cinda at one end of the
+table, while Mida presided at the other, the Chief being at her right,
+and his wife at her left.
+
+For the first time in their lives they were to eat their food with
+knives and forks. They were adepts with the sharpened stick, which
+George had noted, and there was amusement at the many incidents that the
+new order brought forth.
+
+"I remember," said George, "that the Professor told us the Italians,
+about the year 1700, were the first to use forks."
+
+"Yes," replied John. "As late as the year 1800 the English did not use
+the fork, but the knife, for conveying food to the mouth; but the
+new-fangled idea, when once introduced, became universal, soon after
+that time; and it was then the custom for travelers to carry their own
+knives and forks when traveling."
+
+The Professor said, addressing the Chief: "I am surprised that you use a
+fork at the table. While we do so universally, it was not originally our
+custom."
+
+"I can remember," replied the Chief, "when it was not the habit to use
+any implement, but all were required to take food from the same dish
+with the hands. But at that time food was not served hot, but allowed to
+cool. But we found that the eating of hot articles became a custom, and
+then we had to use the pointed forks."
+
+"I am curious to know what gives the roast such a beautiful flavor!"
+asked the Chief's wife. "I am told that you do not use leaves for
+flavoring."
+
+"No," said Mida. "We now use spices, and the flavor is made more
+distinct by adding salt."
+
+"What kinds of spices are used?"
+
+"For meats, principally pepper, of which I have no doubt you have plenty
+on your island."
+
+Of course, there was coffee, which grew in abundance in Wonder Island,
+and numerous trees of which had been discovered by the boys of the
+Chief's island. When this was brought out, and the natives first tasted
+it, there was some doubt on their part as to its food value.
+
+Added interest was given to it when the Chief was induced to try it with
+a bountiful supply of cream and sugar. Then these articles attracted
+their attention.
+
+"Is this a fruit?" he asked as a lump of sugar was handed him.
+
+"No, it is made from cane, or from some vegetables."
+
+"Made from vegetables? How can it be made from them? There is part of
+the flavor of fruit, but I cannot taste any vegetables in it."
+
+Then the Professor explained that all fruit, as well as vegetables, had
+the same taste, and that they took out only that part and left the
+other.
+
+"But what is this white liquid which you use in the new drink?"
+
+"It is called 'cream,' and the cream is made from milk?"
+
+"And what is milk made of?"
+
+"It is taken from cows, a large animal, that people raise for that
+purpose."
+
+As there was nothing on the island that was as large as a cow, or that
+resembled it in any manner, the Chief's curiosity was unbounded.
+
+"I would like to see the animal from which this was obtained."
+
+"But we have no animal with us."
+
+"Then it never spoils?"
+
+"Oh, yes, it will quickly grow sour and unpleasant if allowed to remain
+in a warm place."
+
+He looked around in bewilderment, and the Professor seeing his
+embarrassment, continued: "In the ship we have a way to prevent the
+cream and the milk, as well, from spoiling. We will show you that."
+
+Thus one article after the other called for some comment, and
+explanation. To the natives from Wonder Island this meal was an object
+lesson of only a few of the many things which they had learned from the
+white people.
+
+But Sutoto and his bride could not be forgotten. When the meal was
+finished, the Professor arose, and said: "I have some news to impart to
+you. When the white people first came to Wonder Island, they found
+Uraso, and Muro, and they were the first to come to our aid against
+powerful tribes."
+
+"One of their neighbors had at its head a wise Chief, Suros, known and
+respected by friend and foe alike, and he readily adopted the ideas of
+the white men, and offered his tribe to save us from destruction at the
+hands of those who were unfriendly."
+
+"Sutoto was the nephew of the wise Chief Suros, and I have come to tell
+you that he is dead, and that we have been mourning for him."
+
+Every one who glanced at Sutoto, saw that it greatly affected him. This
+address was translated to the Chief, by Uraso, as the Professor
+proceeded, the latter speaking it in such measured sentences, that it
+could be quickly grasped by the interpreter.
+
+"We have all been sad, since his death, and we shall erect a suitable
+monument to his memory on our return."
+
+The Chief looked at the Professor, and the latter instantly divined that
+he wanted some enlightenment.
+
+"What does the white Chief mean by that?"
+
+"It is the custom of the white man to put up something that all the
+people may look at, for years and years afterwards, so as to remind them
+that he has lived, and to tell the people what good he has done."
+
+"And why should the people do that?"
+
+"So as to teach people the example, and try to make them be good as he
+was."
+
+"Do your people need to have such examples to make them do good?"
+
+"That may not be necessary," replied the Professor, as he vainly tried
+to hide the smile that was trying to manifest itself.
+
+"But do you not find it necessary to set the people a good example?"
+asked the Professor.
+
+For a moment he looked around at the company in bewilderment, and he
+slowly replied: "No, I do not think it would do any good. If the people
+are bad, and they want to be bad, it will do them no good to tell them
+that I have always tried to do right."
+
+There was a respectful silence, at this avowal, and the Professor
+continued: "There are many who think as you do, and we had one great
+teacher, called Confucius, who said: 'Do good not for the hope of
+reward, but because it is right.' Then we have also a precept which,
+interpreted, means: that happiness is in the heart."
+
+"I do not know what that means," he replied.
+
+"It means that the desire and the wish must come from within, and not
+from without." And the savage nodded an assent.
+
+"But," continued the Professor, "I have some news to impart, that makes
+us all happy again. It is something that pertains to Sutoto, and I know
+you will all join in wishing him all happiness in the good fortune which
+Wonder Island brings to him, while this island is vying with us to make
+him happy."
+
+What was this happy thing that the Professor portended? There was
+intense eagerness in the eyes of all who had left Wonder Island when the
+_Pioneer_ sailed away, three weeks before.
+
+"I want to present to you Sutoto, the new Chief of the Berees." The
+Professor could get no further. George and Harry were wild with
+excitement, and they bounded over to him and actually hugged him. Poor
+Cinda did not for the moment know what all this excitement meant.
+
+She supposed that this was the white man's part of the ceremony, and
+quietly submitted. But she was quickly informed, and as she glanced at
+her father and mother, and the people came by and affectionately greeted
+them, she was so happy that tears actually flowed.
+
+Then John came forward with a large box, which he carefully opened, and
+drew forth two packages, one of which he unwrapped, while Mida took the
+strings from the other.
+
+"We want to present you these tokens, the presents of George and Harry.
+You are to wear these as an emblem of your authority." And George and
+Mida placed the most beautiful crown shaped hats on the heads of the
+couple.
+
+"Is this part of the ceremony too?" asked Cinda, as she slyly glanced at
+Sutoto.
+
+It is impossible to say who were the most surprised people, the boys or
+Sutoto, since these presents had been prepared without their knowledge,
+and it atoned in a way for their neglect in not thinking of the gifts
+before.
+
+But there were also other agreeable surprises in store for them. The
+wives of Uraso and Muro led Cinda to the table on which the presents
+were exposed, and also exhibited the many beautiful garments which had
+been prepared for her.
+
+Her bewilderment was still greater when she was directed to turn, and
+found herself standing in front of a tall oval mirror which the boys had
+brought up, under the Professor's directions.
+
+Her image in the mirror startled the bride beyond measure, and she
+innocently asked Sutoto whether this was also a part of the wedding
+ceremony.
+
+According to the custom of the tribe, the couple had to go through the
+ordeal of the tribal dance, and when the boys learned of this they
+regretted that provision had not been made for the event. They were now
+in for everything which belonged to this unique wedding. The entire
+party broke up, and the boys regretted that the affair came to an end so
+soon.
+
+As they filed down the steps and marched along the dock to the shore
+they noticed that the entire village was shining brightly with hundreds
+of the native candles, and everywhere were the well-known lamps, which
+the boys knew came from Wonder Island.
+
+"What does all that mean?" asked Harry, as John came up.
+
+"That means the dance, that is the final requirement of the wedding
+ceremony."
+
+"But where are the dancers? Are we to take part?"
+
+"Oh, no; no one who has partaken of the feast is permitted to take
+part."
+
+"Well, that is certainly queer."
+
+"Not more so than among many white people, where the dancers are those
+who have been specially selected for the purpose, and are professionals.
+In Biblical times the Jews had dancing as part of the religious
+ceremony, and that which took place in the Temple was participated in
+only by special ones set apart for that purpose."
+
+No one was in sight, however, and the Chief led the entire company to a
+large green space, not far from his dwelling, and after a circle had
+been formed, they heard a peculiar humming sound, which seemed to be all
+about them, and this increased in intensity, and when at its height, two
+dozen or more of the native girls rushed in with a gliding, swaying
+motion, and circled around with peculiar grace, continuously giving
+forth the weird sounds that have been described.
+
+It was intensely dramatic, and fascinated the boys. They had never seen
+anything so remarkable in its character, and for once they were unable
+to question its meaning, or ask for information concerning it.
+
+For an hour this continued, until the boys thought the performers would
+certainly drop dead with fatigue; then, one after the other disappeared,
+and with each disappearance the sound of the humming grew less until but
+one remained. In some way, unknown to the boys she made the last circle
+around the green, bearing a wreath of leaves, and as she approached
+Sutoto and Cinda, wheeled about, and threw it over them.
+
+"That is the final act," said John. "See, they are both within the
+wreath, and it signifies that they are bound together forever, even as
+the wreath, which has no end."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+HUTOTON; THE PLACE OF DEATH
+
+
+But the boys knew that they had some important things to attend to. The
+pleasures of life have an important part, but they were now engaged in
+serious work. The fact that they had accomplished so much was a great
+incentive to go on and investigate other things which were still
+mysteries, and which might be of great value to them.
+
+The coming of the Professor had been a great pleasure to them. The
+developments of the past two weeks were ever in their minds and they
+could not repress the curiosity to visit the other islands, if such
+could be found.
+
+Now that Sutoto was married they knew he would not be with them for a
+time, and they had not talked over the future plans. When, the next day,
+they and the Professor and John were together to consider the next step,
+it was with joy that the Professor informed them of the purpose of John
+to continue the investigations throughout that part of the ocean.
+
+"It seems that your interpretation of Walter's note was entirely wrong,"
+said John. "In any event it is certain that we are more than thirty
+leagues from Wonder Island, and not in the direction he pointed out."
+
+"Then it is likely that if there is an island which will fit the place,
+it must be to the north," said Harry.
+
+"That would be a natural conclusion," he answered. "It has occurred to
+me that the natural place for an island would be to the north."
+
+The boys looked at him with surprise. "What makes you think so?" asked
+George.
+
+"I judged so, merely from the conformation of this island."
+
+"What is there in the island that makes you think so?"
+
+"You have noticed that the island is very narrow east and west, and very
+much longer north and south."
+
+"Yes; but that still does not make it plain to me."
+
+"The island may be like the ridge of a mountain cropping out of the
+ocean. For instance, the Andes and the Sierras in the United States run
+north and south. Now suppose the ocean should cover the land, those
+mountains would form islands which would naturally be north and south of
+each other, and the islands themselves would be longer north and south
+than east and west."
+
+"I see the idea. But we might find them to the south of this island, as
+well."
+
+"Certainly; but as the northern section brings us nearer the supposed
+thirty leagues, we should, I think, make the investigation there first."
+
+It was necessary that Sutoto should go back to Wonder Island. His
+position as Chief of the Berees made this essential. Furthermore, the
+age of the Professor made traveling and the hardships of investigating
+on foot a hard task, and besides it was necessary to take back the
+visitors.
+
+"I have suggested to the Chief that we shall return, and have invited
+him to accompany us, and I am gratified to say that he has accepted. We
+shall, therefore, be ready to return within a few days," said the
+Professor.
+
+"Have you said anything to him about the contemplated visit to Hutoton?"
+asked John.
+
+"No; but I shall do so at once."
+
+"Oh! that will give us an opportunity to take the paralytic back with
+us," suggested Harry.
+
+"Yes; that will be the reason for our stopping there."
+
+"Wouldn't it be a good idea to sail to the north, and investigate in
+that direction, on our way home?" remarked George.
+
+"That has occurred to me."
+
+The Chief gave careful instructions to his son, Calmo, in view of his
+proposed trip, and informed the Professor that he was anxious to
+accompany them at the earliest opportunity.
+
+Two days thereafter, the entire party boarded the ship, and the course
+was set for the northern part of the island. There the Chief had the
+first opportunity to see the dreadful place where the criminals of his
+community had been sent.
+
+There was no resentment on the part of the convicts. On the other hand,
+there was the most effusive welcome extended, and when the Chief saw the
+happiness and prosperity there, which he could not help but contrast
+with his own people, he was amazed.
+
+The unfortunate patient was carefully taken to the ship, and during his
+removal did not in the least indicate by any sign that he knew what was
+going on about him.
+
+John took many stores from the ship, and particularly garments, and
+articles of food for the people. All participated in the division, and
+the old man was delighted when he saw the gifts, the more so when John
+told him that they would soon be visited and other stores provided.
+
+When the rolling motion of the boat was felt by the stricken man, he
+showed the first symptoms of consciousness. Sometimes he would look
+about him, and try to grasp something. On several occasions the
+Professor saw him open his eyes with a sort of questioning look.
+
+But we cannot dwell too long on the result of the patient's progress, at
+this time. John felt, as did the Professor, that from that man they
+would be able to learn something, if he could ever regain his faculties.
+The boys gathered that much from the conversation, so that, for the
+present, he must be left to the tender care of the Professor, until
+later events are recorded.
+
+From Hutoton the ship sailed directly north, it being understood that if
+no land was sighted before evening it would be useless to go farther in
+that direction. The _Pioneer_ was a good sailer, and could easily, with
+a fair wind, make ten miles an hour, so they would have fully seven
+hours' run to test out their theory of land in that direction.
+
+Before five o'clock John, who was constantly on the watch, came to the
+Professor and remarked that he believed the haze to the north indicated
+the presence of land. This was soon communicated to the boys, and there
+was no more idleness from that time on.
+
+John's theory was correct. Slowly certain fixed objects appeared and
+some outlines that looked like mountains, and the boys could not repress
+their anxiety at the anticipated shore.
+
+"Then we were right, after all," said Harry.
+
+John smiled, as he replied: "I do not know; the calculations have not
+yet been made."
+
+"I would like to know how our position can be found out from an
+examination of the sun," remarked George.
+
+"That will require a long answer to explain fully but I shall try to
+answer it in a simple manner. The sailor takes an observation of the sun
+in two directions, namely, north and south, and east and west. You know,
+of course, that the sun moves north in the summer and south in the
+winter, and that the extreme southern point is in midwinter, Dec. 20:
+that in the spring, or March 20, it is directly above the equator, and
+in midsummer, or, on June 20, it is as far north as it can go."
+
+"You mean," said George, "that it would be north of the equator."
+
+"As we have the same calendar over the entire world, it is true
+everywhere. The difference is, of course, that summer and winter, and
+spring and autumn are reversed, north and south of the equator. All
+estimates as to locations are made by measuring angles."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 15. Getting Angle from Position of the Sun._]
+
+"Then it must be something like surveying?"
+
+"Yes; the same principles are applied. Here is a sketch, which shows the
+earth A, and B is the equatorial line. C is the position of the sun on
+September 20, or on June 20."
+
+"Why are they in the same position on both days?"
+
+"Yes; the sun crosses the equator September 20, on its way south, and
+then it again recrosses the equator coming north six months afterwards.
+On either of those days, if a person should stand at D, and look at the
+sun, there would be a line E, which projects out from the earth to the
+sun, and that is called the equatorial line."
+
+"It is exactly at right angles to F, which passes through the poles. Now
+the drawing shows two other positions, namely G and H. These represent
+the extreme points of the travel of the sun north and south, or the
+positions that the sun occupy on Dec. 20, and June 20 of each year."
+
+"I see," said Harry. "The points G and H are just 23 degrees north and
+south of the equator."
+
+"That is correct, and there is another thing which can be learned from
+their positions."
+
+"I know what it is."
+
+"What?"
+
+"It gives another line, or angle."
+
+"So now we have two angles, this, and the equatorial line. Then, we know
+the exact distance of the sun from the earth, and this gives the first
+measurement, and with the angle formed by the line I, taken in
+connection with the line E, it is easy to determine just where, or how
+far the sun is to the north or to the south, and if you did not, for
+instance, know the time of the year, a man could by such a measurement,
+tell, by the angle thus formed, the exact date."
+
+"I understand that now," remarked George. "The sailor, in getting the
+angle, simply measures that, and if he knows where the sun is on that
+day he will then have two angles, one that he knows beforehand, and the
+other that he finds out by looking at the sun."
+
+"That is correct. The Nautical Chart gives all that information, so that
+it saves a large amount of work in making the calculations."
+
+"That gives the way to determine positions north and south. But how
+about east and west?"
+
+"In the same manner exactly so far as the angle measurements are
+concerned, but in this case, instead of taking the time, in days or in
+months, as in reckoning north and south, we must take time in minutes,
+and to do that the entire globe is laid off in minutes and degrees,
+which the nautical tables give, and the mariner knows when he obtains a
+certain angle just how far east or west he is located by the chart."
+
+"But if he has no chart?"
+
+"Then he must figure out the position for himself, which he can do if he
+has what is called Greenwich, or standard time, and has, also the
+correct time of the day where his ship is."
+
+Land was beyond; there was no question of that. It rose out of the water
+higher than the island they had just left, which the boys had named
+_Venture_ Island.
+
+The Chief knew nothing of the land before them. He had told John that
+years before he learned that there was a land where there were many bad
+people, who killed and ate each other, but he did not know the exact
+direction.
+
+The vessel was sailed along the coast, and the field glasses were used
+to scan the land. It had the appearance of the other islands which they
+now knew. Vegetation was magnificent, and growing everywhere, but there
+was not the sign of a habitation anywhere.
+
+After an hour's sail they rounded a point, and beyond was the first
+cove, or indentation along the coast. To that John directed the course
+of the vessel, and they ran in very close, since he knew from the abrupt
+sloping beach that it must be a deep bay.
+
+The men could scarcely man the boat quickly enough. A dozen of them,
+together with John, Muro and Uraso, took the first boat, while a second
+boat was filled with the warriors who also were accompanied by some of
+the natives of Venture island.
+
+The Professor and the others remained on board, while the party made the
+preliminary examinations of the immediate neighborhood. John formed two
+parties, one under command of Muro, and the other of Uraso. The boys
+were with Uraso, while he was with Muro. The object was to find out as
+quickly as possible what they would have to meet, and the result would
+enable them to determine the future plans.
+
+"It is understood, now," remarked John, "that the two exploring parties
+shall take the two courses outlined, Muro and his men, to go directly
+east, while Uraso will take a course to the northeast, and proceed in
+that direction for three hours, and then the two parties are to turn
+toward each other, and mutually report. This will give us an
+opportunity to find out something, unless the island is a very large
+one, and requires subsequent exploration to ascertain whether it is
+inhabited."
+
+John had purposely selected the route to the east, as he saw the high
+elevation in that direction, and George laughed, as he said, slyly:
+"John is still after the caves," and Harry laughed, as he recalled the
+keenness with which John had arranged the trips.
+
+John did make his way to the highest points, and soon learned, from the
+observations, that the island was inhabited, but the trip of the boys
+was more exciting, so we shall more particularly detail their
+adventures.
+
+Before they had gone two hours evidences grew thick and fast that tribes
+inhabited the island. Muro, and the different men, were continually
+finding traces, none of them, however, which indicated that the people
+were near at hand, or that the telltale marks had been recently made.
+
+But now signs began to be apparent to the boys also; the bones of
+animals, lying around the spot where a fire had been gave them the first
+real sensation. Muro glanced at the boys, and at some bones, and the
+action on his part was so peculiar, that George quietly remarked:
+
+"Muro looked so peculiarly at me when I glanced at the bones, over
+there, that I wonder what he meant?"
+
+"I saw it too," answered Harry. "Let us have another look at them;" and
+acting on the suggestion they went over. Muro followed. They did not
+appear to pay any attention to him; but he was quick to join them, and
+as he did so he slowly nodded his head.
+
+"Are they human remains?" said Harry, as he turned to Muro,
+questioningly.
+
+"Yes; and this is not the first we have seen," he answered. "We may find
+them now at any time. I am now sure that there are several tribes here."
+
+"What makes you believe so?"
+
+"Because we have found different kinds of hair, which is usually the
+best evidence of the differences in the tribes, as each has its own
+peculiarity."
+
+"Savages, and cannibals!" said George reflectively.
+
+"But we must go on. We have still an hour in this direction before we
+turn to the south and east," said Harry.
+
+There was more caution now exercised, and the speed was accordingly
+reduced, in view of the especial care which they took. In order to
+understand what happened the reader should know something of the nature
+of the country.
+
+Some places in Wonder Island had the same sort of timber and
+undergrowth, and they went through some dense forests, in which vines
+and small brush made traveling difficult. They had to cut their way
+through some of this vegetation.
+
+The land was not low or flat. If it had been there would have been a
+dense jungle. Sometimes they passed through half-grown forests, and
+these places were the most difficult to scour, because an enemy might
+be within fifty feet, and not be discovered.
+
+It was in just such a place that they received their first surprise; a
+shower of arrows, so thick that they instantly knew it could not have
+been made by only a dozen or so. Some of the arrows found their marks,
+and two of the men sank down, while Muro coolly drew one of the crude
+missiles from his arm.
+
+"Drop down!" cried Muro.
+
+There was not a savage in sight; still a number of arrows fell around
+them. "Remain quiet, and I will find them?" said Muro, as he crept
+forward quietly through the dense grass.
+
+George and Harry followed, although it was evident it was not Muro's
+wish. Before they had gone ten feet, Muro turned, and pointed ahead.
+"They are there; at least one party. Get ready for a shot."
+
+The savages, noting the quiet in their front, now cautiously peered
+through the bush, and the boys saw the most hideous countenances. "We
+might give them a round," said Muro, and after carefully aiming, the
+guns spoke.
+
+The simultaneous explosion of the three guns, raised pandemonium on all
+sides. They were now surrounded by at least a hundred of the savages,
+but for some reason the little party of twenty awed them, and instead of
+making a charge, they rushed toward the place where the three victims of
+the gunshots lay.
+
+[Illustration: "_She ... found herself standing in front of a tall oval
+mirror_" [See p. 204]]
+
+Muro's arm was bleeding profusely, and George quickly bound it up,
+while the enemy were hesitating. "Do not shoot, unless they rush at us.
+I will talk: to them, and try to get an understanding."
+
+Then, in a loud voice Muro called to them, saying they were friends, and
+not enemies. There was no response. Thinking that they knew nothing of
+the dialect, he tried another, and the only response was the evident
+determination of the savages to attack again.
+
+The boys and Muro could plainly hear their chattering, but the latter
+said that what they were saying was not intelligible to him, and that
+they must now prepare for a fight.
+
+"Get your guns ready, and be prepared for a charge. If they come so
+close that you cannot use the guns, then we must be prepared to meet
+them with our knives, and we must all stand together, and not become
+separated."
+
+Instead of attacking, however, there was silence, after the first
+excitement. "They are trying to find, out what struck their comrades
+when we fired," remarked Muro.
+
+"Yes; I think it was a big surprise."
+
+"I recall," continued Muro, "when we had our first brush with you that
+we could not find the arrow which we supposed was made by your bullet.
+That frightened us more than anything else."
+
+There was not the slightest movement on the part of an enemy for a full
+half hour. This is the most trying sort of tactics. If you can see the
+enemy, or note that he is doing something, there is some relief to the
+tension, but where he can neither be seen, nor heard, it tries the
+nerves of the strongest man.
+
+Muro knew that this inactivity on the part of the savages had its
+purpose. Probably, they intended to remain there until night, and
+overwhelm them in the rush. Muro had other plans, however.
+
+"We cannot remain here. We must make the attack. Remain here, and permit
+me to feel out their positions, and also to determine what they are
+doing." He glided away from them noiselessly, and how he kept the tall
+grass and weeds from swaying, the boys could not determine at that time.
+
+It did not take Muro long to see the situation. They were surrounded by
+a cordon of savages, and while spying, saw a new lot of them coming up.
+The plan was plain enough, and it meant a fight now, or a night defense.
+
+When he returned, he had his plans formed. "They are being reinforced,
+and we have, probably, a hundred and fifty, or more, around us. John is,
+no doubt, too far away to come to our assistance, and our only hope is
+to attack them now, so we might as well take the necessary steps."
+
+While on his investigations Muro had discovered a fallen tree, which was
+not more than fifty feet to their left. "We must reach that tree, and by
+digging a shallow trench at one side, can easily defend ourselves, as
+well as pick them off at our leisure."
+
+Slowly they moved, in crawling attitudes, toward the place indicated.
+The tree was not a large one, but it made an admirable breastworks, and
+with their knives each man dug out a shallow hole, piling up the earth
+beyond the hole, so as to shelter them from the arrows, which they knew
+would be rained on them.
+
+This work required a full half hour, and when it was completed, and Muro
+had satisfied himself that each one was supplied with sufficient
+ammunition, he was ready for the second stage of the game.
+
+"We must attract them, by some form of action. I will take three with
+me, and crawl forward, until we can catch glimpse of some of the
+watchers. Those we will attack, and then fall back, and do the same on
+the other sides."
+
+Muro indicated those who were to follow, and after going only a short
+distance the boys heard the shots, then four more. This brought the
+sounds of voices from every direction. Muro and his men, during the
+excitement, crawled to another portion of the line, and repeated the
+manoeuver.
+
+This, for the moment threw them into consternation, but they quickly
+rallied, and now it was plain that they were pressing forward to rush
+the position occupied by the boys. It was now obvious that the
+precaution of making the defensive position, as Muro had suggested, was
+their only salvation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+DISCOVERY OF A NEW ISLAND, AND A SAVAGE TRIBE
+
+
+Nothing could describe the uproar that the second volley created in the
+ranks of the besiegers. Yell after yell came from the hundreds of
+throats that were about them. It was now war to the end. There could be
+no compromise.
+
+While the boys had been in many difficult and trying experiences before,
+this was the first time that they grew pale, and had strong misgivings.
+They knew, however, that the object of the shrieks and yells of savages
+were for the purpose of driving terror into the hearts of their foes.
+
+In this respect it might not thus affect them, but when they considered
+the overwhelming numbers around them, we cannot blame them for feeling
+alarmed.
+
+They were coming forward, and on all sides. "Remember, what John used to
+tell us: it is the shots that hit which count. Fire deliberately, and
+keep together. Do not use your revolvers until they are close, and you
+cannot use the guns."
+
+Closer and closer they came, and Muro and the men were silent. "Now, get
+ready! Shoot deliberately!"
+
+The first salvo was fired. It was a staggering blow. They reloaded,
+while the enemy was trying to recover, and the second volley belched
+forth.
+
+Then, when the execution was noticed, and they saw their people fall all
+about them, they charged forward in one mass, and the boys looked at
+each other, for a moment, and George reached over and gave Harry's hand
+one pressure, and then turned away and began to fire as fast as he could
+aim the weapon.
+
+They were still coming on. The demons were nearly up to the log. For
+some reason the savages did not heed those who fell. It had not struck
+terror into their hearts, as the boys hoped. How would this end? The
+enemy was now too close to make their guns of any use. The revolvers
+were drawn, and the cracks from them became almost a continuous roar.
+
+They were still coming. Soon the ammunition would be gone. The boys
+realized this. They were determined to die fighting, and they began to
+feel for their knives which must be the final act in the great tragedy.
+
+Then they heard something louder than the cracks of their own weapons
+and the shrieks of the devils around them. Some one was shooting. They
+could see the startled faces of the savages, as they turned and swung
+around. The attack ceased, and Muro sprang up on the log, with a yell.
+
+Could he be mad? The boys were stupefied. "Come on!" cried Muro. "Here
+is John!"
+
+This announcement, coming at an unexpected moment, was such a reaction
+to the poor boys, that they could hardly raise themselves. Another
+volley; they could hear it now. There was another yell from the savages,
+and then they could be seen rushing through the brush.
+
+The men with John ran up, and John struggled forward through the weeds.
+"Are you hurt?" asked John, as he sprang to the side of the boys.
+
+"No! no!" cried George, and he fell down, overcome with the excitement,
+while Harry could not speak for a moment.
+
+"That was a close call," said John. "We heard the first shots an hour
+ago, and we turned to take this direction. Then we heard nothing for a
+long time, and as we were coming over the hill beyond the firing
+commenced but we could see nothing, so we hurried forward and soon saw
+the smoke, and then the savages coming from the bush, and directly to
+the east we noticed fifty or more coming this way, but they are not here
+yet."
+
+"I wonder how many attacked us?" asked George.
+
+"It is difficult to tell, but it is safe to say that there were at least
+two hundred in the fight. Oh, no; the boys will not follow them up very
+far," said John, as Harry looked apprehensively toward the direction
+that John's men were going.
+
+He blew the whistle, and gradually the men straggled in, reporting that
+the savages appeared terror-stricken, as they had had no idea that there
+was another force in the neighborhood, and they did not stop to consider
+the possible number.
+
+"I am sorry for these poor people," remarked John. "We must hunt up the
+wounded."
+
+Searchers were set to work, and the wounded, when found, were carried to
+an open place beyond, and their hurts examined and bandaged. At first
+terror showed itself on their faces, but as John and Muro, together with
+the boys, washed their wounds, and wrapped bandages around the limbs,
+they lay there and marveled at the actions of their enemies.
+
+More than two dozen had been killed, and forty-two wounded, nearly all
+in the legs or bodies, those having arm wounds being enabled to get
+away.
+
+On Muro's orders a watch was set on the movements of the savages, and
+from time to time reports were brought in concerning them. They had
+retreated eastwardly, and were now off less than a half mile, where they
+were assembled, and evidently debating the situation.
+
+John and Muro well knew that their present force, now numbering
+forty-one, and all well armed, would be more than a match for the savage
+force, still, it would not be advisable to prolong the explorations for
+the day, as it was desirable to report the situation of affairs to the
+Professor.
+
+After making the sufferers comfortable they started on the march back to
+the ship. During the period while caring for the wounded, John and Muro
+tried to engage the savages in conversation but all attempts to learn
+their language failed, and, as they were about to leave, John said to
+Muro:
+
+"Do you think that man is a chief?"
+
+"I know he is; I spotted him from the first, and saw from his actions,
+and the fact of his being obeyed, that he was a man of some authority."
+
+"I agree with you," said Uraso, "that he is the one we must take with
+us."
+
+A litter was quickly improvised and the savage gently laid on, and with
+this, as their only encumbrance, they started for the return march. Five
+of the men had been wounded, all in the arms and body, and none of them
+dangerously, so that there was no trouble in the march.
+
+They filed out to the west, avoiding as much exposure as possible.
+Muro's men had been on the observing line, and at Muro's suggestion they
+occasionally showed themselves, so as to assure the natives that they
+were still holding their ground.
+
+As the two forces were starting for the ship, Muro prepared a decoy, so
+that the savages could see what appeared to be two figures. Then he
+hurriedly told John what he had done, and the march began, as rapidly as
+possible, at first, and a rear guard was provided to watch the movements
+of their enemies.
+
+Two miles beyond the scene of the fight the party halted, and George was
+assisted to climb a tree, from which point they might be seen.
+
+"I can see them plainly," he called down. "They are now around the
+wounded. I cannot see what they are doing, but there is a big crowd."
+
+He waited for some time, and then cried out: "I believe they are coming
+this way. I think it is time for us to be moving." And George slipped
+down, as John gave the order to go on.
+
+The rear guard, with John and Uraso, were now following up behind the
+marchers. "Go on, without stopping," he said, as they took up their
+positions.
+
+The boys begged to be permitted to remain with the rear guard, but John
+refused to have them exposed. In an hour and a half they ascended an
+elevation from which the ship could be seen in the bay to the southwest.
+
+During that time only once had the runner returned from John to notify
+them of the progress of the natives. The last information, therefore,
+was about a half hour before, and it was now obvious that the savages
+were determined to follow them up, and this would bring them within view
+of the vessel.
+
+Before descending the last declivity that led to the beach, John and the
+Chief appeared, and told the boys that all of the tribe was behind them,
+and that the cause of the pursuit was, unquestionably, to recover the
+Chief who had been taken along.
+
+At the suggestion of John three shots were fired to attract the
+attention of those on the boat, while several of the fleetest runners
+speeded down the beach and quickly advised the Professor of the
+situation.
+
+Two boat loads of warriors were quickly sent to shore, and when John and
+the party with him came up to the beach, the savages had reached the
+crest of the hill, and ranged up in line, but halted to witness the
+spectacle before them.
+
+The wounded chief was taken to the vessel, and the Professor immediately
+gave him the best care, but he remarked: "This man is desperately
+wounded, and will require the best of attention to enable him to pull
+through."
+
+All the men were finally placed on board, and their experiences related.
+An immediate consultation was held. John and the boys insisted on
+remaining with a sufficient force to enable them to carry out their
+explorations, but the Professor seemed to oppose it.
+
+"I quite agree with you that, from what John has said, there are reasons
+aside from the cannibals over there, why we should explore it from one
+end to the other."
+
+The boys cast a side glance at John. Did John find something that made
+him so insistent to remain? They repressed their curiosity, however, for
+the time. To their minds they thought the natives were the incentive,
+notwithstanding the terrible fight they had just engaged in, although
+they were willing to take the risk.
+
+But it was finally settled. John was to have the force now on board, and
+he, with the boys, was to explore, and, if need be, to conquer the
+natives on the island. The _Pioneer_ would, in the meantime, sail to
+Wonder Island, and return with food and ammunition, and reinforcements.
+
+There was thus left at their disposal fifty-five men, with a fair supply
+of ammunition. Uraso and Muro were to be of the party, as events just
+related showed that there was serious work to do before they might be
+able to return.
+
+That night, while making the final arrangements on the vessel, the boys
+sought John, and asked him more particularly concerning his trip.
+
+"We have had no opportunity to speak to you, but the Professor said you
+had learned enough about the island to determine you to explore it
+fully," said George.
+
+"That is true. I have found what I believe to be the identical spot
+described in the charts, and I have found the solution, I think, of
+Walter's note and of the skull."
+
+This was, indeed, something of importance to them, but John informed
+them that for certain reasons it might be better to defer the
+explanation until they had made the final explorations.
+
+The boys knew he must have some pretty good reason for thus explaining
+and laying the matter before them, and they forebore further
+questionings.
+
+The next morning, when all the supplies and ammunition had been taken
+off, and the final good-byes were said, the party stood on the shore
+while the _Pioneer_ slowly moved out, and was soon racing before the
+wind on its way to Wonder Island.
+
+A council was held before they attempted to march into the interior. "I
+have every reason to believe that the band which we met yesterday is in
+the immediate vicinity, and that they have been watching our movements,"
+remarked John.
+
+"In that case," remarked Uraso, "I favor the route to the east, which,
+while it may offer us still greater obstacles, in view of our
+observations there, still it might enable us the more quickly to
+overcome the tribe we have just met."
+
+The boys looked at each other significantly. "I wonder what Uraso can be
+talking about? There must be something very much out of the usual, in
+the eastern part of the island."
+
+"I am interested in knowing what he means by 'the observation' they made
+there," responded Harry.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+FIGHT WITH NATIVES AND RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND
+
+
+When the _Pioneer_ sailed for Unity it was with the understanding that
+she was to return within a week or ten days. At a cliff in the headland,
+which jutted out on the southern side of the bay, a sort of post office
+station was established, because if the ship should return while they
+were in the interior, it would be well for the commander of the
+_Pioneer_ to know where to go in the event that the eastern or the
+northern coast should be much more convenient for John and his party.
+
+It was nearly a hundred miles from the Island to Wonder Island, and
+there would be no occasion for the Professor to hurry back a relief,
+except to supply additional ammunition, because they did not for an
+instant expect to meet a tribe that would give them such a fight.
+
+There was still enough to provide, probably five rounds per man, so that
+it made them a pretty respectable fighting force. The weather was such
+that the force on the island did not require tents for shelter, and with
+the native fruits the party could well subsist for quite a time without
+assistance.
+
+It was agreed that the party should keep together, and no straggling be
+permitted, as it was evident they had a very bitter foe to deal with.
+The severely wounded Chief, who was taken along, was under the personal
+charge of the Professor, the understanding being that as soon as his
+wounds were satisfactorily progressing, an effort would be made to open
+up communication with him, and through that channel they could reach the
+inhabitants of the island, and thus advise them that they did not mean
+to do them an injury.
+
+"I wonder if that isn't the real reason why John does not want to go for
+the fellows who attacked us," asked George.
+
+"That may be so. It never occurred to me before. It seems to me,
+though," answered Harry, "that they will get but little out of that
+fellow in a week's time. You know they are very much reserved at times."
+
+"Or stubborn," suggested George.
+
+One of the things that John was careful about related to the
+organization of the force, so that it would at all times be ready for
+action. In order to carry out this idea and make it effectual, he
+divided the fighters into two squads of twenty-five men each, under the
+commands of Uraso and Muro, the arrangement being such that one squad
+should have charge of the patrolling and picketing for a period of two
+days, and then the other should take charge for a like time.
+
+There was always the most perfect accord between the two Chiefs, and
+John wisely allowed them to arrange those matters in such a way as would
+be most satisfactory to them.
+
+Before noon the following day the force marched out from Security
+Harbor, as they had named the bay, and took up the trail made by John
+and his party two days before.
+
+"We have names for the two islands, and for about all the principal
+points, but we have no name for this place," said Harry, as they were
+marching along.
+
+"Quite true," answered George, reflectively. Then, with a laugh, he
+said: "As they have cannibals here, according to the evidence so far
+gathered, I think _Maneta_ would be a name that would tell the story
+about as well as anything." And George laughed as he made the
+suggestion.
+
+He was an adept in applying names, being generally the first to make
+suggestions in that direction, and he was rarely at a loss for an apt
+designation.
+
+The route was over a country which was rich in vegetation. During the
+first ten miles the ascent was gradual, and the fruit and nuts were
+abundant, while new species of trees and flowers attracted the boys.
+
+"Harry and I have found a plant that has flies and other insects all
+over the leaves, and I believe it actually catches and holds. Here is a
+sample," said George, as he presented a branch to John.
+
+John examined it carefully. Then he said: "This is a plant of which we
+have several in the United States, but none which are as active. This is
+called Venus' Fly Trap."
+
+"That is curious," remarked Harry. "I wouldn't have paid any attention
+to it but I saw a fly alight on it, and these little feelers seemed to
+close around it, and hold it."
+
+"It works on that plan exactly. It is in that way it gets its food."
+
+"But why should the feelers be able to grasp the fly the moment it
+touches the leaf?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 16. Venus' Fly-Trap._]
+
+"Do you recall about what the Professor told you of the peculiar power
+of plants to absorb food of particular kinds by a faculty called
+_irritability_?"
+
+"Yes; I remember."
+
+"By means of that, plants are enabled to select just the kinds of
+substances that they want, and can digest. If you will carefully notice
+the leaf, after it has seized a fly it will be observed that the leaf
+exudes a watery substance, and that has the property of digesting the
+fly, or of converting the liquid part of the insect into a form of food
+which is taken through the leaf, and from the leaf it goes into the
+plant itself."
+
+"I thought plants got their food from the roots only?"
+
+"Leaves are just the same as roots. They are terminals, and moisture as
+well as foods, such, for instance, as nitrogen, is absorbed and fed to
+the plant through the leaves."
+
+As they progressed they could see evidences of human occupation, and in
+many places the remains of fire. It was while making a detour from the
+regular route taken by John that they saw the first startling thing.
+
+It was found at a place where a rude hut was discovered in a dilapidated
+condition. Directly behind the hut was a raised sort of dais, supported
+on two posts, and this was filled with human skulls, all in an advanced
+stage of decay.
+
+It was noticed only by accident, as the area around the hut was thickly
+grown up by the vegetation. The boys were naturally startled at the
+sight.
+
+"What does that mean?" asked Harry.
+
+John replied: "This is evidence that the people here are head hunters."
+
+"What do you mean by _head hunters_?"
+
+"Certain savages have the belief that their importance depends on the
+number of heads they can capture."
+
+"Where do they get them?"
+
+"It is necessary for them to kill their enemies, and impale the heads,
+or nail them up to their huts."
+
+"Is it a religious ceremony?"
+
+"In some cases that is so. In some tribes the object is merely to show
+bravery and manliness. The more heads a man possesses the braver he is."
+
+The vicinity of the hut was carefully examined, and Uraso brought to
+John a very curiously arranged shell, with a handle to it. It was, in
+fact, a rattle. John took the article, and after examining it for some
+time, remarked:
+
+"These people will be difficult to deal with; very difficult."
+
+"Why do you form that conclusion from the examination of the rattle?"
+
+"This is a vele."
+
+"A _vele_; and what in the world is that?"
+
+"A vele is a sort of hoodoo; it is something that many natives believe
+in with such tenacity that if any one having this rattle points to him
+and declares him veleed, and announces that the veleed one will die the
+next day, he will lay down and actually expire as predicted."
+
+"Do you believe such tales?" asked Harry.
+
+"Of course those stories are hard to understand, but the missionaries on
+the Melanesian Islands vouch for many things similar to that. In 1871,
+Bishop Patterson, one of the missionaries, was murdered by the natives
+of those islands, and many of the facts in regard to their customs were
+then established."
+
+"But how do they work the vele?"
+
+"The place where the vele is worked to the most unlimited extent is in
+the Island of Guadalcaner, one of the Solomon Islands, although it has
+its counterpart in many other places. The vele rattler is carefully kept
+in a bamboo box, and when the owner wishes to destroy an enemy he takes
+the vele, and searches for him.
+
+"In doing so he must not be seen by any one. If he is seen the vele will
+not be effective. When he finds his enemy the vele is pointed to the
+man, and the rattles shaken, and while doing so the one exorcising the
+spell must turn his face away and utter curses. As soon as his enemy
+hears this, he turns to see who has veleed him, and he then glances
+around to see if any one has seen the vele."
+
+"Are you sure that the rattle is for that purpose?"
+
+"There is no question of it, and it is an evidence that the natives are
+intensely superstitious, and such people are very difficult to deal
+with."
+
+"I suppose we shall have witch doctors to deal with here?" asked George.
+
+"That is a very natural supposition."
+
+"Did you see some of these things when you came over here yesterday?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+It was evident to both boys that they were going direct to the
+mountains, and the general character of the surroundings reminded them
+so much of the mountains on Wonder Island, that they felt assured John
+would be able to find the cave for which he was searching.
+
+That night they encamped on a small stream which was, no doubt, formed
+by a spring, as its waters were deliciously cool, and refreshing.
+
+During that night, shortly after twelve o'clock, the boys heard the most
+peculiar noises, like a doleful, continuous cry, echoed and reechoed
+from hill to mountain,--something indescribable, but they refrained
+from saying anything to John about it.
+
+Some of the boys who were present and heard it were singularly affected,
+and it must be said that the boys themselves, notwithstanding the
+experiences they had passed through, were not altogether composed in
+their minds.
+
+When Uraso and Muro appeared next morning, after a night of scouting,
+they were startled by the accounts which were furnished, as to the
+number and warlike character of the inhabitants, and a council was held
+to decide whether it would be advisable to proceed with their limited
+force.
+
+If they knew, beyond question, that the island was occupied by another
+tribe, it might enable them to make peace with one of them, and thus
+pave the way for approaching these people.
+
+It was unfortunate that the first contact with the natives brought them
+into open hostilities, much as they desired to avoid it, but it was too
+late now.
+
+"From your investigations," said John, addressing the two chiefs, "can
+you give any idea of the number of natives in this tribe?"
+
+"We were unable to get near the village, but during the night we touched
+three different parties, one over by the high ridge, one a mile to the
+front, and the other over in the open ground not far from the place we
+had the fight. If I can judge anything by that I should say they have a
+number of warriors," answered Uraso.
+
+"That does, indeed, look as though they are ready to meet us from
+whatever direction we may attack them," remarked John.
+
+"The thing which is the most singular to me," remarked Muro, "is the way
+they are coming at us after the fight over there. If they were a weak
+lot they would draw off, and keep away from us, and that makes me think
+they have a lot of warriors, and are simply waiting until they can
+collect all of them."
+
+"We must do one of two things," ventured John, on reflection. "Either to
+go on with the men we have, or to wait until the _Pioneer_ returns, and
+then go back with her and fit out a force of ample size to meet them. It
+is our wish to win over the people by peaceful means, but our weakness
+may be the worst possible way of accomplishing that purpose."
+
+Uraso and Muro were both in favor of returning and waiting for the
+_Pioneer_, as they knew it would be likely to show up within the next
+three days, and their views decided the matter.
+
+"Under the circumstances we must leave this place before it is too late
+in the day, or we may have trouble in reaching the landing, although we
+can easily hold them off with our rifles, but we must avoid bloodshed,"
+and on this point John was insistent.
+
+The camp was astir and all the equipment in hand within fifteen minutes,
+although they had not yet partaken of breakfast. Uraso took the first
+turn, as commander of the rear guard, while the main body hurried on to
+cross the valley, before the savages could get the first notice of the
+retirement.
+
+Notwithstanding the great caution displayed, several shots were heard
+before the slope on the other side was reached, and they knew that Uraso
+was engaged.
+
+It is difficult, sometimes, to know just how information travels among
+savage people, but in this case, the peculiar beatings of the drums
+which could be heard in the dim distance, was sufficient to satisfy Muro
+that they had watchers, and a signaling means from treetops and from the
+crests of the great hills all around them.
+
+An hour afterwards Uraso's men were seen in the distance, and, although
+they had fired no more shots, it was evident that the natives were now
+in force and pressing against him with all their might. Only the
+consummate skill of Uraso prevented them from rushing the men under his
+command.
+
+But the top of the hill was reached; the landing was not much more than
+a mile beyond that, and John hurriedly took a half dozen men, and George
+and Harry with him, in order to select the final line of defense within
+reach of the landing place, while Uraso and Muro held them in check.
+
+The boys were ahead of the little party, swinging along and trying to
+get to the elevated point which John indicated as the most available
+place, when two powerful natives sprang across their path, and before
+either could draw a weapon, they were pounced upon and seized by two
+more who approached from the rear.
+
+With great presence of mind Harry cocked and fired the gun which his
+captors were struggling for. The shot went through the arm of the native
+who had seized George, and the latter, now free, raised his rifle and
+brought it down with all force on the nearest one.
+
+John and the men with him needed no further information as to the
+situation. They were practically surrounded. That was his first thought;
+but, as no more natives appeared, and the two remaining savages started
+on a run it began to be evident that they were only scouts who expected
+an easy capture of the two boys.
+
+There was no more straggling or running ahead after that. Uraso and the
+rear guard came up with a rush on hearing the shots, but were reassured
+when they saw the party intact.
+
+The heights were gained, and before they could arrange for the defense
+the natives appeared from three quarters, and held off a quarter of a
+mile beyond.
+
+During the following day John tried to establish communications with the
+natives, but they rebuffed all efforts, and the arrival of the _Pioneer_
+was anxiously awaited.
+
+On the third day the natives were observed closer at various points, and
+they began to grow bolder, but at noon of the fourth day the sharp eyes
+of Muro discovered the glimpse of a sail to the west.
+
+Within two hours the form of the ship could be seen. The _Pioneer_ was
+making for the landing, and a cheer went up from the men at the welcome
+sight.
+
+There was not much difficulty in descending the cliffs and establishing
+communications with the vessel, and within an hour they were aboard and
+the natives could plainly be seen coming down the opposite slope waving
+defiance to the ship.
+
+The next day the _Pioneer_ sailed up Enterprise River. The people in
+Unity were anxious to learn of the new island, and to hear of the
+exploits with the savage tribe which the boys had encountered.
+
+"The Treasures of the Islands," the next book in this series, relates
+the further experiences of the boys upon their return to Rescue Island.
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS
+
+By ELBERT FISHER
+
+_12mo. Cloth. Many Illustrations. 60c. per Volume_
+
+
+This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
+make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet
+with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
+adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter
+relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
+through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of
+boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
+books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each
+chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the
+author, and four striking halftones.
+
+1. FROM NEW YORK TO THE GOLDEN GATE, takes in many of the principal
+points between New York and California, and contains a highly
+entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a
+little useful information.
+
+2. FROM SAN FRANCISCO TO JAPAN, relates the experiences of the two boys
+at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii,
+Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and
+a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text.
+
+3. FROM TOKIO TO BOMBAY. This book covers their interesting experiences
+in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hongkong and
+finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field
+seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great
+Hyderabad region of South India.
+
+4. FROM INDIA TO THE WAR ZONE, describes their trip toward the Persian
+Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site
+of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan
+through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where
+they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa,
+and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully
+described.
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
+
+BY J. S. ZERBE
+
+
+CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
+
+A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all
+subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of
+tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles
+involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the
+rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty
+illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a
+complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most
+comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
+
+
+ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
+
+The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the
+work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been
+developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using
+technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It
+has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred
+original drawings.
+
+
+PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
+
+This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
+shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
+shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
+and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every
+subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a
+glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature
+that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully
+illustrated.
+
+_12mo, cloth.     Price 60 cents per volume_
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK
+
+
+
+
+The Ethel Morton Books
+
+By MABELL S. C. SMITH
+
+
+This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls.
+Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our
+young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their
+accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know.
+
+In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the
+entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of
+swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted
+as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are
+illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text.
+
+LIST OF TITLES
+
+  ETHEL MORTON AT CHAUTAUQUA
+  ETHEL MORTON AND THE CHRISTMAS SHIP
+  ETHEL MORTON'S HOLIDAYS
+  ETHEL MORTON AT ROSE HOUSE
+  ETHEL MORTON'S ENTERPRISE
+  ETHEL MORTON AT SWEET BRIER LODGE
+
+_Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+  PUBLISHED BY
+  The New York Book Company
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK, N.Y.
+
+
+
+
+The Mountain Boys Series
+
+
+  1. PHIL BRADLEY'S MOUNTAIN BOYS
+  2. PHIL BRADLEY AT THE WHEEL
+  3. PHIL BRADLEY'S SHOOTING BOX
+  4. PHIL BRADLEY'S SNOW-SHOE TRAIL
+
+These books describe with interesting detail the experiences of a party
+of boys among the mountain pines.
+
+They teach the young reader how to protect himself against the elements,
+what to do and what to avoid, and above all to become self-reliant and
+manly.
+
+_12mo .'. .'. .'. Cloth._
+
+_40 cents per volume; postpaid_
+
+  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+  147 FOURTH AVENUE     NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: ADVENTURES
+ON STRANGE ISLANDS***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 21760.txt or 21760.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/7/6/21760
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/21760.zip b/21760.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..641459f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21760.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..999259f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #21760 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21760)